EXPORT-ORIENTED MANAGEMENT - IMC Fachhochschule Krems

CONTENT 

EXPORT-ORIENTED MANAGEMENT – Bachelor Programme ..................................................... 11 

1 st Semester (FALL) ...........................................................................................11 

2 nd Semester (SPRING) ......................................................................................32 

3 rd Semester (FALL) ...........................................................................................56 

4 th Semester (SPRING) .......................................................................................75 

5 th Semester (FALL) ...........................................................................................76 

6 th Semester (SPRING) .......................................................................................96 

EXPORT-ORIENTED MANAGEMENT – Master Programme ....................................................... 112 

1 st Semester (FALL) ......................................................................................... 112 

2 nd Semester (SPRING) .................................................................................... 127 

3 rd Semester (FALL) ......................................................................................... 148 

4 th Semester (SPRING) ..................................................................................... 149 

TOURISM & LEISURE MANAGEMENT – Bachelor Programme ...................................................... 160 





5 th Semester (FALL) ......................................................................................... 224 


TOURISM & LEISURE MANAGEMENT – Master Programme ........................................................ 254 





BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION & E-BUSINESS MANAGEMENT - Bachelor Programme..................... 274 







MANAGEMENT – Master Programme ........................................................................................ 327 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 2



HEALTH MANAGEMENT – Bachelor Programme ......................................................................... 338 


2 nd Semester (SPRING) ..................................................................................... 348 





MIDWIFERY – Bachelor Programme ........................................................................................... 380 





5 th Semester (Fall) ........................................................................................... 414 

6 th Semester (Spring) ....................................................................................... 423 

OCCUPATIONAL THERAPY – Bachelor Programme ...................................................................... 431 


2nd Semester (SPRING) ................................................................................... 445 





MARKETING AND SALES – Master Programme ........................................................................... 480 


2 st Semester (SPRING) ..................................................................................... 490 



MEDICAL & PHARMACEUTICAL BIOTECHNOLOGY – Bachelor Programme ................................... 510 







FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 3

MEDICAL & PHARMACEUTICAL BIOTECHNOLOGY – Master Programme ...................................... 544 





FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 4

WELCOME to the IMC – UNIVERSITY of APPLIED SCIENCES! 

To study means … 

to develop your talents and strengths, 

to question things, 

to reflect on impressions and learning, 

to find your way to your personal 

success, and last of all, 

to stay curious your entire life. 

Dear Partners, 

Dear Students, 

The present ―International Students‘ Course Guide‖ gives a short description of the 

content of all courses offered in the various full-time programmes of the IMC University 

of Applied Sciences Krems. Please note that all information given in this guide may be 

subject to changes. 

General information relating to a student‘s stay at the IMC University of Applied Sciences 

Krems can be found in the ―International Students‘ Guide‖ which can be downloaded 

from the internet under 

www.fh-krems.ac.at (-> International) 

In case that some of your questions remain unanswered, it will be our pleasure to help 

you and answer your queries – by email, telephone or fax. 

We are looking forward to welcoming you and your students to the IMC University of 

Applied Sciences Krems. 

FH-Prof. Mag. Eva Werner 

Rector 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 5

GENERAL INFORMATION 

NAME AND ADDRESS OF THE INSTITUTION 

IMC Fachhochschule Krems / IMC University of Applied Sciences Krems 

Campus Krems 

Am Campus, building G, 3500 Krems, Austria / Europe 

and 

International Campus “Piaristengasse” 

Piaristengasse 1, 3500 Krems, Austria / Europe 

phone: 0043 (0)2732/802 

fax: 0043 (0)2732/802-4 

email: office@fh-krems.ac.at 

http://www.fh-krems.ac.at 

Erasmus ID: A KREMS 03 

EUC: 29732-IC-1-2007-1-AT-ERASMUS-EUCX-1 

Executive Managers: Dr.h.c. Mag. Heinz Michael BOYER, Mag. Ulrike PROMMER 

Office: Campus Krems 

Rectorate: 

FH-Prof. Mag. Eva WERNER (Rector) 

FH-Prof. Dr. Karl ENNSFELLNER (Vice-Rector) 

Office: Campus Krems 

THE ACADEMIC MOBILITY OFFICE 

Campus Krems 

IMC building (building G) 

Head of Department: FH-Prof. Dr. Max SCHACHNER 

phone: 0043 (0)2732/802-150 

fax: 0043 (0)2732/802-318 

email: max.schachner@fh-krems.ac.at 

Assistant Coordinator (Outgoing Students & Events): Regina PARZER 

phone: 0043 (0)2732/802-511 

fax: 0043 (0)2732/802-318 

email: regina.parzer@fh-krems.ac.at or international@fh-krems.ac.at 

Assistant Coordinator (Incoming Students & Accommodation): Sylvia SCHNELZER 

phone: 0043 (0)2732/802-270 

fax: 0043 (0)2732/802-318 

email: sylvia.schnelzer@fh-krems.ac.at or international@fh-krems.ac.at 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 6

ECTS & Bologna Institutional Coordinator: FH-Prof. Mag. Eva WERNER (Rector) 

phone: 0043 (0)2732/802-250 

fax: 0043 (0)2732/802-318 

email: eva.werner@fh-krems.ac.at 

BACHELOR PROGRAMMES 

6 semesters, 180 ECTS 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS 

Tourism and Leisure Management (full-time & part-time) 

Language of instruction: English 

Located at: International Campus Piaristengasse 

Export-Oriented Management (full-time) 



Business Administration & E-Business Management (full-time & part-time) 

Language of instruction: German, some courses in English 

Located at: Campus Krems 

Health Management (full-time & part-time) 



SCHOOL OF LIFE SCIENCES 

Medical & Pharmaceutical Biotechnology (full-time) 



SCHOOL OF HEALTH 

Midwifery (full-time) 

Language of instruction: German 


Physiotherapy (full-time) 



Occupational Therapy (full-time) 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 7

General Nursing (full-time) 



Advanced Nursing Practice (part-time) 



Musictherapy (part-time) 



MASTER PROGRAMMES 

4 semesters, 120 ECTS 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS 

Tourism & Leisure Management (full-time) 



Export-Oriented Management (full-time & part-time) 



Management (full-time & part-time) 



Marketing and Sales (full-time) 



Environmental and Sustainability Management (full-time) 



Management of Health Institutions (part-time) 



Management of SME (part-time) 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 8

SCHOOL OF LIFE SCIENCES 

Medical & Pharmaceutical Biotechnology (full-time) 



Regulatory Affairs (part-time) 



HOW TO USE THIS GUIDE / HOW TO COMPOSE YOUR 

SCHEDULE 

This guide contains – in order of study programmes, all courses offered in full-time 

programmes during the academic year 2011/12 and short descriptions of course content. 

Many of the courses will be offered with group division; international exchange students 

are free to choose the group that is most appropriate to their schedule as long as 

sufficient places are availabe. Please note that due to pedagogic and quality reasons, the 

number of places is restriced in some courses. 

All international exchange students will receive - by beginning of September for the fall 

term, or beginning of February for the spring term – their access code to the IMC 

Intranet and thus to the course schedules. With this code you will be able to enter the 

Intranet (internal system of the IMC) and can already begin to compose your individual 

schedule for the upcoming semesterbased on the course list given in this guide and the 

learning agreement established with your home institution. 

Please respect and bear in mind that attendance is compulsory in IMC classes and you 

should therefore not choose courses that clash or overlap with another course. You are, 

however, free to look if a similar course is offered in another programme; if so, you can 

choose that particular course. 

HOW TO ENTER THE IMC INTRANET 

(possible only once you have received your user name and access code): 

� go to www.fh-krems.ac.at and choose ―eDesktop‖ 

� enter your user name & enter your access code 

HOW TO VIEW THE SCHEDULE IN THE INTRANET 

� Choose schedule 

� Choose study programme (drop-down)e 

Full-time = Vollzeit 

Part-time = berufsbegleitend 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 9

BACHELOR 

MASTER 

All full-time study programmes listed in this Guide 

Study Programme German Translation 

Tourism and Leisure 

Management 

Export-oriented Management 

Business Administration & E- 

Business Management 

Health Management 

Medical & Pharmaceutical 

Biotechnology 

Midwifery 

Occupational Therapy 

Tourism and Leisure 

Management 

Export-oriented Management 

Medical & Pharmaceutical 

Biotechnology 

Management 

Marketing and Sales 

Fachhochschul-Bachelorstudiengang 

Tourismusmanagement & Freizeitwirtschaft 


Exportorientiertes Management 


Unternehmensführung und E-Business 

Management 


Gesundheitsmanagement 


Medizinische und Pharmazeutische 

Biotechnologie 


Hebammen 


Ergotherapie 

Fachhochschul-Masterstudiengang 

Tourismusmanagement & Freizeitwirtschaft 


Exportorientiertes Management 


Medizinische und Pharmazeutische 

Biotechnologie 


Management 



� Choose semester (drop-down) 

SS = Sommersemester / spring term (February - June) 

WS = Wintersemester / fall term (September – January) 

Relevant for academic year 2012/13: WS12/13 (fall term) & SS13 (spring term) 

� Choose semester number (drop-down) 

During the fall term, you can choose courses of odd semesters (1,3 or 5). During 

the spring term, courses from even semesters are available (2,4 or 6). 

Please notice that in internship semesters (-> ―Practical Training 

Semesters‖/‖ARTS‖, in Bachelor‘s programmes mostly semester four, in 

Master‘s programmes mostly semester three) no theoretical courses are 

offered! 

� Choose weeks 

� View the entire semester (courses may not always be on the same day!) 

� Pay attention to group divisions! 

� Block seminars may start later during the semester! 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 10

EXPORT-ORIENTED MANAGEMENT – Bachelor 

Programme 

1 st Semester (FALL) 

Accounting Exercises 

Semester Hours per week Subject code ECTS 

Fall 1 ACCT Ex. 0 

Learning Outcomes / Course Objectives 

This course is dedicated to reviewing the topics covered in ―Accounting I‖ and doing 

additional exercises. Participation is voluntary but strongly recommended for those 

students who would like to deepen their understanding and practice their skills. 

For more information please refer to the course ―Accounting I". 

Prerequisites / Level 

Participant of the course ―Accounting I‖ 

Course Description 

See Accounting I 

Literature 


Teaching Methods 


Evaluation 

None 

Accounting I 


Fall 2 ACCT 3 


Upon completion of the course the students will: 

� understand the principles of accounting and how the various sections of an 

accounting system co-ordinate 

� realise the effects of accounting rules 

� be able to establish simple annual accounts incorporating accounting adjustments 

� distinguish between private and public limited companies 

� be able to prepare a basic set of company accounts 


None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 11


This first semester will focus on the basics and principles of accountancy. Accounting 

rules, the recording of business transactions, and the preparation of a trial balance and 

basic final accounts. Year-end adjustments as well as an introduction to manufacturing 

accounts and the final accounts of limited companies are the major tasks for this period. 

The acquired theory will be used to produce the final accounts in a comprehensive 

example at the end of this course. 

Even though the course is aimed at an understanding of international accounting in 

English, it is a requirement that the terms and procedures used are also understood in 

German by German speaking students. 

Literature 

DYSON, J.R: Accounting for Non-Accounting Students. 7th ed. Pitman Publishing 

Lecturer hand-outs 


The course consists of 12 100-minute sessions which will be equally split into lectures 

and seminar style discussions. In addition, material specifically prepared for self-study 

purposes will be provided online and study time (equivalent to 4 contact hours) needs to 

be allocated accordingly. An extra 50 minutes per week will be dedicated to a general 

review and additional exercises. Depending on the material covered in the lectures the 

exercise work will consist of individual problem solving, group work or dealing with case 

studies. 

Evaluation 

Examinations: examinations will involve solving problems, using the tools and techniques 

learned and practised during class or in assignment form. There will be no problems or 

cases that are identical to those dealt with during class. There will be no multiple choice 

or true/false questions. 

Assignments, home- and group work: homework assignments are intended to provide an 

opportunity to employ the concepts and techniques covered in class. These assignments 

also provide important insight into how well the material has been mastered. Solutions 

for each assignment will be made available after the homework is turned in. 

Applied Business Computer Technologies I 


Fall 4 ABCT 4 


Upon completion of the course students will be able to: 

� label and use different operating systems and functional hardware and software 

elements as well as client server solutions 

� use software applications especially MS Office/Open Office 

� design MS PowerPoint presentations efficiently 

� work efficiently on scientific papers using MS Word 

� create MS Excel spreadsheets as well as modify and accumulate data in MS Excel 

spreadsheets 

� understand relational table relations and handle data samples using PowerPivot 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 12

� utilize technology supported communications and cooperation media (e.g. MS 

Sharepoint, Wiki, blogs) for efficiently mastering routine office tasks 

(correspondence, group and appointment coordination, calculation, presentation, 

data processing, data and file administration) 


Basic computer literacy 


This course is designed to provide knowledge of both hardware and software commonly 

used nowadays within European companies focusing on software tools provided with 

Microsoft Office ®. Concentrating on MS PowerPoint ® and MS Word ®, an in depth 

knowledge of designing presentations and using MS Word ® for the creation of scientific 

papers should be gained by students. The acquired theory will be used for both self 

designed presentations held in class and assignments, coped with individually. 

Furthermore spreadsheet and database analysis will be covered. Especially the Microsoft 

Office Applications MS Excel on the one hand and MS Access on the other hand will be 

used to illustrate as well as to analyse business cases. 

Literature 

Lecturer‘s slides 

MS Training course library 


Lectures will be held in class and via the E-Learning environment introduced in the first 

sessions – online attendance required. 

The first part of the course will cover basic concepts of MS Word® as well as tips and 

tricks for effective work on seminar papers. Due to voluntary assignments students 

should take self responsibility to prepare for class lectures. MS Word® E-Learning 

content will be used for general reviews and additional exercises. 

The latter part of the class consists of 6 units. During class lectures basics concepts of MS 

Powerpoint® will be covered which should be applied on self designed presentations. 

Again voluntary exercises and online units are offered on the Microsoft E-Learning 

platform to deepen the students‘ knowledge. Within the last two sessions students‘ 

presentations will be held, feed backed and discussed. 

Evaluation 

Examinations: examinations will involve Multiple Choice Questions as well as solving 

problems, using the tools and techniques learned and practised during class. The final 

exam will take two hours. 

Presentations & assignments - group work: homework assignments & presentations are 

intended to provide an opportunity to adopt the concepts and techniques covered in 

class. 

Training Communication Competence 


Fall 2 TCOM 2 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 13

� know and use efficient rhetorical tools 

� develop and structure powerful presentations 

� present and explain complex subjects using structured presentations 

� analyse and interpret their own body language 

� experiment with voice, modulation and resonance 


None 

Literature 

Optional: 

You are the Message by Roger Ailes with Jon Kraushar; ISBN 0-385-26542-5; Currency 

and Doubleday 1995 

Set Your Voice Free by Roger Love with Donna Fraser; ISBN 0-316-44179-1; Little, 

Brown and Company 2003 

Job Interviews for Dummies by Joyce Lain Kennedy; ISBN 978-0-470-17748-8; Wiley 

Publishing Inc., 2008 

Resumes for Dummies by Joyce Lain Kennedy; ISBN 0-7645-5471-9; Wiley Publishing 

Inc., 2003 

The Definitive Book of Body Language by Allan and Barbara Pease; ISBN-10: 

0553804723; B&T, 2006 

Shut up and Speak! by John Sheirer; ISBN 0-595-25674-0; Writers Club Press, 2002 

Say it with Presentations by Gene Zelazny; ISBN 0-07-147289-4; McGraw-Hill, 2006 


The course will be devoted to the following topics: 

� Self-presentation 

� Rhetorical tools 

� Feedback rules and their application 

� Voice for public speaking 

� Structured presentations 

� Employment interviews 

� Significance of body language and posture 


At the beginning of every lecture there will be a brief theoretical introduction to each 

topic given by the instructor. Depending on the actual subject matter, the practical part 

of the workshop will then give the students the possibility to try out what they have just 

learned. The instructor will give them instant, high quality feedback and useful hints on 

how it is done in ―real life―. Some topics will be discussed in plenary; others in groups of 

two or three. Different role playing scenarios will strengthen the students‘ ability to 

perform in difficult situations such as presentations, meetings or interviews. Business 

attire will be the dress code for the last day of the workshop to demonstrate students the 

importance of appropriate clothing in an international business environment. 

Evaluation 

Since there will be no grades, the parameters of success for this workshop will be: active 

participation, commitment, courage and the willingness to try out something new that 

might – in the long run – change the students‘ personality. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 14

Research Methodology I 


Fall 2 RESM 2 


The purpose of this course is to equip students with the basic tools and know-how to 

write scientific papers and other publications. The main focus is put on the upcoming 

work for successful completion of their studies. By the end of the course, students should 

be able to confidently express themselves in academic writing. Students will have 

practiced strategies for overcoming ‗writer‘s block‘, writing specific sections of the thesis, 

and improved academic writing style overall. Additionally, students will have improved 

feedback skills. 

After successful completion of the module, students will be able to: 

� utilise basic scientific terminology; 

� develop an understanding of scientific theories and academic thinking; 

� explain the differences between qualitative and quantitative research in terms of 

objectives, sampling, data collection, analysis and outcomes; 

� build up a rational line of argumentation; 

� search for information 

� prepare research questions and hypotheses 

� prepare a research proposal 


None 

Literature 

Lecturer‘s slides 

IMC Manual for Academic Research 


Students will be focusing on the following steps in the academic writing process: 

� ‗Unblocking‘ so that ideas can flow 

� Revision in writing groups 

� Academic writing techniques 

� Writing specific sections of the thesis (introduction, conclusion, abstract) 

Students will be asked to keep their work in a ―writing portfolio‖, which will be evaluated 

at the end of the course. 


Course will be conducted in a workshop manner, meaning that students will often be 

asked to perform various writing tasks during class, under the guidance of the 

instructor. Students will be working in writing groups, which help develop feedback skills 

and prepare students to be independent learners. 

Evaluation 

Writing portfolio, home assignments 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 15

Business Statistics and Mathematics I 


Fall 1 BISM 2 


Business Statistics and Mathematics I is a first unit in statistics designed to enable 

students to gain some proficiency in basic statistical terms and techniques typically 

applied in the field of social sciences. Students will see how statistics is relevant to 

modern life, and will learn how to tackle simple statistical problems. In addition to that, 

students should acquire sufficient statistical sophistication to read and understand 

reports with conclusions phrased in statistical terms. 

Upon successful completion of the module, students will be able to: 

� discuss the problems of sampling; 

� understand the statistical jargon commonly used in the analysis, interpretation, 

and presentation of numerical information; 

� calculate descriptive statistics; 

� utilize MS Excel to draw charts and graphs: 

� apply some of the basic statistical techniques to problems they encounter in their 

studies; 

� assess information and statistical arguments commonly found in scientific reports, 

in newspapers and on television. 


None 


This course includes the nature of statistics, scales and sampling methods, organisation 

and classification of data, graphic representation, descriptive statistics like measures of 

central tendency and variability, percentiles, correlation and regression, statistical 

inference, estimation, and hypothesis testing and the use of computers for statistical 

calculations. 

Literature 

Lecturer‘s handouts 

Brase, C. H., Brase, C. P. (2004); Understanding Basic Statistics; 3 rd Ed.; Boston, MA: 

Houghton Mifflin or newer 

Norusis, M. (2007); SPSS 16.0 Guide to Data Analysis; Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice 

Hall or newer 


This course will be held primarily as a lecture, which will cover theory and practical 

applications of writing statistical analysis. The students are expected to prepare material 

in advance of the lecture. Additionally, integrated in and accompanying the lecture and 

short tutorials on how to carry out statistical analysis using MS Excel and SPSS will be 

conducted. Supplementary summaries of the literature, examples and exercises will be 

provided on-line. In order to ensure active engagement of the students, three 

(individual/small group) assignments will be handed out during the course, solving the 

exercises along with the performance in the exams will account for the final grade. Due 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 16

to the scope of the material covered in a relatively short time, all exams will be held 

open-book style. 

In addition to the classroom sessions there will also be one self-directed E-Learning 

session. Self-directed learning time will give students the opportunity to deepen and 

practice the skills acquired in class. Core issues of E-Learning sessions will be an integral 

part of course exams. 

Evaluation 

Assignments, mid-term exam (written), final exam (written) 

Organisation Theory 


Fall 1 BADM 1 


Upon completion students should be able to: 

� Explore the nature of organizations and organization theory today 

� Understand the types of goals that organizations pursue and some of the 

competitive strategies managers develop to reach these goals 

� Define basic concepts of organizational structure and structure design 

� Develop a framework for assessing environments and how organizations respond 

to them 

� Explore the most recent trend in organizing, which is the increasingly dense web 

of relationships among organizations 

� Understand how managers design organizations for the international environment 

� Discuss both, core and non-core work processes and their relationship to 

designing organization structure 

� Understand that information technology is an essential part of successful 

organizations 

� Explore the question of large versus small organizations and how size is related to 

structure and control 

� Explore ideas about corporate culture and associated ethical values and how these 

are influenced by organizations 


None 


The course will lead the students through following topics and will provide the students 

with a better understanding on how organizations function: 

� organizational structures and work processes 

� functions and tasks of individual departments 

� importance and specifics of company size 

� importance and role of management in national and international context 

� analysis of success factors for modern organizational structures (such as 

corporate culture, IT infrastructure) 

� centralized versus decentralized design of business processes 

� organizational culture 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 17

Literature 

DAFT, Richard l.: Understanding the Theory and Design of Organizations, International 

Students Edition, Thomson South-Western 2007, ISBN: 0-324-42271-7 

Presentation slides will be available prior to actual lectures on the IMC e-desktop. 


Various complementary approaches will be combined in classroom teaching. 

The lecturer will provide students with basic information to introduce them to the 

subjects of the respective sessions. Students should feel free to ask questions at any 

time. Students are also expected to work on case studies between meetings, which will 

then be discussed at the beginning of each meeting. 

The textbook supplements provide online resources, e.g. interactive quizzes to each 

chapter. It is recommended to take these short quizzes. These exercises are not 

mandatory therefore no time is being deducted from the total hours available for this 

course for e-learning purposes. 

Evaluation 

2 written exams (done with e-testing tools) 

Micro- and Macroeconomics 


Fall 2 ECON 4 


Students are enabled to use the basic tools and concepts of economics to think critically 

about news in media or be able to develop economic arguments on their own. Students 

shall further be able to derive implications from economic facts and developments for 

actual business. Students will possess basic knowledge on micro- and macroeconomics 

as well as international trade and financial markets. 

The main objectives are: 

� to provide a basic understanding of economic thoughts, 

� to apply economic theory to interpreting actual economic developments. 


None 


This course is designed to provide basic insights into selected important concepts of 

economics. Students have to develop a principal understanding of economic thoughts and 

underlying mechanisms in economic theory. The lecture will deal with the fundamentals 

of micro- and macroeconomics and deepen students' understanding of international trade 

and financial markets. Basics of European Union economics and basic mechanisms of 

financial economics will also be part of the course. 

The following topics are of main interest: 

� Household Behaviour and Consumer Choice 

� Measuring National Output and Income 

� Market dynamics 

� Analysis of competitive markets 

� Market power: monopoly, competition 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 18

� Investments, time and capital markets 

� General balance and economic efficiency 

� Markets with asymmetrical information 

� Externalities and public goods 

� Goods, money, and finance markets 

� Concept of the market and market equilibrium 

� Growth and technological progress 

� Labour market and unemployment 

� National accounts 

� Monetary and fiscal policies 

� Function of the open economy 

� Production, money demand, interest rates and exchange rate 

Literature 

Essentials of Economics, 2nd Edition Stanley L Brue, Campbell R McConnell, Sean Masaki 

Flynn 

Paul A. Samuelson, William D. Nordhaus (2001): Economics, 17th Edition, McGraw-Hill. 

This source of recommended reading does not necessarily have to be in the same edition. 


The main method used will be lecture style. Interactive discussions and small individual 

or group work in class and e-learning will also be employed to improve learning efficacy 

and student motivation. Parts of the course will be held online, via online discussions on 

selected topics (such as the current financial crisis and its effects on the real economy). 

Evaluation 

Take-home exams, final written exam 

Business Administration 


Fall 1 BADM 1 


This course intends to provide students with a common theoretical basis and 

comprehensive overview of the principles of business administration irrespective of their 

professional experience and educational background. Furthermore it gives students a 

basic orientation as to how the various courses, concepts and disciplines they will get to 

know during their studies are interlinked. 

Thus, the students are to develop an understanding of the functioning of a business and 

the various tasks in a company, the environment and the background of a business as 

well as the current challenges confronting it. This approach should finally allow students 

to use the knowledge acquired for the upcoming, more specialized lecturers in business 

administration. However, being drafted as complementary to some specialized courses 

starting also at the beginning of the semester, students will partly be referred directly to 

issues dealt in these lectures. 

Upon completion of this course students will understand: 

� business as a field of science and its major differentiations 

� the contexts of businesses 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 19

� the role of managers in the business enterprise 

� how to find, manage and motivate employees 

� financial management 

� and understand and critically evaluate emerging challenges and opportunities in 

the business environment 


None 


A definition of business administration and its various fields of science is provided at the 

beginning of the semester in order to give students a feeling where to place this and 

future courses and how they are related to each other. Then the strategic, organizational 

and environmental (economic, technological, political-legal, socio-cultural) contexts 

within which a business operates are discussed to visualize the complex interactions 

between businesses and their surroundings. The next two units introduce the students 

first to the management process in general and then to two specialized areas of 

management – Human Resource and Financial Management – which are regarded 

essential to know from the very beginning. The lecture closes with a summary of new 

challenges to businesses which will cover topics that will hopefully lead to interesting 

discussions. 

Literature 

Lecture slides 

Business Administration; The Principles of Business Organization and System, and the 

Actual Methods von Parsons Carl Copeland, Bibliobazaa, 2009. 


In the first part of this course the instructor will introduce students to the basic 

theoretical concepts of those topics announced for the respective sessions. Students 

should feel free to ask questions at any time. 

For the last regular session before the final exam students are expected to prepare their 

views and comments on a minor case study which will be distributed to them in the first 

meeting. 

Evaluation 

Group assignment (case study) and final written exam 

International Marketing and Sales 1 


Fall 2 MKTG 3 


The aim of this course is to develop a general understanding of marketing. Why it is 

essential for all kind of companies and why strategic and tactical marketing are becoming 

more and more important these days. 


None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 20


The course will cover the following topics: 

� Principles of marketing (definition, development, marketing areas, environmental, 

and consumer buying behaviour) 

� Introduction to strategic marketing (market segmentation, targeting, positioning 

strategies, strategic marketing management) 

� Operational marketing (product and services marketing policy, distribution policy, 

communication policy, pricing policy) 

� Corporate communication, especially internal and external PR 

� Marketing plan 

Literature 

The lecture is supported by MS-PowerPoint presentations. Most of the slides of the 

presentations are available for download. On demand there will be further advice 

regarding additional literature. 

Marketing Management von Philip Kotler und Kevin Lane Keller von Prentice Hall 

International, 2009 


The content will be presented primarily in lectures and analysis of short case studies. 

Discussions about practical examples/issues brought up by students are welcome. 

Evaluation 

Final written exam 

Private Law 


Fall 2 LAW 3 


Upon completion of this course students will be able to: 

� understand the terminology of law and distinguish and identify different fields of 

law, court system and procedure, 

� understand and apply basic concepts of private law, particularly: 

o negotiation, 

o structuring and conclusion of contracts, 

o organizations, 

o application of laws and determination of applicable laws, 

o legal decisions, 

o legal reasoning under civil and common law, 

o identification of basic legal issues, 

o answering of simple legal problems, torts, 

o tangible and intangible property. 


None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 21


Introduction to legal terminology and different fields of law, legal decisions, court system 

and procedure, basic concepts of private law, i.e. contracts, with particular reference 

to the UN Convention regarding the Sale of Goods (CISG), introduction to contract 

negotiations and conclusion and structuring of contracts, torts, tangible and intangible 

property. 

Literature 

Cases, Contracts hand out and other hand-outs presented in the meetings 


Lectures, presentations, use of legal vocabulary, case and text examples 

Evaluation 


English for Exchange Students – Intermediate Level 


Fall 2 EEXI - 


Upon completion of this course students will improved their English at the medium level: 

The focus will be put on improving reading, listening, writing and speaking skills. 


Basic Understanding of English 


The course provides intensive practice in the four above skills. Within the context 

relevant linguistic structures will be revised. The textbook "Ready for IELTS" by Sam Mc 

Carter forms the core of the course. There is the possibility of taking the internationally 

acknowledged IELTS-Exam on a voluntary basis at any time students feel fit for it. 

Literature 

Coursebook with CD-ROM Ready for IELTS by Sam McCarter, MACMILLAN EXAMS 

Macmillan Dictionary 


Methods of instruction will include a variety of activities: information, comments and 

assistance through the lecturer. Tasks and exercises are carried out through individual, 

pair and group work. There will be ample opportunity for speaking and writing through 

discussions and role play. Moreover, writing tasks will develop writing skills and authentic 

material will be provided for improving listening skills. 

CDs, video and audio cassettes as well as CDs will occasionally be used. E-Learning 

assignments (e.g. in the form of blog contributions, DVD ROM Content etc.) primarily 

serve the purpose of developing specific language skills which may be relevant for the 

final exam. 

Evaluation 

Test and documentation of content (session) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 22

English for Exchange Students – Advanced Level 


Fall 2 EEXA - 


The course is designed for international students who wish to improve their English at an 

advanced level. It is aimed at developing the language and skills in the four modules of 

listening, academic reading, academic writing and speaking. 

On completion of the course, students will reach a level of proficiency which allows them 

to successfully take the internationally acknowledged IELTS Academic exam. Taking this 

exam is highly recommended, but not compulsory. 


English Intermediate 


The course provides intensive practice in reading, writing, listening and speaking. In this 

context, main Grammar points will be revised, depending on the skills of the individual 

students. Furthermore, all four parts of the IELTS Academic exam are systematically 

trained in a step-by-step approach. So students will progress to a considerably higher 

band score. 

Literature 

Coursebook with CD-ROM Ready for IELTS by Sam McCarter, MACMILLAN EXAMS 

Macmillan Dictionary 


Methods of instruction will include a wide variety of activities; i.e. individual, pair and 

group work. In vocabulary training emphasis is laid on practical use and word building. 

Students will have varied speaking practice in dialogues, discussions, and role play. 

Authentic material is provided for listening. Writing tasks will be set to develop students' 

writing skills. E-Learning assignments are included in the course outline to develop 

specific language skills required for the final exam. 

Evaluation 

Test and assignments 

Arabic Exercises 


Fall 1 ARAB Ex. 0 


This course is dedicated to reviewing the topics covered in ―Arabic I‖ and doing additional 

exercises. Participation is voluntary but strongly recommended for those students who 

would like to deepen their understanding and practice their skills. 

For more information please refer to the course ―Arabic I". 


Participant of the course ―Arabic I‖ 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 23


See ―Arabic I‖ 

Literature 




Evaluation 

None 

Arabic I 


Fall 2 ARAB 2,5 


Students should be able to read and write short texts and be able to conduct a simple 

dialogue in Arabic as well as have a basic knowledge of the Arabic grammar. 


None 


The students will learn basic grammar such as simple affirmative sentences and 

questions, nominative case, personal and possessive pronouns, prepositions and verbs in 

present tense. The students will also hold simple conversations as they develop a useful 

vocabulary (the first 60 pages of the book will help the students to pronounce, spell and 

write the Arabic alphabet, the following lessons will cover the topics ‗get to know each 

other‘ and ‗at the airport‘). 

Literature 

Al-Kitab Al-Asasi I (Arabic for non-native speakers), Tunis 1988 


The teaching method is theoretical teaching by practice and interactive learning through 

dialogue, role-playing and encouragement of vocabulary development and correct 

pronunciation while explaining the culture background of the Arabic language and 

cultures. Many additional drills and methods will be used to keep the students interested. 

Evaluation 

Written and oral exams, presentation and homework 

Chinese Exercises I 


Fall 1 CHIN Ex. 0 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 24


See ―Chinese I‖ 


Participant of the course ―Chinese I‖ 


This course is accompanying our Chinese Semester 1 course, focused on exercises that 

support students to learn the subject matter in the main course. Methods include 

listening exercises, work on dialogues as well as group work on structures of the Chinese 

language. Students are encouraged to ask questions to get clarity on all subjects taught 

in the main course. 

Literature 




Evaluation 

None 

Chinese I 


Fall 2 CHIN 2,5 


In our beginner's course the students will acquire elementary skills in written and oral 

Chinese, which means mastering basic vocabulary and sentence patterns. 

Accordingly, a strong focus is put on phonetics and character writing. The characters to 

be learned are the simplified characters which are used in the People‘s Republic of China, 

Hanyu Pinyin is the standard phonetic transcription which will be used throughout the 

course. At the end of the semester students will be able to carry out simple conversations 

on a limited range of topics. 


None 


Chinese, especially at the beginning, is a language that requires continuous practice. 

Students are asked to practice characters and prepare vocabulary for each lesson to be 

able to follow the course. After the first two meetings students will be able to understand 

the characteristics and structure of the Chinese language. 

During the following meetings one lesson will be accomplished in two meetings. Students 

will acquire basic skills in distinguishing between the 4 tones in Chinese, and pronounce 

them accurately. They will be able to communicate (listen, speak, read, and write) in 

simple Chinese. Thematic areas include: greetings; introducing oneself; asking about 

occupation, citizenship etc.; talking about date and time, classroom language. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 25

Literature 

Required Text: ZHAO Jinming et al.: Lu. Chinese Conversation for Foreigners. Beijing 

Language and Culture University. 2002 

Additional materials will be handed out. 


Language means communication, thus teaching principles are guided by a communicative 

and interactive approach which emphasises the strong relation between language and 

culture. Apart from explanations by the teacher, as much time as possible shall be used 

for practicing Chinese language skills and thereby getting a further glimpse of the various 

aspects of Chinese culture (e.g. intercultural communication, Chinese food, history, 

politics, geography). 

Evaluation 

2 written exams, homework and quizzes 

Homework: students will get homework after every meeting except for the meetings that 

include a mid-term and final exam. Homework has to be handed in at the beginning of 

the subsequent meeting. 

Quizzes: there will be a quiz at the end of every lesson of the book learnt. The quiz will 

include grammar and vocabulary of the lesson learnt, Chinese characters and pinyin of 

the respective lesson are being tested. 

French Exercises I 


Fall 1 FREN Ex. 0 


To enable students to handle everyday situations in France, including both oral and 

written skills 


Participant of the course ―French I‖ 


Students get the opportunity to practice the grammatical chapters treated in the course 

―French I‖ and to speak as freely as possible in French dialogues and different authentic 

situations. 

Literature 

Dossier: Le point sur la grammaire francaise 


The course is based on vivid interaction between the students and the teacher. Students 

get the opportunity to improve their knowledge on various oral texts and to use 

worksheets. Individual questions will be dealt with in detail. 

Evaluation 

None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 26

French I 


Fall 2 FREN 2,5 


The course aims at presenting the basics of the French economy and society. After 

completing the course students will have acquired the following competences: 

� ability to have a fluent conversation in common situations of business life, 

� ability to present various social and economic aspects typical of France, 

� ability to understand general statements on France in detail and they can 

describe general economic contexts (written and oral texts). 


High School level 


The course will start from an intermediate level. France and the French will be viewed 

from different angles such as France – the country and its people, France – the tourism 

destination, France – the business partner. The three economic sectors will be analysed 

in more detail. Furthermore, topics of current interest will be treated. Particular grammar 

items will be revised. 

Literature 

Le Truc Français, semester 1 

Le point sur la grammaire française (both scripts will be provided) 


The course will be based on interactive teaching: through common development of the 

course topics, discussions, group-work and presentations the students will be encouraged 

to express themselves as often as possible in order to improve their oral skills. Moreover, 

students will be asked to engage in role plays. 

E-learning elements included in the course outline: texts, preparation for group work, 

links, audio files, lecturer forum etc. (but no presence reduction in classroom) 

Evaluation 

Grammar test, final test, group work, presentation 

Russian Exercises I 


Fall 1 RUSS Ex. 0 


This course is dedicated to reviewing the topics covered in ―Russian I‖ and doing 



For more information please refer to the course ―Russian I". 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 27


Participant of the course ―Russian I‖ 


See ―Russian I‖ 

Literature 




Evaluation 

None 

Russian I 


Fall 2 RUSS 2,5 


After this course students will be able to read and write all the letters of the Russian 

alphabet and to deal with everyday situations such as asking for and giving directions, 

buying newspapers, tickets etc., inviting somebody. Moreover, students will be able to 

talk about their family, their hometown, jobs and languages. 


None 


A Russian course for beginners is aiming at teaching basic Russian in a communicative 

way, including numerous dialogues, listening and reading comprehension, but also 

providing the grammar necessary for further intensive studies. Written work is intended 

to consolidate oral skills and facilitate correct use of Russian. The course also includes 

information on Russian culture and civilization to facilitate better understanding of 

Russian life and institutions. 

Literature 

Golosa Book 1, 4d ed. Textbook (Robin, Evans-Romaine, Shatalina, Robin): ISBN 

9780131986282 

Golosa Book 1, 4d ed. Student Activities Manual (Robin, Evans-Romaine, Shatalina, 

Robin): ISBN 9780131986299 


After the introduction of Russian letters the course aims at presenting a great number of 

typical situational dialogues with the help of audio texts (cassettes), automating the 

situations, at the same time providing the necessary language structure. Great emphasis 

is put on enlarging the vocabulary as fast as possible. Grammar is introduced to make 

comprehension and text production easier and more effective. The situational dialogues 

are embedded in typical everyday situations. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 28

Evaluation 

Grammar checks, regular vocabulary checks, regular homework, written and oral exams 

Spanish Exercises I 


Fall 1 SPAN Ex. 0 



� Practice and demonstrate the communicative competence as basic users in the 

private and public domain (everyday life situations). 

� Analyse the basic elements of Spanish grammar. 

� Employ Spanish for every day oral communication, vocabulary and structure. 


Participant of the course ―Spanish I‖ 


Exercises accompany the main course and follow the same progression. 

Students get the opportunity to practise the chapters treated in the course "Spanish I". 

The material will also be discussed and enlarged in the lessons in order to develop those 

basic linguistic activities: Reception, Production, Interaction and Mediation. 

Exercises are not compulsory but they are vital in order to achieve the goal of the 

semester. Participation is strongly recommended as the exercises complement the main 

lecture. 

Literature 

See „Spanish I― 


The material offered in the lecture will be practiced and enlarged in order to develop the 

four basic skills: reading, listening, writing and speaking. 

The course is based on vivid interaction between the students and the teacher. Teaching 

is done by practical and interactive learning through dialogues, role playing and 

encouragement of vocabulary development and correct pronunciation while explaining 

the cultural background of the Spanish speaking countries. 

The students will work individually, in pairs, groups and in plenary. Individual questions 

will be dealt with in detail. 

Students who don't attend the Exercises are required to keep an eye on the part of the 

material offered in the Exercises, which enlarges the topics of the book. 

Evaluation 

None 

Spanish I 


Fall 2 SPAN 2,5 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 29



� Recognize and use basic sentences related to personal areas, like very basic 

personal and family information, local geography and shopping. 

� Describe in simple terms aspects of companies. 

� Report the most relevant social and economic aspects of Spanish speaking 

countries. 

� Perform simple tasks (short letters, interviews, dialogues, descriptions, etc) in 

topics related to their daily experience. 

� Use every day vocabulary and basic structure. 


None 


The course consists of lectures and exercises. 

Learning Spanish should result in a far reaching ability of communication within and 

beyond a given field of knowledge. 

The students should have direct contacts – orally and in writing - with Spanish texts, 

exchange opinions, and be capable to receive, understand and pass on information about 

various sections of their everyday life and their social, cultural and professional 

environment. 

To achieve this, the following targets will be aimed for: 

Mastering the four basic linguistics aptitudes: 

� Listening and understanding 

� Speaking 

� Reading and understanding 

� Expressing oneself in writing 

An introspective understanding of how Spanish as a language functions as a means of 

communication and of expressing the mentality of Spanish and Latino American speaking 

people. A basic knowledge of the culture of Spain and the Spanish speaking countries of 

Latino America will be given to students as well. 

Emphasis is on oral communication using every day vocabulary and basic structure, but 

also listening and reading comprehension as well as the accurate writing of simple texts 

are part of the programme as a whole. 


semester. Their attendance is therefore highly recommended. 

Literature 

Socios 1 Nueva Edición. Libro del alumno + CD. Difusión, Barcelona. 

Socios 1 Nueva Edición. Cuaderno de ejercicios + CD. Difusión, Barcelona. 

It is highly advisable that the students buy a good dictionary. 


The approach adopted, generally speaking, is an action-oriented one in so far as it views 

users and learners of a language primarily as "social agents": members of a society who 

have tasks to accomplish in a given set of circumstances, in a specific environment and 

within a particular field of action. The language activities form part of a wider social 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 30

context. One speaks of "tasks" in so far as the actions are performed by one or more 

individuals strategically using their own specific competences to achieve a given result. 

The action-based approach also takes into account the cognitive, emotional and volitional 

resources and the full range of abilities applied by the individual as a social-agent. 

No meeting will be held exclusively as an e-learning module. E-learning elements, 

exercises and activities in the form of multimedia sources, online information or selfstudy 

options are part of every lecture and therefore are essentials for the final exam. 

Evaluation 

Regular homework, mid-term exam, final exam (oral and written) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 31

2 nd Semester (SPRING) 

Accounting II 


Spring 2 ACCT 3 


The course is designed to provide an in-depth knowledge about, and skill in, financial 

accounting using the British accountancy system in principle but also applying to 

IAS/IFRS and creating awareness for US-GAAP rules. Furthermore a first excursion into 

managerial accounting and explicitly into the accounting aspects of financial planning is 

made. 

After participation the students should: 

� be able to prepare a basic set of company accounts for manufacturers and service 

providers 

� be able to "manage" working capital 

� get an understanding of basic cost concepts 

� produce annual operating, cash and capital budgets, use key ratios and other 

methods of accounts analysis 


Accounting I 


Financial performance and financial reporting will be the major topics of this semester. 

The students will be introduced to the basic tools necessary to analyse a business and, 

therefore, to make more enlightened managerial decisions. Using the basic accounting 

statements, the student should be able to dissect a company, isolate areas of strengths 

and weaknesses and make recommendations on how to resolve the weaknesses and 

capitalize on the strengths. 

Literature 

DYSON, J.R: Accounting for Non-Accounting Students. 7 th ed. Pitman Publishing 

ATRILL P., MCLANEY M.: Management Accounting for Decision Makers 5 th ed., FT Prentice 

Hall 

Lecturer handouts. All handouts, exercises, results to exercises and other information will 

be available in the IMC eLearning platform. 


The course consists of a mix of classroom lectures, group work and discussions and also 

some self-learning units accompanied by the lecturer using eLearning tools and the IMC 

eDesktop. 

Evaluation 

Written examinations will involve solving problems, using the tools and techniques 

learned and practiced during class or in assignment form. There will be no problems or 

cases that are identical to those dealt with during class. There will be no multiple choice 

or true/false questions. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 32

Homework assignments are intended to provide an opportunity to employ the concepts 

and techniques covered in class. These assignments also provide important insight into 

how well the material has been mastered. Solutions for each assignment will be made 

available after the homework is turned in. Assignments are not accepted late. 

Trade History and Organisations 


Spring 2 THO 2 


Upon completion of the course, students will be able to: 

� explain the role of international trade and economic integration for economic 

development; 

� understand the main concepts and institutions governing international trade 

policy; 

� know the most important trade policy instruments and their - intended and 

unintended - effects; 

� form their own informed opinion on the arguments brought forward in the ongoing 

debate on globalisation. 


None 


In order to achieve this goal, the course will look at: 

� the main concepts underlying international economic relations and trade policy , 

esp. the law of comparative advantage, the Hecksher-Ohlin theorem and "New 

Trade Theory"; 

� the development of economic thinking on trade issues from Mercantilism until 

today; 

� the most important trade policy instruments, esp. tariffs, quantitative and 

qualitative restrictions, and their effects; 

� the history and mechanisms of trade liberalisation and the development of the 

modern international trade system, esp. the World Trade Organisation; 

� its interaction with bilateral and regional trade agreements and institutions, esp. 

the European Union; and 

� the cultural, social, ecological and development dimension of trade and the 

globalisation debate. 

Literature 

A hand-out will be provided which builds, together with the lecture itself, the basis for the 

test. 


Lectures will alternate with discussions of the issues at stake. Emphasis will be laid on 

integrating theoretical concepts and historical developments with today's issues. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 33

Evaluation 

Evaluation will take the form of a two-hour test, which will be partially multiple-choice 

and partially fill-in. It will also require students to formulate some answers to questions, 

to apply their acquired knowledge to simple examples and to write a short essay. 

Economic Areas I 


Spring 1 ECAR 1 


The main objectives of the course are: 

� to provide an overview of the selected region and its cultural, geographic, political 

and economic position in the world to familiarize students with the major impacts 

of the above on the current business situation to enhance students‘ knowledge of 

the socio-economic situation in the SEE region to outline EU-policies towards 

specific regions 

� Upon completion of the course the students should: 

� have a basic knowledge of the SEE Region, with an emphasis on their economic 

development be aware of major geographic, cultural, and political aspects of SEE 

Countries and their impact on business relations and foreign direct investment 

(FDI) in the regions know the main principles of EU policies towards selected 

regions 


None 


East and South East Europe: resources, production and manufacturing, technology, 

(foreign) trade, investments, company structures, economic policies, historical and social 

development, political system, role of the government and good governance matrix, 

instruments of Governance and Sustainability. 

The role of government policy in investment and growth (the compact for reform, 

investment, integrity and growth in SEE): investment policy, investment promotion, tax 

policy, anti-corruption and business integrity, competition policy, trade policy, regulatory 

reform, human capital and employment, corporate governance, SME policy. 

Description of strategy to enhance the business in a target country which includes: 

� assessment of market opportunities (chances and obstacles) as well as of legal 

conditions for foreign investors 

� establishment of a legal presence, choosing the legal form of the company, 

assessment of requirements (financial, legal and advertising) which should be 

fulfilled for the company, so that the company can be fully operational 

� a statement of a set of business goals and the reasons why they are believed 

attainable. 

Literature 

Cases supplied in class and publications in international media combined with Internet 

research. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 34


Learning will be based on lectures, e-Learning and case study. The main task is to 

motivate students to participate actively in the course through case studies and 

presentations in groups and discussions. Using the case method, students learn on their 

own, with the aid of lecturer, through discussion, private research and a small field 

survey. This method will demonstrate what students have learned and should encourage 

an enjoyable learning experience. 

Evaluation 

Case study, final written exam 

Geo Political Affairs 


Spring 2 GPA 2 


Upon successful closure of the course, students with a wide variety of specific interests 

should be able to: (i) verbalise a well-synthesized but comprehensive view; (ii) compare 

and contrast many dimensions and interpolations of contemporary (geo-)political, 

economic and legal affairs by classifying their features and analysing static and dynamic 

elements of those; (iii) understand the role and limitations of main players; (iv) be 

sensitized enough to contextualize specific challenges, and suggest approaches to 

address these; (v) articulate many of the essential differences and assumptions between 

western and non-western (EU, NAFTA, ASEAN) positions; (vi) appreciate the integrated 

and interdependent nature of geographical and topical focal points that include 

development, market, growth and governance. 


None 


Students will explore and review the merits and limitations of a variety of 

international/transnational and national principles/practices and policies as well as 

related (sub-)national strategies and tactics, through different ideas and teachings of 

both practitioners and academics (as both camps are equally focused on theoretical 

issues of the larger historical, philosophical/moral and cultural implications as well as on 

the practical experience and fresh perspectives to address the reality of complex policy 

questions). 

This is to be rather a mixture than the ‗classic‘ study – a ‗walk on the edge‘ between the 

selection and interpretation of geopolitics; political, legal, economic and social sciences, 

between the culture and history as well as between the geography and history. 

Therefore, students‘ analyses are to be a middle ground between policy analysis and 

cultural/civilizational analysis, notably: all what a business aspirant needs to know about 

the prime power struggles of heavy-weights when joining the international corporate 

business of nowadays. 

Literature 

The literature list will be communicated during the course. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 35


The very concept is harmonized with the currently used advanced curricula of the leading 

European and overseas universities. 

The class itself blends inter-disciplinary lecturing, case analysis and in-class discussions. 

With this broad range of topics, one cannot hope to cover all aspects of every issue, 

especially not by the front lecturing. Therefore, the subjects of this inter-disciplinary 

course invite the active and energetic participation of all students. Discussions will be 

most productive when everyone completes the assigned readings carefully and comes 

prepared to engage in thoughtful exploration of the substantive issues. 

Therefore, the preparation for and participation in class discussions is central to the very 

success of this course, Take-Home Essay/Exam and eventually to the final grade. 

The lecturer will provide students with basic (comprehensive but well-systematized and 

simplified) information to familiarize them with the very subject of the GPA. Main items 

will be covered in form of inter-disciplinary lectures, analysis and comments, relevant 

materials/readings or indicated links for self-search. 

Students are expected to prepare a short analytical Paper. Such a paper should be 

submitted by each respective student/group, and presented before the class. 

Additionally, the Take-home Essay will represent the final assignment. 

Evaluation 

Current Affairs briefings, Study Paper, Take Home Essay. 

Human Resource Management I – Organisational Behaviour 


Spring 1 ORBE 2 


The Human Resource Management function has become much more than the legal 

enforcement arm of the organization. Top Management has come to understand that, if 

properly managed, human resources can be an important source of competitive 

advantage in an increasingly competitive world. 

Upon completion of this lecture students should be able to: 

� Characterize contemporary human resource management perspectives. 

� Identify and discuss the fundamental goals of human resource management in 

organizations. 

� Discuss the responsibilities for human resource management, describe the human 

resource management department, and discuss the human resource management 

system. 

� Identify and discuss global issues in international human resource management. 

� Identify three types of strategies and relate each to human resource 

management. 

� Describe human resource planning as a source of information for decision-making. 

� Understand the concept of rightsizing and describe organizational strategies for 

rightsizing. 

� Describe the relationship among planning, recruiting, and selection. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 36

� Describe the recruitment process and steps in the selection process and identify 

and summarize basic selection criteria. 

� Discuss the nature of diversity, including its meaning and associated trends. 

� Describe the basic issues involved in developing a compensation strategy. 

� Describe the purposes of performance appraisal in organizations. 

� Discuss basic concepts of training and development. 

� Understand how to enhance motivation through job design, goals setting and 

reward systems. 

� Apply individual and organizational guidelines for managing workplace stress. 

� Describe the core elements of interpersonal communication. 

� Describe the primary levels of conflict in organizations and explain the common 

interpersonal conflict-handling styles. 

� Explain how organizational culture is formed, sustained and changed. 

� Understand change processes in organizations and be able to describe why people 

resist change and how to manage such resistance 


The course will lead students through the following topics and will provide students with 

a better understanding on the fundamentals of management: 

� organizational structures and management responsibilities 

� leadership and business ethics 

� corporate culture and awareness of intercultural understanding 

� conduct and analysis of groups and individuals in organizations 

� conflict management, negotiation tactics 

� models of learning within organizations 

� motivation theories 

� interpersonal communication 

Literature 

DeNISI, Angelo S. and GRIFFING, Ricky W.: Human Resource Management, 3 rd edition, 

Houghton Mifflin Company, 2008, ISBN: 9781408018521 (has to include access code to 

eduspace!) 


Various complementary approaches will be combined. The lecturer will introduce students 

to the general concepts of the topics as well as the process of studying. Students will 

then study using online resources providing study tools to help them master concepts. 

Every study plan is organized by primary concepts and links to multimedia assets, such 

as animated figures from the book, e-Lectures, video applications, power point slides, 

concept exercises, and concept tutorials. Each chapter will be concluded with a post-test 

to provide students and the lecturer with feedback regarding their understanding of the 

studied concepts. 

Following the e-Learning sessions the lecturer will review learned topics with the students 

and discuss potential open questions. 

Evaluation 

e-Learning activities (based on test results), individual written final exam 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 37

International Economics 


Spring 1 ITEC 2 


After completion of this course, the student will have acquired a framework for 

recognizing and analysing common business problems within the framework of 

economics. 


� name and describe fundamental international economic concepts and relations 

� explain and interpret results, assumptions, and empirical findings from economic 

models 

� solve and calculate as case studies from international economic relations 

� describe and analyse international economic interactions as well as identify their 

impact on international business activities 

� understand how international economics impacts business strategy, decisionmaking 

and results 

� develop abilities to focus on the trends of capital and trade flows 

� gain a practical understand of these major trends and the government policy 

questions that result 

� appreciate the global nature of the rules for successful business 

� strengthen analytical & research skills, enhance communication skills, and 

stimulate creative thinking 


Introduction to Economics 


This course is an extension of the Micro- and Macro-Economics foundation course 

completed in the first semester (―Introduction to Economics‖). Building on the models 

and concepts covered in the first semester, the analysis is extended to include the 

international environment. 

The course content is divided into the following three topic areas: 

� Theory of international trade: 

o Comparative advantage in the Ricardo model 

o Specific factors and income distribution 

o Standard neo-classical trade model 

o Fundamentals of the Heckscher-Ohlin model 

� Foreign trade policy: 

o Customs/duties and their welfare impact 

o Free trade areas and customs unions 

o Arguments for and against governmental foreign trade policies 

o Exchange rates and macro-economically open economies 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 38

� Balance of payments: 

o Currency market, exchange rates and exchange rate systems 

o IS-LM model of open economies (Mundell-Fleming) 

o Production and exchange rate over the short term 

o Price level and exchanger rate over the long term 

� International macroeconomic policy: 

o Development of the international monetary system 

o International policy coordination with floating exchange rates 

Literature 

International Economics, 8/E Husted and Melvin, ISBN-10: 0321594568 (10:032161409) 

Introduction to International Economics, 1st Ed. by Dominick Salvatore, 2005, ISBN: 0- 

471-20226-6, Wiley Publishing 

Economics, N. Gregory Mankiw and Mark P. Taylor; 2006, ISBN: 978-1-84480-133-6, 

Thomson 


Homework assignment: reading of the chapters introduced, review questions and 

problems at the end of each chapter; solutions will be provided 

Video cases: insight into internationally operating organisations 

Learning elements: self-study options, additional essays and problems on course 

contents plus solutions, online-information 

Pop quiz at the beginning of every class meeting (except the last one, with the final test) 

Evaluation 

Pop quizzes, final written exam 

Business Law 


Spring 2 BLAW 3 


Upon completion of this course students will know about: 

� understanding of basic concepts of business law, 

� application of business law and determination of applicable business laws, 

� legal reasoning, 

� identification of basic business law issues, 

� answering of legal problems relating to commercial mattes, 

� business organizations, 

� distribution, intellectual property, and competition. 


None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 39


Introduction to basic concepts of Business Law, relevant to export business, 

entrepreneurial code, business organizations in general, sole proprietorships, 

partnerships, corporations (GmbH and AG). 

In particular: 

� Entrepreneurial Law Code, Enterprise and Registration, Business Transactions 

� Business organizations in general 

� Partnerships 

� Basic Principles of Corporations 

� Advanced Topics Corporations 

� Insolvency Law, Director Responsibility, Business Crimes 

� Commercial Agency, Distribution 

� Trademarks, Intellectual Property, Unfair Competition 

� Cartels and Merger Regulation including European Union aspects 

� Electronic Commerce 

Literature 

Cases supplied in class. 

Online law resources 

Handouts 


Lectures, presentations, use of legal vocabulary, case and text examples 

Evaluation 


Finance and Investment 


Spring 2 FICO 2 


This course is designed to provide basic knowledge of financial markets, products and 

institutions. A financial mathematical part focuses on investment and financing decisions. 

Key concepts such as the NPV or IRR are presented. 


� define the purpose of interest rate; 

� explain the function of the stock market; 

� understand the main methods of investment appraisal, and be able to distinguish 

between methods which adjust for time value and those which do not, and be able 

to assess the strengths and weaknesses of each method; 

� explain the basic concepts of risk management and have a basic introductory 

understanding of the nature of risk, and its relationship with the return required 

from an investment; and how this links with a firm's cost of capital selected from 

different investment options. 

� analyse basic decision problems, and to evaluate decisions with some awareness 

of the strengths and limitations of the methods employed; 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 40

� calculate NPV and IRR; 

� compare stocks to bonds; 

� propose a plan for fixed-rate investments; 

� report to client/superior. 


None 


Given the introductory nature of this course, the prime objective is to introduce the 

student to the basic concepts of financial mathematics. Bond and stock valuation will be 

covered. Different methods of rising capital and capital budgeting will be discussed. 

Further learning objectives include understanding the basic structures and terminology 

used by finance academics and practitioners and to obtain the ability to carry out basic 

financial calculations. 

Literature 

Lecturer handouts with references given to: 

Brealey, R. A., Myers, S. C., Allen, F. (2006); Corporate Finance; 8th Ed.; NY: McGraw- 

Hill 

Weston, J. F., Besley, S. Brigham, E. F. (1996); Essentials of Managerial Finance; 11th 

Ed., Forth Worth, TX: Dryden 


This course will be held primarily as a lecture, certain cases and topics will be discussed 

in class, additional group work and discussions and also two self-learning units 

accompanied by the lecturer using eLearning tools and the IMC eDesktop completes the 

concept. 

As basic financial mathematics is an important subject of this class, some exercises will 

be completed in class and some exercises will be handed out as assignments. Students 

are advised to bring a calculator to class in order to be able to practise financial 

calculations. Depending on the material covered in the lectures the exercise work will 

consist of individual problem solving, group work or dealing with case studies. 

Furthermore, at the beginning of some of the lectures specific assignments will be 

presented by the students. The assignments can, on the one hand, be small research 

reports about specifically selected financial topics. On the other hand, the assignments 

can be tasks that require the individual solving of mathematical problems. The lectures 

will provide an extensive theoretical background as well as practical examples. 

Evaluation 

Assignments, mid-term exam, final exam 

Research Methodology II 


Spring 2 RESM 3 


The purpose of this course is to support in writing their first academic research paper. 

The main focus is put on the upcoming work for successful completion of their studies. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 41

After completion of this seminar, students should furthermore be able to distinguish 

trade, academic and scientific literature. A further objective of the lecture is to prepare 

future academics to meet the quality criteria of scientific publications as well as coping 

with the demands of sponsors, clients, and institutions, which might have opposite 

characters at first sight. 

After successful completion of the module, students will be able to: 

� know the various steps involved for carrying out and reporting scientific research; 

� locate different sources of secondary data. 

� apply the formal guidelines and requirements for writing scientific work; 

� critically assess the quality of information attained from secondary sources. 


None 


In this course the process of developing and identifying a research problem and 

formulating a hypothesis based on an idea will be explored. In order to develop skills 

needed for writing up seminar papers and ultimately their bachelor papers students will 

learn the basic essentials of research in terms of how to search and find adequate 

literature and how to cope with a literature review. Afterwards, research methods and 

principal questions of research will be addressed. During the lecture, the requirements 

regarding structure and form/layout of a research report or thesis will be highlighted. 

Hermeneutics and empirical work will also be discussed in this lecture. 

The main topics of the course will cover the following issues: 

� topic selection and research planning 

� time management 

� scientific research work and data analysis, scientific language 

� reading and analysis of technical papers 

� sources of analysis and ranking discussion 

� structure of the science industry 

� survey methodology 

� hermeneutic versus empirical work 

� objectivity - validity - reliability 

� writing a separate work under the guidance of the IMC Fachhochschule Krems 

"Academic research" methods 

Literature 

Provided hand-outs. 

IMC Manual for Academic Writing 


This course emphasizes a mixture of presentation and discussion, additional group work 

and utilization of the IMC eDesktop to support communication completes the concept. 

In class, the students will have to participate in a discussion class in order to acquaint 

them with topics related to scientific research. Furthermore they also have to provide a 

paper meeting scientific standards to familiarize them with the process of writing and the 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 42

guidelines applying at the IMC. Blended learning will be used in this course; strictly 

optional excursion trips to the library of the WU-Wien will be announced. 

Most of the meetings will be split into three parts, not necessarily in the following order: 

� Lecture: this part covers theory and some practical applications of writing 

scientific publications. Please note that the lecturer will take the liberty to have 

the course not strictly follow the slides uploaded at the start of the semester, as – 

as a result of the discussion in class – some subjects might get addressed earlier. 

� Discussion Club in Class: students will prepare given topics (no presentation and 

written report) and discuss them in class. One topic is chosen by a group of three 

or four. 

� Problems with application: the assignment written in the course has to meet the 

standards of scientific work and will be discussed and worked on in the course of 

the semester. 

If required, individual coaching sessions can be appointed. 

E-Learning: in addition to the classroom sessions there will also be one self-directed E- 

Learning session. Self-directed learning time will give students the opportunity to deepen 

and practice the skills acquired in class. Core issues of E-Learning sessions will be an 

integral part of course exams. 

Evaluation 

Paper 

Business Statistics and Mathematics II 


Spring 2 IST 2 


This course is designed to enable students to gain some proficiency numerical 

assessment and statistical techniques typically applied in the field of social sciences. 

Students will see how statistics is relevant to modern life, and will learn how to tackle 

simple statistical problems. In addition to that, students should acquire sufficient 

statistical sophistication to read and understand reports with conclusions phrased in 

statistical terms. 


� understand the statistical jargon commonly used in the analysis, 

interpretation, and presentation of numerical information; 

� develop a healthy scepticism of data and the conclusions often made from 

them; 

� understand the limitations of interpretation; 

� utilise with statistical packages like SPSS; 

� assess information and statistical arguments commonly found in scientific 

reports, in newspapers and on television. 


Business Statistics and Mathematics I 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 43


This course includes the nature of statistics, scales and sampling methods, organisation 

and classification of data, graphic representation, descriptive statistics like measures of 

central tendency and variability, percentiles, correlation and regression, statistical 

inference, estimation, and hypothesis testing and the use of computers for statistical 

calculations. 

Literature 

Lecturer handouts 

The references in the lecture will mostly refer to: 

Brase, C. H., Brase, C. P. (2004); Understanding Basic Statistics; 3 rd Ed.; Boston, MA: 

Houghton Mifflin or newer 

Norusis, M. (2008); SPSS 16.0 Guide to Data Analysis; Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice 

Hall or newer 


This course will be held primarily as a lecture, which will cover theory and practical 

applications of writing statistical analysis. The students are expected to prepare material 

in advance of the lecture. Additionally, integrated in and accompanying the lecture and 

short tutorials on how to carry out statistical analysis using MS Excel and SPSS will be 

conducted. Supplementary summaries of the literature, examples and exercises will be 

provided on-line. In order to ensure active engagement of the students, three 

(individual/small group) assignments will be handed out during the course, solving the 

exercises along with the performance in the exams will account for the final grade. Due 

to the scope of the material covered in a relatively short time, all exams will be held 

open-book style. 

In addition to the classroom sessions there will also be one self-directed E-Learning 

session. Self-directed learning time will give students the opportunity to deepen and 

practice the skills acquired in class. Core issues of E-Learning sessions will be an integral 

part of course exams. 

Evaluation 

Assignments, mid-term exam (written), final exam (written) 

International Marketing and Sales II 


Spring 2 MKTG 3 


The first objective of this course is to review the concepts covered in ―Introduction to 

Marketing‖ and see if they can be applied in practice. The second objective is to put the 

focus on the sales force and explore sales force management and what it takes to close 

the deal. As a third objective, the subject of Marketing will be put into an international 

context to discuss the resulting consequences for both organisation and operation of 

marketing activities. 

Upon successful completion of the module students will be able to: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 44

� understand the scope of marketing and its role and impact in business; 

� explain the importance of international sales management to the distribution and 

market communication; 

� discuss the problem of application of models to real world phenomena; 

� explain the importance of an international distribution policy as a guideline for 

decisions in international distribution management; 

� describe the steps to be taken in preparing a sales call and develop a strategy to 

deal with different roles and functions encountered in a buying centre; 

� discuss the importance of an international marketer‘s after sales activities. 

Upon completion of the course the students will acquire certain intellectual skills and will 

be able to: 

� utilise the most important key terms of marketing; 

� apply fundamental concepts and tools and critically question their applicability in 

practice; 

� evaluate the pros and cons of alternative distribution systems and choose 

selection criteria for distribution channels; 

� select the appropriate method for acquiring customers; 

� participate in planning the recruitment, assessment and development of sales 

personnel. 


Introduction to Marketing 


The course seeks to develop decision making skills for the successful formulation, 

implementation and control of Marketing and Sales strategies. It builds directly on the 

knowledge gained from the course ―Introduction to Marketing‖ and will on one hand 

concentrate on application of the methods while on the other hand investigate the 

peculiarities of international marketing and sales operations. 

International students should be aware that signing up for this course is only 

recommended if the students already participated in a beginner‘s course for marketing. 

Literature 

Marketing Management von Philip Kotler und Kevin Lane Keller von Prentice Hall 

International 2009 or newer. 

Lecturer hand-outs. 


The course involves a combination of formal lecture and case discussions, placing 

particular emphasis on student participation. To ensure this, working on projects and 

cases will play an important role, not only in the assessment; they will also help to 

enhance communication-, diagnostic-, analytical-, investigative- and decision-making 

skills of the students. Business cases to serve in utilisation of marketing tools and 

concepts will be selected in the first units; students will be expected to be prepared to 

discuss them in class. In selected units, the application of concepts will be based on the 

selected cases. 

The course will draw on methodology covered in ―Introduction to Statistics‖ and requires 

the guidelines for academic writing discussed in ―Introduction to Scientific Working‖ to be 

applied in the development of the project and project reports. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 45

Selection of topic, group forming, reporting and end presentation will mimic task and 

project assignment within a company. 

When doing the group-specific project, students should preferably pick up a multinational 

or big private sector company with a good public image. The higher the number of 

salespeople, sales managers, and sales jobs the better. It is recommended to address 

companies with a minimum of 20 salespersons. The point is that probably the quality of 

the project will be affected by what has been mentioned, as students might end up 

finding no or insufficient information otherwise, as it is traditionally the bigger companies 

that apply most of concepts relevant for the course. 

The objectives of the project are 

� first, to find out what is going on, 

� second, to find out why is it going on, and 

� third - if students believe that any changes should be made by the company - 

recommend those changes and justify recommendations. 

If a company applies any concepts that have not been mentioned in the course, include 

the findings in the project and comment on their soundness. 

The project is based on developing and gathering information from face-to-face 

interaction; internet projects are not going to be considered. However, students are 

encouraged to collect basic organization's data or other relevant information from the 

web. 

Reading and understanding the material well is going to help students to develop 

effective questions and do a good project. 

Writing up the results students will have to prepare a paper on a Marketing and Sales 

subject meeting the criteria for scientific working at the IMC and applying the methods 

covered in ―Introduction to Marketing‖ in groups of 4-8 students each. The paper will also 

be used for assessment in the ―Introduction to Scientific Working‖ course. 

All students must come prepared to all project discussions. This is an integral part of the 

course and the material covered is examinable. The course is supported through the E- 

Learning platform. Students are strongly encouraged to regularly visit the platform in 

order to download the course material and keep track of news and announcements. 

Advice for students: Students are welcome to bring topics and cases forward that they 

want to pick up for their paper, or that they want to have discussed and/or solved. 

Evaluation 

Paper, project end presentation, method and tool presentation 

Arabic Exercises II 


Spring 1 ARAB Ex. 0 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 46


This course is dedicated to reviewing the topics covered in ―Arabic II‖ and doing 



For more information please refer to the course ―Arabic II". 


Participant of the course ―Arabic II‖ 


See Arabic II 

Literature 

See Arabic II 


See Arabic II 

Evaluation 

None 

Arabic II 


Spring 2 ARAB 2,5 


The course is designed to provide the most effective means to teach a language such as 

Arabic by developing the four basic skills of listening, speaking, reading and writing. 


Arabic I 


Students will improve their writing, reading and speaking skills in Arabic so that they will 

become fluent. During the first few weeks they will review basic grammar and vocabulary 

taught during the first semester. Students will then continue to learn past, present and 

future tenses as well as nominative, accusative, imperative and vocative. Adverbs, 

adjectives, negations and numerals will also be taught. 

The lessons 2 to 6 from the textbook "Al-Kitab Al-Asasi I" will cover the following topics: 

at the airport; at the hotel; at the restaurant; at the bank; during this period students 

will build up a vocabulary that will be useful for everyday life. Also business Arabic will be 

taught using economic terminology. Drills will be conducted in everyday Arabic. Students 

will learn to form and answer questions and hold conversations with each other. 

The exercises will consist of providing the students with the cultural background of the 

Arab world, introducing social, political and economic structures of these countries and 

discussing traditions, customs and cultural values. 

Literature 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 47


The course is designed to provide the most effective means to teach a language such as 

Arabic by developing the four basic skills of listening, speaking, reading and writing. 

Theoretical teaching is practice through role playing, dialogue and interactive learning, 

etc. 

Students′ knowledge of grammar and vocabulary will increase through additional 

exercises. Students′ interest will be maintained by providing up-to-date information of 

current events through newspapers and magazines and at the same time introducing 

them to Arab culture. 

For the exercises every student should prepare a paper about one topic concerning the 

Arab world, e.g. culture, history, religion, language, political and social affairs etc. and 

must present it to the class. 

Evaluation 

Written and oral exams, homework, written and oral assignments 

Chinese Exercises II 


Spring 1 CHIN Ex. 0 


Chinese exercises II accompany and complement the main lecture Chinese II. Lecture 

and exercises comprise 3 teaching units and are taught in a blocked way. For further 

information on exercises please refer to "Chinese II" in the syllabus list. 


Participant of the course ―Chinese II‖ 


See ―Chinese II‖ 

Literature 

See „Chinese II― 


See „Chinese II― 

Evaluation 

None 

Chinese II 


Spring 2 CHIN 2,5 


In the second semester of this beginner's course elementary skills in written and oral 

Chinese will be continuously acquired, which means mastering basic vocabulary and 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 48

sentence patterns. Lesson 6-8 in the book as well as additional material will form the 

basis of this semester‘s course. 

Upon the successful completion of the semester students will be able to 

� understand and use basic sentences related to basic personal information (family, 

daily schedule, etc.), information related to university studies, information on 

date, time, age, prices of goods; 

� understand basic spoken Chinese and pronounce Chinese in an understandable 

way; 

� trace an unknown character in a Chinese-English dictionary; 

� use online resources that help to understand Chinese texts (transformation of 

characters into pinyin-transliteration, online dictionaries) 

� type E-Mails in Chinese by using online-resources for Chinese characters. 


Chinese I 



In semester 2, lessons 6, 7 and 8 of the book will be dealt with, accompanied by 

additional selected materials that will also form the basis of the mid-term and final exam. 

Focus is again laid upon training perceptive skills with listening material (audio material 

of the book and other teaching material) and productive skills by training typical 

dialogues on a range of everyday topics. 

Thematic areas include: greetings and proper address (in formal settings); introducing 

oneself and others (in formal settings); basic conversation on university and study 

matters, date, time, age, family members, plans for the weekend. 

More knowledge about the structure of the Chinese language will be acquired during this 

semester, such as the expression of past tense (completion of action) and the use of 

modal verbs. 

Chinese festivals and the Chinese educational system will be treated in more depth. 

Building up upon basic skills of phonetics and character writing, students will be 

analysing in depth some of the app. 220 characters already learned as well as new 

characters in order to be able to trace them in a Chinese dictionary. A strong focus is put 

on dictionary search and the use of a Chinese-English dictionary will be trained. 

Literature 

ZHAO Jinming et al.: Lu. Chinese Conversation for Foreigners. Beijing Language and 

Culture University. 2002. 

Oxford Compact Chinese Dictionary (paperback) by Martin H. Manser and Zhu Yuan, und 

Wu Jingrong (all Oxford University Press) 






FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 49

aspects of Chinese culture (e.g. intercultural communication, Chinese culture, history, 


Evaluation 

Written and oral exams, quizzes, homework 

French Exercises II 


Spring 1 FREN Ex. 0 


The main purpose in this class is practising French grammar and working on the topics 

treated in the course French II. 


Participant of the course ―French II‖ 


This course will offer the students‘ exercises and additional material to the grammar 

patterns and topics treated in French II. Much emphasis will be put on intercultural 

aspects. Main focus will be put on the active participation of each student. Individual 

questions will be dealt with in detail. 

Literature 

See „French II― 



will be encouraged to express themselves as freely as possible on the treated subjects. 

Videos and texts will introduce the topics thus demanding the students to understand 

and react. Various exercises will lead to a better understanding of the topics, the correct 

use of relevant terminology and develop a sound oral and written language competence. 

Evaluation 

None 

French II 


Spring 2 FREN 2,5 


Students should get a basic insight into the world of companies as well as into the 

terminology of export marketing. Upon completion of the course, the students should be 

able to make a professional presentation of different aspects connected with export 

marketing. They are asked to use various documents and data sheets. 

The course thus aims at presenting the basics of business language. After completing the 

course students will moreover be able to apply for a job, to write business letters, to 

describe the sectors of industry, to do business on the phone and to discuss various 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 50

social and economic aspects typical of France (e.g. the dress code); they will manage to 

understand detailed statements on France and they can describe general economic 

contexts (written texts). 


French I 


The course will deal with the different aspects of economic topics thus introducing the 

students to business language. Topics to be dealt with will be communication within a 

company, job applications or a case study. Furthermore, current tendencies of export 

marketing in France will be treated. Grammar items will be revised. 

Literature 

Le Truc Français, Semester 2 

Le point sur la grammaire française 



course topics, discussions, group work, presentations and case studies, the students will 

be encouraged to express themselves as often as possible and to improve their oral 

language skills. Each student has to deliver a presentation and participate in a case study 

(group work). 

Evaluation 

Grammar test, written final exam, presentation, group work 

Russian Exercises II 


Spring 1 RUSS Ex. 0 


This course is dedicated to reviewing the topics covered in ―Russian II‖ and doing 



For more information please refer to the course ―Russian II". 


Participant of the course ―Russian II‖ 


See ―Russian II‖ 

Literature 




FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 51

Evaluation 

None 

Russian II 


Spring 2 RUSS 2,5 



� understand sentences and commonly used expressions which fall under their 

immediate meaning (e.g. personal information and family, shopping, work, 

immediate surroundings) 

� express themselves in simple, routine situations, which deal with the simple and 

direct exchange of information about trusted and well-known objects 

� use simple means to describe one‘s own background and education, the direct 

surroundings and objects related to immediate needs 

� understand central themes, when standard language is used and when known 

objects are being discussed like work, school, leisure etc. 


Russian I 


The main topics of the course will include: 

� Past tense and utilisation of verbs 

� Irregular verbs, superlatives 

� Russian food 

� Social life in Russia 

Literature 

Golosa Book 1, 4th ed. (Textbook) (Robin, Evans-Romaine, Shatalina, Robin). ISBN: 

9780131986282. 

Loos; H., A. Berditschewski. Proekty. Ein Russischlehrwerk für Beruf und Alltag. Hueber 

Verlag 1996. ISBN 3-19-004467-8 

Loos; H., A. Berditschewski. Proekty. Ein Russischlehrwerk für Beruf und Alltag. 

Arbeitsbuch. Hueber Verlag 1996. ISBN 3-19-014467-2 

CD 


The course aims at presenting a great number of typical situational dialogues with the 

help of audio texts, automatizing the situations, at the same time providing the language 

structures necessary for understanding. Great emphasis is put on enlarging the 

vocabulary. Grammar is introduced to make comprehension and text production easier 

and more effective. The situational dialogues are embedded in typical everyday 

situations. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 52

Evaluation 

Regular vocabulary tests and grammar checks, regular homework, mid-term test, final 

test. 

Spanish Exercises II 


Spring 1 SPAN Ex. 0 



� Develop the communicative competence of the students as basic users in the 

private and public domain (everyday life situations). 

� Gain practical insight into the basic elements of Spanish grammar. 

� Employ Spanish for every day oral communication using vocabulary and structure. 


Participant of the course ―Spanish II‖ 



Students get the opportunity to practise the chapters treated in the course "Spanish II". 





lecture. 

Literature 

See Spanish II 




The course is based on vivid interaction between the students and the lecturer. The 

teaching will be done interactively through dialogue, role playing and encouragement of 

vocabulary development and correct pronunciation. At the same time the cultural 

background of the Spanish speaking countries will be explained. 



Students who do not attend the Exercises are required to keep an eye on the part of the 


Evaluation 

None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 53

Spanish II 


Spring 2 SPAN 2,5 



� Talk about habits, about past events and about plans and events in the future and 

to relate stories. 

� Express preferences, emotional reactions and suppositions. 

� Compare and describe. 

� Talk about ecological problems and the relationship between commerce and 

ecology. 

� Have conversations and understand oral and written texts concerning upon 

matters in Spanish and write easy texts and letters. 


Spanish I 


The course consists of lectures and exercises and is concerned with the development of 

the students in all dimensions of language proficiency and in oral and written 

communicative competence in everyday life and in situations concerned with their social, 

cultural and professional environment. 

In the lectures students will identify the communicative objectives and the grammatical 

structures and practice them. Their communicative language competence will be 

activated in the performance of various language activities, involving reception (oral and 

written), production, interaction and mediation, in relation to texts in oral or written 

form. The material will also be discussed and enlarged in the exercises lessons in order to 

develop those basic linguistic activities: 

� Reception: silent reading and following the media. 

� Production: oral presentations, written reports, letters, opinions. 

� Interaction: learning to interact in oral or written exchanges in which production 

and reception alternate. 

� Mediation: (re)processing an existing oral or written text. 

� Translation or interpretation, paraphrase, summary. 

The emphasis is on oral communication using every day vocabulary and structure, but 


are part of the programme as a whole. Furthermore students will have the opportunity to 

have contact with the language spoken by a native speaker. 


� Speaking of habits, plans and future events 

� Making appointments and giving invitations 

� Making comparisons 

� Telephone conversations 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 54

� Reading, understanding and writing simple texts and dialogs 

� Language structure design 

Literature 

Socios 1 Nueva Edición. Libro del alumno + CD. Difusión, Barcelona. 

Socios 1 Nueva Edición. Cuaderno de ejercicios + CD. Difusión, Barcelona. 



users and learners of a language primarily as ―social agents‖: members of society who 



context. One speaks of ―tasks‖ in so far as the actions are performed by one or more 




Evaluation 

Homework, mid-term test, final examination: written and oral 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 55

3 rd Semester (FALL) 

Controlling 


Fall 2 COTR 3 


Upon completion of this course students will: 

� be familiar with the concept of controlling and controllership. 

� develop an understanding of strategic controlling and budgeting. 

� know the context of value-oriented controlling. 

� be familiar with financial reporting issues. 


None 


Students will learn how to apply modern controlling concepts. They will be introduced to 

the budgeting process as well as issues of strategic controlling. Commonly used 

instruments of controlling will be practically applied. 

Literature 

Peter Atrill, Eddie McLaney, Management Accounting for Decision Makers, Fifth edition, 

Pearson 2007. 

Lecture script (will be provided electronically) 


Lecture, case studies, E-Learning (The completion of the e-learning part of the lecture is 

compulsory and forms an integral part of the course. It will furthermore lead to a 

reduction of the obligatory presence in class. Students are required to individually solve 

the self-study examples provided.) 

Evaluation 

Case studies, written exam 

Economic Areas II 


Fall 1 ECA 1 



� have a sound knowledge of the main EU funding programmes for the SEE region 

and their diversity 

� have a sound knowledge of the main principles of EU-tender procedure: eligibility 

criteria, awarding principles, types of procurement, standard procedure, selection 

criteria and award criteria 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 56

� be able to participate in an EU tender procedure (prepare and submit an offer) 

� be familiar with the main principles of EU project and contract management 


Economic Areas I 


The Section 1 consists of the following parts: 

Part A: EU funding (financing) programmes aimed at the SEE countries for the period 

2007 – 2013 

� Intra-Community programmes and the regional EU Funds 

� International research and technology policies – 7 th Research Programme 

� Structural Funds - existing financing mechanisms, focusing on the initiatives 

dedicated to private companies, and more specifically, to small and medium-sized 

enterprises (SME). 

� The Instrument for Pre-Accession Assistance (IPA), familiarisation with tools and 

know-how for working in the trade / non-profit sector 

Part B: International tender procedure inclusive a ―tender simulation‖ 

� Introduction to international tendering and an overview of the main principles of 

EU-tender procedure: 

� eligibility criteria: rule on nationality and origin, ground for exclusions, conflict of 

interest 

� awarding principles: transparency, proportionality, equal treatment, nondiscrimination 

� types of procurement: services, supplies, works 

� standard procedure: open procedure, restricted procedure, negotiated 

procedure, call for proposal 

� selection criteria: general principles, verification of eligibility, verification of 

financial/economic standing, verification of technical and professional capacities 

� award criteria: automatic award, best-value-for-money procedure 

� Case study: Tender simulation 

� Simulation of an international public tender including elaboration of tender 

documents, bid preparation, public opening of tenders, evaluation and final 

decision. 

Section 2: EU project management and EU contract management 

Project cycle management - main principles of EU project management and its 

differences to generic projects 

Overview of the main principles: 

� what items are required in an EC contract 

� why administrative and financial information are important 

� how to conduct contract negotiations with the EC 

� what are the differences between a project review and a project audit 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 57

Literature 

Cases supplied in class. 

Publications in international media combined with Internet research. 


Teaching will be based on a team approach. The main task is to motivate students to 

participate actively in the course through case studies, tender simulation and 

presentations in groups and discussions. 

Using the case method and tender simulation, students learn on their own, with the aid 

of the lecturer, through discussion, role-plays, private research and a small field survey. 

E-Learning: the students will start preparing the concepts in class during the second 

meeting and continue the work on their own over the following four weeks. Private 

research will give them the opportunity to extend the skills acquired in class. During this 

time students will contact the lecture via mail for future support (exchange of 

information). After four weeks students will submit their bids to the students-tender 

evaluation team in a role play. Evaluation team will evaluate the bidders (tenders) and 

give feedback. 

Evaluation 

Case study tender evaluation, final written exam 

Export Marketing I 


Fall 2 EMK 3 


The course has three main objectives: 

� To provide students with an insight of how globalisation influences – even local 

niche players – today and what are the consequences for adopting business 

strategies. 

� To explain how to evaluate marketing attractiveness and how to apply 

international marketing research for entering chosen markets successfully. 

� To encourage students to consider the vital importance of social and cultural 

aspects in both, planning and carrying out strategic and tactical activities. 

Particularly, the course will have the following learning outcomes: 

� Explain and characterize the major differences of international and domestic 

marketing and how the effect of globalisation influences marketing today 

� Interpret models of accessing marketing attractiveness, decision criteria for 

choosing and entering markets 

� Explain the function of international marketing research 

� Analyse how culture may influence strategy and tactics 

� Explain the opportunity of international niche marketing strategies for SMEs 

� Evaluate the relationship between product and promotion strategies in 

international markets 

� Explain the main difficulties in setting up overseas branches 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 58


Introduction to Marketing 


The course will be based on the following topics: 

� STRATEGIC PLANNING 

o global strategies (ethnocentric, polycentric, regional and geocentric 

perspectives) 

o evaluating marketing attractiveness 

o global segmentation strategies 

o culture awareness in strategic and tactical go-to-market considerations 

o market acquisition strategies (timing / organization) 

� MARKETING MANAGEMENT: 

o differences of international and domestic marketing management 

o social and cultural considerations in international marketing management 

o global product and promotion strategies 

o language and non-language influences on communication issues 

o the use-need model: adaptation vs. standardisation 

o market entry tactics 

o the role of international (external) communication and which tools to apply 

Literature 

Lecturer hand-outs 

Blythe J., Principles & Practice of Marketing, 2006, Thomson Learning, London, ISBN: 

978-1-84480120-6 

Doole I., Lowe R., International Marketing Strategies: Analysis, Development and 

Implementation, 4th ed., 2004, Thomson Learning, London, ISBN: 1-84480-025-3 


The course comprises a combination of formal lecture, colleague counselling and case 

studies, placing particular emphasis on student participation. To ensure this, working on 

projects and cases will play an important role. This will support the ambition to enhance 

analytical-, diagnostic-, decision making, and communication skills for students. Each 

chapter includes post-test questions to provide students and lecturer with feedback 

regarding the understanding of the studied concepts. 

E-learning elements: 

None 

Evaluation 

Project presentations and written exam 

International Management Methods 


Fall 1 ITMM 1 


The aim of this course is to introduce concepts of international management. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 59

As management does consist of many different components the broad subject of 

knowledge management which is stressed very much in today‘s organizations will be the 

base for this. In doing so, students will be provided with a clear understanding of what 

knowledge management is, the management methods, structures and cultural aspects it 

involves, and the role of individuals, groups and the organization. Students will be 

introduced to the international perspective of management and business at an individual 

and group level. 

Upon successful completion of the module, students will be able to 

� Show an understanding what management is and distinguish between different 

perspectives of it. 

� Locate the management of knowledge, intangible assets and intellectual capital 

within different ethical contexts and frameworks in order to critically appraise 

current practice and future options. 

� Identify the main challenges in relationships between individual knowledge and 

knowledge processes at group, organizational and inter- organizational levels. 

� Effectively use information and communication technologies to navigate the 

information environment, and apply to practical contexts a raised awareness of 

how, and in which ways, individual technologies may or may not support 

processes of knowledge management. 

� Critically appraise technological solutions to management problems and 

processes. 

� Suggest, develop or implement ways in which key management processes may be 

better aligned in any given organization with its structural and cultural context. 

� Understand the relationship between knowledge management and HR 

management. 

� Describe key issues in the economics and valuation of intellectual capital, and 

apply this awareness to practical situations. 

� Formulate a knowledge management programme for an organization or a part of 

it. 


None 


The course is an integrated process that will provide students with a clear understanding 

of concepts of international management. It will include: 

� An introduction to the concepts, management methods, structures and cultural 

aspects of knowledge management processes from a group, organizational and 

inter- organizational level. 

� An understanding of the role and impact of intellectual capital, intangible and 

tangible assets for individuals, groups and organizations. 

� An overall understanding of international management methods to prepare 

students for formulating a knowledge management programme. 

Furthermore, the course will be based on the following topics: 

� Performance management and evaluation 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 60

� Analysis and decision-making tools (such as strategy maps and Balanced 

Scorecard) 

� Customer Relationship Management 

� Value Chain Management 

� Six Sigma Quality and Lean Thinking 

� Coordination of corporate objectives ("Linking Customers to Shareholders") 

� Use of modern information technology ("data warehousing" and "data mining") 

Literature 

Hand-outs will be distributed during the lecture. 

Robert N. Lussier: Management Fundamentals. Concepts, Applications, Skill 

Development; 5th edition, international edition; 2012, 2009 South Western, Cengage 

Learning; ISBN-13: 9781111577537, ISBN-10: 1111577536 


A variety of complementary approaches will be combined in classroom teaching: 


subjects of the respective sessions and to position relevant teaching/learning material in 

the overall course outline. It is important for the theoretical inputs to be illustrated in the 

context of up to date knowledge management. 

Students are expected to undertake minor research projects and prepare a group 

presentation. The lecturer will provide students with practical hints and guidance 

(coaching function). Students are expected to actively participate in group work and 

individual tasks. 

Evaluation 

Individual final written exam, case study 

International Private Law 


Fall 2 ITPL 3 


The students should acquire an understanding for the legal background of international 

sales transactions as well as for the risks involved in such deals and the possibilities 

provided by the law to minimize them. Furthermore the students should acquire 

operational skills to appreciate the standard terms and to deal with the documents 

commonly in use. 


Introduction to Private Law 


The course presents the legal structure of international sales transactions from the 

viewpoint of all the parties involved – buyer and seller, financer, insurer and carrier. 

It focuses on the interplay of the different contracts involved and highlights the typical 

risks involved in such transactions. A particular emphasis is placed on the CISG. 

In particular the course will be based on the following topics: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 61

� Foreign Trade Law 

� International Sale Contract 

� Trading conditions 

� UNCITRAL, WIPO, WTO, ICC and conventions 

� Standards and procedures 

� International arbitration 

Literature 

Einführung in das International Privatrecht, Egglmeier-Schmolke, Neuer 

Wissentschaftlicher Verlag, 2009, Vienna-Graz 

UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods (CISG) 

Schmitthoff‘s Export Trade – The Law and Practice of International Trade 11th. ed. By 

Carole Murray, David Holloway, Daren Timson Hunt London Sweet & Maxwell 2007 ISBN 

Paperback 978-0-421-89280-4 


Lectures followed by discussions serve to introduce the principles. Students will form 

teams and work out detailed information on selected topics on the basis of original 

documents and present it in class. CISG cases are discussed in order to teach students 

how to apply and deal with legal rules. 

Evaluation 

Final written exam, group work 

Managerial Accounting 


Fall 2 MAC 3 



� have an in-depth knowledge of standard managerial accounting procedures in full 

and marginal cost accounting situations 

� be able to perform various job, order and process costing calculations 

� be able to apply cost-volume-profit (break-even) analysis 

� be able to handle cost planning and control tasks as well as analysing cost 

problems 


Accounting I + II 


After an introduction to cost concepts the course will focus predominantly on cost 

accounting. Different costing methods as well as cost behaviour and short run decision 

making are being discussed. The use of accounting material in planning, decision making 

and control is discussed and practiced. 


� Basic concepts of cost accounting 

� Reconciliation 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 62

� Cost Accounting 

� Full cost accounting of costs and parts costs 

� Break-Even Analysis 

� Modern cost management 

� Budget control 

� Investment Analysis 

Literature 

ATRILL P./McLANEY E.: Management Accounting for Decision Makers, 5 th Ed. Prentice Hall 

DYSON, J.R: Accounting for Non-Accounting Students. 7 th Ed. Pitman Publishing. 

Lecturer handouts 



and seminar style discussions. In addition material specifically prepared for self-study will 

be provided online and study time (equivalent to 4 contact hours) needs to be allocated 

for this. 

Self-directed learning time will give students the opportunity to deepen and practice the 

skills acquired in class. Core issues of E-Learning sessions will be an integral part of the 

final exam. 

Evaluation 

Written exams, case studies and homework 

Management Simulation 


Fall 3 MSI 3 


This course focuses on the concepts, skills, know-how, information, attitude and 

alternatives that are relevant for managers and stakeholders. 

Upon completion of this course students should be able to: 

� Discuss the management competencies needed to deal with today‘s turbulent 

environment, including issues such as diversity, globalization, rapid change, and 

the skills needed for crisis management. 

� Define a cultural leader and explain the tools a cultural leader uses to create a 

high-performance culture. 

� Explain the challenges of managing in a global environment. 

� Discuss how ethical organizations are created through ethical leadership and 

organizational structures and systems. 

� Define goals and plan and explain the relationship between them. 

� Explain why decision-making is an important component of good management. 

� Discuss the fundamental characteristics of organizing, including such concepts as 

work specialization, chain of command, span of management, and centralization 

versus decentralization. 

� Describe the sequence of four change activities that must be performed for 

change to be successful. 

� Define organizational control and explain why it is a key management function. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 63

� Identify personal characteristics associated with effective leaders. 

� Explain how managers use communication to persuade and influence others. 

� Discuss new applications of teams to facilitate employee involvement. 

� Have gained practical experience in planning for an entrepreneurial venture by 

developing a business plan and associated documents. 

� Develop an increased degree of understanding of strategic frameworks for moving 

from theory to practice. 

� Have increased awareness of external factors that affect business. 

� Study and be able to apply business terminology. 

� Strengthen research, analysis, forecasting, and decision-making abilities. 

� Enhance ability to view organizations as a system of inter-related functions. 

� Emphasize the importance of results that are generated from thoughtful insights 

and actions. 

� Challenge verbal, graphic, written, and electronic media communication skills. 

� Enhance interpersonal abilities by interacting as a team in an organization-like 

setting. 


None 


Most strategic decisions, especially crucial ones, are made after consultation with key 

executives, colleagues, and stakeholders in an atmosphere of committee deliberations 

and discussion. To simulate this procedure, each student has the opportunity to select 

his/her own team. Teams of 5 to 6 will be formed. Team management is as important as 

team task accomplishment. 

Teamwork is an important aspect of this course. 

Each team has to act as the management team of their own Capstone® company and 

has to develop and implement strategic concepts. The management team will make 

decisions about various aspects such as R&D, Marketing, Production and Finance of an 

assigned company's management for a given period of "simulated time". It is expected 

that all management teams meet regularly in person and electronically to analyse the 

strategic position of the company and discuss the issues, problems, etc. The results for 

each company are returned every week to the corresponding group. 

The game is, thus, played over several simulated periods to maximize the firm's 

objectives, achieving the firm's mission. 

In addition the course will lead the students through following topics and will provide the 

students with a better understanding on the fundamentals of Management: 

� The Environment of Management 

� Planning and Organizing 

� Controlling 

� Leading 

Literature 

Capstone® Business Simulation (login at www.capsim.com) 

Capstone® Student Guide 2008 (available as download after login) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 64



Capstone® business simulation. 

Students will perform individually and as teams to complete the web-based simulation. 

Students will be assigned to teams, which will function throughout the exercise. Students 

examine the conceptual and practical aspects of business policies and policy decision 

making by utilizing all the concepts, theories, and tools that were presented in previous 

courses. Students should be able to analyze and recommend a comprehensive and 

workable approach to the situation. The course will cover current business issues and 

developments. 

In regular intervals review meetings between each team and the lecturer are held to 

discuss students approaches, decisions and results. 

In addition individual essay assignments are to be executed which will help students to 

reflect on decisions taken and to learn from actions. 

The course is held in cooperation with Capsim Management Simulations, Inc.®. For elearning 

purposes Foundation®, a web-based management simulation system is used for 

students to become the managers of competing companies, making decisions in R&D, 

Production, Marketing, Finance and, optionally, Human Resources and Total Quality 

Management. 

In addition to lectures will provide students with concepts of management to support the 

hands-on learning also with up to date theories. 

Evaluation 

Written exam, individual assignments, performance in the simulation (online company 

results), team presentation 

Marketing Research 


Fall 2 MRE 3 


Upon successful completion of the course students will be able to: 

� Identify and formulate research problems 

� Define the sources of information (primary and secondary data) 

� Define a sample 

� Collect data 

� Select and brief external marketing research suppliers 

� Set up an appropriate research design which is also manageable with the 

available resources 

� Propose a plan for a research project 

� Judge the quality of a research report 

� Report to a client/superior 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 65


None 


The following steps will be covered in the course: 

� Developing an approach to the problem 

� Formulating a research design 

� Doing field work or collecting data 

� Preparing and analysing data 

� Preparing and presenting the report 

Moreover, the course will be based on the following topics: 

� Provision of basic and detailed knowledge of the market research for future 

marketing and communication professionals 

� Practical application and critical analysis of scientific ways of working methods 

� Comparison of methods in relation to their applications, capabilities and 

limitations 

� Evaluation methods and interpretation techniques of qualitative research 

� Identification of success factors for effective market research projects 

� Market research in support to decision making in marketing, especially in 

advertising and public relations 

� Market research to help launching and re-launching products 

� Stages of a research project, field research (methods, techniques of collection, 

data collection, field work, analysis) 

� Sampling error, questionnaire on the various media 

� Reading and interpretation of tables 

� Tables and graphs in the presentation 

� Introduction to SPSS 

Literature 

Lecturer's slides 

Textbook: Churchill, G. A. (2002); Marketing Research - Methodological Foundations; 8th 

ed.; Fort Worth: Hartcourt (or newer) 


The Marketing Research course is based on three pillars: 

(1) Marketing Research Theory 

(2) Application (carrying out a project) 

(3) Analysis and Interpretation of data using SPSS 

Most of the meetings will be split up in 4 parts: 

� Brief recapitulation of last session‘s topics / reviewing home assignments 

� Presentation of today‘s content 

� Discussion/special activity 

� News & concluding reflection/things to prepare for the next meeting 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 66

This course will use blended learning, especially when it comes to data analysis where it 

shall enable different learning speeds. 

PASW will be used for data entry and analysis; therefore an introduction to SPSS and to 

statistical methods will also be part of this course. One group assignment (usually five 

students per group) will accompany the lecture from meeting three until the end. 

In addition to the classroom sessions there will also be self-directed E-Learning sessions, 

mainly to give students the opportunity to practice data-analysis using provided records, 

and feedback and discussion rounds will provide the opportunity to elaborate and prepare 

the data analysis of their research project. 

Evaluation 

Presentation of proposal, research project, end presentation 

Project and Process Management 


Fall 2 PPM 3 


In this course students will get an insight into the development of business processes 

and the methodologies how to improve or convert such processes with the tools of 

project management. The aim is to achieve that students will be able to apply project 

management tools so that the right things happen at the right times. 

There are three main course objectives: 

� The first objective of this course is the students‘ ability to review the taxonomy of 

a business process and to define how this process affects the entire organisation, 

including customers and stakeholders 

� The second objective is to gain understanding of essential principles associated 

with effective project management and how to apply these principles in the dayto-day 

business environment 

� As a third objective, students should be able to define and explain what the 

relevant cornerstones of a successful project are and how to apply the common 

methods for managing (defining, planning, initiating and monitoring) projects and 

project teams. 


� Discuss the scope and characteristics of a business process 

� Name and explain the importance of customer‘s needs and how these findings can 

be used by improving or reengineering business processes 

� Express the importance to develop and understand a vision and mission 

statement as a starting point of a successful project 

� Define and discuss the relevant tasks and functions (―key player‖) in a project 

� Demonstrate the use of common project scheduling tools (such as Gantt, CPM and 

PERT) 

� Describe and explain the most common graphs and workflow charts which are 

used in process and project management 

� Explain the common project tools and how to apply them (e.g. WBS, WP, SOW) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 67

� Appraise the essence of how to schedule and manage a project (debate the key 

success factors) 


None 


The following issues will be dealt with: 

� basic project management concepts and methods 

� turnkey contracts 

� project controlling 

� risk management 

� crisis management 

� joint ventures 

� payments and penalties 

� project completion 

� benefits and limitations of project management 

� use of project management software 

� basics of process management 

� continuous improvement processes 

� business process reengineering 

� benchmarking 

� roles in process management 

Literature 

Lecturer hand-outs. 

The references in the lecture will mostly refer to: 

Lewis J., Fundamentals of Project Management, 3rd. ed., 2007, AMACOM, New York, 

ISBN: 978-0-8144-0879-7 and 

Field M. and Keller L., Project Management, 1998, The Open University/Thomson 

Learning, ISBN: 1-86152-274-0 (latest reprinted 2007) 

Project Management for the 21st century. 2nd edition, B. Lienitz, K. Rea, 

ISBN012449966X 







regarding the understanding of the studied concepts. Additionally two meetings will be 

held to discuss concepts and to answer any upcoming questions. 

Evaluation 

Final exam (written), group assignment 

Purchase and Logistics I 


Fall 1 PLG 2 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 68


The aim of the course is to provide an introduction into the area of purchase & logistics 

and to understand what activities are included in this field. Students should have a 

general overview about the area of purchase and logistics after the 2 semesters lecture 

and should be able to identify logistical problems and have an idea of appropriate 

solutions. 


None 


The course of logistics consists of the following teaching modules: 

� Overview 

� Material Requirements Planning 

� Strategic Purchasing 

� Operational Purchasing 

� Inbound & Outbound Logistics – quantitative approaches 

� Exam 

Literature 

Hand-outs 

The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management von Alan Rushton, Phil Croucher 

und Peter Baker von Kogan Page, 2010. 


The teaching concept is based on an 2 Semester Course focusing on the "purchase 

(procurement)" part in the first semester and "logistics" part in the second semester 

The lecture will be „lectured― and organized by different lecturers. The lecture is going to 

be held in an interactive way. Students‘ participation is highly required in discussions 

to different topics related to purchase & logistics. Nevertheless there will be a final exam 

covering the contents of the whole lecture. 

Evaluation 

Final exam, group work 

Arabic III 


Fall 2 ARA 2,5 


Upon completion of this course: 

� Students should be able to use verbs in all tenses and nouns in all cases. 

� Students should get used to use the dictionary and start to read small texts by 

themselves. 

� Students will also be trained in translating from Arabic into German and viceversa. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 69


Arabic I + II 


Students will review past tense and imperative forms. The verbs-system as stems and 

radicals will be introduced to them, especially the hollow verbs. Dual-forms and pluralforms 

of the possessive pronouns will also be taught, as well as relative and 

demonstrative pronouns. Knowledge in the tenses, prepositions, vocative, numerals, 

adjectives and adverbs will be deepened. Students will learn how to tell the time (date, 

months, days, etc.). 

The lessons from 8 to 16 will cover the topics ‗at the doctor‘s‘, ‗the family‘, ‗in the street‘, 

‗at the post-office‘, ‗how to send a telegraph‘, ‗how to make a phone-call‘, ‗telling the 

time‘, ‗at the market‘. 

The students will learn in this semester how to use the dictionary, after having 

knowledge of the radical-system in the Arabic language. Also business Arabic will be 

taught using economic terminology. There will be a lecture about economy in the Arabic 

world, too. 

Literature 



The course will consist of both lecture and interactive parts. 

Students‘ knowledge of grammar and vocabulary will increase through additional 

exercises and by using tapes, newspapers and videos 

Students should be trained in listening and comprehension. 

Evaluation 

Mid-term exam, final exam, homework 

Chinese III 


Fall 2 CHI 2,5 


The purpose of this course is to improve the students‘ communicative competence in 

real-life situations. The focus will be put on everyday dialogues, to help students to 

master their first stay in China without major problems. 

Upon the successful completion of the semester students will: 

� be able to use basic sentences related to topics treated in this semester 

� have improved his / her listening comprehension of semi-authentic Chinese 

listening texts 

� have a basic understanding of the use of Chinese online resources 

� be able to type Chinese characters on a computer. 


Chinese I + II 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 70


Chinese, also at intermediate level, is a language that requires continuous practice. 


able to follow the course. 

The first two meetings are devoted to reviewing important grammar, pronunciation and 

vocabulary learned in the previous two semesters. In the following meetings students will 

accomplish one lesson in two meetings. Topics covered include: talking about studies and 

work, buying tickets, shopping and asking for directions. 

Literature 


Culture University. 2002. Volume 1 

Additional material will be handed out. 






aspects of Chinese culture (e.g. intercultural communication, Chinese food, history, 


Evaluation 

Midterm test, final exam, homework and quizzes 

French III 


Fall 2 FRE 2,5 


The targeted competence level is that of an Independent User (B2) to a Competent Users 

(C1) in accordance with the European Common Framework of References for Languages. 


� understand the main contents of complex texts regarding concrete and abstract 

subjects 

� understands his/her own special area as well as specialist discussions 

� be spontaneously and fluently understood so that a normal conversation with 

natives speakers is possible without any effort from either party 

� express oneself in specialist topics clear and in detail 

� explain a position regarding a current issue and explain the benefits and 

disadvantages of various possibilities 

� clearly and in a structured manner make a statement regarding complex 

specialised topics and use various appropriate means to cross reference texts. 


French I + II 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 71

This course will introduce the students to the world of labour and its specific topics and 

terminology such as: looking for a job, reading and interpreting job ads, job interviews, 

information on work contracts, social security, salaries etc. After the written 

communication forms treated in year one, the oral communication forms will be 

emphasised this year. 

Literature 

Required text: Script: Manual for French-Semester 3 

Dictionary 


Students will be encouraged to express themselves on the treated subject. Dialogues 

(taped) and texts will introduce the topics thus demanding the students to understand 

and react. Various exercises will lead to a better understanding of the topic, the correct 

use of the relevant terminology and the development of the language competence both, 

orally and in writing. Moreover, students will be asked to engage in role plays. 

The basic linguistic skills – listening comprehension – speaking – writing – reading 

comprehension - communication shall be trained. 

E-learning elements: no meeting will be exclusively e-learning module. E-learning 

elements, exercises and activities in the form of multi-media sources, online information 

or self-study options are part of the lectures and therefore are essential for the final 

exam. 

Evaluation 

Written exam, oral exam, homework, group work, presentations 

Russian III 


Fall 2 RUS 2,5 


After this course students will be able to deal with typical business situations like 

checking in a hotel, talking on the telephone with their Russian business partners, but 

also going by train in Russia, asking for information etc. Moreover, students will be able 

to talk about places and present their hometown / region / country to their Russian 

business partner. 


Russian I + II 


This Russian course aims at teaching the language in a communicative way, including 

numerous dialogues, listening and reading comprehension, but also provides the 

grammar necessary for further intensive studies. Written work is intended to consolidate 

oral skills and facilitate correct use of Russian. The course also includes information on 

Russian culture and civilization to facilitate better understanding of Russian life and 

institutions. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 72


� ordinal numbers 

� modal verbs 

� genitive case 

� verbal aspects of the infinitive case 

� travel (train, taxi, airport, airplane) 

� telephone conversations 

� simple conversations in and about company 

Literature 


9780131986282 


Robin): ISBN 9780131986299 


Verlag 1996 .ISBN 3-19-004467-8 



CD 



help of audio texts, automating the situations, at the same time providing the necessary 

language structure. Great emphasis is put on enlarging the vocabulary as fast as 

possible. Grammar is introduced to make comprehension and text production easier and 

more effective. The situational dialogues are embedded in typical everyday situations. 

Evaluation 

Regular vocabulary tests and grammar checks, regular homework, mid-term and final 

tests (written and oral). 

Spanish III 


Fall 2 SPA 2,5 



� Describe daily experiences, habits and events in the past. 

� Compare and differentiate the past tenses. 

� Relate a simple description of an event and short simple stories 

� Describe plans and events in the future. 

� Explain opinions and express emotional reactions and instructions. 

� Compare and express suppositions. 

� Revise and analyse complex grammar skills. 


Spanish I+II 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 73


The objective of this semester is to continue the foundation course. The course is 

concerned with the development of the students‘ oral and written communicative 

competence (linguistic, sociolinguistic and pragmatic competences) in everyday life as far 

as to the A2 level of the Common European Framework of References for Languages. 

The semester will begin with a general repetition of the subjects of semester 2. The 

course is concerned with the development of the students in all dimensions of language 

proficiency and in oral and written communicative competence in everyday life and in 

situations concerned with their social, cultural and professional environment. The 

students will identify the communicative objectives and the grammatical structures and 

practice them. Their communicative language competence will be activated in the 

performance of various language activities, involving reception (oral and written), 

production, interaction and mediation, in relation to texts in oral or written form. The 

material will also be discussed in order to develop the following basic linguistic activities: 


� Production: oral presentations, written reports, letters, opinions. 

� Interaction: learning to interact in oral or written exchanges where production and 

reception alternate. 

� Mediation: (re)processing an existing oral or written text. Translation, or 

interpretation, paraphrase, summary. 


� The company and its departments 

� The labour market 

� Telephone conversations and situations in the office 

� Editing of thematic texts 

� Continuation of the linguistic competence building 

Literature 

MARTINEZ, Lola & SABATER, Maria Luïsa: Socios 2, Nueva Edición (Libro del alumno). 

Difusión, Barcelona. 

CORPAS, Jaime, MARTINEZ, Lola & SABATER, Maria Luïsa: Socios 2, Nueva Edición 

(Cuaderno de ejercicios). Difusión, Barcelona. 

MIQUEL, Lourdes & SANS, Neus: Rápido, rápido (Libro del alumno). Difusión, Barcelona. 



users and learners of a language primarily as ―social agents‖. The action-based approach 

also takes into account the cognitive, emotional and volitional resources and the full 

range of abilities applied by the individual as a social-agent. This approach will encourage 

the students to express themselves concerning the subjects treated. Therefore authentic 

dialogues (videos and tapes) and texts will be used to introduce the topics thus 

demanding the students to understand and react. Grammar structures will not only be 

trained with structured exercises but also by examples of open learning. 

Evaluation 

Homework, midterm test, final examination (written and oral) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 74

4 th Semester (SPRING) 

Practical Training Semester 


Spring PTS 30 


Students should be able to apply theoretical course knowledge gained at the IMC during 

the first three semesters as well as additional individual skills to real life business 

situations. Students will gain an insight into future working fields and will experience a 

different culture by working in a foreign country. Upon completion of the course students 

will be able to understand real life business processes as well as strengthen their 

language knowledge of the particular country they worked in. 


Semester 1, 2 and 3 of the Bachelor Programme Export-Oriented Management 


The practical training semester is considered a regular semester and is part of the study 

programme. Students must carry out tasks and duties which are listed in the PTS 

contract as well as follow the PTS guidelines and complete various reports as stated by 

the guidelines. 

Literature 

None 


Real life working experience in the chosen country and organization, learning by doing as 

well as coaching through the PTS co-ordinator. 

Evaluation 

Initial report, seminar paper, employer evaluation, presentation 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 75

5 th Semester (FALL) 

Applied Computer Technologies II 


Fall 2 ACT 2 


This course is designed to provide basic knowledge of software commonly used nowadays 

within European companies focusing on ERP software tools provided by Microsoft and 

SAP. Concentrating on MS Navision and SAP R/3 students will gain an overview of ERP 

System functionalities, the current market situation and specific modules of MS Navision 

and SAP R/3. 

Upon completion of this course students are will: 

� Know important facts about the development and the evolution of ERP Systems 

� Understand the need of ERP Systems especially for multinational corporations 

� Understand underlying business processes 

� Navigate through MS NAV 2009 and SAP R/3, enter Master data as well as apply 

several purchase/sales/finance transactions in both applications 


Good computer literacy 


Within the forth semester the focus will be on the basics of ERP Systems. Especially the 

Microsoft System Navision will be used to illustrate basic functionalities for purchase and 

sales processes. Additionally parts of SAP Foundation Level & FI will be given. 

Literature 



The course is divided into three parts. Within the introductory students will learn the 

basic concepts of ERP Systems. 

Modelling business processes will build the base for taking a closer look at the 

implementation of chosen processes in MS Navision. Within the first E-Learning unit 

students will work freely with shown ledgers of the application. 

The last part of the lecture will be focused on SAP R/3 which will again end in an E- 

Learning session to repeat covered features and explore further details. 

E-Learning units will in total substitute 5 hours in class. 

Evaluation 

Home and class assignments, exam 

Economic Areas III 


Fall 2 ECA 2 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 76


The course consists of two sections: 

� Section 1: China 

� Section 2: U.S.A. 

Upon completion of the course students should: 

� Section 1: receive a comprehensive overview on contemporary China. 

� Section 2: 

o see globalization in its historical perspective 

o understand the U.S.A. as a developing system of regional international 

trading units more than as a nation-state 

o name and describe the forces that lead to sustainable regional 

development 

o apply these regional dynamics to any region in the world 

o strengthen analytical/research skills, enhance communication skills, 



Economic Areas I+II 


Section 1: 

Lecture includes introduction into recent history of China. Important and promising 

Chinese economic centres and hubs, their strengths and weaknesses are mentioned. 

Insight to relevant industrial sectors is presented. Major companies are introduced. 

Legislation for international corporations and foreign invested enterprises is explained. 

Labour law and experiences of the lecturer in personnel management in China is given. 

IPR issues and product pirating is discussed as well as China´s achievement in hightechnology 

businesses and research. 

Section 2: 

Lecture includes a brief history of globalization and the U.S.A. followed by an analysis of 

the new dynamics of regionalism and the paradox of increasing globalization and greater 

regionalization. The analysis concludes with the interplay between demand (corporate 

performance) and supply (community or region's health). 

Literature 



Section 1: teacher-centred lecturing is spiced with a story telling portion and discussion 

of latest China-related news. No group work. 

Section 2: formal lectures will be followed by seminar type discussions and then student 

presentations. 

Evaluation 

Section 1: final written exam 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 77

Section 2: project, presentation, final exam 

Purchase and Logistics II 


Fall 2 PLG 2 


The aim of the course is to provide an introduction into the area of (transport) logistics 

and to understand what activities are included in this field. Students should have a 

general overview about the area of purchase and logistics after the 2 semesters lecture 

and should be able to identify logistical problems and have an idea of appropriate 

solutions. 


Purchase and Logistics I 


The course of purchase & logistics 2 consists of the following teaching modules 

� Logistics Management/Transport Logistics 

� Business Solutions/Cross Docking 

� Supply Chain Management (SCM) 

� Efficient Consumer Response (ECR) 

� Transport Infrastructure/Route planning 

� Road transport - water transport 

� Air transport - rail transport 

� Combined transport 

� EU-transport policy & transport statistics 

Literature 

Hand-outs 

The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management von Alan Rushton, Phil Croucher 

und Peter Baker von Kogan Page, 2010. 


The lecture will be „lectured― and organized by different lecturers and is going to be held 

in an interactive way. Thus it can be considered more as lecture including workshop 

elements. Students‘ participation is highly required in the discussions and in the group 

work of different topics related with logistics. Nevertheless there will be a final exam 

covering the contents of the whole lecture. 

Evaluation 

Written exam 

Bachelor Seminar and Bachelor Thesis I (Part 1: International 

Management & Business) 


Fall 1 BASE 5 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 78


Upon completion students will be able to 

� develop a research proposal 

� identify and select relevant information sources 

� structure, outline and summarise their work 

� apply a sound way of reasoning and explanation 

� utilise proper referencing 

� devise a research report meeting both formal and academic requirements 

� develop a case study 

� apply empirical and hermeneutical approaches when researching 

� report, present and defend their findings 


Foreign Trade Techniques (Semester 3+5) 

Export Marketing (Semester 5) 

International Financial Management (Semester 5) 


Having completed the first four semesters of their study program should give students a 

sound base of knowledge, backed up by practical work experience. The objective of doing 

a seminar is to gain experience in gathering knowledge as well as combining the 

gathered theoretical knowledge with practical experience and practice to utilize this 

knowledge to develop a case/work on a project and report the findings. 

Based on a list of research topics students will form teams and sign up for a topic they 

wish to conduct research on. Allocation will be based on a first come – first served 

principle. 

The first meeting will be spent on introducing students to topics of International 

Marketing and Foreign Trade, which are relevant for their bachelor theses. Also during 

this meeting topics for the bachelor papers will be discussed. 

Students then have to write up a research proposal (two pages) including background 

and justification for selection of the topic, objectives and research questions, preliminary 

data sources and literature review (including key information/authors), and a chapter 

outline. The research proposal will be discussed in the second meeting. 

Students then start writing and giving reports on their research progress in the following 

meeting. Again, the reports/research progress will be discussed in class and coaching will 

be provided (that is to say that coaching will take place during the meeting). During the 

first and second meeting the scientific guidelines (how to quote, structure, format) will be 

shortly reviewed. 

The bachelor thesis has to consist of 20 to 25 pages and has to be done according to 

scientific work standards (The ―Manual for Academic Research‖ is available for download 

on the IMC e-desktop). 

In the final meeting each group will do a presentation on their thesis, whereas each 

individual student has to do a presentation of seven minutes. Each presentation will be 

followed by questions by the lecturer as well as the students (defence). 

Feedback on student‘s performance will be provided during the same meetings. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 79

Literature 

Current editions of the manuals for Academic Work & related manuals at the IMC (will be 

announced in the first unit) 


Throughout this seminar, a combination of lectures, discussions, demonstrations of how 

to write a case and coaching of the papers will be used. 

A presentation on their work will give students the possibility to improve their 

presentation skills, but very much give all other students the possibility to learn from 

others. 

A defensio of their presentation will allow each participant to prove their understanding of 

topic. 

Evaluation 

Bachelor Thesis I 

Bachelor Seminar and Bachelor Thesis I (Part 2: International Law 

& Global Political Studies) 


Fall 1 BASE 5 


The prime target of the ISP course is to serve as a preparatory for the Bachelor Exam. 


should be able to: (i) articulate a well-synthesized but comprehensive view on main 

issues of International Law and Relations; (ii) recognize all relevant practical and 

theoretical aspects of contemporary international legal, political and economic affairs; 

(iii) be able to contextualize the subject in the well advanced scientific writing manner; 

(vi) successfully tackle the second bachelor paper. 


Geo Political Affairs (Semester 2) 

International Private Law (Semester 3) 

International Public Law and Institutions (Semester 5) 


Based on a list of research topics, students have to form a team consisting of two to 

three students and sign up for a topic they wish to conduct research on. Allocation will be 

based on a first come – first served principle (prior-to-class student arrangements are 

allowed too). 

The first meeting will be then spent on introducing students to topics of ILAW&GPS 

issues, which are relevant for their bachelor theses. Also during this meeting topics for 

the theses will be discussed. 

The overall topics will be covering issues of ―Current and Future Challenges – 

Europe/EU‖. 


and justification for selection of the topic, objectives and research question, preliminary 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 80

literature review (including key authors), and a chapter outline. The research proposal 

will be discussed in the second meeting. 

Students then start writing and give reports on their research progress in the following 


be provided. 

The bachelor thesis has to consist of either 20-25 pages (single student) 35-40 pages 

(two students) or 45-50 pages (three students) and has to be done according to scientific 

work standards (The ―Manual for Academic Research‖ is available for downloading on the 

IMC e-desktop). 

As of the third meeting each group will do a presentation on their thesis, whereas each 

individual student has to do a presentation of seven minutes. Though the presentation is 

not part of the final evaluation it is an integral part of this course. Any student not 

executing the presentation will not be evaluated. 

Each presentation will be followed by questions by the lecturer as well as the students 

(defence) for approximately ten minutes. 

Feedback on student‘s performance will be provided during the meeting. 

Literature 

Bachelor Exam literature list 

Emerson, Robert W. and Hardwicke, John W. Business Law Barron‘s Business Review 

Series (3rd or 4th edition) 

Janis, Mark W. An Introduction to International Law ASPEN Publishers, 4th Edition 2003 


A combination of lectures, discussions, writing a bachelor thesis and coaching will be 

used. 

A presentation of their work will give students the possibility to improve their 

presentation skills, but very much give all students the possibility to learn from others. 

A defence of their presentation will allow students to prove their knowledge. 

Evaluation 


Bachelor Seminar and Bachelor Thesis I (Part 3: Human Resource & 

Intercultural Management) 


Fall 1 BASE 5 


Having completed the first four semesters – including a practical training semester – 

students should have a sound base of knowledge as well as experience. The objective of 

doing a seminar is to gain experience in gathering knowledge as well as combining the 

gathered theoretical knowledge with practical experience and practice to utilize this 

knowledge for future references. 

Upon completion students should be able to: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 81

� Develop a research proposal 

� Identify and select relevant information sources 

� Structure, outline and summarise their work 

� Apply a sound way of reasoning and explanation 

� Utilize proper referencing 

� Devise a research report meeting both formal and academic requirements 

� Develop a case study 

� Apply empirical and hermeneutical approaches when researching 

� Report, present and defend their findings 


Human Resource Management (Semester 1+2) 

Project and Process Management (Semester 3) 

International Management Methods (Semester 3) 

Training Intercultural Competence (Semester 5) 


Based on a list of research topics students have to form a team consisting of two to three 

students and sign up for a topic they wish to conduct research on. Allocation will be 

based on first come – first served principle. 

The first meeting will be spent on introducing students to topics of HRM and Intercultural 

Management issues, which are relevant for their bachelor theses. Also during this 

meeting topics for the theses will be discussed. 

The overall topics will be covering issues of ―Human Resource Management‖ and 

―Intercultural Management‖. 


and justification for selection of the topic, objectives and research question, preliminary 

literature review (including key authors), and a chapter outline. The research proposal 

will be discussed in the second meeting. 

Students then start writing and give reports on their research progress in the following 


be provided (that is to say that coaching will take place during the meeting). During the 

first and second meeting the scientific guidelines (how to quote, structure, format) will be 

shortly reviewed. 

The bachelor thesis has to consist of either 25 to 30 pages (two students) or 30 to 35 

pages (three students) and has to be done according to scientific work standards (The 

―Manual for Academic Research‖ is available for download on the IMC e-desktop). 

As of the fourth meeting each group will do a presentation on their thesis, whereas each 

individual student has to do a presentation of seven minutes. Though the presentation is 

not part of the final evaluation it is an integral part of this course. Any student not 

executing the presentation will not be evaluated. 

Each presentation will be followed by questions by the lecturer as well as the students 

(defence) for approximately three minutes. 

Feedback on student‘s performance will be provided during the same meetings. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 82

Literature 

Current editions of the manuals for Academic Work & related manuals at the IMC (will be 

announced in the first unit) 

SNELL, Scott und BOHLANDER, George: Human Resource Management, 1st edition, 

Thomson South-Western, 2007, ISBN: 0-324-42237-7 

ADLER, Nancy J.: International Dimensions of Organizational Behavior, 5th ed., Thomson 

South-Western, 2008, ISBN 978-0-324-36075-2 or 0-324-36075-4 

Hand-outs will be available as a download before the lecture. 


A combination of lectures, discussions, writing a bachelor thesis and coaching will be 

used. 

A presentation of their work will give students the possibility to improve their 

presentation skills, but very much give all other students the possibility to learn from 

others. 

A defence of their presentation will allow students to prove their knowledge. 

Evaluation 


Export Marketing II 


Fall 1 EMK 1,5 


To acquire and develop professional and subject-specific competences, i.e. the 

understanding of basic tools and techniques applicable in international and export 

marketing; national vs. international vs. global markets, preconditions for international 

marketing (socio-cultural specifics, political, legal and economic conditions); choice of 

attractive country markets, market selection and market entry alternatives (indirect vs. 

direct export, strategic alliances, strategic production abroad etc.), questions of ―going 

international‖ vs. ―being international‖; market exit, shrinking and breaking away 

markets; market integration. 


Introduction to Marketing (Semester 1) 

Marketing and Sales (Semester 2) 



� Global competition and strategies 

� Difference between products and services 

� Design of the international marketing mix 

� International sales channel adaptation 

� International consumer behaviour 

� Problems of intercultural management 

� Organisation of international marketing activities 

� Analysis and discussion of current trends in international marketing and sales 

� Foreign investment 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 83

Literature 

Czinkota and Rokainen. International Marketing. 6Th ed. New York: Harcourt, 2001 

Keegan and Schlegelmilch. Global Marketing Management – Aeuropean Perspective. 

Harlow (England): Prentice Hall, 2001 

Mühlbacher, Dahringer, Leihs. International Marketing – A Global Perspective. London: 

1999 


Lectures based on slides, presented by and discussed with the instructor. Moreover there 

will be group work and case studies included. 

Evaluation 

Final written exam, group work and presentation 

Foreign Trade Techniques I 


Fall 2 FTT 2 


To develop an understanding of the overall international framework within which export 

companies including their multi-domestic set-ups act when doing export business, with a 

special emphasis on commercial-, financial- and risk-related issues, and techniques and 

tools mainly focussing on export transactions. Upon completion of the course students 

will have acquired know-how in the field of export commercial framework, for instance of 

specific risk management techniques, commercial terms, contracts, insurance, export 

finance. 


� Understand and describe the possible risk types occur in international business 

� Define and identify the most important elements of contract of international sales 

including the applied documents and Incoterms 2010 

� Explain the major payment options for international business, e. g. L/C 

� Explain the major security instruments for international trade, e. g. bank 

guarantee 

� Describe and apply the major export finance instruments 

� Apply and distinguish the optimal risk mitigation options based on the identified 

risk profile of an export deal 

� Describe and compare the major components and issues for private export 

insurances and public export agencies. 

� Employ and calculate the basic instruments in export finance 


None 



� Conditions in foreign trade 

o Analysis of the framework, which operate in international business 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 84

o History and economic importance of foreign trade 

� Risks in international business 

� Contracting policy in foreign trade 

o Initiation to fulfilment 

o Basic aspects and components of export contracts 

o Application of international standards and Incoterms 2000 

o Complaint Management and Mediation 

� Tools of the trade finance 

o Documents and typical business documents 

o Factoring & Forfaiting 

o Export leasing, etc. 

� Risk Management 

o Bank Guarantees 

o Private Insurance Market 

o Overview of Export Credit Agencies 

Literature 

Czinkota and Ronkainen. International Marketing. 6th ed. New York: Harcourt, 2001 

� ―The Political & Legal Environment‖ 

� ―The Economic Environment‖ 

� ―The Financial Environment‖ 

Shapiro. Multinational Financial Management. 6th ed. New York: Wiley, 1999 

� ―Capital Budgeting for the Multinational Corporation‖ 

� ―The Measurement and Management of Political Risk‖ 

Nevitt and Fabozzi. Project Financing. 7th ed. London: Euromoney, 2000 (Pages 1-32) 

Fietz. Foreign Trade (Reference Book). 1st ed.: Krems, 2003 

Lecture hand-outs 


The contents of the course will be a combination of: 

� Lectures by the instructor 

� Self and group study sections including presentations and documentations 

� Quizzes 

Evaluation 

Group assignments, quizzes, final written exam 

International Financial Management I 


Fall 2 ITFM 2,5 



� better deal with international finance problems that are becoming increasingly 

complex and with greater uncertainty 

� better understand financial goals and corporate governance given the forces of 

globalization 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 85

� apply financial globalization principles to multinational financial management 

� understand cross-border valuation and financing 

� undertake multinational financial decision making in the central financial decisions 

concerning capital structure, risk management, and tax optimization 

� understand the multinational financial management challenges in the global credit 

crisis 

� recognize and capitalize on the unique characteristics of global markets to make 

financial decisions that increase the value of the enterprise 

� analyse and solve real world case studies by applying basic tools and techniques 

to international financial situations 

� develop skills in group dynamics 




None 


ITFM is designed for students who might be involved in global financing and investment 

decisions as financial managers, transactions advisors, investors, or analysts. The course 

will provide students with an understanding of financial management issues in a global 

setting and the analytical tools to capture stakeholder value across borders. 


� The capital market and its financing titles 

o Valuation of financial instruments (bonds, equities and derivatives) 

� Portfolio theory and modern capital market theory 

o Return, risk and the risk attitude of investors 

o Portfolio Theory 

o Capital Asset Pricing Model 

� Determination of capital costs and their application 

o The identification of relevant cost of capital 

o Optimal Capital Budget 

� International investment and financing strategies 

Literature 

Multinational Business Finance, 12th Edition, by David Eiteman, Arthur Stonehill, Michael 

Moffett 


Lecture, case studies, E-Learning 

Evaluation 

Team presentations, case studies, take-home exam, final written exam 

International Public Law and Institutions 


Fall 2 ITPL 2,5 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 86




issues of International Law and Relations; (ii) recognize many dimensions and 

interpolations of contemporary international legal, political and economic affairs; (iii) 

understand the role and limitations of main players; (iv) be sensitised enough to 

contextualize specific challenges, and suggest approaches to address these; (v) detect 

many of the essential differences and assumptions between western and non-western 

(EU, NAFTA, ASEAN) positions; (vi) appreciate the integrated and interdependent nature 

of legal institutions capacity building, especially as regards the EU institution and (legal 

order) instruments building measures. 


None 


Students will explore and review the merits and limitations of International (Public) Law 

and Law of International Organizations, fundamental teachings and principles of 

contemporary International Relations and will finally touch upon the supranational 

institution building in the post-WW II Europe. 

This is to be rather a mixture then the ‗classic‘ study – a ‗walk on the edge‘ between the 

selection and interpretation of legal and political nature of International Law. By using 

the comparative method students will examine mainstreams of modern global legal order 

(Intl. Regimes), be it public or criminal, as well as several legal species as the EU and 

Islamic Legal System (of Intl. Private Law) are. Notably: all what a business aspirant 

need to know when joining the international corporate business of nowadays. 

Literature 

Law Among Nations - An Introduction to Public International Law, G. van Glahen – J. L. 

Taulbee, Pearson Longman (VIII edition, 2007) 

An Introduction to International Law, Mark W. Janis, Little Brown 1999 (or 2003) 




The class itself blends lecturing, case analysis, in-class discussion and comments. With 

such a broad range of topics, one cannot hope to cover all aspects of every issue, 

especially not by my front lecturing. Therefore, the subject of this course invites the 

active and energetic participation of each and every student. Meetings will be most 

productive when everyone completes the assigned readings carefully and comes 


Therefore, the preparation for and participation in the class discussions is central to the 

very success of this course (and to it related the Current Affairs Briefings assignment). 

Students are expected to prepare a short analytical paper. Such a paper should be 

submitted by each respective student, and individually presented before the class (20 + 

10 min. of in-class discussion). 

Evaluation 

Current affairs briefings, study paper, oral exam 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 87

Human Resource Management II - Managerial Competence 


Fall 1 TMC 1 


This course focuses on the concepts, skills, know-how, information, attitude and 

alternatives that are relevant for managers and stakeholders. 


� Explore through research and case analysis the entrepreneurial perspective and 

factors contributing to the success or failure of entrepreneurial ventures. 

� Have gained practical experience in planning for an entrepreneurial venture by 

developing a business plan and associated documents. 

� Develop an increased degree of understanding of strategic frameworks for moving 

from theory to practice. 

� Strengthen research, analysis, forecasting, and decision-making abilities. 

� Enhance ability to view organizations as a system of inter-related functions. 

� Emphasize the importance of results that are generated from thoughtful insights 

and actions. 

� Challenge verbal, graphic, written, and electronic media communication skills. 

� Enhance interpersonal abilities by interacting as a team in an organization-like 

setting. 


Training Managerial Competence I 


Most strategic decisions, especially crucial ones, are made after consultation with key 

executives, colleagues, and stakeholders in an atmosphere of committee deliberations 

and discussion. To simulate this procedure, each student has the opportunity to select 

his/her own team. Teams of 4 to 6 will be formed. Team management is as important as 

team task accomplishment. 

Each team has to manage and analyse their own Capstone® company and has to 

develop and implement strategic concepts. The management team will make decisions 

about various aspects such as R&D, Marketing, Production and Finance of an assigned 

company's management for a given period of "simulated time". It is expected that all 

management teams meet regularly in person and electronically to analyse the strategic 

position of the company and discuss the issues, problems, etc. The results for each 

company are returned every week to the corresponding group. The game is, thus, played 

over several simulated periods to maximize the firm's objectives, achieving the firm's 

mission. 

Moreover the course will be focused on: 

� corporate culture and ethics in an international context 

� strategic HRM 

� intra-organizational relationship management 

� equality in treatment at work, including "Diversity Management" 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 88

� job description, personnel selection and development 

� performance evaluation and compensation (including non-monetary benefits) 

Literature 

Capstone® Business Simulation (login at www.capsim.com) 

Capstone® Student Guide 2008 (available as download after login) 


Various complementary approaches will be combined. 


Capstone® business simulation. 

Students will perform individually and as teams to complete the web-based simulation. 

Students will be assigned to teams, which will function throughout the exercise. 

Students examine the conceptual and practical aspects of business policies and policy 

decision making by utilizing all the concepts, theories, and tools that were presented in 

previous courses. Student should be able to analyse and recommend a comprehensive 

and workable approach to the situation. The course will cover current business issues and 

developments. 

In regular intervals review meetings between each team and the lecturer are held to 

discuss students‘ approaches, decisions and results. 

Evaluation 

Individual completion of first assignment, individual essay assignments, individual peer 

evaluation, performance of the company, team presentation 

Arabic IV 


Fall 2 ARA 3 


After a review of grammar and vocabulary of the previous semesters the students‘ 

knowledge in grammatical items and vocabulary will be deepened and increased. 

The main focus in this semester will be laid on conversation and comprehension as well 

as on working with texts to train fluent reading and using the dictionary. 

Students should be able to use the ten roots in the Arabic language in sentences. 


� Know the most important grammar items of the Arabic language and useful 

vocabulary 

� Be able to hold dialogues and talk about some specific matters in economic, 

political affairs etc. 

� Read by using the dictionary and write simple letters and small comprehensions 

referring to topics that were taught. 


Arabic I, II and III 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 89


The lessons:' to see the doctor I',' to see the doctor II‘, ‗at the police-station‘, ‗how to 

read an Arabic newspaper‘. 

Students will learn active and passive participles, verbal nouns, how to use modal verbs 

in present and past tense, they will repeat the radical-system of the verbs (the roots in 

the Arabic language - roots 1-10) and hear more about irregular forms (assimilated 

forms etc.), conjunctions, negation forms. 

The main topics of the course will include the following: 

� Improving reading 

� Training of basic grammar items 

� Syntactic structures 

� Adjectives and their negation 

� Negation of verbs in all tenses 

� Particles and conjunctions 

� Basic vocabulary for administration and tourism 

Literature 



Through drills in conversation and games, students should get practical routine in the 

active use of the Arabic language. 

Students‘ interest will be maintained by providing up-to-date information of current 

events through newspapers and magazines and at the same time introducing them to 

Arabic culture. 

Evaluation 

Mid-term exam (oral), final written exam and homework 

Chinese IV 


Fall 2 CHI 3 


Due to the complexity of Chinese writing and language, the competence objective of the 

Chinese course during the bachelor study cycle is the language competence of a basic 

user (A2) in adherence with the European Common Framework of References for 

Languages. 

Upon the successful completion of the semester students will: 




� have improved his / her pronunciation by working with the sound files of the 

textbook used in class 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 90

� will be able to use online resources such as dictionaries and transliteration tools 

(Characters to Pinyin) to facilitate reading and writing Chinese texts. 

� have improved skills in writing Pinyin through typing Chinese characters on a 

computer have an insight of the listening and reading part of the Chinese 

Proficiency Test HSK, which consists of 6 levels. 


Chinese I, II and III 



and interactive approach which emphasizes the strong relation between language and 

culture. 

For the written aspects of Chinese students will use online resources such as dictionaries 

and transliteration tools (Characters to Pinyin) to facilitate reading and writing Chinese 

texts. 

Students will work on lesson 18 - 22 in the textbook ―New Practical Chinese Reader 2‖ 

(Textbook and Workbook), accompanied by additional selected materials that will also 

form the basis of Midterm and Final Exam. Focus is laid upon training perceptive skills 

with listening and productive skills by training typical dialogues on a range of everyday 

topics. 

Thematic areas include: 

� at the post office, taking a bus, at the custom office, comparing things (lesson 

18); 

� hobbies, at the art gallery – Chinese painting, (lesson 19); 

� Chinese New Year (review lesson 20); 

� sports, directions and locations (lesson 21); 

� Chinese opera, commenting on past experience, to make an appointment with 

somebody, expressing opinion on various topics (lesson 22) 


semester, such as: 

� the so called „resultative complement― (such as „to have understood by listening, 

understood acoustically vs. understood by reading); 

� the so called „ba―-constructions which puts objects in front of the verb (lesson 

18); 

� time-measure complement - expressing the duration of an action (how long have 

you been studying xy), to compare things (same as… bigger as… not as big as) 

(lesson 19); 

� the so called „shi-de― construction to emphasize time and location of past events, 

sentences and verbs to express existence (lesson 21); 

� aspect particle „guo― to express past experience, action-measure complement to 

express the frequency of an action, contradictory statement (although) (Lesson 

22) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 91

Literature 

Zhao Jinming, Chinese Conversation for Foreigners (vol. 1 and 2) 

Additional material will be distributed by the instructor and/or is to be downloaded from 

the e-learning platform. 


The teaching concept applied in this course is formed by the principles of the 

Communicative Approach. The study material will be presented and acquired in various 

ways: explanations by the teacher; analytical work with the texts; teacher-student 

interaction; individual work; role-plays. 

Evaluation 

Written and oral exams, quizzes 

French IV 


Fall 2 FRE 3 


Students shall get a basic insight into the world of companies and 

its relevant terminology. Upon completion of the course, students can understand 

company related texts, make a professional company presentation and analysis of a 

company using various authentic documents and data. They are furthermore able to 

apply the relevant terminology in situations of business life and can also characterise a 

successful entrepreneur and focus on the development of a company. In addition, they 

can cope with intercultural aspects: France and its economy are understood and 

appreciated in terms of cultural differences. 


French I, II + III 


The course will deal with the various aspects of a company thus introducing the students 

to Business French (Le français des affaires). Topics to be dealt with will be: company 

forms, how to found a company, the role of a company, legal and financial aspects, 

profile of the ideal ―entrepreneur‖ etc. 

Students should also analyse common cultural patterns that characterise the daily 

routine in France and largely contribute to successful economic relations with this 

country. 

Newspaper articles will complement the topics. Selected grammar items will be revised. 

Literature 

Le Truc Français 5 (script –to be distributed during the first meeting) 

Le point sur la grammaire (script semester 1-3) 

Dictionary (English – French/French- English) 


The three basic linguistic competences – listening/understanding, speaking and writing - 

shall be trained. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 92

The course will be based on interactive teaching: through common brainstorming on the 

specific topics, discussions, group work and presentations, the students will be 

encouraged to express themselves as often as possible and thus improve their oral 

language skills. 

The revised grammar items shall be implemented into the students‘ work. 

The students will make a company presentation. Furthermore, students will take part in 

group work to evaluate a company. 

Evaluation 

Written test, oral exam, group work, company presentation 

Russian IV 


Fall 2 RUS 3 


After this course students will be able to present a company, talk about their working 

experience / internship, help their Russian guest / business partner in Vienna (making 

appointments, showing him/her round Vienna etc.), talk about their educational career 

and write a CV. 


Russian I, II and III 


A Russian course for beginners at intermediate level aims at teaching basic Russian in a 

communicative way, including numerous dialogues, listening and reading comprehension, 

but also provides the grammar necessary for further intensive studies. Written work is 

intended to consolidate oral skills and facilitate correct use of Russian. The course also 

includes information on Russian culture and civilization to facilitate better understanding 

of Russian life and institutions and guidelines to presentations skills. 


� personal pronouns 

� time specification 

� genitive case 

� modal verbs nado / nuzhno, dolzhen, nuzhen 

� business meeting 

� conversation in a restaurant 

� appointments 

� socialization 

� future plans 

Literature 

Continuing using: Golosa Book 1, 4th ed. Textbook (Robin, Evans-Romaine, Shatalina, 

Robin): ISBN 0-13-198628-7 

Photocopies which students will be provided with 


Verlag 1996. ISBN 3-19-004467-8 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 93









Evaluation 

Regular vocabulary/grammar tests, regular homework, mid-term test, final test (written 

and oral) 

Spanish IV 


Fall 2 SPA 3 


The students participating in this course will be enabled to: 

� Acquires the language competences of Independent User (B1) according to the 

Common European Framework of References for Languages 

� Written production: the students can write clear detailed texts on a variety of 

economic subjects concerning the field of companies, synthesizing and evaluating 

information and arguments from a number of sources. 

� Listening A: the students can understand the information content of the majority 

of recorded or broadcast audio and audio-visual material on topics of economic or 

personal interest delivered in clear standard speech. 

� Listening B: the students can understand straightforward factual information 

about common everyday or job related topics. 

� Reading: the students can read straightforward factual texts on subjects related 

to economic matters with a satisfactory level of comprehension. 

� Spoken interaction: the students can communicate with some confidents on 

familiar routine and non-routine matters related to their interest and professional 

field. They can exchange, check and confirm information, deal with less routine 

situations and explain why something is a problem. They are able to express 

thoughts and opinions on more abstract questions. 

� Continuous speaking: the students can develop a speech about a certain economic 

matter well enough to be followed without difficulty most of the time. 

� Intercultural awareness: the students know the most important conventions 

concerning the body language and social behaviour of the Spanish speaking world. 

They acquire knowledge, awareness and understanding of the relation (similarities 

and distinctive differences) between the ‗world of origin‘ and the ‗world of the 

target community‘. 


Spanish I, II and III 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 94


The semester will treat the subjects: basics of economy, companies and their history, 

(legal) structures and products, banking, business trips and fairs. Oral presentations and 

written texts will be used to improve the ability of speaking, reading, understanding as 

well as the report of ideas from English into Spanish. 


� The company and its legal forms 

� corporate foundation 

� economic sectors and industries 

� text capture, text comments 

� presentations of companies 

Literature 

Martínez, L.; Sabater, M. L.: Socios 2 – Curso de español orientado al mundo del trabajo. 

Libro del alumno (Nueva edición). Difusión (2008) 

Corpas, J.; Martínez, L.; Sabater, M. L.: Socios 2 – Curso de español orientado al mundo 

del trabajo. Cuaderno de ejercicios (Nueva edición). Difusión (2008) 


Students will be encouraged by a communicative approach to express themselves 

concerning the treated subjects. Therefore videos and authentic texts will be used. 

Grammar structures will not only be trained with structured exercises but although by 

examples of open learning. 

With regard to tasks as vehicles for planning, carrying out and reporting on language 

learning and teaching, the didactic elements are: 

� Types of task, e.g. simulations, role-play, classroom interaction etc; 

� Goals, e.g. the group-based learning goals in relation to the differing, less 

predictable goals of participants; 

� Outcomes: General and economic texts, summaries, tables, presentations, etc. 

� Input: instructions, materials such as newspaper articles, internet resources, etc. 

� Activities: group/pair and individual activities, processes: receptive and 

productive. 

Evaluation 

Written and oral exams, presentation, assignments 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 95


Training Intercultural Competence 


Spring 2 TIC 1,5 


The world of organizations is no longer defined by national boundaries. The objective of 

this course therefore is to break down the conceptual, theoretical, and practical 

boundaries that limit our ability to understand and work with people in countries and 

cultures around the world. 


� Understand what makes a Multinational Manager of the ―next generation‖. 

� Discuss culture, the levels of culture and the differences between national and 

business culture. 

� Explain how cultural differences affect organizations. 

� Describe ―Hofstede‘s Model of National Culture‖, the ―7d Cultural Dimensions 

Model‖ as well as ―GLOBE‖. 

� Discuss how social institutions influence both people and organizations. 

� Be aware of differences in communication across cultures. 

� Understand how to leverage cultural diversity by creating cultural synergy, 

managing multicultural teams, and negotiate globally. 

� Explain how to manage cross-cultural transitions 

� Understand the importance of planning a negotiation process 

� Develop the ability to execute the planning process in a structured way 

� Engage in mock negotiations to understand how the issues may emerge once the 

bargaining has begun in earnest 

� Understand how differing values and expectations may influence the negotiation 

process. 

� Identify one‘s own strength and weaknesses as a negotiator as well as those of 

counterparts. 


None 


The course will lead students through the following topics and will provide students with 

a better understanding on International Dimensions of Organisational Behaviour: 

� The Impact of Culture on Organisations 

� Leveraging Cultural Diversity 

� Managing Global Managers 

By using Inspire©, a web-based negotiation support system the course has an 

international dimension, since the system links ―players‖ from around the world. This 

reflects the current reality of economic organizations. Through Inspire users can study 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 96

and practice international negotiation involving people from diverse cultures to help 

understand how differing values and expectations may influence the negotiation process. 

The course will be focused on the following topics: 

� impact of culture on organizations and their management 

� cross-cultural communication 

� creating cultural synergy 

� management of multicultural teams (including motivation, decision making and 

career planning) 

� leadership and negotiation strategies in the international environment. 

Literature 

Lecture presentations are available in advance on the eDesktop. 

For the e-negotiation process there will be online course materials made available 

(www.interneg.org - a log in will be provided) 

ADLER, Nancy J.: International Dimensions of Organizational Behavior, 5th ed., Thomson 

South-Western, 2008, ISBN 978-0-324-36075-2 or 0-324-36075-4 



subjects of the respective sessions. Students should feel free to ask questions at any 

time. Case Studies will be discussed during meetings to provide students with practical 

insights. Using Inspire©, a web-based e-negotiation support system, students will be 

able to practice and sharpen their bargaining skills. After completion of the negotiation 

process students will work in teams to discuss their experiences and learn by reflecting 

their own and their colleagues‘ experiences. 

Evaluation 

Final written exam, individual written assignment 

International Financial Management II 


Spring 2 ITFM 3 



� better deal with international finance problems that are becoming increasingly 

complex and with greater uncertainty 

� better understand financial goals and corporate governance given the forces of 

globalization 

� apply financial globalization principles to multinational financial management 

� understand cross-border valuation and financing 

� undertake multinational financial decision making in the central financial decisions 

concerning capital structure, risk management, and tax optimization 

� understand the multinational financial management challenges in the global credit 

crisis 

� recognize and capitalize on the unique characteristics of global markets to make 

financial decisions that increase the value of the enterprise 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 97

� analyse and solve real world case studies by applying basic tools and techniques 

to international financial situations 

� develop skills in group dynamics 




International Financial Management I 


ITFM is designed for students who might be involved in global financing and investment 

decisions as financial managers, transactions advisors, investors, or analysts. The course 

will provide students with an understanding of financial management issues in a global 

setting and the analytical tools to capture stakeholder value across borders. 


� institutions in the financial market (banks, central bank, etc.) 

� deepening of financial instruments (with a focus on derivative products) 

� trade finance and foreign investment 

� management of "Operating Exposure", "Transaction Exposure" and "Accounts 

Exposure" 

� business valuations and mergers and acquisitions, including leveraged buy-out 

� assessment of relevant indicators external analysis 

Literature 

Multinational Business Finance, 12th Edition, by David Eiteman, Arthur Stonehill, Michael 

Moffett 


Face to face sessions will be supplemented by a self-directed e-Learning session, which 

will replace 8 contact hours. The completion of the e-learning part of the lecture is 

compulsory and forms an integral part of the course. Students are required to 

individually solve the self-study examples provided and prepare a group assignment. 

Self-directed learning time will give students the opportunity to deepen and practice the 

skills acquired in class. Core issues of e-learning sessions will be an integral part of the 

final exam. 

Evaluation 

Team presentations, case studies, take-home exam, final written exam 

International Strategies of Sustainable Development 


Spring 2 ISR 3 


This course of field trip as principal seats/HQs of relevant international organizations 

combines the lessons of Economic Areas, International Law and Finances. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 98

Upon successful closure of the course/trip, it should give business aspirants a 

multidimensional perspective on the current economic trends and their roots as well as 

on the forthcoming economic policies and possible practices (including the new trends 

towards the linking economic, political, social and environmental coherence). 

It is to make students understanding the interdependent and often complex aspects of 

power; culture; economics; (social engineering of) institutions; environment and 

resources, rights and capabilities; international, supranational, national and sub-national 

actors; possibilities and constraints of participatory techniques and competing 

frameworks of strategic change, primarily within Europe. 

Eventually, it is to make students, already by now, the intelligent consumers, diligent 

thinkers and active players of any ongoing or forthcoming strategic change, which per se, 

requires the buildup of strong partnership between government, business, research 

community, labor and civil society. 

After completing the course, students will be able to: 

� explain and discuss features of sustainable development 

� illustrate the relations between government, business, research community, labor 

and civil society 

� analyze and scrutinize development strategies 

� consider resource availability and deployment in their decisions. 


International Law and Institutions (Semester 5) 

Economic Areas (Semester 2, 3 and 5) 


Students will review the main economic trends by topics and areas (EU, NAFTA, ASEAN, 

and other relevant regions such as MERCOSUR) addressing the fundamental questions of 

concern to the economic inter-relations and interactions (such as resources, production, 

technology, trade, investments, corporate governance, social development, role of state 

and IOs and good governance – governance tools, environmental concerns, energy and 

sustainability). Arguments presented by economists will be examined (round-de-table 

manner). Students will practically visit relevant international FORAs and meet 

professionals and internationals of different cultural and professional backgrounds trying 

to learn from, discuss and exchange views with them. 

Literature 

A Concise Economic History of the World (3rd or 4th revised Edition) Rondo 

Cameron; Oxford University Press (first published 1989) 

I. Serageldin, A. S. Younis; WB 1996 

Economy, Ecology and Spirituality: Towards a Theory & Practice of Sustainability, 

Advancing Sustainable Development: The World Bank and Agenda 21 


This course is a research colloquium by which students, through their presentations, will 

work towards the final integrated Report. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 99

Besides the front lecturing on Environmental Ethics, the Lecturer will provide students 

with basic (comprehensive but well-systematized and simplified) information to 

familiarize them with the very subject of SD Colloquium (to it relevant materials/readings 

will be either dispatched or indicated for self-search, including the short intro front 

lecturing). 

Students are expected to prepare a short analytical Assessment report against the FF 

Mission. Such an assessment and to it Basic Paper should be made by each respective 

student, and individually presented before the class. 

Additionally, two meetings will be organized as mini-Workshops to which the students will 

contribute by conducting their respective Group Assignments – so-called State of Planet 

assignments. 

Evaluation 

Current Economic affairs briefings, other topical discussions, Basic Paper (Assessment 

Report), workshop – group assignment. 

Foreign Trade Techniques II 


Spring 1 FTT 3 


Upon successful completion of the module students will be able to: 

� Understand and describe the possible risk types occur in project finance and 

structured finance. 

� Define and explain the key player and concepts of project finance. 

� Understand and describe the ECA (OeKB) export instruments. 

� Describe and compare the major components and issues for export finance 

instruments. 

� Identify and decide for the proper instruments offered by ECA (OeKB) to support 

export opportunities. 

� Employ and calculate the basic instruments of project finance. 


Foreign Trade Techniques I 



� Module 1: Export (Re-)financing by public institutions and ECAs (OeKB) 

o Export re-financing instruments for SMEs and large enterprises 

o Export re-financing instruments for developing countries (soft loans) 

� Module 2: Introduction to the Theory and Practice of Project Finance 

o Definition and the theory of project finance 

o Roles and sponsors in project finance 

o Project characteristics and the most common contracts 

o Risk analysis and risk management 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 100

� Module 3: Export instruments of ECA (OeKB) – supported by OeKB experts 

o Export Guarantees 

o Rescheduling (Paris Club) 

o Project finance 

o Export financing 

� Module 4: Export instruments – supported by Raiffeisen Bank International expert 

o Commodity and structured trade finance 

o Project finance 

Literature 

All lecturer notes provided by instructor and by guest lecturers. All documents will be 

provided on the IMC eDesktop. 

Vinter. Project Finance – A Legal Guide. 2nd ed. London: Sweet & Maxwell, 1998 

Chapters 1 (incl. introduction); 4; 5 (only 5.1.); 8 (only 8.1. and 8.2.) 

Nevitt and Fabozzi. Project Financing. 7th ed. London: Euromoney, 2000 Pages 1-32 

Fietz. Foreign Trade (Reference Book). 1st ed.: Krems, 2003 


The contents of the course will be a combination of: 

� Lectures by the instructor 

� Guest lecture and excursion to OeKB 

� Guest lecture of Raiffeisen Bank International experts at IMC 

Evaluation 

Quizzes, final written exam 

Revision Course I (International Management and Business) 


Spring 1 BASE 8 


THIS COURSE IS DESIGNED FOR REGULAR STUDENTS AS A REVISION OF THE COURSES 

OFFERED IN THE BACHELOR PROGRAMME AND PREPARATION FOR THE BACHELOR 

EXAMINATIONS ACCORDING TO SELECTED SPECIALIZATIONS. 

As this course is a revision course for the chair ―International Management and Business‖ 

students attending the course ―Bachelor Seminar I‖ during the previous semester can 

take the opportunity to join this course on their own will. If attending they are obliged to 

participate in the group work. These students who choose to attend should get in contact 

with the lecturer to be given a guest ticket in order to be able to access all information 

provided on the eDesktop. 


� Understand and explain principles of Finance, Marketing, Foreign Trade 

Techniques and Logistics in international context. 

� Illustrate approaches to approach, structure and analyse tasks and problems in an 

applied IMB-setting, as well as develop basic strategies to address and solve tasks 

and problems based on models and theories covered in the IMB-related courses. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 101

� Understand and discuss the challenges and complexity involved in international 

business activities in order to address the bigger picture, explain the relations in 

between the different subjects and departments and adjust the solution to given 

problems to both micro- and macro environment. 

The main objective of this course is to support students to prepare the information 

needed for attending the bachelor exam in the chair ―International Management and 

Business‖ 


Foreign Trade Techniques (Semester 3, 5 and 6) 

Export Marketing (Semester 5 and 6) 

International Financial Management (Semester 5 and 6) 


Students will be required to work in groups on assigned chapters of the required readings 

and develop within the team a presentation regarding their opinion of main concepts in 

each of the chapters and their relationship to other topics. 

The meetings will be utilized for students to present their summaries and to discuss and 

highlight relevant issues based on the chair specific focus. 

The course will be focused on the following aspects: 

� Design and implementation of the Bachelor Thesis II, including project planning 

� Thematic literature search 

� Application form and content rules 

� Presentation 

Literature 

Mühlbacher, Dahringer, Leihs. International Marketing – A Global Perspective. 

Brigham, E.F., Ehrhardt, M.C. (2008). Financial Management Theory and Practice. 

Cincinnati: South-Western. 

Madura, J., Fox, R. (2007). International Financial Management. London: Thomson 

Learning. 

Shapiro, A.C. (2006). Multinational Financial Management. New York: Wiley. 

Bowersox, D.J., Closs, D.J., Cooper, M.B. (2009). Supply Chain Logistics Management. 

McGraw Hill. 

Czinkota, M.R., Ronkainen, I.A. (2009). International Marketing. New York: South- 

Western. 

Keegan, W.G., Schlegelmilch, B. (2001). Global Marketing Management – A European 

Perspective. Harlow: Prentice Hall. 

ICC Commission on Banking Technique and Practice (2007). Uniform Customs and 

Practice for Documentary Credits (UCP 600). Paris: International Chamber of Commerce. 


Students will actively work on the various topics, find and select sources of information, 

learn what to focus on, understand how to summarize the key points related to the main 

concepts. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 102

Evaluation 

Case project(s) 100% 

Revision course II (Chair 2: Human Resource and Intercultural 

Management) 







The main objective of this course is to support students to prepare the information 

needed for attending the bachelor exam in the chair ―Human Resource Management / 

Intercultural Management‖ 


� Understand and explain principles of Organization Theory. 

� Understand and link concepts of Human Resource Management to principles of 

Organizational Behaviour and Organization Theory. 

� Explain the main approaches to Human Resource Management. 

� Illustrate approaches to Intercultural Management as well as linking these to 

principles of OB, Organization Theory, and HRM. 

� Understand and discuss the new management ideas whilst retaining the best of 

traditional management thinking and relate them to OB, Organizational Theory, 

and HR. 

As this course is a revision course for the chair ―Human Resource Management / 

Intercultural Management‖ students attending the course ―Bachelor Seminar I‖ during 

the previous semester can take the opportunity to join this course on their own will. If 

attending they are obliged to participate in the group work. These students who choose 

to attend should get in contact with the lecturer to be given a guest ticket in order to be 

able to access all information provided on the eDesktop. 


Human Resource Management I – Organizational Behaviour (Semester 2) 

Human Resource Management II – Managerial Competence (Semester 5) 

Project and Process Management (Semester 3) 

International Management Methods (Semester 3) 

Management Simulation (Semester 3) 

Bachelor Seminar I (Semester 5) 

Training Intercultural Competence (Semester 6) 


Students will be required to work in groups on assigned chapters of the required readings 

and develop within the team a presentation regarding their opinion of main concepts in 

each of the chapters and their relationship to other topics. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 103

The meetings will be utilized for students to present their summaries and to discuss and 

highlight relevant issues based on the chair specific focus. 

The course will be focused on the following aspects: 

� Design and implementation of the Bachelor Thesis II, including project planning 

� Thematic literature search 

� Application form and content rules 

� Presentation 

Literature 

Slocum, John W, and Hellriegel, Don, Principles of Organizational Behavior, 12th ed., 

South-Western Cengage Learning, 2009 

� Chapters 2 – 8, 12, 13, 15, and 16 (pages: app. 250) 

Daft, Richard, Understanding the Theory and Design of Organizations, (9th ed), 

International Students Edition, Thomson South-Western, 2007 

� Chapters 4, 5, 6, 11 and 13 (pages: app. 150) 

Snell, Scott, and Bohlander, George, Principles of Human Resource Management, (15th 

ed.) International Edition, South-Western Cengage Learning, 2010 

� Chapters 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 15, and 16 (pages: app. 350) 

Daft Richard L., and Marcic Dorothy: Management: The New Workplace, Thomson South- 

Western, 2007 

� Chapters 1, 4, 5, 6, and 10 (pages: app. 170) 

Adler, Nancy J., International Dimensions of Organizational Behavior, (5th ed) Thomson 

South Western, 2008, plus slides from lectures 

� Chapters 1 to 7 (pages: app. 130) 


Students will actively work on the various topics, learn what to focus on, understand how 

to summarize the key points related to the main concepts.  

Evaluation 


Revision course II (Chair 3: International Law and Global Political 

Studies) 







The prime target of the ISP course is to serve as a preparatory for the Bachelor‘s Exam. 

Beyond that main academic target, upon successful closure of the course, lays the 

practical applicability; graduates with a wide variety of specific interests should be able 

to: (i) articulate a well-synthesized but comprehensive view; (ii) compare and contrast 

many dimensions and interpolations of contemporary political, economic and legal affairs 

by classifying their features and analysing static and dynamic elements of those; (iii) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 104

understand the role and limitations the law and legality plays; (iv) be sensitized enough 

to contextualize specific legal challenges in their professional environment, and suggest 

approaches to address these; (v) appreciate the integrated and interdependent nature of 

development, market, growth, institution/capacity building and governance. 


International Private Law (Semester 3) 

International Public Law and Institutions (Semester 5) 

International Strategies and Relations (Semester 6) 


Students will explore and review the merits and limitations of a variety of judicial 

institutes, be it of Private/Business, EU or International Law. Additionally, students will 

devote due time to the (reformed) EU Institutions. 


selection and interpretation of all the ILAW & GPS- related courses students have 

attended since the first semester. Therefore, our ISP course is to be a middle ground 

between further learning and repeating the already acquired, notably: all what a business 

aspirant needs to know (or better to say: shouldn‘t forget) when joining the international 

corporate business of nowadays. 

Literature 

Emerson, Robert W. and Hardwicke, John W. Business Law Barron‘s Business Review 

Series (3rd or 4th edition) 

Janis, Mark W. An Introduction to International Law ASPEN Publishers, 4th Edition 2003 


With this broad a range of topics, one cannot hope to cover all aspects of every issue, 

especially not by the front lecturing. Therefore, the subject of this course invites the 

active and energetic participation of all students. Sometimes, the lecturer will not lecture 

but may present relatively short open comments to focus the discussion. Those 

discussions will be most productive when everyone completes the assigned readings 

carefully (as beforehand indicated in the ILAW Diploma Literature List) and comes 


Evaluation 

Passing the Bachelor seminar implies active participation in the seminar as well as a 

positive assessment of the Bachelor‘s paper. 

Arabic V 


Spring 2 ARA 3 


The students should have good knowledge of the most important grammar items of the 

Arabic language and of useful vocabulary. They should be able to hold dialogues to make 

conversation as well as talking about some specific matters in economic and political 

affairs etc. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 105

The students should also be able to read by themselves using the dictionary and write 

simple letters and small comprehensions referring to topics they were taught at. The 

main focus should be on drills for speaking and reading. 


Arabic I, II, III and IV 


During this semester students should improve their reading, especially by working with 

Arabic newspapers. Some lessons from Al-Kitab Al-Asasi will cover the following topics: 

‗the family‘, ‗in the street‘, ‗at the post-office‘, ‗how to send a telegraph‘, ‗how to make a 

phone-call‘, ‗telling the time‘, ‗at the market‘. 

The course will continue to train the learners in basic grammar items as syntactic 

structures, adjectives and negation of adjectives, negation of all tenses, particles and 

conjunctions. 

Additionally also topics about administration and tourism are being introduced. Students 

will get basic vocabulary for these topics and be trained to make advanced conversation 

as well as get knowledge in ‗newspaper-Arabic‘. Special texts will be chosen to work with 

from newspapers, magazines or reports. 

Literature 



Students should learn how to work and develop their language by themselves after 

having finished the Arabic course. There should be taken care of the individual need of 

each student, for example one‘s difficulties in pronunciation. 

Each student has to write a paper about a specific topic (economics) and then hold a ten 

minute speech in front of the others and be able to answer questions about her/his topic. 

There will be special drills in oral translations and in making summaries of stories or 

articles the students listened to or read. 

Evaluation 


Chinese V 


Spring 2 CHI 3 


Due to the complexity of Chinese writing and language, the competence objective of the 

Chinese course during the bachelor study cycle is the language competence of a basic 

user (A2) in adherence with the European Common Framework of References for 

Languages. 

Upon the successful completion of the semester students will achieve: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 106

� Enhancement of speaking and writing skills - ability to communicate in more 

standard situations which will be of relevance for further (professional) encounter 

with China. 

� Mastering a first short presentation in Chinese about a chosen topic related to 

China. 

� Further knowledge of the use of Chinese (online) sources when preparing short 



Chinese I, II, III and IV 


Students will continue with the textbook ―New Practical Chinese Reader 2‖ (Textbook and 

Workbook), lesson 23-25, accompanied by additional selected materials that will also 

form the basis of Midterm and Final Exam. Focus is laid upon the training of perceptive 

skills with listening exercises and productive skills by training typical dialogues on a 

range of everyday topics. 

Thematic areas include: 

� Plans, suggestions, weather, buying tickets, restaurant (lesson 23) 

� Talking about action in progress, about changes, living conditions (lesson 24) 

� Incidents, visiting a patient, making complaints (lesson 25) 

Literature 

New Practical Chinese Reader, Textbook Vol. 2; ISBN-10: 7561910401; ISBN-13: 978- 

7561910405 

New Practical Chinese Reader: Workbook Vol. 2; ISBN-10: 7561910428; ISBN-13: 978- 

7561910429 


Culture University. 2002, Vol 1 and 2. 

A Chinese-English / English-Chinese dictionary 






aspects of Chinese culture. 

Another important aim of the course is to teach methods for reading Chinese texts. 

Students will get familiar with online resources such as dictionaries, transliteration tools 

(characters to Pinyin) which will help them to work on their language skills also after 

completion of the course. 

Evaluation 

Final exam, mid-term exam, presentation (hand out and oral presentation) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 107

French V 


Spring 2 FRE 3 


Upon completion of this course the students will have acquired the following 

competences: they can characterize important elements of international trade and 

compare Austrian and French exports; they do case studies, become familiar with various 

techniques in export and are able to define Incoterms. Moreover, they can analyse 

French organisations which have specialized in export. They can also deal with marketing 

strategies and are able to discuss controversial economic topics by giving presentations. 

Grammar skills will be revised. 


French I, II, III and IV 


The course is concerned with characteristics and techniques in export and also 

concentrates on marketing strategies and French organisations (such as COFACE or 

SOPEXA). In this context students should get an overview of structures and systems that 

mark work on a personal and more general, political level. They will study specialized 

language and express themselves in specific situations demanding many elements of 

business French. They will also focus on structures that help them to present the various 

details of controversial subjects (presenting pros and cons of topics and drawing effective 

conclusions). All in all, students should get a precise picture illustrating the fascinating 

world of export made in France. 

Oral communication forms will be emphasised (for example in comments on texts). 


� Marketing 

� Negotiations and reasoning techniques 

� International trade instruments / methods 

� International trade organizations 

� France - an export-oriented country 

Literature 

Script: Manual for French-Semester 6 


Students will be encouraged to express themselves on the treated subjects. Dialogues 

(taped), videos and texts will introduce the topics thus demanding the students to 

understand and react. Various exercises will lead to a better understanding of the topics, 

the correct use of the relevant terminology and develop the language competence both 

orally and in writing. 

Evaluation 

Written test, oral exam, speech (intervention), group work 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 108

Russian V 


Spring 2 RUS 3 


After this course students will be able to handle basic business correspondence in written 

form, to present their company, talk about their jobs, their plans for the future, talk 

about their educational career and write a CV. Furthermore, students will learn how to 

read, summarize and comment on authentic Russian texts related to economics. 


Russian I, II, III and IV 


A Russian course at intermediate level aims at teaching basic Russian in a communicative 

way, including numerous dialogues, listening and reading comprehensions, but also 




Russian life and institutions and guidelines to presentation skills. 


� short forms of adjectives 

� irregular verbs 

� autobiography 

� presentation of a company 

� simple business correspondence 

� reading, summarizing and discussing texts about economic, education and career 

Literature 

Students will be provided with copies from: 

Harald Loos, ―Бизнес. Lehrbuch der russischen Sprache für die Wirtschaft―. 1998 E. 

Weber Verlag GmbH. ISBN 3-85253-301-1 







The course also contains some basic business situations. 

Evaluation 

Regular homework, regular vocabulary/grammar tests, final exam (written + oral) 

Spanish V 


Spring 2 SPA 3 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 109


Parting from the (very) different levels of language knowledge and practice the students 

have after their working and/or exchange experiences and concerning the different 

language competences, such as speaking, writing, reading, listening and intercultural 

competences, the students will be enabled to: 


economic subjects concerning the field of companies, synthesizing and evaluating 

information and arguments from a number of sources. 


of recorded or broadcast audio and audio-visual material on topics of economic or 

personal interest delivered in clear standard speech. 


about common everyday or job related topics. 


to economic matters with a satisfactory level of comprehension. 

� Spoken interaction: the students can communicate with some confidence on 

familiar routine and non-routine matters related to their interest and professional 

field. They can exchange, check and confirm information, deal with less routine 

situations and explain why something is a problem. They are able to express 

thoughts and opinions on more abstract questions. 


matter well enough to be followed without difficulty most of the time. 


concerning the body language and social behaviour of the Spanish speaking world. 

They acquire knowledge, awareness and understanding of the relation (similarities 

and distinctive differences) between the "world of origin" and the "world of the 

target community". 


Spanish I, II, III and IV 


The semester will treat the subjects: 

� trade fairs 

� banking 

� marketing 

� correspondence 

� trade agreements concerning the Spanish-speaking world 

� commerce: exporting to Latin America and Spain 

� intercultural aspects in negotiations with Spanish-speaking business partners 

� advertising campaigns 

� business projects and business plans 

� summaries of Spanish, English and German texts in Spanish 

Oral presentations and written texts will be used to improve the ability of speaking, 

reading, understanding as well as the report of ideas from English into Spanish. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 110

Literature 


Libro del alumno (Nueva edición). Difusión (2008). 


del trabajo. Cuaderno de ejercicios (Nueva edición). Difusión (2008). 



concerning the treated subjects. Therefore videos, tapes and authentic texts will be used. 

Grammar structures will not only be trained with structured exercises but also by 

examples of open learning. 




� Activities: group/pair and individual activities 

� Processes: receptive and productive. 


Evaluation 

Written and oral exams, presentation, assignments 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 111

EXPORT-ORIENTED MANAGEMENT – Master 

Programme 


Advanced Foreign Trade Techniques (FT+PT) 


Fall 1 AFTT 3 


After successful completion of this course students will have a thorough understanding of 

foreign trade techniques with the ability to: 

� Assess and distinguish the different risks inherent in foreign trade 

� Know the characteristics and application of each instrument available to mitigate 

these risks 

� Understand the rights and obligations of each party to an instrument/risk 

mitigation tool 

Prerequisites/Level 

Completed BA studies 


To develop an understanding of the overall international framework within which export 

companies including their multi-domestic set-ups act when doing export business, with a 

special emphasis on commercial-, financial- and risk-related issues, techniques and tools. 

Upon completion of the course students will have acquired know-how on topics focusing 

on International Financing, Insurance, Commercial Contracts and specific risk 

management techniques. 

The course will be combining theoretical and practical/applied knowledge and be strongly 

driven by discussion and examples. The content will be split in modules corresponding 

the session planning. 

The main topics will include: 

� Quotas and quota management, sanctions and safety regulations 

� Dual-use products 

� Customs law 

� Risk management in foreign trade 

� Business documents 

� Basic aspects and components of export contracts 

� Typical documents 

� Letter of credit, bank guarantees, hedging of exchange rate fluctuations (e.g. 

forward contract) 

� Incoterms 2000, UCP 500, etc. 

Literature 

Material prepared by the lecturer 

Fietz, E. (2003). Foreign Trade (Reference Book). IMC Fachhochschule Krems. 

ICC Commission on Banking Technique and Practice (2007). Uniform Customs and 

Practice for Documentary 

Baker, W.A. (2008). Users' Handbook for Documentary Credits under UCP 600. 

International Chamber of Commerce (ICC). ISBN-10: 9284200431, ISBN-13: 978- 

9284200436. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 112

Cook, T.A., Alston, R. & Raia, K. (2004). Mastering Import & Export Management. 

Amacom. ISBN-10: 0814472036, ISBN-13: 978-0814472033. 


This course will be combining theoretical and practical aspects of foreign trade. It will be 

taught in an interactive manner fostering discussions and performing small case studies. 

Evaluation 

Case study and final written examination 

International Finance, Investment and Budgeting (FT+PT) 


Fall 2 IFIB 3 


After successful completion of this course students will: 

� Be familiar with financial ratios. 

� Understand how financial ratio systems work. 

� Know how to perform a financial analysis of a company. 

� Be able to prepare a financial budget and plan. 

� Be able to apply different company valuation methods. 

� Know how to apply advanced methods used to evaluate investments. 

� Be familiar with different advanced financial strategies and investment 

decisions. 




Students will learn how international financial markets function and what role and 

influence the various participants have in these markets. Students will also focus on how 

to make investment decisions applying advanced capital budgeting techniques. Financial 

budgeting methods will be introduced. Students will apply all the theoretic concepts to 

several case studies. (It would be an advantage if students could bring laptop computers 

to the lectures.) They will also analyse several companies listed on a stock market and 

work out an investment recommendation. 

Literature 

Pablo Fernandez, Company Valuation Methods, 2004 

Graham Friend, Stefan Zehle, Guide to Business Planning, The Economist Newspaper 

Ltd., 2004 (Ch. 14 & 17) 

Eugene F. Brigham, Michael C. Erhardt, Financial Management – Theory and Practice, 

Thomson 2008 (Students may use an earlier edition from 2005 onwards) 

K. Schoenebeck, M. Holtzman, Interpreting and Analyzing Financial Statements, 5th 

edition, Prentice Hall 2010, ISBN-10: 0136121985, ISBN-13: 9780136121985 

Evaluation 

Written and oral exam. 

International Institutions & Strategic Relations (FT+PT) 


Fall 2 IISR 3 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 113




issues of International Institutions and Strategic Relations; (ii) analytically report on the 

contemporary international legal, political, environmental and economic affairs; (iii) 

understand the role and limitations of main stakeholders (SD); (iv) detect many of the 

essential differences and assumptions between the global vs. regional institutions and 

instruments; (v) timely and accurately formulate solutions for their respective business 

environment, especially as regards the EU institutions (and instruments) . 




The course will extend the review of the merits and limitations of International (Public) 

Law and Law of International Organizations (including the so-called Diplomacy of 

Sustainable Development/SD), fundamental teachings and principles of contemporary 

International Relations and will finally touch upon the supranational institution building in 

the post-WW II Europe by addressing the institutions and instruments representing the 

core of the European Union. 

This will be a mixture between the selection and interpretation of legal and political 

nature of international and regional/EU settlements. By using the comparative method 

students will examine mainstreams of modern global legal order (Intl. Regimes), be it 

instruments or institutions, or regional like the EU (including the road-maps like: the EU 

Lisbon and Goteborg Strategies and the concept of Creative Industries). 

Literature 

Law Among Nations - An Introduction to Public International Law, G. van Glahen – J. L. 

Taulbee, Pearson Longman (VIII edition, 2007) 

The Institutions of the European Union, Peterson and Shackleton, Oxford 2008 

The Principles of sustainability, Simon Dresner, 1 st Edition; 2002, London Earthscan 

A Theory of Justice, John Rawls, Harvard University Press (first published 1971), revised 

edition 2001 




The class itself blends the lecturing, the EU case analysis, in-class discussion and 

comments. With such a broad range of topics, not all aspects of every issue can be 

covered, especially not by the front lecturing. Therefore, the subject of this course invites 

the active and energetic participation of each and every student. Scheduled meetings will 

be most productive when everyone completes the assigned readings carefully (sent or 

otherwise indicated beforehand) and comes prepared to engage in thoughtful exploration 

of the substantive issues. 

Therefore, the preparation for and participation in the class discussions is central to the 

very success of this course (and to it related the Current Affairs Briefings assignment). 

Students are expected to prepare two short analytical papers. Such papers should be 

submitted by each respective student, and individually presented before the class (20minute 

presentation + 10-minute discussion). 

Excursion/Study Visit/Guests 

Several local excursions (Vienna) and guest-lectures (detailed announcement will be 

communicated prior the event) 

Evaluation 

Current affairs briefings, group assignment, study paper 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 114

International Human Resource Management (FT+PT) 


Fall 2 IHRM 3 


In this course students will discuss and appraise the stages a firm typically goes through 

as it grows internationally and elaborate how each stage affects human resources 

management (HRM). Moreover, the emphasis will be placed on HRM challenges in 

networked firms. The students will be able to recognize and examine challenges and will 

have the competence to know which kind of strategy could be applied for solving human 

resource related subjects. In addition, students will have the ability to analyse and 

debate the various roles of a corporate HR department in centralized and decentralized 

and also in ―transition‖ companies. 

After successful completion of this course students will be able to: 

� Describe the core function of human resources in transnational corporations 

� Explain HR activities in several stages of a cross-border merger and acquisition 

(M&A) phase 

� Judge the role of HR in formation of an international joint venture (IJV) and which 

appropriate HR-practices and strategies for the IJV should be provided 

� Discuss and interpret equity-based alliances (M&As, IJVs) and non-equity modes 

of foreign operations and how this affects IHRM 

� Evaluate phases of cultural adjustments in a M&A process and compare 

similarities and differences of cultural adjustment in an international assignment 

� Analyse the different styles of managing subsidiaries by MNE, particularly the 

―ethnocentric‖, ―polycentric‖, ―geocentric‖ and ―regiocentric‖ approach 

� Describe the various types of international assignments (incl. long and short term 

as well as ―standard‖ and ―non-standard‖ assignments) and compare the various 

roles of expatriates, inpatriates and flexpatriates 

� Describe components of international compensation programs and analyse how 

variable compensation packages may affect expatriate performance 

� Appraise what is meant by ―balancing the standardization and localization of HRM 

in multinational organizations‖. 




The course seeks to develop the student‘s ability to evaluate IHR related issues and 

demonstrate problem-solving competence in HR linked challenges regarding global 

business activities. The lectures will comprise particularly the following topics: 

ORGANIZATIONAL: 

� differences of domestic human resources management and international human 

resources management (IHRM) 

� how global organizational structures in multinationals impact employees, line 

managers and human resource 

� HR activities in the stages of a cross-border merger and acquisition (M&A) phase 

� the development of international joint ventures and the possible HR related 

implications 

CULTURAL AWARENESS: 

� rising cultural awareness as a complex problem for multinational enterprises 

(MNE) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 115

� HR tasks in context with different management styles with an ―ethnocentric‖, 

―polycentric‖, ―geocentric‖ and ―regiocentric‖ approach 

� mentor duties for both, expatriation and repatriation 

RECRUITING AND COMPENSATION: 

� the crucial factors of recruiting and selecting staff for international assignments 

� components of international compensation programs 

HRM TASKS RELATED TO INTERNATIONALIZATION: 

� HR role with the global Code of Conduct (called ―Social Accountability 8000‖) 

� tasks in context with off-shoring 

� perspectives, issues, actions and consequences in MNE performance management 

The impact of trade unions and how they may limit on MNE strategic choices 

Influences on the image of MNEs as a global employer 

Literature 

Dowling P., Festing M. and Engle A., SR. (2008): International Human Resource 

Management, Fifth Edition, Cengage Learning, London, ISBN: 978-1-84480-542 

McKenna E., Beech N. (2008), Human Resource Management – A concise Analysis, 

Pearson Education Limited, ISBN: 978-0-273-69418-2 







regarding the understanding of the studied concepts. Additionally, two meetings will be 

held to discuss concepts and to answer any upcoming questions. 

Evaluation 

Group work, paper and final exam 

Strategic Purchase and Global Sourcing (FT+PT) 


Fall 2 SPGS 3 


Upon completion of this course the students should have knowledge of the basic 

techniques of Strategic Purchasing and Global Sourcing. Students should understand the 

long term approach to supplier relationship management, the necessary co-operations 

between buyer and supplier and the types of relationship. 

Furthermore students will: 

� analyse of the necessary purchasing conditions for multinational or global oriented 

companies 

� analyse purchasing structures to comply with demands for „cost leadership― 

strategies 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 116


The students will learn the strategic aspects of supply chain management and the 

strategic purchasing approach for a firm´s supply management practices. 

Strategic purchasing goals, key tasks competencies, skills as well as strategies are 

discussed. Part of the discussions is the understanding of the TCO (Total Cost of 

Ownership) approach. Furthermore basic knowledge of analyse techniques for supplied 

goods and suppliers e.g. portfolio analyses will be conveyed. Finally, the student will 

learn about supplier control mechanisms and procedures in case of change of 

relationships between customer and supplier. Examples will show how multinational and 

global acting enterprises conduct strategic supply analyses. 

Literature 

Bowersox, Closs, Cooper. Supply Chain Logistics Management 2nd ed. McGraw-Hill, 

2007. 

Kenneth Rolnicki, Managing Channels of Distribution, Amacom 

Malcolm Saunders, Strategic Purchasing & Supply Chain Management, Pitman Publishing 


Lectures based on slides and literature, presented by and discussed with the instructor. 

Cases are discussed in class; group work will be utilized to intensify the understanding of 

the course content. 

Evaluation 

Group work and written exam. 

Strategic Controlling and Reporting (FT+PT) 


Fall 2 SCRE 3 



� Understand the challenges of an Enterprise 2.0 world 

� Understand organisation, roles and responsibilities of Strategic Controlling in 

industrial practice 

� Apply best practice processes (rhythm of business) 

� Apply Strategic Controlling tools & instruments from industry and consulting 

business 

� Reflect critically the value add of industry standard KPIs in terms of feasibility, 

effort involved in measurement, pitfalls and information & interpretation derived 

� Organise control of strategy implementation in an efficient and effective way 




The lecture will include the following subjects: 

� New world of business – Enterprise 2.0 

� Controlling Function 

� Controlling Foundation 

o Revenue Analysis 

o Cost Analysis 

� Rhythm of Business: Strategic Planning, Budgeting, Forecasting and Reporting 

� Business Analysis Tools & Methodologies 

o SWOT 

o BCG Portfolio and McKinsey Matrix 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 117

o Benchmarking 

� Business Strategy Development 

� Business & Strategy Control by means of Balanced Scorecard 

� Business Productivity 

Literature 

Lecture script (will be provided electronically) 

Marketing Metrics: The Definitive Guide to Measuring Marketing Performance (2nd 

Edition) von Paul W. Farris, Neil T. Bendle, Phillip E. Pfeifer und David J. Reibstein von 

Pearson Prentice Hall (2010) 


Practical industry experiences and benchmarks will be shared, as well as best of bread 

tools and methodologies from industry and consulting. Learning will be driven by case 

oriented group work. 

Evaluation 

Oral and written exam 

Strategic Management and Planning (FT+PT) 


Fall 2 SMPL 3 

ATTENTION: THE COURSE‘S OBJECTIVES AND LEARNING OUTCOMES OF STRATEGIC 

MANAGEMENT AND PLANNING (SMPL1) HAS TO BE SEEN IN CONJUNCTION WITH 

CORPORATE STRATEGIES (COST2) LECTURE IN SUMMER TERM. 


� Knowledge. To encourage the understanding of the many, often conflicting, 

schools of thought and to facilitate the gaining of insight into the assumptions, 

possibilities and limitations of each set of theories; 

� Skills. To develop the student's ability to define strategic issues, to critically reflect 

on existing theories, to creatively combine or develop theories where necessary 

and to flexibly employ theories where useful; 

� Attitude. To instil a critical, analytical, flexible and creative mind-set, that 

challenges organizational, industry and national paradigms and problem-solving 

recipes. 




One of the occupational hazards of becoming a manager or consultant is superficiality. 

Many students enter business programs hoping to quickly pick up the tricks of the trade, 

without expending too much energy on the laborious task of learning to think 

strategically. Tools and techniques are more highly valued than developing a strategic 

problem-solving ability. Some students aspire to become ‗spread sheet wizards‘, 

commonly referred to as ‗trained monkeys‘ in the business world. 

However, in this course, the emphasis is not on filling in frameworks and applying 

standard recipes. On the contrary, students will be expected challenge recipes, question 

received wisdom, and exhibit unconventional thinking. 

Course description 

It is the intention of this course to give an overview of all essential aspects of strategic 

management. The most fundamental distinction made in the field is between strategy 

process, strategy content and strategy context. These are the three dimensions of 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 118

strategy that can be recognized in every real-life strategic problem situation. They can be 

generally defined as: 

� Strategy Process 

� Strategy Content 

� Strategy Context 

It must be emphasized that process, content and context are not the ‗elements‘ of 

strategic management, but its ‗dimensions‘. Elements can be taken apart and examined 

in isolation, but this is not the case with the strongly interrelated aspects process, 

content and context. Strategic phenomena can be examined from a process, content or 

context perspective, as one could look at a box's length, width and height, dependent on 

where one stands. The exclusive use of any of the three angles gives only a limited view 

of the object under investigation. To obtain ‗depth‘ of understanding of strategy, it is 

therefore necessary to merge the process, content and context angles into a three 

dimensional view of strategic management. This course takes such a three dimensional 

view of strategic management, by paying equal attention to each dimension. In this way, 

all essential topics in the area of strategic management are covered. 

Literature 

Any slides, hand-outs, copies delivered/distributed by the lecturer 

De Wit, Bob, and Ron Meyer (2010). Strategy - Process, Content, Context: An 

International Perspective. 4th edition. London: Thomson Learning. 

Additional literature: 

Hitt, M. A., Ireland, R. D., Hoskisson, R. E. (2009). The Management of Stratety: 

Concepts and Cases. 8th edition. Nashville: South-Western. 

Mintzberg, Henry, Ahlstrand, Bruce, and Lampel, Joseph (2009). Strategy Safari. 2 nd 

edition. London: Pearson. 


The contents of the course will be a combination of 

� Lectures (based on slides), presented by and discussed with the instructor 

� Self and group study sections and case study assignments. 

� Quizzes 

Method of Evaluation 

Case study assignment and written exam 

Corporate Governance & International Conduct (FT+PT) 


Fall 1 CGIC 2 


To convey to the student what corporate governance is and how it developed over the 

few years. In particular recent developments and legal provisions that every company 

will have to observe. 

Upon completion of the course, students will be able to: 

� Understand the role and nature of corporate governance 

� Discuss and illustrate the importance of corporate governance 

� Identify and describe and main stakeholders of corporate governance 

� Understand the key theoretical issues in the study of corporate governance 

� Distinguish between various approaches to the subject 

� Analyse the contexts, both endogenous and exogenous, that underpin and 

contribute to corporate governance structures locally and internationally 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 119

� Evaluate the strengths and limitations of different approaches to corporate 

governance 

� Hypothesise about corporate governance issues and events in a wider context 




The course focuses on: 

� Introduction to corporate risk management 

� Developments in Corporate Governance 

� Owners and Stakeholders 

� Directors and Board Structure 

� International Corporate Governance with a special emphasis on Austria 

Literature 

Corporate Governance, Christine Mallin, OUP, Oxford 2009 

UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods (CISG) 


Class sessions will include various forms of delivery, including lectures, group workshops 

and case studies. 

Evaluation 

Oral and written exams 

International Market Management (FT) 


Fall 2 INMM 4 


On successful completion of the module, students will know about: 

� cross-cultural marketing management 

� target market selection based on relevant criteria 

� future technologies 

� international factors influencing the marketing mix 

� embargo and safety regulations 

� dual-use products 

� international brand management 

� international distribution chanel 

� international distribution policy 

� organisation of an international sales team 




The course will provide students with an understanding of strategic marketing from the 

customer and brand perspective. The course will go into the concept of marketing 

strategy: targeting, obtaining a sustainable competitive advantage, and brand positioning 

in international context. 

Furthermore, the course will focus on various aspect of the distribution process. Students 

will also learn how international sales teams are organized and managed. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 120

Literature 

Carvens, David W. and Nigel F. Piercy (2006). Strategic Marketing, 8th ed., McGraw-Hill. 

Kotler, Philip and Kevin Keller (2006). Marketing Management, 12th ed., Prentice Hall. 

Ghauri P.N., Usunier J.-C. (2008). International business negotiations , 2nd ed., Emeral. 

Kremenyuk, V.(2002). International Negotiations: Analysis, Approaches, Issues, Jossey- 

Bass. 

Salacuse, J.W. (2004), Negotiating: The top ten way that culture can affect your 

negotiations, in: ―Ivey Business Journal‖, Sept./Oct. 2004 


The course is designed in the interactive manner. On the one hand, a case and paperbased 

approach will be used to illustrate decision problems and necessary steps in 

planning. Special emphasis will be put on the analysis of the decision situation, 

information gathering and models supporting decision makers. A company case serves as 

a basis for discussion for the first units, and students will be invited to develop their own 

business cases; forming small groups, concepts and strategies for self-selected business 

serve as sandbox and learning environment. 

On the other hand, presentations will be used to structure the teaching subject and to 

illustrate decision problems and possible approach and solutions. Special emphasis will be 

put on implementing real-life examples to support issues presented and discussed and 

also to animate questions. An experience-based instrumental approach will be coupled 

with a holistic overview, providing students with intellectual insights into non-economic 

sciences and thus inviting them to expand their cognitive horizons. 

Evaluation 

Projects and presentations 

International Consulting I (FT+PT) 


Fall 2 ICON 3 


Students will be provided with an understanding of the international consulting industry, 

its major segments and players. Students will be provided with an introduction of the 

commonly used approach towards clients‘ issues and their practical application. Also, 

students will gain insights in the application and selection process, career 

initiation/outlook and first potential engagements. 

After completion of the course students will be able to: 

� Describe possible reasons/demand for hiring external consultants 

� Summarize major approaches used (from framing the issue to managing 

engagements) 

� Utilize and apply basic tools used 

� Analyse exemplary cases and teasers and present results 

� Formulate hypotheses and design basic approaches 




Session I will focus on providing an overview of the consulting industry landscape and 

segments and include a discussion of required skill-sets. Thus, the typical routine will be 

sketched and illustrated by examples. 

During the subsequent sessions, examples of commonly used methodology and its 

practical application will be presented and discussed. Thus, case studies of typical 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 121

consulting engagements will be used to outline the practical application of the theoretic 

concepts. Each session will be started by a lecture covering the necessary inputs to 

resolve the case. Teams will be formed to solve the questions based on additional 

reading material, if necessary. Concluding the sessions, each team must present its 

findings in simulated project environments or typical consulting situations. The depth of 

presented content, as well as the used presentation techniques will serve as parameters 

for grading. 

Literature 

Mandatory: Lecturer‘s handouts & notes 

Friga, Paul N. and Rasiel, Ethan M., The McKinsey Mind: Understanding and 

Implementing the Problemsolving Tools and Management Techniques of the World's Top 

Strategic Consulting Firm, McGraw-Hill Professional, 2001 

Andler, Nicolai, Tools for Project Management, Workshops and Consulting: A Must-Have 

Compendium of Essential Tools and Techniques, Publicis, 2008 


The course is designed to be highly interactive. Main concepts and tools used in 

consulting will be introduced and then discussed and utilized in group sessions. 

Evaluation 

Case studies and final exam 

Advanced Arabic I (incl. business communication) 


Fall 2 CHIN 3 


Given the complexity of the Arabic language, the competency goal of this course is to 

reach language competences from the level of ―basic users‖ (A2) to ―independent users‖ 

(B2) according to Common European Framework of References for Languages. 

This should enable students to communicate appropriately orally and in writing in various 

professional situations, to grasp simple economic texts and reflect on them, to 

understand the cultural specifics of the Arab business community, and to derive to a 

sufficient level of communication in the professional world. 


Completed BA studies / A1 level 



� Training of text and listening comprehension 

� Presentation of a company 

� Business Correspondence 

� Dialogs 

� Telephone conversations 

Literature 

Compulsory and supplementary literature according to lecturer‘s requirements 

Teaching Method 

The course is conducted in the interactive manner and includes in-class discussions, 

grammar review and vocabulary sessions, dialogue building, etc. Students will be 

encouraged to express themselves orally and in writing in various business and daily 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 122

situations. Active in-class participation and timely preparation are to advance the 

learning process of the students. 

Evaluation 

Written and oral examinations, quizzes, homework assignments 

Advanced Chinese I (incl. business communication) 


Fall 2 CHIN 3 


Given the complexity of Chinese characters and language, the competency goal of this 

course is to reach language competences from the level of ―basic users‖ (A2) to 

―independent users‖ (B2) according to Common European Framework of References for 

Languages. 



understand the cultural specifics of the Chinese-speaking business world, and to derive to 

a sufficient level of communication in the professional world. 





� complements 

� ―shi-de‖-structure 

� ―guò-structure‖ 

� comparisons 

� high numbers, percentages, fractions 

� interpretation of graphs and trends 

� simple communication for professional purposes. 

Literature 








Evaluation 


Advanced French I (incl. business communication) 


Fall 2 FREN 3 


Upon successful completion of this course students will: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 123

� acquire the language competences of Basic User (A2) to Competent User (C1-C2) 

according to the Common European Framework of References for Languages 

� be able to communicate spontaneously and correctly 

� be able to read and understand texts dealing with degree programme relevant 

topics 

� be able to explain her/his own point of view on current issues 

� be able to compose clearly structured texts 

� acquire the competence to reproduce information and to express one‘s opinion 

about specific questions 


Completed BA studies / B1 level 


In the course the students will review of the most relevant parts of syntax and stylistics, 

basic business French specializing on export-oriented ventures and export trade, and 

argumentation. 

The course will cover the following main topics: 

� international trade and globalisation; 

� France and Austria as exporting countries and business partners; 

� export techniques. 

Furthermore, summarizing and commenting business texts will be trained. 

Students will also focus on structures that help them to present the various details of 

controversial subjects (presenting pros and cons of topics and drawing effective 

conclusions). All in all, students should get a precise picture illustrating the fascinating 

world of export. 

Literature 



The three main linguistic competencies – understanding, speaking, and writing – will be 

trained through discussions, text studies, group work and assignments. 



understand and react. Exercises will lead to a better understanding of the topics, the 

correct use of the relevant terminology and develop the language competence both in 

oral and in written. 

The course will be run like a seminar, so students' active participation in discussions 

based on topic preparation is not only requested but crucial 

Evaluation 

Written and oral examinations, assignments, group work 

Advanced Russian I (incl. business communication) 


Fall 2 RUSS 3 



� Acquires the language competences of a Competent User (B1-B2) according to the 

Common European Framework of References for Languages 

� Is able to communicate orally and written in profession related situations 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 124

� Is able to compose, reproduce and comment on texts with economic content 

� Understands cultural characteristics of the Russian business world 




Written and oral business communication, reading, summarizing and discussing texts and 

newspaper articles, further study of grammar and syntactic structures. 

Literature 

Students will be provided with hand-outs. 


Authentic written texts (e.g. newspaper texts) and audio materials will be used for 

vocabulary and structure input as well as for constant improvement of text 

comprehension. Active speaking will be embedded in real-life situations and practiced in 

form of role plays, discussions, presentations etc. with a focus on communicative 

interaction. 

Evaluation 

Home-exercises, vocabulary / grammar tests, final written and oral exam 

Advanced Spanish I (incl. business communication) 


Fall 2 SPAN 3 



� Acquire the language competences of Independent User (B2) to Competent User 

(C1-C2) according to the Common European Framework of References for 

Languages 

� Be able to spontaneously and correctly communicate, to read articles and reports 

on degree programme relevant topics and to express one‘s opinion about current 

issues 

� Be able to compose clearly structured texts 

� Be able to reproduce information and to express one‘s opinion about specific 

questions 

Having completed this course the students will have revised and increased their grammar 

knowledge as well as their business and especially export-related vocabulary in Spanish; 

they will be able to apply for a job in the Spanish speaking countries; they have acquired 

linguistic skills which enable them to negotiate in Spanish and are aware of the most 

important intercultural differences; they are able to investigate on subjects as, for 

example, an economic sector, to resume the information in a written report and to 

present the results in an oral speech; they also know the structure of the export industry 

and the main operators in the Spanish speaking countries. 




Review of the most relevant parts of syntax and stylistics; basic business Spanish 

specializing on export-oriented ventures and export trade; argumentation; text 

comprehension and focus on: trade, banking, marketing; Practicing general professional 

skills such as telephoning, talking to customers considering different language registers; 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 125

working on intercultural skills for speaking and writing in a professional context in a 

Spanish-speaking environment. 

The course is based on the 5 communicative skills (listening and reading comprehension, 

oral and written production, intercultural competences) and pays special attention to the 

vocabulary relevant to the export industry. The semester will include the following 

subjects: el mundo laboral, las negociaciones, el traslado al extranjero, la economía en 

América Latina. 

Literature 

Text book: Tano, M. (2009): Expertos. Curso avanzado de español orientado al mundo 

del trabajo. Libro del alumno. Difusión. 

Handouts 

More grammar exercises but not compulsory: Tano, M. (2010): Expertos. Curso 

avanzado de español orientado al mundo del trabajo. Cuaderno de ejercicios. Difusión. 


Students will be encouraged by a communicative and interactive approach to express 

themselves concerning the treated subjects. Therefore videos, tapes and authentic texts 

and situations will be used. With regard to tasks as vehicles for planning, carrying out 

and reporting on language learning and teaching, the didactic elements are: e.g. 

simulations, role-play, classroom interaction, presentations, etc. 

Evaluation 

Assignments, written and oral examinations, presentation 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 126


International Market Management (PT) 


Spring 2 INMM 4 


On successful completion of the module, students will know about: 

� cross-cultural marketing management 

� target market selection based on relevant criteria 

� future technologies 

� international factors influencing the marketing mix 

� embargo and safety regulations 

� dual-use products 

� international brand management 

� international distribution chanel 

� international distribution policy 

� organisation of an international sales team 




The course will provide students with an understanding of strategic marketing from the 

customer and brand perspective. The course will go into the concept of marketing 

strategy: targeting, obtaining a sustainable competitive advantage, and brand positioning 

in international context. 

Furthermore, the course will focus on various aspect of the distribution process. Students 

will also learn how international sales teams are organized and managed. 

Literature 

Carvens, David W. and Nigel F. Piercy (2006). Strategic Marketing, 8th ed., McGraw-Hill. 

Kotler, Philip and Kevin Keller (2006). Marketing Management, 12th ed., Prentice Hall. 

Ghauri P.N., Usunier J.-C. (2008). International business negotiations , 2nd ed., Emeral. 

Kremenyuk, V.(2002). International Negotiations: Analysis, Approaches, Issues, Jossey- 

Bass. 

Salacuse, J.W. (2004), Negotiating: The top ten way that culture can affect your 

negotiations, in: ―Ivey Business Journal‖, Sept./Oct. 2004 


The course is designed in the interactive manner. On the one hand, a case and paperbased 

approach will be used to illustrate decision problems and necessary steps in 

planning. Special emphasis will be put on the analysis of the decision situation, 

information gathering and models supporting decision makers. A company case serves as 

a basis for discussion for the first units, and students will be invited to develop their own 

business cases; forming small groups, concepts and strategies for self-selected business 

serve as sandbox and learning environment. 

On the other hand, presentations will be used to structure the teaching subject and to 

illustrate decision problems and possible approach and solutions. Special emphasis will be 

put on implementing real-life examples to support issues presented and discussed and 

also to animate questions. An experience-based instrumental approach will be coupled 

with a holistic overview, providing students with intellectual insights into non-economic 

sciences and thus inviting them to expand their cognitive horizons. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 127

Evaluation 

Projects and presentations 

Change Management and New Management Methods (FT+PT) 


Spring 1 CMMM 2 


Organizations are always engaged in change management processes at both strategic 

and operating level, in order to both adapt to the environment and bring changes to it. 


� understand and explain the mechanisms of change-management 

� plan and implement a change process 

� discuss the utilisation of different management styles in critical situations in those 

corporations, that undergo change or a substantially new orientation 

� apply methods and techniques of coaching, mediation and supervision 

� explain the significance of corporate culture and the tools for its conception, 

techniques and strategies of negotiations at an international level with regard to 

intercultural specifics. 


International Human Resource Management, Strategic Management and Planning 


The course will include the following topics: 

� models and steps to generate effective change in an corporation, 

� analysis of reasons for resistance and methods to deal with resistance 

� cost-benefit analysis of completed change processes 

� risk analysis 

� analysis of success factors 

� features of successful implementation of change processes 

� significance of „Soft Factors― for a successful implementation of new strategies 

� description and analysis of new management methods, such as Balanced Score 

Card, TQM-systems, methods of self- and external etc. 

Literature 

Ackoff, Russel, Differences That Make a Difference, 1st ed., Triarchy Press, 2010 

Biggs, David, Management Consulting - A Guide for Students, 1st ed., Cengage Learning 

EMEA, 2010 

Boos, Frank, and Heitger, Barbara, Veränderung - Systemisch - Management des 

Wandels, Praxis, Konzepte und Zukunft, 1st ed., Klett-Cotta, 2004 

Covey, Stephen R., The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People: Powerful Lessons in 

Personal Change, Free Press, 2004 

Kotter, John P., Leading Change, McGraw-Hill Professional, 1996 

Kotter, John P., and Cohen, Dan S., The Heart of Change, McGraw-Hill Professional, 2002 

Trompenaars, Fons, and Prud‘homme, Peter, Managing Change Across Corporate 

Cultures, 1st ed., Capstone Publishing, 2004 

Woods, Stephen A., and West, Michael A., The Psychology of Work and Organizations, 

1st ed., South-Western Cengage Learning, 2010 


The course will first lead students through an introductory lecture to be able to gain the 

first understanding on basic principles of change management. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 128

For the purpose of applying theories on change management the EIS Simulation will be 

used. The simulation - developed by CALT, INSEAD‘s Centre for Advanced Learning 

Technologies - is a multi-media learning software allowing participants to simulate 

important changes within an organization while confronting various forms of resistance. 

The Simulation is run in teams in a computer lab, and it will allow participants to 

experiment the effective implementation of appropriate change tactics. At the end of the 

simulation a full debriefing will be run, where the core learning messages will be 

summarized. To free learning from misunderstandings and maximize the simulation 

experience, no evaluation is assigned to the EIS exercise. In order for students to reflect 

and learn from the experience a reflective report needs to be submitted. 

For students to engage in developing an understanding of change management principles 

in relation with new management methods students will work in teams of five to six to 

prepare a video clip of maximum 10 minutes duration. This will require students to 

research on the given topic, analyse, and develop means to communicate the major 

points of their area of research to the audience. The final meeting will be used to present 

each video to their colleagues and a jury which will then announce the winner. To reflect 

on learning experiences and to share these experiences and knowledge with peers, 

students are required to write a blog. 

Evaluation 

Reflective report on EIS Simulation, video, blog. 

International Business and Strategic Change (FT) 


Spring 2 IBSC 3 



� know, understand and apply the main tools of strategic management 

� recognise and interpret the interaction of departments, business units and 

organisations 

� evaluate the possibilities of process and corporate management as well as the 

implementation of change 


Strategic Management and Planning, Strategic Controlling and Reporting, Corporate 

Governance and International Conduct 


The global business environment is changing dramatically. Any business operation, whether 

global or local, large or small, is now impacted by developments in the international arena. 

This course is designed to develop skills and awareness for competing effectively in the 

dynamic new global business arena. The focus is on changes taking place in the global 

environment. The course provides both a general overview of the international dimensions 

of management, and a foundation for further, specialized studies in the field. Special topics 

include the new opportunities and challenges facing small businesses in the global 

economy, and the emerging role of China and India. 

The course covers a variety of topic areas related to the contemporary global business 

environment, including: 

� The Changing Demographics of International Business 

� The Challenges of Globalization 

� Country Differences in Political Economy and Culture 

� The Foundations of Cross-Border Trade and Investment 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 129

� Current Developments in Trade and Investment Policies 

� The International Financial Environment 

� Entering Foreign Markets 

� Strategies for Competing in the Global Marketplace 

� Managing and Controlling Global Operations 

� The New Challenge of Emerging Economies 

Literature 

Due to accelerated nature of this course, no textbook is required. Consequently, it is 

particularly important that students attend all of the scheduled lectures. The course is 

structured around the textbook: Charles W.L. Hill, Global Business Today, 5 th edition 

(2008), a readable and timely text which covers both the theoretical concepts of 

contemporary international business and practical applications through company 

examples and mini-case studies. It is recommended both as supplemental reading for the 

present course, and for future reference. References to corresponding portions of the Hill 

text are cited throughout the course syllabus. 


The course consists of a related series of lectures, videos, case studies and discussions, 

designed to integrate theoretical concepts of international business with practical 

application to the contemporary global business environment. 

Participants are expected to attend all of the lectures, and to participate actively in the 

classroom discussions and case studies – that way, we can all learn from each other. In 

addition, participants will be asked to do a moderate amount of reading, and to prepare a 

brief written or oral submission in advance of most of the class meetings. Suggested 

preparation time: minimum of one hour per class session. 

Evaluation 

Case preparations and presentations, final exam. 

Business and Project Development (FT) 


Spring 2 BPDE 3 



� outline, prepare, draft and report pre-feasibility studies, feasibility studies and 

business plans in the area of the international business development consulting 

� develop strategies to develop a business including interface issues in a company 

as well as the evaluation of the success of applied strategies on the basis of the 

design flexibility within a given corporate culture. 

� explain and apply the most important criteria for evaluation of a business plan 

� develop abilities to recognize potentially valuable opportunities 

� develop the capability of using analytic tools to analyse customers and 

competitors 

� learn how to obtain the resources necessary to pursue these opportunities 

� develop the skills for formulating business strategy and making decisions leading 

to desired results 

� manage and grow the business into a sustainable competitive operation 




Strategic Management and Planning, Strategic Controlling and Reporting, International 

Marketing Management, International Finance, Investment and Budgeting, Strategic 

Purchase and Global Sourcing 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 130


The following topics will be covered in the course: 

� conception and implementation of pre-feasibility studies, feasibility studies and 

business plans 

� analysis of competition (coherence analysis) 

� market segments (analysis of demand and reception) 

� target groups 

� marketing concept (positioning, pricing, branding and rebranding) 

� distribution concept 

� financial planning and liquidity 

� analysis of opportunities and risks 

� business strategy and policy 

� analysis of investment and operating costs 

� planning and structuring of the revenues 

� description of the IRR, NPV, EBIT, EBITDA ratios 

Literature 

Lecture reader is provided 



classroom discussions and case studies. In addition, participants will be asked to do a 

read up, prepare cases and present solutions in class. 

Evaluation 

Business plan and final written exam 

Corporate Strategies (FT + PT) 


Spring 2 COST 3 


Based on the theoretical basics, introduced in the course Strategic Management and 

Planning (winter term), the course Corporate Strategies is aimed at challenging the 

state-of-the-art concepts and linking corporate practice and theory. 

Upon successful completion of this course the students will be able to analyse and 

evaluate strategic concepts in theory and practice. A special focus is given to enable 

students to apply strategic theories and concepts in practice. 

The involvement of management representatives of leading international companies will 

help to bridge theory and practice. 


� define strategic targets 

� describe and utilise the essential tools of strategic management and planning in 

an international environment 

� assess, analyse and discuss a company‘s strategy 

� develop strategies suiting both company and environment 


Strategic Management and Planning 


The course will focus on the following topics: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 131

� Definition of strategic purposes and goals 

� Tools of strategic management 

� Analysis and description of international company strategies on the basis of 

selected case studies with regard to the following parameters (as examples): 

marketing, financing, human resources based on theoretical fundamentals of 

company strategies, the selected corporations should comprise different industry 

approaches, like the investment goods sector, the consumer goods sector as well 

as the service sector 

Literature 

De Wit, Bob, and Ron Meyer (2010). Strategy - Process, Content, Context: An 

International Perspective. 4th edition. London: Thomson Learning. 

Additional literature: 

Hitt, M. A., Ireland, R. D., Hoskisson, R. E. (2009). The Management of Strategy: 

Concepts and Cases. 8th edition. Nashville: South-Western. 

Mintzberg, Henry, Ahlstrand, Bruce, and Lampel, Joseph (2009). Strategy Safari. 2 nd 

edition. London: Pearson. 


The contents of the course will be a combination of lectures, self study sections and case 

study assignment, and will include company discussions and presentations at IMC 

(supported by respective senior and top management representatives) 

Evaluation 

Project presentations and final exam 

e-Marketing and New Trends in Sales Techniques (FT) 


Spring 1 EMST 2 


Upon completion of these lectures students should be able to: 

� Recognize the benefits and growth potential of interactive media and digital 

material in creating successful marketing strategies and improving basic business 

processes 

� Explain the economic concept of Moore‘s Law and understand its relevance in 

business planning and strategy 

� Describe customer segmentation (B2C as well as B2B) in the e-marketing mix, 

primarily based on individual behaviour patterns. 

� Recognize Customer Lifetime Value (LTV) as a key concept driving direct and 

indirect online business activities 

� Know about ―communication/promotion‖ in the e-marketing mix 

� Explain how the three factors of usability, credibility and persuasion can 

determine the success or failure of online marketing efforts 

� Be able to describe the concept of bundle pricing and how it can be employed by 

marketers to reduce costs, expand markets and improve performance 

� Understand how new online channels can help firms expand geographic markets, 

product assortment and redesign closeout markets 


International Market Management 


The course will lead the students through the following topics and will provide a deep 

understanding of the following topics: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 132

� selection and briefing 

� international e-marketing 

� innovative marketing strategies in global competition 

� global e-marketing (e.g. direct mail) 

� database management concepts 

� marketing concepts for web platforms 

� IT procurement and the importance of new sales techniques 

� electronic processing of customs and reporting procedures 

Readings and Media, Sources for Individual Studies 

Ward A. Hanson and Kirthi Kalyanam, Internet Marketing & e-Commerce, South-Western 

Cengage Learning, Mason, Ohio, 2007, ISBN-13: 978-0-324-42281-8 

Carolyn Siegel, Internet Marketing, 2 nd edition, Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston, 2006, 

ISBN: 0-618-51999-8 


Lectures including practical examples presented and discussed with the lector. The 

course comprises a combination of formal lecture, colleague counselling and discussing 

cases, placing particular emphasis on student participation. This will support the ambition 

to enhance analytical-, diagnostic-, decision making, and communication skills for 

students. 

Evaluation 

Group assignment and written exam. 

European Union Law including EU Integration (FT + PT) 


Spring 2 EULI 3 



� Understand the structure and assistance mechanisms of the EU 

� Find out and interpret guidelines, directives and legal parameters and apply them 

to successfully perform international activities. 

� Analyse political and legal parameters in relation to internationalisation 

� Integrate the knowledge when developing operational and strategic company 

goals. 




The course should give the students an idea by what factors European law is formed and 

how it affects business activities in the EU. 

The following topics will be covered in more detail: 

� Law of the European Union 

� For the international trade-related parts of commercial law, employment law, right 

of establishment and the right to intangible assets, intellectual property protection 

� Past, present and future of European integration (degree of integration, phases of 

integration, discussion of enlargement or consolidation, principle of subsidiarity, 

federal state vs. confederation of nations, etc.) 

� Subsidiarity principle 

� State vs. confederation 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 133

Literature 

Alberto Santa Maria, European Economic Law, Kluwer 2009, ISBN-10: 9041125361; 

ISBN-13: 978-9041125361 

Sarah Dillon, International Trade and Economic Law and the European Union, Hart 

Publishing, ISBN-10: 184113113X; ISBN-13: 978-1841131139 

Gabriel Moens, John Trone, Commercial Law of the European Union, Springer; 1 edition 

(April 2010), ISBN-10: 9048187737; ISBN-13: 978-9048187737 

Ian Ward, A Critical Introduction to European Union Law, Cambridge University Press; 3 

edition, ISBN-10: 0521711584; ISBN-13: 978-0521711586 


The principles are presented and illustrated by examples in the lectures. Selected topics 

are developed in greater depth and presented by the students. 

Evaluation: 

Presentation and exam. 

International Accounting Principles and Taxation (FT+PT) 


Spring 2 IAPT 3 


In this course students will get a comprehensive overview of the principles of IFRSaccounting. 

The overview comprise of the conceptual design as well as recognition, 

measurement and disclosure requirements. 

Upon successful completion of this course students will be able to: 

� Outline and apply the IFRS rules and standards 

� Know the components, design and content of a financial statement in compliance 

with IFRS 

� Analyse and compare financial statements 

� Outline the major differences to local accounting regulations (UGB) 


International Finance, Investment and Budgeting 


In the course the following topics are included: 

� Consolidated accounts, obligation to compile a consolidated accounts, enterprises 

to be included in a consolidated account, consolidation(-methods), distinction 

between IAS/IFRS and HGB, compilation of an consolidated account, consolidated 

balance sheet, consolidated profit and loss account, cash flow statement, equity 

capital status, segment reporting, consolidated management report, correlation 

between a consolidated account and individual accounts; 

� Outline and content of a consolidated account, limits of validity of a consolidated 

account, assessing the separate items of a consolidated account, scope of 

arranging individual items according to the national and international parameters, 

analysis of a consolidated by means of ratios, accounting policy, taxation aspects, 

analysis of a consolidated account based on case studies; 

� International accounting rules and standards as well as basics of international 

taxation and the most common corporation taxes including e.g. double taxation 

agreements, tax havens, preferred economic regions. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 134

Literature 

Wiley-VCH: International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) 2009, The official 

standards approved by the EU (English-German edition) 


The contents of the course will be a combination of lectures, self study sections and 

assignments. 

Evaluation 

Homework, group work and written exam. 

Mergers, Acquisitions and Due diligence (FT) 


Spring 1 MADD 2 


After successful completion of this course students will have a good understanding of: 

� Motivations for mergers 

� The ―M&A Process‖ 

� Approaches to determine ―Company Value‖ 

In addition, students will be able to: 

� Understand the concept of due diligence and its dimensions 

� Deduct the sales price from the profitability of a corporation or a project to 

acquire and take over 

� Structure risks 

� Prepare and analyse contractual arrangements 

� Discuss payment terms including financing terms 

� Analyse success factors 


International Finance, Investment and Budgeting, Corporate Governance and 

International Conduct 


The objective of the course is to enable student to understand the entire M&A process 

and how the company value is determined within an M&A transaction. 

The course will give an introduction into different rationales for entering into an M&A 

transaction, explain the process from the first call to closing a deal and explain how the 

purchase price is determined. Students will be given a comprehensive real-life case study 

and be required to demonstrate in a presentation their knowledge of what they have 

learned in the first two sessions. 

The wrap up will then cover issues faced in the real case and deal with M&A related 

questions students may have. 

Literature 

‖Valuation‖ from Tom Copeland, Tim Koller, Jack Murrin - John Wiley & Sons Inc – 

Language: English, ISBN: 0471361909 


This course will be combining theoretical and practical aspects of M&A. It will be taught in 

an interactive manner fostering discussions and requiring the students to perform a 

comprehensive case study (in groups). 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 135

Evaluation 

Case study project 

Research Seminar and Preparation for Master Thesis (FT + PT) 


Spring 2 RSMT 3 



� draft sophisticated academic papers and a master thesis on one‘s own 

� know the structures in the field academic research 

� work with case studies 

� prepare seminar papers under academic supervision with regard to practicerelated 

topics which relate to special interest modules 

� plan and develop a master thesis 

� report and defend their work 

� select proper research instruments 

� differentiate and utilise qualitative and quantitative research methods 

� utilise statistical methods for data assessment 

� critically assess the quality of information attained from secondary sources. 




The purpose of this course is to equip students with the tools and know-how to write 

scientific papers and other publications. The main focus is put on the upcoming master 

thesis for successful completion of their studies. After completing of this seminar, 

students should furthermore be able to distinguish trade, academic and scientific 

literature. A further objective of the lecture is to prepare future academics to meet the 

quality criteria of scientific publications. 

Topics include: 

� topic selection and research planning 

� time management 

� theoretical fundamentals 

� structure, organization and content of scientific papers and dissertations 

� rules of citation 

� presentation of the ideal research process in economics 

� discussion of research question vs. hypothesis 

� information search 

� writing a synopsis 

� scientific research work and data analysis 

� academic language 

� reading and analysis of technical papers 

� sources of analysis and ranking discussion 

� survey methodology 

� hermeneutic versus empirical work 

� objectivity - validity - reliability 

� writing an authentic work under the guidelines for ―Academic papers‖ of the IMC 

University of Applied Sciences 

Literature 

Babbie, E. (2004); The practice of Social Research; 10th Edition; Belmont, CA: 

Wadsworth 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 136

Best, J. W.; Kahn, J. V. (2006); Research in Education; 10th Edition; Boston: Pearson 

Evans, D., Gruba, P. (2004); How to Write a Better Thesis; 2nd Ed.; Carlton: Melbourne 

University 

Ghauri, P., Gronhaug, K. (2002); Research Methods in Business Studies - A Practical 

Guide; 2nd Ed.; Harlow: Prentice Hall 

Diamantopoulos A., Schlegelmilch B. B. (1997); Taking the Fear Out of Data Analysis - A 

Step-by-step Approach; London: Thompson 




In class, the students will have the chance to participate in class projects in order to 

acquaint them with an academic (method and fact driven) elaboration of a topic. 

Furthermore, they also have to provide a proposal for a paper meeting scientific 

standards to familiarize them with process of writing and the guidelines applying at the 

IMC as well as prepare one core article for discussion. 

Evaluation: 

Master thesis proposal and scientific article discussion 

Structured Export and Project Financing (FT + PT) 


Spring 2 SEPF 3 



� discuss international parameters, under which export-oriented companies act with 

special emphasis on commercial, financial and risk-related tools and foreign trade 

techniques. 

� understand and implement the different tools of risk mitigation including cost 

calculations 

� explain and apply payment terms 

� plan the delivery of international projects 



International Conduct, Advanced Foreign Trade Techniques 


The topics covered in the course include: 

� consolidation and extension of: (structured) financing tools in foreign trade 

(structured project- and export financing, structured trade financing inclusive of 

commodity trade), export and internationalisation grants, underwriting of exports 

and direct investments (e.g. „Export Credit Agencies―), international private 

insurance market (e.g. Lloyds), countertrade 

� project financing 

� PPP (Public-Private-Partnership)-models 

� risk analysis and (financial) risk management 

� instruments and techniques used (syndicated loans, bonds and asset backed 

securities) 

� analysis and mitigation and hedging of risks involved in structured trade and 

project finance 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 137

Literature 

Stefano Gatti: Project Finance in Theory and Practice; 2008; Chapter 1 to 8; ISBN-13: 

978-0-12-373699-4 

Vinod Kothari: Securitisation – the Financial Instrument of the Future; ISBN-13: 978-0- 

470-82195-7 


Teaching of the lecturer will be based on a comprehensive written presentation; 

additionally, basic material for the case studies will be provided, if not mentioned in 

readings and media section. 

To deepen the understanding and practical application of the theory, exercises and case 

studies will be incorporated in the lecture. The case studies will also be provided by the 

lecturer; each case study will be prepared and presented by a group. Each group has to 

prepare one ―Group Case Study Paper‖ (ca. 5 pages for every group member); the paper 

is evaluated as a group-work. There will be as well a presentation of the case study in 

class (30 minutes), which should be accompanied by a hand-out (2-4 pages) distributed 

a week before the presentation to facilitate group discussion of the case study. 

Evaluation 

Seminar paper, case studies and exercises 

International Consulting II (FT + PT) 


Spring 2 ICON 3 


Overall aim is to learn and train best practice tools and methodologies from consulting 

industry. Being a consultant or a manager does not make a big difference. Especially in 

the "The new world of business" where companies, business and organisations become 

less tangible and more "cloud" like. Both "jobs" - consultant and manager - have to deal 

with change and transformation. Nevertheless, consulting provides best practice tools 

and methodologies which accelerate change processes and ensure sustainable change. 

These tools and methodologies have a proven track record in consulting and are as well 

extremely useful to managers. They can make the difference between a good and an 

excellent manager. 


� Know and handle resistance to change on client's side and to develop truly 

customer specific solutions 

o Understand sources and mechanisms of resistance to change 

o Analyse customer requirements and create buy-in at the start of the 

consulting project (initial mobilisation) 

o Involve customers and create buy-in in the course of the project, and 

especially before start of solution implementation/roll-out 

� Analyse business processes in a way that creates in-depth business insights, 

external benchmarking view and ensures customer involvement and mobilisation 

� Design customer specific financial models, i.e. Business Case 

� Design a long term transformation plan which supports organisations to manage 

change in a sustainable way 

� Document and present project results and moderate results presentation in a 

collaborative and mobilising manner 


International Consulting I 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 138


Consulting II course will be based on the following topics: 

� Change Management in Consulting - Introduction 

� Consulting Best Practice Toolbox 

o Focus Interview 

o Brown Paper process mapping 

o Transformation mapping 

� Business Case - Introduction 

� Optional: Presentation and moderation skills basics, including video feedback 

Literature 

Lecture script will be provided electronically. 

Teaching methods 

Practical consulting industry experiences and best practice tools from international 

consulting will be shared. Learning will be driven lecturing, interactive discussion and 

practical exercises. During the exercises best practice methodologies will be performed in 

order to achieve "learning by doing". Overall aim is to adopt methodologies to an extent 

so that they can be immediately applied in industrial practice. 

Evaluation 

Exercises and written exam 

Advanced Chinese II (incl. business communication) 


Spring 2 CHIN 3 





Languages. 








The main focus areas of the course will include: 

� further consolidation of syntax and communicative aspects; 

� reading and listening comprehension; 

� acquiring intercultural skills for professional situations and communication. 

Literature 






FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 139



Evaluation 


Advanced French II (incl. business communication) 


Spring 2 FREN 3 



� communicate with business partners 

� reflect on the topics discussed in class 

� further improve their linguistic skills 




The course will cover the following main topics: 

� organisations involved in foreign trade 

� foreign trade techniques and export strategies 

� specifics of foreign trade between Austria and France 

� intercultural competence in negotiations with the French 

Literature 

Le monde du commerce extérieur, script for semester 2 

Dictionary 

Additional Reading: Newspapers and magazines; TV 5 and Internet 



trained through discussions, text studies, group work and assignments. Students will be 

encouraged to express themselves on the treated subjects. 

Dialogues (taped), videos and texts will introduce the topics thus demanding the 

students to understand and react. Exercises will lead to a better understanding of the 

topics, the correct use of the relevant terminology and develop the language competence 

both in oral and in written. 


based on topic preparation is not only requested but crucial. 

Evaluation 

Written and oral examinations, assignments, group work 

Advanced Russian II (incl. business communication) 


Spring 2 RUSS 3 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 140



� specifics of foreign trade between Austria and Russia 

� intercultural competence in negotiations with the Russians 




Reading and interpreting of relevant economic texts; Job related communication as well 

as dealing with intercultural skills for the Russian business world. 

Literature 

Students will be provided with hand-outs. 


Authentic texts (e.g. newspaper articles) and audio materials will be used for vocabulary 

and structure input as well as for constant improvement of text comprehension. Active 

speaking will be embedded in real-life situations and practiced in form of role plays, 

discussions, presentations etc. with a focus on communicative interaction. 

Evaluation 

Home-exercises, vocabulary / grammar quizzes, final written and oral exam 

Advanced Spanish II (incl. business communication) 


Spring 2 SPAN 3 



� communicate with business partners 

� reflect on the topics discussed in class 

� further improve their linguistic skills 




� text comprehension and working on the following issues: corporations, business 

management, HR; 

� practicing of general job-related skills like speaking with customers, suppliers and 

colleagues as well as negotiating when considering the different linguistic 

registers; 

� writing skills (e-mails); 

� elaboration of intercultural skills for written and oral communication in a Spanishspeaking 

environment. 

Literature 

Text book: Tano, M. (2009): Expertos. Curso avanzado de español orientado al mundo 

del trabajo. Libro del alumno. Difusión. 

Handouts 

More grammar exercises but not compulsory: Tano, M. (2010): Expertos. Curso 

avanzado de español orientado al mundo del trabajo. Cuaderno de ejercicios. Difusión. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 141



themselves concerning the treated subjects. Therefore videos, tapes and authentic texts 

and situations will be used. With regard to tasks as vehicles for planning, carrying out 

and reporting on language learning and teaching, the didactic elements are: e.g. 

simulations, role-play, classroom interaction, presentations, etc. 

Evaluation 

Assignments, written and oral examinations, presentation 

International Business and Strategic Change (PT) 


Fall 2 IBSC 3 



� know, understand and apply the main tools of strategic management 

� recognise and interpret the interaction of departments, business units and 

organisations 

� evaluate the possibilities of process and corporate management as well as the 

implementation of change 


Strategic Management and Planning, Strategic Controlling and Reporting, Corporate 

Governance and International Conduct 


The global business environment is changing dramatically. Any business operation, whether 

global or local, large or small, is now impacted by developments in the international arena. 

This course is designed to develop skills and awareness for competing effectively in the 

dynamic new global business arena. The focus is on changes taking place in the global 

environment. The course provides both a general overview of the international dimensions 

of management, and a foundation for further, specialized studies in the field. Special topics 

include the new opportunities and challenges facing small businesses in the global 

economy, and the emerging role of China and India. 

The course covers a variety of topic areas related to the contemporary global business 

environment, including: 

� The Changing Demographics of International Business 

� The Challenges of Globalization 

� Country Differences in Political Economy and Culture 

� The Foundations of Cross-Border Trade and Investment 

� Current Developments in Trade and Investment Policies 

� The International Financial Environment 

� Entering Foreign Markets 

� Strategies for Competing in the Global Marketplace 

� Managing and Controlling Global Operations 

� The New Challenge of Emerging Economies 

Literature 

Due to accelerated nature of this course, no textbook is required. Consequently, it is 

particularly important that students attend all of the scheduled lectures. The course is 

structured around the textbook: Charles W.L. Hill, Global Business Today, 5 th edition 

(2008), a readable and timely text which covers both the theoretical concepts of 

contemporary international business and practical applications through company 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 142

examples and mini-case studies. It is recommended both as supplemental reading for the 

present course, and for future reference. References to corresponding portions of the Hill 

text are cited throughout the course syllabus. 


The course consists of a related series of lectures, videos, case studies and discussions, 

designed to integrate theoretical concepts of international business with practical 

application to the contemporary global business environment. 


classroom discussions and case studies – that way, we can all learn from each other. In 

addition, participants will be asked to do a moderate amount of reading, and to prepare a 

brief written or oral submission in advance of most of the class meetings. Suggested 

preparation time: minimum of one hour per class session. 

Evaluation 

Case preparations and presentations, final exam. 

Business and Project Development (PT) 


Fall 2 BPDE 3 



� outline, prepare, draft and report pre-feasibility studies, feasibility studies and 

business plans in the area of the international business development consulting 

� develop strategies to develop a business including interface issues in a company 

as well as the evaluation of the success of applied strategies on the basis of the 

design flexibility within a given corporate culture. 

� explain and apply the most important criteria for evaluation of a business plan 

� develop abilities to recognize potentially valuable opportunities 

� develop the capability of using analytic tools to analyse customers and 

competitors 

� learn how to obtain the resources necessary to pursue these opportunities 

� develop the skills for formulating business strategy and making decisions leading 

to desired results 

� manage and grow the business into a sustainable competitive operation 




Strategic Management and Planning, Strategic Controlling and Reporting, International 

Marketing Management, International Finance, Investment and Budgeting, Strategic 

Purchase and Global Sourcing 



� conception and implementation of pre-feasibility studies, feasibility studies and 

business plans 

� analysis of competition (coherence analysis) 

� market segments (analysis of demand and reception) 

� target groups 

� marketing concept (positioning, pricing, branding and rebranding) 

� distribution concept 

� financial planning and liquidity 

� analysis of opportunities and risks 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 143

� business strategy and policy 

� analysis of investment and operating costs 

� planning and structuring of the revenues 

� description of the IRR, NPV, EBIT, EBITDA ratios 

Literature 

Lecture reader is provided 



classroom discussions and case studies. In addition, participants will be asked to do a 

read up, prepare cases and present solutions in class. 

Evaluation 

Business plan and final written exam 

e-Marketing and New Trends in Sales Techniques (PT) 


Fall 1 EMST 2 


Upon completion of these lectures students should be able to: 

� Recognize the benefits and growth potential of interactive media and digital 

material in creating successful marketing strategies and improving basic business 

processes 

� Explain the economic concept of Moore‘s Law and understand its relevance in 

business planning and strategy 

� Describe customer segmentation (B2C as well as B2B) in the e-marketing mix, 

primarily based on individual behaviour patterns. 

� Recognize Customer Lifetime Value (LTV) as a key concept driving direct and 

indirect online business activities 

� Know about ―communication/promotion‖ in the e-marketing mix 

� Explain how the three factors of usability, credibility and persuasion can 

determine the success or failure of online marketing efforts 

� Be able to describe the concept of bundle pricing and how it can be employed by 

marketers to reduce costs, expand markets and improve performance 

� Understand how new online channels can help firms expand geographic markets, 

product assortment and redesign closeout markets 


International Market Management 


The course will lead the students through the following topics and will provide a deep 

understanding of the following topics: 

� selection and briefing 

� international e-marketing 

� innovative marketing strategies in global competition 

� global e-marketing (e.g. direct mail) 

� database management concepts 

� marketing concepts for web platforms 

� IT procurement and the importance of new sales techniques 

� electronic processing of customs and reporting procedures 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 144


Ward A. Hanson and Kirthi Kalyanam, Internet Marketing & e-Commerce, South-Western 

Cengage Learning, Mason, Ohio, 2007, ISBN-13: 978-0-324-42281-8 

Carolyn Siegel, Internet Marketing, 2 nd edition, Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston, 2006, 

ISBN: 0-618-51999-8 


Lectures including practical examples presented and discussed with the lector. The 

course comprises a combination of formal lecture, colleague counselling and discussing 

cases, placing particular emphasis on student participation. This will support the ambition 

to enhance analytical-, diagnostic-, decision making, and communication skills for 

students. 

Evaluation 

Group assignment and written exam. 

Mergers, Acquisitions and Due diligence (PT) 


Fall 1 MADD 2 


After successful completion of this course students will have a good understanding of: 

� Motivations for mergers 

� The ―M&A Process‖ 

� Approaches to determine ―Company Value‖ 

In addition, students will be able to: 

� Understand the concept of due diligence and its dimensions 

� Deduct the sales price from the profitability of a corporation or a project to 

acquire and take over 

� Structure risks 

� Prepare and analyse contractual arrangements 

� Discuss payment terms including financing terms 

� Analyse success factors 



International Conduct 


The objective of the course is to enable student to understand the entire M&A process 

and how the company value is determined within an M&A transaction. 

The course will give an introduction into different rationales for entering into an M&A 

transaction, explain the process from the first call to closing a deal and explain how the 

purchase price is determined. Students will be given a comprehensive real-life case study 

and be required to demonstrate in a presentation their knowledge of what they have 

learned in the first two sessions. 

The wrap up will then cover issues faced in the real case and deal with M&A related 

questions students may have. 

Literature 

‖Valuation‖ from Tom Copeland, Tim Koller, Jack Murrin - John Wiley & Sons Inc – 

Language: English, ISBN: 0471361909 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 145


This course will be combining theoretical and practical aspects of M&A. It will be taught in 

an interactive manner fostering discussions and requiring the students to perform a 

comprehensive case study (in groups). 

Evaluation 

Case study project 

International Management Simulation (PT) 


Fall 2 IMSI 3 


Changes in society are influencing both the business and the learning culture; therefore, 

the new competence requirements coming from corporate sector are also challenging 

students in their learning behaviors. Good governance of the specific study area is not 

enough, but the student, soon the new employee, is expected to also have e.g. business, 

problem solving, teamwork and decision making competences. 


� Identify and experience communication challenges within virtual working 

environments and differing time zones. 

� Develop understanding for virtual team development processes and team work. 

� Cultivate inter-cultural communication competences. 

� Develop global decision-making capabilities. 

� Practice inter-cultural negotiation tactics within a virtual environment. 

� Utilize virtual communication tools. 

� Develop and implement competitive strategies. 

� Design organization collaborations in global supply chains. 

� Understand the link from the materials process to the monetary process and to 

information flows. 

� Analyze ―bottle-necks‖ and attached problems in companies‘ processes. 

� Assess the efficiency and economic performance of a company. 


Management and Leadership Competence, International Market Management and 

Sourcing, Finance and Controlling, Human Resource and Intercultural Management 


The first meeting is held in order to provide students with an impulse lecture on 

international management, as well as to introduce students to the VIBu RealGame 

business simulation, which presents the core part of the course and creates the base for 

discussions and learning experiences. 

The VIBu RealGame environment is especially designed to enhance learning about virtual 

teamwork, leadership in virtual teams, virtual and cross-cultural communication, and of 

course, the entity and the different processes of a business organization. Other salient 

learning themes include supply-chain management and components of profitability in 

business organizations. 

The actual participation with VIBu RealGame consists of two consecutive simulation 

sessions, held with a break in between. Each participant is assigned to a multinational, 

virtual team consisting of students from other universities. 

The course is held in cooperation with Turku School of Economics at Turku University, 

Finland, as well as the Department of International Management at Johannes Kepler 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 146

University in Linz. Students, partly on an individual base, partly in a group will simulate 

to run a business, guided by the tutors. 

Literature 

Hand-outs will be provided electronically 


The lecturer will provide students with basic information to introduce them to the topic of 

International Management as well as the VIBu RealGame management simulation. 

Students will perform in virtual teams, consisting of team members from all over the 

world to complete the on-line simulation. 

Between the two sessions team assignments are given to each virtual management team 

to reflect together on performance of the company and team, applied strategies, etc. and 

develop to overcome weaknesses and to leverage strength. 

After both simulation sessions participants are asked to reflect on their experiences 

individually (guided questions are given). 

The meetings after the two participation days will be used to discuss and learn from the 

experience as well as to develop strategies to implement learned behavior in real life 

situations. 

All required information as well as links and log-ins will be provided! 

The simulation will last on both days twelve hours; it is required to participate at least six 

hours during this time, whereas scheduling will take place within the teams. 

Evaluation 

Individual reflection reports, virtual team assignment, class team assignment 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 147


Applied Research and Training Semester 


Fall ARTS 18 


The Applied Research and Training Semester (ARTS) is an excellent opportunity to use 

the expertise learned during IMC courses and combine it with real life practice. Students 

will not only gain professional experience but also learn about different company policies 

and processes as well as gain contacts in an international network. During this semester 

students are supposed to start working on their master thesis if possible in co-operation 

with the company or research institution. 




The Applied Research and Training Semester (ARTS) should be completed in the form of 

one of the following options: 

� an internship/work placement (in Austria or abroad) with a company active in a 

relevant business environment covered by the curriculum; 

� a research period at a distinguished research institution (in Austria or abroad) 

� an exchange semester at a university abroad 

Parallel to the chosen option, students are urged to proceed with their research for 

writing their Master thesis. 

Literature 

Guidelines for Students Applied Research and Training Semester (ARTS), Master Degree 

Programmes (full-time) at the School of Business of the IMC University of Applied 

Sciences Krems 

Leitfaden für Wissenschaftliche Arbeiten, Manual for the composition of Academic Papers 


As students are not present at the IMC during the timeframe of the ARTS semester, elearning 

takes place in the form of emails and direct contact with the master thesis 

coach. 

Evaluation 

Student experience report, Master Thesis progress report 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 148


International Management Simulation (FT) 


Spring 2 IMSI 3 


Changes in society are influencing both the business and the learning culture; therefore, 

the new competence requirements coming from corporate sector are also challenging 

students in their learning behaviors. Good governance of the specific study area is not 

enough, but the student, soon the new employee, is expected to also have e.g. business, 

problem solving, teamwork and decision making competences. 


� Identify and experience communication challenges within virtual working 

environments and differing time zones. 

� Develop understanding for virtual team development processes and team work. 

� Cultivate inter-cultural communication competences. 

� Develop global decision-making capabilities. 

� Practice inter-cultural negotiation tactics within a virtual environment. 

� Utilize virtual communication tools. 

� Develop and implement competitive strategies. 

� Design organization collaborations in global supply chains. 

� Understand the link from the materials process to the monetary process and to 

information flows. 

� Analyze ―bottle-necks‖ and attached problems in companies‘ processes. 

� Assess the efficiency and economic performance of a company. 


Management and Leadership Competence, International Market Management and 

Sourcing, Finance and Controlling, Human Resource and Intercultural Management 


The first meeting is held in order to provide students with an impulse lecture on 

international management, as well as to introduce students to the VIBu RealGame 

business simulation, which presents the core part of the course and creates the base for 

discussions and learning experiences. 

The VIBu RealGame environment is especially designed to enhance learning about virtual 

teamwork, leadership in virtual teams, virtual and cross-cultural communication, and of 

course, the entity and the different processes of a business organization. Other salient 

learning themes include supply-chain management and components of profitability in 

business organizations. 

The actual participation with VIBu RealGame consists of two consecutive simulation 

sessions, held with a break in between. Each participant is assigned to a multinational, 

virtual team consisting of students from other universities. 

The course is held in cooperation with Turku School of Economics at Turku University, 

Finland, as well as the Department of International Management at Johannes Kepler 

University in Linz. Students, partly on an individual base, partly in a group will simulate 

to run a business, guided by the tutors. 

Literature 

Hand-outs will be provided electronically 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 149


The lecturer will provide students with basic information to introduce them to the topic of 

International Management as well as the VIBu RealGame management simulation. 

Students will perform in virtual teams, consisting of team members from all over the 

world to complete the on-line simulation. 

Between the two sessions team assignments are given to each virtual management team 

to reflect together on performance of the company and team, applied strategies, etc. and 

develop to overcome weaknesses and to leverage strength. 

After both simulation sessions participants are asked to reflect on their experiences 

individually (guided questions are given). 

The meetings after the two participation days will be used to discuss and learn from the 

experience as well as to develop strategies to implement learned behavior in real life 

situations. 

All required information as well as links and log-ins will be provided! 

The simulation will last on both days twelve hours; it is required to participate at least six 

hours during this time, whereas scheduling will take place within the teams. 

Evaluation 

Individual reflection reports, virtual team assignment, class team assignment 

International Consulting III (FT + PT) 


Spring 2 ICON 3 



� develop customer-specific solutions 

� design customer-specific finance models and project bundles 

� know and handle internal resistance on client‘s side 

� carry out consulting projects in the areas of process management/change/finance 

� analyse processes and provide an external point of view 

� document and report consulting projects 


International Consulting II 



� Strategy Consulting 

� Process Consulting 

� Reorganisation 

� Value Chain Consulting 

� Risk Management 

� Change Management 

� Creative solution development 

� New approaches to consulting 

Literature 

Learning materials will be provided electronically. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 150


This course will be devoted to a New World of Work transformation case study which 

takes place in cooperation with the management of Erste Bank. It will be a real life case. 

This case covers application of consulting tools and methods as mentioned under course 

description, developing new approaches to consulting, risk and change management and 

how to design an integrated consulting approach for a complex consulting assignment. 

Evaluation 

Case study, final oral exam 

Chinese Diploma Level 


Spring 2 CHIN 3 





Languages. 








The main topics of the course will be devoted to: 

� Chinese economic areas 

� Final repetition and consolidation of the written and oral skills 

� Preparation for the final exam 

Literature 








Evaluation 


French Diploma Level 


Spring 2 FREN 3 


Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to discuss general business and 

export related topics using the correct terminology; they will understand economic 

(original) texts and be able to summarize their content and explain specific terms. They 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 151

will be able to apply their technical and linguistic knowledge to evaluate and comment 

little cases. 

According to the set level B2/C1, students will be able to understand export-related 

texts, communicate rather spontaneously, express their opinion clearly and 

understandably and give reasons for or against certain options. They will also be able to 

prepare and lead a discussion on export related topics. 

Achieving the expected learning outcomes means: 

� Students have a clear and understandable pronunciation 

� Students understand subject-related texts, can summarize and comment them in 

their own words 

� Students can express their opinion in appropriate terms and an appropriate way 

� Students have sound grammar control and are able to correct mistakes in 

retrospect 

� Students are able to build arguments logically and in a stringent way 

� Students can communicate without putting stress on either party. 




The course will cover the following main topics: international trade and globalisation; 

export techniques; transports; payments; commercial alliances. Furthermore, 

summarizing and commenting business texts will be trained. Students will also focus on 

structures that help them to present the various details of controversial subjects 

(presenting pros and cons of topics and drawing effective conclusions). All in all, students 

should get a precise picture illustrating the fascinating world of export. 

Literature 

Required text: Script: Le monde du commerce extérieur, script for semester 4 

Dictionary 

Additional Reading: Newspapers and magazines; TV 5 and Internet 



trained through discussions, text studies, group work and assignments. 



understand and react. Exercises will lead to a better understanding of the topics, the 

correct use of the relevant terminology and develop the language competence both in 



based on topic preparation is not only requested but crucial. They will also be trained in 

how to lead a discussion and to react spontaneously and give reasons for or against 

certain options. 

Evaluation 

Written and oral exams, discussion, assignment, group-work 

Russian Diploma Level 


Spring 2 RUSS 3 


Upon completion of the course students will know about: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 152



� specifics of foreign trade between Austria and Russia 

� intercultural competence in negotiations with the Russians 

Furthermore, students will be able to discuss everyday topics relevant for the TRKI-1 

exam. The TRKI-1 exam is recognized as the Russian Language entry requirement for 

Russian institutes of higher education 




The course will focus on the following aspects: 

� reading and interpreting of relevant economic texts; 

� job related communication 

� dealing with intercultural skills for the Russian business world 

� preparation for the final exam. 

Literature 

Students will be provided with handouts 


Authentic texts (e.g. newspaper articles) and audio materials will be used for vocabulary 

and structure input as well as for constant improvement of text comprehension. Active 

speaking will be embedded in real-life situations and practised in form of role plays, 

discussions, presentations etc. with a focus on communicative interaction. 

Evaluation 

Home-exercises, vocabulary / grammar quizzes, final written and oral exam 

Spanish Diploma Level 


Spring 2 SPAN 3 


Having completed this course the students will have improved their linguistic and 

communicative competences in Spanish; they will be able to understand the main ideas 

of complex text on both concrete and abstract topics, including technical discussions in 

his/her field of specialisation. They will be enabled to interact with a degree of fluency 

and spontaneity that makes regular interaction with native speakers quite possible 

without strain for either party. They can produce clear, detailed text on a wide range of 

subjects and explain a viewpoint on a topical issue giving the advantages and 

disadvantages of various options. 

At the end of the semester they will have acquired vocabulary regarding e.g. the 

following subjects: 

� la vida profesional después de los estudios 

� el comercio internacional 

� documentos comerciales y mercantiles 

� negociaciones 

� la comida de negocios – la reunión de equipo 

� diferencias interculturales 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 153




The course is based on the 5 communicative skills: listening and reading comprehension, 

oral and written production, intercultural competences. It pays special attention to the 

vocabulary relevant to the exportation industry. 

Thus, the course will focus on the following areas: 

� Training and development of understanding of text content using articles from 

newspapers and journals 

� Training of general work-related skills such as negotiation techniques with special 

reference to the different language registers 

� Training of written communication in the field of e-mails in regard to the ability to 

decide when that email, what tab to perform a successful communication on a 

professional level 

� development of intercultural competences for a job relevant written and oral 

communication in Spanish-speaking area 

� preparation for the final exam. 

Literature 

Hand-outs elaborated by the lecturer will be the basis of the course. 



themselves concerning the treated subjects. Therefore videos, books, CDs and authentic 

texts and situations will be used. With regard to tasks as vehicles for planning, carrying 

out and reporting on language learning and teaching, the didactic elements are: e.g. 

simulations, role-play, classroom interaction, presentations etc. 

Evaluation 

Assignments, presentations, oral and written examinations 

Individual Specialisation 1: Foreign Trade Techniques and 

Structured Financing (IMB) (FT + PT) 


Spring 2 ISPE 4 


Upon successful completion of this course students will be able to: 

� explain and illustrate foreign trade and financing topics covered in the previous 

semesters of the Master Program 

� apply the concepts to solve case problems. 

� develop solutions to focused problems. 

� integrate aspects from different fields and combine strategies to develop complex 

solutions. 




―Revision Course Topics‖ are designed similar to short case studies that link theoretic 

concepts to the practical application in the business environment. In addition to 

repetition and deepening of subjects, adding backing services (as e.g. provided by AWS) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 154

will extend discussion and possibilities. The lectures are delivered by a set of lecturers 

from different businesses to deliver multiple perspectives and approaches. 

The course will be based on: 

� Application and deepening of concrete examples 

� Critical "review" of the 1 st and 2 nd semesters held lectures on "Foreign Trade 

Techniques" and "Structured Export and Project Financing", including the relevant 

literature for the final examination, current issues, case examples, sample 

calculations, etc. 

� Question and answer session with the goal is the best possible preparation for the 

final examination. 

Literature 

Material supplied by the lecturers 

Baker, W.A. (2008). Users' Handbook for Documentary Credits under UCP 600. 

International Chamber of Commerce (ICC). ISBN-10: 9284200431, ISBN-13: 978- 

9284200436. 

Cook, T.A., Alston, R. & Raia, K. (2004). Mastering Import & Export Management. 

Amacom. ISBN-10: 0814472036, ISBN-13: 978-0814472033. 

Gatti, S. (2007). Project Finance in Theory and Practice - Designing, Structuring, and 

Financing Private and Public Projects. Academic Press. ISBN-10: 9780123736994 , ISBN- 

13: 978-0123736994. 


The course will be conducted in the interactive manner based on various topics 

discussions, illustrative examples, assignments. 

Timely preparation and active participation by students can ensure better training for the 


Evaluation 

Assignment, exam 

Individual Specialisation 2: International Market Management and 

Sourcing (FT + PT) 




Upon completion of the course students will be able to 

� explain and illustrate market (sourcing as well as selling) situations as well as 

� develop complex strategies for solving real-world problems 

� utilise an interdisciplinary approach picturing different fields while 

� apply various concepts to address case problems focusing. 




―Revision Course Topics‖ are designed similar to short case studies that link theoretic 

concepts to the practical application in the business environment. Deepening of core 

subjects like experience effects will extend discussion and possibilities. The lectures will 

include various cases to add different perspectives. 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 155


� Critical "review" of the 1 st and 2 nd semesters held lectures on relevant topics, 

including the relevant literature for the final examination, current issues, case 

examples, sample calculations, etc. 



Literature 

Material supplied by the lecturers 

Doole, I. & Lowe, R. (2008). International Marketing Strategy: Analysis, Development 

and Implementation. 5th edition. Cengage. ISBN-10: 1844807630, ISBN-13: 978- 

1844807635. 

Farris, P.A., Bendle, N.T., Pfeifer, P.E. & Reibstein, D.J. (2008). Marketing Metrics: 50+ 

Metrics Every Manager Needs to Know. Prentice Hall. ISBN-10: 0273722034 , ISBN-13: 

978-0273722038. 

Hair, J.F. (2009). Sales Management: Building Customer Relationships and Partnerships. 

South-Western. ISBN-10: 0538743921, ISBN-13: 978-0538743921. 

Hanson, W.A & Kalyanam, K. (2007). Internet Marketing & e-Commerce. South-Western 

Cengage Learning. ISBN-13: 978-0-324-42281-8. 

Bowersox, D. (2009). Supply Chain Logistics Management. 3rd edition. McGraw-Hill. 

ISBN-10: 0071276173, ISBN-13: 978-0071276177. 

Frohne, P.T. (2007). Quantitative Measurements for Logistics. McGraw-Hill. ISBN-10: 

0071494154, ISBN-13: 978-0071494151. 

Handfield , R.B., Moncka, R.M, Giunipero, L.C. & Patterson, G. (2008). Sourcing and 

Supply Chain Management. 4th edition. Cengage. ISBN-13: 978-0324381399, ISBN-13: 

978-0324381399. 

Nagle, T.T., Hogan, J.E., Zale, J. (2010). The Strategy and Tactics of Pricing: A Guide to 

Growing More Profitably. 5th edition. Prentice Hall. ISBN-10: 9780136106814 , ISBN-13: 

978-0136106814. 

Rolnicki, K. (1997). Managing Channels of Distribution Managing Channels of 

Distribution. Amacom. ISBN-10: 9780814403358, ISBN-13: 978-0814403358. 


This course emphasizes a mixture of presentation, case work and discussion, additional 

group work and utilization of the IMC eDesktop to support communication completes the 

concept. 


acquaint them with an academic and solution-oriented (method and fact driven) 

elaboration of a topic. 

Evaluation 

Case assignments 

Individual Specialisation 3: Finance and Controlling (IMB) (FT + 

PT) 




Upon completion of this course students will repeat and be familiar with financial and 

controlling topics covered in the first and second semester of the Master Program. 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 156


Students will independently prepare ―Revision Course Topics‖ that refer to contents 

covered during their Master studies. The ―Revision Course Topics‖ are design similar to 

short case studies that link theoretic concepts to the practical application in the business 

environment. The instructor will randomly choose students that will discuss their findings 

during class. 



� Critical "review" of the 1 st and 2 nd semesters held lectures on relevant topics, 

including the relevant literature for the final examination, current issues, case 

examples, sample calculations, etc. 



Literature 

Hand-outs will be provided by the lecturer electronically 

F. Mishkin, S. Eakins, Financial Markets & Institutions, 5th edition, 2006, ISBN 0-321- 

30812-3 

Eugene F. Brigham, Michael C. Erhardt, Financial Management – Theory and Practice, 

Thomson 2010 (Students may use an earlier edition from 2005 onwards) 


Face to face sessions will be supplemented by a self-directed E-Learning session, which 

will replace 8 contact hours. Self-directed learning time will give students the opportunity 

to deepen and practice the skills acquired in class. Core issues of E-Learning sessions will 

be an integral part of the final exam. 

Evaluation 

Preparation of the Revision Course Topics, oral exam 

Individual Specialisation 4: International Law and Global Political 

Studies (FT + PT) 




The students will be able to 

� explain and illustrate International Laws and Global Political Studies topics 

covered in the previous semesters of the Master Program 

� analyse trends and developments and prepare suggestions for strategy 

developments 

� integrate aspects from different fields and combine strategies to develop complex 

solutions. 

The prime target of the ISP course is to serve as a preparatory for the Master diploma 

exam. 

Beyond that main academic target, upon successful closure of the course, lays the 

practical applicability; absolvents with a wide variety of specific interests should be able 

to: (i) articulate a well-synthesized but comprehensive view; (ii) compare and contrast 

many dimensions and interpolations of contemporary political, economic and legal affairs 

by classifying their features and analysing static and dynamic elements of those; (iii) 

understand the role and limitations the law and legality plays; (iv) be sensitized enough 

to contextualize specific legal challenges in their professional environment, and suggest 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 157

approaches to address these; (v) appreciate the integrated and interdependent nature of 

development, market, growth, institution/capacity building and governance. 




In this course students will explore and review the merits and limitations of a variety of 

judicial institutes, be it of Private/Business, EU or International Law. Additionally, due 

time will be devoted to the (reformed) EU Institutions. 


selection and interpretation of all the ILAW & GPS- related courses that students have 

attended in the course of their studies. Therefore, the ISP course is to be a middle 

ground between further learning and repeating the already acquired, notably: all what a 

business aspirant needs to know (or better to say: shouldn‘t forget) when joining the 

international corporate business of nowadays. 

Literature 

Required literature will be taken from the Master Literature List 


With this broad a range of topics, one cannot hope to cover all aspects of every issue, 

especially not by the front lecturing. Therefore, the subject of this course invites the 

active and energetic participation of all students. Sometimes, the lecturer will present 

relatively short open comments to focus the discussion. Those discussions will be most 

productive when everyone completes the assigned readings carefully (as beforehand 

indicated in the ILAW Master Literature List) and comes prepared to engage in thoughtful 

exploration of the substantive issues. 

Therefore, the preparation for and participation in class discussions is central to the very 

success of the course and finally to the Master Exam. 

Students are expected to prepare two short analytical Papers. Both papers should be 

submitted by each respective student, and individually presented before the class. 

Evaluation 

Study papers 

Individual Specialisation 5: Chair Human Resource and 

Intercultural Management (FT + PT) 




The case-study method encourages students to think through the largest issues in 

business today — everything from ethics to new business models. By considering real-life 

problems confronted by case studies, students refine their analytical, presentation, 

management and leadership skills. They constitute another form of experiential learning. 

Students will be asked to take on the roles of managers. Through guided discussion, 

students will explore hard decisions to help refine their own values and standards and to 

expand their understanding of the practice of management today. 

Among the most important learning outcomes: 

� Refine analytical skills, as demonstrated by oral argument in class and written 

out-of-class assignments. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 158

� Articulate ideas, analysis and fact in a public presentation; gain confidence and 

practice through the semester. 

� Understand the difficulties of management and leadership, as demonstrated by 

written and oral classwork. 

� Reinforce active listening skills, as demonstrated by response to and further 

development of ideas presented by classmates. 

� Understand current challenges, issues, conflicts and dilemmas in the practice of 

management, as demonstrated by written and oral classwork. 




Case-based learning is a rather modern teaching concept. "Cases recount real life 

business or management situations that present business executives with a dilemma or 

uncertain outcome. The case describes the scenario in the context of the events, people 

and factors that influence it and enables students to identify closely with those involved". 

Case-based learning on the basis of real life situations will make an important 

contribution to the development of problem-solving skills needed by 4th semester master 

students when entering the job market. 

Literature 

All case materials will be distributed on the eDesktop! 

Ellet, W. (2007). The Case Study Handbook: How to Read, Discuss, and Write 

Persuasively About Cases. Boston: Harvard Business Press 

Dowling, P. J., Festing, M., and Engle A. D. (2008). International Human Resource 

Management: Managing People in a Multinational Context. London: Cengage Learning 

Ciulla, J. B. (2004). Ethics: The Heart of Leadership. London: Praeger 

Daft, R. L., and Marcic D. (2011) Management: The New Workplace. South-Western 

Jacob, N. (2003). Intercultural Management: MBA Masterclass, Kogan Page 

Kotter, J. P. (1996). Leading Change. Boston: Harvard Business School Press 

Schein, E. H. (2010). Organizational Culture and Leadership. Jossey-Bass Business & 

Management 

Senge, P. M. (2006). The Fifth Discipline: The Art & Practice of the Learning 

Organization. Crown Business 


Case-based learning integrates definition-based learning, solution-based learning, and 

problem-based learning. And like the problem-based learning, this is also considered an 

iterative situation – through routine, problem solving, problem orientation, and 

innovation. In the case-based pedagogical model every case reflect needs of an 

organization or a user, because needs are stable points in a society. 

The course will require students to analyze cases independently before class and to 

prepare a written analysis beforehand. The classes themselves will be organized entirely 

around student discussion and team presentations of views, which will be subjected, to 

the questioning of others. 

Evaluation 

Written case analysis, presentation 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 159

TOURISM & LEISURE MANAGEMENT – Bachelor 

Programme 


Accounting I 


Fall 2 ACC 3 



� understand the principles of accounting and how the various sections of an 

accounting system co-ordinate 

� realise the effects of accounting rules 

� be able to establish simple annual accounts incorporating accounting adjustments 

� distinguish between private and public limited companies 

� be able to prepare a basic set of company accounts 


None 


This first semester will focus on the basics and principles of accountancy. Accounting 

rules, the recording of business transactions, and the preparation of a trial balance and 

basic final accounts. Yearend adjustments as well as an introduction to manufacturing 

accounts and the final accounts of limited companies are the major tasks for this period. 

The acquired theory will be used to produce the final accounts in a comprehensive 

example at the end of this course. 

Even though the course is aimed at an understanding of international accounting in 

English, it is a requirement that the terms and procedures used are 

also understood in German by German speaking students. 

Literature 

DYSON, J.R (2007): Accounting for Non-Accounting Students. 7th ed. Pitman Publishing. 

Schmidgall, S.R. (2006): Hospitality Industry Managerial Accounting, Educational 

Institute of the American Hotel and Motel Association. 

Evaluation 

Examinations will involve solving problems, using the tools and techniques learned and 

practised during class or in assignment form. 

There will be no problems or cases that are identical to those dealt with during class. 

There will be no multiple choice or true/false questions. 

Assignments, home- and groupwork, Homework assignments are intended to provide an 

opportunity to employ the concepts and techniques covered 

in class. These assignments also provide important insight into how well the material has 

been mastered. Solutions for each assignment will be made 

available after the homework is turned in. Assignments are not accepted late. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 160



and seminar style discussions. In addition material specifically 

prepared for self-study will be provided online and study time (equivalent to 4 contact 

hours) needs to be allocated for this. An extra 50 minutes per 

week will be dedicated to general review and additional exercises. Depending on the 

material covered in the lectures the exercise work will consist of 

individual problem solving, group work or dealing with case studies. 

Accounting Exercise I 


Fall 1 ACC Ex. 0 


See ―Accounting I‖ 


None 



Literature 


Evaluation 



These classes will be dedicated to reviewing the topics covered in class and doing 


students which would like to deepen their understanding and practice their skills. 

More information can be found in the syllabus of the "Introduction to Accounting" course. 

Software Applications I 


Fall 1 SWA 2 


After this course students are able to work with modern operating systems and networks, 

text processors and presentation programs. 

Spreadsheets allow you to organize, calculate and analyze data. In this course you will 

learn how to create worksheets, enter data, use formulas and functions, format and 

print, as well as advanced topics like Pivot tables and data analysis. Other topics covered 

include: 

� working with Excel menus and toolbars 

� relative and absolute cell references 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 161

� working with large and multiple worksheets 

� creating charts 

� data analysis with Excel 

� Pivot Tables 

Knowledge you should have at the end of the course: We expect a knowledge-level that 

is equal to an EDCL Advanced Certification. 


None 


Applied Computer Technologies (ACT) is about software and IT-based Knowledge 

Management. Knowledge management seen as ―art to store and retrieve information‖ 

becomes more and more vital to organizations. Office applications – like those provided 

by Microsoft (or other manufactures) – offer the possibility to create masses of 

information that needs to be organized in an intelligent way. In the course of the ACT- 

Trainings in the study field ―Tourism and Leisure Management‖ we will discuss these 

topics embedded in the following framework: 

� Word processing, presentations, operating system 

� Windows Vista 

� Word 

� PowerPoint 

� Additional Topics: Security, Networks, Search Engines 

―Introduction to knowledge management with standard computer applications‖ 

Knowledge management seen as ―art to store and retrieve information‖ becomes more 

and more vital to organisations. Office applications – like those provided by Microsoft (or 

other manufactures) – offer the possibility to create masses of information that needs to 

be organized in an intelligent way. In the course of the ACT-Trainings in the study field 

―Tourism and Leisure management‖ we will discuss these topics. 

Literature 

All scripts / courseware materials are available free, without a fee, for students in the 

downloads area. 

Scripts by „Cheltenham Courseware― 

IDG-Books Worldwide: „Computer simplified‖ 

Application Help 

Internet (Search Engine, Office Online,…) 

Evaluation 

written exam 


Lectures 

Seminar-style exercises 

Group work / Seminar Papers / Presentations 

Discussions 

Oral Repetitions 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 162

Chinese Exercise I 


Fall 1 CHI Ex. 0 







Literature 


Evaluation 




Chinese I 




In our beginner's course you will acquire elementary skills in written and oral Chinese, 

which means mastering basic vocabulary and sentence patterns. Accordingly, the main 

focus of the course is put on phonetics and character writing. The characters to be 

learned are the simplified characters which are used in the People´s Republic of China, 

Hanyu pinyin is the standard phonetic transcription which will be used throughout the 

course. At the end of the semester we will be able to carry out simple conversations on a 

limited range of topics, and master Chinese for common everyday purposes. 


None 


Chinese, especially at the beginning, is a language that requires continuous practice. 


able to follow the course. After the first meetings you will be able to understand the 

characteristics and structure of the Chinese language. The following meetings we will 

accomplish one lesson in two meetings.You will acquire basic scills in distinguishing 

between the 4 tones in Chinese, and pronounce them accurately. You will be able to 

communicate (listen, speak, read, and write) in simple Chinese and recognize and write 

approximately 180 Chinese characters. Thematic areas include: greetings; introducing 

oneself; asking about occupation, citizenship etc.; talking about date and time, classroom 

language 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 163

Literature 



Script: Bazant-Kimmel, Christina: Introduction to Chinese Character Writing. 

Additional material will be handed out. 

E-Learning 

Evaluation 

Midterm test 

Final Exam 

Homework and quizzes 






aspects of Chinese culture. (e.g. Chinese food, history, politics, geography...) 

French Exercise I 


Fall 1 FRE Ex. 0 


To enable the students to handle with everyday situations in France, including both oral 

and written skills. 

Course Description: 

Students get the opportunity to practice the grammatical chapters treated in the course 

―French 1‖ and to speak as freely as possible in French dialogues and different authentic 

situations. 


ERR Level B2 


The course is based on vivid interaction between the students and the teacher. 

Students get the opportunity to improve their knowledge on various oral texts and to use 


Literature 

Dossier: Le point sur la grammaire francaise ; Mentor Französisch (Langenscheidt); 

Websites, e.g. « Sprachwerkstatt » 

Evaluation 

none 


The course is based on vivid interaction between the students and the teacher. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 164

Students get the opportunity to improve their knowledge on various oral texts and to use 


French I 




This course is to provide the students with an overall view of France and the French as 

business partner and give them a first insight into French as business language. After 

completing the course students will be able to have a fluent conversation in common 

situations of business life, they will be able to present various social and economic 

aspects typical of France, they will manage to understand general statements on France 

and they can describe general economic contexts. 

Differences in language competence shall be evened out and thus grammar skills will be 

reinforced and the overall knowledge of grammar completed. 


ERR Level B2 


The course will start from an intermediate level. France and the French will be viewed 

from different angles such as France – the country and its people, France – the tourism 

destination, France – the business partner. The three economic sectors will be viewed in 

more detail. Furthermore, topics of current interest will be treated. Particular grammar 

items will be revised. 

Literature 

Required text: 

Scripts: Le Truc Français, semester 1 Le point sur la grammaire française, Dictionary 

(English -French/French-English) 

Additional readings: 

Newspapers and magazines (e.g.: Les Echos, Les Alternatives Economiques, Le Point……) 

Dictionnaire Economique 

Evaluation 

Grammar Test 

Final test 

Homework, assignments, presentations 





course topics, discussions, group-works and presentations the students will be 

encouraged to express themselves as often as possible and improve their oral skills. 

Every student must prepare an oral summary of a meeting. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 165

Principles of Management I 


Fall 2 PROM 3 


� Provide students with relevant information regarding recent events that have 

reshaped the world of organizations and management. 

� Show students mistakes managers have made, how they addressed the 

mistakes, and the outcome of their actions. 

� Integration of Entrepreneurship and E-business e.g. empowerment, 

technology, E-commerce, E-organizations and diversity. 

� Provide students with a comprehensive look at contemporary topics that affect 

changes and innovations in business and entrepreneurial ventures. 

� Enhance student's diagnostic, analytical, investigative and decision-making 

skills. 

� Familiarize students with the goals, requirements, benefits and obstacles to 

value chain management. 


None 


This course covers the principle concepts of management to provide students with a solid 

foundation for understanding key issues. Organized around the four traditional functions 

of management - planning, organizing, leading, and controlling - it reflects current trends 

in management and organizations, and presents the latest research studies in the field. 

In the first semester the course addresses managing in our contemporary world, 

foundations of planning and decision making, basic organization designs, human resource 

management and change management. In the second semester the course covers 

organizational behavior, leadership, control and value chain management. 

Literature 

Robbins, S.P. & Coulter, M. (2007): Management, 9th Edition, Prentice Hall. 

(International Edition) 

Articles & power-point slides of the lecture are made available on the students' eDesktop. 

Evaluation 

Final exam 


The course involves a combination of formal lecture and case discussions, placing 

particular emphasis on student participation.Students are expected to prepare for each 

session by working through the relevant chapter(s) in advance of class to enhance 

effectiveness & efficiency of the formal lecture. 

Most sessions will include a short case study in order to foster communication-, 

diagnostic-, analytical-, investigative- and decision-making skills. These cases will be 

usually distributed in advance and students will be expected to be prepared to discuss 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 166

them in class. All students must come prepared to all case study discussions. This is an 

integral part of the course and the material covered is examinable. 

German for beginners 


Fall 2 GER Beg. 2,5 


After this course the students will be able to communicate on a basic level in some 

everyday situations. They can introduce themselves and others, talk about their interests 

and hobbies, make appointments, give an opinion, order food and drinks, tell about their 

appartment and furniture. Furthermore, students will learn how to fill in a form, write 

postcards and short letters. 


None 


In this Course students will learn the foreign language the communicative way. Written 

and oral texts will correspond to typical situations of German everyday life. 

Within these contexts phrases and structures are trained which are important for later 

usage.Drawings and pictures help with the understanding of the texts and are as well 

used to build up new texts and dialogues . 

The course also includes and provides a lot of information about German and Austrian 

daily life, society and culture. 

Literature 

Themen aktuell 1. Kursbuch + Arbeitsbuch mit Audio-CD. Hueber Verlag 2003. ISBN 3- 

19-181690-9. 

Additional Sources for Individual Studies: 

http://www.hueber.de/shared/uebungen/themen-aktuell/lerner/uebungen/ 

http://www.hueber.de/sixcms/list.php?page=lehren_aktuell1_the 

http://www.hueber.de/shared/uebungen/schritte/lerner/uebungen/index.php 

Dreyer/Schmitt: A Practice Grammar of German. 

Evaluation 

Regular Homework 

Regular vocabulary and grammar tests 

Final exam (written and oral) 


The course aims at presenting a great number of situational dialogues with the help of 

audio texts, and at the same time providing the necessary language structure. Great 

emphasis is put on enlarging the vocabulary and using it in dialogic speaking. Grammar 

is introduced to make comprehension and text production easier and more effective. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 167

German intermediate 


Fall 2 GER Interm. 2,5 


After this course the students will be able to communicate and discuss from several 

points of view certain themes, touching everyday life. They can talk for instance about 

fashion, people and social problems, education and job, some aspects in business, family 

and relationship. 

Furthermore they are able to read newspaper articles and write comments, read job 

announcements and write a CV. 


GER Beginners 


In this course students will learn the foreign language the communicative way. Written 



usage. Drawings and pictures help with the understanding of the texts and are as well 

used to build up new texts and dialogues. 



Literature 

Required Text: 

Themen aktuell 2. Kursbuch+Arbeitsbuch mit Audio CD. Hueber Verlag 2004. ISBN 3-19- 

181691-7 

Additional Reading: 


http://www.hueber.de/sixcms/list.php?page=lehren_aktuell1_the&id_nav=band2 

http://www.noen.at/ 

http://www.krone.at/ 

http://diepresse.com/ 

http://derstandard.at/ 

http://www.orf.at/ 

Evaluation 

Regular Homework 

Regular tests 

Final exam (written and oral) 






FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 168

Tourism and Leisure Management I 


Fall 2 TLM 2 


Tourism and Leisure 1 is the first of two subjects that form a core foundation for the 

Bachelor degree in Tourism and Leisure Management. Students are introduced to the 

various interdisciplinary approaches, perspectives and challenges that apply in the study 

of tourism. This course provides a comprehensive introduction to all facets of tourism 

with the necessary guidelines of the knowledge and skills for the tourism industry. 

Emphasis is given to the structure, component activities and environment of the travel 

trade sector. 

� Define Tourism and Leisure and appreciate its status as one of the world‘s 

most important economic sectors 

� Describe the historical development of tourism 

� Explain the basic characteristics of the tourism industry and its main sectors 

� Discuss economic, environmental and socio-cultural impacts of tourism 

� Describe trends within the field of tourism 


None 


Tourism is an increasingly widespread and complex activity, which requires sophisticated 

management to realize its full potential as a positive and sustainable economic, 

environmental, social and cultural force. This interactive lecture provides a general 

introduction to tourism and leisure. Definitions will be provided and the student will 

receive an initial appreciation of the importance of tourism and leisure as an economic 

sector at a global and national level. 

Literature 

Scripts are provided by the lecturer. 

Waver, David; Laura Lawton: Tourism Management. John Wiley & Sons, Australia, Milton 

2006; 

Holloway, J.Christopher; Neil Taylor: The Business of Tourism. London 2006; 

Cook, Yale, Marqua (2006); Tourism-The Business of Travel, Pearson, Prentice Hall, New 

Jersey. 

Leonard J. L., Jenkins, C. L. (1997); An Introduction to Tourism, Oxford. 

Evaluation 

group assignments 

individual final exam 


Main topics of the course will be discussed in the classroom. Attendance to lectures is 

highly recommended and participation in class discussions will be admired. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 169

Italian Exercise I 


Fall 1 ITA Ex. 0 


On successful completion of the course the students will be able to 

� introduce themselves 

� ask and answer questions about personal details, their likes and preferences, 

their habits, what they do in their free time 

� describe in simple terms aspects of their immediate environment 

� speak about something that happened in the past 

� deal with everyday life situations like eating in a restaurant and booking 

accomodation 

� find specific information in simple everyday material such as menus and 

advertisements 

� understand simple written texts on the topics dealt with in the unit contents 

� produce simple written texts like postcards, e-mails, personal letters and 

simple compositions 

� fill in forms with personal details 


None 


The foundation course takes the students up to ‖intermediate‖ level in three semesters. 

The course is therefore fast and demanding and requires steady work throughout the 

semester . The objective of the first semester is to reach essential communicative 

competence as basic user in the private and public domain (everyday life situations). 

During the course the students will learn to interact in simple conversations and to deal 

with everyday life situations. Further the students will learn to find specific information in 

simple everyday material and practise the comprehension of short simple texts. They will 

also produce simple written texts. 

Literature 

REQUIRED TEXT: 

ZIGLIO-RIZZO, Espresso 1, Units 1 – 5, 7 

1° SEMESTRE-MATERIALE INTEGRATIVO (copies of the enlarged topics of the units in the 

book; found in the IMC library) 

Evaluation 

None 


The course consists of LECTURES and EXERCISES. 

LECTURES 

Through the use of different media (e.g.cassettes, CDs, over-head, written material etc.) 

the course introduces the students to essential communicative techniques as well as to 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 170

important language structures of the Italian language. The students will work 

individually, in pairs, groups and in plenary. 

EXERCISES 


four basic skills: reading, listening, writing and speaking. The students will work 


NB: EXERCISES ARE NOT COMPULSORY, BUT THEY ARE VITAL IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE 

THE GOAL OF THE SEMESTER! 

Italian I 


Fall 2 ITA 2,5 



� introduce themselves 

� ask and answer questions about personal details, their likes and preferences, 

their habits, what they do in their free time 

� describe in simple terms aspects of their immediate environment 

� speak about something that happened in the past 

� deal with everyday life situations like eating in a restaurant and booking 

accomodation 

� find specific information in simple everyday material such as menus and 

advertisements 

� understand simple written texts on the topics dealt with in the unit contents 

� produce simple written texts like postcards, e-mails, personal letters and 

simple compositions 

� fill in forms with personal details 


None 



The course is therefore fast and demanding and requires steady work 

throughout the semester. The objective of the first semester is to reach essential 

communicative competence as basic user in the private and public domain (everyday life 

situations). During the course the students will learn to interact in simple conversations 

and to deal with everyday life situations . Further the students will learn to find specific 

information in simple everyday material and practise the comprehension of short simple 

texts. They will also produce simple written texts. 

Literature 


ZIGLIO-RIZZO, Espresso 1, Units 1 – 5, 7 

1° SEMESTRE-MATERIALE INTEGRATIVO (copies of the enlarged topics of the units in the 

book; found in the IMC library) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 171

Evaluation 

Examinations (1 written exam, 1 oral exam) 

Assignments 


The course consists of LECTURES and EXERCISES. 

LECTURES 

Through the use of different media (e.g.cassettes, CDs, over-head, written material etc.) 

the course introduces the students to essential communicative techniques as well as to 

important language structures of the Italian language. The students will work 


EXERCISES 


four basic skills: reading, listening, writing and speaking. The students will work 


Law I 


Fall 2 LAW 2 


Students should acquire an overview and understanding of the basic concepts and 

principles of law playing a role in tourism and leisure management; introduction into 

legal language. This course will allow students to enter into more profound, sectorspecific 

studies in the 2nd semester (Specialised Tourism Law). 


None 


The course provides with general and basic information and presents the main features 

of different branches of law relevant in tourism and leisure management. 

The course is divided into five main parts (Introduction, Public Law & European Union 

Law, Criminal Law, Private Law, and Substantive European Community Law); the key 

problems thereof will be outlined. 

Literature 

The lecturers will provide with handouts. 

Additional References: Horspool/Humphreys, European Union Law4 (2006) 

Hausmaninger, (2003): The Austrian Legal System, Springer; 

Graf (et. al.), Business Law in Austria [1996], 

Heidinger, Introduction to the Law and Language of the European Union [1998]. 

Evaluation 

Midterm Test, Final Test 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 172


The lecturer will present a guide on the complex body of law, especially European Union 

law, and will make students familiar with understanding of legal problems and ways to 

solve them. Discussions are intended. Students are expected to do private studies. 

Marketing I 


Fall 2 MKE 3 


In modern business, marketing represents a fundamental philosophy that must be 

implemented at all levels and in all functional areas of a company. This marketing course 

shall provide participants with a comprehensive understanding of marketing as a 

philosophy as well as with knowledge on current developments. Furthermore the course 

covers the practical tools for managing marketing in increasingly complex business 

settings. Marketing I and II shall serve the student as a systematic analytical framework. 

Essentially, the following objectives shall be attained: 

1) Demonstrate the scope of marketing and develop an understanding of its role and 

impact in business, 

2) Introduce key marketing terms and fundamental concepts and tools, 

3) Analyze examples from marketing practice and apply the concepts and tools presented 

to real-life problems; 


None 


The course is divided into three blocks. In block A the students get to know the 

fundamentals of marketing (marketing philosophy & environment, understanding 

customers, gathering information;). Block B is concerned with strategic marketing 

(marketing management, target marketing;). Block C treats operative marketing 

(product, price, place, promotion;) and is to be dealt with in the second semester. 

Literature 

Kotler, P. & Keller, K.L. (2008): Marketing Management, 13th Edition, Prentice Hall; 

(International Edition). Students may also use the 12th Edition (2006) 

Kuester, C, & Krohmer, S. H. (2008): Marketing Management: A Contemporary 

Perspective, Mc. Graw Hill; 

Articles and power-point slides of the lecture are made available on the students' 

eDesktop. 

Evaluation 

Final Exam 


The course involves a combination of formal lecture and class discussions, placing 

particular emphasis on student participation. Students are expected to prepare for each 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 173

session by working through the relevant chapter(s) in advance of class to enhance 

effectiveness & efficiency of the formal lecture. 

Personality Training I 


Fall 1 PT 1 


This first semester personality training workshop will give you a solid introduction to the 

broad field of perception, communication and presentation. After two days of intensive 

training you will know how to: 

� broaden your perception 

� create an environment of appreciation 

� strengthen your self-confidence 

� speak in front of an audience 

� introduce yourself in three minutes 

� analyze and improve your body language 

� give a presentation that will be remembered 

� apply the five finger rhetoric 

� give and receive quality feedback 

� use your voice in a powerful way 


None 


Knowing how to communicate in an effective and professional way is a must in today's 

business world. This workshop will support you in finding your very personal way of 

communicating and presenting yourself, speaking in front of an audience, successfully 

mastering stressful situations, or even handle a complete blackout. The course is divided 

into several theoretical parts and a large number of practical exercises. This training 

lecture is going to prepare you for the coming six semesters as well as for a challenging 

job in the tourism industry. 

Literature 

You Are the Message by Roger Ailes with Jon Kraushar 

ISBN 0-385-26542-5 

Currency and Dubleday 1995 

The Definitive Book of Body Language by Allan and Barbara Pease 

ISBN-10: 0553804723 

B&T, 2006 

Körpersprache des Erfolgs by Samy Molcho 

ISBN-10: 3720526569 

Ariston Verlag 2005 

Set Your Voice Free by Roger Love with Donna Fraser 

ISBN 0-316-44179-1 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 174

Little, Brown and Company 2003 

Evaluation 

None 


At the beginning of every lecture there will be a brief theoretical introduction to each 

topic given by the instructor. Depending on the actual subject matter, the practical part 

of the workshop will then give you the possibility to try out what you have just learned. 

The instructor will give you instant, high quality feedback and useful hints on how it is 

done in ―real life―. All this is done in an environment of appreciation and trust. Business 

attire will be the dress code for day two of the workshop when students are asked to hold 

their final five minutes presentation. 

Russian Exercise I 


Fall 1 RUS Ex. 0 







No assessment of the exercises! 

Participation is strongly recommended as the exercises complement the main lecture. 

For detailed description see main course! 

Literature 


Evaluation 

None 



Russian I 




To give an introduction to Russian in order to enable a businessman to cope with 

everyday situations in a Russian speaking country, including oral and written skills. 


None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 175


A Russian course for beginners aiming at teaching basic Russian in a communicative way, 

including numerous dialogues, listening and reading comprehension, but also providing 

the grammar necessary for further intensive studies. Written work is intended to 

consolidate oral skills and facilitate correct use of Russian. The course also includes 



Literature 


9780131986282 


Robin): ISBN 9780131986299 

Evaluation 

Regular vocabulary tests 

Regular homework 

Mid-term test (written) 

Final test (written) 


After the introduction of Russian letters the course aims at presenting a great number of 

typical situational dialogues with the help of audio texts (cassettes), automatizing the 

situations, at the same time providing the necessary language structure. Great emphasis 

is put on enlarging the vocabulary as fast as possible. Grammar is introduced to make 

comprehension and text production easier and more effective. The situational dialogues 

are embedded in typical everyday situations. 

Spanish Exercise I 


Fall 1 SPA Ex. 0 


Practice and demonstrate the communicative competence as basic users in the private 

and public domain (everyday life situations). 

Analyse the basic elements of Spanish grammar. 

Employ Spanish for every day oral communication, vocabulary and structure. 


See ―Spanish I‖ 



Students get the opportunity to practise the chapters treated in the course "Spanish I". 





lecture. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 176

Literature 

See ―Spanish I‖ 

Evaluation 

None 




The course is based on vivid interaction between the students and the teacher. Teaching 

by practice and interactive learning through dialogue, role playing and encouragement of 

vocabulary development and correct pronunciation while explaining the culture 

background of the Spanish speaking countries. 





Spanish I 




Recognize and use basic sentences related to personal areas, like very basic personal and 

family information, local geography and shopping. 

Describe in simple terms aspects of companies. 

Report the most relevant social and economic aspects of Spanish speaking countries. 

Perform simple tasks (short letters, interviews, dialogues, descriptions, etc) in topics 

related to their daily experience. 

Use every day vocabulary and basic structure. 


None 



Learning Spanish should result in a far reaching ability of communication within and 

beyond a given field of knowledge. 

The students should have directs contacts –orally and in writing- with Spanish texts, 

exchange opinions, and be capable to receive, understand and pass on information about 

various sections of their every day life and their social, cultural and professional 

environment. 

To achieve this, the following targets will be aimed for: 

Mastering the four basic linguistics aptitudes: 

� Listening and understanding 

� Speaking 

� Reading and understanding 

� Expressing themselves in writing 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 177

An introspective understanding of how Spanish as a language functions as a means of 

communication and of expressing the mentality of Spanish and Latino American speaking 

people. 

A basic knowledge of the culture of Spain and the Spanish speaking countries of Latino 

America. 

Emphasis is on oral communication using every day vocabulary and basic structure, but 


are part of the programme as a whole. Exercises are not compulsory but they are vital in 

order to achieve the goal of the semester. Their attendance is therefore highly 

recommended. 

Literature 

Socios 1 Nueva Edición. Libro del alumno+CD. Difusión, Barcelona. 

Socios 1 Nueva Edición. Cuaderno de ejercicios +CD. Difusión, Barcelona. 


It is highly advisable that the students buy a good dictionary. 

Evaluation 

Homework 

Midterm Test 

Final examination: written and oral 



users and learners of a language primarily as "social agents": members of society who 



context. We speak of "tasks" in so far as the actions are performed by one or more 




Statistics I 


Fall 1 STAT 2 


At the completion of the courses students will 

� understand the meaning of the terms elements, variables, and observations as 

they are used in statistics. 

� understand the difference between qualitative and quantitative data. 

� know about the sources of data and possible errors that can arise in data. 

� know the meaning of descriptive and inferential statistics. 

� be able to distinguish between a population and a sample. 

� understand the role a sample plays in making statistical inferences about the 

population. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 178

� be able to prepare frequency distributions, cross-tabulations, bar graphs, pie 

charts, dot plots, stem-and-leaf plots, histograms, and scatter 

� diagrams. 

� understand measures of central location (mean, median, mode) and measures of 

variability (range, percentiles, interquartile range, variance, 

� standard deviation, and coefficient of variation). 

� understand the concept of skewness of distribution, Chebyshev‘s theorem, and 

the empirical rule. 

� be able to prepare and understand five-number summaries and box plots. 

� understand the role probability information plays in the decision-making process. 

� understand probability as a numerical measure of the likelihood of occurrence. 

� know methods commonly used for assigning probabilities and understand when 

they should be used. 

� know how to use the laws that are available for computing the probabilities of 

events. 


None 


The purpose of this lecture is to give students a conceptual introduction to the field of 

descriptive statistics and its many applications in business and economics. 

Literature 

Recommended textbook (interactive e-book) 

Paul Velleman: ActivStats, 7/E. Addison-Wesley (Pearson Higher Education) 

Additional reading 

Richard De Veaux, Paul Velleman, David Bock : Intro Stats, 3/E. Addison-Wesley 

(Pearson Higher Education) 

Evaluation 

Assignments and final exam 


Course material will be passed over through lecture and presentation 

hands-on exercises 

self study 

International Tourism Markets 


Fall 2 ITM 3 


1. Gain comprehensive understanding of global tourism regions and destinations; 

2. Assess and evaluate the flow of international leisure tourism markets; 

3. Examine various market segments in global tourism regions; 

4. Analyze various strategies used by destinations to market and attract leisure markets; 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 179

5. Use selected leisure marketing case studies to illustrate applied marketing principles; 

and 

6. To provide evaluations and assessments which ensure students‘ ability to clearly and 

succinctly account for the co content. 


None 


Global Tourism Regions; Regional Distribution of International Tourism; Location of Major 

Tourism Destinati and Gateways in North America, Western Europe, Caribbean and Latin 

America, Africa, Australia/South Pacific, Asia and Mi East; Spatial Variations of Tourist 

Flows and Tourism Development; Major tourism and leisure market segments 

Literature 

Boniface, Brian and Chris Cooper, Worldwide Destinations: The Geography of Travel & 

Tourism; Butterworth-Heinem Oxford, UK, 4th Edition (2005) 

Atlas: Komiczky, Peter; World Travel Atlas, 7th Edition (1999) 

Hammond (Publisher) Explorer World Atlas, 2002 Edition 

Evaluation 

tba 


Course delivery will consist of lecture presentations, video reviews and group exercises. 

Due to the intensive natur the course, students are required to attend all lectures and 

to arrive in class on time. Advance preparation of real assignments and take-home 

assignments are essential to successful completion of this course. 

Research Methods 


Spring 2 RESM 3 


The lecture will provide students with a basic understanding of scientific theories and 

academic thinking. The main focus is put on the basic tools and know-how to write 

scientific papers and other publications. Special emphasis will be set on the upcoming 

work (thesis writing) to successfully complete the studies of the current program. 

After completion of the course, students should be able to differ between qualitative and 

quantitative research as well as have the ability to work with secondary data. 

The progress of the development of the development of scientific papers as well as the 

formal guidelines of a thesis will be explained to provide students with the necessary 

knowledge of how to write their papers/thesis during their studies and for their academic 

career. 


None 


―Scientific work‖ – what is meant by? 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 180

To start up, some background on scientific theories and academic thinking will be given 

to categorize economics within the scientific theories. Next the basics of how to work 

scientifically will be explained whereas the main parts would be how to develop and 

indentify a research problem and to formulate research questions and hypothesis. To get 

the needed skills for writing up seminar papers and bachelor thesis students will learn the 

basic essentials of research in terms of how to look up and find the adequate literature. 

After that the structure of the writing workflow will be given and the requirements 

regarding structure and form/layout of a research report will be highlighted. Within the 

last part of the lecture quantitative and qualitative research methods will be explained 

and discussed. 

Literature 

J. Veal, „Research methods for leisure and tourism‖ 3rd Edition, Pearson Education 

―Manual for academic research‖ Download FHelis 

Presentation material will be made available on eDesktop 

Evaluation 

Research Proposal 

Exam 

E-Learning requirements 


According to the short time of the lecture there will be the main emphasis on 

presentation during the in class meetings lightened up by discussions on some of the 

topics. 

Practical work will mainly be done for the E-learning part of the lecture as well as a 

research proposal has to be developed by each student. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 181


Accounting Exercise II 


Spring 1 ACC Ex. 0 


See ―Accounting II‖ 





Literature 


Evaluation 

None 


These classes will be dedicated to reviewing the topics covered in class and doing 


students which would like to deepen their understanding and practice their skills. 

Accounting II 


Spring 2 ACC 3 


The course is designed to provide an in-depth knowledge about, and skill in, financial 

accounting using the British accountancy system in principle but also applying to 

IAS/IFRS and creating awareness for US-GAAP rules. Furthermore a first excursion into 

managerial accounting and explicitly into the accounting aspects of financial planning is 

made. 

After participation the students should: 

� be able to prepare a basic set of company accounts for manufacturers and service 

providers 

� use key ratios and other methods of accounts analysis 

� be able to "manage" working capital 

� get an understanding of basic cost concepts 

� produce annual operating, cash and capital budgets 


ACC 1 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 182


Financial performance and financial reporting will be the major topics of this semester. 

The students will be introduced to the basic tools necessary to analyze a business and, 

therefore, to make more enlightened managerial decisions. Using the basic accounting 

statements, the student should be able to dissect a company, isolate areas of strengths 

and weaknesses and make recommendations on how to resolve the weaknesses and 

capitalize on the strengths. 

Literature 


DYSON, J.R: Accounting for Non-Accounting Students. 7th ed. Pitman Publishing 

Lecturer handouts (All handouts, exercises, results to exercises and other information will 

be made available on the IMC eLearning platform). 

Dictionaries: 

A guide to the jargon, concepts and the uncertainties of Accounting: 

NOBES Christopher: Pocket Accounting. The Economist Books 

A detailed introduction to British accounting: 

WOOD Frank: Business Accounting I. 11th ed. Prentice Hall 2008 

Understanding Accounting: 

RICE Anthony: Accounts demystified. Prentice Hall 2007 

Internet: 

Prentice Hall‘s student resources: 

http://wps.pearsoned.co.uk/ema_uk_he_dyson_accnas_7 

Evaluation 

Exam, Assignments 


The course consists of a mix of classroom lectures, group work and discussions and also 

some self-learning units accompanied by the lecturer using eLearning tools and the IMC 

eDesktop/Courseware. An extra 50 minutes per week will be dedicated to review and 

additional exercises. Depending on the material covered in the lectures the exercise work 

will consist of individual problem solving, group work or dealing with case studies. 

Software Applications II 


Spring 1 SWA 1 


After this course students are able to work with databases and web based collaboration 

tools. 


ACTE 2 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 183

Applied Computer Technologies (ACT) is about software and IT-based Knowledge 

Management. Knowledge management seen as ―art to store and retrieve information‖ 

becomes more and more vital to organizations. Office applications – like those provided 

by Microsoft (or other manufactures) – offer the possibility to create masses of 

information that needs to be organized in an intelligent way. In the course of the ACT- 

Trainings in the study field ―Tourism and Leisure management‖ we will discuss these 

topics embedded in the following framework: 

� Databases 

� Access 

� SharePoint 

Literature 

All scripts / Courseware materials are available free, without a fee, for students in the 

Downloads area. 

Evaluation 

written exam 


Lectures 

Seminar-style exercises 

Group work / Seminar Papers / Presentations 

Discussions 

Chinese Exercise II 


Spring 1 CHI Ex. 0 


Practicing and improving oral and written language skills covered by the topics of the 

textbook. 




This course complements the main lecture Chinese II. 

Students are asked to raise questions on unclear points or difficulties they encounter 

during their Chinese language studies. 

To improve our understanding of Chinese culture we shall from time to time listen to 

Chinese music or watch movies, videos etc. 

Literature 


Evaluation 

None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 184



Chinese II 


Spring 2 CHI 2,5 


The main objective of this class is the acquisition of further elementary skills in written 

and oral Chinese. Accordingly, the main focus of the course lies on grammar patterns and 

new vocabulary that will help students to carry out conversations on a variety of topics. 

On successful completion of the course students will have acquired the following 

competencies: 

Grammar Patterns: 

� Employing different alternatives of asking for date, time and age 

� Expressing the date (year, month, day, weekday) 

� Expressing time (point in time, length of time, past tense, present tense, future 

tense) 

� Expressing time by the use of particle 了 

� Using interrogative sentences with 还是, with particle 吧 and affirmative-negative 

questions 

� Stating approximate numbers 

� Using verb reduplication to indicate a change in the amount of action required 

� Expressing 想 want, 要 need and 得 must 

� Using nominal-predicate sentences 

Vocabulary to confidently master a variety of everyday standard situations: 

� Making an appointment 

� Talking about daily schedules, study plans and future plans 

� Talking about weekends, vacations and holidays 

� Understanding and producing written texts on the topics dealt with during the 

semester 

Cross-Cultural Competencies: 

� Chinese Educational System vs. Austrian Educational System 

� Chinese Festivals vs. Austrian festivals 


CHI 1 


The course contains a combination of lectures and exercises. The first meeting will be 

devoted to extensive reviews and exercises in order to build a common basis from which 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 185

we may proceed! We will start with a repetition of the most important grammar patterns 

and situations introduced during the first semester. 

In subsequent meetings, each lesson from the book will be accomplished over the course 

of two meetings. The Main focus will be put on grammar patterns, enlarging vocabulary 

and pronunciation. Regular homeworks, quizzes, dictations, repetitions, audio exercises 

and role-plays will help students to deepen their written and spoken competence. 

Thematic areas include: What time is it?; How old are you?; Talking about weekend 

plans, study matters, daily schedules, etc. 

Chinese, especially at the elementary level, is a language that requires continuous 

practice. Students are asked to practice characters and prepare vocabulary for each 

lesson in order to be able to follow the course. 

Literature 



Script: Bazant-Kimmel, Christina: Introduction to Chinese Character Writing. 

Oxford Compact Chinese Dictionary (paperback) by Martin H. Manser and Zhu Yuan, und 

Wu Jingrong (all Oxford University Press) 

Handwörterbuch Deutsch - Chinesisch / Chinesisch - Deutsch by Xu Sufang and Han 

Wendian, Commercial Press/ Langenscheidt, 2003. 

Evaluation 

Midterm test (oral) 

Final Exam (written) 

Homework, quizzes and dictations 



and interactive approach that emphasizes the strong relationship between language and 

culture. 

Apart from explanations by the teacher, as much time as possible shall be used for 

practicing Chinese language skills and thereby getting a closer glimpse of the various 

aspects of Chinese culture. (e.g. Chinese food, history, politics, geography...) 

French Exercise II 


Spring 1 FRE Ex. 0 


The main purpose in this class is practising French grammar and working on the topics 

treated in the course French 2. 


See ―French II‖ 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 186


This course will offer to the students exercises and additional material to the grammar 

patterns and topics treated in French 2. 

Much emphasis will be put on intercultural aspects. 

Main focus will be put on the active participation of each student. 

Individual questions will be dealt with in detail. 

Literature 

See ―French II‖ 

Evaluation 

None 



will be encouraged to express themselves as freely as possible on the treated subjects. 

Videos and texts will introduce the topics thus demanding the students to understand 

and react. Various exercises will lead to a better understanding of the topics, the correct 

use of relevant terminology and develop the language competence both in oral and in 

written. 

Reading and Media, Sources for Individual Studies: 

Texts or articles of newspapers and audio files used in the course can be found on the eplatform. 

French II 


Spring 2 FRE 2,5 


Students should get a basic insight into the world of compagnies as well as into the 

terminology of tourism. Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to 

make a professional presentation of tourist destinations or tourist establishments using 

various documents and data sheeds. 

The course thus aims at presenting the basics of business language. After completing the 

course students will moreover be able to apply for a job, to write business letters, to 

describe the sectors of industry, to do business on the phone and to discuss various 

social and economic aspects typical of France (e.g. the dress code); they will manage to 

understand detailed statements on France and they can describe general economic 

contexts (written texts). 


FRE 1 


The course will deal with the different aspects of economic topics thus introducing the 

students to business language (francais d'affaires). Topics to be dealt with will be 

communication within a company, job applications, organization of guided tours (case 

study). Furthermore topics of current interest such as the situation of tourism in France 

will be treated. Particular grammar items will be revised. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 187

Literature 

Required text: Scripts: French II, Le point sur la grammaire, Dictionary (English- 

French/French-English) 

Additional readings: Newspapers and magazines (e.g. Les Echos, Alternatives 

Economiques) 

Media: Internet 

Evaluation 

Grammar test; Written final; Presentation and case study; Homework and assignments 



course topics, discussions, group works, presentations and case studies, the students will 

be encouraged to express themselves as often as possible and improve their oral lanuage 

skills. Each student has to make a presentation and participate in a case study (group 

work). 

Principles of Management II 


Spring 2 PROM 3 


� Provide students with relevant information regarding recent events that have 

reshaped the world of organizations and management. 

� Show students mistakes managers have made, how they addressed the mistakes, 

and the outcome of their actions. 

� Provide students with a comprehensive look at contemporary topics that affect 

changes and innovations in business and entrepreneurial ventures. 

� Enhance student's diagnostic, analytical, investigative and decision-making skills. 

� Familiarize students with the goals, requirements, benefits and obstacles to value 

chain management. 


FOM I 


This course builds upon the course Fundamentals of Management I. It covers the 

principle concepts of management to provide students with a solid foundation for 

understanding key issues. Organized around the four traditional functions of 

management—planning, organizing, leading, and controlling, it reflects current trends in 

management and organizations, and presents the latest research studies in the field. As 

the managerial environment, planning and decision making were the topic of the course 

Fundamentals of Management I, the second semester course elaborates on organization 

designs, human resource management, change management, organizational behavior, 

leadership, control and value chain management. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 188

Literature 

Robbins, S.P. & Coulter, M. (2007): Management, 9th Edition, Prentice Hall. 


Articles & power-point slides of the lecture are made available on the students' eDesktop. 

Evaluation 

Final exam 


The course involves a combination of formal lecture, e-learning and case discussions, 

placing particular emphasis on student participation. Students are expected to prepare 

for each session by working through the relevant chapter(s) in advance of class to 

enhance effectiveness & efficiency of the formal lecture. Most sessions will include a short 

case study in order to foster communication-, diagnostic-, analytical-, investigative- and 

decision-making skills. These cases will be usually distributed in advance and students 

will be expected to be prepared to discuss them in class. All students must come 

prepared to all case study discussions. This is an integral part of the course and the 

material covered is examinable. 

Face to face sessions will be supplemented by a self directed E-Learning session which 

will replace 3 contact hours. E-content (audio-, video- & text files) is provided via the 

students' eDesktop (Infoboard). Self directed learning time will give students the 

opportunity to deepen the knowledge acquired in class. Core issues of E-Learning 

sessions will be an integral part of the final exam. 

German for beginners 


Spring 2 GER Beg. 2,5 


After this course the students will be able to communicate on a basic level in some 

everyday situations. They can introduce themselves and others, talk about their interests 

and hobbies, make appointments, give an opinion, order food and drinks, tell about their 

appartment and furniture. Furthermore, students will learn how to fill in a form, write 

postcards and short letters. 


None 


In this Course students will learn the foreign language the communicative way. Written 



usage.Drawings and pictures help with the understanding of the texts and are as well 




Literature 

Handouts 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 189

Additional Sources for Individual Studies 

http://www.hueber.de/shared/uebungen/themen-aktuell/lerner/uebungen/ 

http://www.hueber.de/sixcms/list.php?page=lehren_aktuell1_the 

http://www.hueber.de/shared/uebungen/schritte/lerner/uebungen/index.php 


Evaluation 

Tests 






German intermediate 


Spring 2 GER Interm. 2,5 


After this course the students will be able to communicate and discuss from several 

points of view certain themes, touching everyday life. 

They can handle for instance situations at the doctors, give advices, tell about things, 

that happened, ask for the way in a town, understand and write announcements for 

apartments, letters and invitations. 


GER Beginners 


In this course students will learn the foreign language the communicative way. Written 



usage. Drawings and pictures help with the understanding of the texts and are as well 



daily life, society and culture . 

Literature 

Themen aktuell 1. Kursbuch+Arbeitsbuch mit Audio CD. Lektion 6-10. Hueber Verlag 

2003. ISBN 3-19-191690-3 

Additional Reading 


http://www.hueber.de/sixcms/list.php?page=lehren_aktuell1_the&id_nav=band2 

http://www.noen.at/ 

http://www.krone.at/ 

http://diepresse.com/ 

http://derstandard.at/ 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 190

http://www.orf.at/ 

Evaluation 

Tests 






Research Seminar 


Spring 1 RES 2 


The lecture will provide students with an understanding of scientific theories and 

academic thinking. Special emphasis will be set on the upcoming work (thesis writing) to 

successfully complete the studies of the current program. 


None 


To get the needed skills for writing up seminar papers and bachelor thesis students will 

learn the basic essentials of research in terms of how to look up and find the adequate 

literature. After that the structure of the writing workflow will be given and the 

requirements regarding structure and form/layout of a research report will be 

highlighted. Within the last part of the lecture quantitative and qualitative research 

methods will be explained and discussed. 

Literature 

Carson, D., Gilmore, A., Perry, Ch., & Gronhaug, K. (2001). Qualitative Marketing 

Research. London: Sage. 

Flick, U. (2005). An Introduction to Qualitative Research. 2nd ed., London: Sage. 

Krueger, R.A. (1998). Analyzing & Reporting Focus Group Results. Focus Group Kit 6. 

London: Sage. 

Mason, J. (2005). Qualitative Researching, 2nd ed., London: Sage. 

Morgan, D.L. (ed.) (1993). Successful Focus Groups. London: Sage. 

Silverman, D. (2000). Doing Qualitative Research, A Practical Handbook. London: Sage. 

Silverman, D. (2004). Interpreting Qualitative Data. Methods for Analysing Talk, Text and 

Interaction. 2nd ed., London: Sage. 

Evaluation 

tba 


tba 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 191

Italian Exercise II 


Spring 1 ITA Ex. 0 


See ―Italian II‖ 




The material offered in the lecture will be practiced and enlarged in order to develop 

the four basic skills: reading, listening, writing and speaking. 

The students will work individually, in pairs, groups and in plenary. 



THEIR ATTENDANCE IS THEREFORE HIGHLY RECOMMENDED! 

Literature 


Evaluation 

None 



Italian II 


Spring 2 ITA 2,5 



� Interact in simple conversations on familiar topics like family, pets, cooking, 

fashion, shopping, their town and everyday life 

� Deal with everyday life situations like asking for directions and information, 

buying food, clothes and shoes 

� Describe pictures 

� Describe past activities and narrate a story 

� Sustain monologues on the topics dealt with during the semester 

� Understand texts on the topics dealt with during the semester 

� Produce written texts like personal letters, recipes and compositions on the topics 

dealt with during the semester 


ITA 1 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 192




semester. 

The objective of the 2nd semester is to develop the communicative competence of the 

students as basic users in the private and public domain (everyday life situations). 

During the course the students will learn to interact in simple conversations on familiar 

topics and they will improve their ability to sustain monologues on these topics. They will 

also learn to deal with everyday life situations. 

Further the students will practice the comprehension and production of written texts 

(personal letters, recipes, compositions and articles) on the topics of the unit contents 

and the topics of the first semester. 

NB. During the semester the students are also expected to read at home a short book 

and to answer questions about its content during the oral exam in order to improve their 

ability of understanding longer texts and speaking about them. 

Literature 

ZIGLIO – RIZZO, Espresso 1, Hueber, Units 6, 8 – 10 

BALI`- RIZZO, Espresso 2, Hueber, Units 1, 2 

DUCCI, Il signor Rigoni, Hueber (1° livello) 

DE GIULI - NADDEO, Maschere a Venezia, Hueber (2° livello) 

2o SEMESTRE-MATERIALE INTEGRATIVO (copies of the enlarged topics of the units in the 

book found in the IMC library) 

Evaluation 

Examinations (1 written exam, 1 oral exam ) 

Assignments 


Through the use of different media (e.g. cassettes, CD, over-head, written material 

power point presentations etc.) the course introduces the students to communicative 

techniques as well as to important language structures of the Italian language. 


Law II 


Spring 2 LAW 2 


The course introduces to the central areas of business law. The objective of the course is 

to sensitize students for the legal aspects of everyday business life and to make them 

familiar with legal problems likely to occur in tourism and leisure management. 


LAW 1 


The course provides with information on public and private law for tourism and leisure 

management. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 193

Both branches of law, public and private law, will deal with Austrian, European Union and 

international aspects. The lecturers begin by describing national provisions and proceed 

by explaining the possibilities the European Union opens to private persons and to 

entrepreneurs. 

The course is divided in two main parts (Part I: ―Public Law and Public Business Law‖ 

[―Specialized Tourism Law I‖] and Part II: ―Private Law and Business Law‖ [―Specialized 

Tourism Law II‖]). 

Literature 

Horspool/Humphreys, European Union Law4 [2006] 

Hausmaninger, The Austrian Legal System3 [2003] 

Köbler, Rechtsenglisch - Rechtswörterbuch für Jedermann7, Deutsch-Englisch, Englisch- 

Deutsch [2007] 

Evaluation 

Midterm Test 

Final Test 


The lecturers will present a guide on the complex body of public and private law relevant 

for tourism and leisure management; constant revision at the outset of each meeting. 

Discussions are intended. Students are expected to do private studies and work on cases. 

Marketing II 


Spring 2 MKT 3 


In modern business, marketing represents a fundamental philosophy that must be 

implemented at all levels and in all functional areas of a company. This marketing course 

shall provide participants with a comprehensive understanding of marketing as a 

philosophy as well as with knowledge on current developments. Furthermore the course 

covers the practical tools for managing marketing in increasingly complex business 

settings. Marketing I and II shall serve the student as a systematic analytical framework. 

Essentially, the following objectives shall be attained: 

1) Demonstrate the scope of marketing and develop an understanding of its role and 

impact in business, 

2) Introduce key marketing terms and fundamental concepts and tools, 

3) Analyze examples from marketing practice and apply the concepts and tools presented 

to real-life problems; 


MKT 1 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 194


The marketing course is divided into two semesters and three blocks. In block A (1st 

semester) students got to know the fundamentals of marketing (marketing philosophy & 

environment, understanding customers, gathering information;). Block B (2nd semester) 

is concerned with strategic marketing (marketing management, target marketing;). Block 

C (2nd semester) treats operative marketing (product, price, place, promotion;) 

Literature 

Kotler, P. & Keller, K.L. (2008): Marketing Management, 13th Edition, Prentice Hall; 


Students may also use the 12th Edition (2006) 

Evaluation 

Final exam 


The course involves a combination of formal lecture, e-learning and class discussions, 

placing particular emphasis on student participation. Students are expected to prepare 

for each session by working through the relevant chapter(s) in advance of class to 

enhance effectiveness & efficiency of the formal lecture. 


will replace 3 contact hours. E-content (audio-, video- & text files) is provided via the 

students' eDesktop (Infoboard). Self directed learning time will give students the 

opportunity to deepen the knowledge acquired in class. Core issues of E-Learning 

sessions will be an integral part of the final exam. 

Personality Training II 


Spring 1 PTM 1 


Your boss asks you five minutes before the big event starts to give a witty speech in 

front of your top 500 clients at the annual sales meeting. What are you going to do? 

This second semester personality training will deepen your knowledge gained during our 

first semester workshop and will strongly build on top of the fundamentals we have 

discussed and training during winter semester. After two days of intensive training you 

will know: 

� about the art of making an impromptu speech 

� how to structure a complex presentation 

� how to successfully prepare for and deal with a stressful job interview situation 

� how industry and political leaders give top presentations 

� how to successfully deliver a complex and well-structured presentation 

� how to put the theory of semester one into practice 

� how to make small talk in a business environment 


None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 195


Soft skills beat pure knowledge in today‘s business world! Companies are more and more 

looking for mature characters that can take over responsibility. Today, knowing how to 

communicate in an effective and professional way is a must. This workshop will support 

you in finding your very personal way of communicating and presenting, speaking in 

front of an audience, successfully mastering stressful situations, or prepare for the job 

interview of your life. The course is divided into several theoretical parts and a large 

number of practical exercises. This interactive lecture is going to prepare you for the 

coming semesters as well as for a successful PTS abroad. 

Literature 

Shut up and Speak! by John Sheirer 

ISBN 0-595-25674-0 

Writers Club Press, 2002 

Job Interviews for Dummies by Joyce Lain Kennedy 

ISBN 978-0-470-17748-8 

Wiley Publishing Inc., 2008 

Resumes for Dummies by Joyce Lain Kennedy 

ISBN 0-7645-5471-9 

Wiley Publishing Inc., 2003 

The Last Job Search Guide You'll Ever Need. How to find and Get the Job or Internship of 

Your Dreams! by Steven John Rothberg 

ISBN-10: 0972655239 

Collegerecruiter, 2002 

The Fine Art of Small Talk by Debra Fine 

ISBN-10: 1401302262 

Hyperion, 2005 

Evaluation 

Since there will be no grades, active participation, commitment, courage and the 

willingness to try out something new that might – in the long run – change your 

personality in a positive way, will be the parameters of success for this workshop. 


Brief theoretical parts will be the backbone and basic structure of this workshop. 

Depending on the actual subject matter, the practical part of the workshop will then give 

you the possibility to try out what you have just learned. 

Russian Exercise II 


Spring 1 RUSS Ex. 0 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 196







THEIR ATTENDANCE IS THEREFORE HIGHLY RECOMMENDED! 

Literature 


Evaluation 

None 



Russian II 


Spring 2 RUS 2,5 


To give an introduction to Russian in order to enable a businessman to cope with 

everyday situations in a Russian speaking country, including oral and written skills. 


RUS 1 


A Russian course for beginners aiming at teaching basic Russian in a communicative way, 

including numerous dialogues, listening and reading comprehension, but also providing 

the grammar necessary for further intensive studies. Written work is intended to 

consolidate oral skills and facilitate correct use of Russian. The course also includes 



Literature 


9780131986282 


Robin): ISBN 9780131986299 

Evaluation 

Regular grammar and vocab tests 


Mid-term test (oral) 

Final test (written) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 197

Final test (oral) 



help of audio texts, automatizing the situations, at the same time providing the 

necessary language structure. Great emphasis is put on enlarging the vocabulary as fast 

as possible. Grammar is introduced to make comprehension and text production easier 

and more effective. The situational dialogues are embedded in typical everyday 

situations. 

Spanish Exercise II 


Spring 1 SPA Ex. 0 


Develop the communicative competence of the students as basic users in the private and 

public domain (everyday life situations). 

Gain practical insight into the basic elements of Spanish grammar. 

Employ Spanish for every day oral communication using vocabulary and structure. 


See ―Spanish II‖ 



Students get the opportunity to practise the chapters treated in the course "Spanish II". 





lecture. 

Literature 

See ―Spanish II‖ 

Evaluation 

None 




The course is based on vivid interaction between the students and the teacher. The 

teaching help by practice and learning will interactive through dialogue, role playing and 

encouragement of vocabulary development and correct pronunciation. At the same time 

the culture background of the Spanish speaking countries will be explained. 





FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 198

Spanish II 


Spring 2 SPA 2,5 


Talk about habits, about past events and about plans and events in the future and to 

relate stories. 

Express preferences, emotional reactions and suppositions. 

Compare and describe hotels. 

Talk about ecological problems and the relationship between tourism and ecology. 

Have conversations and to understand oral and written texts concerning upon matters in 

Spanish and to write easy texts and letters. 


SPA 1 


The course consists of lectures and exercises and is concerned with the development of 

the students in all dimensions of language proficiency and in oral and written 

communicative competence in everyday life and in situations concerned with their social, 

cultural and professional environment. 

In the lectures students will identify the communicative objectives and the grammatical 

structures and practice them. Their communicative language competence will be 

activated in the performance of various language activities, involving reception (oral and 

written), production, interaction and mediation, in relation to texts in oral or written 

form. 

The material will also be discussed and enlarged in the exercises lessons in order to 

develop those basic linguistic activities: 


� Production: oral presentations, written reports, letters, opinions,... 

� Interaction: learning to interact in oral or written exchanges which production and 


� Mediation: (re)processing an existing oral or written text. 

� Translation, or interpretation, paraphrase, summary,... 

The emphasis is on oral communication using every day vocabulary and structure, but 


are part of the programme as a whole. 

Furthermore they will have the opportunity to have contact with the language spoken by 

a native speaker. 


semester. Their attendance is therefore highly recommended. 

Literature 

Socios 1 Nueva Edición. Libro del alumno+CD. Difusión, Barcelona. 


It is highly advisable that the students have a good dictionary. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 199

Evaluation 

Homework 

Midterm Test 

Final examination: written and oral 



users and learners of a language primarily as ―social agents‖: members of society who 



context. We speak of ―tasks‖ in so far as the actions are performed by one or more 




Statistics II 


Spring 2 STAT 3 


At the completion of the course students will be able to 

� distinguish between discrete and continuous probability distributions. 

� calculate probabilities using the binomial, the Poisson, the hypergeometric, and 

the normal distribution 

� identify point estimators for a population mean, population standard deviation, 

and population proportion. 

� describe the characteristic of the sampling distribution of the sample mean and 

the sample proportion. 

� construct confidence intervals for a population mean using the normal distribution 

and the t distribution. 

� calculate the sample size required to construct confidence intervals. 

� set up and interpret hypothesis test for a population mean and for a population 

proportion. 


STAT 1 


The purpose of this lecture is to give students a conceptual introduction to the field of 

probability and inferential statistics. 

Literature 

Recommended textbook (interactive e-book): Paul Velleman ActivStats, 7/E Addison- 

Wesley (Pearson Higher Education) 

Johnson/Kuby: STAT 2nd edition + WebAssign Bundle (Online Homework and Grading) 

Brooks/Cole Cengage 

Salkind: Statistiscs for People Who (Think They) Hate Statistics. 4th edition. Sage 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 200

Evaluation 

Assignments and final exam 


Course material will be passed over 

through lecture and presentation 

hands-on exercises 

self study 

Specialised Business Administration Hospitality Management 


Spring 2 3 



� be comfortable with the organisation structure of hotels and the structure of the 

hotel business 

� understand the economics of hotels 

� be up-to date with the information systems in hotels 

� be able to deal with different hands-on management situations in hotels 

� be able to identify the critical success factors of hotels 

� be able to deal with solving specific operational problems in hotels 


None 


The course takes a management perspective in explaining the organization and structure 

of hotels and restaurants. It includes the critical success factors of a hotel operation, 

different types of operation, comparison of operations, an overview over front and back 

office information technology, problem solving in hotels and much more. In short: the 

pre-requisites aspiring managers need to get acquainted with the hospitality industry. 

Literature 

MEDLIK/INGRAM, The Business of Hotels, Butterworth-Heinemann, 4 th Ed. July 2000, 

ISBN-10: 0750641150 

KNOWLES Tim, Hospitality Management, FT Prentice Hall, 2 nd Ed., ISBN:0-582-31271-X 

RUTES/PENNER/ADAMS: Hotel Design, Planning and Development, W.W. Norton & 

Company, July 2001, ISBN: 0393730557 

CONSTANTINOS S./VEREGININS S./Wood R.: Accommodation Management, Thomson 

Business Press, ISBN:1-86152-489-7 

RANSLEY J./INGRAM H.: Developing Hospitality Properties & Facilities, 2 nd Ed. May 2004, 

Butterworth-Heinemann, ISBN-10: 0750659823 

Evaluation 

Final examination 

Assignments and groupwork 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 201


The course will be delivered in 26 contact hours which are split into lectures and seminar 

style exercises. Depending on the material covered in the lectures the exercise work will 

consist of individual problem solving, group work or dealing with case studies. 

In addition to the classroom sessions there will also be a self directed E-Learning session 

equivalent to two contact hours. Self directed learning time will give students the 

opportunity to deepen and practice the skills acquired in class. Core issues of E-Learning 

sessions will be an integral part of the final exam. Further details can be found in the 

meetings section of courseware. 

Micro Economics 


Spring 2 3 


The student 

� can name and describe the fundamental micro-economic theories 

� can explain and interpret the results from micro-economic models and empirical 

findings 

� is able to solve and calculate case studies in micro economics 


None 


� Deciding in times of uncertainty 

� Analysis of competitors‘ markets 

� Market power: monopoly, competition 

� Investments, time and capital markets 

� General balance and economic efficiency 

� Markets with asymmetrical information 

� Externalities and public goods 

How to sucessfully pass this lecture and the exam? Economics has the reputation of 

beeing difficult because there are some mathematical models behind economic 

assumptions. Students will be guided through the calculation examples. Secondly, ask as 

many questions as possible – every question has a reasoning behind. 

Literature 

N. Gregory Mankiw and Mark P. Taylor (2006). Economics: Thompson Learning. 

Pindyck, R. S. Rubinfeld, D. L (2005). Microeconomics. Boston: Prentice Hall. 

Blanchard, O. (2005). Macroeconomics. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall. 

N. Gregory Mankiw and Mark P. Taylor: Economics 

Additional reading: 

Ball, D. E. McCulloch, W. H. et al. (2009). International Business. The Challenge of Global 

Competition. Boston: Irwin/McGraw Hill. 

Krugman, P. Obstfeld, M. (2008). International Economics. Theory and Policy. New York: 

Pearson Longman. 

Evaluation 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 202


Input from lecturer, reading, group works. 

Academic Writing 


Spring 1 1 


The student will be able to 

� write scientific papers using the appropriate forms of academic expression. 


None 


Language for systematically writing a scientific paper: 

� Stringent and written recording of ideas and contents 

� Academic writing techniques 

� Writing an individual seminar paper in cooperation with the research seminar 

Literature 

Course reader (downloadable) 

Manual for Academic Research at the IMC FH KREMS, IMC FH KRMS, Dok.Nr.: FHM-5- 

0003, Version 02; Revision 01_english 

Manual for the composition of Academic Papers, IMC FH KREMS, Dok.Nr.: FHM-5-0003, 

Version 03; Revision 01_english 

Evaluation 

Peer feedback and instructor assessment of assignments. The percentages awarded to 

the individual assignments are as follows: Homework 1 (text analysis): 10%, Homework 

2 (thesis statement and outline): 20%; Homework 3 (introduction): 20%; Homework 4 

(first draft of final paper): 20%; Homework 5 (final paper): 30%. Note that late 

submissions will receive a lower grade. 


We will be looking at samples of model writing in which relevant features will be 

identified. Students will be guided through the stages of academic writing and then given 

tasks in which they will produce their own texts. 

Students will critique their fellow students‘ texts in class and make suggestions for 

improvement. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 203


Chinese III 


Fall 2 CHI 3 


Due to the complexity of Chinese writing and language, the competence objective is the 

language competence of a basic user (A2) in adherence with the European Common 

Framework of References for Languages. 

Upon the successful completion of the semester students will 




� have a high awareness of the correct production of tones when speaking 

� have a basic understanding of the use of Chinese online resources 

� and will be able to type Chinese characters on a computer. 

In the third semester of our Chinese course we will continue to acquire elementary skills 

in written and oral Chinese, which means mastering basic vocabulary and sentence 

patterns. Lesson 15-17 in the textbook ―New Practical Chinese Reader 2‖ will form the 

basis of this semester‘s course. 


CHI 2 


� Telephone calls and office situations 

� Entertainment and media 

� Restaurants 

� Visits 

In semester III we repeat some aspects of the first two semesters (New Practical Chinese 

Reader 1) and work on Lesson 15-17 in the textbook ―New Practical Chinese Reader 2‖. 

This will form the basis material for the Midterm and Final exam. 

One specific of this semester‘s course is that it will partely held via e-learning, in order to 

allow students abroad to follow the course. However there will be two blocked meetings 

in January where students already returned from their exchange semester can follow the 

course face to face and take the exam which will be held in our last session of this 

academic semester. The last session will also be an opportunity for feedback and for 

exchange with the students who chose to take the regulary exam. 

Since a large part of this semester‘s course will be done via e-learning the focus is laid 

upon training perceptive skills with listening texts. Productive skills of written language 

will be trained by writing short texts and typical dialogues on a range of everyday topics. 

Thematic areas and Grammar include: 

Lesson 15 

Changing money at a bank Talking about (past) travel experiences Commenting on one's 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 204

actions ("I ate well") Describing a place (Shanghai) Putonghua (Mandarin) and Shanghai 

dialect Reading text: A professor teaching in Shanghai 

Lesson 16 

In a library (filling out a form, borrow and return books, paying a fine) talking about a 

past exam Reading text: In a Shanghai teahouse 

Lesson 17 

how long have you lived in Beijing? How has Beijing changed? Comparing things (little 

markets are cheaper) Buying traditional Chinese clothes Colours Trying on clothes (size, 

color, price) Asking for someones opinion comparing size ("this one is 5 cm smaller than 

that one") negotiating prices (page 60) Reading text: a "xiangsheng" dialogue (crosstalk, 

Chinese comedic performance) -making comparisons 

Literature 

Newest editions of the following textbooks: 

Huang (1998); Standard Chinese Course; Bejing University Press, paperback 

Zhao et al. (2002); Chinese Conversation for Foreigners; Beijing Language and Culture 

University 

Evaluation 

Inherent nature of examination ( at least two performance assessments) 

FinalExam: 60% 

MidtermExam: 40% 

Total: 100% 






aspects of Chinese culture. (e.g. intercultural communication, Chinese food, history, 

politics, geography...) 

French III 


Fall 2 FRE 3 


The targeted competence level is that of an Independent User (B2) to a Competent Users 

(C1) in accordance with the European Common Framework of References for Languages : 

The student 

� can understand the main contents of complex texts regarding concrete and 

abstract subjects 


� is able to be spontaneously and fluently understood so that a normal conversation 

with natives speakers is possible without any effort from either party 

� can express oneself in specialist topics clear and in detail 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 205

� can explain a position regarding a current issue and explain the benefits and 

disadvantages of various possibilities 

� can clearly and in a structured manner make a statement regarding complex 

specialised topics and use various appropriate means to cross reference texts 

The skill acquisition will be carried out progressively while taking language fundamentals 

into consideration: reading/ writing / speaking / understanding 


FRE 2 


This course will introduce the students to the world of labour and its specific topics and 

terminology such as: looking for a job, reading and interpreting job ads, job interviews, 

information on contracts of work, social security, salaries etc. After the written 

communication forms treated in year one, the oral communication forms will be 

emphasised this year. 

Literature 

Gaeng: Le monde de l‘entreprise française 

Nathan: Précis de gestion d‘entreprise 

Nathan: Le tourisme de France 


Les Echos 

Alternatives Économiques 

Le Point 

Ecoute 

L‘Echo touristique 

Tourhebdo 

Voyages d‘Affaires 

Evaluation 

Inherent examination character (at least two performance assessments) 

Written test: 40% 

Oral exam: 40% 

Homework, group work, presentations : 20% 


Students will be encouraged to express themselves on the treated subject. Dialogues 

(taped) and texts will introduce the topics thus demanding the students to understand 

and react. Various exercises will lead to a better understanding of the topic, the correct 

use of the relevant terminology and develop the language competence both in oral and in 

written. 

Moreover, students will be asked to engage in role plays. 



German advanced 


Fall 2 GER Adv. 3 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 206


Upon completion of this course the students will be able to communicate in a written and 

oral way in a correct and idiomatic German. They should be able to use their German in a 

professional context and to talk about the specific skills at the IMC. 


GER Intermediate 


The German in use will cover following professional situations: 

� to welcome visitors,to introduce myself and others, to explain a daily timetable 

� to present a firm and its various departments and their functions 

� to describe a product 

� behavior in a German professional context and cultural differences 

� to invite somebody to eat out, recommend a restaurant, choose among the 

different courses 

� talking about family, living condition, leisure and holidays 

� working conditions, working atosphere 

� to give a phone call, to leave a message 

Literature 

A course book hand-out elaborated by the lecturer will be the basis of the course. 

Evaluation 

written exam 

home exercises 

presentations and role playing 


The course tends to be very interactive that means based on authentic situations, role 

playing, discussion and usage of different media. The students will be encouraged to 

actively participate in the course as much as possible to enhance their confidence in 

using German. 

Italian III 


Fall 2 ITA 3 


The targeted competence level is that of an Independent User (B1-B2) in accordance 

with the European Common Framework of References for Languages : 

On successful completion of the course the students should be able to 

� Interact in conversations on topic of personal interest such as other people, job, 

educational background, friendship and health 

� Interact in conversations on contemporary problems such as pollution and trends 

of modern life 

� making plans and suppositions 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 207

� deal with everyday life situations like going to the doctor 

� sustain monologues on the topics dealt with during the semester 

� understand written texts on the topics dealt with during the semester 

� produce written texts like CV, letters and compositions on the topics dealt with 

during the semester 


ITA 2 


Further development of oral and written skills in routine life and simple business 

situations 



semester. 

The objective of the 3rd semester is to develop the communicative competence of the 

students as basic users in the private and public domain (everyday life situations). 

During the course the students will learn to interact in conversations on topics of 

personal interest and on contemporary problems and they will improve their ability to 

sustain monologues on these topics. They will also learn to deal with the everyday life 

situations. 

Further the students will practise (during the lessons and at home)the comprehension 

and production of written texts on the topics of the unit contents and the topics of the 

first and second semester. 

NB. During the semester the students are also expected to read at home a short book 

and to answer questions about its content during the oral exam in order to improve their 

ability of understanding longer texts and speaking about them. 

Literature 


� Ziglio-Rizzo (2002): Espresso, Bowles (1992): Italian Grammar, NTC Publishing 

Group., (2000): Dictionary, 

� Additional reading: 

� Adesso 

Evaluation 

Inherent nature of examination (at least two performance assessments), the assessment 

is based upon written exam and assignments 


Through the use of different media the course introduces the students to communicative 

techniques and to important language structures of the Italian language. 

In order to develop their communicative competence the students will read and discuss 

texts, listen to dialogues and perform role plays.The students will work individually, in 

pairs, groups and in plenary. 

They will also produce at home written texts on the topics dealt with during the lessons. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 208

Marketing Research 


Fall 2 MRES 3 


On successful completion of this course, students will have an overview on different 

aspects of Marketing Research in tourism. In particular, students will be able to… 

� define the functions of marketing research in an organization. 

� understand the principles of marketing research - quantitative and qualitative. 

� identify a marketing research problem and develop an appropriate approach to 

solve it. 

� develop a design for a marketing research project. 

� plan the (statistical) analysis of collected data and the interpretation of the 

outcome. 

� prepare a report and presentation of the results. 

The aim of this course is not to prepare the student for a career in marketing research 

but to provide him/her with all necessary skills to evaluate the work of marketing 

researchers as a decision maker in a (tourism) organization. 


None 


This lecture provides an introduction to the marketing research process and the very 

broad portfolio of tools, techniques and methods that help the manager to understand 

the market and the effects of marketing activities. It will provide the student with solid 

skills necessary to solve business problems and exploit business opportunities in their 

future professional careers. 

Topics covered: 

� Determining the research objective 

� Determining research design 

� Developing research instruments 

� Selecting samples and field work 

� Analysis and interpretation of data 

� Writing a final report 

Literature 

Malhotra, N. K. (2007): Marketing Research. An Applied Orientation. 5/e. Upper Saddle 

River: Pearson. 

Additional reading 

� Churchill, G. A., Iacobucci, Dawn (2005): Marketing Research. Methodological 

Foundations. Mason: Thomson / South Western. 

� Birn, Robin J. (Ed.) (2000): The Handbook of International Market Research 

Techniques. London: Kogan Page. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 209

� Johnson, Robert, Kuby, Patricia (2010): STAT 2009-2010. Pacific Grove Edition: 

Brooks/ Cole Cengage Learning. 

� John Wiley & Sons (Ed.) (2007): Market Research Best Practice: 30 Visions for the 

Future 

� McQuarrie, Edward (2005): The market research toolbox: a concise guide for 

beginners (2nd ed.). Sage. 

Evaluation 

Inherent examination character (at least two performance assessments) 

� 70 % individual contribution / composition of wiki-page (= article) 

� 30 % comments on five other pages of the ―Marketing Research Wiki‖ 


As a semester-product, students will develop a ―Marketing Research Wiki‖, covering the 

topics presented and discussed throughout the seminar. The production of this wiki will 

be carried out as group work. 

This project is divided into four phases: 

1. Presentation of the project / sign-in for topics. 

2. Development of students‘ contributions (= Wiki-pages). 

3. Cross-evaluation. 

4. Presentation. 

A list of topics will be presented in the first meeting, students sign up to the topic. The 

timeline to prepare the wiki-page as personal contribution will be set in the first meeting. 

Personality Training III 


Fall 1 PT 1 


This workshop will provide students with the fundamentals of negotiating in an 

international business environment based on the methods of the Harvard Negotiation 

Project. After two days of intensive training students will know how to: 

� Deal with negotiations on a professional level using basic strategies 

� Apply the most important rules of thumb 

� Negotiate firmly while maintaining a co-operative attitude 

� Manage the ―one text‖ process 

� Work with a clear win-win concept in mind 

� Distinguish between interests and positions 

� Prepare for negotiations in an efficient way 

� Deal with difficult or powerful negotiating parties 

� Build up professional business relations that last 


None 


� Preparation and execution of negotiations 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 210

� The four phases of negotiations 

� Negotiation tools 

� Conflict communication 

These are some of the questions you will be confronted with during this personality 

training workshop: 

� What is important when negotiating? 

� Why is the Harvard method so effective? 

� Active listening – what is it good for? 

� How can you create a win-win situation? 

� What can you do to improve your communication skills? 

� A friendly or tough approach? - that is the question 

� When is it time to leave the bargaining table? 

Finding the students very personal answers to these questions will be the goal for the 

two exciting days ahead. 

Literature 

� Pease, A. and B. (2006): The Definitive Book of Body Language, B&T; 

� Ariston; Love, R./Fraser, D. (2003): Set Your Voice Free, Little, Brown and 

Company; 

� Sheirer, J. (2002): Shut up and Speak!, Writers Club Press; 

� Kennedy, J. L. (2008): Job Interviews for Dummies, Wiley Publishing Inc.; 

� Kennedy, J. L. (2003): Resumes for Dummies, Wiley Publishing Inc.; 

� Rothberg, St. J. (2002): The Last Job Search Guide You'll Ever Need. How to find 

and Get the Job or Internship of Your Dreams!, Collegerecruiter; 

� Fine, D. (2005): The Fine Art of Small Talk, Hyperion; Fisher, 

� Ury, W. (2007): Getting past No: Negotiating your Way from Confrontation to 

Cooperation, Bantam Books; 

� Watkins, M. (2003): Negotiation, Harvard Business Essentials, Harvard Business 

School Publishing Corporation; 

� Brett, J. M. (2007): Negotiating Globally, John Wiley & Sons; 

Evaluation 

A reflection report needs to be handed in after the course. There will be no grades given 

out for this workshop though, the parameters of success will be: active participation, 

commitment, accurate preparation for the exercises, courage and the willingness to go 

the extra mile. 


These lectures on negotiating skills will be presented in an interactive manner, where 

students will have the opportunity to use their own 

experience and know-how and improve on it. Practical exercises, group discussions, 

feedback sessions, role plays and case studies 

together with a solid theoretical introduction by the instructor will be the cornerstones of 

this workshop. 

Russian III 


Fall 2 RUS 3 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 211


On successful completion of the course, students will be able to 

� talk about daily activities and schedules 

� report about the past 

� make and respond to simple invitations 

� read and write notes and letters 

� express necessities and obligations 

� talk about homes and rooms 

� read want ads 

� express ownership, existence and presence 

� ask the way and give directions 

� give details about Moscow and St. Petersburg 


RUS 2 


A Russian course aiming at teaching the language in a communicative way, including 

numerous dialogues, listening and reading comprehension, but also providing the 

grammar necessary for further intensive studies. Written work is intended to consolidate 

oral skills and facilitate correct use of Russian. The course also includes information on 

Russian culture and civilization to facilitate better understanding of Russian life and 

institutions. 

Literature 

Golosa Book 1 und 2, Textbook 

Golosa Book 1 und 2, Student Activities Manual 


Loos (1996); Proekty. Ein Russischlehrwerk für Beruf und Alltag; Hueber 

Loos (1996); Proekty. Ein Russischlehrwerk für Beruf und Alltag. Arbeitsbuch; Hueber ; 

Loos, Khan (1998); Rossija/Rußland. Kniga dlja chtenija/Ein Lesebuch; Eisenstadt: 

Weber 

Evaluation 


Regular grammar and vocab tests 30% 

Regular homework 10% 

Final test (written) 30% 

Final test (oral) 30% 



help of audio texts (cassettes), automatizing the situations, at the same time providing 

the necessary language structure. Great emphasis is put on enlarging the vocabulary as 

fast as possible. Grammar is introduced to make comprehension and text production 

easier and more effective. The situational dialogues are embedded in typical everyday 

situations. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 212

Spanish III 


Fall 2 SPA 3 


The targeted competence level is that of an Independent User (B1-B2) in accordance 

with the European Common Framework of References for Languages : 

The student 

� can understand the main contents of complex texts regarding concrete and 

abstract subjects 


� is able to be spontaneously and fluently understood so that a normal conversation 

with natives speakers is possible without any effort from either party 


SPA 2 


The objective of this semester is to continuate the foundation course. The course is 

concerned with the development of the students‘ oral and written communicative 

competence (linguistic, sociolinguistic and pragmatic competences) in everyday life as far 

as the B1 level of the Common European Framework of References for Languages. 

The semester will begin with a general repetition of the subjects of semester 2. The 

course is concerned with the development of the students in all dimensions of language 

proficiency and in oral and written communicative competence in everyday life and in 

situations concerned with their social, cultural and professional environment. The 

students will identify the communicative objectives and the grammatical structures and 

practice them. Their communicative language competence will be activated in the 

performance of various language activities, involving reception (oral and written), 

production, interaction and mediation, in relation to texts in oral or written form. The 

material will also be discussed in order to develop those basic linguistic activities: 


� Production: oral presentations, written reports, letters, opinions,... 

� Interaction: learning to interact in oral or written exchanges which production and 


� Mediation: (re)processing an existing oral or written text. Translation, or 

interpretation, paraphrase, summary,... 

Literature 

Socios 1 Nueva edicion, Libro del alumno + CD. Difusion Barcelona. 

Socios 1 Nueva edicion, Cuaderno de ejercicios + CD. Difusion Barcelona. 

Socios 2 Nueva edicion, Libro del alumno + CD. Difusion Barcelona. 

Socios 2 Nueva edicion, Cuaderno de ejercicios + CD. Difusion Barcelona. 

Butt, B. (2000); A new reference – grammar of modern Spanish; London: Arnold 

VV.AA; Serie Idiomas Hoy; Barcelona: Difusion 

Chastain (1994); Spanish grammar in review; McGraw-Hill; Chicago: Lincolnwood 

Collins (1995); Harrap‘s Vocabulario económico y comercial; Madrid 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 213

QUO, ECOS, CAMBIO 16, El TIEMPO 

Evaluation 

The course will assess in the following manner: 

� Homework: 10% 

� Midterm Test: 30% 

� Final examination: written 40% and oral 20% 

Homework assignments are obligatory and they will be accepted only until a certain 

deadline. 



users and learners of a language primarily as ―social agents‖. The action-based approach 

also takes into account the cognitive, emotional and volitional resources and the full 

range of abilities applied by the individual as a social-agent. This approach will encourage 

the students to express themselves concerning the subjects treated. Therefore authentic 

dialogues (videos and tapes) and texts will be used to introduce the topics thus 

demanding the students to understand and react. Grammar structures will not only be 


Specialised Business Administration – Transportation Management 


Fall 2 SBA 3 


The student 

� knows and understands the special business procedures in the areas of transport, 

hotels, travel agencies and travel organisers 

� can identify and evaluate the critical success factors for hotels 

� is able to analyse the specific operation problems for hotels in a solution oriented 

manner 

� can interpret the evaluation and analytical methods for transport agreements 

� knows the principles of travel planning and tourism product planning and can 

apply them appropriately 


None 


The following topics are covered: 

1. Transportation History, Movement, Transport, Transportation Systems 

2. Modes of Transport, Network & Hub-Systems, Transportation Data and 

Importance 

3. Austria-Europe-TEN, Players in Transportation – Infrastructure, Operators, 

Manufacturers 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 214

4. Railway Systems, Highway Systems, Pipelines, Bus Transportation, Waterway 

Transportation, Inter-modality 

5. Transportation Economic Principles, Indices – Parameters – Factors, Economic + 

Transportation Demand, Capacity Management, Transportation Costs 

6. Investment Criteria, Infrastructure, Cost Structures Transportation Companies 

7. Surface Construction, Pre-Opening Investments 

8. Transportation Pricing, Trends in Transportation, Transportation Policy 

(Privatisation & Deregulation) 

9. Strategies – Policies – Drivers (Growth, Cost Structure Measurements, Volume 

Drivers LCC, Global Alliances, Other Alliances) 

10. Globalisation – Consolidation – Liberalisation 

11. Transportation Management 

12. Future in Transportation, Airline Strategy Principles, Transportation Products 

13. Visit to Transport Enterprises (Austrian Airlines, ÖBB) 

Literature 

Boyer, Kenneth D: Principles of Transportation Economics, 1997. 

Syratt, Gwenda: Manual of Travel Agency Practice, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, 

Oxford 2004 

Evaluation 

Final written examination 100% 


Complimentary approaches will be combined in classroom teaching: 

The lecturer will provide students with basic information to initiate them with the subjects 

of the respective sessions and to position relevant teaching/learning material in the 

general course outline. Furthermore, presentations and discussions of topical cases are 

intended to illustrate recent developments in the industry. 

Students are expected to do some little homework (2 hours per week) by reading 

reference books, media or websites. 

Specialized Business Administration – Tour Operating & Retail 

Travel 


Fall 2 SBTT 3 


On successful completion of the course the student will be able to: 

� Explain the basic characteristics of the travel agencies and tour operators; 

� Discuss the importance of the travel intermediaries; 

� Apply the criteria to define and develop new tourism products; 

� Identify the different types of tours and the main destinations; 

� Analyse the tour operator‘s business; 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 215

� Describe trends in the travel industry. 


None 


� Development of the market and company 

� Structure of travel agencies 

� Critical analysis of specific characteristics 

� Travel agent joint ventures 

� Travel industry value-added chains – agencies – Tourists - tourism products 

� Price policies, tariffs, marketing instruments 

This course provides the students with the necessary guidelines of the knowledge and 

skills for successful tour operations and designing itineraries. Emphasis is given to the 

stages of tour development with the structure and operations of travel trade sector 

Literature 

Syratt, Gwenda: Manual of Travel Agency Practice, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, 

Oxford 2004. 

Pender, Lesley, Travel Trade and Transport, Thomson Learning, London, England, 2003, 

(ISBN: 1-84480-108-X). 

Yale, Pat, The Business of Tour Operations, Longman Group Ltd., England, 1997, (ISBN: 

0-582-27797-3). 

Evaluation 


Grading will cover a combination of 4 individual and/or group assignments (10 % each) 

and an individual final exam (60 %). 


Main topics of the course will be discussed in the class. 

Tourism Reservation Systems 


Fall 2 TORS 2 


After this course students 

� students will have an overview about different reservation systems (CRS) used by 

travel agencies 

� will be able to understand and use the system and know about some distribution 

ways of travel agencies and tour operators. 


None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 216


� Introduction to the most important booking and reservation systems, basic 

concepts and getting to know various reservation systems (e.g. Galileo) and their 

economic environment as well as electronic platforms (CETS) 

� Processing of booking qualifications for various travel packages 

� Getting to know booking platforms and having practical training with them 

� Introduction to test bookings and actual bookings based on various criteria details 

(Austrian travel agents) 

� Criteria for selecting reservation systems 

� Process of introducing reservation systems in a company 

Main focus on touristic reservation system C.E.T.S (Central European Touristic Solutions) 

in relation to touroperators, distributing their products in all channels including the 

internet booking engine (IBE). 

Teaching Concept/Pädagogisch-didaktische Konzeption/ 

E-Learning 

Combination between theoretical and practical parts. Examples, testbookings etc will 

performed with CETS Test accounts. 

Literature 

O‘Connor, Peter (1999): Electronic Information Distribution in Tourism and Hospitality. 

New York: CABI Publishing 

Werthner, Hannes / Klein, Stefan (1999): Information Technology and Tourism – A 

Challenging Relationship. Wien, New York: Springer 

Evaluation 

Written exam with practical exercises using CETS 


Course objectives will be achieved by primary practical work on the systems. The 

students will be asked for active participation by analyzing system outputs and 

participation in discussions. We also will see short sequences of documentary movies as 

part of the vocational sessions. 

Managerial Accounting 


Fall 2 ? 3 


The students can 

� enter current transactions and create financial reports 

� enter year-end report items and apply different methods for evaluating 

investment, inventory, bills payable and reserves 

� determine accruals and deferrals 

� calculate key figures and analyse balance sheets 

� analyse company key figures in tourism operations 

� use various cost calculation types in his/her calculation and when setting prices 


None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 217


� Budget controlling 

� Key figure in tourism 

� Fundamentals of cost calculations, marginal costing 

� Master summary sheet, cost category accounting, cost centre accounting, cost 

unit accounting at full and partial costs 

� Break even analyses 

� Modern cost management 

� Price formation in hotels 

Literature 

Dyson J.R. (2007). Accounting for Non-Accounting Students. FT Prentice Hall - Pearson 

Education. Schmidgall S.R. (2006). Hospitality Industry Managerial Accounting, 

Educational Institute of the American Hotel and Motel Association. 

Evaluation 



The course involves a combination of formal lectures, knowledge transfer, class and 

group discussions, and practice examples 

Human Resource Management 


Fall 2 ? 3 


Upon completion of the course the student 

� understands the relevant aspects of HRM such as recruitment, staffing, training 

and development, performance management, compensation and retention 

� has gained hands-on experience through dealing with real-world HRM issues 

(emphasis is placed on developing problem solving and critical thinking skills) 

� is able to discuss theoretical aspects in managing people in organizations 

successfully 

� can describe practical relevance of successful HRM for organisational success 


None 


� Management responsibilities and business ethics 

� Company culture 

� Behaviour and analysis of groups and individuals in organizations 

� Conflict management, negotiating strategies 

� Models for learning within organizations 

� Motivation theory 

� Interpersonal communication 

� Personnel planning 

� Recruiting personnel 

� Continued development of personnel 

� Laying off personnel 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 218

The objective of the course is to introduce students to the field of human resource 

management (HRM). 

The success of a company - its ability to grow and stay on top of the customer demand - 

has always depended heavily on the quality of its people. In todays‘ globalized and 

deregulated world with changing demographics, virtualization of work, new technologies 

and work-life-forms, it is even more relevant than ever. The management of the 

intellectual capital of an organization can foster or hinder the firm‘s effort to remain 

competitive. 

The course builds on the lectures of Principles of Management I and II and addresses the 

fundamentals of HR in a dynamic environment. Staffing the organization, training and 

development, managing high performance, retention, wages, company culture as well as 

examining what today‘s most successful and progressive companies are doing with 

respect to HR, will be covered. Case Studies from Harvard Business School ensure that 

students are able to understand and apply basic HRM-concepts when solving HRproblems. 

Literature 

Fundamentals of Human Resource Management, David A. DeCenzo, Stephen P. Robbins, 

Wiley: 10th edition (2009) 

Human Resource Management: Theory and Practice, John Bratton, Jeff Gold, Palgrave 

Macmillan: 4th edition (2007) 

The Truth About Managing People, Stephen P. Robbins, Prentice Hall: 2nd edition (15 

November 2007) 

Required readings: 

� Harvard Case Studies 

Evaluation 

Final Exam: 80% 

Home Assignments: 20% (5% per home assignment) 


The course consists of seven 100-minute sessions. The subject is taught in a multimethod 

fashion. There will be lectures, readings and class discussions. Particular 

emphasis is placed on preparation for case studies (i.e. Harvard Case Studies) and active 

participation in class. Harvard Case Studies will be provided to students and have to be 

prepared for the next class. There will be four short papers (home assignments, 1 page). 

These papers will be collected in class on the date due. Both, theory and case studies will 

be part of the final exam. 

Macro Economics 


Fall 2 ? 3 


The student 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 219

� can name and describe the fundamental economic theories of macro economics 

� can explain and interpret the results from economic models and empirical findings 

� is able to solve economic cases in macro economics 

� evaluates and analyses international economic interactions as well as identifies 

their impact on the tourism industry 


none 


� Goods, money, and finance markets 

� Concept of the market and market equilibrium 

� Growth and technological progress 

� Labour market and unemployment 

� National accounts 

� Monetary and fiscal policies (IS-LM and AS-AD models, closed economies, money 

supply, inflation) 

� The public economy 

� Production, interest rates and exchange rates 

Literature 


Blanchard, O. (2005). Macroeconomics. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall. 

Evaluation 


Tourism Consumer Behaviour 


Fall 2 ? 2 

Learning outcomes 

The student 

� can understand the complex relationship between tourism and the leisure 

economy as well as international tourism flows 

� is able to identify sensitive areas (environment etc.) as well as tourism induced 

and tourism dependent areas and understand and clarify their connection 

� can describe specific tourism segments and define their characteristics 

� is able to understand the psychological indicators of travel and leisure time 

behaviour and analyse and interpret the derived consumer behaviour 


None 


� Disciplines in the tourism economy 

� Travel motivation and vacation expectations, vacationer typologies 

� Attitudes, expectations, images 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 220

� Behaviour at vacation spot 

� Travel types, vacation forms 

� Impact of travel on individuals 

Literature 

Waver, David; Laura Lawton: Tourism Management. John Wiley & Sons, Australia, Milton 

2006; 

Holloway, J.Christopher; Neil Taylor: The Business of Tourism. London 2006; 

Boniface, Brian and Chris Cooper: Worldwide Destinations: The Geography of Travel and 

Tourism; Butterworth-Heinem Oxford, UK, (2005); 

Hammond (Publisher): Explorer World Atlas, 2002. 

Kozak, M./Decrop, A. (2008): Handbook of Tourist Behavior: Theory and Practice, 

Routledge; 

Crouch, G.I./Perdue, R.R./Timmermans, H.J.P/Uysal, M. (2004): Consumer Psychology of 

Tourism, Hospitality and Leisure, Cabi; 

Evaluation 


Intercultural Competence 


Fall 2 ? 2 


The student 

� knows the different cultural forms and can interpret their relevance in a company 

environment 

� can describe the basic modes of intercultural management and discuss their 

influence on leading a company 

� can recognize and analyze the significance of different value systems and 

expectations from international negotiations. 


None 


� Influence of culture on organisations and their management 

� Trans-cultural communication 

� Creating cultural synergies 

� Management of multicultural teams (including motivation, decision making, and 

career planning) 

� Leadership skills and negotiating strategies in an international environment 

Literature 

Adler, N.J. (2008). International Dimensions of Organizational Behavior. Thomson South- 

Western; 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 221

Cokins, G. (2004). Performance Management: Finding the Missing Pieces (to Close the 

Intelligence Gap). Wiley & Sons 

Evaluation 

Immanent examination character ( at least two performance assessments) 


Presentation, group works, reflection 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 222


Practical Training Semester 


Spring PTS 30 


During your PTS you should get a detailed insight in your future working field and above 

that you will also get the chance to put all the theory you have studied into practice. 


None 


The Practical Training Semester (PTS) counts as a regular study semester and therefore 

certain conditions have to be fulfilled. Your PTS has to take place abroad in a company 

active in the field of Tourism or Leisure Management and it has to last for at least 22 

weeks. 

Literature 

None 

Evaluation 

Employer Evaluation 

Initial Report 

Seminar Paper 

Experience - Presentation/PowerPoint 


None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 223


Bachelor Seminar and Bachelor Thesis I 


Fall 1 BSE 5 


Upon completion of this seminar, students should have written up their Bachelor paper I 

according to scientific requirements. 

This course should help the students to be able to 

1) Operate the Bachelor-work correctly according to the formal guidelines of the FH- 

Krems. 

2) Operate independently on a selected theme with scientific methods. 

3) Meet the most important guidelines of scientific working 

4) Deliver a contribution to scientific questions of this field 


None 


Hermeneutical and empirical researching 

Stand and reporting of the bachelor-works 

Theories and Hypothesis in Tourism-research 

Literature 

Allison, B. (1997); The Student‘s Guide to Preparing Dissertations and Theses; London: 

Kogan Page 

Fennell, D.A. (2006); Tourism Ethics; Aspects of Tourism 30, Clevedon: Channel View 

Finn, M., Elliott-White, M., Walton, M. (2000); Tourism & Leisure Research Methods. Data 

collection, analysis and interpretation; Essex: Person 

Hall, C.M. (2005); Tourism. Rethinking the Social Science of Mobility; Essex: Pearson, 

pp. 3-15, pp. 347- 

Jennings, G. (2001); Tourism Research; Milton: Wiley 

Veal, A.J. (1997); Research Methods for Leisure and Tourism; London: Financial Times 

Prentice Hall 

Evaluation 

Bachelor 1 Thesis 


A combination of lectures, discussions and coaching will be used. 

Italian IV 


Fall 2 ITA 2,5 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 224


On successful completion of the course the students will be able to: 

� Present their company and their own job 

� Make telephone calls 

� Meeting Italian customers 

� Interact in simple business transactions with Italian customers 

� Understand and write the types of letters wich accompany some oft he most 

important stages of business transactions 

� Understand texts about some important economic topics 

� Produce written texts like presentations of firms, simple reports on economic 

topics and compositions 

� Interact in conversations on topics such as the Italian economy and some Italian 

socio-economical problems, Internet and the 

� European Union 

� Sustain monologues on the topics dealt with during the lessons 


ITA 3 


The course „L‘italiano per gli affari― (Part 1) is designed to introduce the students to 

important aspects of Italian business communication and to the economic world in order 

to develop their communicative competence as indipendent users in these domains. 

The course is also concerned with the development of the students' general 

communicative competence. 

The course is fast and demanding and requires steady work throughout the semester. 

During the course the students will learn to cope with various situations of business 

communication. 

They will also be introduced to some aspects of international transactions and to some 

aspects of the economic world as well as to important language structures of the Italian 

language. 

Literature 

R. JEZEK, L’italiano per gli affari. 1a parte (SCRIPT) 

Evaluation 

written exam 

oral exam 

Assignments and presentation 


Through a variety of methodological approaches supported by different types of media 

the course will introduce the students to some aspects of business communication, to 

important aspects of the economic world and to important language structures of the 

Italian language. 

In order to implement their newly acquired knowledge in their general communicative 

competence the students will read and discuss texts, perform role plays and carry out 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 225

They will also produce at home a variety of written texts such as letters, presentations of 

firms and compositions. They are also expected to do a small research on economic 

topics using Internet and to write a report about their findings. 

French IV 




The following competences will be acquired: 

Students shall get a basic insight into the world of companies and its relevant 

terminology. Upon completion of the course, the students can understand company 

related texts, make a professional company presentation and analysis of a company 

using various authentic documents and data. 

They are furthermore able to apply the relevant terminology in situations of business life 

and can also characterise a successful entrepreneur and focus on the development of a 

company. In addition, they can cope with intercultural aspects: France and its economy 

are understood and appreciated in terms of cultural differences. 


FRE 3 


The course will deal with the various aspects of a company thus introducing the students 

to Business French (Le français des affaires). Topics to be dealt with will be: company 

forms, how to found a company, the role of a company, legal and financial aspects, 

profile of the ideal ―entrepreneur‖ etc. 

Students should also analyse common cultural patterns that characterise the daily 

routine in France and largely contribute to successful economic relations with this 

country. 

Newspaper articles will complement the topics. 

Selected grammar items will be revised. 

Literature 

Le Truc Français 5 (script –to be distributed during the first meeting) 

Le point sur la grammaire (script semester 1-3) 

Dictionary (English – French/French- English) 

Evaluation 

Written test 

Oral exam 

Group work 

Company presentation 


The three basic linguistic competences – listening/understanding, speaking, writing - 

shall be trained. 

The course will be based on interactive teaching: through common brainstorming on the 

specific topics, discussions, group work and presentations, the students will be 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 226

encouraged to express themselves as often as possible and thus improve their oral 

language skills. 

The revised grammar items shall be implemented into the students‘ work. 

The students will make a company presentation. Furthermore, students will take part in 

group work to evaluate a company. 

German Higher Advanced 


Fall 2 

GER 

Adv. 

Higher 

2,5 


Die Studenten sollen deutschsprachige Texte (auch Hörtexte) verstehen und sich sowohl 

schriftlich als auch mündlich in möglichst korrektem und gewandtem Deutsch ausdrücken 

können. 

Sie sollen die Fähigkeit haben, die deutsche Sprache im Geschäftsbereich richtig 

anzuwenden, Geschäftsbriefe zu verfassen und ihre Fachkenntnisse, die sie während 

ihres Studiums erworben haben, in deutscher Sprache wiederzugeben. 

Die Studenten sollen Äußerungen der deutschen Sprache, vor allem auch der Medien, 

differenziert und kritisch beurteilen können. 

Sie sollen weiters ihre sprachliche Kreativität im Deutschen unter Beachtung der Sprech- 

und Schreibrichtigkeit weiterentwickeln. 


GER Advanced 


Der deutsche Sprachgebrauch wird vor allem für folgende Bereiche geübt: 

Medien 

Werbung - v.a. die Tourismus- und Exportwirtschaft betreffend 

Veränderungen in der Gesellschaft und Arbeitswelt 

Globalisierung 

Handel, Export, Import 

Literature 

Aktuelle Artikel aus diversen deutschsprachigen Zeitungen und Zeitschriften. 

Aktuelle Filme und Fernsehsendungen 

Nicolas, Sprenger, Weermann, Wirtschaft – auf Deutsch, Verlag Klett, Stuttgart 1999 

Volker Eismann, Wirtschaftskommunikation Deutsch , Langenscheidt 

Dreyer/Schmitt: A practice Grammar of German 

Evaluation 

Die Studenten werden auf Grund ihrer Präsentationen, ihrer schriftlichen Arbeiten 

(Hausübungen) und ihrer Mitarbeit am Unterrichtsgeschehen beurteilt. 

Besprechung der Beurteilung: in der letzten Lehrveranstaltung 


Die Verwendung der deutschen Sprache wird vor allem mit interaktiven Methoden und 

der Einbeziehung audiovisueller Medien trainiert. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 227

Es werden Präsentationen und verschiedene kommunikative Situationen wie Dialoge, 

Interviews, Diskussionen geübt. 

Die Studenten werden ermutigt, sich so oft wie möglich am Unterricht zu beteiligen, um 

ihre Sicherheit im Gebrauch der deutschen Sprache zu steigern. 

Russian IV 




After this course students will be able to present a company, talk about their working 

experience / internship, help their Russian guest / business partner in Vienna (making 

appointments, showing him/her round Vienna etc.), talk about their educational career 

and write a CV. 


RUS 3 


A Russian course for beginners at intermediate level aiming at teaching basic Russian in 

a communicative way, including numerous dialogues, listening and reading 

comprehension, but also providing the grammar necessary for further intensive studies. 

Written work is intended to consolidate oral skills and facilitate correct use of Russian. 

The course also includes information on Russian Culture and Civilization to facilitate 

better understanding of Russian life and institutions and guidelines to presentations 

skills. 

Literature 


Verlag 1996 .ISBN 3-19-004467-8 



CD 

Evaluation 

Regular vocabulary/grammar tests 


Mid-term test 

Endterm test (written and oral) 



help of audio texts (cassettes), automatizing the situations, at the same time providing 

the necessary language structure. Great emphasis is put on enlarging the vocabulary as 

fast as possible. Grammar is introduced to make comprehension and text production 

easier and more effective. The situational dialogues are embedded in typical everyday 

situations. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 228

Spanish IV 




Parting from the (very) different levels of language knowledge and concerning the 

different language competences, such as speaking, writing, reading, listening and 

intercultural competences, the students will be enabled to: 


economic subjects concerning the field of 

� companies, synthesizing and evaluating information and arguments from a 

number of sources. 


of recorded or broadcast audio and 

� audiovisual material on topics of economic or personal interest delivered in clear 

standard speech. 


about common everyday or job related 

� topics. 


to economic matters with a satisfactory 

� level of comprehension. 


familiar routine and non-routine matters 

� related to their interest and professional field. They can exchange, check and 

confirm information, deal with less routine 

� situations and explain why something is a problem. They are able to express 

thoughts and opinions on more abstract 

� questions. 


matter well enough to be followed 

� without difficulty most of the time. 


concerning the body language and social 

� behavior of the Spanish speaking world. They acquire knowledge, awareness and 

understanding of the relation (similarities 

� and distinctive differences) between the ‗world of origin‘ and the ‗world of the 



SPA 3 


The semester will treat the subjects: basics of economy, companies and their types and 

history, structures and products, business trips and fairs. Oral presentations and written 

texts will be used to improve the ability of speaking, reading, understanding as well as 

the report of ideas from English into Spanish. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 229

Literature 





Evaluation 

written final exam 

homework and e-Learning content 

Presentation 

oral exam 

2 Quizzes 



concerning the treated subjects. 

Therefore videos and authentic texts will be used. Grammar structures will not only be 

trained with structured exercises but although by examples of open learning. 



Types of task, e.g. simulations, roleplay, classroom interaction etc; 

� Goals, e.g. the group-based learning goals in relation to the differing, less 

predictable goals of participants; 



� Activities: group/pair and individual activities, processes: receptive and 

productive. 

Chinese IV 




Our course is according the guideline of the module description for the second 

language/Chinese 

Besides our teaching book (lessons 14, 15, 16, (17)), we have therefore the following 

topics: 

1) making presentations (every student will make a short presentation - topics are to be 

discussed in our first meeting) 

2) Business Chinese - The first meeting (listening comprehension) 

3) Business Chinese - At the dinner table (listening comprehension) 

4) Business Chinese - joint venture/corporates /listening comprehension 

After finishing the course students should be able to make a presentation. Also, they 

should get familiar with a more sophisticated/"polite" language 

when talking with business people. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 230


CHI 3 


In semester 4 we will work on lesson 11-15 of our book „Lu―, accompanied by additional 

selected materials that will also form the basis of Midterm and Final Exam. Focus is laid 

upon training perceptive skills with listening and productive skills by training typical 

dialogues on a range of everyday topics. 

Thematic areas include: buying a train ticket (lesson 11), grocery shopping / measures 

and weight (lesson 12), asking for directions (lesson 13 and 14), Hobbies (lesson 15) 


semester, such as the complement of time, the so called „shi-de― construction to 

emphasize parts of a sentence, auxiliary verbs to express existence, complement of 

degree. 

Grammar of past lessons such as the use of „le― (to express completion of action) and 

the use of auxiliary and modal verbs will be revised in our first two lessons. 


semester, such as the complement of time, the so called „shi-de― construction to 

emphasize parts of a sentence, auxiliary verbs to express existence, complement of 

degree. 

Grammar of past lessons such as the use of „le― (to express completion of action) and 

the use of auxiliary and modal verbs will be revised in our first two lessons. 

Literature 

Zhao Jinming, Chinese Conversation for Foreigners (vol. 1 and 2) Additional material will 

be distributed by the instructor and/or is to be downloaded from the e-learning platform. 

Evaluation 

Final Exam: 40% 

Midterm Exam: 30% 

Quizzes: 30% 

Total: 100% 




culture. 

For the written aspects of Chinese we will use online resources such as dictionaries and 

transliteration tools (Characters to Pinyin) to facilitate reading and writing Chinese texts. 

E-Tourism 


Fall 2 ETM 2 


To understand the importance of quality content in the context of eTourism 

To learn the basics of HTML structure 

To understand the difference between content and design 

To be aware of the content life cycle and the content production process 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 231

To create the information structure for a complex website 

To become familiar with usability guidelines 

To learn how to write for the Internet and how to edit pictures 

To understand the tasks of a Content Manager 

To work with professional Content Management Systems (e.g. Tiscover, Nethotels) 

To understand the basics of performance measurement of websites (Web Metrics) 


None 


Providing content that is interesting, current, accurate, relevant, rich, and sufficiently 

detailed has become a competitive advantage for tourist boards and destinations. 

Tourism destinations and tourism businesses today face multiple challenges when trying 

to use their websites to attract customers and generate business results, including: 

Deploying and updating websites costs too much and takes too long. 

Web content is inaccurate or outdated, because the content owners (non-technical 

workers) cannot update the website. 

Content has to be published and maintained quickly, easily, and without requiring highlevel 

technical knowledge by the content managers. Therefore, more and more suppliers 

in the tourism industry use and rely on CMS. A web content management system 

(WCMS) is a computer software system for organising and facilitating collaborative 

creation of documents and other content. A CMS is used for managing dynamic web 

content on web sites, such as articles, events, accommodations, pictures, hyperlinks, 

audio and video files etc. 

In this course we will work with popular Content Management Systems in the tourism 

industry. We will create a website and fill it with content. 

Literature 

Buhalis, Dimitrios (2003): eTourism. Information Management for strategic tourism 

management. Harlow: Pearson 

Lynch, Patrick / Horton, Sarah (2002): Web Style Guide. Basic Principles for Creating 

Web Sites. Yale University Press. (See also above under weblinks!) 

World Tourism Organisation Business Council (1999): Marketing Tourism Destinations 

Online. Strategies for the Information Age. 

Evaluation 

Content Management project 

Written exam 


A variety of approaches will be combined in classroom teaching, e.g. presentations, 

discussions, reflections, practical work. The lecturer will provide 

students with information, guidelines, checklists, and techniques to initiate them with the 

subjects of the respective sessions. 


will replace 2 contact hours, i.e. class attendance is not 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 232

equired. Self directed learning time will give students the opportunity to deepen and 

practice the skills acquired in class. Further details about the 

eLearning module will be given in the first meeting. 

Finance & Investment 


Fall 2 FIN 3 


The students will 

� be familiar with different financing concepts 

� be introduced to the budgeting process 

� know various criteria in investment planning 

� be able to discuss various investment instruments 


FIN 1 


The following topics will be discussed: financing concepts, budgeting process, 

criteria in investment planning, investment instruments 

Literature 


Pearson 2007 

Evaluation 

Written exam 

Group assignment 


tba 

Project Management 


Fall 2 PM 3 



� differentiate between projects and processes 

� understand the benefits and boundaries of project management 

� understand projects as social systems 

� identify the main project success factors such as context-thinking, business-case 

thinking and social competences 

� apply main project management methods and plan project start processes 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 233

� reflect on project content, project process and give feedback 


None 


One of the most demanded skills in tourism industry and business today is the ability to 

manage and cope with complex projects. Examples for projects are the organisation of 

an event, the implementation of a marketing campaign, the launch of a website, the 

implementation of a CRM system or a management information system, or writing your 

bachelor thesis. The art of project management is to deliver results within time and cost 

at the quality desired by the customer. 

This course is designed to make students familiar with essential project management 

skills required in a complex business environment. A project manager is responsible for 

planning, implementing, and monitoring a project and bring it to a successful completion. 

Additionally to the knowledge of project management techniques the project manager 

needs to be endowed with interpersonal skills in order to lead the project team and 

communicate with the relevant project stakeholders efficiently. 

The course outline follows the project management life cycle: 

� Project initiation: feasibility check, team organisation, kick-off meeting 

� Project definition: title, scope, objectives, duration, budget 

� Project planning: work breakdown structure, environment analysis, time schedule, 

resource and cost planning, risk management 

� Project execution and monitoring: controlling of time, cost, and quality, project 

documentation 

� Project closure: final report, dissolving the project team 

Literature 

Tomczyk, C. A. (2005); Project Manager‘s Spotlight on Planning; San Francisco, London: 

Harbor Light Press 

Gareis, R. (2005); Happy Projects!; Wien: Manz 

Kerzner, H. (2001) Project Management. A Systems Approach to Planning, Scheduling 

and Controlling; New York: Wiley & Son. 

Evaluation 

Successful completion of eLearning module 

Written exam 

Project documentation group work 


A variety of approaches will be combined in classroom teaching, e.g. briefings, 

discussions, group work, presentations. 

Face to face sessions will be supplemented by a self-directed eLearning session which will 

replace 2 contact hours. Self-directed learning time will give students the opportunity to 

deepen and practice the skills acquired in class. Further details about the eLearning 

module will be given in the first meeting. 

The lecturer will provide students with information, templates, checklists, and techniques 

to initiate them with the subjects of the respective sessions. 

The course also aims to convey transferable skills, such as: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 234

� Ability to manage complex work assignments 

� Problem solving strategies 

� Time and self-management 

� Working in teams 

� Creativity techniques 

� Documentation and presentation skills 

Meeting Industry Management 


Fall 2 MIM 3 


In this course, the student will be introduced to the areas of incentive travel, convention 

business, seminar and meeting marketing as well as to the essential know how of trade 

show planning. 

After this series of lectures the students should be able to understand the complex and 

manifold world of the meetings industry. 


None 


The following topics will be covered: 

� Introduction to the Meeting Industry Management and discussion of the essential 

differences between leisure tourism and business travel (motives, monetary 

effects, infrastructure, marketing). 

� Individual Business Travel (market of individual business travel, cost factor in 

many companies. traveller needs in a changing environment and challenges for 

suppliers). 

� Incentive travel (introduction of incentive travel as a motivational instrument and 

as a management tool. Planning phases from bidding to trip operation and billing). 

Incentive sales approaches.) 

� Conventions, Trade Shows, Corporate Meetings and Seminars. 

Literature 

Davidson, Rob: Business Travel: Conferences, Incentive Travel, Exhibitions, Corporate 

Hospitality and Corporate Travel, London 2002 

Evaluation 

Access Trade Show (Vienna) Excursion Paper 

End of term exam 


This introductory course will be mainly held in the form of lectures. The lecturer will 

provide students with information of today‘s situation of the industry. Two excursions will 

provide the students with inside knowledge about the Austrian business travel trade 

show ACCESS and the operation of the Congress Casino Baden as meeting and 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 235

entertainment complex. Feedback to the excursion to the access will be evaluated in form 

of a short excursion paper. 

This introductory course will be mainly held in the form of lectures. The lecturer will 

provide students with information of today‘s situation of the industry. Two excursions will 

provide the students with inside knowledge about the Austrian business travel trade 

show ACCESS and the operation of the Congress Casino Baden as meeting and 

entertainment complex. Feedback to the excursion to the access will be evaluated in form 

of a short excursion paper. 

Sustainable Tourism Development 


Fall 2 STM 3 


At the end of the course, the students should have knowledge and practice in the 

following areas: 

� Nature and ecotourism in practice, sustainable development and sustainable 

tourism 

� Climate Change and Tourism 

� Landscape, Inventories and Regional Planning 


None 


� Definitions of nature tourism, ecotourism, sustainable tourism, soft tourism. 

� Measuring touristic impacts on 

� Conflicts between nature/environmental protection and tourism 

� Regional development 

� Trends 

Literature 

Fenell D. (2008): Ecotourism. Third Edition. Routledge. London. New YorkLiburd, J., 

Edwards D. (2010): Understanding the Sustainable Development of Tourism, Goodfellows 

Publisher, London, ISBN: 978-1-906884-13-0 

Weaver D. (2006): Sustainable Tourism. Elsevier. London.Handouts will be distributed in 

the sessions in December. 

Evaluation 

Presentation 

Written exam 


Inputs will be done either by Power Point Presentation or by using Flip Chart and/or 

Whiteboard. The Students receive documentation that includes the topics covered as well 

as exercises 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 236

Event Management 


Fall 2 EVM 3 


The objective of the course is introduce students to the principles event management and 

make them familiar with the potential of event management 


None 


The course will provide information on the following event management topics: 

� Economic aspects of event management on international level 

� Organisation formens in event management 

� Event conception and ferasibility 

� Strategies in event sponsoring 

� Event management and marketing 

� Event planning and event operation 

� Evaluation of sustainability in event management 

� Event agencies 

� Legal aspects in evenet management 

Literature 

Getz, D. (1997): Event Management and Event Tourism, Cognizant Communication Corp. 

Shone, A.: Successful event management, Thomson Learning, 2004. 

Van der Wagen, L., Carlos, B.: Event management for tourism, cultural, business, and 

sporting events, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2005. 

Evaluation 

final written exam 


t.b.d 

Tourism Product Development 


Fall 2 TPD 3 


� to recognise the importance of innovation 

� to understand the basic concepts of innovation and product development theory 

� to be able to describe the nature and structure of tourism products 

� to determine the key factors triggering and contributing to successful product 

development 

� to apply processes and methods for product innovation and development 

� to identify elements and product development strategies by having a look at 

international best-of-class case studies 

� to understand total quality management issues in tourism product development 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 237


None 


The tourism product is a fragmented bundle of intangible, perishable, immovable and 

heterogeneous service components. More specifically, the tourism product is delivered by 

many suppliers in a destination supply chain, which demonstrates the importance of 

destination competitiveness tied to the ability and willingness to cooperate while paying 

particular attention to customers‘ needs. In a world of increasingly dynamic changes and 

continuous internationalisation and globalisation, innovation and a better understanding 

of core competences can be seen as critical success factors of sustainable competitive 

advantage. 

This course incorporates both strategic and operational dimensions of new product and 

service development for the tourism and hospitality industry. A variety of concepts and 

methods will be discussed in class. 

Literature 

GODFREY K., CLARKE J. (2000): The Tourism Development Handbook. A Practical 

Approach to Planning and Marketing. 

GUN, C. (2002): Tourism Planning. Basics. Concepts. Cases. 

PUEHRINGER S. (2008): Regional Tourism Knowledge Management. A Strategic 

Framework for Business Administration and Tourism Management Students and 

Practitioners, Saarbrücken: Verlag Dr. Müller 

TROTT P. (2008): Innovation Management and New Product Development. 

WALDER B., WEIMEIER K., SANCHO P. (2006): Innovation and Product Development in 

Tourism: Creating Sustainable Competitive Advantage, Berlin: Erich Schmidt Verlag 

Evaluation 

Group project and final exam. 


This course will be divided into two parts. While the first module will focus on useful 

theoretical disciplines in tourism product development making use of short in-class 

exercises covering various tourism areas and businesses, the second part will lay 

particular emphasis on product and service development in the tourism and hospitality 

industry. 

Students will be provided with useful information and practical material in order to be 

able to successfully complete group projects of the respective module. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 238


Cultural Tourism 


Spring 2 ACULT 3 


Upon completion of the course students should be able to: 

� define cultural tourism and distinguish between different forms of cultural 

tourism; 

� explain the various forms and dimensions of cultural tourism; 

� describe the variety of cultural attractions and discuss criteria of successful 

attractions; 

� demonstrate awareness of the cultural tourist and its characteristic traits; 

� discuss critical issues such as commodification in relation to cultural tourism and 

cultural tourist attractions. 


None 


The course introduces students to the broad spectrum of cultural tourism. This includes 

first to define the term culture, to address the dynamic concept of culture and to discuss 

cultural encounters. Traditional as well as new emerging forms and dimensions of cultural 

tourism will then be outlined and examined. An overview of cultural tourist attractions 

and criteria of successful attractions will be put forward. Strong emphasis will be placed 

on discussing the cultural tourist. By introducing different typologies of cultural tourists it 

will be shown that cultural tourists do not constitute a uniform market. Students will get 

an insight into different categorizations of cultural tourists based on motivation and depth 

of experiences sought. 

Furthermore, it will be illustrated that changes in the travelling public have implications 

on what is demanded as regards cultural tourism products/attractions and how they want 

to be experienced. Another aim of the course is therefore to address the concept of 

authenticity and the problem of commodification and to reflect critically on these issues. 

The last part of the course will focus on the management of cultural attractions. 

Literature 

Smith, M.K (2003); Issues in Cultural Tourism Studies; London: Routledge 

Meethan, K. (2001); tourism in a global society – place, culture, consumption; 

Basingstoke: Palgrave (Chapter 6: Whose Culture?, pp. 114-137) 

Evaluation 

Final Exam 


Teaching will be primarily in the form of lectures. Discussions on various topics and case 

studies (presented by students) in the field of cultural tourism will form an important part 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 239

of the course and students are expected to actively participate in these discussions. Also, 

small group works will be part and parcel of this course. 

Health and Spa Tourism 


Spring 2 HST 3 


On successful completion of this course, students will have an overview on various basic 

aspects, concepts and strategies of ―Health and Spa Tourism‖. Students will be able to… 

� define ―Health and Spa Tourism‖ 

� give an overview of the history and development of ―Health and Spa Tourism‖ 

and discuss inter-linkages between the historic development and the present 

status of that sector 

� describe and analyse the specific products and services, as well as product and 

strategy development 

� describe the specific framework conditions such as changing markets for 

Health and Spa Tourism 

� analyse quality management issues in ―Health and Spa Tourism‖ 


None 


This course provides an introduction to ―Health and Spa Tourism‖. Students will be 

provided with an overview on this topic, from definitions and basic principles of Health 

and Spa Tourism to the topics of Product Development and Quality Management. The 

course focuses framework conditions (e.g. aging society, changing travel motivations) 

and shows strategies of the tourism industry in general and tourism providers in 

particular to meet these challenges. 

A conceptual approach of Tourism Marketing is used to structure the course in four parts, 

consisting of subject-related modules: 

� Introduction, basic principles, definitions, history of ―Health and Spa‖ 

� Society in change – framework conditions for Health and Spa Tourism 

� Product Development in the field of Health and Spa Tourism – with special 

focus on Quality Management 

� Case Studies: Profiles of ―Health and Spa Destinations‖ 

Literature 

Smith, Melanie, Puczkó, László (2009): Health and Wellness Tourism. Oxford: 

Butterworth-Heinemann. 

Erfurt-Cooper, Patricia, Cooper, Malcolm (2009): Health and Wellness Tourism. Spas and 

Hot Springs. Bristol: Channel View Publications. 

D‘Angelo, Janet M. (2006): Spa Business Strategies: A Plan for Success. Clifton Park, NY: 

Thomson Delmar Learning. 

Nefiodow, Leo A. (2006): Der sechste Kondratieff: Wege zur Produktivität und 

Vollbeschäftigung im Zeitalter der Information. Sankt Augustin: Rhein-Sieg-Verlag. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 240

Online Sources 

Best Health Austria, Gesellschaft für Gesundheitstourismus mbH. 

www.besthealthaustria.com 

Relax Guide. www.relax-guide.com 

World Health Organization. www.who.int 

Deutscher Wellness Verband. www.wellnessverband.de 

Alpine Wellness. www.alpinewellness.com 

Evaluation 

paper & presentation, final examination 


Theoretical models and practice examples, case studies, overview, group works seminar 

paper will allow students to follow actively and participate in an effective way; hand outs 

are to be prepared. 

Sports Tourism 


Spring 2 SET 3 


Upon completion of the course students shall 

� Have a clear insight into the world of sports tourism 

� Get a broad understanding of sports sponsoring, how to sell sponsorships and how 

to analyse sponsorhips 

� Experience how to activate sponsoring within the marketing mix 

� Learn how to use PR and media within the world of sports and get an idea of how 

to create and distribute PR content 

� Learn how to develop concepts, present oneself and one`s creative ideas and how 

to defend one´s ideas. 


SET 5 


The course will start with a general introduction, within lectures, into sports tourism and 

sports marketing 

� Sports Tourism (Introduction, Sports organization, Infrastructure, Branding, 

Sponsors Partner Program) 

� Sport Sponsoring (Benefits of sponsoring, Strategic sponsoring / theory, Kinds of 

sports sponsorship, Sponsoring principles, What do I need to do to find a sponsor?) 

� Activation of Sponsoring / Integration into Marketing Mix (Theory, Examples, 

Testimonials, development of an activation campaign of a selected Sponsorship) 

� Media Partnerships and PR in sports marketing (PR in sports, Media Partnerships, 

Content development & content distribution) 

� Monitoring (The importance of research, Analysis of Sponsorships, Development, 

Return on Investment) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 241

Literature 

1. Sylvia Allen, 'How to be successful at sponsorship sales', Trafford publishing 

(publisher), 2010 

2. Paul Mark Pedersen, Janet Parks, Jerome Quarterman, Lucie Thibault, 'Contempory 

Sport Management', Human Kinetics (publisher), 2010 

Evaluation 

Presentation 

Final exam 


Self directed learning time will give students the opportunity to prepare for class and 

deepen the knowledge acquired in class. I do expect students to discuss topics and to be 

interactive. A special focus will be held on presentation skills of students. 

Bachelor Seminar II 


Spring ??? BSE 8 


� Upon completion of this seminar students should have 

� formulated their research questions 

� executed the literature research on the topic 

� structured their their bachelor paper 

� applied appropriate methods of scientific work 

� applied the formal requirements of a bachelor paper 


BSE 1 


At the beginning students will be provided with theoretical input on how to conduct and 

analyse qualitative research including expert interviews and focus group discussions. 

Students will have the opportunity to discuss technical issues related to their work in two 

individual coaching sessions. 

Depending on the individual requirements the following topics will be covered: 

� Help with finding adequate literature 

� Structure of the BA paper 

� Help with literature review 

� Academic Writing 

� Citing / Rules for Citations 

� Quantitative Data Analyses 

� Qualitative Methods 

� Preperation for defense of BA Paper 

Literature 

Creedy, J. (2008). Research Without Tears. From the First Ideas to Published Output. 

Cheltenham: Edward Elgar. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 242

Diamantopoulos, A. & Schlegelmilch, B. (2000). Taking the Fear Out of Data Analysis. 

London: Thompson Learning. 

Finn, M., Elliott-White, M. & Walton, M. (2000). Tourism & Leisure Research Methods. 

Essex: Pearson Longman. 

Allison, B. (1997). The Student's Guide to Preparing Dissertations and Theses. London: 

Kogan. 

Carson, D., Gilmore, A., Perry, Ch., & Gronhaug, K. (2005). Qualitative Marketing 

Research. London: Sage. 

Veal, A.J. (2006). Research methods for Leisure and Tourism. 3rd ed., Harlow: Prentice 

Hall. 

Evaluation 

Bachelor Thesis 2 


A combination of lectures, coachings and elearning sessions will be applied. 

Chinese V 


Spring 2 CHI 2,5 


The general aim of this semester‘s course is a.) the training of productive language skills 

with additional material on the topics treated in the book and b.) the training of 

perceptive skills with listening material provided by the book. Tourism and export related 

topics will both be treated. 

Lesson 18 – 20 in Textbook I and selected material of further lessons in Textbook II will 

form the basis of this semester‘s course. By this more knowledge about the structures of 

the Chinese language will be mastered during this semester. (comparative, conditional, 

conjunctions / sentence linking, reduplication of measure words, adjectives, the 

structural particle ―de‖, tense markers ―le‖ vs. ―zhe‖ vs.―guo‖….). 

Further to this upon the successful completion of the semester students will also have the 

ability to type Chinese (i.e. e-mail) by using online-resources for Chinese characters and 

use online resources that help them to understand and translate Chinese texts. 

(transformation of characters into pinyin - transliteration, online dictionaries, …) 


CHI 4 


Lesson 16 – 18 in our Textbook Lu as well as selected additional (audio) material will 

form the basis of this semester‘s course, the topics covered on our textbook are 

� Lesson 16 Health (Grammar: complement of result) 

� Lesson 17 Congratulations / Festivities (Grammar: potential verb complement 1) 

� Lesson 18 past experience (Grammar the experiential perfective "guo" to express 

past experience, complement of frequency) 

� Lesson 19 searching for things (Grammar potential verb complement 2) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 243

Literature 


Culture University. 2002, Vol 1 and 2. 

A Chinese-English / English-Chinese dictionary 

Required textbook: 


Culture University. 2002, Vol 1 

� Writing Chinese Characters 

http://www.quickmandarin.com/chineseinput/inputchinesepy.php 

� Writing Pinyin with tone markers 

http://www.csulb.edu/~txie/Itool/type_pinyin_with_tones.htm 

� Pronunciation of Chinese syllables 

http://www.hello-han.com/ch-education/yinjieku/hanziyinjieku-en.php 

� Online Dictionaries 

http://us.mdbg.net/chindict/chindict.php 

� Elementary Chinese Grammar 

http://www.ctcfl.ox.ac.uk/Grammar%20exercises/ 

Evaluation 

Final Exam 

Midterm Exam 

Quizzes 

Short presentations 

Homework 



and interactive approach which emphasizes the strong relation between language and 



aspects of Chinese culture. 

Another important aim of the course is to teach methods for reading Chinese texts. 

Students will get familiar with online resources such as dictionaries, transliteration tools 

(Characters to Pinyin) which will help them to work on their language skills also after 

completion of the course. 

French V 


Spring 2 FRE 2,5 


Upon completion of this course the students will have acquired the following 

competences: they can characterize typical features of international tourism and cope 

with climate change and its effects on tourism. They are able to analyse air traffic, 

budget airlines and recent tendencies in this context. Moreover, they can interpret the 

latest figures of tourism in France, describe its economic importance and show common 

reactions typical of French and international tourists. This includes a glimpse at the 

situation in territories overseas. The students can also deal with different forms of 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 244

tourism and illustrate their characteristics (for example tourisme de santé et bien-être). 

Grammar skills will be revised. 


FRE 4 


The course should give an overview of structures and tendencies characterizing tourism 

today. This involves the introduction of specialized language; business French will be 

used in many contexts and will enrich the students' vocabulary. Classes are concerned 

with climate change, current developments in air traffic and particular features of tourism 

in France. Moreover, essentials forms of tourism will be compared: parallels and 

differences between le tourisme de culture and le tourisme d'affaires, for example, will be 

discussed. Students also concentrate on structures that help them to present the various 

details of controversial economic subjects (presenting pros and cons of topics and 

drawing effective conclusions). All in all, the participants should get a precise picture 

illustrating the fascinating world of tourism made in France. Oral communication forms 

will be emphasized. 

Literature 

Required text: Script: Manual for French-Semester 6, dictionary; 

Additional readings: newspapers and magazines (for example Le Monde, L'Expansion or 

L'Express). 

Evaluation 

Written test 

oral exam 

speech (intervention) 

group work 




understand and react. Various exercises will lead to a better understanding of the topics, 

the correct use of the relevant terminology and develop the language competence both in 


German advanced 


Spring 2 GER Adv. 2,5 


Upon completion of this course the students will be able to communicate in a written and 

oral way in a correct and idiomatic German. They should be able to use their German in a 

professional context and to talk about the specific skills at the IMC. 


GER Intermediate 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 245


The German in use will cover the following professional situations: 

� to analyse a job offer and to apply for it 

� to write a Resume (CV) 

� to write a Cover letter 

� to speak about your strengths and your weak points 

� to prepare and to pass an interview 

� to speak about Austrian/German school system and to compare it with school 

systems in other countries 

� talking about professional choice 

� jobs in the future 

� unemployment 

� intercultural aspects: cultural differences at work 

Literature 

A course-book hand-out elaborated by the lecturer will be the basis of the course. 

Additional Reading: 

Dreyer/Schmitt: A Practice Grammar of German 

Evaluation 

presentations and role playing 

written exam 

their home exercises 


The course tends to be very interactive that means based on authentic situations, role 

playing, discussion and usage of different media. The students will be encouraged to 

actively participate in the course as much as possible to enhance their confidence in 

using German. 

German higher advanced 


Spring 2 

GER 

Adv. 

Higher 

2,5 


Die Studenten sollen deutschsprachige Texte (auch Hörtexte) verstehen und sich sowohl 

schriftlich als auch mündlich in möglichst korrektem und gewandtem Deutsch ausdrücken 

können. 

Sie sollen die Fähigkeit haben, die deutsche Sprache im Geschäftsbereich richtig 

anzuwenden, Geschäftsbriefe zu verfassen und ihre Fachkenntnisse, die sie während 

ihres Studiums erworben haben, in deutscher Sprache wiederzugeben. 

Die Studenten sollen Äußerungen der deutschen Sprache, vor allem auch der Medien, 

differenziert und kritisch beurteilen können. 

Sie sollen weiters ihre sprachliche Kreativität im Deutschen unter Beachtung der Sprech- 

und Schreibrichtigkeit weiterentwickeln. 


GER Advanced 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 246


Der deutsche Sprachgebrauch wird vor allem für folgende Bereiche geübt: 

Medien 

Werbung - v.a. die Tourismus- und Exportwirtschaft betreffend 

Veränderungen in der Gesellschaft und Arbeitswelt 

Globalisierung 

Handel, Export, Import 

Literature 

Aktuelle Artikel aus diversen deutschsprachigen Zeitungen und Zeitschriften. 

Aktuelle Filme und Fernsehsendungen 

Nicolas, Sprenger, Weermann, Wirtschaft – auf Deutsch, Verlag Klett, Stuttgart 1999 

Volker Eismann, Wirtschaftskommunikation Deutsch , Langenscheidt 

Dreyer/Schmitt: A practice Grammar of German 

Evaluation 

Die Studenten werden auf Grund ihrer Präsentationen, ihrer schriftlichen Arbeiten 

(Hausübungen) und ihrer Mitarbeit am Unterrichtsgeschehen beurteilt. 

Besprechung der Beurteilung: in der letzten Lehrveranstaltung 


Die Verwendung der deutschen Sprache wird vor allem mit interaktiven Methoden und 

der Einbeziehung audiovisueller Medien trainiert. 

Es werden Präsentationen und verschiedene kommunikative Situationen wie Dialoge, 

Interviews, Diskussionen geübt. 

Die Studenten werden ermutigt, sich so oft wie möglich am Unterricht zu beteiligen, um 

ihre Sicherheit im Gebrauch der deutschen Sprache zu steigern. 

Italian V 


Spring 2 ITA 2,5 



� Present a commercial/industrial product (in oral and written form) 

� Present a destination (in oral and written form) 

� Organize a travel 

� Organize and attend a congress 

� Organize the participation in a trade fair and visit it 

� Produce written texts like letters, simple reports on touristic and economic topics, 

brochures, travel programmes, congress programmes and compositions 

� Understand texts about the tourism industry and some important economic topics 

like marketing and meeting industry 

� Sustain monologues on the topics dealt with during the lessons 

� Interact in conversations on the topics dealt with during the lessons 

� Read and summarize written texts 


ITA 4 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 247


The course ―L‘italiano per gli affari‖ (Part 2) is designed to develop the students‘ 

communicative competence as independent users in business communication and also 

their general communicative competence. 

The course is fast and demanding and requires steady work throughout the semester. 

During the course the students will learn to cope with various situations of the business 


They will be also introduced to the main aspects of the tourism industry and its 

terminology as well as to important structures of the Italian language. 

Further the course focuses on the development of the skills of understanding, 

summarizing and producing texts about economic and professional topics. 

Literature 

R.JEZEK, L’italiano per gli affari. 2a parte.(script) 

Evaluation 

written exam 

oral exam 

Assignments 


Through a variety of methodological approaches supported by different types of media 

the course will introduce the students to some aspects of business communication, to the 

main aspects of the tourism industry and to important structures of the Italian language. 

In order to implement their newly acquired knowledge in their general communicative 

competence and to develop their command of the Italian language the students will read 

and discuss texts and practice communicative skills with role plays and presentations. 


They will also produce in the classroom and at home a variety of written texts such as 

letters, brochures, reports programmes and compositions. 

They are also expected to do a small research on touristic topics using Internet and to 

write a report about their findings. 

Russian V 


Spring 2 RUS 2,5 


After this course students will be able to handle basic business correspondence in written 

form, to present their company, talk about their jobs, their plans for the future, talk 

about their educational career and write a CV. Furthermore, students will learn how to 

read, summarize and comment on authentic Russian texts related to economics. 


RUS 4 


A Russian course at intermediate level aiming at teaching basic Russian in a 

communicative way, including numerous dialogues, listening and reading comprehe 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 248



information on Russian Culture and Civilization to facilitate better understanding of 

Russian life and institutions and guidelines to presentation skills. 

Literature 

Harald Loos, ―Бизнес. Lehrbuch der russischen Sprache für die Wirtschaft ―. 1998 E. 

Weber Verlag GmbH. ISBN 3-85253-301-1 

Evaluation 


Regular vocab/grammar tests 

Final exam (written + oral) 







The course also contains some basic business situations. 

Spanish V 


Spring 2 SPA 2,5 


the students participating in this course will be enabled to: 


economic subjects concerning the field of 

� companies, synthesizing and evaluating information and arguments from a 

number of sources. 


of recorded or broadcast audio and 

� audiovisual material on topics of economic or personal interest delivered in clear 

standard speech. 


about common everyday or job related 

� topics. 


to economic matters with a satisfactory 

� level of comprehension. 


familiar routine and non-routine matters 

� related to their interest and professional field. They can exchange, check and 

confirm information, deal with less routine 

� situations and explain why something is a problem. They are able to express 

thoughts and opinions on more abstract 

� questions. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 249


matter well enough to be followed 

� without difficulty most of the time. 


concerning the body language and social 

� behavior of the Spanish speaking world. They acquire knowledge, awareness and 

understanding of the relation (similarities 

� and distinctive differences) between the ‗world of origin‘ and the ‗world of the 



SPA 4 


The semester will treat the subjects: different types of tourism, commercial 

correspondence, fairs, advertising, conferences, doing business in Spanish speaking 

countries, etc. Written texts (newspaper articles) will be used to improve the ability of 

speaking, reading, understanding as well as the report of ideas from English into 

Spanish. 

Literature 





Evaluation 

written final exam 

2 Quizzes 

oral exam 

homework 

e-Learning content 



concerning the treated subjects. 

Therefore videos and authentic texts will be used. Grammar structures will not only be 




Types of task, e.g. simulations, roleplay, classroom interaction etc; 

Goals, e.g. the group-based learning goals in relation to the differing, less predictable 

goals of participants; 

Outcomes: General and economic texts, summaries, tables, presentations, etc. 

Input: instructions, materials such as newspaper articles, internet resources, etc. 

Activities: group/pair and individual activities, processes: receptive and productive. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 250

Controlling 


Summer 2 CONTR 3 


The students will 

� be familiar with different concepts of controlling (operative and strategic). 

� know how to apply financial ratios & ratio systems in the context of valueoriented 

controlling. 

� develop an understanding of the functioning of business intelligence systems. 

� be familiar with financial reporting issues. 

� have an understanding of different business structures. 


FIN 1 


Students will learn how to apply modern controlling concepts in tourism. Commonly used 

instruments of controlling will be practically applied. 

Literature 


Pearson 2007 

Evaluation 

Written exam 

Group assignment 


tba 

Entrepreneurship 


Spring 2 ENTRE 2 


The learners should be able to 

� analyze the characteristics and skills of successful entrepreneurs individually and 

in a team. 

� develop a business idea through brainstorming and analysis of ideas generated 

and they should be able to appraise different business plans and write a short 

outline/executive summary of a business plan. 

� investigate the market and to develop a marketing strategy and compile a 

marketing plan out of these findings. 

� select the appropriate organization/ administration structure and prepare a 

business strategy. 

� operating plan including R&D planning. 

� prepare a finance and investment plan. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 251

� prepare financial statements necessary for a business plan and to assess included 

risks. 

� present and defend a business plan. 


None 


Entrepreneurship is course designed to understand the meaning of entrepreneurship and 

comprehension of starting-up a business. This course shall provide learners with the 

fundamental entrepreneurial competence in order to start a small enterprise. 

Furthermore it provides students the experiencing skills needed to effectively organize, 

develop, create, and manage their own business. 

This course is based upon the Entrepreneurial Learning which includes business, 

management, and entrepreneurship; communication and interpersonal skills. 

Emphasis is placed on the functions of marketing: distribution, financing, marketing 

information management, pricing, product/service management, promotion, selling, 

sources for financing; investments; different types of costs associated with opening and 

running a business; elements of financials of a business plan such as balance sheet, 

income statement, three year forecasted income statement, repayment plan; cash flow 

calculations; and risk analysis. 

Additional topics to be addressed slightly are assessment of personal skills, the 

understanding of small businesses and its place in our global economy, interpersonal 

skills, developing and assessing business ideas, and the role quality and service play in 

business. Students have to develop a written business plan for a business of their choice. 

Literature 

Acs, Zoltan J., and David B. Audretsch. Handbook of Entrepreneurship Research: An 

Interdisciplinary Survey and Introduction. New York: Springer. 2003. 

Botha, Melodi; Fairer-Wessels, Felicite; Lubbe, Berendien. Tourism Entrepreneurs, Juta & 

Co Ltd, 2006. 

Shane, Scott. A General Theory of Entrepreneurship: The Individual-Opportunity Nexus. 

Cheltenham, U.K.: Edward Elgar. 2003 

Sharma, K.. Tourism and Development, Neu Dehli, 2005 

Smit, L. Tourism Entrepreneurship: Start Your Own Tourism Business, Entrepreneurship, 

2001, Cape Town. 

Smit, L., T.C. Vivian. Tourism Entrepreneurship and Business Management, CLS 

Publishers, 2001. 

Assessment 

� The business idea, 

� The written business plan, 

� The necessary spreadsheets for budgeting and calculations, 

� The presentation of the business idea in front of a real jury. 


Case studies and discussions 

Individual and group practices 

Own field research 

Written paper 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 252

Destination Management 


Spring 2 DM 3 


Introduction to the basics of destination management. The students shall be able to 

discuss typical developments and problems in tourism destinations and be able to provide 

problem solutions. Hence great attention is put on analytic procedures in the sense of 

problem solutions. 


none 


The following contents are covered: 

� Development and conception of destinations and the destination management 

� Tourism organizations and their role in the destination management 

� Presentation of different destination management (models) systems in 

international perspective 

� Stakeholder in destinations, and the management of change Destination life 

cycles 

� Development of strategic business plans 

Literature 

Agrarwal, S. (1997). The resort cycle and seaside tourism: an assessment of its 

applicability and validity. Tourism Management 18(2), 65-73. 

Buhalis, D. (2000) Marketing the Competitive Destination of the Future. Tourism 

Management, 21(1): 97–116. 

Pike, S. (2008) Destination Marketing – An integrated Marketing Communication. 

Approach, Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford (GB) 

Pike, S. (2004) Destination Marketing Organizations, Elsevier, Oxford (GB) 

John, N., Mattson, J. (2005). Destination development through entrepreneurship: a 

comparison of two cases. Tourism Management 26(4), 605-616. 

Sainaghi, R. (2006). From contents to processes: Versus a dynamic destination 

management model (DDMM). Tourism Management 27, 1053-1063. 

Evaluation 

Presentation and Final Exam 


Case study discussion, group work. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 253

TOURISM & LEISURE MANAGEMENT – Master 

Programme 


Research-based Decision Making 


Fall 3 RES 5 


� Principles and methods for empirical data analysis in the tourism and leisure 

sector (such as multivariate analysis) 

� Qualitative research methods 

� Market segmentation methods 

� Interpretation of results and deduction of measures for decision makers 

� Empirical studies in the tourism context 

Literature 

� Chalmers (1999); What is the Thing Called Science?;3rd ed., Queensland: 

University of Queensland Press; 

� Gilbert A., Churchill, J., Iacobucci D.(2005): Marketing Research - Methodological 

Foundations, 9th Edition, Thomson South Western; 

� Hair, J., Black, B., Babin, B. (2005), Multivariate Data Analysis, 6th ed., Prentice- 

Hall; 

� Levine, Berenson & Stephan: Statistics for Managers using Microsoft Excel, 3/e, 

Prentice Hall. 

� Norusis, M. (2009): SPSS 16.0 Guide to Data Analysis, Prentice Hall; 

� Phillimore J., Goodson L., (2004): Qualitative Research in Tourism. London. 

Routledge.Salkind (2005); Exploring research; 6th ed.; Prentice Hall; 

Experience Design 


Fall 2 EXPD 4 


� Experiences from a social, psychological and economical point of view 

� Relevance of staging of experiences in the development of touristic products 

� Change of perspective towards client focus 

� Theoretical models for analyzing and measuring experience quality of touristic 

products by considering the emotional component of the experience 

� Evaluation of touristic products with regard to of experience quality 

� Service marketing 

� Required organisational framework for successful production of experiences 

(company culture, leadership, design) 

� Information and communication design 

� Examples of successful experience design (experience hospitality, city tourism, 

etc.) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 254

Literature 

� Diller, S., Shedroff, N., Rhia, D. (2006): Making Meaning: How Successful 

Businesses Deliver Meaningful Customer Experiences. Newriders, USA 

� Hollins, G., Hollins B. (1991): Total Design. Managing the Design Process in the 

Service Sector. Financial Times/ Prentice Hall. 

� Indi, Y. (2008): Mental Models: Aligning Design Strategy with Human Behavior. 

Publisher: Rosenfeld Media 

� Jennings, G., Polovitz, N., Nickerson, N. P. (2006): Quality Tourism Experiences. 

Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, Burlington USA 

� Lindstrom, M. (2005): Brand sense. Build Powerful Brands through Touch, Taste, 

Smell, Sight and Sound. Free Press, New York 

� Miller, F. P., Vandome, A.F., McBrewster, (2009): Experience Design. Alphascript 

Publishing 

Advanced Project and Process Management 


Fall 3 APPM 4 


� Characteristics of social systems 

� Process- and project-orientation as organizational strategies 

� Cultures and structures of project-oriented companies 

� Linkages between process- and project management 

� Process management: objectives, tasks, methods and roles 

� Project management: objectives, tasks, methods and roles in project start-, 

project controlling and project close down processes 

Literature 

� Borland R., Collopy F. (2004): Managing as Designing. Stanford Business Books. 

An imprint of Stanford University Press. Stanford, California. 

� Gareis, R., Stummer, M., 2008, Processes & Projects, Englische Auflage, Manz, 

Wien 

� Gareis, R., Huemann, M., 2007, Maturity models for the project-oriented 

company, In: Turner J.R. (ed.), The Gower Handbook of Project Management, 

Gower, Aldershot, 187-213 

� Huemann, M., 2004, Improving quality in projects and programmes, In Morris, 

P.W.G., Pinto J.K. (ed.), The Wiley Guide to Managing Projects, Wiley & Sons, New 

York 

� Huemann, M., Anbari, F.T., 2007, Project auditing: A tool for compliance, 

governance, empowerment, and improvement, Journal of Academy of Business 

and Economics, 7(2), 9-17 

� Turner, J.R., Huemann, M., Keegan, A.E., 2008, Human Resource Management in 

the project-oriented organisation, Newtown Square, PA: Project Management 

Institute 



Fall 2 MIM 4 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 255


� Congress management - trends and development, congress planning and 

operation 

� Focus congress logistics 

� Congress marketing 

� Congress financing on international level 

� Congress services 

Literature 

� Allen, Judy (2000): Event planning: the ultimate guide to successful meetings, 

corporate events, fundraising galas, conferences, conventions, incentives and 

other special events / Judy Allen. Toronto: Wiley. 

� Rogers, T. (2003): Conferences and Conventions – A Global Industry. Elsevier 

Butterworth Heinemann. London. 

� Van der Wagen, Lynn: Event management: for tourism, cultural, business, and 

sporting events / Lynn Van der Wagen; Brenda R. Carlos. - Upper Saddle River, 

N.J: Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2005. 

� Van der Wagen, Lynn: Human Resource Management for Events : Managing the 

event workforce, 2007 

� Tum, J. (2005): Management of event operations. Amsterdam, London: 




Fall 2 CULT 4 


� Comparative theories in culture tourism: the non-for profit organisation on the 

International, European and local level. 

� Business areas in arts and culture institutions: structures and organisation of the 

cultural institution; 

� Careers and job profiles in arts and culture; volunteers in the arts; 

� Cultural projects and production – developments in the arts and cultural sector 

versus in the commercial world of entertainment; planning and financing arts and 

culture: grant writing, sponsoring and fundraising schemes and guidelines; 

� Case studies (visual-, performing- multi media a.o. projects); 

� Marketing and sales of arts and cultural projects: audience development; 

segmenting, market research; the marketing mix, media planning; sales 

structures & ticketing; 

Literature 

� Byrnes, W. J. (2009): Management and the Arts. Elsevier. 

� Gradie, J. (2006): A simple statement – A guide to Nonprofit Arts Management & 

Leadership. Heinemann. 

� Kerrigan, F., Fraser, P., Özbilgin, M. (2004): Arts Marketing. Elsevier – 

Butterworth Heinemann. 

� Kotler, N., Kotler, Ph., & Kotler, W. (2008): Museum Marketing and Strategy. 

Designing Missions, Building Audiences, Generating Revenue and Resources. 

Milton: Wiley & Sons. 

� Misiura, Sh. (2006). Heritage Marketing. London: Butterworth-Heinemann. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 256

� Moss, S. (ed.), (2009): The Entertainment Industry – an Introduction. Cabi 

Tourism Texts. 

� Sigala, M. & Leslie D. (2006): International Cultural Tourism – Management, 

implications and Cases. Elsevier – Butterworth –Heinemann. 

� Stein, T.S., Bathurst, J. (2008): Performing Arts Management – A Handbook of 

Professional Practices, Allworth Press. 

Sport & Outdoor Tourism 


Fall 2 SOT 4 


� Market segments in sport tourism (offers and demands in the inter-cultural 

context) 

� The market segment „sports mega events― and ―sports events― in detail 

� International trends in sports and sport tourism 

� Non-Profit vs. commercial sport organizations 

� Specific legal and political frameworks (institutions, unions) 

Literature 

� Allen, S. (2010): How to be successful at sponsorship sales‖. Trafford Publishing. 

� Pedersen, P.M., Parks, J. (2010): Contemporary Sport Management. Human 

Kinetics (publisher). 

Health and Wellbeing Tourism 


Fall 2 HW 4 


� Wellbeing and health as core elements in the development of touristic products 

� International developments in the wellbeing- and health tourism sector 

� Development of the demand in wellbeing- and health tourism sector 

� Link between demand and market development 

� Medical tourism 

Literature 

� Cohen, Marc, & Bodeker, Gerard (2008). Understanding the Global Spa Industry. 

Spa Management. Amsterdam: Butterworth-Heinemann. 

� Erfurt-Cooper, P., Cooper, M. (2009). Health and Wellness Tourism. Spas and Hot 

Springs. Bristol: Channel View Publications. 

� Smith, Melanie, & Puczkó, László (2009). Health and Wellness Tourism. 

Amsterdam: Butterworth-Heinemann. 

E-Tourism Application Domains 


Fall 2 ETSM 3 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 257


� Definitions and terminology eTourism 

� eTourismus markett 

� Characteristics of the eTourist, behavior in information search and booking 

� eBusiness Models 

� Application domains of eTourism (cases from destinations, hospitality, 

intermediaries, transportation) 

� Web 2.0/Travel 2.0 

Literature 

� Antoniou, G., van Harmelen, F. (2004): A Semantic Web Primer. MIT Press. 

� Buhalis, D. (2003): eTourism. Information Management for strategic tourism 

management. Harlow: Pearson. 

� Buhalis, D., Laws, E. (2001): Tourism Distribution Channels. Practices, Issues and 

Transformations. London: Continuum. 

� Buhalis, D., Costa, C. (2006): Tourism Management Dynamics. Elsevier. 

� Buhalis, D., Egger, R. (2008): eTourism Case Studies. Elsevier 

� Chaffey, D. (2002): E-Business and E-Commerce Management. Prentice Hall 

� Combe, C. (2006): Introduction to E-business. Management and strategy. 

Elsevier. 

� Daft, R. L. (2008): New Era of Management. Cengage. 

� Hutt, M. D. , Speh, T. W. (2004): Business Marketing Management. A strategic 

View of Industria and Organisational Markets. Thomson. 

� Inkpen, G. (1998): Information Technology for Travel and Tourism. Longman 

� Laudon, K. Traver, C. (2008): eCommerce. Business. Technology. Society. 

Pearson 

� O‘Connor, P. (1999): Electronic Information Distribution in Tourism and 

Hospitality. New York: CABI Publishing 

� Passin, T. (2004): Explorer‘s Guide to the Semantic Web. Manning 

� Pitts, R. A., Lei, D. (2006): Strategic Management. Building and Sustaining 

Competitive Advantage. Thomson. 

� Sheldon, P. (1997): Tourism Information Technology. CA International 

� Thompson, J., Martin, F. (2005): Strategic Management. Awareness and Change. 

Thomson 

� Werthner, H. Klein, S. (1999): Information Technology and Tourism – A 

Challenging Relationship. Wien, New York: Springer. Chapter 1 

� World Tourism Organization Business Council (1999): Marketing Tourism 

Destinations Online. Strategies for the Information Age 

Journals 

� Information and Communication Technologies in Tourism. Proceedings of the 

ENTER conferences. Springer (published annually since 1994) 

� American Marketing Association (Ed.). Journal of International Marketing. 

(published quarterly) 

� Travel and Tourism Research Association (Ed.). Journal of Travel Research. 

(published bimonthly) 

� Maurer, C. & Lutz, V. (2011). The Impact of Digital Divide on Global Tourism: 

Strategic Implications of Overcoming Communication Gaps Caused by Digital 

Inequalities. In R. Law, M. Fuchs & F. Ricci, F. (Eds.), Information and 

� Maurer, C. (2010): Integrated Online Marketing – Monitor, Aggregate & Share. In: 

Tourism-Review On-Line Magazine, 7-8/2010, p. 27-29 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 258

� Maurer, C. (2010): Online Travel 2010: Convergence – Meta search – Social 

Media – Location-aware Mobile Apps. In: Tourism-Review On-Line Magazine, 

4/2010, p. 14-16 

� Maurer, C. (2007): The Role of eCRM in an Integrated eMarketing Strategy for 

Tourism Organisations. Tourism-Review On-Line Magazine, 2/2007, p. 42-43 

Information and Communication Technology for Tourism 


Fall 2 ICT 3 


� The role of information in the tourism industry 

� Strategic and managerial role of ICTs in tourism as a tool to gain a competitive 

advantage 

� Pros & cons of various services offered through the Internet (e.g. email, WWW, 

ftp, Instant Messaging, VoIP) 

� The meaning of ICTs for customer relationship management 

� Mobile and wireless services and applications and their impact on tourism 

� Current research areas of ICTs (e.g. standardization, integration & 

interoperability, Semantic Web) 

� Innovative ICT applications used in the tourism industry 

Literature 

� Antoniou, G. / van Harmelen, F. (2004): A Semantic Web Primer. MIT Press 

� Chaffey, D. (2002): E-Business and E-Commerce Management. Prentice Hall 

� Geser, G. et al. (2007): Tourism-Trends & IKT-Szenarien. Trendradar und 

Zukunftsszenarien im e-Tourismus. Hamburg: ITD-Verlag 

� Greenberg, P. (2002): Customer Relationship Management. Berkley 

� Information and Communication Technologies in Tourism. Proceedings of the 

ENTER conferences. Springer (published annually since 1994) 

� Inkpen, G. (1998): Information Technology for Travel and Tourism. Longman 

� O‘Connor, P. (1999): Electronic distribution technology in the tourism and 

hospitality industries. CABI Publishing 

� Passin, T. (2004): Explorer‘s Guide to the Semantic Web. Manning 

� Sheldon, P. (1997): Tourism Information Technology. CA International 

� Werthner, H. / Klein, S. (1999): Information Technology and Tourism – A 

Challenging Relationship. Springer. 

International Consulting I 


Fall 2 IC 3 


� Fundamentals of international consulting 

� Structures, objectives and contents of feasibility studies 

� Hotel pre-opening process 

� Strategic marketing plan development in the hotel industry 

� Operational budgeting process (tools & techniques) based on Uniform System of 

Accounts for the Lodging Industry 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 259

Literature 

� Hospitality Industry Managerial Accounting, 1997, by Raymond S. Schmidgall, 

published by the Educational Institute of the American Hotel & Motel Association, 

ISBN 0-88612-149-8 

� Uniform System of Accounts for the Lodging Industry, Tenth Revised Edition, 

2006, by the Hotel Association of New York City, Inc., published by the American 

Hotel & Lodging Educational Institute, ISBN 978-0-86612-282-5 

� Hotel and Lodging Management, an Introduction, 2001; by Allan T. Stutts, John 

Wiley & Sons, Inc.; ISBN 0-471-35483-X 

Russian I 


Fall 2 RUS 3 


This course is orientated on the ТРКИ-1 (maybe 2), which is recognized as Russian 

Language entry requirements by Russian institutes of higher education. 

(http://www.cie.ru/eng/rus_test_pr.php) It includes the 4 skills listening, speaking, 

writing, reading about everyday, cultural, educational and professional themes. They will 

be enlarged to some kernel themes of the curriculum: sports/health, 

nature/environment, arts/culture and combined with business phrases, which are 

important for later usage. 

Literature 

� Loos, Harald: Бизнес. Lehrbuch der russischen Sprache für die Wirtschaft. Weber 

2005. ISBN 3-85253-316-3 

� Loos, Harald: Grammatik der russischen Sprache für Wirtschaft und Alltag. 

Praktische Grammatik mit Übungen und Schlüssel. Facultas 2007. ISBN 978 -3- 

7089-0050-6 

Spanish I 


Fall 2 SPA 3 



oral and written production, intercultural competences and pays special attention to the 

vocabulary relevant to the tourism industry. 

Literature 

� The lecturer runs the homepage of the Asociación Austríaca de Profesores de 

Español www.aape.at. The students are invited to make use of the link collections 

("Enlaces", "Ejercicios de gramática"). 

� Magazines and newspapers: Emprendedores, QUO, ECOS, CAMBIO 16, El TIEMPO, 

El País, La Gazeta, SPIC; 

� Chastain, Kenneth: Spanish grammar in review, Lincolnwood (Chicago), 1994) 

� Alonso Raya, Rosario: Gramática básica del estudiante de español. Difusión 

(Barcelona), 2005. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 260

� Castro Viúdez, F., Díaz Ballesteros, P.: Aprende gramática y vocabulario 1 + 2 + 

3. SGEL, 2004, 2005. 

� Serie „Practica tu español―, por ejemplo: Losana, J.E.: Los tiempos de pasado. 

SGEL, 2005. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 261


Service Design 


Spring 2 SERD 4 


� Definition of terms and concepts, difference between Experience Design and 

Service Design 

� Application areas for Service Design 

� Methods for the design of new, or further development of existing touristic 

products and services: classical methods (process management) and new 

methods (storyboarding, storytelling, co-design, context panorama, evidencing, 

etc.) 

� Service Design processes 

� Roles in Service Design 

� Integration of Service Design into tourism companies 

� Service Design strategies for tourism companies and organizations 

� Examples of successful Service Design 

Literature 

� Lockwood, T. (2009). Design Thinking: Integrating Innovation, Customer 

Experience, and Brand Value. Allworth Press. 

� Mager, B., Gais, M. (2009). Service Design. Köln, Weimar, Wien: UTB 

� Margolin, V., Buchanan, R., Margolin, V., (1996): The Idea of Design: MIT Press. 

� Miettinen, S., Koivisto, M. (2009): Designing Services with Innovative Methods. 

Helsinki: University of Art and Design. 

� Quesenbery, W., Brooks, K. (2010): Storytelling for User Experience. Crafting 

Stories for Better Design. Rosenfeld Media 

Marketing & Communication Management 


Spring 3 MCM 5 


� Marketing management with focus on planning convergent campaigns 

� Market analysis 

� Marketing controlling and -evaluation 

� Event marketing 

� Promotion / advertising (Print, Radio, TV) 

� Sales promotion 

� Direct marketing 

� Public relations / media 

� Key Account Management 

Literature 

� Chaffey, D. (2006): Internet Marketing: Strategy, Implementation and Practice. 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 262

� Charlesworth, A. (2009): Internet Marketing. A Practical Approach. Elsevier. 

� Combe, C. (2006): Introduction to E-business. Management and Strategy. 

Elsevier. 

� Chaffey, D. (2008): eMarketing eXcellence, Third Edition: Planning and optimising 

your digital marketing. Elsevier. 

� Hanson, W. / Kalyanam, K. (2007): Internet Marketing & e-Commerce. Thomson. 

� Kotler, P., Bowen, J. & Makens, J. (2005). Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism. 

Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall International. 

� Laudon, K.C. / Traver, C. G. (2008): e-commerce. business. technology. society. 

Pearson. 

� Maurer, C. & Wiegmann, R. (2011). Effectiveness of Advertising on Social Network 

Sites: A Case Study on Facebook. In R. Law, M. Fuchs & F. Ricci, F. (Eds.), 

Information and Communication Technologies in Tourism 2011 (pp. 485-498). 

Wien: Springer 

� Maurer, C. & Schaich, S. (2011). Online Customer Reviews Used as Complaint 

Management Tool. In R. Law, M. Fuchs & F. Ricci, F. (Eds.), Information and 

Communication Technologies in Tourism 2011 (pp. 499-511). Wien: Springer 

� McCabe, S. (2009): Marketing Communications in Tourism & Hospitality. 

Concepts, Strategies and Cases. Butterworth-Heinemann. 

� Pickton, D. & Borderick, A (2011). Integrated Marketing Communications. Upper 

Saddle River: Financial Times Prentice Hall. 

� Pike, S. (2008). Destination Marketing: An Integrated Marketing Communication 

Approach. Amsterdam: Butterworth-Heinemann. 

� Sweeney, Susan (2000): Internet Marketing for Your Tourism Business: Proven 

Techniques for Promoting Tourist-Based Businesses over the Internet. Maximum 

Press 

E-Marketing 


Spring 2 EMKT 3 


� Communication models and marketing concepts 

� Main technologies that support eMarketing 

� Pros and cons of various forms of online communications 

� Importance of search engine optimization and search engine marketing for 

eMarketing 

� Key performance indicators for measuring the success of eMarketing campaigns 

� Innovative forms of eMarketing (web 2.0 etc) 

� Legal and ethical issues related to eMarketing 

� Process of developing an eMarketing plan 

Literature 

� Chaffey, D. (2006): Internet Marketing: Strategy, Implementation and Practice. 


� Chaffey, D. (2008): eMarketing eXcellence, Third Edition: Planning and optimising 

your digital marketing. Elsevier 

� Laudon, K.C. / Traver, C. G. (2008): e-commerce. business. bechnology. society. 

Pearson. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 263

� McCabe, S. (2009): Marketing Communications in Tourism & Hospitality. 

Concepts, Strategies and Cases. Butterworth-Heinemann. 

� Sweeney, Susan (2000): Internet Marketing for Your Tourism Business: Proven 

Techniques for Promoting Tourist-Based Businesses over the Internet. Maximum 

Press 

Financial Management 


Spring 2 FIN 3 


� Evaluation methods for investments 

� Investment decisions based on advanced capital budgeting methods Cash flows 

� Cost of capital, optimal capital structure of a companies 

� Financing instruments 

� Budgeting 

Literature 

� Brigham, E. F., Erhardt, M.C. (2008): Financial Management – Theory and 

Practice. Thomson. 

� Eugene F. Brigham, Michael C. Erhardt, Financial Management – Theory and 

Practice, Thomson 2008 

Cooperation Management 


Spring 1 COOP 2 


� Co-operations: theory, gaming theory 

� Cooperation forms 

� Characteristics of co-operations in tourism destinations 

� Selection criteria for adequate organisation forms (strategic fit, compatibility, 

cultures) 

� Criteria for selecting cooperation partners, negotiation strategies 

� Potentials and limits of participatory approaches 

� Processes, tasks and roles in co-operations 

� Cooperation quality and quality measurement 

Literature 

� Alexrod, R. (1984): The Evolution of Cooperation. Penguin Books. 



Spring 2 MIM 5 


Meeting Industry Management, semester 1 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 264


� Congress management from the point of view of organizer and client 

� Financing 

� International organisations 

� Networking and lobbying in congress management 

� Political aspects of congress management 

� Spezifics of the luxury segment in the congress industry 

Literature 

� Allen, Judy (2000): Event planning: the ultimate guide to successful meetings, 

corporate events, fundraising galas, conferences, conventions, incentives and 

other special events / Judy Allen. Toronto: Wiley. 

� Rogers, T. (2003): Conferences and Conventions – A Global Industry. Elsevier 

Butterworth Heinemann. London. 

� Van der Wagen, Lynn: Event management: for tourism, cultural, business, and 

sporting events / Lynn Van der Wagen; Brenda R. Carlos. - Upper Saddle River, 

N.J: Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2005. 

� Van der Wagen, Lynn: Human Resource Management for Events : Managing the 

event workforce, 2007 

� Tum, J. (2005): Management of event operations. Amsterdam, London: 




Spring 2 CULT 5 


Culture Tourism, semester 1 


� Cultural Management in arts and culture institutions: structures and organization 

of the cultural institution; 

� Program Planning, Project and Event Management 

� Cultural Projects and Production; Case studies (Group Work on projects); 

� Applied Marketing and sales with special focus on Museums and Performing Arts: 

audience development; segmenting, market research; 

� The marketing mix, media planning; sales structures & ticketing; 

Literature 

� Byrnes, W. J. (2009): Management and the Arts. Elsevier. 

� Gradie, J. (2006): A simple statement – A guide to Nonprofit Arts Management & 

Leadership. Heinemann. 

� Kerrigan, F., Fraser, P., Özbilgin, M. (2004): Arts Marketing. Elsevier – 

Butterworth Heinemann. 

� Kotler, N., Kotler, Ph., & Kotler, W. (2008): Museum Marketing and Strategy. 

Designing Missions, Building Audiences, Generating Revenue and Resources. 

Milton: Wiley & Sons. 

� Misiura, Sh. (2006). Heritage Marketing. London: Butterworth-Heinemann. 

� Moss, S. (ed.), (2009): The Entertainment Industry – an Introduction. Cabi 

Tourism Texts. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 265

� Sigala, M. & Leslie D. (2006): International Cultural Tourism – Management, 

implications and Cases. Elsevier – Butterworth –Heinemann. 

� Stein, T.S., Bathurst, J. (2008): Performing Arts Management – A Handbook of 

Professional Practices, Allworth Press. 

Sport & Outdoor Tourism 


Spring 2 SOT 5 


Sport & Outdoor tourism, semester 1 


� Sport marketing and cross-marketing in sport tourism 

� Concepts in sport sponsoring 

� Activation in sport sponsoring 

� Corporate social responsibility in sport tourism 

� Specifics of the luxury segement in sport & outdoor tourism 

Literature 

� Allen, S. (2010): How to be successful at sponsorship sales‖. Trafford Publishing. 

� Pedersen, P.M., Parks, J. (2010): Contemporary Sport Management. Human 

Kinetics (publisher). 

Health and Wellbeing Tourism 


Spring 2 HW 5 


Health and Wellbeing Tourism, semester 1 


� Best-practice in health and wellbeing tourism 

� Assets / USP of successful operators 

� Management of health- and wellbeing infrastructure 

� Marketing and communication in the health and wellbeing sector 

� Spezifics of the luxury segment in the health and wellbeing sector 

Literature 

� Cohen, Marc, & Bodeker, Gerard (2008). Understanding the Global Spa Industry. 

Spa Management. Amsterdam: Butterworth-Heinemann. 

� Erfurt-Cooper, P., Cooper, M. (2009). Health and Wellness Tourism. Spas and Hot 

Springs. Bristol: Channel View Publications. 

� Smith, Melanie, & Puczkó, László (2009). Health and Wellness Tourism. 

Amsterdam: Butterworth-Heinemann. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 266

International Consulting II 


Spring 2 IC 3 


IC1 


� Details about the operational aspects of hotel consulting (e.g. the acquisition 

process), preparation of a financial forecast 

� Hotel operator search & selection process 

� Hotel project development cycle 

� Principles of hotel architecture & design 

Literature 

� Hotel Feasibility Studies: Critique, Accuracy, Study Procedure,…; Palonpera, 

Martti; 1993 

� The Hotel and Lodging Market Research Handbook; Norcross, GA: Richard K. 

Miller & Associates, Inc.; 1999-2002 

� Hotel Management and Operations; ED. Denney G. Rutherford, Ivar Haglund 

Hoboken, N.J. Wiley; 2007 

� The Once and Future Hotel Management Agreement Lindquist, Scott A.; Real 

Estate Finance Journal; Winter 2002 

� Hotel Design, Planning and Development; Rutes, Penner, Adams 

Russian II 


Spring 2 RUS 3 


RUS1 


This course is orientated towards the ТРКИ-1, which is recognized as the Russian 

Language entry requirement for Russian institutes of higher education (cf. 

http://www.cie.ru/eng/rus_test_pr.php). It includes the four skills listening, speaking, 

writing and reading about everyday, cultural, educational and professional themes. Those 

topics will be enlarged by central themes of the curriculum and a discussion of current 

economic issues in Russia. 

Literature 

� Loos, Harald. Бизнес. Lehrbuch der russischen Sprache für die Wirtschaft. 

Eisenstadt 1998. 

� Saprykina, E. and Pribyl, D. Wirtschaftsrussisch. München 2004. 

� Loos, Harald: Grammatik der russischen Sprache für Wirtschaft und Alltag. 

Praktische Grammatik mit Übungen und Schlüssel. Wien 2007. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 267

Spanish II 


Spring 2 SPA 3 


SPA I 



oral and written production, intercultural competences. It pays special attention to the 

vocabulary relevant to the tourism industry. 

Literature 

� The lecturer runs the homepage of the Asociación Austríaca de Profesores de 

Español www.aape.at. The students are invited to make use of the link collections 

("Enlaces", "Ejercicios de gramática"). 

� Magazines and newspapers: Emprendedores, QUO, ECOS, CAMBIO 16, El TIEMPO, 

El País, La Gazeta, SPIC; 

� Chastain, Kenneth: Spanish grammar in review, Lincolnwood (Chicago), 1994) 

� Alonso Raya, Rosario: Gramática básica del estudiante de español. Difusión 

(Barcelona), 2005. 

� Castro Viúdez, F., Díaz Ballesteros, P.: Aprende gramática y vocabulario 1 + 2 + 

3. SGEL, 2004, 2005. 

� Serie „Practica tu español―, por ejemplo: Losana, J.E.: Los tiempos de pasado. 

SGEL, 2005. 

� Díaz, Susana: Profesionales II, Madrid 2006 

� Juan, Olga: en equipo.es 2 y 3, Madrid 2002 

� de Prada, Marisa et al.: Entorno Empresarial, Madrid 2008 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 268


During semester 3 students carry out the ARTS (Applied Research and Training 

Semester) semester. The following 3 courses are offered open only the regular students, 

not for of exchange students. 

Coaching Seminar 


Diploma Thesis I 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 269


Sustainable Tourism Management 


Spring 2 SUST 3 


� Sustainable management systems 

� Methods for measuring sustainability of touristic infrastructure and organisations 

� Legal and political dimension of sustainability 

� Consequences of sustainability for users, operators and producers 

� Sustainability and marketing 

� Design of sustainable touristic products and touristic infrastructure 

� Sustainability and biodiversity / ecosystems / landscape 

� International best practises 

Literature 

� Diamantis, D. (2004): Ecotourism : Management and Assessment. London: Thomson 

Learning. 

� Harris, R., Griffin, T., & Williams, P. (2002): Sustainable Tourism. A Bobal 

Perspective. Amsterdam: Butterworth-Heinemann. 

� Higham, J. (2007). Critical Issues in Ecotourism. Understanding a Complex Tourism 

Phenomenon. Amsterdam: Butterworth-Heinemann. 

� Honey, M. (2008). Ecotourism and Sustainable Development: Who owns Paradise? 

Washington D.C.: Island Press. 

� Liburd, J. & Edwards, D. (2010). Understanding the Sustainable Development of 

Tourism. London: Goodfellows Publisher. 

� Macleod D. (2006). Tourism, Globalisation and Cultural Change. An Island Community 

Perspective. New Delhi: Viva Books. 

� Mowforth, M. & Munt, I. (2009). Tourism and Sustainability. Development, 

globalisation and new tourism in the Third World. Third Edition. London: Routledge. 

� Patterson, C. (2007). The Business of Ecotourism: The Complete Guide for Nature 

and Culture-based Tourism Operators. Victoria: Trafford Publishing. 

� Swarbrooke, J. (1999): Sustainable Tourism Management. Wallingford: CAB Intl. 

� Weaver, D. (2006). Sustainable Tourism: Theory and Practice. Amsterdam: 


� Weaver, D. (2008). Ecotourism. Hoboken: John Wiley & Sons. 

Diploma Thesis II 


Spring - DT 10 


Second stage of composing and completing the Master thesis. 

Management Simulation in Tourism Contexts 


Spring 2 SIM 2 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 270


� Management of social systems 

� Management paradigms and consequences for business practise 

� Mistakes in managing complex systems 

� Systemic interventions and systems competency 

� Simulation of processes of touristic organisations/companies 

� Development of strategies and measures to further develop the individual systems 

competency 

Literature 

� Ceccini, A. (1988): Simulation is education. In: Corookall, D. (Hrgs), Proceedings of 

the ISAGA 18th Conference 1987. New York. S 213-228. 

� Checkland, P.B. (1981) Systems Thinking, Systems Practice. Chichester, UK:Wiley. 

� Dörner, D. (1996) The Logic of Failure. New York: Metropoliton Books. 

� Kolb, D.A. (1984): Experiental Learning: Experience as the source of learning and 

development. New York 

� Kriz, W.C. (2000): Lernziel Systemkompetenz. Planspiele als Trainingsmethode. 

Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, Göttingen. 

� Ulrich, W. (2005) Can nature teach us good research practice? A critical look at 

Frederic Vester‘s bio-cybernetic systems approach. Journal of Research Practice 1 (1), 

art. R2. 

� Vester, F. (2003): The Art of Network Thinking: Ideas and Tools for a New Way of 

Dealing with Complexity. dtv. 

Managing & Leading the Tourism Workforce 


Spring 2 MLTW 4 


� Strategic Human Resources Management 

� Personnel marketing 

� Personnel recruitment, Assessment Center 

� Personnel development 

� Career planning 

� Personnel leadership and controlling 

� Beratung/Training/Coaching als Instrumente der Personalentwicklung 

� Knowledge- and competency management 

� Leadership concepts, the role of the manager as leader, decision-maker 

� Interpersonal and intercultural conflicts, authentic leadership. 

Literature 

� Francesco, A.M., Barry, A.G. (1997): International Organizational Behavior: Text, 

Readings, Cases, and Skills. Prentice Hall; 1st edition. 

� Handy, C. (2005): Understanding Organizations. Penguin Global; 4 edition. 

� Hayes, D., Ninemeier, J. (2009): Human Resource Management in the Hospitality 

Industry. Ed. Wiley 

� Hodgetts, R., Luthans, F. (2003): International Management: Culture, Strategy and 

Behavior. McGraw-Hill/Irwin; 5th edition. 

� Mendenhall, M. (2006): Readings and Cases in International Human Resource 

Management. Routledge; 4 edition. 

� Northouse, P. (2006): Leadership: Theory and Practice, fourth edition; Sage 

Publications, Los Angeles. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 271

� Trompenaars, F., Hampden-Turner, C. (2004): Managing People Across Cultures. 

Capstone; 1 edition. 

� Ulrich, D., Smallwood, N. (2007): Building a Leadership Brand; in: Harvard Business 

Review, July–August 2007. 

� Yukl, G. (2010): Leadership in Organizations‖, seventh edition; Pearson, Upper 

Saddle River, New Jersey. 

Sales Design 


Spring 2 SALD 4 


� Spezific characteristics of the tourism market (micro and macroeconomic) 

� Current trends in sales 

� Supplier-focus and understanding of target group 

� Communications- and sales channels in tourism with specific focus on intermediaries 

� Touristic market analysis 

� Bundling of touristic products and services 

� The role of co-operations and networks in sales design 

� Strategies in sales design 

Literature 

� Diller, S., Shedroff, N., Rhia, D. (2006): Making Meaning: How Successful Businesses 

Deliver Meaningful Customer Experiences. Newriders, USA 

� Hollins, G., Hollins B. (1991): Total Design. Managing the Design Process in the 

Service Sector. Financial Times/ Prentice Hall. 

� Indi, Y. (2008): Mental Models: Aligning Design Strategy with Human Behavior. 

Publisher: Rosenfeld Media 

� Jennings, G., Polovitz, N., Nickerson, N. P. (2006): Quality Tourism Experiences. 

Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, Burlington USA 

� Lindstrom, M. (2005): Brand sense. Build Powerful Brands through Touch, Taste, 

Smell, Sight and Sound. Free Press, New York 

� Quesenbery, W., Brooks, K. (2010): Storytelling for User Experience. Crafting Stories 

for Better Design. Rosenfeld Media 

Integrated E-Strategy Development 


Spring 2 IEST 5 


� To identify the ingredients of an eTourism strategy for tourism businesses and 

organisations 

� To explore the role of the vision, value creation, planning and administration, global 

awareness, stakeholder‘s needs, leveraging technology in the development process 

� To understand the strategic role of ICTs for gaining a competitive advantage 

� To analyse and formulate the core elements of an eTourism strategy plan 

� To understand the challenges of the strategic planning process 

� To identify the change originating from the implementation of a strategic plan in an 

organisation 

� To develop an integrated eTourism strategy for a tourism business / organisation 

Basically, strategy is about two things: deciding where you want your business to go and 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 272

deciding how to go there. Strategy development covers a variety of issues, concepts and 

methods. Many topics need to be considered in the formulation and implementation of an 

eTourism strategy, including industry analysis, competitor analysis, ethics, strengths / 

weaknesses, value creation, technology, innovation, product development, diversification, 

balancing the needs of various stakeholders, strategic alliances, organisation design, 

reward systems, corporate cultures, corporate governance. (conf. Pitts / Lei, 2006) 

The goal of this course is to collocate the learning outcomes of the eTourism subjects 

from semester 1+2 in order to analyse best practice cases and to develop an eTourism 

strategy for a tourism business / organisation. In this context, integrated strategy 

development means a systematic approach to align and concentrate all organisational 

resources in order to optimize all resources towards productivity and achieving goals. 

Literature 

Buhalis, D. (2003): eTourism. Information technology for strategic tourism management. 


Combe, C. (2006): Introduction to E-business. Management and strategy. Elsevier. 

Daft, R. L. (2008): New Era of Management. Cengage. 

Hutt, M. D. / Speh, T. W. (2004): Business Marketing Management. A strategic View of 

Industria and Organisational Markets. Thomson. 

Laudon, K.C. / Traver, C. G. (2008): e-commerce. business. bechnology. society. 

Pearson. 

Pitts, R. A. / Lei, D. (2006): Strategic Management. Building and Sustaining Competitive 

Advantage. Thomson. 

Thompson, J. / Martin, F. (2005): Strategic Management. Awareness and Change. 

Thomson 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 273

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION & E-BUSINESS 

MANAGEMENT - Bachelor Programme 


E-Business und E-Commerce 

Semester Wochenstunden LV Code ECTS 

Wintersemester 2 EBEC 2 

Zielsetzung / Lernziele der Lehrveranstaltung 

Nach Ende der Lehrveranstaltung ist der Student in der Lage: 

die grundlegenden Abläufe von Internet-Diensten und die damit verbundenen 

Implikationen für E-Business-Anwendungen darstellen zu können das Potenzial und die 

Möglichkeiten der Nutzung des Internet im Unternehmen abzuschätzen einen typischen 

Prozess zur Erstellung einer Homepage aus Unternehmenssicht zu beschreiben die 

Grundlagen der E-Commerce-Abwicklung (Zahlungssysteme, Geschäftsabwicklung) 

darzustellen. 

Erforderliche Vorkenntnisse 

keine 

Lehrveranstaltungsinhalte 

Zunächst wird die grundlegende Definition von E-Business und E-Commerce erarbeitet 

und ein Überblick über den Internetmarkt in Österreich gegeben. Im Anschluss erfolgt im 

Rahmen eines technikorientierten Abschnittes die Diskussion der grundlegenden Funktion 

des Internet. Dies ist notwendig, um die Möglichkeiten und Einschränkungen der 

Technologie für kommerzielle Anwendungen zu verstehen. Teil dieser Diskussion sind 

Themen wie Internet-Zugangstechnologien, Domain-Namen und deren System sowie ein 

Überblick über die Internet-Dienste. Danach wir der Prozess der Erstellung einer 

Homepage aus Sicht eines Unternehmens diskutiert. Themen wie die Planung, inhaltliche 

und technische Konzeption sowie die Realisierung (aus Sicht des Auftraggebers) werden 

behandelt. Ein Überblick über die Thematik des Internet-Providing rundet dieses LVA ab. 

Ziel der LVA ist die Vermittlung der notwendigen Grundlagen von E-Business und E- 

Commerce im betrieblichen Umfeld. Schwerpunkt ist dabei die Vermittlung des 

Verständnisses für die technischen und prozessrelevanten Abläufe im Zusammenhang 

mit der Nutzung von Internet, Telekommunikation und der Neuen Medien im 

Unternehmen. 

Empfohlene Literatur 

Vorlesungsfolien 

Hansen Hans R.; Neumann, Gustaf: Wirtschaftsinformatik. Band 1&2 in der jeweils 

aktuellen Auflage. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 274

Lehrmethoden 

Die Konzeption der Lehrveranstaltung basiert primär auf dem Vortrag durch den 

Lehrveranstaltungsleiter sowie auf der Diskussion mit Studierenden. Kurze 

Gruppenarbeiten vertiefen den vermittelten Stoff. 

Im Rahmen einer Projektarbeit wird ein Konzept für eine Homepage eines Unternehmens 

erstellt. 

Bewertungsmethoden 

Abschlussklausur und Projektarbeit 

Allgemeine Betriebswirtschaftslehre 


Wintersemester 3 BWL 4 


Im Rahmen dieser Lehrveranstaltung werden die theoretischen Grundlagen der 

Allgemeinen Betriebswirtschaftslehre (ABWL) vermittelt. Auf diese Weise wird das Wissen 

der Studierenden auf eine Basis gestellt, die es ihnen erlaubt, ein gemeinsames 

Verständnis für die ABWL aufzubauen. 

Nach Absolvierung der Lehrveranstaltung sind die Studierenden in der Lage, 

die grundlegenden Begriffe der ABWL zu verstehen und anzuwenden, 

die Grundlagen der Funktionsweise eines Unternehmens zu verstehen, 

die Zusammenhänge im Unternehmen zu analysieren und 

das Wissen über die Funktionen eines Unternehmens als Basis für weiterführende 

Lehrveranstaltungen anwenden zu können. 


keine 


Zu Beginn wird die Betriebswirtschaftslehre in die Wissenschaft eingeordnet. Nach den 

wesentlichen Fragestellungen, die bei der Gründung eines Unternehmens zu erwarten 

sind, werden die einzelnen Funktionalbereiche analysiert. 

Zunächst wird auf die Führung des Unternehmens und auf das Marketing eingegangen. 

Fragestellungen der Finanzierung des Unternehmens sowie der Investitionsentscheidung 

führen zur grundlegenden Analyse der Beschaffung, der Produktion und der Logistik. Ein 

Kurzüberblick über das Controlling sowie über die Bestandteile des Rechnungswesens 

beendet die Lehrveranstaltung. 


Lechner, Karl / Egger, Anton / Schauer, Reinbert: Einführung in die Allgemeine 

Betriebswirtschaftslehre, 23. überarbeitete Auflage, Linde Verlag, Wien 2006 

Schneider, Wilfried / Schneider, Dieter: Betriebliches Rechnungswesen für Einsteiger, 5. 

Auflage, Manz-Verlag, Wien 2005 

Handouts, die in den Lehrveranstaltungen ausgegeben werden. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 275

Lehrmethoden 

Die Lehrveranstaltung ist grundsätzlich als Vorlesung konzipiert, wobei primär ein 

interaktiver Diskurs mit den Studierenden erfolgt. Zusätzlich wird im Kapitel 

"Finanzierung - Investition" ein e-Learning-Modul implementiert. 


Abschlussklausur und Aufgaben aus dem e-Learning-Modul 

Marketing 


Wintersemester 3 MKT 4 

Learning Outcomes: 

This course provides a comprehensive introduction to the area of marketing which 

enables students: 

to define and describe marketing ; 

to understand the role of marketing in the company and its environment; 

to realize the importance of market research and of strategies for market entry; 

to comprehend the implementation of marketing policy tools and to apply them in reallife 

situations. 

Prior knowledge required 

none 


The course sets out with a general overview of the basics of marketing and marketing 

management and covers relevant strategic features. This is succeeded by behaviour 

scientific fundamentals of consumer behaviour. Subsequently topics such as market 

segmentation, target group marketing and market positioning will be dealt with and the 

four tools of marketing policy will be worked on in detail A presentation and discussion of 

the marketing tools: product, price, promotion and place(distribution) are focused on. 

Reading and media 

Kotler, P., Keller, K.L., Brady, M., Goodman, M, & Hansen, T. (2009): Marketing 

Management. 1st European Edition, Pearson. ISBN 978-0-273-71856-7 

Teaching concept 

The students are advised to work through the relevant chapters of the mandatory 

reading in addition to the e-learning modules and the slide set. The lecturer will give a 

summary of the chapters and supplementary literature will be used. Discussions and 

group work as well as the elaboration of case studies are used to round off the course. 

Assessment 

Final test and e-learning project work 

Buchhaltung 


Wintersemester 3 BH 5 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 276


Ziel dieser Lehrveranstaltung ist, gleiche Voraussetzungen zwischen Studierenden für die 

Anforderungen der Lehrveranstaltungen höherer Semester zu schaffen. 

Die Studierenden gewinnen in der Lehrveranstaltung einen Einblick in das betriebliche 

Rechnungswesen und sind am Ende der Lehrveranstaltung mit den Grundlagen der 

Buchführung vertraut. Sie können gängige Buchungsfälle verbuchen. Weiter haben die 

Studierenden am Ende der Lehrveranstaltung einen Überblick über Bilanzierungs- und 

Bewertungsmethoden und Grundkenntnisse im Aufbau der Buchführung und des 

Jahresabschlusses erworben. Sie sind in der Lage einen Jahresabschluss in Grundzügen 

zu analysieren und geltende Bilanzierungs- und Bewertungsmethoden auf den 

Jahresabschluss anzuwenden. 


keine 


Einführung in die Buchführung und Bilanzierung, im ersten Teil der Lehrveranstaltung 

wird vor allem die Verbuchung laufender Geschäftsfälle behandelt und der zweite Teil 

konzentriert sich auf den Jahresabschluss. 


Grohmann C., Schneider W., Eberhartinger E.: Einführung in die Buchhaltung im 

Selbststudium, letzte Auflage, Wien, WUV Universitätsverlag 

Kuhnle-Schadn A.: Skriptum „Einführung in die Jahresabschlussanalyse―, WS 2008/09 

Kuhnle-Schadn A.: Beispielskriptum, WS 2008/2009 

Kuhnle-Schadn A.: Powerpoint-Skriptum, WS 2008/2009 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Inhalte der Lehrveranstaltung werden durch Vorlesung und praktische Übungen 

vermittelt. Zusätzlich ist es erforderlich, dass der Studierende durch Selbststudium 

eigenständig Themengebiete aufarbeitet und vertieft. 


2 Teilprüfungen 

IT-Management im Unternehmen 


Wintersemester 1 ITM 1 


Ziel der Lehrveranstaltung ist die Vermittlung von weiterführenden Inhalten zum Thema 

E-Business im Unternehmen. Der Schwerpunkt liegt dabei auf der Optimierung, dem 

Schutz und der möglichen Auslagerung von E-Business- und IT-Prozessen im 

Unternehmen. 

Nach Ende der Lehrveranstaltung ist der Student in der Lage: 

die Effizienz von E-Business-Anwendungen im Unternehmen kritisch zu prüfen 

kritische Faktoren betreffend der E-Business-Daten im Unternehmen zu erkennen und 

Maßnahmen zum Schutz und zur Sicherung der Daten zu organisieren 

die Thematik der Softwarelizensierung im Unternehmen zu beurteilen 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 277

Profilingtechniken effizient zu nutzen 


keine 


Die Lehrveranstaltung gliedert sich inhaltlich in folgende Blöcke: 

Datenschutz und Datensicherheit: Diskussion der notwendigen Maßnahmen, um für 

geeigneten Datenschutz im Unternehmen und bei externer Übertragung zu sorgen. 

Darlegung der notwendigen Prozesse zur Gewährleistung einer effizienten 

Datensicherung. 

E-Controlling: Methoden und Messgrößen zur Ermittlung des Nutzens bzw. der Effizienz 

von E-Business-Anwendungen im Unternehmen. 

Profiling: dieses Spezialthema widmet sich der Nutzung von Kundenvorgangsdaten zur 

effizienten Erstellung und Umsetzung von Profilen. 

Software-Lizenzen: Arten von Softwarelizenzen und deren Anwendung im Unternehmen. 


Gora W. & Krampert T.;Handbuch IT-Sicherheit; (2003); Addision-Wesley 

Vorlesungsfolien 

Lehrmethoden 


Lehrveranstaltungsleiter sowie auf der Diskussion mit Studierenden. Teile des Stoffes 

werden in Gruppen erarbeitet und präsentiert. In Form von E-Learning werden anhand 

von webgestützten Case-Studies die Inhalte praktisch angewendet. 


Abschlussklausur und Projektarbeit 

Algorithmen und Programmierung 


Wintersemester 2 AP 2 


Die Studierenden sind nach dem erfolgreichen Besuch der Veranstaltung in der Lage, 

eigenständig kleine Computerprogramme zu konzipieren und in MS-Visual Basic 

umzusetzen. 


Keine 


Am Beginn der Lehrveranstaltung werden Programmiergrundlagen, wie Problemanalyse 

und Algorithmenentwurf, besprochen. Aufbauend darauf werden gemeinsam im PC-Labor 

Computerprogramme mit steigendem Schwierigkeitsgrad unter Verwendung eines 

Struktureditors konzipiert und in Visual Basic implementiert. Dabei lernen die 

Studierenden die Konzepte (Variablendeklaration, Alternativen, Schleifen, 

Unterprogramme, ...) von prozeduralen Programmiersprachen kennen. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 278


Kämper, Sabine: Grundkurs Programmieren mit Visual Basic, 2. Auflage, Vieweg Verlag, 

Wiesbaden 2005 

Präsentationen in Form von PPT-Foliensätzen 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Wissensvermittlung erfolgt durch Kurzvorträge und durch gemeinsames sowie durch 

selbstständiges Bearbeiten von Beispielen. Am Ende der Lehrveranstaltung ist von jedem 

LV-Teilnehmer ein Computerprogramm mittleren Schwierigkeitsgrades selbstständig zu 

erstellen. 


Abschlussklausur und Abgabe eines auszuarbeitenden Programmierbeispiels. 

Softwareanwendungen I 


Wintersemester 1 SA 1 


Die Studierenden sind nach Absolvieren der Lehrveranstaltung dazu in der Lage, die 

täglichen Aufgaben ihres Arbeitsumfeldes durch den Einsatz von geeigneten Hard- und 

Software-Werkzeugen effizienter und schneller zu erfüllen und die Softwareanwendungen 

Word und PowerPoint professionell zu bedienen. 


keine 


Inhalt sind die Standardapplikationen Word und PowerPoint der aktuellen Office 

Anwendungen (zusätzlich Wissen zu Sharepoint und OneNote). Durch das selbstständige 

Erarbeiten der Anwendung sollen die Studenten ein Gespür für die Umsetzung von 

Management-Arbeitsaufgaben mit den entsprechenden IT-Tools bekommen. 


Microsoft Press, MS Word das Handbuch 

Microsoft Press, MS Excel das Handbuch 

Microsoft Press, MS Outlook das Handbuch 

Microsoft Press, MS Power Point das Handbuch 

Microsoft Press, MS Access das Handbuch 

Microsoft Press, Microsoft Office XP das Handbuch 

Microsoft Press, Windows XP das Handbuch 

Online-Hilfesysteme der verwendeten MS-Produkte 

sowie online: 

http://www.microsoft.com (Microsoft Corporation) 

http://www.msdn.com (Microsoft Developer Network) 

http://www.w3.org (World Wide Web Consortium) 

Lehrmethoden 

In dieser Lehrveranstaltung soll als höchstes Ziel der praktische Aspekt aller behandelten 

Themen hervorgehoben werden. Gemäß dieser Vorgabe, werden die erste 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 279

Unterrichtseinheit, sowie die Prüfung in einem PC-Labor abgehalten. Die E-Learning 

Einheiten können sowohl im EDV Labor als auch zu Hause zeitunabhängig durchgeführt 

werden. Der Lektor wird den Lernfortschritt während des Semesters kontinuierlich 

überprüfen. 


Abschlusstest 

Wirtschaftsprivatrecht 


Wintersemester 2 WPR 3 


Die Lehrveranstaltung führt von den allgemeinen Grundlagen des Privatrechts ausgehend 

zu den im Unternehmensbereich wesentlichen Themen des Wirtschaftsprivatrechtes. 

Hierdurch wird der Rahmen für eine praxisbezogene Anwendung einzelner im 

Wirtschaftsleben wichtiger Rechtsgebiete geschaffen. 

Der Student kann nach Absolvierung der Lehrveranstaltung einfache Begriffe des 

Wirtschaftsprivatrechtes selbst anwenden und mögliche rechtliche Risiken im 

Unternehmensbereich erkennen. 


Keine 


Grundzüge des Wirtschaftsprivatrechtes unter besonderer Bedachtnahme auf Vertragstypen 

in den wichtigsten Dienstleistungssektoren sowie im Rahmen der Vertriebs- und 

Finanzierungsstrategien. Grundzüge des gewerblichen Rechtschutzes, des 

Wettbewerbsrechtes, des Wertpapierrechtes. 


Skriptum des Lehrveranstaltungsleiters 

Bydlinski Peter, Grundzüge des Privatrechts für Ausbildung und Praxis, 6. Auflage, Wien 

2005, Manz-Verlag samt Beiheft: Fälle und Fragen zum Privatrecht. 

Lehrmethoden 

Die einzelnen Themen werden im Skriptum sowie in den Vorträgen dargelegt und anhand 

von praktischen Beispielen veranschaulicht. Die empfohlene Literatur dient der 

Themenvertiefung und als Nachschlagewerk. 


Abschlussprüfung 

Persönlichkeitstraining I 


Wintersemester 2 PT 2 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 280


Nach Absolvierung der Lehrveranstaltung 

� sind den Studierenden eigene Erlebens- und Verhaltensmuster in den 

Bereichen Lernen, Stressbewältigung und Selbstmanagement bewusst(er) 

geworden; 

� kennen die Studierenden neue Methoden und Strategien in den oben 

genannten Lebensbereichen; 

� verfügen die Studierenden über Motivation und Anleitung zur Umsetzung 

neuer Erkenntnisse; 

� sind die Studierenden in der Lage Zielgruppen orientierte Präsentationen 

vorzubereiten und durchzuführen; 

� können die Studierenden überzeugend und zuhörerorientiert argumentieren; 

� können die Studierenden Feedback geben und nehmen. 


keine 


Stress und Stressbewältigung; Lern- und Arbeitstechnik; Zeit- und Selbstmanagement; 

Entspannung, Visualisierung; Präsentationstechnik; Feedback; Johari-Fenster; 

Präsentationstechnik; Vorbereitung einer Präsentation; Aufbau und Inhalte einer 

Präsentation; Visualisierung, Bild und Foliengestaltung; Medieneinsatz; Körpersprache 

und persönliches Auftreten; Interaktionsstrategien für kritische Augenblicke 


Skriptum 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Inhalte der Lehrveranstaltung werden durch Vortrag, Übungen, 

Teilnehmerpräsentationen, Lernpartnerschaften, Video-Analysen und Diskussions- sowie 

Feedbackrunden vermittelt und durch Selbststudium vertieft. 


Präsentation und schriftlicher Lernbericht 

General Englisch I 


Wintersemester 2 WENG 2 

Learning Outcomes 

The students are able 

� to see, hear or do any particular task in the IELTS exam 

� to describe people, their likes and dislikes 

� to talk about habits in the past and 

� to express cause and effect 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 281

� skim texts to get an overall idea of the content and analyze headings quickly 

� describe data or a diagram and 

� express their own opinions about a topic of general interest 


Higher School Certificate 


The course is designed to help students prepare for the IELTS Academic exam as well as 

to obtain a sound level of proficiency (B 2) in the use of English for general purposes. 

The course contains a wide range of activities providing practice in reading, writing, 

listening and speaking. Word-building and language focus analyzing the main grammar 

areas are also included. 

Topic related areas are social networking, technology now and then interests, e.g. sports. 


„Ready for IELTS― coursebook : ISBN: 978-3-19-122927-6. 

Recommended literature: 

English Grammar in Use - a self-study reference and practice book, 3rd ed., CUP 

www.business-spotlight.de 

Teaching Concept 

The teaching is based on interactive assignments which comprise analysing texts, 

recordings and video clippings for illustration and discussion. Work on grammatical and 

lexical issues will be mainly dealt with in form of self-study (e-learning)in order to be 

revised and checked on in class. 

Assessment 

2 written tests (mid-term and final) 

Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten 


Wintersemester 2 WISS 2 


Diese Lehrveranstaltung bietet eine umfassende Einführung in das Themengebiet des 

wissenschaftlichen Arbeitens, wobei die Studierenden nach Absolvierung der 

Lehrveranstaltung in der Lage sind: 

Grundkenntnisse der Wissenschaftstheorie & Bedeutung für BWL zu haben 

eigenständig ein Thema und adäquate Literatur finden 

Wissenschaftliche Arbeiten inhaltlich logisch und formal korrekt gliedern können 

Stilistisch sauber arbeiten und richtig zitieren 

Grundkenntnisse der empirischen Sozialforschung (qualitativ und quantitativ) zu haben 


keine 


Die Lehrveranstaltung beginnt mit einer allgemeinen Einführung in die 

Wissenschaftstheorie. Anschließend werden Grundlagen und Typen einer 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 282

wissenschaftlichen Arbeit behandelt. Dabei wird im speziellen auch auf den Prozess der 

Themenfindung, der Literaturrecherche und detailliert auf Definition einer adäquaten 

Forschungsfrage eingegangen. Logische und formale Gliederungsrichtlinien setzen das 

Stoffgebiet fort, ergänzend wird noch auf Sprachregeln sowie Zitierregeln eingegangen. 

Eine ausführlichere Schwerpunktsetzung erfolgt auf qualitative und quantitative 

Methoden der empirischen Sozialforschung. 


Berger D. (2010); Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten in den Sozial- und Wirtschaftswissenschaften; 

Wiesbaden: Gabler Verlag 

Rössl D. (2008); Die Diplomarbeit in der Betriebswirtschaftslehre; 4. Auflage; Wien: 

Facultas Verlag 

Berger D. (2008): Foliensatz Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten 

Lehrmethoden 

Den Studierenden wird empfohlen, vor der jeweiligen Lehrveranstaltungseinheit die 

relevanten Kapitel der Literatur durcharbeiten sowie die gegebenen Hausarbeiten 

sorgfältig und eigenständig durchzuführen. Im Rahmen der Lehrveranstaltung wird eine 

Zusammenfassung der jeweiligen Kapitel durch den Vortragenden gegeben und mit 

zusätzlicher Literatur und div. Übungen ergänzt. Diskussionen und Hausarbeiten sowie 

die Ausarbeitung einer wissenschaftlichen Gruppen-Seminararbeit runden die 

Lehrveranstaltung ab. 


Abschlusstest und Seminararbeit 

Statistik 


Wintersemester 1 WISS 2 


Die Studierenden erhalten eine Einführung in relevante Statistikmethoden und können 

nach der LV mit SPSS umgehen und sinnvolle Datenanalysen durchführen (Uni-, 

Bivariat) und diese auch interpretieren und aufbereiten. 


Keine 


Vermittlung theoretischer Grundlagen der Statistik, Anwendung des Wissens in Form 

eines empirischen Projektes. Erheben Daten mittels bspw. einer Online-Befragung und 

Auswerten der Daten mit SPSS. 


Zum Erlernen der Inhalte können die Folien des Vortragenden herangezogen werden. 

Lehrmethoden 

Theoretischer Input mittels Power Point und ergänzenden Gruppenarbeiten 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 283

Kennenlernen von SPSS (Frontal und Einzelarbeit) 

Verfassen von eigenständigen Gruppenarbeiten sowie eines Abschlussberichtes 


Gruppenarbeit, Abschlusstest 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 284


Marktforschung 


Sommersemester 1 MAFO 2 


Nach Absolvierung der LV sollen die Studierenden in der Lage sein 

ein empirisches Marktforschungsprojekt eigenständig planen und durchführen zu können. 


Grundkenntnisse des wissenschaftlichen Arbeitens 


Im Rahmen der LV werden zunächst die theoretische Grundlagen der Statistik sowie der 

Marktforschung vermittelt. Im Anschluss an diesen Theorieblock soll dieses Wissen in 

Form eines empirischen Projektes angewendet werden. Anhand einer quantitativen 

Online-Befragung werden Daten erhoben und mit SPSS ausgewertet. Ein 

Abschlussbericht wird verfasst und dem Auftraggeber präsentiert. 


Empfohlene Literatur (keine Pflichtliteratur) 

� Fantapié Altobelli, C. (2007): Marktforschung. Methoden – Anwendungen – 

Praxisbeispiele. Stuttgart: Lucius & Lucius. 

� Malhotra, N. K. (2007): Marketing Research. An Applied Orientation. 5/e. 

Upper Saddle River: Pearson. 

Lehrmethoden 

Theoretischer Input mittels Power Point und ergänzenden Gruppenarbeiten 

Verfassen von eigenständigen Gruppenarbeiten sowie eines Abschlussberichtes 


Gruppenarbeit, Casting (Gruppenarbeit, Peer Review), Abschlusstest 

Human Resource Management 

Semester Weekly hours LV Code ECTS 

Sommer semester 2 HRM 2 



• to talk about principals of Human Resource Management 

• to make international comparisons 

• to give an overview over HRM measures and tools under special consideration of 

applicability in Austria. 


none 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 285


The parts of the course are: Introduction to principals of Human Resource Management, 

International Comparisons, Overview over HRM measures and tools under special 

consideration of applicability in Austria. 


Human Resource Management, Angelo S. DeNisi und Ricky W. Griffin. Publisher: 

Houghton Mifflin Company, 2008, with eduspace (for e-learning units), 3. Edition 


lectures, presentations, active participation in class discussions, e-learning 

Assessment 

1 written examinations and 1 written report 

Bilanzierung 


Sommersemester 3 BIL 4 


Die Studierenden sollen mit Bilanzierungs- und Bewertungsmethoden inkl. 

unternehmens- und steuerrechtlicher Vorschriften vertraut werden. Sie sind am Ende der 

Lehrveranstaltung in der Lage Bilanzierungs- und Bewertungsmethoden anhand des 

Gesetzestextes nachzuvollziehen und an praktischen Beispielen anzuwenden. 

Weiters sind die Studierenden in der Lage einen Jahresabschluss in Grundzügen zu 

analysieren und die wichtigsten Kennzahlen zu berechnen. 


Grundlagen der Buchhaltung 


Bilanzierung: im ersten Teil der Lehrveranstaltung werden Bilanzierungs- und 

Bewertungsmethoden behandelt und der zweite Teil konzentriert sich auf die Analyse des 

Jahresabschlusses in Grundzügen. 


Auer K. et al: Buchhaltung und Bilanzierung II – Arbeitsunterlage mit Lösungen 

(Skriptum), letzte Auflage, Wien 

Kuhnle-Schadn A.: Skriptum „Einführung in die Jahresabschlussanalyse―, WS 2008/09 

(wird den Studierenden zur Verfügung gestellt) 

Gesetzestext (Auszüge): Wird den Studierenden zur Verfügung gestellt; Quelle: Doralt, 

W. (Hrsg.), Kodex des österreichischen Rechts: Steuergesetzte, 44. Auflage 

Verwendete Powerpoint-Slides werden den Studierenden zur Verfügung gestellt 

Verwendete Zusatzbeispiele werden den Studierenden zur Verfügung gestellt 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Inhalte der Lehrveranstaltung werden durch Vorlesung und praktische 

Übungsbeispiele vermittelt. Zusätzlich ist es erforderlich, dass der Studierende durch 

Selbststudium (u.a. auch anhand des Gesetzestextes) eigenständig Themengebiete 

aufarbeitet und vertieft. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 286



Internes Rechnungswesen 


Sommersemester 2 IRW 3 


Die Lehrveranstaltung verfolgt das Ziel einen Überblick über die Grundlagen der 

Kostenrechnung zu geben. 

Nach Absolvierung der Lehrveranstaltung sind die Studierenden in der Lage, die 

Aufgaben des internen Rechnungswesens innerhalb des Rechnungswesens erläutern und 

anhand von Beispielen darstellen 

die Kostenerfassung durchzuführen 

die Kostenverrechnung durchzuführen 

den Erfolg nach kalkulatorischen Grundsätzen ermitteln 

die Kostenrechnung als Steuerungsinstrument für kurzfristige Entscheidungen sowie für 

langfristige Entscheidungen einzusetzen 


keine 


Zu Beginn werden eine Systematisierung des internen Rechnungswesens durchgeführt 

und die einzelnen Systeme der Kostenrechnung im Zusammenhang analysiert. 

Anschließend erfolgen die Erfassung der Kosten (Betriebsüberleitung, Gliederung der 

Kosten) und die Verrechnung der Kosten auf Kostenträger. Der Erfolgsermittlung mit 

Hilfe der Kostenträgererfolgsrechnung und der Periodenerfolgsrechnung folgt eine 

Analyse der Kostenrechnung als Steuerungsinstrument, wobei der Einsatz als 

kurzfristiges und als langfristiges Entscheidungsinstrument tiefgehend besprochen wird. 


Bogensberger, S. / Messner, S. / Zihr, G. / Zihr, M.: Kostenrechnung - eine praxis- und 

beispielorientierte Einführung, 3., überarbeitete Auflage, grelldenk Verlag, Wien letzte 

Auflage 

Handouts, die in den Lehrveranstaltungen ausgegeben werden 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Konzeption der Lehrveranstaltung ist durch einen Wechsel zwischen Input durch den 

Lehrveranstaltungsleiter und dem Üben der Studierenden an konkreten Rechenbeispielen 

geprüft. Den Studierenden wird dringend empfohlen, die für die jeweils folgende Einheit 

relevanten Kapitel der angegebenen Literatur vorab zu lesen, damit in der jeweiligen 

Einheit auf die sich ergebenden Fragestellungen vertiefend eingegangen werden kann. 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 287

Relationale Datenbanken 


Sommersemester 1 RD 1 


Die Studierenden sind nach dem erfolgreichen Besuch der Veranstaltung in der Lage, 

relationale Datenbanken inhaltlich einzurichten und mit den darin enthaltenen Daten zu 

arbeiten. 


keine 


In der Lehrveranstaltung wird besprochen und geübt, relationale Datenbanken zu 

entwerfen, einzurichten und die in Datenbanken gespeicherten Daten unter Verwendung 

von SQL zu manipulieren und auszuwerten. 


� Literatur 

Hansen, Hans Robert / Neumann, Gustaf.: Wirtschaftsinformatik I, letzte Auflage, 

Lucius & Lucius VerlagsgesellschaftmbH, Stuttgart 

Hansen, Hans Robert / Neumann, Gustaf.: Wirtschaftsinformatik II, letzte Auflage, 

Lucius & Lucius VerlagsgesellschaftmbH, Stuttgart 

� Weblinks zum Thema 

http://www.sql.org/online_resources.html#beginner 

http://www.w3schools.com/sql/default.asp 

http://www.sqlcourse.com/intro.html 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Wissensvermittlung erfolgt durch Vorträge und durch Übungen, die gemeinsam oder 

selbstständig zu erledigen sind. Im PC-Labor werden sowohl die theoretischen 

Grundlagen vermittelt, als auch deren Umsetzung in gemeinsamen und selbständig 

durchzuführenden Beispielen. 


Abschlussprüfung und Projektarbeit 

Softwareanwendungen II 


Sommersemester 2 SA 2 


Die Studierenden können 

• betriebswirtschaftliche Problemlösungen mittels Office umsetzen 

• die Softwareanwendungen Excel und Access mit "Microsoft Certified Application 

Specialist - Wissen" nutzen 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 288


keine 


Kennenlernen und Vertiefung der Office Standardapplikationen (Excel und Access). 

Erreichen des Microsoft Office Specialist Niveaus und Heranführung zur Microsoft 

Zertifizierung. Verständnis der relationalen Datenbank MS Access, sowie der 

Tabellenklakulation MS Excel. 


Siehe LV Softwareanwendungen I 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Lehrveranstaltung wird zum größten Teil als Vorlesung abgehalten werden. Die 

Kommunikation mit dem Lektor wird während der Lehrveranstaltung vor allem direkt, 

oder aber über ein Forum und Online Konferenzen stattfinden. Unterstützung wird die 

Lehrveranstaltung durch Diskussionsforum, Online Inhalte (Videos, Streams, Youtube, 

ItunesU,....) sowie Teile des Microsoft Online Lerprogrammes. 



Gesellschaftsrecht 


Sommersemester 2 GSR 2 


Ziel der Lehrveranstaltung ist, dass die Studierenden nach Absolvierung der 

Lehrveranstaltung 

(i) die für die Wahl der passenden Gesellschaftsform für unternehmerische Tätigkeiten 

wesentlichen Kriterien kennen, 

(ii) die wesentliche Strukturen unterschiedlicher Gesellschaftsformen erkennen und 

(iii) die Risiken im Zusammenhang mit der Haftung von Gesellschaftsorganen erkennen 

und vermeiden. 


keine 


Dem Überblick über das Gesellschaftsrecht folgt eine eingehende Darstellung der 

wichtigsten Personen- und Kapitalgesellschaften. Sodann wird anhand praktischer 

Lösungsmöglichkeiten Unternehmenskäufe, Umgründungen und Verschmelzungen 

veranschaulicht. 


Skriptum des Lehrveranstaltungsleiters. Zur Vertiefung die folgende Literatur herziehen: 

Fischer / Feuchtinger, Wirtschaftsrecht für die Praxis (2010); Nowotny, 

Gesellschaftsrecht (2009), Verlag Österreich; Rieder/Huemer, Gesellschaftsrecht (2008), 

Facultas Verlag. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 289

Lehrmethoden 

Die einzelnen Themen werden im Skriptum sowie in den Vorträgen dargelegt und anhand 

von praktischen Beispielen veranschaulicht. 



Persönlichkeitstraining II (Kommunikation und Moderation) 


Sommersemester 2 PT 2 


Nach dem Besuch der Lehrveranstaltung sind den Studierenden Aspekte des eigenen 

verbalen und nonverbalen Kommunikationsverhaltens stärker bewusst verfügen die 

Studierenden über verbesserte Fähigkeiten zur Metakommunikation - vor allem in 

schwierigen Kommunikationssituationen kennen die Studierenden neue Strategien und 

Methoden aus verschiedenen Bereichen der Kommunikation verfügen die Studierenden 

über eine Anleitung zur Umsetzung neuer Erkenntnisse und sind dazu auch motiviert 

haben die Studierenden verschiedene Formen der Moderation kennen und anwenden 

gelernt. 


keine 


Die vier Seiten einer Nachricht (Schulz von Thun) 

Transaktionsanalyse (Berne) 

NLP (Bandler, Grinder) 

Nonverbale Kommunikation 

Moderation 


Schulz von Thun: Miteinander reden 

Rolf Rüttinger: Transaktionsanalyse 

Josef W. Seifert: Visualisieren, Präsentieren, Moderieren 

Weisbach: Professionelle Gesprächsführung 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Inhalte der Lehrveranstaltung werden durch Vortrag, Einzel- und Gruppenübungen, 

Video-Analyse, Teilnehmerpräsentationen und Diskussionsrunden vermittelt und durch 

Selbststudium vertieft. 


Präsentation/Moderation, Lernbericht 

General Englisch II 


Sommersemester 2 WENG 2 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 290



� to see, hear or do any particular task in the IELTS exam 

� to describe general problems 

� to make suggestions 

� to do proof-reading. 


� identify the writer‘s views and claims 

� locate information in a text 

� give examples to support their answers 

� develop ideas by expanding the meaning of adjectives. 


Business English I 


The course is designed to help students prepare for the IELTS Academic exam as well as 

to obtain a sound level of proficiency (B 2) in the use of English for general purposes. 

The course contains a wide range of activities providing practice in reading, writing, 

listening and speaking. Word-building and language focus analyzing the main grammar 

areas are also included. 

Topic related areas are global problems and opportunities, ways of looking at the future 

aqnd the world of training and work.. 


Course book: „Ready for IELTS― coursebook : ISBN: 978-3-19-122927-6. 

Recommended literature: English Grammar in Use - a self-study reference and practice 

book, 3rd ed., CUP 






revised and checked on in class.. 

Assessment 

2 written tests (mid-term and final) 

Proseminar aus Betriebswirtschaftslehre 


Sommersemester 1 PBWL 2 


Die Studierenden können: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 291

� ein betriebswirtschaftliches Thema wissenschaftlich und formal korrekt, als 

Vorbereitung auf die Bachelorarbeit, aufarbeiten, 

� eine aktuelle Problemstellung mit Verwertungsperspektive umzusetzen und 

� eine studiengangsbezogene Problemstellung tiefgehen präsentieren und 

diskutieren. 


Grundlagen der Allgemeinen BWL 


Die Lehrveranstaltung beginnt mit einer Kick Off Veranstaltung und der Vorstellung der 

zu bearbeitenden Problemstellungen. Es werden betriebswirtschaftliche Themen 

vergeben, die in Kleingruppen wissenschaftlich bearbeitet werden sollen. Die Ergebnisse 

werden in einer abschließenden Präsentation dem LV Leiter vorgestellt und kritisch 

reflektiert und diskutiert. 


Lechner K., Egger A., Schauer R. (2005); Einführung in die allgemeine BWL; 22. Aufl., 

Wien: Linde oder aktuellere Auflage 

FH Krems (Hrsg.) (2010). Leitfaden für Wissenschaftliche Arbeiten. 

Berger, D. (2010). Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten in den Wirtschafts- und 

Sozialwissenschaften. Wiesbaden: Gabler 

Rössl, D. (Hrsg.) (2008). Die Diplomarbeit in der Betriebswirtschaftslehre. 4. Aufl. Wien: 

Facultas 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Studierenden sollen möglichst selbständig ein praktisches Thema wissenschaftlich 

aufbereiten, als optimale Vorbereitung auf die Bakk- und Masterarbeit. Individuelle 

Coachingtermine werden zur Verfügung gestellt. Gruppenpräsentationen und das 

Verfassen einer wissenschaftlichen Arbeit stehen im Vordergrund. 


Konzeptqualität, Seminararbeit, Präsentation 

Prozessmanagement 


Sommersemester 1 PZM 2 


� Theoretische und praxisbezogene Einführung in die Grundlagen des 

Prozessmanagements 

� Konzepte und Modelle eines umfassenden Prozessmanagements kennen lernen 

� Erfahrung in der Anwendung wesentlicher Methoden und Instrumente des 

Prozessmanagements gewinnen 


keine 


Einführung in die Grundlagen des Prozessmanagements mit folgenden Schwerpunkten: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 292

Entwicklung und Begriffsabgrenzungen im Rahmen des Prozessmanagements 

Identifikation von zentralen Unternehmensprozessen (Prozesslandkarte) 

Methoden für die Erhebung von Unternehmensprozessen 

Methoden zur Analyse von Verbesserungspotentialen aus Kunden- und 

Unternehmenssicht 

Methoden zur Prozessmodellierung und Prozessoptimierung 

Definition von Prozesszielen und Kennzahlen zur Prozesssteuerung 

Typische Formen von Prozessorganisationen 

Einführungsstrategien von optimierten Prozessen 

Methoden zur kontinuierlichen Prozessverbesserung 


Karl W. Wagner (Hrsg.): PQM, Prozessorientiertes Qualitätsmanagement. Leitfaden zur 

Umsetzung der ISO 9001:2000, letzte Auflage 

Skriptum, Unterlagen und E-Learning-Elemente, die für die Lehrveranstaltung zur 

Verfügung gestellt werden 

Lehrmethoden 

Vermittlung bzw. interaktive Erarbeitung der theoretischen Grundlagen sowie praktische 

Übungen. Zusätzlich ist es erforderlich, dass die Studierenden durch Selbststudium 

Themengebiete eigenständig und selbstverantwortlich aufarbeiten und vertiefen. 


Prüfung und schriftliche Arbeit 

Arbeitsrecht 


Sommersemester 1 AR 1 


Vermittlung von Grundkenntnissen des Arbeitsrechts, wobei das Erkennen von Problemen 

in der betrieblichen Praxis sowie das Erarbeiten von Lösungsansätzen im Mittelpunkt 

steht. Nach Beendigung der Lehrveranstaltung kann der Student praktische und gezielte 

arbeitsrechtliche Lösungsansätze bei personellen Problemen anwenden. 


keine 


Die Gliederung folgt einem sich aus der Materie ergebenden System, bei dem zuerst die 

Kernbegriffe und Gestaltungsmittel des Arbeitsrechts dargestellt werden und im Anschluß 

angepasst an den Verlauf eines Arbeitsverhältnisses (Begründung, Pflichten aus dem 

Arbeitsvertrag, Beendigung, etc.) auf die einzelnen Sachprobleme eingegangen wird. 

Bewusst werden Schwerpunkte in den praxisrelevanten Bereichen des Kollektiv- und 

Individualarbeitsrechts gesetzt und auf die aktuelle Rechtsprechung eingegangen. 


Brodil/Risak/Wolf, "Arbeitsrecht in Grundzügen", 4. Auflage, Verlag: LexisNexis ARD 

Orac. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 293

Kodex Arbeitsrecht/Verlag LINDE 

Internet: www.ris.bka.gv.at (=Rechtsinformationssystem des Bundes) 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag und gemeinsames Erarbeiten von aktuellen Fällen 


Abschlussklausur 

Moderne IT-Kommunikation 


Wintersemester 1 ITK 1 


Erarbeiten von Einsatzmöglichkeiten von Groupware, Arbeiten und Erstellen von 

Livestreams sowie Videokonferenzen, Einsatz von VoIP (Skype, MS Communicator), 

nutzen von Foren/Chats sowie erkennen der Möglichkeiten von verschiedenen Arten des 

Document sharing. 

Projektmanagement 


Sommersemester 1 PJM 1 


Das Ziel der Lehrveranstaltung besteht in der theoretisch fundierten und zugleich 

praxisorientierten Einführung in die Grundlagen des Projektmanagements. Der 

Schwerpunkt liegt auf dem Vorgehensmodell des Projektmanagements sowie den 

wesentlichen Methoden für den Projektstart, die Projektplanung und das 

Projektcontrolling. 

Die Inhalte werden theoretisch bearbeitet und zusätzlich von den Studierenden im 

Rahmen realitätsnaher Projekte praktisch angewendet. Dadurch sollen die Studierenden 

ein gemeinsames Verständnis für das Management von Projekten entwickeln und 

gleichzeitig die erforderlichen Kompetenzen aufbauen, um ein Projekt effektiv und 

effizient starten, planen und steuern zu können. 

Die vermittelten Grundlagen des Projektmanagements basieren auf den Standards der 

österreichischen Zertifizierungsstelle Projekt Management Austria (PMA). Somit haben 

die Studierenden weiters die Möglichkeit, im Anschluss an die Lehrveranstaltung eine 

Zertifizierung zum Junior Projekt Manager zu absolvieren. 

Die Studierenden können 

� die theoretisch fundierten und zugleich praxisorientierten Grundlagen des 

Projektmanagements beschreiben, 

� das Vorgehensmodell des Projektmanagements - im Besonderen die 

wesentlichen Methoden für den Projektstart, die Projektplanung und das 

Projektcontrolling - anwenden, 

� auf ein gemeinsames Verständnis für das Management von Projekten 

aufbauen, 

� ein Projekt effektiv und effizient starten, planen und steuern und 

� zu einer Zertifizierung zum Junior Projekt Manager (Level D) antreten. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 294


keine 


Einführung in die Grundlagen des Projektmanagements mit folgenden Schwerpunkten: 

� Projektmanagement-Phasenkonzept 

� Zieldefinition und Projektabgrenzung 

� Projekt - Umweltanalyse 

� Organisationsformen in Projekten 

� Methoden der Projektplanung (Aufgaben, Termine, Ressourcen, Kosten) 

� Projektmarketing – Kommunikation und Information in Projekten 

� Projektcontrolling (Aufgaben, Termine, Ressourcen, Kosten) 

� Projektabschluss 


Patzak, Gerold / Rattay, Günter: Projekt Management, Linde, letzte Ausgabe 

Skriptum, Unterlagen und E-Learning-Elemente, die für die Lehrveranstaltung zur 

Verfügung gestellt werden 

Lehrmethoden 

Vermittlung bzw. interaktive Erarbeitung der theoretischen Grundlagen sowie praktische 

Übungen. Zusätzlich ist es erforderlich, dass die Studierenden durch Selbststudium 

Themengebiete eigenständig und selbstverantwortlich aufarbeiten und vertiefen. 


Prüfung und Projektarbeit 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 295


Retail Management 


Winter semester 2 RM 3 


The course provides a comprehensive and fundamental introduction to retail marketing 

which enables the students: 

to define and describe the subject and characteristics of retail marketing; 

to comprehend the role of retail marketing in the company and its environment; 

to understand and argue the current and future development in the trading sector; 

to explain the characteristics and the use of marketing tools of a trading operation. 

Priour knowledge required 

Basics of marketing 


The course sets out with a general overview of definition of retail marketing and presents 

current and future developments in the trading sector. 

Furthermore the characteristics of strategic marketing decisions of a trading operation 

will be dwelt upon. Its focus will rest on strategic and operational trading decisions by 

constantly taking real-life situation into consideration. 

Readings and media 

Berman B., Evans J. (2007): Retail Management, 10th edition; New Jersey: Pearson 

Education 


The students are advised to work out the relevant chapters of the reading before the 

respective session. The lecturer will provide a summary of the chapter and add on some 

additional reading and various surveys. Discussions and group work as well as the 

elaboration of case studies and their presentation will complement the course. 

Assessment 

Final test and case study 

Organisation & Organisationsentwicklung 


Wintersemester 2 OE 3 


a) Wissen über Tätigkeitsfelder, Problemfelder, Forschungsergebnisse und state of the 

art im Bereich Organisation und Organisationsentwicklung 

b) praxisbezogene Fähigkeit zur Erkennung und Aufarbeitung von instituionellen und 

personellen Organisations(-entwicklungs)erfordernissen in Wirtschaftseinheiten 

(Unternehmen, Abteilungen, Teams, etc.) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 296

c) Kompetenz zur Einleitung von praxisbezogenen organisatorischen 

Umsetzungmaßnahmen sowie deren Begleitung und Überprüfung in einem 

Unternehmen aus "interner" Führungskräfte- bzw. Mitarbeitersicht. 

d) Grundlegendes Wissen über Anforderungen und Fähigkeiten für die Begleitung eines 

Organisationsentwicklungsprozesses aus externer "Beratersicht". 

e) Kenntnis der Grenzen und Problemfelder von Veränderungsmöglichkeiten durch 

organisatorische und organisationsentwicklungsbezogene Gestaltungsmaßnahmen. 


Grundlagen der allgemeinen BWL 


Grundlagen und Voraussetzungen der Organisationstheorie sowie der 

Organisationsentwicklung. Ziele und Zielsysteme von Organisationen. 

Modelle und Prinzipien der Aufbau- und Ablauforganisation. 

Organisationskonzepte, OE-Ansätze, Voraussetzungen von Veränderungsprozessen und 

deren Umsetzung. 


Olfert, Klaus/Rahn, Horst-Joachim: Kompakt-Training Organisation; 4. Auflage, Leipzig 

2005; ISBN: 3 470 49864 4 

Lehrmethoden 

Lehrveranstaltung und Wissensvermittlung in Form von Theorieinput, 

Ausarbeitungen und Präsentationen von theoretischen Konzepten und Case Studies in 

Kleingruppen, Diskussionen und Bezugnahme auf praktische Beispiele. 


Gruppenarbeiten + -präsentationen und schriftliche Abschlussklausur 

Finanzierung 


Wintersemester 2 FIN 2 


In dieser Lehrveranstaltung soll eine Einführung in die betriebliche Investition und 

Finanzierung gegeben. 

Am Ende der Lehrveranstaltung kennen die Studierenden unterschiedliche Methoden der 

Investitionsbeurteilung und sind in der Lage diese auch an Praxisfällen anzuwenden. Sie 

sind vertraut mit unterschiedlichen Finanzierungsformen und deren Besonderheiten, 

wobei hier die Fremdfinanzierung einen Schwerpunkt bildet. Weiter kennen sie den 

Stellenwert finanzwirtschaftlicher Entscheidungen. 


keine 


Themenbereiche und Teilziele dieser Lehrveranstaltung sind daher: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 297

� Grundlagen und Ziele des Finanzmanagement einschließlich finanzwirtschaftlicher 

Analyse, 

� Problemstellungen bei Investitionen und ausgewählte Methoden der 

Investitionsrechnung, 

� Möglichkeiten der Unternehmensfinanzierung und Beurteilung dieser Möglichkeiten 

im allgemeinen (Kapitalformen und –quellen) und 

� Fremdfinanzierung und Sonderformen der Fremdfinanzierung im Besonderen. 


Kuhnle-Schadn A., Kuhnle R.: Bankgeschäfte nachgerechnet!, Wien 2007, Linde-Verlag 

Kuhnle-Schadn A.: Skriptum zur Investitionsrechnung, Studienjahr 2008/09 

Kuhnle-Schadn A.: Lösungsskriptum zur Investitionsrechnung, Studienjahr 2008/09 

Kuhnle-Schadn A./Kuhnle R.: Fallbeispiel zur Finanzierung, Studienjahr 2008/09 

Kuhnle-Schadn A./Kuhnle R.: Lösungsskriptum zur Finanzierung, Studienjahr 2008/09 

Kuhnle-Schadn A./Kuhnle R.: Ppt-Skriptum zur Lehrveranstaltung, Studienjahr 2008/09 

Reader zu Finanzierungs-Themenstellungen für das Studienjahr 2008/09 

Lehrmethoden 


vermittelt. Zusätzlich ist es erforderlich, dass der Studierende durch Selbststudium 

eigenständig Themengebiete aufarbeitet und vertieft. 



IT-Tools im Projektmanagement 


Wintersemester 1 ITPJM 1 


Die Studenten werden sich in vielen Berufsfeldern wiederfinden, in denen im hohen Maße 

Projektmanagement-Skills benötigt werden. 

Aus diesem Grund soll ein Schwerpunkt auf den Bereich Computerbased Project- 

Managegement gelegt werden. Nach Besuch dieser Lehrveranstaltung sind die Studenten 

in der Lage, das Projektmanagementsoftware-Tool MS Project in der Praxis einzusetzen, 

Projekte damit zu erstellen, zu verwalten und Kosten zu berechnen. 


Grundlagen des Projektmanagements 


Es wird aufbauend auf den theoretischen Unterricht zu Projektmanagement der Umgang 

mit MS Project durchgenommen. 

� Kennenlernen durch Anwendung der Projektmanagementsoftware MS Project 

� Erstellen von Projekten 

- Vorgangsmanagement 

- Ressourcenmanagement 

- Überwachungsmanagement 

- Berichte 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 298


COLUMNAE-Schulungsunterlagen: 

- MS Project 2003 

Der Download dieser Schulungsunterlage ist vom eDesktop möglich: 

- Nach Anmeldung an das IMC-Netzwerk: 

"PublicArea"TRAINWARE"COLUMNAE_(deutsch)"office2003 

Lehrmethoden 

Lehrveranstaltung und Wissensvermittlung in Form von Theorieinput, 

Ausarbeitungen und Präsentationen von theoretischen Konzepten und Case Studies in 

Kleingruppen 

Diskussionen und Bezugnahme auf praktische Beispiele. 


Schriftliche Abschlussklausur 

IT-gestütztes Prozessmanagement 


Wintersemester 2 ITPZM 2 


Die Studierenden sind nach diesem Kurs in der Lage, an Prozessmanagement Projekten 

in Unternehmen teilzunehmen. Sie sind weiters in Lage, selbst Prozesse IT-gestützt 

abzubilden, diese zu analysieren, zu simulieren und die entsprechenden Ergebnisse 

auszuwerten. Durch das Erkennen von Problemen in Prozessen, können sie 

Optimierungspotential von Prozessen aufzeigen und die Optimierung IT-gestützt 

durchführen. 


Grundlagen des Prozessmanagements 


In der ersten Präsenzveranstaltung wird eine Einführung in die theoretischen Grundlagen 

gegeben. Sowohl in der ersten wie in allen weiteren Präsenzterminen wird der Einsatz 

von Geschäftsprozessmanagement-Werkzeugen praktisch anhand des Tools ADONIS® 

erlernt. In diesen praktischen Einheiten werden zunächst gemeinsam Beispiele modelliert, 

analysiert und simuliert. Die Studierenden haben dann die Möglichkeit, Beispiele 

selbstständig zu erarbeiten und diese zu präsentieren. 


Alle Theorieunterlagen werden zum Download zur Verfügung gestellt. 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Theorieinhalte werden einerseits durch Vortragsfolien, andererseits durch die 

ausführlichen E-Learning Unterlagen vermittelt. 

Die praktischen Inhalte werden anhand des praktischen Erarbeitens von Beispielen 

vermittelt. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 299


(1) Erarbeitung und Präsentation GPM-Statement, (2) Gruppenarbeit GPM Beispiel 

(Dokumentation), (3) Präsentation der Gruppenarbeit GPM Beispiel 

Anwendung von ERP-Systemen 


Wintersemester 3 ERP 3 


Am Ende des 1. Teils der LV kennen die Student/inn/en die 

Einsatzmöglichkeiten von ERP-Systemen. Sie besitzen Kenntnisse in der 

Standardsoftware SAP ERP 6.0 und sind in der Lage in den Modulen FI, MM, SD und 

CO Geschäftsfälle zu bearbeiten. 

Die Studenten sind nach Absolvieren des 2. Teils der Lehrveranstaltung dazu in der Lage, 

das Programm Microsoft Dynamics NAV zu verstehen und zu bedienen. Der Student ist 

aber vor allem auch in der Lage zu verstehen wie ein Ablauf (Bestellung, Verkauf,..) in 

einem modernen ERP System funktioniert, sowie abschätzen können ob ein solches 

System im Unternehmen Sinn macht oder nicht. 


Relationale Datenbanken, Softwareanwendungen, Grundlagen der BWL 


Im 1. Teil des Kurses wird eine Einführung in SAP, Navigation im SAP-System (Modul 

MM, Modul SD, Modul FI, Modul CO), Integration der einzelnen Module im SAP System 

gegeben. Es werden viele Übungen am SAP-Schulungssystem ACME durchgearbeitet. 

Im 2. Teil des Kurses wird aufbauend auf den theoretischen Unterricht auf die Umsetzung 

der Finanzbuchhaltung und von Ein- und Verkauf sowie Lagerhaltung im 

Computerprogramm Microsoft Dynamics NAV eingegangen. Die Studenten erlernen als 

erstes die Handhabung von Mandanten, das Einrichten von Mandanten sowie vor allem 

den Umgang mit den Teilbereichen Finanzbuchhaltung, Kreditoren und Debitoren sowie 

Lager und eine kleine Übersicht über andere mögliche Module 


Es werden PDF-Dokumente als Download zur Verfügung gestellt. 

Skriptum zu Navision auf SharePoint 

Online Unterlagen auf SharePoint 

Online-Hilfesysteme der verwendeten MS-Produkte 

Hauptmann, Christian, ERP Allgemein – NAV 5.0 Deutschland Edition, ISBN 

9783950249255 

Hauptmann, Christian, ERP Allgemein - Einführung in Microsoft Dynamics NAV 5.0, ISBN 

9783950249217 

o.Author, MOC 8886, Einführung in Microsoft Dynamics NAV 5.0 

sowie online: 

http://www.microsoft.com (Microsoft Corporation) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 300

http://www.msdn.com (Microsoft Developer Network) 

http://www.w3.org (World Wide Web Consortium) 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Lehrveranstaltung wird als ILV abgehalten. 

In dieser Lehrveranstaltung soll als höchstes Ziel der praktische Aspekt aller behandelten 

Themen hervorgehoben werden. Gemäß dieser Vorgabe wird jede Unterrichtseinheit in 

einem PC-Labor abgehalten, um unverzüglich jedes theoretisch erworbene Wissen in die 

Praxis umsetzen zu können. Selbstverständlich bedient sich der Unterricht aller 

Möglichkeiten der vorhandenen EDV-Infrastruktur und nutzt die vielfältigen Möglichkeiten 

des Internets nicht nur zur Lehre sondern auch zur Kommunikation zwischen den 


Ausarbeitung und Präsentation eines SAP-Spezialthemas, Praktische Prüfung am SAP- 

System, im 2. Teil: Projekt und Multiple Choice Test 

Persönlichkeitstraining III 




Nach Abschluss dieser LV sind die Studierenden in der Lage, Argumente zu reihen und 

eine Überzeugungspräsentation vorzubereiten 

eine Überzeugungspräsentation durchzuführen und das eigene bzw. das Verhalten 

anderer zu interpretieren und wirkungsvoll rückzumelden. 

das eigene Kommunikationsverhalten (v.a. Stärken und Schwächen) in Verhandlungs- 

und Konfliktsituationen bewusst(er) wahrzunehmen 

einzelne Verhandlungssequenzen (v.a. Störungen) auf der Metaebene zu analysieren; 

Verhandlungen nach den Grundsätzen des Harvard-Konzeptes (lösungsorientierte bzw. 

partnerschaftliche Verhandlungsführung) vorzubereiten und durchzuführen; 

auf rhetorische An- und Übergriffe ("Verhandlungstricks") richtig reagieren sowie in 

schwierigen Gesprächssituationen besser agieren; 

grundlegende Manipulationsstrategien anzuwenden. 


keine 


Aufbau einer Überzeugungspräsentation 

Reihung von Argumenten 

Rhetorische Instrumente zu effektiven Gestaltung von Einstieg, Mittelteil und Schluss 

Gefangenen-Dilemma 

Konfliktlösung 

Harvard-Konzept 

Die 4 Prozess-Ebenen der Verhandlung 

Verhandlungs-Tricks 

Umgang mit schwierigen Gesprächspartnern 

Manipulation 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 301


Braun: Rhetorik 

Toelstede: Das Verhandlungskonzept 

Fisher, Ertel: Arbeitsbuch Verhandeln 

Lehrmethoden 


Teilnehmerpräsentationen, Lernpartnerschaften und Diskussionsrunden vermittelt und 

durch Selbststudium vertieft. 


schriftliche Arbeit ("Lernbericht"), div. Arbeitsaufträge/Präsentationen 

General English III 


Winter semester 2 WENG 2 


The students are able to sit for the IELTS exam 


• skim texts to get an overall idea of the content and analyze headings quickly 

• express their own opinion about a topic of general interest 


Next to the preparation for the academic module of the IELTS exam the students will be 

made familiar with English for business purposes in relation to other courses of the 3rd 

semester. 

Both receptive (reading and listening) and productive (speaking and writing) skills will be 

practiced with focusing on accurate and proper language usage. 





revised and checked on in class 


Course book: 

„Ready for IELTS― coursebook : ISBN: 978-3-19-122927-6. 

Recommended literature: 

TOP Grammar 

Lerngrammatik zum Nachschlagen und Üben bis Niveau B2 inkl. CD-ROM 

Autor(en): Rachel Finnie, Carol Frain, David A. Hill, Karen Thomas, Peter Dines 

ISBN: 978-3-85272-250-4 


Assessment 

Written Test (100 min., 60%) 

Oral exam (10 min., 30%) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 302

Seminar aus E-Business Management 


Wintersemester 1 PSE 2 


Nach erfolgreicher Absolvierung der Lehrveranstaltung sind die Studierenden in der Lage, 

selbständig einen abgegrenzten Themenbereich mit den zur Verfügung stehenden 

wissenschaftlichen Methoden zu bearbeiten, eine Seminararbeit zu einem abgegrenzten 

Themenbereich zu verfassen. 

Die Lehrveranstaltung dient zur Hinführung auf die Bachelor-Arbeit. 


Kenntnisse des wissenschaftlichen Arbeitens. 


Bearbeiten eines ausgewählten Themenbereichs (Web 2.0) aus den Fachgebieten des E- 

Business Managements. Aufgebaut wird dabei auf den vorsemestrigen 

Lehrveranstaltungen aus dem Bereich Erstellung von wissenschaftlichen Arbeiten. 


� FH Krems (Hrsg.) (2010). Leitfaden für Wissenschaftliche Arbeiten. 

� Berger, D. (2010). Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten in den Wirtschafts- und 

Sozialwissenschaften. Wiesbaden: Gabler 

� Rössl, D. (Hrsg.) (2008). Die Diplomarbeit in der Betriebswirtschaftslehre. 4. 

Aufl. Wien: Facultas 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Lehrveranstaltung wir nach dem Konzept des Blended Learnings gehalten. Ein 

Zusammenspiel von Präsenzeinheiten und E-Learning-Einheiten ist vorgesehen. Elemente 

des selbstgesteuerten Lernens sind in die Lehrveranstaltung integriert. Die Bearbeitung 

der Themen erfolgt in Kleingruppen. 


Qualität Konzept, Qualität Seminararbeit, Qualität Präsentation 

Export Marketing 


Winter semester 2 EMKT 3 


At the completion of the course, students are able to 

� an understanding of the issues to consider when developing a marketing 

program outside their geographical home market 

� a better grasp of techniques and marketing tools that are available in the 

international arena 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 303

� a confidence in their personal ability to solve problems in the area of 

International Marketing. 


basics in marketing 


In this course, we will discuss the scope and challenge of international marketing and 

draw the distinction between international, global and multinational marketing. We will 

deal with the reasons for growing globalization of markets as well as the dynamic 

development of international trade and the cultural environment of global markets. In a 

next step, we will adapt the basic 4 Marketing Mix elements to the international 

marketplace. We will learn how to assess global market opportunities and how to enter 

new foreign markets and how to develop global marketing strategies. We will discuss 

international market segmentation and targeting, environmental and competitive analysis 

and common pitfalls in global marketing. 

By the end of this course students will appreciate how the international marketing 

environment differs from domestic environments and understand the complexity of the 

international marketplace as well as the adaptations a company needs to make to the 

Marketing Mix elements. They will be able to analyze and develop an international 

marketing plan and be familiar with current issues in international marketing. 


Kotabe, Masaaki / Helsen, Kristiaan: Global Marketing Management, 3 rd edition, John 

Wiley & Sons, New York et. al., 2004 


The primary teaching method will be lectures, group discussion and group problemsolving. 

An Assignment will stimulate your thinking and understanding. 

Assessment 

Exam, Assignments 

Logistik 


Wintersemester 2 LOG 2 


Das in der Lehrveranstaltung vermittelte Wissen versetzt die Hörer in die Lage, für 

logistische Problemstellungen in der Praxis selbstständig Lösungsansätze entwickeln zu 

können. 

Nach Absolvierung der Lehrveranstaltung sind die Studierenden in der Lage, 

Problemstellungen im dispositiven Bereich der Logistik selbstständig bearbeiten zu 

können. 


keine 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 304


Die Studierenden lernen das Konzept und die Funktion der Logistik und darauf aufbauend 

das Management der Logistikfunktionen kennen. 

Schwerpunktmäßig werden Aufgabenstellungen aus den Themenbereichen 

Mengenplanung, Ablaufplanung und Auftragssteuerung in der Lehrveranstaltung 

bearbeitet. 


Koether, R. (2008). Taschenbuch der Logistik. 3. Auflage. München Wien: Carl Hanser 

Verlag 

Handouts, die in der LV ausgegeben werden. 

Lehrmethoden 

Zu Beginn der Lehrveranstaltung wird ein logistisches Planspiel mit dem Ziel 

die Teilnehmer für logistische Fragestellungen zu sensibilisieren durchgeführt. Die 

eigentliche Wissensvermittlung erfolgt durch Vorträge. Vertieft wird das Wissen durch die 

gemeinsame Bearbeitung von Fall- und Berechnungsbeispielen. Dabei auftretende Fragen 

werden in offener Diskussion mit dem Lehrveranstaltungsleiter diskutiert. 



European Law 


Winter semester 1 ER 1 


After completing this course, the students shall be familiar with the basic principles 

of European Union Business Law, and understand the basic legal principles 

governing European and international e-commerce activities. 


Basics in law 


The course will focus on: 

European Internal Market law: free movement of goods, freedom to provide services, 

freedom of establishment, free movement of workers, free movement of capital. 

European e-commerce law: rule of origin, e-marketing law, e-contracts, consumer 

protection and distance selling, information requirements for business websites. 


Fina, European Union E-Commerce Law: Consolidated Legislation (2008), ISBN 978-3- 

214-00274-9. 


Presentations, e-learning and discussions 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 305

Assessment 

Case studies and presentations, written exam 

Mikroökonomie 


Wintersemester 1 ER 2 


Die Lehrveranstaltung vermittelt den Studierenden grundlegende Kenntnisse der 

Volkswirtschaftslehre. Das ökonomische Denken wird anhand der Grundbegriffe der 

Ökonomie erklärt und der Umgang mit formal-theoretischen Konzepten gezeigt. Die 

Anwendung von volkswirtschaftlichen Modellen wird mit praktischen Beispielen geübt. 

Nach Absolvierung der Lehrveranstaltung sind die Studierenden in der Lage 

� die Grundbegriffe der Allgemeinen Volkswirtschaftslehre zu verstehen, 

� Mikro- und Makroökonomie voneinander abzugrenzen, 

� die grundlegende Funktionsweise von Märkten und des Preismechanismus zu 

verstehen und theoretisch anzuwenden und die einzelwirtschaftlichen 

Entscheidungen in Haushalten und Unternehmen nachzuvollziehen, 

� sowie unterschiedliche Marktformen voneinander abzugrenzen und im Hinblick auf 

ihre Wirtschaftlichkeit beurteilen zu können. 


keine 


Die Lehrveranstaltung ist inhaltlich wie folgt strukturiert: Zu Beginn werden die 

Grundbegriffe der Ökonomie erklärt. Danach folgt die Beschäftigung mit fachspezifischen 

Begriffen, wie der Unterscheidung von Mikroökonomik und Makroökonomik. Anhand der 

Haushalts- und Unternehmenstheorie wird die Basis einzelwirtschaftlicher 

Entscheidungen analysiert und daraus die Funktionsweise von Märkten abgeleitet. 

Danach werden unterschiedliche Marktformen analysiert und im Hinblick auf ihre 

Wirtschaftlichkeit untersucht. 


� Vortragsfolien + Übungsfragen stehen jeweils zwei Wochen vor dem betreffenden 

Termin als Download zur Verfügung. 

� Bofinger, Peter (2006): Grundzüge der Volkswirtschaftslehre, 2. Auflage, 

München: Pearson Studium. 

Lehrmethoden 

� Vortrag durch die Lehrveranstaltungsleiterin auf der Basis der Pflichtliteratur. 

� Zu jedem Themenblock werden vertiefende Übungs- und Fallbeispiele (unter 

Mitwirkung der Studierenden) in der Lehrveranstaltung gemeinsam 

durchgearbeitet. 


Schriftliche Abschlussklausur, Kurzreferat 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 306

Makroökonomie 


Wintersemester 1 ER 2 


Die Lehrveranstaltung vermittelt den Studierenden grundlegende Kenntnisse der 

Makroökonomie und setzt die - im ersten Semester mit Mikroökonomie begonnene - 

Volkswirtschaftsausbildung fort. Es wird den Studierenden makroökonomisches 

Grundwissen vermittelt um wirtschaftliche Zusammenhänge in einem größeren Rahmen 

verstehen und analysieren zu können. 

Nach Absolvierung der Lehrveranstaltung können die Studierenden 

� grundlegende Begriffe der Makroökonomie (wie z. B. Konjunktur, 

Wirtschaftswachstum, Arbeitslosigkeit und Inflation) verstehen und erklären, 

� die Problematik der Messbarkeit wirtschaftlicher Aktivitäten verstehen und 

gelernte Messmethoden (Volkswirtschaftliche Gesamtrechnung) anwenden und 

interpretieren, 

� ausgewählte Erklärungsmodelle gesamtwirtschaftlicher Wirtschaftstätigkeit 

verstehen und anwenden, 

� die besondere Bedeutung des Geldes für die Gesamtwirtschaft beurteilen und die 

Funktionsweise eines Zentralbanksystems erklären, 

� sowie mehrere Lehrmeinungen in der Makroökonomie interpretieren. 


keine 


Die Lehrveranstaltung ist inhaltlich wie folgt strukturiert: Zu Beginn werden die 

Grundbegriffe der Makroökonomie erklärt und die Abgrenzung zur Mikroökonomie 

wiederholt. Danach zeigt die volkswirtschaftliche Gesamtrechnung, wie wirtschaftlicher 

Aktivitäten gemessen werden können (unter Berücksichtigung von Erfassungs- und 

Berechnungsproblemen). Anhand des keynesianischen Einkommen/Ausgaben-Modells 

wird der Multiplikatoreffekt wirtschaftspolitischer Maßnahmen (Fiskalpolitik) auf die 

Gesamtwirtschaft theoretisch und praktisch gezeigt. Die anschließende Beschäftigung mit 

der Geldtheorie und Geldpolitik am Beispiel des Europäischen Systems der Zentralbanken 

zeigt die Bedeutung des Geldes für die Gesamtwirtschaft. Die Lehrveranstaltung schließt 

mit einem Überblick verschiedener Lehrmeinungen zu makroökonomischen 

Problemstellungen. 


� Vortragsfolien + Übungsfragen stehen jeweils zwei Wochen vor dem 

betreffenden Termin als Download zur Verfügung. 

� Bofinger, Peter: Grundzüge der Volkswirtschaftslehre - Eine Einführung in die 

Wissenschaft von Märkten, Pearson-Studium, 2. Auflage, München 2007 

Lehrmethoden 

� Vortrag durch die Lehrveranstaltungsleiterin auf der Basis der Pflichtliteratur. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 307

� Zu jedem Themenblock werden vertiefende Übungs- und Fallbeispiele (unter 

Mitwirkung der Studierenden) in der Lehrveranstaltung gemeinsam 

durchgearbeitet. 


Schriftliche Abschlussklausur, Kurzreferat 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 308


Berufspraktikum 


Sommersemester 1 BP 30 


Anwendung der in den Lehrveranstaltungen erworbenen Kenntnisse im Unternehmensfeld 


keine 


Einblick in die Unternehmensstrukturen und –prozesse, erste Orientierung in Bezug auf 

Jobpräferenzen und besondere individuelle Fähigkeiten, Umsetzung des erworbenen 

Wissens in realen Arbeitssituationen und dessen Prüfung auf Relevanz, Aktualität und 

situationsgerechte Anwendbarkeit. 


keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Im Rahmen des mind. 22-wöchigen Praktikums wird eine Seminararbeit (nach 

wissenschaftl. Richtlinien) verfasst, welche die Zielsetzung hat, den Wissenstransfer 

zwischen Praxis und Theorie sicherzustellen und eine kritische, theoriegestützte Reflexion 

des Tätigkeitsbereiches im Rahmen des Unternehmens zu gewährleisten. 

Die Erarbeitung des Seminararbeitsthemas erfolgt durch die Studierenden unter Coaching 

durch den jeweiligen Seminararbeitsbetreuer. Das Thema der Seminararbeit bezieht sich 

auf den Aufgabenbereich bzw. Projekte des Praktikanten, wobei das Ziel der 

Seminararbeit die Einordnung der Tätigkeiten in einen theoretischen Zusammenhang ist. 


Erstbericht (inkl. Kurzkonzept), Seminararbeit, Leistung im Unternehmen, Präsentation 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 309


Controlling 


Wintersemester 2 CON 2 


Die Studenten 

� kennen den Unterschied zwischen operativem und strategischem Controlling. 

� wissen wie operatives bzw. strategisches Controlling eingesetzt werden. 

� wissen wie ein wertorientierter Controllingprozess abläuft. 

� kennen die wichtigsten Werttreiber sowie Kennzahlen(-systeme) zu deren 

Steuerung. 

� kennen den Zusammenhang zwischen wertorientiertem Controlling und 

wertorientierten Verfahren der Unternehmensbewertung. 

� kennen die Grundsätze des Investment Controlling. 

� kennen die Voraussetzungen und Instrumente des internen und externen 

Reportings. 

� wissen wie mit Unsicherheit in Planungsprozessen umgegangen werden kann. 

� kennen den Aufbau von Business Intelligence Systemen sowie deren 

Verwendung bei der operativen und strategischen Steuerung des 

Unternehmens. 

� wissen, wie Performance gemessen werden kann. 


Kenntnisse der Buchhaltung und der Kostenrechnung 


Die Lehrveranstaltung bietet zu Beginn einen theoretischen Überblick über operatives 

und strategisches Controlling sowie Management Information Systems bzw. 

Berichtswesen. Basierend auf einer Fallstudie evaluieren die Studenten dann ein 

Unternehmen bzw. eine konkrete Fragestellung der sich ein Unternehmen gegenüber 

sieht. Die Studenten beschäftigen sich dabei fachübergreifend mit operativem bzw. 

strategischem Controlling, Unternehmensplanung und –analyse, strategischem 

Management und Investitionsanalyse. 


Eschenbach, R., & Siller, H. (2009). Controlling professionell: Konzeption und 

Werkzeuge. Schäffer-Poeschel, Stuttgart 

Unterlagen des Lektors (werden am eDesktop zur Verfügung gestellt) 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag, Beispiele, E-Learning, Fallstudie 


Schriftliche Abschlussprüfung, Präsentation der Gruppenarbeit 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 310

Finanzierungs- und Sicherungsgeschäfte 


Wintersemester 2 FINS 3 


Im 1. Teil der Lehrveranstaltung erfolgt eine Einführung in das Risikomanagement der 

Finanzierungsinstrumente und Sicherungsgeschäfte insbesondere Risikoarten, - 

erfassung, -messung und Instrumente zur Risikominimierung (Swaps, Optionen, Forward 

Rate Agreements usw.). Die Bedeutung des Risikomanagements im Zusammenhang mit 

Finanzierung und Veranlagung durch Sicherungsgeschäfte wird verdeutlicht. Darüber 

hinaus bilden die Auswirkungen von Basel II, der Kapitalmarkt und die 

Mittelstandsfinanzierungsgesellschaften im Zusammenhang mit der Finanzierung von 

Klein- und Mittelbetrieben einen Schwerpunkt. 

Der (Die) Student/in kennt nach Absolvierung des 2. Teils der Lehrveranstaltung: die 

Grundlagen des Risikomanagements, Instrumente zur Bewertung von Risken, 

Instrumente zur Begrenzung von Risken. Ziel dieser Lehrveranstaltung ist es, Risiken und 

Chancen im Aussenhandel zu erkennen, diese zu quantifizieren und Möglichkeiten zu 

prüfen, in wieweit diese Risiken für den Exporteur akzeptabel sind, oder auf welche 

Risikoträger diese abgewälzt werden können/sollen. Der Studierende soll demzufolge als 

angehender Mitarbeiter in einer Exportabteilung einer Bank oder eines Corporates in der 

Lage sein, die mit dem Export verbundenen Problemfelder zu erkennen und 

Möglichkeiten aufzeigen, die eine Mitigation des Risikos ermöglichen. 


Grundlagen der Finanzierung, Grundlagen der BWL 


Im 1. Teil der Lehrveranstaltung: Grundlagen und Ziele des Risikomanagement im 

Zusammenhang mit Finanzierung (Risiko, -arten, erfassung, -messung), Instrumente 

und Sicherungsgeschäfte zur Minimierung des Bonitätsrisikos, Die Auswirkungen Basel II 

für KMU´s, Finanzierungsinstrumente zur Begrenzung der Zins-, Währungs- und 

sonstigen Risiken, Die Bedeutung von Mittelstandsfinanzierungsgesellschaften für KMU´s, 

Der Kapitalmarktzugang für KMU´s. 

Im 2. Teil der Lehrveranstaltung: Neben einleitenden Bemerkungen und allgemeinen 

Problemstellungen zum Thema Risiko im Außenhandel wird in diesem Kurs auf folgende 

Themenbereiche gesondert eingegangen: Vertragliche Absicherungsmöglichkeiten im 

Export, Mitigation von Risken mir Hilfe von Banken, Wechselkursmanagement, 

Außenhandelskalkulation, Finanzierungsinstrumente im Außenhandel, Risikoabsicherung 

und verfahrensmäßige Finanzierung im Rahmen der staatlichen Exportförderung 


Wird zu Beginn der Lehrveranstaltung elektronisch vom Lektor zur Verfügung gestellt. 

Skriptum 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Inhalte der Lehrveranstaltung werden gemeinsam durch Einsatz diverser Medien und 

praktische Übungen vermittelt und erarbeitet. 

Der Kurs folgt einem integralen Lehransatz. Es werden Theorie und Praxis, sowie kleine 

Fallbeispiele zum Gelernten miteinander verbunden. Der Kurs erfordert daher intensive 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 311

Mit- und Zusammenarbeit. Es soll gemeinsam mit den Studenten das Ziel erarbeitet und 

letztendlich auch einer anwendbaren Form für die Praxis verstanden werden. 


Abschlussprüfung, Gruppenarbeit 

Unternehmenssteuerrecht 


Wintersemester 2 JAB 2 


Ziel dieser Lehrveranstaltung ist es, die wesentlichen Grundlagen des österreichischen 

Abgaben- bzw. Besteuerungssystems zu vermitteln und so den Studierenden in die Lage 

zu versetzen, die in der betrieblichen Praxis häufig auftretenden Fälle steuerrechtlicher 

Relevanz zuordnen und allfällige Probleme erkennen zu können. 

Weiters ist es ein Ziel, dass die Querverbindungen zu anderen Lehrveranstaltungen 

hergestellt werden und dadurch das Verständnis des Studierenden für 

betriebswirtschaftliche Zusammenhänge in Bezug auf die Besteuerung der Unternehmen 

gegeben ist. 


Grundlagen der Bilanzierung und Bilanzanalyse 

Inhalt der Lehrveranstaltung 

- Grundlagen der beiden Ertragsteuerarten 

- Einkommensteuer 

- Körperschaftsteuer 

- Grundzüge der Umsatzsteuer 

Pädagogische und didaktische Konzeption 

Die Inhalte der Lehrveranstaltung werden durch Vorlesung, praktische Übung und 

Fallbeispiele vermittelt. Zusätzlich ist es erforderlich, dass der Studierende durch 

Selbststudium eigenständig Themengebiete vertieft und die vermittelten Inhalte an 

Beispielen anwendet. 

Literatur 

Empfohlene Literatur / Lehrveranstaltungsmaterial 

- Steuerrecht 2010/11 (12. Auflage) W. Doralt , Manz Verlag 

- Einführung in das Steuerrecht / Lang, Schuch, Staringer; aktuelle Auflage; 

- Kodex Steuergesetze; aktuelle Auflage; Linde Verlag 

Jahresabschlussanalyse 


Wintersemester 2 JAB 3 


Verständnis für die wesentlichen Zusammenhänge im Jahresabschluss Fähigkeiten 

Bilanzen beurteilen zu können Verbesserungen der Kommunikation mit Spezialisten 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 312

(Finanzchefs, Steuerberater, Abschlussprüfer) Anregungen für die 

Unternehmensbewertung Erkennen der Schwachstellen Praxisnähe durch die Analyse von 

aktuellen Geschäftsberichten 




Gliederung, Inhalt und Aufgabe des Jahresabschlusses Was steht nicht oder nur indirekt 

im Jahresabschluss (Grenzen der Aussagekraft)? Bewertung der einzelnen 

Bilanzpositionen und inwieweit Gestaltungsmöglichkeiten gegeben sind Unterschied 

Rücklage - Rückstellungen Bewertungsfragen, insbesondere zu Vorräten und 

Forderungen Eventualverbindlichkeiten Gewinn und Verlust Rechnung, Betriebserfolg 

Finanzergebnis, EGT, Jahresabschluss a.o. Ergebnis, 

Umsatzkostenverfahren/Gesamtkostenverfahren Anhang, Anlagespiegel, 

Beteiligungsspiegel Lagebericht Beurteilung von Rentabilität und Liquidität durch 

Kennzahlen, Kapitalflussrechnung, Cash-flow-Analyse, dynamischer Verschuldungsgrad, 

ROE,ROCE,ROS,EBITDA,EBIT, Gearing, Eigenkapitalausstattung in Österreich und 

international, Steuerliche Aspekte, Ertragssteuerbelastungen Gestaltungsmöglichkeiten, 

Bilanzpolitik Ausschüttungspolitik Einführung in die Konsolidierung (Vollkonsolidierung, 

Equitykonsolidierung) Fragen der Unternehmensbewertung Unterschiede in der 

Rechnungslegung, national und international (HGB, IFRS, US-GAAP) 


Unterlage der Lehrveranstaltung: Kopie der Power Point Präsentation, 

Wagenhofer Bilanzierung und Bilanzanalyse Verlag Linde 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorträge Übungen Fallstudie Durcharbeitung von aktuelle Geschäftsberichten Tests 



Unternehmensplanspiel 


Wintersemester 1 IERP 2 


� Komplexe wirtschaftliche Zusammenhänge analysieren können. 

� Verschiedene betriebswirtschaftliche Teilgebiete miteinander vernetzen können. 

� Die Wechselwirkungen zwischen dem eigenen Verhalten und den Aktivitäten der 

anderen Markteilnehmer abschätzen können. 

� Strategische Pläne entwickeln und strategische Entscheidungen treffe können. 

� Die Folgen des eigenen Handelns kritisch reflektieren können. 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 313


� Strategische Planung 

� Produkt- und Preispolitik 

� Kostenträgerrechnung 

� Finanzplanung 

� Bilanzanalyse 

Pädagogisch-didaktische Konzeption 

Die Studierenden bilden Kleingruppen; jede Gruppe leitet ein Unternehmen im Rahmen 

eines computersimulierten Unternehmensspieles. Die zu treffenden Entscheidungen 

erfordern neben einer systematischen strategischen Planung den Einsatz verschiedener 

betriebswirtschaftlicher Instrumentarien, d.h. die Lerninhalte werden nicht theoretisch 

vermittelt, sondern durch aktives Problemlösen erarbeitet. 

Implementierung von ERP-Systemen 


Wintersemester 2 IERP 2 


Praktische Implementierung eines ERP-Systems. Technische Installation und 

grundlegende Konfiguration. Planung und Vorbereitung von Customizing-Vorgängen. 

Durchführung grundlegender Custumizing-Schritte mit besonderem Schwerpunkt auf 

prozessrelevante Anpassungen. Organisation und Umsetzung von Parametrisierungen. 

e-Marketing 


Wintersemester 1 EMKT 2 


- Die Studenten können die Chancen und Möglichkeiten von Online-Marketing ergeben 

einschätzen und planen. 

- Die Studenten kennen die wichtigsten Zielsetzungen, Konzepte und Kennzahlen und die 

einzelnen Prozessschritte einer Online-Marketing Kampagne. 

- Die Studenten können die für eine best. Zielsetzung sinnvollsten Online-Werbeformen 

auswählen und die notwenigen Kennzahlen kontrollieren. 


LV Marketing, LV E-Business und E-Commerce 


- Analyse der verschiedenen Werbeformate und Online-Kommunikationsmöglichkeiten: 

Suchmachinen, Banners, Newsletters etc. 

- Planung, Durchführung und Controlling von Online-Marketing-Kampagnen. 

- In Vorlesungs-Fallbeispielen und einer Kleingruppen-Hausübung werden die Inhalte 

vertieft. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 314

Lehrmethoden 

- Frontalvortrag der Theoriebausteine 

- Analyse von Fallbeispielen im PC-Labor 

- Gruppenübung 

Moderne IT-Kommunikation 


Wintersemester 1 ITK 1 


Erarbeiten von Einsatzmöglichkeiten von Groupware, Arbeiten und erstellen von 

Livestreams sowie Videokonferenzen, Einsatz von VoIP (Skype, MS Communicator), 

nutzen von Foren/Chats sowie erkennen der Möglichkeiten von verschiedenen Arten des 

Document sharing. 

Persönlichkeitstraining IV 




Die Studierenden sind nach Abschluss der Lehrveranstaltung in der Lage: 

� sich selbst und andere genauer und vollständiger wahrnehmen und verstehen 

zu können 

� eigene Anliegen vertreten und durchsetzen zu können 

� mit Konflikten in Teams besser umgehen zu können 

� Voraussetzungen für erfolgreiche Zusammenarbeit und Kreativität in einem 

Arbeitsteam (zumindest ansatzweise) herstellen und aufrechterhalten zu 

können 

� in einer Arbeitsgruppe ein Klima der Kooperation und Problemlösung schaffen 

zu können 

� ihre eigene Rolle in Teams bzw. Gruppen und die damit verbundenen Stärken 

und Schwächen bzw. Vor- und Nachteile besser zu kennen 


keine 


Gruppe und Gruppenstruktur 

Entwicklungsphasen von Gruppen 

Normen, Rollen, Rollenkonflikte 

Führung, Führungsstile, Dimensionen des Führungsverhaltens 

Entscheidungsprozesse in Gruppen 

Motivation von Gruppen 

Störfaktoren der Teamarbeit 


Antons: Gruppendynamik 

Faller, Kerntke, Wackmann: Konflikte selber lösen 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 315

Lehrmethoden 


Teilnehmerpräsentationen, Lernpartnerschaften, Diskussionsrunden und Video-Analysen 

vermittelt und durch Selbststudium vertieft. 


div. Arbeitsaufträge/Präsentationen, schriftliche Arbeit (Lernbericht) 

Wirtschaftsenglisch IV 


Winter semester 2 WENG 2 


Upon completion of the course the participants will have: 

� Looked at analysing and writing an abstract to accompany their bachelor 

thesis 

� Have extended their ability to utilise English in a range of Business topics 

� Identified and self-reflected on their use of the English language and 

grammar, including areas of strengths and weaknesses 

Previous Knowledge 

Business English III 


The course will cover a range of business and management topics, and an important part 

of the remaining bachelor's degree course, the abstract to accompany the students' 

bachelor theses. 


Allison, Townend, Emmerson 2007 The Business: Intermediate 

Additional handouts will be available to download 


The class will focus on extending students´ ability to communicate effectively on real 

business topics. This will include writing correspondence, speaking, using audio-visual 

materials and working individually, in pairs and in groups. Embedded within the tasks is 

revision of selected grammar and vocabulary topics. 

Assessment 

Mid-term and End of term text, written homeworks 

Bachelor Seminar & Bachelorarbeit aus Betriebswirtschaftslehre & 

E-Business Management 


Wintersemester 1 SEBA 5 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 316


Im Rahmen dieser Lehrveranstaltung wenden die Studierenden ihre Kenntnisse des 

wissenschaftlichen Arbeitens an, indem sie sich in ein e-business- oder 

betriebswirtschaftliches Thema vertiefen und am Ende eine Bachelorarbeit verfassen. 

Damit sind sie in der Lage 

selbständig einen abgegrenzten betriebswirtschaftlichen Themenbereich mit 

wissenschaftlichen Methoden zu bearbeiten, 

die Kernpunkte der Arbeit zu verteidigen bzw. zu diskutieren. 


Kenntnisse des wissenschaftlichen Arbeitens, Allgemeine BWL 


Zu Beginn werden die jeweiligen Themen von den Lehrveranstaltungsleitern an die 

Studierenden vergeben. Im Idealfall suchen sich die Studierenden selbst ein Thema. 

Diese bearbeiten die Themenstellung und verfassen darüber die Bachelorarbeit. 


Wird im Rahmen der LV zur Verfügung gestellt. 

Lehrmethoden 

Selbstgesteuerte Einzelarbeit mit Reflexionsphasen 

Begleitung in der Bearbeitungsphase durch E-Learning Einheiten 

Feedback nach Abgabe der Arbeit 


Bachelorarbeit 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 317


Content Management Systeme, Intranet und eCRM 


Sommersemester 2 CMS 2,5 


Content-Management-Systeme: Planung und Implementierung von CMS, Bewertung und 

Nutzenanalyse für Betriebe, Datenorganisation im Zusammenhang mit CMS-Projekten, 

Content-Syndikation, prozessorientierte Betrachtung von Content-Life-Cycles und Einsatz 

von CMS im Betriebsablauf. Nutzung von Intranet-Applikationen und Groupware zur 

Organisation von internen Abläufen. Rahmenbedingungen und technische 

Implementierung von eCRM. 

Budgetierung & Finanzplanung 


Sommersemester 2 BF 2,5 


Der erste Teil der Lehrveranstaltung verfolgt das Ziel, die theoretischen Grundlagen der 

Budgetierung zu vermitteln. Danach gibt es eine Einführung in die Budgetierungssoftware 

Professional Planner. Die erworbenen Fähigkeiten der wissenschaftlichen Theorie in 

Verbindung mit dem praktischen Bezug zur Software soll die Studierenden in die Lage 

versetzen selbständig ein integriertes Unternehmensbudget zu erstellen. Ziel ist es den 

Studenten die Notwendigkeit und die Operationalität eines integrierten Planungs- und 

Budgetsystem näherzubringen 


Buchhaltung, Steuerlehre, Bilanzierung, Kostenrechnung 


Darstellung von Budgetierungsgrundlagen in Theorie an Hand des Standardwerkes 

"Kurzfristige Unternehmensplanung" von Egger/Winteheller. Der theoretische Ansatz folgt 

einem Planungsprozess wie er in der Wirtschaft auch gelebt wird. Beginnend mit der 

Erfolgsplanung, über Finanz- und Bilanzpanung hin zu Soll-Ist-Vergleichen und 

Abweichungsanalysen. 


Egger/Winterheller: Kurzfristige Unternehmensplanung Foliensatz 

Lehrmethoden 

Das Konzept des ersten Teils der Lehrveranstaltung beruht zum Großteil auf dem Vortrag 

des Lehrveranstaltungsleiters unterstützt durch Diskussionen mit den Studenten. 

Vollendet wird dieser Teil am Ende der Lehrveranstaltung durch Präsentationen von 

Studenten. Der Erfolg des zweiten Teil der Lehrveranstaltung (Fallbeispiel) hängt im 

wesentlichen von der Mitarbeit der Studenten ab. Der Lehrveranstaltungsleiter 

übernimmt die Rolle des Moderators und Coaches. Dadurch sollen die Studenten ein 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 318

selbständiges Arbeiten mit dem System lernen, was eine wesentliche Voraussetzung für 

die abschließende Klausur darstellt. 


Präsentation, Projektarbeit, Fallbeispiel 

Wissensmanagement 


Sommersemester 2 WMAN 3 


Die Studierenden sind nach dem erfolgreichen Absolvieren der LVA in der Lage, 

Wissensmanagement zu definieren und sind sich über die verschiedenen Arten des 

Erwerbs und Erhalts von Wissen in Firmen im Klaren. Weiters können Sie Vorschläge zur 

Realisierung von Wissensmanagement in Unternehmen erarbeiten und verifizieren. 

Darüber hinaus hat jeder Studierende die Möglichkeit gehabt, sein eigenes Wissen 

anderen nach seinen eigenen Vorstellungen zu vermitteln. 


keine 


Entwicklung des Wissensmanagements 

Wissen in den Unternehmen 

Klassifizierung von Wissen 

Wissensmanagement 

Begriffliche Annäherung 

Ganzheitlicher Ansatz 

Wissensspirale 

Bausteine 

Wissensziele 


Vorlesungsfolien, Handouts der Studierenden 

Probst, Gilbert, J.; Raub, Steffen; Romhardt, Kai: Wissen managen - Wie Unternehmen 

ihre wertvollste Ressource optimal nutzen, Gabler, 2. Aufl. 1998 

Wilke, Helmut: Einführung in das systemische Wissensmanagement, (2006) 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Veranstaltung steht im Zeichen der "Lehre um zu lernen" 

Im Detail erfolgt die Wissensvermittlung durch 

Einführungsvortrag durch Lektor 

Selbstständiges Bearbeiten von Themen aus dem Bereich des Wissensmanagements in 

Form von Gruppenarbeit und Präsentation der Ergebnisse in der Lehrveranstaltung 


Gruppenarbeit inkl. Präsentation, Abschlussprüfung 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 319

IT-Security 


Sommersemester 1 ITSEC 1 


Ziel ist es Sicherheits-Richtlinien kennen zu lernen und diese in einer Unternehmung 

umsetzen zu können. Der Studierende ist somit nach Beendigung des Kurses in der Lage 

eine IT Sicherheitsvorgabe für ein Unternehmen zu erstellen und kann die Tragweite 

einer solchen Umsetzung technisch als auch organisatorisch abschätzen. Die 

Studierenden können nach Absolvierung der Lehrveranstaltung einfache technische 

Aufgaben im Zusammenhang mit der IT-Sicherheitstechnik durchführen. 


keine 


Struktur von IT Sicherheitsvorgaben und deren Erstellung 

Installation und Konfiguration von „Security Tools― 

Security Überprüfung 


IT Sicherheitshandbuch des Bundes. 

Secure Operation Guides für MS Produkte. 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Themen werden jeweils präsentiert und erläutert. 

Nach jedem Thema erfolgen Übungen, um das Thema auch real umsetzen zu können. 

Dies wird mit praktischen Übungen am Computer erreicht. Am Ende der Veranstaltung 

wird es eine Abschlussarbeit geben, die eine konkrete Aufgabenstellung im 

Sicherheitsbereich umfasst. 


Abschlussprojekt, Mitarbeitsprojekt 

Netzwerktechnik und Netzwerkplanung 


Sommersemester 1 NETP 2 


Fächerübergreifendes Erarbeiten der Einflüsse auf die Netzwerkplanung eines 

Unternehmens. Wissen um verschiedene Servertypen, sowie Kommunikationsmethoden 

im Unternehmen zwischen Mitarbeitern sowie Rechnern. Analyse eines gewählten 

Unternehmens für die Netzwerkanalyse und Präsentation des aktuellen Standes sowie 

Empfehlungen. 


In dieser Studienveranstaltung wird vor allem der aktuelle Stand der Netzwerktechnik 

erörtert und die für die Studenten später wichtigen Themen bezüglich der Basis-IT 

Komponenten eingegangen. Informationen zum Thema Cloud sowie Clientbereitstellung 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 320

und diverse Serverlandschaften sollen hier einen Überblick über den „State-of-the-Art― 

der Technik geben. 

Pädagogisch-didaktische Konzeption 


Lehrveranstaltungsleiter sowie auf der Diskussion mit Studierenden. In dieser 

Lehrveranstaltung soll als höchstes Ziel der praktische Aspekt aller behandelten Themen 

hervorgehoben werden. In diesem Unterricht wird praxisnah auf den Nutzen und 

Einsatzzweck von Basis-Netzwerkkomponenten wie File & Printserver, Messagingserver, 

Management- und Securitylösungen eingegangen und neben bekannten Problemen auch 

Lösungsansätze dafür zu vermittelt, sowie ein zusammenhängendes Verständnis für die 

Planung und Konzeption eines Netzwerkprojektes zu erreichen. 

Zusätzlich wird die Lehrveranstaltung mittels E-Learning durch diverse online Medien 

(Links und Infos werden in der LVA besprochen) unterstützt. 

Literatur und Medien, Angaben zur Vertiefungsmöglichkeit 

- Netzwerke, Markt&Technik 

- Computernetze, D-Punkt Verlag 

Wirtschaftspolitik 


Sommersemester 1 WP 2 


Die Lehrveranstaltung beschäftigt sich mit den Grundzügen der Wirtschaftspolitik. Sie 

vermittelt die wichtigsten Inhalte der Theorie der Wirtschaftspolitik und erklärt, wie diese 

sich von der Allgemeinen Wirtschaftstheorie unterscheidet. Die Lehrveranstaltung 

beschäftigt sich in weiterer Folge mit der Europäischen Integration, da diese den Rahmen 

für österreichische wirtschaftspolitische Maßnahmen darstellt. Auf dieser Grundlage 

werden das Wirtschaftssystem, die Wirtschaftsverfassung, die Träger und Institutionen 

der Wirtschaftspolitik Österreichs erklärt. Unter Berücksichtigung der derzeitigen 

internationalen Wirtschaftskrise, werden diesbezüglich relevante wirtschaftspolitische 

Themen näher untersucht. Dazu zählen u.a. die Europäische Geldpolitik und die 

österreichische Finanzpolitik. 

Nach Absolvierung der Lehrveranstaltung haben die Studierenden 

� die Theorie der Wirtschaftspolitik gelernt und können diese von der 

allgemeinen Volkswirtschaftslehre abgrenzen. 

� die Grundlagen der Europäischen Integration kennengelernt und wissen, wie 

diese den Rahmen der österreichischen Wirtschaftspolitik bestimmt. 

� die Träger und Institutionen der Wirtschaftspolitik kennengelernt und können 

sie in einen europäischen Zusammenhang einordnen. 

� eine genaue Vorstellung davon, welche Institutionen die wichtigsten 

„Player― bei der Bekämpfung der internationalen Wirtschaftskrise sind, welche 

Möglichkeiten und Instrumente diesen zur Verfügung stehen, bzw. welche 

Grenzen deren Handeln gesetzt sind. 


keine 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 321


Die Lehrveranstaltung ist inhaltlich in folgende Themenschwerpunkte gegliedert: 

� Theorie der Wirtschaftspolitik 

� Europäische Integration 

� Träger und Institutionen der Wirtschaftspolitik 

� Europäische Geldpolitik 

� Österreichische Finanzpolitik 

� Wirtschaftspoltische Maßnahmen infolge der internationalen Wirtschaftskrise in 

Österreich 


Berg/Cassel/Hartwig: N. Theorie der Wirtschaftspolitik, in: Vahlens Kompendium der 

Wirtschaftstheorie und Wirtschaftspolitik, Band 2, 9. Auflage 2007, S. 245-359 

Nienhaus: S. Europäische Integration, in: Vahlens Kompendium der Wirtschaftstheorie 

und Wirtschaftspolitik, Band 2, 9. Auflage 2007, S. 617-698. 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag durch die Lehrveranstaltungsleiterin auf der Basis der Literatur und aktueller 

Materialien. 



Unternehmensgründung 


Sommersemester 2 UG 3 


Nach Absolvierung der Lehrveranstaltung kennen die Studierenden die erforderlichen 

Informationen zu den Rahmenbedingungen zur Unternehmensgründung. Sie sind in der 

Lage, ein eigenes Unternehmen am Markt zu positionieren. 


Grundlagen der BWL, Finanzierung, Buchhaltung, Kostenrechnung, Gesellschaftsrecht 


Der Inhalt des Kurses konzentriert sich darauf, im Rahmen des Kernelementes Business 

Plan sämtliche Rahmenbedingungen, welche für Unternehmensgründer relevant sind, in 

Grundzügen aufzuzeigen. Das grundsätzliche Ziel ist, Gründern aufzuzeigen, welche 

Schritte zur Gründung notwendig sind, welche Marktmechanismen vorherrschen und wie 

der Markt für die jeweiligen Gründer bearbeitet werden kann. Nicht zuletzt ist das Ziel 

aufzuzeigen, bei welchen Institutionen und Personen die benötigten Finanzmittel lukriert 

werden können und v.a. welche Möglichkeiten es zur Finanzierung der Geschäftsidee 

gibt. Weiters werden Grundzüge in Steuerrecht, Rechnungswesen, Gesellschaftsrecht 

sowie Sozialversicherungsrecht im Rahmen einer "Ringvorlesung" vermittelt, in der 

Gastvortragende aus Wirtschaft und Praxis über ihren Fachbereich referieren werden. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 322


McKinsey & Company: Planen, Gründen, Wachsen - Mit dem professionellen Business 

Plan zum Erfolg; 4. aktualisierte Auflage, Verlag Ueberreuter: Wien. 2007. 

Kailer, Norbert; Weiß, Gerold – Gründungsmanagement kompakt, Von der Idee zum 

Business Plan, 2. Auflage, Verlag Linde, Wien 2008 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag, multimediale Elemente, Gastreferenten und Diskussion 



Gründungsfinanzierung 


Sommersemester 1 GFIN 2 


In dieser Lehrveranstaltung wird ein umfassender Einblick in die Gründungsfinanzierung 

gegeben. Am Ende der Lehrveranstaltung kennen die Studierenden unterschiedliche 

Finanzierungsinstrumente, die für die Gründung von Relevanz sind, und können diese 

auch einsetzen. Sie sind in der Lage Unterlagen für die Gründungsfinanzierung 

(insbesondere den Liquiditätsplan) selbst zu erstellen. Sie sind vertraut mit 

Förderungsmöglichkeiten im Bereich der Gründungsfinanzierung und kennen relevante 

Förderstellen. Sie sind außerdem in der Lage den Gründungsprozess mit 

Finanzierungspartnern aktiv zu steuern. 


Grundlagen der Finanzierung 


Themenbereiche und Teilziele dieser Lehrveranstaltung sind daher: 

� Einführung in die Gründungsfinanzierung 

� Modelle der Gründungsfinanzierung 

� Finanzierungsquellen und –instrumente in der Gründungsfinanzierung 

� Finanzierungsprozess 

� Gründungsförderung in Österreich 

� Businessplan (Teile: Liquiditätsplan und Finanzierung) 


Nathusius, K.: Grundlagen der Gründungsfinanzierung, Gabler, Wiesbaden 2001 

Kuhnle R.: Ppt-Slides zur Lehrveranstaltung 

Lehrmethoden 


vermittelt. Zusätzlich gibt es einen Vortrag mit einem Spezialisten für 

Gründungsförderung und eine Diskussionsrunde mit einem erfolgreichen Gründer. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 323


Prüfung, Liquiditätsplan 

Öffentliches Wirtschaftsrecht 


Sommersemester 1 ÖWR 2 


Grundlagen des Gewerberechts, Einteilung der Gewerbe, Antritt und Ausüben eines 

Gewerbes: Anwendungsbereich (Gewerbsmäßigkeit, Erlaubtheit, Ausnahmen), 

Beendigung der gewerblichen Tätigkeit, gewerbliche Betriebsanlage, Übersicht über 

gewerbliche Betriebsanlagen, Genehmigungspflicht, Genehmigungsverfahren, 

Genehmigung der Betriebsanlage, Recht der genehmigten Betriebsanlage, Auflösung der 

Betriebsanlage, Gewerbeaufsicht, Behörden und Verfahren, Vergaberecht, Beihilfenrecht, 

Wirtschaftsaufsichts- und Wirtschaftslenkungsrecht. 

Persönlichkeitstraining IV 


Sommersemester 1 PT 1 


nach dem Besuch der Lehrveranstaltung 

� können die Studierenden besser mit schwierigen Gesprächspartnern 

kommunizieren 

� kennen die Studierenden die Grundlagen und Methoden des 

Konfliktmanagements 

� verfügen die Studierenden über mehr Selbsterkenntnis bezüglich ihres 

Verhaltens in Konfliktsituationen 

� können die Studierenden mit persönlichen Krisen besser umgehen 

� verfügen die Studierenden über eine verbesserte Problemlösekompetenz 


keine 


Umgang mit schwierigen Gesprächspartnern 

Konfliktmanagement 

Konfliktarten, Konfliktverlauf, Konfliktlösung 

Konfliktgespräch, Konfrontationsgespräch 

Konflikttypen-Test 

Drama-Dreieck 

Gewaltfreie Kommunikation nach Rosenberg 

Selbsterforschung 

Krisenmanagement im persönlichen Bereich 

Mentales Training 


L. Haschtmann: Karriere statt Konflikte 

A. von Hertel: Professionelle Konfliktlösung 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 324

M. B. Rosenberg: Gewaltfreie Kommunikation 

K. W. Vopel: Kreative Konfliktlösung 

Faller, Kerntke, Wackmann: Konflikte selber lösen 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Inhalte der Lehrveranstaltung werden durch Vortrag, Einzel- und Gruppenübungen, 

Teilnehmerpräsentationen, Lernpartnerschaften und Diskussionsrunden vermittelt und 

durch Selbststudium vertieft. 


Diverse Arbeitsaufträge, Lernbericht 

Wirtschaftsenglisch V 


Sommer semester 1 WENG 2 


After completing the course, students should be able to deal with the English oral 

element of the bachelor's exam and talk about their bachelor's thesis. Students should 

also be able to describe and comment on graphs and charts in English. 

Of primary concern is the preparation for the 6th semester Bachelor exam. 

Previous knowledge 

Business English IV 


The course will focus on preparation for the oral element of the bachelor's exam and look 

at selected general economic topics, such as business and the environment. 


The Business Intermediate is essential for this course. 

Handouts will be provided. 


The course will follow the same pattern as the previous semester. This includes pair work, 

group work and whole class activities. 

Methods of Evaluation 

End of semester test, course assignments 

Bachelorseminar und Bachelorarbeit aus Betriebswirtschaftslehre 

und E-Business II 


Sommersemester 1 SEBA 8 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 325


Die Lehrveranstaltung verfolgt die Zielsetzung, mit den Studierenden Schwerpunkte aus 

dem betriebswirtschaftlichen sowie dem E-Business Teil des Studiums zu wiederholen 

und zu vertiefen. 


keine 


Ausgewählte Themenbereiche aus den betriebswirtschaftlichen und E-Business 

spezifischen Fachgebieten des Studienganges werden von den Studierenden individuell 

erarbeitet und präsentiert (Präsentation max. 5-7 Minuten). 


Quellen, welche auf der Bachelorprüfungsliteraturliste enthalten sind. 

Lehrmethoden 

Die erste Lehrveranstaltungseinheit dient der Vermittlung der Zielsetzungen und der 

Strukturierung der Lehrveranstaltung. Die Studierenden erhalten eine Themenliste von 

jeweils 3 Fragestellungen aus den Bereichen E-Business Management und 

Unternehmensführung, welche von den Studierenden ausgearbeitet und in den 3 

Präsentationsveranstaltungen präsentiert werden. 


Ausarbeitung, Präsentation 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 326

MANAGEMENT – Master Programme 


KONZEPTE DES NACHHALTIGEN MANAGEMENTS (KNMT) 

Management im globalen Kontext 

Semester Wochenstunden ECTS 

Wintersemester 2 4 


Globalisierung der Märkte und des Handelns, Gründe und Ziele der Internationalisierung 

und der Globalisierung, internationale Vertragsbeziehungen, 

Internationalisierungsstrategien von Unternehmen, interkulturelles Management, 

Kommunikation und Verhandlungen im interkulturellen Kontext, Kommunikation und 

Koordinationstechniken im internationalen Umfeld, kulturelle Einflussfaktoren, 

Kulturanalysen. 

Konzepte des nachhaltigen Managements 




Analyse und Gegenüberstellung der Konzeptionen des nachhaltigen Managements, 

Corporate Social Responsibility, Corporate Strategy, Interpretation von Strategie und 

Corporate Social Responsibility, Corporate Citizenship, Chancen und Risiken für 

nachhaltige Unternehmen, unternehmerische Vision und Nachhaltigkeit, strenge 

Nachhaltigkeit und Realität, Entwicklung und Definition von Nachhaltigkeit, nachhaltiges 

Ressourcen-Management; Nachhaltigkeitsinstrumente, Nachhaltigkeit in der 

Unternehmensphilosophie, im Leitbild und im Mission Statement, 

Nachhaltigkeitsberichterstattung und interne Kommunikation, Nachhaltigkeit in den 

Funktionalbereichen des Unternehmens. 

International Management Issues 



Lehrveranstaltungsinhalte (Englische LV) 

Analyse und Diskussion von Managementthemen, die auf internationaler Ebene aktuell 

sind, Analyse internationaler Märkte, Erarbeitung von Handlungsempfehlungen für 

international tätige Unternehmen. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 327

Fachbereich Forschung (ANFO) 

Qualitative und quantitative Forschungsmethoden 




Methoden und Verfahren zur empirischen Datenanalyse (unter anderem multivariate 

Verfahren); Möglichkeiten der Marktsegmentierung; Interpretation der Ergebnisse und 

Ableitung von Handlungsempfehlungen unternehmerische Entscheidungsträger; 

Durchführung einer empirischen Studie zu einer aktuellen Fragestellungen aus dem 

Bereich Management 

NACHHALTIGE UNTERNEHMENSENTWICKLUNG I (NAEN I) 

Strategieentwicklung und -implementierung 




Konzepte des strategischen Managements, Strategisches Management im 

Unternehmenszusammenhang, Unternehmenskultur, Unternehmenspolitik sowie 

operative Ebene im Zusammenhang mit dem strategischen Management, Analyse der 

strategischen Ausgangsposition, Positionierung der strategischen Geschäftseinheiten, 

Wahl der Strategien Kompetenzaufbau im Unternehmen, Schaffung nachhaltiger 

Wettbewerbsvorteile, Messung des Erfolges der Strategien, Implementierungsprozess, 

Evaluierung von Strategien. 

Stakeholder Management 




Konzepte des Stakeholder Managements, Strategisches und operatives Stakeholder 

Management, Identifikation und Analyse von Stakeholdern, Entwicklung und Umsetzung 

von Strategien des Stakeholder Managements, Steuerung von Stakeholdern, 

Kommunikationsprozesse im Stakeholder Management, Konfliktmanagement, 

Evaluierung der Stakeholderbeziehungen, Management der Beziehung zu Stakeholdern 

des Unternehmens. 

PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT I (PEFO I) 

Kostenmanagement 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 328


Voll- und Teilkostenrechnungssysteme, Leistungsbudget, Planbilanz und Finanzplan, Plan- 

und Istrechnungen, sowie Abweichungsanalysen, Umgang mit Engpass- und 

Optimierungsproblemen, Investitions-, Finanzierungs- und Liquiditätsanalysen, 

Zusammenhang zwischen Plan- und Ist-Abrechnung 

Rechnungslegung nach nationalen und internationalen Standards 




Bilanzierung nach dem österreichischen Unternehmensgesetzbuch unter Berücksichtigung 

ausgewählter steuerlicher Aspekte: Bilanzierungszeitpunkt, Bilanzwert – 

Anschaffungskosten bzw. Herstellungskosten, Bilanzierung von Anlagevermögen (u.a. 

Immaterielle Vermögensgegenstände, Beteiligungen), Bilanzierung von Umlaufvermögen, 

Leasing, Rückstellungen, Eigenkapital; 

Bilanzierung nach den International Financial Reporting Standards: Grundlagen IFRS, 

Ausgewählte Bestandteile des Jahresabschlusses: Immaterielle Wirtschaftsgüter, 

Sachanlagen, Finanzanlagevermögen und Finanzinstrumente, Vorräte, Forderungen, 

Leasing, Rückstellungen, Eigenkapital. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 329


NACHHALTIGE UNTERNEHMENSENTWICKLUNG II (NAEN II) 

Innovationsmanagement 


Sommersemester 2 4 


Arten von Innovationen, Innovationskonzepte, Gestaltung und Organisation des 

Innovationsprozesses, Gestaltung einer innovationsfördernden Unternehmenskultur, 

Anforderungen an Innovationsmanager, Netzwerkmanagement, Marketing für 

Innovationen, Kreativitätstechniken, Führung im Innovationsprozess, Strategisches 

Innovationsmanagement, Instrumente des Innovationsmanagements, Open Innovation, 

organisationale Aspekte des Innovationsmanagements. 

Das projektorientierte Unternehmen 




Merkmale projektorientierter Unternehmen, PEP – das Project Excellence Programm, 

Anpassung der Führungsfunktionen im projektorientierten Unternehmen, Neueinführung 

und Weiterentwicklung von Projektmanagement in Unternehmen, Instrumente des 

projektorientierten Unternehmens, Aufbau persönlicher und organisatorischer 

Projektmanagementkompetenz, Personal- und Qualitätsmanagement in 

projektorientierten Unternehmen, Fallbeispiele – spezielle Projektarten, 

Wettbewerbsvorteile des projektorientierten Unternehmens, Zukunftsvisionen einer 

projektorientierten Unternehmensentwicklung. 

PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT II (PEFO II) 

Wertorientiertes und strategisches Controlling & Reporting 




Konzeption des strategischen Controlling, Wertorientierung im Controllingprozess, 

Aufgabenfelder des strategischen Controlling, strategische Controllinginstrumente, 

kritische Erfolgsfaktoren für die Gestaltung von strategischen Controllingsystemen, 

Implementierung von strategischen Controllingsystemen in Unternehmen, strategische 

Frühaufklärung, IT-Unterstützung im Rahmen des strategischen Controlling, 

Reportingarten und –prozesse. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 330

Finanzmanagement 




Vermögens- und Kapitalstrukturgestaltung, Finanzplanung, Finanzierungsentscheidungen, 

Management der Kapitalbeschaffung, finanzwirtschaftliches Risikomanagement, 

nachhaltiges Finanzmanagement, Finanzmanagement und Unternehmenswert, 

Finanzmärkte und Finanzierungsformen, Einsatz derivativer Instrumente im 

Finanzmanagement, Einflussfaktoren auf die Kapitalkosten, Aufgaben des 

Finanzmanagers im Wandel. 

CONTROLLING (CONT) Spezialisierung 

Controlling (CONT) 

Funktionales Controlling und Beteiligungscontrolling 




Controlling-Konzeptionen, Integrierte Unternehmenssteuerung, Besonderheiten des 

Controlling in den einzelnen Funktionsbereichen (z.B. HR-Controlling, Vertriebscontrolling, 

Supply Chain Controlling, Innovationscontrolling), Divisionscontrolling, Projektcontrolling, 

Organisationsoptionen des Controlling, Nachhaltigkeitscontrolling, Kommunikation im 

Controlling. 

Budgetierung und Liquiditätsmanagement 




Gestaltung und Organisation des Budgetierungsprozesses, integrierte Planungsrechnung, 

IT-gestützte Planungssysteme, Gestaltung der Zahlungsströme, Liquiditätsplanung, 

Beschaffung und Veranlagung liquider Mittel, Kontrolle im Budgetierungsprozess, Better 

Budgeting und Beyond Budgeting, Liquiditätsmanagement in Krisenzeiten. 

Risikomanagement 




Arten von Risiken, Risikomanagement im Führungsprozess, Instrumente des 

Risikomanagements, Risikoidentifikation, Risikoanalyse und -messung, Risikobewertung 

und –steuerung, Risikoreporting, Risikopolitik, Risikocontrolling, organisatorische Aspekte 

des Risikomanagements, Chancenmanagement. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 331

Business Intelligence 




Einsatzmöglichkeiten von Business Intelligence, Business Intelligence Tools, BI-Systeme 

und Open Source Lösungen, Auswahlkriterien für BI-Systeme, Unterstützung von 

Managemententscheidungen durch Business Intelligence, Analysemethoden, Planung und 

Modellierung von Datenbanken und Durchführung von Datenbankabfragen, Integration 

von Datenbanken in Web-Applikationen und CMS, Methoden der Analyse von 

Datenbanken, Integration von Datenbanken in unternehmerische Entscheidungsprozesse, 

Managementinformationssysteme. 

International Financial Issues 



Lehrveranstaltungsinhalte (Englische LV) 

Aktuelle Finanzierungstrends im internationalen Kontext, internationale Finanzmärkte, 

aktuelle Finanzierungsprojekte von nationalen und internationalen Unternehmen und 

Organisationen, Aufgaben der Finanzierung im Rahmen der Internationalisierung von 

Unternehmen, Ziele, Aufgaben und Instrumente der Finanzierung von Projekten, Risiko 

und Risk Management im unternehmerischen Zusammenhang. 

HUMAN RESOURCES Spezialisierung 

– Strategisches Personalmanagement (STPM) 

Strategisches Personalmanagement 




Konzepte des strategischen Personalmanagements, strategische Personalrekrutierung, 

Employer Branding, Personalbeurteilung, strategisches Denken im Personalbereich, 

strategisch-orientierte Führungskräfteentwicklung, Trust Management, psychische und 

physische Gesundheit am Arbeitsplatz, , Kreative Wege zur Kostenentlastung und 

Beschäftigungssicherung, Führungsethik, Rollenbewusstsein im strategisches 

Personalmanagement technologiegestütztes Workflowmanagement im Personalbereich, 

strategische Dimension der Führung von Teams, der Mensch als „Drehscheibe― und 

„Antriebskraft― des Unternehmens, Personal als Wettbewerbsfaktor. 

Entlohnungs- und Anreizsysteme 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 332


Konzeptionen und Modelle von Entlohnungs- und Anreizsystemen, Entlohnungs- und 

Anreizsysteme und Jobdesign, Nachhaltigkeit im Rahmen von Entlohnungs- und 

Anreizsystemen, Ressourcensteuerung, strategische Anreizsysteme im Überblick, 

Gestaltungsprinzipien und -parameter, Lohnformen, Individuelle Incentives, Steuerung 

des Leistungsverhaltens, Entwicklung eines intelligenten Anreizsystems, Wertorientierung 

im strategischen Personalmanagement, Arbeitszeit-flexibilisierung als Anreizsystem. 

Tücken von Anreizsystemen, Analyse von Praxisbeispielen, das Cafeteria Konzept, 

Mitarbeiterbeteiligungen, aktuelle Entwicklungen in der Personaleinsatzplanung. 

Diversity Management 




Instrumente des Diversity Managements, Nutzen des Diversity Managements für das 

Unternehmen, interkulturelles Konfliktmanagement, diskriminierende Situationen 

erkennen und analysieren, Gender-Kompetenz-Training, Age Diversity Management, 

Chancen und Risiken im Diversity Management, das Drei-Ebenen Model, Diversity 

Mainstream im HR-Management, Erfolgsmessungsmethoden, Trend in Richtung Vielfalt, 

kultureller und demographischer Wandel. 

Arbeitsrecht 




Rechtsquellen des Arbeitsrechts, maßgebende Normen, Entgeltzahlung, Arbeitsverträge, 

Rechte und Pflichten im Arbeitsverhältnis, besondere Arbeitsverhältnisse, Haftung des 

Arbeitgebers, Begründung und Beendung des Arbeitsverhältnisses, Arbeitsschutz, 

Kollektivverträge, Änderung von Arbeitsbedingungen, Leistungsstörung und Haftung, 

Erholungsurlaub, nachvertragliche Pflichten. 

International HR Issues 




Analyse aktueller HR-Themen im internationalen und globalen Zusammenhang, 

interkulturelle Unterschiede im Rahmen von HR-Aufgaben, HR-Aufgaben vor dem 

Hintergrund von Diversität, Internationalisierung von Unternehmen und HR-Aufgaben, 

HR-Instrumente im internationalen Vergleich. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 333


APPLIED RESEARCH AND TRAINING (ARTS) 

Applied Research and Training Seminar 




Konzeption der Master Thesis; Coaching bei der Erstellung der Master Thesis; 

Hilfestellung bei der Literaturrecherche; Inhaltliche und formale wissenschaftliche 

Betreuung. 



Wintersemester 18 


Verfassen einer wissenschaftlichen Projektarbeit (z.B. Auftragsarbeit) an einer 

ausländischen Universität, Fachhochschule oder sonstigen Einrichtung/Institution 

akademischen Ranges bzw. in der Forschungsabteilung eines international agierenden 

Unternehmens bzw. in einer speziellen Abteilung eins Unternehmens; die Arbeit muss in 

direktem Zusammenhang mit der zu erstellenden Master Thesis stehen. 

MASTERARBEIT 

Masterarbeit 


Wintersemester 10 


Erste Phase der Genese der Master Thesis. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 334


BUSINESS CASE/PLANSPIEL (BCPS) 

Business Workshop 




Bearbeitung eines real life case entweder in Form eines Planspiels (z.B. Capstone) oder in 

Form eines Unternehmensprojektes. 

FÜHRUNG (FHRG) 

Führung- und Unternehmenskommunikation 




Konzeptionen der Unternehmensführung, Führung in situativen Kontexten, 

Gestaltungskonzepte der Unternehmensführung, Führung in Prozessen der Veränderung, 

Einflussfaktoren und Beteiligte, Konzepte, Instrumente und Methoden des Change 

Managements; Chancen- und risikoorientierte Unternehmensführung; Change 

Communication, Ausrichtung der Unternehmenskommunikation und - führung, 

Informationsmanagement im Unternehmen, Kommunikation im Rahmen der 

Unternehmensführung. 

Führung in Krisensituationen und Krisenmanagement 




Soziopsychologische Phänomene in Krisensituationen, Stress- und Traumabewältigung, 

Problemlösung in Krisensituationen, Kreativität in Krisensituationen, Arten von 

Unternehmenskrisen, Frühwarnsysteme für Unternehmenskrisen, Erkennen von 

Unternehmenskrisen, Krisenkommunikation, Handlungsalternativen im Rahmen von 

Krisensituationen, Maßnahmen der Krisenbewältigung, Unternehmensrestrukturierung. 

CONTROLLING Spezialisierung 

Unternehmensanalyse (UNAN) 

Jahresabschlussanalyse und Bilanzpolitik 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 335


Bilanzpolitik und bilanzpolitische Spielräume im UGB: Ansatzpolitik, Bewertungspolitik, 

Gewinnausweispolitik, Gliederungspolitik etc., Analyse eines UGB-Jahresabschlusses: 

Investitionsanalyse, Finanzierungsanalyse, Liquiditätsanalyse, Erfolgs- und 

Rentabilitätsanalyse, Ausgewählte Besonderheiten eines IFRS-Abschlusses: 

Bilanzpolitische Spielräume, Analyse eines IFRS-Abschlusses. 

Due Diligence 




Konzepte der Unternehmensbewertung, Bewertungsanlässe, objektive / objektivierte / 

subjektive Unternehmensbewertung, Wert versus Preis, Bewertungskonzeptionen, 

Einzelbewertungsverfahren, Gesamtbewertungsverfahren, Mischverfahren, Ertragswertverfahren 

(Konzeption, Äquivalenzprinzip, 2-Phasen-Modell, Diskontierungszinsfuß), 

Discounted Cashflow Verfahren (Konzeption, Bruttoverfahren, Nettoverfahren, APV- 

Verfahren, Bestimmung der Kosten des Eigenkapitals, WACC, alternative Bestimmung 

des Kapitalkostensatzes), Spezialthemen und Sonderfragen der Unternehmensbewertung, 

Auswahl der Bewertungsmethode, Schritte bei der Durchführung einer Due 

Diligence, Dimensionen der Due Diligence, Financial Due Diligence, Commercial Due 

Diligence, Umwelt Due Diligence, Legal Due Diligence, steuerliche Due Diligence, Due 

Diligence Review, Interpretation der Ergebnisse der Due Diligence, Rückschlüsse auf die 

Ertragskraft des Unternehmens, Ertragskraft des Unternehmens und Ermittlung des 

Kaufpreises, Kaufpreisfestsetzung in der Praxis. 

HUMAN RESOURCES Spezialisierung 

– Operatives Personalmanagement (STPM) 

Operatives Personalmanagement 




Konzepte der Unternehmensbewertung, Bewertungsanlässe, objektive / objektivierte / 

subjektive Unternehmensbewertung, Wert versus Preis, Bewertungskonzeptionen, 

Einzelbewertungsverfahren, Gesamtbewertungsverfahren, Mischverfahren, Ertragswertverfahren 

(Konzeption, Äquivalenzprinzip, 2-Phasen-Modell, Diskontierungszinsfuß), 

Discounted Cashflow Verfahren (Konzeption, Bruttoverfahren, Nettoverfahren, APV- 

Verfahren, Bestimmung der Kosten des Eigenkapitals, WACC, alternative Bestimmung 

des Kapitalkostensatzes), Spezialthemen und Sonderfragen der Unternehmensbewertung, 

Auswahl der Bewertungsmethode, Schritte bei der Durchführung einer Due 

Diligence, Dimensionen der Due Diligence, Financial Due Diligence, Commercial Due 

Diligence, Umwelt Due Diligence, Legal Due Diligence, steuerliche Due Diligence, Due 

Diligence Review, Interpretation der Ergebnisse der Due Diligence, Rückschlüsse auf die 

Ertragskraft des Unternehmens, Ertragskraft des Unternehmens und Ermittlung des 

Kaufpreises, Kaufpreisfestsetzung in der Praxis. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 336

Personalmarketing und –controlling 




Konzepte und Modelle des Personalmarketings, Instrumente des Personalmarketings, 

Ziele des Personalmarketings, der Mitarbeiterlebenszyklus, Schnittstelle 

Personalmarketing und Entwicklung, Instrumentenmix des Personalmarketings, externes 

Personalmarketing, ganzheitliches Personalmarketing; die Instrumente des 

Personalcontrollings, Rolle des Personalcontrollers, die Bedeutung von Kennzahlen im 

Personalwesen, Kennzahlenbildung und Analyse im Personalmanagement, Controlling der 

Mitarbeitermotivation, Personalrisikomanagement, Human Vermögensrechnung, 

Personalcontrolling im strategischen Kontext, zentrales und dezentrales 

Personalcontrolling, der Wertschöpfungsansatz, die Gemeinkostenanalyse, Bezugsobjekte 

des Personalcontrollings, organisatorische Eingliederung des Personalcontrollings, 

Balanced Scorecard als Instrument im Rahmen des Personalcontrollings. 

MASTERARBEIT 

Masterarbeit 


Sommersemester 12 


Zweite Phase der Genese der Master Thesis und Abschluss. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 337

HEALTH MANAGEMENT – Bachelor Programme 


Gesundheitswirtschaft 


Wintersemester 2 GW 3 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage Strukturen und Zusammenhänge in der 

Gesundheitswirtschaft zu analysieren und mit den Akteuren der Gesundheitswirtschaft 

professionell zu interagieren. 


Die Lehrveranstaltung verlangt keinerlei Vorkenntnisse. 


Geschichtliche Entwicklung 

Rechtliche Grundlagen 

Demografie und Gesundheitszustand 

Institutionen und Akteure im Gesundheitswesen 

Gesundheitsversorgung - Leistungen, Kosten und Finanzierung 

Ambulante und stationäre Gesundheitsversorgung 

Vergütungssysteme 

Reformen 

Erster, zweiter und dritter Gesundheitsmarkt 

Lokale, regionale, nationale und internationale Aspekte der Gesundheitswirtschaft 

Beschäftigung und Ausbildung in der Gesundheitswirtschaft 

Innovationspotentiale 

Managed Care, integrierte Versorgung 

Systempartnerschaften 


Hofmarcher M., Rack H. (2006). Gesundheitssysteme im Wandel: Österreich. Wien: 

MWV. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, e-learning –Modul 


Semesterprüfung (2 Teilprüfungen) 

Allgemeine Volkswirtschaftslehre I (Mikroökonomie) 


Wintersemester 2 AVWL 3 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 338


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage die volkswirtschaftlichen Rahmenbedingungen ihrer 

Tätigkeit in einer Organisation zu analysieren und die Rahmenbedingungen entsprechend 

in ihre organisationalen Entscheidungen einzubeziehen. 




Knappheit, Wirtschaftliches Prinzip 

Arbeitsteilung 

Funktionsweise von Märkten 

Marktformen 

Arbeitsmarkt 

Theorie des Haushalts und Nutzentheorie 

Theorie der Firma 

Transaktions- und Opportunitätskosten in der Wirtschaft 

Externalitäten 


Bofinger P. (2006). Grundzüge der Volkswirtschaftslehre. München: Pearson Studium. 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung: Vortrag 


Semesterprüfung 

Allgemeine Betriebswirtschaftslehre 


Wintersemester 1 ABWL 2 


Die Studierenden können die grundlegenden Begriffe der ABWL verstehen und 

anwenden, die Grundlagen, den Aufbau und die Komplexität einer Organisation 

erkennen, die Zusammenhänge in Unternehmen analysieren und das Wissen über die 

Funktionsbereiche einer Organisation als Basis für weiterführende Lehrveranstaltungen 

anwenden. 




Grundlagen der Betriebswirtschaftslehre 

Unternehmensführung 

Ziele. Planung und Entscheidung 

Konstitutive Führungsentscheidungen 

Betriebsorganisation 

Personalwirtschaft 

Betriebsmittel und Werkstoffe 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 339

Produktion und Dienstleistungsproduktion 

Betriebliches Rechnungswesen 

Überwachung und Controlling 

Investition und Finanzierung 

Marketing 


Lechner K., Egger A. & Schauer R. (2008). Einführung in die Allgemeine 

Betriebswirtschaftslehre. 23. Auflage. Wien: Linde. 

G. & Döring, U. (2008). Einführung in die allgemeine Betriebswirtschaftslehre. München: 

Vahlen. 

Lehrmethoden 




Organisation und Personal 


Wintersemester 2 OP 3 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage den Aufbau und die Funktionsweise einer Organisation 

sowie die Komplexität einer Organisation und die Abhängigkeiten ihrer Teile zu erkennen. 

Sie können die zweckmäßige Organisationsstruktur wählen und umsetzen und sind 

imstande geeignetes Personal im Unternehmen einzusetzen und weiterzuentwickeln. 


Funktionen und Instrumente des Managements 


Organisation: Grundlagen der Organisation, Elemente, Beziehungen und Dimensionen 

der Organisation, Stellenbildung, Leitungssystem, Informations-, Kommunikations- und 

Sachmittelsystem, Organisatorischer Wandel 

Personal: Personalplanung als Grundlage personalpolitischer Aktivitäten, 

Funktionsbereiche betrieblichen Personalmanagements (Rekrutierung neuer Mitarbeiter, 

Integration neuer Mitarbeiter, qualifikatorische Entwicklung von Mitarbeitern, 

Personalfreisetzung), Gestaltung von Personalführungsinstrumenten 

(Entgeltmöglichkeiten, flexible Arbeitszeitmodelle, Feedback, Karrierechancen), 

Personalcontrolling 


Nicolai, C. (2006). Personalmanagement. Stuttgart: Lucius & Lucius 

Schmidt, G. (2002). Einführung in die Organisation. Wiesbaden: Gabler 

Lehrmethoden 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 340



Rechnungswesen I 


Wintersemester 3 ERW 4 


Einführung in die Aufgaben, die Begriffswelt, die Systematik und Technik des 

betrieblichen Rechnungswesens Vermittlung der theoretischen und rechtlichen 

Grundlagen des betrieblichen Rechnungswesens Entwicklung einer Vertrautheit mit 

üblicherweise im Geschäftsleben vorkommenden Geschäftsvorfällen und deren 

Behandlung im Rahmen des betrieblichen Rechnungswesens Entwicklung der Fähigkeit 

Verbuchungen von Geschäftsfällen selbstständig durchführen zu können Abbau von 

eventuell vorhandenen Berührungsängsten mit Zahlen, Grundfunktionen der Mathematik 

und der Buchhaltung Vermittlung der Bedeutung der profunde Kenntnis des betrieblichen 

Rechnungswesens für alle anderen Unternehmensfunktionen. 




Einführung in das betriebliche Rechnungswesen 

Inhalt und Aufgaben des betrieblichen Rechnungswesens 

Grundlagen der Finanzbuchhaltung: Funktionen und Grundbegriffe der 

Finanzbuchhaltung, Doppelte Buchführung, Grundlagen der Buchungstechnik und 

Behandlung einzelner Geschäftsfälle 

Bilanzierung/Jahresabschluss: Gesetzliche Grundlagen, Grundsätze ordnungsmäßiger 

Bilanzierung, Bewertungsgrundsätze, Aufbau, Gliederung und Ermittlung von Bilanz, 

Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung und Kapitalflussrechnung 


Grohmann-Steiger, C., Schneider, W. & Eberhartinger, E. (2008). Einführung in die 

Buchhaltung im Selbststudium. 2 Bände. Wien: Facultas. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag 


Semesterprüfung, Gruppenarbeiten, Study minutes 

Kommunikationstraining 


Wintersemester 1 KOMT 1 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage auf Basis aktueller wissenschaftlicher Erkenntnisse 

effektiv mit ihren Gesprächspartnern zu kommunizieren. Sie können die Anforderungen, 

die an bestimmte Teamrollen gestellt werden beschreiben und gezielt Aktionen in den 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 341

einzelnen Aufgabenbereichen setzen. Sie sind imstande als wertvolles Mitglied in 

Gruppen und Teams mitzuarbeiten und bei auftretenden Konflikten professionell zu 

agieren und damit wesentlich zur Konfliktlösung bei der Zusammenarbeit mit anderen 

beizutragen. Sie können aktuelle und zielgruppengerechte Methoden und Techniken zur 

Visualisierung, Präsentation und Moderation in der Praxis anwenden. 




Modelle der Kommunikation 

Axiome der Kommunikation 

Feedbackregeln 

Wirkungen von Kooperation und Wettbewerb 


Haug, C. (2003). Erfolgreich im Team. München: dtv. 

Lehrmethoden 

Workshop: Kurzvortrag, Rollenspiel, Kleingruppenarbeit 


Der Workshop wird mit "bestanden" beurteilt. 

Präsentation und Visualisierung 


Wintersemester 1 PV 1 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage auf Basis aktueller wissenschaftlicher Erkenntnisse 

effektiv mit ihren Gesprächspartnern zu kommunizieren. Sie können die Anforderungen, 

die an bestimmte Teamrollen gestellt werden beschreiben und gezielt Aktionen in den 

einzelnen Aufgabenbereichen setzen. Sie sind imstande als wertvolles Mitglied in 

Gruppen und Teams mitzuarbeiten und bei auftretenden Konflikten professionell zu 

agieren und damit wesentlich zur Konfliktlösung bei der Zusammenarbeit mit anderen 

beizutragen. Sie können aktuelle und zielgruppengerechte Methoden und Techniken zur 

Visualisierung, Präsentation und Moderation in der Praxis anwenden. 




Rolle, Aufgabe und Haltung des Moderators 

Der Moderationsprozess: Ziele, Anlässe, Chancen und Risiken 

Visualisierung in der Moderation 

Präsentieren – wozu eigentlich? 

Einzeltechniken der Moderation 


Seifert, W. (2008). Visualisieren, Präsentieren, Moderieren. Offenbach: Gabal. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 342

Lehrmethoden 

Workshop: Kurzvortrag, Rollenspiel, Kleingruppenarbeit 


Der Workshop wird mit "bestanden" beurteilt. 

Medizinische Terminologie 


Wintersemester 2 MT 2 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage mit Vertretern naturwissenschaftlicher Fächer, wie z.B. 

der Medizin, der Pharmazie, Vertretern der Pflege und der medizinisch-technischen 

Berufe in einer, diesen Berufsgruppen eigenen Terminologie zu kommunizieren und 

zusammen zu arbeiten. 




Allgemeine Terminologie 

Allgemeine und spezielle Anatomie 

Physiologie und Pathologie: Zelle, Gewebe, Skelett, Gelenke und Muskulatur, Haut, Blut, 

Herz- Kreislaufsystem, Atmung, Verdauung, Urogenitalsystem, Nervensystem, Augen, 

Drüsen und Hormone, HNO 


Schäffler, A., Menche, N. (1999). Mensch, Körper, Krankheit. München: Urban & Fischer. 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung 



Wirtschaftsrecht 


Wintersemester 2 WIRE 2 


Der Studierende ist in der Lage ein Rechtsproblem zu erkennen, die notwendige 

Fragestellung zu formulieren und/oder Wege zu finden die sich ergebenden Fragen zu 

lösen. 





FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 343

Einführung in die Rechtsgrundsätze im österreichischen und europäischen Recht 

Beachtung des besonderen Augenmerks auf wirtschaftliche und gesundheitsrechtliche 

Fragen 


Doralt, P., Nowotny, C., Schauer M. (2001). Grundzüge des Privatrechts, Bürgerliches 

Recht 1 und 2. Wien: WU. 

Doralt, P., Nowotny, C., Schauer, M. (2001). Grundzüge des Privatrechts, Handelsrecht. 

Wien: WU. 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung 



Wirtschaftsenglisch I 


Wintersemester 2 WENG 2 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage die Hauptinhalte komplexer Texte zu konkreten und 

abstrakten Themen zu verstehen. Sie können sich spontan und fließend auf Englisch 

unterhalten und einen Standpunkt zu aktuellen (gesundheits)wirtschaftlichen Themen 

erläutern und vertreten. 


Maturaniveau 


Inhaltsbezogene Wortschatzarbeit 

Grammatikalische Strukturarbeit 

Weiterentwicklung von reading/listening skills and understanding 

Weiterentwicklung von speaking and writing skills 

Writing of Minutes 


Allison, J., Emmerson, P. (2007). The Business Intermediate. Student´s Book. Ismaning: 

Hueber. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, e-learning Modul 


Semesterprüfungen, Präsentation, e-learning Modul 

Mathematik und Statistik I 


Wintersemester 2 MTH 3 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 344


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage grundlegende Methoden der beschreibenden und 

induktiven Statistik zu praktizieren und statistische Methoden zur Lösung einfacher 

Probleme der beschreibenden und induktiven Statistik anzuwenden. 




Wirtschaftliches Rechnen (Schlussrechnung, Prozentrechnung) 

Grundlagen der Wirtschaftsmathematik mit Schwerpunkt auf Modellbildung (Kosten-, 

Erlös- und Erfolgsfunktionen, Deckungsbeitrag, Break-Even-Point, lang- und kurzfristige 

Preisuntergrenzen) 

Grundlagen der Finanzmathematik (einfacher Zins, Zinseszins, ganzjährige und 

unterjährige Verzinsung, Rentenrechnung, Schuldentilgung) 


Griffiths, D. (2008). Statistik von Kopf bis Fuß. Köln: O‘Reilly. 

Schira, J.(2003). Statistische Methoden der VWL und BWL – Theorie und Praxis. 

München: Pearson Studium 

Tietze, J. (2008). Einführung in die angewandte Wirtschaftsmathematik: Das praxisnahe 

Lehrbuch-bewährt durch seine brillante Darstellung (14. Auflage). Wiesbaden: 

Vieweg+Teubner. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, praktische Übungen 


Semesterprüfungen 

Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten I 


Wintersemester 1 WA 2 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage Grundlagen und Richtlinien des wissenschaftlichen 

Arbeitens zur Verfassung von Seminar- und Bachelorarbeiten zu verstehen und 

anzuwenden. 




Grundlagen des wissenschaftlichen Arbeitens (Arten von Wissenschaft, 

Grundlagenforschung und Angewandte Forschung, Gütekriterien der Wissenschaft, 

Alltagswissen und Wissenschaftswissen, Arten von wissenschaftlichen Aussagen, Arten 

von wissenschaftlichen Arbeiten, Bewertungskriterien einer wissenschaftlichen Arbeit) 

Entstehungsprozess einer wissenschaftlichen Arbeit 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 345

Literaturrecherche, Literaturbewertung und Literaturauswertung 

Schreiben und Zitieren in einer wissenschaftlichen Arbeit 

Die aktuelle Version des Leitfadens "Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten in den Management 

Studiengängen" des IMC (dt., engl.) unter: Manuals im eDesktop; 

Empfohlene 

Balzert, H., Schäfer, C., Schröder, M., Kern, U. (2008). Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten - 

Wissenschaft, Quellen, Artefakte, Organisation, Präsentation. W3l. 

Bänsch, A. (2007). Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten (9. Auflage). München: Oldenbourg. 

Hienerth, C., Huber, B., Süssenbacher, D. (2009). Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten kompakt. 

Wien: Linde. 

Stickel-Wolf, C., Wolf, J. (2009). Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten und Lerntechniken: 

Erfolgreich studieren - gewusst wie! (5. Auflage). Wiesbaden: Gabler. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, e-learning –Modul 


Hausarbeit 

Softwareanwendungen I 


Wintersemester 2 SA 2 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage die vorhandene IT-Infrastruktur zur effizienten 

Bewältigung der täglichen Aufgaben ihres Arbeitsumfeldes zu nutzen, PowerPoint und 

Word zur Erstellung von Präsentationsunterlagen und wissenschaftlichen Arbeiten 

einzubeziehen und Excel zur Lösung wirtschaftswissenschaftlicher Problemstellungen 

(Wirtschaftsstatistik ) zu verwenden. 




Einführung in Excel 

Wissenschaftlich mit PowerPoint arbeiten 

Wissenschaftlich mit Word arbeiten 

Arbeiten mit einem ausgewählten Content-Management System 

Empfohlene 

Chatfield, C., Johnson, T. (2007). Microsoft Office Project 2007 Step by Step. Frankfurt: 

Microsoft Press Deutschland. 

Duller, C. (2007). Einführung in die Statistik mit EXCEL und SPSS (2. Auflage). 

Heidelberg: Physica-Verlag. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 346

Nicol, N., Albrecht, R. (2004). Wissenschaftliche Arbeiten schreiben mit Word: 

Formvollendete und normgerechte Examens-, Diplom- und Doktorarbeiten. München: 

Addison-Wesley. 

Radke, H.-D. (2005). Statistik mit Excel: Für Praktiker: Statistiken aufbereiten und 

präsentieren. München: Markt und Technik. 

Schels, I. (2007). Excel 2007. München: Markt und Technik. 

Stahlknecht, P., Hasenkamp U. (2004). Einführung in die Wirtschaftsinformatik. Berlin: 

Springer. 

Walter, S. (2007). Präsentieren mit Microsoft PowerPoint 2007. München: Markt und 

Technik. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, parktische Übungen, e-learning Modul 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 347


Allgemeine Volkswirtschaftslehre II (Makroökonomie) 


Sommersemester 2 AVWL 3 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage die volkswirtschaftlichen Rahmenbedingungen ihrer 

Tätigkeit in einer Organisation zu analysieren und die Rahmenbedingungen entsprechend 

in ihre organisationalen Entscheidungen einzubeziehen. 


Mathematik und Statistik I 


Grundfragen der Volkswirtschaftslehre 

Knappheit, Wirtschaftliches Prinzip 

Mikro-/Makroökonomie 

Gesamtwirtschaftliche Ziele 

Leistungsfähigkeit der Volkswirtschaftslehre 

Gesamtwirtschaftliches Angebot und gesamtwirtschaftliche Nachfrage 

Arbeitslosigkeit, Produktivität, Inflation, Zinssatz und Wechselkurs 

Außenhandel und seine Auswirkungen, Wettbewerbsfähigkeit einer Nation 

Grundlegende Ansätze der Wirtschaftspolitik 

Finanzierung des Gesundheitswesen aus volkswirtschaftlicher Sicht (z.B. Rationierung) 


Bofinger, Peter (2006) Grundzüge der Volkswirtschaftslehre, 2. Aufl., München: Pearson 

Studium 

Samuelson, P. & Nordhaus, W. (2007). Volkswirtschaftslehre München: mi-Fachverlag. 

Lehrmethoden 




Management 


Sommersemester 2 MGT 2,5 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage die Aufgaben des Managements und aktuelle 

Konzeptionen und Methoden im Management zu differenzieren. 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 348


Grundbegriffe des Managements 

Managementprozess 

Stakeholder 

Management und Ethik 

Operative Planung und Kontrolle 

Das Individuum in der Organisation 

Gruppe und Gruppenverhalten 

Führung 

Gestaltung organisatorischer Strukturen 

Unternehmenskultur 

Change Management 

Diversity Management 


Schreyögg, G., Koch, J. (2007). Grundlagen des Managements . Wiesbaden: Gabler 

Verlag 

Lehrmethoden 




Rechnungswesen II 


Sommersemester 2 RW 3 


Vermittlung der theoretischen Grundlagen der GuV, des Cash-Flow Statements, des 

Instruments der Balanced Scorecard, der Kostenrechnung, der Jahresabschlussanalyse 

und der Unternehmensbewertung als Instrumente der Unternehmensführung, sowie 

deren praktischen Anwendung. 

Vermittlung der Fähigkeit der Anwendung theoretischer Modelle des Rechnungswesens 

auf reale Unternehmenssituationen anhand von Fallstudien. 




Kostenrechnung: Grundlagen, Kostenartenrechnung (z.B. Kostenerfassung, 

Betriebsüberleitung), Kostenstellenrechnung (z.B. Betriebsabrechnungsbogen), 

Kostenträgerrechnung (z.B. Divisionskalkulation, Zuschlagskalkulation), 

Vollkostenrechnung, Teilkostenrechnung 

Kennzahlenanalyse: Grundlagen, Liquidität/Kapitalstruktur, Erfolg und Effizienz, 

Rentabilität 

Balanced Scorecard: Unternehmensbewertung 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 349


Bogensberger, S., Messner, S., Zihr, G. & Zihr, M. (2006). Kostenrechnung: Eine praxis- 

und beispielorientierte Einführung. Wien: grelldenk. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, Übungen 


Semesterprüfung, Gruppenarbeiten 

Marketing 


Sommersemester 2 MKT 3 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage eine Organisation marktorientiert zu betrachten und zu 

lenken. Sie können geeignete Maßnahmen von PR und Marketing identifizieren und mit 

den entsprechenden Instrumenten umsetzen. 




Grundbegriffe und -konzepte des Marketings 

Marktorientiertes Entscheidungsverhalten 

Marktforschung 

Produktpolitik 

Preispolitik 

Distributionspolitik 

Kommunikationspolitik 

Marketingcontrolling 

Marketingorganisation 


Bruhn, M. (2009). Marketing. Wiesbaden: Gabler. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, kleine Fallbeispiele, aktive Diskussion aller 

Teilnehmer 


Schriftliche Prüfung und Gruppenarbeit 

Mentoring 


Sommersemester 1 MEN 1 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 350


Die Studierenden wissen über den Bewerbungsvorgang, das Zusammenstellen von 

Bewerbungsunterlagen und das Führen von Bewerbungsgesprächen Bescheid. 


Kommunikationstraining 


Vorbereitung auf das Berufspraktikum 

Bewerbungsunterlagen, Bewerbungsgespräche 

Coaching bei Suche nach Praktikumsplatz 

Vorbereitung einer Bewerbung 

Umgehen mit Absagen 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Workshop: Vortrag, Diskussion von Fallbeispielen, Gruppenarbeiten 


Der Workshop wird mit "bestanden" beurteilt 

Medizinisch pharmazeutische Grundlagen 


Sommersemester 2 MPG 2 


Die Studierenden verfügen über ein breites Basiswissen der rechtlichen Grundlagen des 

Arzneimittelverkehrs, vor allem aus der aktuellen Fassung des Arzneimittelgesetzes und 

seiner Novellen und kenne die rechtlichen Termini des Arzneimittelgesetzes und der 

anderen Gesetzeswerke. 




Allgemeine und spezielle Pharmakologie in ausgewählten Indikationen 

Arzneimittelkunde 

Einführung in die Mikrobiologie und Chemotherapeutika 


Die zitierten Gesetzeswerke in der gültigen Fassung, sowie ein Nachschlagewerk der 

Chemie sollten als Basis für die Vertiefung des Vorgetragenen herangezogen werden. 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 351

Arbeits- und Sozialrecht 


Sommersemester 2 AR-SR 2,5 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage grundlegende Regelungen des Arbeits- und 

Sozialrechts, seine Besonderheiten im Gesundheitswesen und ausgewählte berufs-, 

patienten- und organisationsrechtliche Regelungen anzuwenden. 


Wirtschaftsrecht 


Arbeitsrecht – Sonderrecht unselbständig Erwerbstätiger 

Funktion des Arbeitsrechts 

Arbeitnehmerschutz und deren Bezug zur Gesundheit (z.B.: Arbeitszeit und Arbeitsdauer) 

Versichertenkreis im Sozialrecht; Abgrenzung Arbeiter - Angestellte; Sonderrechte für 

bestimmte Arbeitnehmergruppen 

Anbahnung und Begründung des Arbeitsverhältnisses 

Rechte und Pflichten im aufrechten Arbeitsverhältnis 

Beendigung des Arbeitsvertrages 

Kollektives Arbeitsrecht 

Besonderheiten des Arbeits- und Sozialrechts im Gesundheitswesen 


Vorlesungsskriptum zum Downloaden 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung 



Wirtschaftsenglisch II 


Sommersemester 2 WENG 2 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage die Hauptinhalte komplexer Texte zu konkreten und 

abstrakten Themen zu verstehen. Sie können sich spontan und fließend auf Englisch 

unterhalten und einen Standpunkt zu aktuellen (gesundheits)wirtschaftlichen Themen 

erläutern und vertreten. 


Wirtschaftsenglisch I 


Spezielles wirtschaftsbezogenes Vokabular und spezielle Situationen des Geschäftslebens 

Einbeziehung von wirtschaftsbezogenen Themen 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 352

Weiterentwicklung von reading/listening skills and understanding 

Weiterentwicklung von speaking and writing skills 


Allison, J., Emmerson, P. (2007). The Business Intermediate. Student´s Book. Ismaning: 

Hueber. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, e-learning Modul 


Semesterprüfungen, Präsentation, e-learning Modul 

Mathematik und Statistik II 


Sommersemester 2 MTH 3 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage grundlegende Methoden der beschreibenden und 

induktiven Statistik zu praktizieren und statistische Methoden zur Lösung einfacher 

Probleme der beschreibenden und induktiven Statistik anzuwenden. 




Grundbegriffe der Statistik, Univariate Datenbeschreibung, Bivariate Datenbeschreibung 

Grundlagen der Wahrscheinlichkeitsrechnung, Theoretische Verteilungen 

Schätzverfahren 

Statistische Tests 


Griffiths, D. (2008). Statistik von Kopf bis Fuß. Köln: O‘Reilly. 

Schira, J.(2003). Statistische Methoden der VWL und BWL – Theorie und Praxis. 

München: Pearson Studium 

Tietze, J. (2008). Einführung in die angewandte Wirtschaftsmathematik: Das praxisnahe 

Lehrbuch-bewährt durch seine brillante Darstellung (14. Auflage). Wiesbaden: 

Vieweg+Teubner. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vorlesung und Präsentation, praktische Übungen 


Zwei Teilprüfungen 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 353

Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten II 


Sommersemester 2 WA 3 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage Grundlagen und Richtlinien des wissenschaftlichen 

Arbeitens zur Verfassung von Seminar- und Bachelorarbeiten zu verstehen und 

anzuwenden. 




Argumentieren in einer wissenschaftlichen Arbeit 

Überblick über wissenschaftliche Forschungsmethoden 

Vorgehensweise und Anwendungsmöglichkeiten von wissenschaftlichen 

Forschungsmethoden 

Erstellung einer wissenschaftlichen Arbeit 


Balzert, H., Schäfer, C., Schröder, M., Kern, U. (2008). Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten - 

Wissenschaft, Quellen, Artefakte, Organisation, Präsentation. W3l. 

Bänsch, A. (2007). Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten (9. Auflage). München: Oldenbourg. 

Hienerth, C., Huber, B., Süssenbacher, D. (2009). Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten kompakt. 

Wien: Linde. 

Stickel-Wolf, C., Wolf, J. (2009). Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten und Lerntechniken: 

Erfolgreich studieren - gewusst wie! (5. Auflage). Wiesbaden: Gabler. 

Lehrmethoden 

Proseminar 


Seminararbeit 



Sommersemester 2 SA 2 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage die vorhandene IT-Infrastruktur zur effizienten 

Bewältigung der täglichen Aufgaben ihres Arbeitsumfeldes zu nutzen, PowerPoint und 

Word zur Erstellung von Präsentationsunterlagen und wissenschaftlichen Arbeiten 

einzubeziehen und Excel und SPPS zur Lösung wirtschaftswissenschaftlicher 

Problemstellungen (Wirtschaftsstatistik ) zu verwenden. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 354




Excel 

Datenlisten & Pivot-Tabellen 

Diagramme 

Formeln und Funktionen 

Datenaufbereitung in SPSS 

Empfohlene 

Chatfield, C., Johnson, T. (2007). Microsoft Office Project 2007 Step by Step. Frankfurt: 

Microsoft Press Deutschland. 

Duller, C. (2007). Einführung in die Statistik mit EXCEL und SPSS (2. Auflage). 

Heidelberg: Physica-Verlag. 

Nicol, N., Albrecht, R. (2004). Wissenschaftliche Arbeiten schreiben mit Word: 

Formvollendete und normgerechte Examens-, Diplom- und Doktorarbeiten. München: 

Addison-Wesley. 

Radke, H.-D. (2005). Statistik mit Excel: Für Praktiker: Statistiken aufbereiten und 

präsentieren. München: Markt und Technik. 

Schels, I. (2007). Excel 2007. München: Markt und Technik. 

Stahlknecht, P., Hasenkamp U. (2004). Einführung in die Wirtschaftsinformatik. Berlin: 

Springer. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, Präsentation, praktische Übungen, e-learning 


Zwei Teilprüfungen 

Spezielle BWL für Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen I 




Die Studierenden sind in der Lage neueste wissenschaftliche und Gesundheitsbranchenspezifische 

Erkenntnisse anzuwenden. 

Die Studierenden verfügen über das theoretische und praktische Rüstzeug, das 

notwendige Wissen und die entsprechenden Schlüsselqualifikationen, um 

Managementfunktionen in Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen effizient und effektiv 

ausüben zu können. 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 355


Grundlagen des Managements von Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen 

Systemplanung im Gesundheits- und Sozialwesen 

Rechtsgrundlagen von Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen 

Grundlagen der Krankenhausbetriebsführung 

Aufgabengebiete der Kollegialen Führung 


Haubrock, M., Schär, W. (2007). Betriebswirtschaft und Management im Krankenhaus. 

Bern: Huber 

Hofmarcher, M., Rack, H. (2006). Gesundheitssysteme im Wandel: Österreich. Wien: 

MWV Medizinisch Wissenschaftliche Verlagsges. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, Diskussionen 


Semesterprüfungen 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 356


Teamtraining 


Wintersemester 1 TEAM 1 


Die Studierenden können nach dem Workshop benennen, welche Vorteile das Arbeiten im 

Team bringt, welche Faktoren ein Team erfolgreich machen und Unterschiede zur Einzel- 

oder Gruppenarbeit auflisten. Sie sind imstande, Teamrollen zu definieren und Hilfsmittel 

zur Auswahl der Teammitglieder beim Aufbau von Projektteams einzusetzen. Sie können 

die Phasen des Teambuilding identifizieren und durch gezielte Maßnahmen dazu 

beitragen, den Teamentwicklungs - Prozess zu fördern. Sie sind in der Lage, die 

Anforderungen, die an einen Teamleiter gestellt werden, zu beschreiben und gezielt 

Aktionen in den einzelnen Aufgabenbereichen zu setzen. Bei eventuell auftretenden 

Konflikten sind sie imstande, professionell zu agieren und entsprechende Lösungsansätze 

zu finden. Die Studierenden können Teammeetings effizient organisieren und abhalten. 


Keine 


� Warum Teamarbeit? – Was ist ein Team und was kann es leisten? 

� Von der Gruppe zum Team: Welche Phasen und damit verbundenen Hürden gibt 

es? 

� Teamrollen – Hilfsmittel zur Auswahl der Teammitglieder 

� Der Teamleiter – Anforderungen und Führungsinstrumente 

� Teammeetings – professionelle Organisation und Durchführung 


keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Workshop 


Der Workshop wird mit „bestanden/nicht bestanden― beurteilt. Ein Lernbericht ist 

innerhalb von 14 Tagen nach der letzten Lehreinheit abzugeben. 

Prozessmanagement 




Die Studierenden können die Instrumente des Prozessmanagements anwenden. 


keine 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 357


� Grundlagen Geschäftsprozesse (z.B. Auslöser, Ziele, Strukturen) 

� Formen der Prozessorganisation 

� Prozessmodellierung 

� Planung, Kontrolle und Steuerung von Geschäftsprozessen 

� Methoden zur Leistungssteigerung von Geschäftsprozessen 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, Fallbeispiele, Übungen, Diskussionen, e-learning 

Modul 


Semesterprüfung(en) 

Projektmanagement 




Die Studierenden können die Instrumente des Projektmanagements anwenden. 


Keine 


� Definition und Werkzeuge des Projektmanagements 

� Projektdefinition, Besonderheiten in der Startphase 

� Projektteams (Rollen und Aufgabenverteilung) 

� Projektplanungs- und –ausführungsphase 

� Projektdokumentation (Protokolle, Handbücher, Pläne, To Do Listen) 

� Projektcontrolling 

� Projektabschluss (z.B. Projektpräsentation) 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, Fallbeispiele, Übungen, Diskussionen, e-learning 

Modul 



Beschaffung und Logistik 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 358


Die Studierenden können • Beschaffungs- und Logistikprozesse optimieren. 


Keine 


� Begriffe, Bedeutung und Grundlagen der Beschaffung und Logistik 

� Ziele und Aufgaben der Beschaffung und Logistik 

� Materialwirtschaft (z.B. Lagerwirtschaft, Lagerbestände, Lagerbewertung) 

� Transport (z.B. Transportverfahren, Transportalternativen, 

Transportoptimierung) 

� Supply Chain Management 

� Organisation (z.B. Einkaufsabwicklung, Einkaufsstrategien) 

� Ausgewählte Problemstellungen und Praxisbeispiele im Krankenhaus 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung 



Finanzierung und Investition 




Studierende lernen ausgewählte Konzepte der Finanzwirtschaft kennen. Am Ende der 

Lehrveranstaltung können Sie die Finanzfragen einer Organisation verstehen und 

Finanzierungs- und Investitionsentscheidungen richtig treffen. 


Die Lehrveranstaltung baut auf dem grundlegenden Wissen aus den folgenden 

Lehrveranstaltungen auf: 

Mathematik (insb. Finanzmathematik) 

Statistik (insb. Mittelwert, Varianz) 

Rechnungswesen II (insb. Kostenrechnung, kalkulatorische Kosten) 


Finanzierung: 

� Grundlagen des Finanzmanagement (z.B. Ziele, organisatorische Eingliederung) 

� Entscheidungskriterien 

� Innenfinanzierung 

� Außenfinanzierung (z.B. Fremdfinanzierung, einschl. Leasingfinanzierung, 

Beteiligungsfinanzierung) 

� Mezzaninfinanzierung 

Investition: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 359

� Investitionen und Investitionsprozess 

� statische und dynamische Investitionsrechenverfahren einschließlich kritischer 

Beurteilung 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung 



Public Relations 




Die Studierenden sind in der Lage geeignete Maßnahmen von PR und Marketing zu 

identifizieren und mit den entsprechenden Instrumenten umzusetzen. 



� Grundlagen der PR 

� Imagepflege, Kommunikation und Arbeit mit den Medien 

� Instrumente, Maßnahmen und Werkzeuge der PR (z.B. Presseaussendung, 

Pressekonferenz) 

� Medienarbeit online 

� Medientaugliche Sprache 

� Medienarbeit in der Krise 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung 



Informationstechnologien im Gesundheitswesen 




Wissen und Verständnis: 

Nach Abschluss des Kurses ist den StudentInnen geläufig, welche rechtlichen Aspekte es 

beim Betrieb einer IT im Gesundheitswesen zu beachten gilt. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 360

Es besteht ein Wissen in den Technologien und Begriffen: 

� Datenschutzgesetz, Signaturgesetz, Gesundheitstelematikgesetz (Auswirkungen 

auf den Betrieb im Gesundheitswesen und Lösungsansätze, wie man konform 

arbeitet) 

� Rechenzentrumsbetrieb, Netzwerke (LAN / WAN) 

� Leistungsorientierte Krankenanstaltenfinanzierung / Codierung / Optimierung / 

Programmunterstützung 

� e-Card / e-health / ELGA / elektronische Befundübermittlung 

� KIS / PACS / HL-7 / IHE / Schnittstellen / Datawarehouse 

Die StudentInnen haben einen Überblick über die derzeit im IT Bereich des 

Gesundheitswesens gängigsten Programme, Technologien und Trends 

Intellektuelle Fähigkeiten: 

Die StudentInnen können die komplexen Zusammenhänge der IT im Gesundheitswesen 

erkennen und bei Projekten die kritischen Erfolgsfaktoren abschätzen 



� Informationsmanagement 

� Datenbanken 

� Systementwicklung 

� Beschaffung und Einführung von EDV-Anwendungen 

� Datenschutz 

� Neue Medien (Internet - Geschichte, Grundlagen, Infrastruktur, Architektur, 

Sicherheit / E-Business - Definition, Demographie, Analyse, Ziele, Strategien, 

Planung und Implementierung eines Webauftrittes) 

� EDV-Anwendungen für Gesundheitseinrichtungen (z.B. Ordinationssysteme, 

Krankenhausinformationssysteme und ihre einzelnen Elemente, z.B. 

Labordatensysteme, RIS) 

� Telemedizin 

� Computermedizin 

� Gesundheitspass 

� e-health 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 




Gesundheitsförderung und Prävention I 




FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 361

Die Studierenden verfügen über Basiskenntnisse der wissenschaftlich relevanten 

Gesundheitsmodelle und Gesundheitstheorien und sind in der Lage, einfache 

Gesundheitsförderungs- und Präventionsprojekte aufzusetzen und durchzuführen. 


Keine 


� Definitionen und Hintergründe von Gesundheitsförderung und Prävention 

� Ottawa Charta 

� Modelle der Gesundheitsförderung (Salutogenese, Modell von Antonovsky) 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 




Medizinische Technologie 


Wintersemester 1 MT 1 


Folgend der Lehrveranstaltung Medizinische Terminologie soll die Medizinische 

Technologie ein fundiertes Verständnis des Basiswissens technischer Möglichkeiten der 

Diagnostik und Behandlung von Erkrankungen vermitteln, um den grundlegenden 

Gebrauch, die Notwendigkeiten und den Kostenrahmen solcher Methoden zu 

beleuchten und auch für nicht Gesundheitsberufler verständlich zu machen. 

Die Studenten sind nach Abschluss der Lehrveranstaltung in der Lage sein, die 

Grundlagen der Diagnostik und Therapie mit technischen Hilfsmitteln zu verstehen und 

ihre Möglichkeiten und ihren Kostenrahmen zu bewerten. 




� Bildgebende Diagnostik 

� Labor Diagnostik 

� Endoskopie 

� Spezielle Diagnoseverfahren 

� Anästhesie und Intensivmedizin 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 362



Qualitätsmanagement 




Die StudentInnen sind nach der Lehrveranstaltung in der Lage sicher mit den 

Begrifflichkeiten im Qualitätsmanagement umzugehen, grundlegende Instrumente im 

Rahmen des Qualitätsmanagements in der Praxis einzusetzen, einzelne QM-Modelle zu 

beschreiben und je nach Anwendungsobjekt kritisch zu beurteilen und die Einführung 

eines QM-Systems zu planen und zu projektieren. 




� Motivation zu Qualität 

� Begriffsbestimmungen (z.B. Qualität, Qualitätsmanagement) 

� Kundenorientierung, Mitarbeiterorientierung, Umfeldorientierung, 

Prozessorientierung 

� Struktur-, Prozess-, Ergebnisqualität 

� Methoden des Qualitätsmanagements (z.B. Prozessbeschreibungen, 

Qualitätszirkel) 

� Qualitätsmanagementsysteme (z.B. ISO 9000 ff.) 

� Qualitätswerkzeuge 

� Umgang mit Fehlern und Beschwerden 

� Zertifizierungs- und Akkreditierungsverfahren 

� TQM-Preise und Auszeichnungen 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 




Spezielle Betriebswirtschaftslehre für pharmazeutische 

Unternehmen I 




Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, Strukturen und Marktmechanismen des 

pharmazeutischen Marktes zu erklären und die Auswirkungen von regulativen und 

marktsteuernden Maßnahmen zu analysieren 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 363


Keine 


� Stellenwert und Aufgaben der pharmazeutischen Industrie in der 

Gesundheitsversorgung 

� Ausgewählte Stakeholder aus Sicht der pharmazeutischen Industrie 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 




Spezielle Betriebswirtschaftslehre für Versicherungsunternehmen I 




Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, Zusammenhänge in der Versicherungswirtschaft und 

in den mit dieser in Verbindung stehenden Unternehmen zu erkennen 


Keine 


Einführung in das Versicherungsmanagement 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 




Softwareanwendungen III 




Die Studenten werden sich in vielen Berufsfeldern wiederfinden, in denen im hohen Maße 

Projektmanagement-Skills benötigt werden. 

Aus diesem Grund soll in Softwareanwendungen III ein Schwerpunkt auf den Bereich 

Computerbased Project-Managegement gelegt werden. Nach Besuch dieser 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 364

Lehrveranstaltung sind die Studenten in der Lage, das Projektmanagementsoftware-Tool 

MS Project in der Praxis einzusetzen, Projekte damit zu erstellen, zu verwalten und 

Kosten zu berechnen. 




Kennenlernen durch Anwendung der Projektmanagementsoftware MS Project 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 




Fachenglisch I 




Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, Diskussionen zu Themen des Gesundheitswesens auch 

unter Verwendung gesundheitsspezifischer Termini in englischer Sprache zu führen. 


Wirtschaftsenglisch II 


� Spezielles gesundheitswirtschaftsbezogenes Vokabular und spezifische 

Situationen des Berufslebens 

� Spezielle Themen und Diskussion: Umwelt, Gesundheitssysteme, 

Gesundheitstechnologie 

� Weiterentwicklung von speaking and writing skills 

� Meetings und Verhandlungen mit Fokus Gesundheit 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: group and pair work, roleplays, discussions, analysis, 

feedback, e-learning element 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 365


PTS - Berufspraktikum 


Sommersemester PTS 28 


Nach Beendigung des Berufspraktikums haben die Studierende erste Einblicke in die 

Berufswelt erhalten. Je nach Einsatzgebiet während des Praktikums sind sie imstande, 

verschiedene operative Tätigkeiten und fachspezifische Arbeiten in Unternehmen des 

Gesundheitswesens durchzuführen. 


Grundsätze interkulturellen Handelns, Mentoring, Konfliktmanagement und Mediation 


22-wöchiges Berufspraktikum in einer Einrichtung des Gesundheitswesen 


Zur Absolvierung des PTS kann der Leitfaden für Studierende zur Organisation und 

Absolvierung des Praktikums (aktuelle Version) herangezogen werden. 

Lehrmethoden 

Berufspraktikum, Coaching während des Praktikums 


Das PTS wird mit der Note "mit Erfolg absolviert" oder mit "nicht genügend" beurteilt. 

Zur Erlangung der Note "mit Erfolg absolviert" ist ein Praktikumseinsatz von 

wenigstens 32 Stunden/Woche während eines Zeitraums von mindestens 22 Wochen und 

die Übermittlung der Praktikumsbescheinigung über diese Arbeitsleistung erforderlich 

(mehr zur Praktikumsbescheinigung siehe "Additional Features"). 

Bei Abbruch des PTS ohne Zustimmung der PTS-Koordination und der 

Studiengangsleitung wird das PTS mit der Note "nicht genügend" beurteilt. 

Praktikumsbegleitendes Seminar 


Sommersemester BPSE 2 


Nach Beendigung des Berufspraktikums haben die Studierende erste Einblicke in die 

Berufswelt erhalten. Je nach Einsatzgebiet während des Praktikums können sie operative 

Tätigkeiten und fachspezifische Arbeiten in Unternehmen des Gesundheitswesens 

durchzuführen. Studierende sind nach Beendigung des Praktikums und des Seminars in 

der Lage eine Reflexion über ihre Aufgaben im Praktikum und über Gelerntes 

und erlangten Kompetenzgewinn zu geben. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 366


keine 


� Betreuung während des Berufspraktikums 

� Erarbeiten von Zwischenberichten 

� Erarbeiten von Endberichten 

� Präsentation über das Berufspraktikum 


Zur Erstellung des Erstberichts und des Reflexionsberichts werden folgende Manuals in 

ihrer jeweils aktuellen Version herangezogen 

� Leitfaden für Studierende zur Organisation und Absolvierung des 

Berufspraktikums 

� Leitfaden für Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten 

Lehrmethoden 

tba 


Zur Beurteilung des praktikumsbegleitenden Seminars werden der Erstbericht, der 

Reflexionsbericht und eine Präsentation über das Praktikums zu Beginn des 5. Semesters 

herangezogen. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 367


Bachelorseminar und -arbeit 


Wintersemester 1 BAS 5 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, innerhalb der vorgegebenen Zeitspanne eine 

eigenständige Bachelorarbeit im vorgeschriebenen Umfang unter Anwendung 

wissenschaftlicher Richtlinien zu verfassen. 


Die Lehrveranstaltung baut auf dem grundlegenden Wissen aus den folgenden 

Lehrveranstaltungen auf: 

Einführung in das wissenschaftliche Arbeiten 

Softwareanwendungen I (Word, Powerpoint) 

Mathematik und Statistik I und II (insb. Beschreibende Statistik) 

Methodenbasierende Kompetenz 


� Verfassen einer eigenständig Arbeit nach geltenden Richtlinien 

� Thematische Abgrenzung der Bachelorarbeit I 

� Aufbau und Gliederung der Bachelorarbeit I 

� Coaching durch Betreuer 


Leitfaden für Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten 

Lehrmethoden 

Seminar: Vortrag, Coaching bei der Erstellung der Bachelorarbeit, e-learning 


Bachelorarbeit I 

Controlling 


Wintersemester 2 CONT 2,5 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, Controlling als zentrales Werkzeug für die 

Entscheidungsvorbereitung und Planung im Unternehmen anzuwenden. 


Die Lehrveranstaltung baut auf folgendem Grundwissen: 

Rechnungswesen (insb. Finanzbuchhaltung, Jahresabschluss, Kostenrechnung) 

Mathematik und Statistik (insb. Kostenrechnung, Regressionsanalyse) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 368


� Begriffsbestimmung 

� Funktionen des Controlling 

� Organisation des Controlling 

� Strategisches Controlling (z.B. Aufgaben des strategischen Controllings, Strategische 

Planung, Strategische Kontrolle) 

� Operatives Controlling (z.B. Aufgaben des operativen Controllings, Operative Planung, 

Budgetierung, Operative Kontrolle mittels Deckungsbeitragsrechnung und 

Plankostenrechnung, Abweichungsermittlung und -analyse, Berichtswesen) 


Literatur: 

Peter Atrill, Eddie McLaney: Management Accounting for Decision Makers 

6th Edition, 2009 

Pearson 

ISBN-13: 978-0273-72362-2 

Lehrmethoden 

Case Study und übungsorientiertes Lernen. Ausrichtung an Praxisbeispielen. 


Vorlesung (Abschlussprüfung) 

Fachenglisch II 


Wintersemester 2 FENG 2 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, 

� die Hauptinhalte komplexer Texte zu konkreten und abstrakten Themen zu verstehen. 

� sich spontan und fließend auf Englisch zu unterhalten und einen Standpunkt zu 

aktuellen (gesundheits)wirtschaftlichen Themen zu erläutern und zu vertreten. 

� Diskussionen zu Themen des Gesundheitswesens auch unter Verwendung 

gesundheitsspezifischer Termini in englischer Sprache zu führen. 




� Bewerbung und Interview-Techniken; schwierigere Kapitel der englischen Sprache 

(Lexis, Syntax) 

� Spezielles gesundheitswirtschaftsbezogenes Vokabular und spezifische Situationen 

des Berufslebens 

� Spezielle Themen und Diskussion: Austrian Health Care System, Demand for Health 

Care, Medical Issues 

� Festigung von speaking and writing skills 


� Presenting a Thesis 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 369


Wird als Download den Studierenden zur Verfügung gestellt. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Lecture, partner and group work 


Semesterprüfung (en) 

Gesundheitsförderung und Prävention II 


Wintersemester 3 GP 4 


� Die Studierenden verfügen über Basiskenntnisse der wissenschaftlich relevanten 

Gesundheitsmodelle und Gesundheitstheorien. 

� Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, einfache Gesundheitsförderungs- und 

Präventionsprojekte aufzusetzen und durchzuführen. 


Gesundheitsförderung und Prävention I 


� Gesundheitsförderung als Profession 

� Settings der Gesundheitsförderung 

o betriebliche Gesundheitsförderung 

o öffentliche Gesundheitsförderung 

o private Gesundheitsförderung 

� Ausbildung und Erziehung zur Gesundheit 

� Projektentwicklung in der Gesundheitsförderung und Prävention 

� Implementierungsstrategien 

� Implementierungsmaßnahmen 

� Marketing für Gesundheitsförderungs- und Präventionsprogramme 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, Fallbeispiele, Übungen, Diskussionen 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 370

Recht im Gesundheitswesen 


Wintersemester 2 RGES 2 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, ein Rechtsproblem zu erkennen, die notwendige 

Fragestellung zu formulieren, und/oder Wege zu finden die sich ergebenden Fragen zu 

lösen, indem sie ausgewählte berufs-, patienten- und organisationsrechtliche Regelungen 

anwenden. 




� Berufs-, patienten- und organisationsrechtliche Zusammenhänge zwischen den 

Gesundheits- und Sozialberufen und den Gesundheitsunternehmen 

� Erkennen der berufsspezifischen Bedeutung der zivilrechtlichen Haftung und 

strafrechtlichen Verantwortung 

� Verständnis für das Initiieren, Planen, Implementieren und Evaluieren 

haftungsminimierender Struktur- und Prozessabläufe in Gesundheitsunternehmen 

� Übung im Umgang mit Gesetzesmaterialien und Rechtsinformationssystemen 


Koziol/Welser/Kletecka, ISBN-13: 978-3-214-14710-5; Band I, Allgemeiner Teil, 

Sachenrecht, Familienrecht, Manz Verlag, 14. Auflage 2011 

· Welser/Zöchling-Jud, ISBN-13: 978-3-214-14711-2; Band II, Schuldrecht Allgemeiner 

Teil, Schuldrecht Besonderer Teil, Erbrecht. Manz Verlag, 14. Auflage, 2011 

· Kienapfel/Höpfel, ISBN-13: 978-3-214-12183-9; Strafrecht, Allgemeiner Teil, Manz 

Verlag, 12. überarb. Auflage, 2007 

· Kienapfel, ISBN-13: 978-3-214-10565-5; Strafrecht, Besonderer Teil, Manz Verlag, 5. 

neubear. Auflage 2003 

· Andreaus/Gottwald, ISBN 978-3-7089-0331-6; Rechtsgrundlagen für Gesundheitsberufe, 

facultas Verlag, 1. Auflage, 2008 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung: Vortrag, Diskussion, Fallbesprechung 







Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, bei auftretenden Konflikten professionell zu agieren 

und damit wesentlich zur Konfliktlösung bei der Zusammenarbeit mit anderen 

beizutragen. 


Kommunikation, Teamtraining 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 371


� Konfliktmanagement als Führungsaufgabe 

� Konfliktarten 

� Typische Konfliktursachen 

� Konfliktstile und Verhaltensmuster 

� Konflikte analysieren und Diagnose stellen 

� Konfliktstrategien anwenden in Fallbeispielen 

� Rolle des Konfliktmanagers oder Mediators 

� Gruppenprozesse aktiv steuern 

� Interventionstechniken anwenden 

� Gruppendynamische Phänomene berücksichtigen 


Thomann, Chr., Schulz von Thun, F. (1988). Klärungshilfe. Handbuch für Therapeuten, 

Gesprächshelfer und Moderatoren in schwierigen Gesprächen. Reinbek: rororo. 

Thomann, Chr. (2004). Klärungshilfe 2 Konflikte im Beruf: Methoden und Modelle 

klärender Gespräche. Reinbek: rororo. 

Lehrmethoden 

Workshop: Vortrag, Rollenspiel, Kleingruppenarbeit, Videoanalyse 


Lernbericht 

Spezielle BWL für Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen II 


Wintersemester 3 SGES 4,5 


Die Studierenden 

� sind in der Lage, neueste wissenschaftliche und gesundheitsbranchen-spezifische 


� verfügen über das theoretische und praktische Rüstzeug, das notwendige Wissen und 

die entsprechenden Schlüsselqualifikationen, um Managementfunktionen in 

Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen effizient und effektiv ausüben zu können. 


Spezielle BWL für Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen I 


� Gesundheits- und Sozialbereich als Markt 

� Aufgaben von Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen 

� Grundlagen der Finanzierung von Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen 

� Projektentwicklung für Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 372

� Zielplanung für Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen 

� Funktionsplanung für Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen 

� LKF-System und Dokumentation 

� Führung und Organisation einer Krankenanstalt 

� Schnittstellenmanagement zu extramuralen Strukturen 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, Fallbeispiele, Planspiele, Diskussion, e-learning 



Spezielle BWL für pharmazeutische Unternehmen II 


Wintersemester 3 SPU 4,5 



� Strukturen und Marktmechanismen des pharmazeutischen Marktes zu erklären und 

die Auswirkungen von regulativen und marktsteuernden Maßnahmen zu analysieren. 

� die betriebsinternen Funktionen und Prozesse eines pharmazeutischen Betriebes zu 

beschreiben und soweit anwenden, dass ein erfolgreicher beruflicher Einstieg in der 

pharmazeutischen Industrie z.B. als Assistent/In der Marketingleitung möglich ist. 


Spezielle BWL für pharmazeutische Unternehmen I 


� Legistische Rahmenbedingungen im Pharmamarkt 

� Klinische Prüfung, Monitoring, Qualitätssicherung und -kontrolle 

� Zulassungsverfahren und Pharmakovigilanz 

� Pharmakoökonomie 

� Strukturelemente und Steuerungsinstrumente der Arzneimittelversorgung 

� Qualitätsmanagement in der Pharmaindustrie 


Schöffski, O., Fricke, F.-U., Guminski W. (2008). Pharmabetriebslehre. Berlin: Springer. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, Diskussionen sowie Fallbeispiele 



Spezielle BWL für Versicherungsunternehmen II 


Wintersemester 3 SVER 4,5 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 373



� Zusammenhänge in der Versicherungswirtschaft und in den mit dieser in Verbindung 

stehenden Unternehmen zu erkennen. 

� mit den zentralen Herausforderungen, die auf die Branche zukommen, nämlich das 

Versicherungsmarketing, das Risikomanagement und die allumfassenden 

Finanzdienstleistungsangebote umzugehen. 


Spezielle BWL für Versicherungsunternehmen I 


� Versicherungsbetriebslehre 

� Risk Management in Versicherungsunternehmen 

� Planung in Versicherungsunternehmen 

� Betriebsorganisation, Datenverarbeitung in Versicherungsbetrieben 

� Rechnungswesen in Versicherungsbetrieben 

� Controlling in Versicherungsbetrieben 

� Sozialversicherungswesen I 

� Prozess- und Qualitätsmanagement in Versicherungsbetrieben 


Farny D. (2006). Versicherungsbetriebslehre. Karlsruhe: Versicherungswirtschaft. 

Versicherungsbedingungen (auf www.vvo.at) 

Holzer, E., Thomeczek, C., Hauke, E., Conen, D., Hochreutener, M.-A. (2005). 

Patientensicherheit – Leitfaden im Umgang mit Risiken im Gesundheitswesen. Wien: 

Facultas. 

Von den Lehrveranstaltungsleitern beigebrachte Vortragsunterlagen. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, Übungen, Gruppenarbeiten, Diskussion 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 374


Bachelorarbeit II 




Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, innerhalb der vorgegebenen Zeitspanne eine 

eigenständige Bachelorarbeit in einem jeweils vorgeschriebenen Umfang unter 

Anwendung wissenschaftlicher Richtlinien zu verfassen. 


Einführung in das wissenschaftliche Arbeiten 

Softwareanwendungen I (Word, Powerpoint) 

Mathematik und Statistik I und II (insb. Beschreibende Statistik) (für empirische 

Bachelorarbeiten) 

Methodenbasierende Kompetenz 


Konzeption und Verfassen der Bachelorarbeit II 


Leitfaden für wissenschaftliches Arbeiten an der IMC Fachhochschule Krems. 

Lehrmethoden 



Case Studies im Gesundheitswesen 


Sommersemester 2 3,5 


Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, vernetzt zu denken und spezifische 

Aufgabenstellungen unter Bedachtnahme der Auswirkungen auf beteiligte Akteure in der 

Gesundheitsbranche zu lösen. 


Die Lehrveranstaltung verlangt grundlegende allgemeine und spezielle 

betriebswirtschaftliche Grundkenntnisse. 


� Bearbeitung von ausgesuchten Fallstudien aus dem Gesundheits- und Sozialwesen 

� Lösung von Gruppenaufgaben durch vernetztes Denken und kritische Diskussion 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, Fallbeispiele, Gruppenarbeiten 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 375



Fachenglisch III 


Sommersemester 2 FENG 2 



� die Hauptinhalte komplexer Texte zu konkreten und abstrakten Themen zu verstehen. 

� sich spontan und fließend auf Englisch zu unterhalten und einen Standpunkt zu 

aktuellen (gesundheits)wirtschaftlichen Themen zu erläutern und zu vertreten. 

Diskussionen zu Themen des Gesundheitswesens auch unter Verwendung 

gesundheitsspezifischer Termini in englischer Sprache zu führen. 


Fachenglisch I + II 


� Vorbereitung auf die Bachelor-Prüfung 

� English for Academic Purposes (i.e. abstract writing) 

� Spezielle Themen und Diskussion: Public vs. Private Hospitals, Comparison of Health 

Care Systems (UK, USA, Austria, ...), Debate on Public Health 



Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: learner-centered concept, partners or small groups, class 

debate, e-learning 



Medizinethik 




Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, ethisch zu argumentieren, wobei sie unterschiedliche, 

kulturell bedingte Wertorientierungen berücksichtigen können. Sie sind kompetent, im 

Alltag ethisch relevante Probleme zu identifizieren und von rein sachlichen zu 

unterscheiden. Die Studierenden können ethische Diskurse moderieren, um praktisch 

umsetzbare Lösungen zwischen Konsens und Kompromiss anzustreben. 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 376


� Ethisches Grundinstrumentarium 

� Unterscheidung von sachlichen und ethischen Gesichtspunkten 

� Fähigkeit zum qualifizierten Argumentieren 

� Wissen um Aspekte verschiedener, teilweise kulturell bedingter Wertorientierungen 

sowie um den Einfluss des berufsspezifischen Ethos 

� Führung/Moderation von interkulturellen und interdisziplinären ethischen Diskursen 

� Betrachtung relevanter medizinethischer Fragen hinsichtlich des philosophischen und 

wertorientierten Gehalts 

� Betrachtungen der Auswirkungen auf den Binnenbereich Patient-Gesundheitsberufe 

und deren (ökonomische) Einflüsse auf die Gesellschaft 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Workshop: Vortrag, Kleingruppen, Präsentationen, Fallbeispiele 


Lernbericht 

Repetitorium 




Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, sich eigenständig auf die mündliche Bachelorprüfung 

vorzubereiten. Sie kennen den Ablauf einer Bachelorprüfung und haben ausgewählte 

Inhalte bestimmter Lehrveranstaltungen anhand von Fragen wiederholt. 


Die Lehrveranstaltung verlangt grundlegende allgemeine und spezielle 

betriebswirtschaftliche Grundkenntnisse. 


Vorbereitung auf die mündliche Bachelorprüfung 


Wird während der Lehrveranstaltung vom Lektor/der Lektorin bekannt gegeben. 

Lehrmethoden 

Repetitorium 


Bearbeiten einer spezifischen Aufgabenstellung (schriftlich und/oder mündlich) 

Spezielle BWL für Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen III 


Sommersemester 3 SGES 4,5 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 377


Die Studierenden 

� sind in der Lage, neueste wissenschaftliche und gesundheitsbranchen-spezifische 


� verfügen über das theoretische und praktische Rüstzeug, das notwendige Wissen und 

die entsprechenden Schlüsselqualifikationen, um Managementfunktionen in 

Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen effizient und effektiv ausüben zu können. 


Spezielle BWL für Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen I + II 


� Projekt- Prozess- und Qualitätsmanagement von Gesundheits- und 

Sozialeinrichtungen 

� Spezifische Ökonomie von Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen: 

o Finanzierung und Rechnungswesen 

o Investition und Controlling 

o Personal(einsatz)planung 

o Logistik und Lagerhaltung 

� Das Krankenhaus – Planung und Bau von Krankenanstalten 

� Kostenrechnung und Controlling für Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen 

� Ausgewählte Rechtsprobleme für Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen 

Risk Management in Gesundheits- und Sozialeinrichtungen 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vorträge, Fallbeispiele, Planspiele, … 



Spezielle BWL für pharmazeutische Unternehmen III 


Sommersemester 3 SPU 4,5 



� Strukturen und Marktmechanismen des pharmazeutischen Marktes zu erklären und 

die Auswirkungen von regulativen und marktsteuernden Maßnahmen zu analysieren. 

� die betriebsinternen Funktionen und Prozesse eines pharmazeutischen Betriebes zu 

beschreiben und soweit anzuwenden, dass ein erfolgreicher beruflicher Einstieg in der 

pharmazeutischen Industrie z.B. als AssistentIn der Marketingleitung möglich ist. 


Spezielle BWL für pharmazeutische Unternehmen I+II 


� Marktforschung in der Pharmaindustrie 

� Pharmaceutical Care und Compliance Management 

� Vertriebswege und Arzneimitteltransport 

� Preisbildung von Arzneimitteln 

� Erstattung EKO inkl. Generika 

� Pharmamarketing 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 378

� Erfolgsfaktoren bei der Neuprodukteinführung 

� Besonderheiten: Orphan Drugs und Biosimilars 


Schöffski, O., Fricke, F.-U., Guminski W. (2008). Pharmabetriebslehre. Berlin: Springer. 

Skripten der Vortragenden 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vorträge, Diskussionen, Bearbeitung von Fallbeispielen 

sowie begleitete Einzelarbeit beim Tool-Training 



Spezielle BWL für Versicherungsunternehmen III 


Sommersemester 3 SVER 4,5 



� Zusammenhänge in der Versicherungswirtschaft und in den mit dieser in Verbindung 

stehenden Unternehmen zu erkennen. 

� mit den zentralen Herausforderungen, die auf die Branche zukommen, nämlich das 

Versicherungsmarketing, das Risikomanagement und die allumfassenden 

Finanzdienstleistungsangebote umzugehen. 


Spezielle BWL für Versicherungsunternehmen I + II 


� Interne Revision 

� Sozialversicherungswesen II 

� Rechtliche Fragen der Versicherung (Versicherungsvertrags-, 

Versicherungsaufsichtsgesetz) 

� Einführung Personen-Spartenkunde 

� Unfallversicherung 

� Lebens- u. Pensionsversicherung 

� Lebensversicherungsmathematik 

� Betriebliche Altersvorsorge 

� Krankenversicherung 

� Versicherungsmarketing und Marktforschung in Versicherungen 

� Rückversicherung 


Farny D. (2006). Versicherungsbetriebslehre. Karlsruhe: Versicherungswirtschaft. 

Lehrmethoden 

Integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: Vortrag, Übungen, Gruppenarbeiten, Diskussionen 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 379

MIDWIFERY – Bachelor Programme 


Berufsbild und Berufsethik 


Wintersemester 1 SWS BBE1ILV 1 


Auseinandersetzung mit hebammenrelevanten historischen-, kulturellen- und 

gesellschaftspolitischen Aspekten zur Entwicklungsförderung einer Berufsidentität unter 

Einbeziehung berufsethischer Themen- und Aufgabenstellungen. 


Keine 


Berufsbild: 

Einführung, Begrifflichkeiten, Definitionen (basierend auf dem Österreichischen 

Hebammengesetz, der WHO etc.) Hebammengeschichte, kulturelle- und gesellschaftliche 

Aspekte. Der Hebammenberuf in der Gegenwart, Perspektivenwandel innerhalb des 

Hebammenberufes, rechtliche Rahmenbedingungen. 

Berufsethik: 

Berufspflichten, Grenzen der Berufspflichten, Recht und Ethik 


Ethik und Hebammenpraxis; Jones, S., Verlag Huber (2003) 

Lehrmethoden 

Einführung in die Thematik mittels Impulsreferat, gegebenenfalls zur Untermauerung 

einzelne Filmsequenzen aus dem Film „Midwives―. 

Gruppenarbeiten, in denen die Themenbereiche eigenständig erarbeitet werden sollen. 

Die Ergebnisse der Gruppenarbeiten bilden die Grundlage für die Gruppenpräsentationen. 

Hier soll auf bereits erworbenen Kompetenzen aus der Lehrveranstaltung 

„Wissenschaftliche Grundlagen― aufgebaut werden. 

Fallbeispiele, Diskussionen, Reflexion. 


Präsentation 70% 

Handout 30% 

Berufspraktikum I und praktikumsbegleitendes Seminar 


Wintersemester 1 SWS BPR1BOPR 6 


Vertiefung der Fachpraktischen Übungen und weiteres Erwerben von fachpraktischen 

Kompetenzen in Verknüpfung mit den theoretischen Inhalten des 1. Semesters. Die 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 380

Studierende kann zum Ende des 1. Semesters die erforderlichen praktischen 

Qualifikationen (siehe Course Description) umsetzen und anwenden. 


Keine 


Einführung in den klinischen stationären und ambulanten Bereich 

Stationäre Routine 

Hygiene-, Pflege- und Betreuungsstandards 

Vorbereitung und Durchführung von prophylaktischen und therapeutischen Maßnahmen 

Aufnahme und Anamnese 

Vitalparameter 

Beobachtung des Allgemeinzustandes der Frau/Patientin 

Dokumentation 


Tätigkeitskatalog wird ausgehändigt 

Lehrmethoden 

Handlungsorientiertes und reflektives Lernen in der realen Praxissituation gemäß der 

Kompetenzerwerbsstufen 


Praktische Beurteilung erfolgt durch die Praktikumsstelle – Leistungsüberprüfung 100 % 

bei neg. Beurteilung tritt die an der IMC-FH Krems gültige Prüfungsordnung in Kraft. 

Berufsspezifische Grundlagen der Hebammenlehre Partiale 1 und 2 


Wintersemester 6 SWS BSPG1ILV 6 


Die Studierenden erwerben theoretische und praktische Grundlagen und Kenntnisse 

gemäß der aktuellen fachspezifischen Wissenschaft, um stationäre Routineabläufe, von 

der Aufnahme bis zur Entlassung, selbständig gemäß der prozessorientierten 

Hebammenbetreuung durchführen zu können. Die Studierenden sind in der Lage, 

sämtliche diagnostische und therapeutische Maßnahmen umzusetzen, bzw. sind sich auch 

der damit verbundenen Verantwortung bewusst. Die Studierenden erkennen die 

Notwendigkeit von individuellen pflegerischen und therapeutischen Maßnehmen gemäß 

der prozessorientierten Hebammenbetreuung und setzen diese praktisch um. 

Die Studierenden können durch die Auseinandersetzung mit den Themen Gesundheit, 

Krankheit sowie deren kritische Gegenüberstellung zum Themenbereich der Salutogenese 

relevante Beispiele für die Praxisrealität ableiten. Weiters sind sie in der Lage, anhand 

von Betreuungsmodellen die Vorteile der prozessorientierten Betreuung zu erörtern und 

begründen. 


Keine 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 381


Partiale 1 : 

Anamnese / Vitalparameter / Allgemeine Patientenbeobachtung / Pflegerische und 

therapeutische Maßnahmen / Medikamente – Umgang und Anwendung / Umgang mit 

medizinischen Instrumenten und Geräten / Stationäre Routineabläufe / Praktische 

Hygiene / Aufnahme – Entlassung 

Partiale 2 : 

Gesundheit und Krankheit / Ganzheitlichkeit / Salutogenese / Aktivitäten des Täglichen 

Lebens / Betreuungsprozess und Betreuungsplanung / Betreuungsmodelle 


Hebammenkunde; Geist/Harder/Stigl, Hippokrates Verlag, neueste Auflage 

Effektive Betreuung während der Schwangerschaft und Geburt; Enkin, Keirse; Huber, 

neueste Auflage 

Pflegetechniken heute; Ina Pfitzer; Urban & Fischer, neueste Auflage 

Lehrmethoden 

Themenzentrierte Vorträge mit Diskussionsrunden und praxisrelevanten Fallbeispielen, 

Gruppenarbeiten, praxisorientierte Übungen und Präsentationen 

Einzelarbeit sowie Partnerarbeiten im Zusammenhang mit speziellen Aufgabenstellungen 


Partiale 1: mündliche Abschlussprüfung 70%, schriftliche Zwischenprüfung 30% 

Partiale 2: Präsentation der Partnerarbeiten 

Die Gesamtnote ergibt sich aus prozentueller Aufteilung der Stunden. 

Fachpraktische Übungen I 


Wintersemester 1 SWS FPÜ1ILV 1 


Die Studierenden erwerben fachpraktische Kompetenzen in spezieller Verknüpfung mit 

den theoretischen Inhalten der Lehrveranstaltungen „Berufsspezifische Grundlagen der 

Hebammenlehre Partiale I―, „Physiologie in der praepartalen Phase – prozessorientierte 

Hebammenbetreuung―, „Physiologie in der praepartalen Phase – medizinischer Bereich― 

und „Medizinische Grundlagen der Hebammenlehre Partiale II― des ersten Semesters. 


keine 


Organisation der Praxisplätze / Kooperationsabkommen mit den Praxisstellen / 

Stufenweise Planung und gezielte Umsetzung der Praktischen Übungen gemäß 

Praxishandbuch / Individuelle Anleitung von Tutoren / Evaluierung und Reflexion / 

Analyse von Problemen und Situationen / Assessment und Dokumentation 


Tätigkeitskatalog wird ausgehändigt 

Lehrmethoden 

Handlungsorientiertes und reflektiertes Lernen in der realen Praxissituation. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 382


Überprüfung des Kompetenzerwerbs 40% 

Seminararbeit 60% 

Bei negativer Beurteilung tritt die Prüfungsordnung der IMC Fachhochschule Krems in 

Kraft. 

Gesetzliche Grundlagen der Hebammenlehre Partiale I und II 


Wintersemester 1 SWS GESG1ILV 1 


Die Studierenden erwerben Kenntnisse der Rechtsgrundlagen für den Hebammenberuf. 


keine 


Partiale 1 : 

Berufsbilder, -rechte, -pflichten der Gesundheitsberufe, Fachspezifische Schnittstellen 

Partiale 2 : 

Strukturen und Organisation des österreichischen Gesundheitswesen, 

Krankenhausmanagement im Bezug zu den Gesundheitsberufen, Dienstrecht, 

Sozialversicherungsrecht, Patientenrecht 


Handbuch Medizinrecht für die Praxis, Wien, Manz-Verlag 

Hebammenrecht; Gasser/Hausreither, Wien 1996 

Recht für Gesundheitsberufe; Sladecek/Marzi/Schmiedbauer, Orac, Wien 2006 

Kodex Ärzterecht; Wien 2006, Orac Verlag 

Kodex Gesundheitsberufe; Wien 2007, Orac Verlag 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung einschließlich Diskussion und Mitarbeit. 


1 gemeinsame (Partiale 1 und 2) schriftliche Abschlussprüfung 100% 


Kraft. 

Medizinische Grundlagen der Hebammenlehre Partiale 1 bis 4 


Wintersemester 9 SWS MEDG1ILV 9 


Partiale 1 und 2 

Das Ziel des Kurses ist es, ein fundiertes Verständnis über notwendige medizinisch 

wissenschaftliche Grundlagen zu vermitteln. Besonderes Augenmerk gilt dabei dem 

fächerübergreifenden Verständnis der allgemeinen Grundlagen und der wichtigsten 

Organsystemen. Ein weiteres Ziel ist es auch, die Studierenden an die Verwendung der 

Fachsprache zu gewöhnen. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 383

Partiale 3 

Ziel ist die Vermittlung hygienerelevanter Basis-Informationen in Bezug auf 

Infektionslehre, Krankenhaus-Hygiene, Mikrobiologie und Immunologie 

Partiale 4 

Einführung in die rechtlichen Grundlagen der Arzneimittelverabreichung mit speziellem 

Augenmerk auf das Hebammenrezeptpflichtgesetz und Dokumentation. 

Genereller Überblick über die Themenbereiche Pharmakologie, Pharmakokinetik und 

Pharmakodynamik mit Schwerpunkt auf Wirkmechanismen und Neben – 

Wechselwirkungen der Arzneimittel. 

Vorstellung einiger auserwählter Substanzklassen und deren Wirkung auf den 

menschlichen Organismus. 


keine 


Partiale 1: Allgemeine Anatomie und Physiologie 

Aufbau, physiologische Funktion und Zusammenspiel der Organe, sowie Topographie und 

Blutversorgung folgender Systeme sowie Richtungs- und Lagebeziehungen folgender 

Systeme: 

Skelettsystem inkl. Muskeln, Bänder und Gelenke / Herz-Kreislaufsystem / 

Atmungssystem / Verdauungssystem / Urogenitalsystem (inkl. Geschlechtsorgane) / 

Endokrines System / Nervensystem / Sinnesorgansystem / Blut- und blutbildendes 

System / Lymphsystem 

Partiale 2 : Allgemeine Pathologie 

Pathologische Veränderungen von Skelettsystem inkl. Muskeln, Bänder und Gelenke / 

Herz-Kreislaufsystem / Atmungssystem / Verdauungssystem / Urogenitalsystem (inkl. 

Geschlechtsorgane) Endokrines System / Nervensystem / Sinnesorgansystem / Blut- und 

blutbildendes System / Lymphsystem 

Partiale 3 : Hygiene 

Grundlagen der Bakteriologie, Virologie und Parasitologie, häufigste 

Infektionskrankheiten sowie deren Prävention und Therapie, Hygiene im Krankenhaus, 

Hygienestandards 

Partiale 4 : Arzneimittellehre 

Grundlagen der Pharmakologie, Arzneimittel, Arzneimittellagerung, Arzneiformen, 

Pharmakokinetik, Pharmakodynamik, Verordnung und Anwendung von Arzneimitteln, 

Dokumentation der Medikation 


Mensch Körper Krankheit; Huch, Verlag Urban und Fischer 

Hygiene in der Pflege; Rainer Werlberger 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung, freiwillige Hausübungen, aktives Erarbeiten von Lehrinhalten, Fallbeispiele aus 

dem Klinikalltag, praktische Übungen, Videos. 


Partiale 1und2 

2 schriftliche Prüfungen zu je 50% 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 384

Partiale 3 

Schriftliche Abschlussprüfung 100% 

Partiale 4 


Gesamtnote ergibt sich aus prozentueller Aufteilung der Stunden. 


Kraft. 

Physiologie der praepartalen Phase – medizinischer Bereich 

Partiale I und II 


Wintersemester 2 SWS PPPM1ILV 2 


Die Studierenden erwerben theoretische Grundlagen und Kenntnisse gemäß der aktuellen 

Wissenschaft des geburtshilflichen Bereichs, um den physiologischen Verlauf der 

Schwangerschaft erkennen und einschätzen zu können. Die Studierenden können 

aufgrund dieser erworbenen Kenntnisse die erforderlichen Maßnahmen im Rahmen der 

Betreuung und Überwachung einer Schwangeren ableiten. 


keine 


Partiale 1: 

Konzeption / Grundzüge der embryo-fetalen Entwicklung / Gameten und Zygote / 

Embryonalentwicklung / Aspekte der Morphogenese / Die Fetalperiode / Entwicklung der 

Plazenta und Eihäute / Der utero-plazentare Kreislauf / Der fetale und feto-plazentare 

Kreislauf 

Partiale 2: 

Spezielle Anatomie und Physiologie der weiblichen Geschlechtsorgane / Diagnose der 

Schwangerschaft / Hormonale Veränderungen während der Schwangerschaft / 

Praepartale Diagnostik / Test- und Screeningverfahren / Radiologie insbesondere 

Ultraschalldiagnostik / praepartale Überwachung, Mutter- Kind – Pass – Untersuchungen / 

Ärztliche Beratung / Risikobewertung / Medikamente während der Schwangerschaft / 

Prophylaxen 


Geburtshilfe; Schneider, Husslein, Springer Verlag, Berlin 2005 

CTG-Training; Susan M. Gauge, Hippokrates Verlag, 2003 

Lehrmethoden 

Themenzentrierte Vorlesungen mit Diskussionsrunden und praxisrelevanten Fallbeispielen 


Partiale I – schriftlicher Test 30% 

Partiale II – schriftlicher Test 70% 

Wiederholung lt. FH Prüfungsordnung 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 385

Physiologie der praepartalen Phase – prozessorientierte 

Hebammenbetreuung 


Wintersemester 2 SWS PPPH1ILV 2 


Die Studierenden erwerben theoretische und praktische Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten um 

eine Schwangerschaftsbegleitung durchführen zu können. Dazu gehört die Feststellung 

der Schwangerschaft und deren physiologische Entwicklung genauso wie Kontrollen laut 

Mutter-Kind-Pass und Beratungsgespräche. Dem entsprechend können die Studierenden 

auch die Schwangerschaft feststellen, die physiologische Entwicklung überprüfen, sowie 

sämtliche Kontrollen laut Mutter-Kind-Pass und entsprechende Beratungsgespräche 

prozessorientiert, gemäß der aktuellen fachspezifischen Wissenschaft durchführen. 


keine 


Feststellung der Schwangerschaft / Physiologische Entwicklung der Schwangerschaft / 

Physiologische Abläufe und Veränderungen im mütterlichen Organismus während der 

Schwangerschaft / Prozessorientierte Beratung und Betreuung während der 

physiologisch verlaufenden Schwangerschaft/ Praepartale Untersuchungen und Routine- 

Kontrollen lt. Mutter-Kind-Pass durch die Hebamme inklusive praktische Übungen / 

Ernährungsberatung der Schwangeren / Prophylaxen 


Schwangerenvorsorge durch Hebammen; Hippokrates, neueste Auflage 

Hebammenkunde, Lehrbuch für Schwangerschaft, Geburt, Wochenbett und Beruf; Geis, 

Ahrendt, Harder, Stiefel; Hippokrates, aktuelle Auflage 

Lehrmethoden 

Themenzentrierte Vorlesungen mit Diskussionsrunden und praxisrelevanten Übungen, 

Gruppenarbeiten, Präsentationen 


Mündliche Abschlussprüfung 70% 

Schriftliche Präsentation 30% 


Selbstmanagement und Kommunikation 


Wintersemester 1 SWS SMKO1WK 1 


Grundlagen der Kommunikation und Gesprächsführung, Einführung 

Einführung in Arbeits- und Zeitmanagement, Selbstmanagement 


keine 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 386


Grundlagen der Gesprächsführung : Kontaktaufnahme, Beziehung, Kontrollierter Dialog / 

Selbstmanagement : Selbstreflexion, Selbstorganisation, Zeitmanagement, 

Stressmanagement 


keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Themenzentrierte Vorlesungen mit Diskussionsrunden und praxisrelevanten Übungen, 

Gruppenarbeiten, Präsentationen 


Anwesenheit, Gruppenarbeit 

Wissenschaftliche Grundlagen 


Wintersemester 1 SWS WG1ILV 1 


Die Studierende kann 

� Wissensquellen von Hebammen nennen 

� Wissenschaftliches bzw. evidenz-basiertes Arbeiten definieren 

� Die ethischen Prinzipien der Forschung diskutieren 

� Die quantitative und qualitative Forschungsperspektive erläutern 

� Den Forschungsprozess erklären 

� Einen Überblick über die wissenschaftliche Literatursuche für Hebammen 

geben 

� Effektiv lesen und Grundsätze des wissenschaftlichen Schreibens nennen 

� Im Text zitieren und ein Literaturverzeichnis anlegen 


keine 


Einführung - Ethik in der Forschung – Gesichtspunkte, Standpunkte 

Wissenschaftliche Paradigmen und Ansätze / Kritische Fragestellungen / Recherche / 

Kritische Beurteilung der Literatur / Dissemination der Information / Verfassen einer 

wissenschaftlichen Arbeit / Präsentationstechnik / Umgang mit Internet und Power Point 


Bässler, Roland (2007): Leitfaden für wissenschaftliches Arbeiten. Krems: IMC 

Fachhochschule Krems; Cluett, Elizabeth & Bluff, Rosalind (Hrsg.) (2003): 

Hebammenforschung. Bern: Hans Huber.; Kleibel, Veronika & Mayer, Hanna (2005): 

Literaturrecherche für Gesundheitsberufe. Wien: facultas. 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung, Gruppenarbeiten, Übungen, Selbststudium 




FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 387


Berufspraktikum II und praktikumsbegleitendes Seminar 


Sommersemester 1 SWS BPR2BOPR 12 


Die Studierenden erwerben weitere fachpraktische Kompetenzen in den prae- und 

postpartalen Bereichen sowie im Geburtenbereich. 

Jede Studierende soll bis zum Ende des Praktikums die vorgeschriebenen Tätigkeiten laut 

EU Richtlinie durchgeführt und nachweislich im eigens dafür vorgesehenen Katalog 

dokumentieren. 


Kenntnisse aus Berufspraktikum I 


Praepartaler Bereich: 

Beratung und Betreuung von Schwangeren 

Geburtenbereich: 

Betreuung der Gebärenden 

Verlaufsüberwachung 

Äußere und innere Untersuchung,CTG 

Assistenz bei und nach der Geburt 

Bonding und erstes Stillen 

Übernahme und Versorgung des Neugeborenen 

Betreuung der Frau/Familie nach der Geburt 

Dokumentation 

Postpartaler Bereich: 

Beratung und Betreuung der Wöchnerin/der Familie 

Beobachtung und Pflege des Neugeborenen 

Überwachung der Rückbildungsvorgänge, Stillhilfe 


keine 

Lehrmethoden 




Praktische Beurteilung erfolgt im Geburtenbereich der Praktikumsstelle – 

Leistungsüberprüfung 100 % - bei neg. Beurteilung tritt die an der IMC-FH Krems gültige 

Prüfungsordnung in Kraft. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 388

Fachpraktische Übungen II 


Sommersemester 1 SWS FPÜ2ILV 1 


Es sollen aufbauend auf FÜ I weitere fachpraktische Kompetenzen basierend auf den 

theoretischen Unterrichtsinhalten des 2. Semesters erworben werden. 


1. Semester 


Durch die Betreuung von mindestens 25 Schwangeren, 25 Wöchnerinnen und 25 

Neugeborenen werden anhand des Tätigkeitskatalogs und unter Anleitung der Lektorin 

die theoretischen Bildungsinhalte in die Praxis übertragen. 


Tätigkeitskatalog für die Einführung in den klinischen Bereich, den praepartalen und den 

postpartalen Bereich. 

Lehrmethoden 

Handlungsorientiertes und reflektiertes Lernen in der realen Praxissituation. 


Die Feststellung des Erfolges erfolgt durch die Benotung durch die Praxisstellen. 

Wertigkeiten: praepartaler Bereich: 40 %, postpartaler Bereich 60 %. Bei negativer 

Beurteilung tritt die Prüfungsordnung der IMC Fachhochschule Krems in Kraft. 

Methodik der Hebammenwissenschaft 


Sommersemester 1 SWS MHEB2ILV 1 


Die Studierende kann im quantitativen und qualitativen Bereich 

� die häufigsten Forschungsansätze nennen und beschreiben 

� die Stichprobengewinnung und die Methoden der Datensammlung erläutern 

� die Methoden der Datenanalyse verstehen 


Wissenschaftliche Grundlagen, 1. Semester 


Quantitative und qualitative Forschungsansätze 

Die Stichprobenbildugn 

Methoden der Datensammlung 

Methoden der Datenanalyse 

Entwurf eines Forschungsprojektes im Gesundheitsbereich 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 389


Beck-Bornholdt, H.-P. und Dubben, H.-H. (2005) Der Hund, der Eier legt, 6.Aufl., 

Reinbeck: rowohlt TB 

Bowers, D., House, A. und Owens, D. (2001) Understanding Clinical Papers, Chichester: 

Wiley 

Cluett, E.und Bluff, R. (Hrsg.) (2003) Hebammenforschung, Bern: Hans Huber 

Greenberg, R. et al (2005) Medical Epidemiology, 4.Aufl., New York: Lange Medical Books 

Holloway, I. und Wheeler, S. (1997) Qualitative Pflegeforschung, Wiesbaden: Ullstein 

Medical 

LoBiondo-Wood, G. und Haber, J. (1996) Pflegeforschung: Methoden, kritische 

Einschätzung und Anwendung, Berlin: Ullstein-Mosby 

Müllner, M. (2002) Erfolgreich wissenschaftlich Arbeiten in der Klinik, Wien: Springer 

Rees, C. (2003) Introduction to Research for Midwives, 2.Aufl., Edinburgh: Books for 

Midwives 

Lehrmethoden 

Präsentationen durch die Studierenden, Vortrag, Übungen, Gruppenarbeit, Selbststudium 


Präsentation 100% 



Sommersemester 1 SWS PT2WK 1 


Die Studierenden kennen die Grundlagen der Kommunikation und können diese sowohl 

im beruflichen als auch privaten Umfeld gezielt und effizient einsetzen. Sie lernen 

Beratungstools kennen und anwenden. Sie können ihre Standpunkte klar vertreten, 

verstehen, professionelles Feed back geben sowie präzise Fragestellungen anzuwenden. 

Sie optimieren ihre persönliche Gesprächskompetenz. 


keine 


� Kommunikation und Gesprächsführung 

� Kommunikationsregeln und Kommunikationsstörungen 

� Aktives Zuhören 

� Wahrnehmung – eigen- und Fremdbild 

� Diskussionsregeln 

� Feedbackregeln 

� Beratungsgespräche und Beratungstools 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Theorieinput, Selbstreflexion, Übungen, Kleingruppen- und Großgruppenarbeit 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 390


Fragebogen 

Physiologie der Geburt – prozessorientierte Hebammenbetreuung 



Sommersemester 5 SWS PGP2ILV 5 


Partiale 1 

Die Studierenden können mittels der erworbenen Kenntnisse den neuesten Trends 

entsprechende Geburtsvorbereitungsprogramme entwickeln und evaluieren. 

Partiale 2 

Die Studierenden erwerben theoretische und praktische Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten, um 

eine prozessorientierte Geburtsbegleitung durchführen zu können. 

Dazu gehören Kenntnisse über die Faktoren der Geburt, Geburtswege und Geburtsobjekt, 

Geburtsbeginn, Geburtsschmerz, Geburtsmechanismus, Geburtsphasen und 

Geburtsdauer. Dem entsprechend können die Studierenden die Schwangere zur Geburt 

aufnehmen und Vorbereitungen zur Geburt treffen, sie erlernen die Leitung und 

Überwachung der Eröffnungs-, Austreibungs- und Plazentaperiode. Sie erwerben 

Kenntnisse über psychosoziale Betreuung, der Förderung physiologischer Vorgänge und 

lernen Gebärhaltungen richtig einzusetzen – beginnend bei der aktivierenden Betreuung 

bis hin zur Wassergeburt. Sie lernen den Dammschutz kennen und dessen Anwendung 

zur Entwicklung des Kindes. Sie können alle Maßnehmen zur Durchführung einer 

Episiotomie und deren Wundversorgung anwenden. Weiters sind sie in der Lage, die 

Plazentagewinnung, die richtige Einschätzung des Blutverlustes und Inspektion der 

Geburtswege durchzuführen. Sie können die postpartale Überwachung von Mutter und 

Kind, aber auch Versorgung und Betreuung der beiden, ebenso wie Bonding und das 

erste Stillen prozessorientiert umsetzen. Die Studierenden werden die Grenzen der 

Eigenverantwortlichkeit kennenlernen und sind infolge dessen in der Lage, diese auch 

wahrzunehmen. Sie könne die notwendige Administration der Geburt und ihre 

Meldepflicht entsprechend durchführen. 


Grundlagen der Hebammenlehre, 1. Semester 


Partiale 1 

Grundlagen und Formen der Gebursvorbereitung 

Ziele der Geburtsvorbereitung 

Modelle der Geburtsvorbereitung – Kurskonzepte 

Methoden der Evaluierung 

Qualität der Geburtsvorbereitung 

Partiale 2 

Aufnahme zur Geburt 

Leitung einer Geburt incl. CTG 

Versorgung des Neugeborenen und der Mutter in der postpartalen Phase 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 391

Administrative Aufgaben und Meldepflicht prozessorientiert gemäß der aktuellen 

fachspezifischen Wissenschaft 


Hebammenkunde; Geist, Harder, Stigel 

Effektive Betreuung während der Schwangerschaft und Geburt; Enkin, Keirse 

Lehrmethoden 

Themenzentrierte Vorträge mit Diskussionsrunden, Teamarbeiten und Präsentationen, 

Praktische Gruppenübungen 


Partiale 1 

Mündliche Präsentation 50% 

Schriftliche Präsentation 50% 

Partiale 2 

Mündliche Abschlussprüfung 100%, Wiederholung der Prüfung laut FH-Prüfungsordnung 

Die Gesamtnote ergibt sich aus prozentueller Aufteilung der Stunden. 

Physiologie der Geburt und postpartalen Phase – medizinischer 

Bereich 


Sommersemester 3 SWS PGPPM2ILV 3 



geburtshilflichen Wissenschaft, um die physiologischen Verläufe in den Bereichen der 

Geburt und postpartalen Phase erkennen und einschätzen zu können. Die Studierenden 

können aufgrund dieser erworbenen Kenntnisse die erforderlichen Maßnahmen im 

Rahmen der berufsspezifischen Betreuung und Beratung ableiten und umsetzen. 


Kenntnisse aus dem ersten Semester 


Biophysische und Biochemische Prozesse im geburtshilflichen Bereich / Medikation 

während der Eröffnungsperiode und Geburt / Analgesie / Medikamente und Prophylaxen 

in der postpartalen Phase 

Untersuchungsmethoden während der Geburt / Kontrolle und Überwachung des 

Geburtsverlaufes / Kardiotokographie / 

Endokrine Umstellung während der postpartalen Phase / Involution und Wundheilung / 

Wiederaufnahme der Ovarialfunktion / Kontrazeption 


Schneider, Husslein, Schneider, Die Geburtshilfe, Springer 

Lehrmethoden 

Themenzentrierte Vorträge mit Diskussionsrunden und praxisrelevanten Fallbeispielen 

sowie Geburtssimulationen am Phantom. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 392


2 schriftliche Tests; 30% und 70% 

Physiologie der postpartalen Phase – prozessorientierte 

Hebammenbetreuung Partiale 1-3 


Sommersemester 5 SWS PPPH2ILV 5 


Die Studierenden erwerben theoretische und praktische Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten um 

eine Betreuung im Wochenbett durchführen zu können. 

Dazu gehören die prozessorientierte Pflege und Beobachtung des Neugeborenen und die 

Miteinbeziehung der Mutter bzw. Eltern, die Beobachtung und Kontrolle der 

Vitalparameter, Kenntnisse des Apgar-Schemas, die Anwendung sämtlicher Prophylaxen, 

die Beobachtung und Einschätzung der Wachstumsentwicklung und des 

Ernährungszustandes beim Neugeborenen und Säugling sowie die 

Beobachtung, Kontrollen und Maßnahmen bei physiologischen Veränderungen z.B. 

Ikterus neonatorum oder postpartale Gewichtsabnahme und pathologische 

Veränderungen mit entsprechende Maßnahmen, und nicht zuletzt die interdisziplinäre 

Zusammenarbeit. 

Weiters werden von den Studierenden die tägliche Wochenbettvisite der Hebamme, 

Beurteilung und Überwachung der Rückbildungsvorgänge, prozessorientierte Beratung, 

Betreuung und Pflege der Wöchnerin, Ernährungsberatung und Hygiene, psychosoziale 

Beratung und Betreuung, Bedeutung und Ziele der Rückbildungsgymnastik, Prophylaxen, 

Kreislauf- und Stoffwechselanregung, Atemschulung, Übungen für den Beckenboden und 

Bauchmuskulatur, Beckenbodenschonendes Verhalten, Kontraindikationen, 

Einschränkungen, Motivation der Wöchnerin zur Teilnahme an einer Rückbildungsgruppe 

und das Entlassungsgespräch erworben. 

Vermittelt wird grundlegendes, evidenzbasiertes Wissen zum Thema Stillen und 

Stillberatung. Die Studentinnen können das erworbene Wissen in die Praxis umsetzen 

und schwangere und stillende Mütter informieren, anleiten und in schwierigen 

Situationen unterstützen. 


Kenntnisse aus dem ersten Semester 


Partiale 1 : 

Prozessorientierte Pflege und Beobachtung des Neugeborenen bzw. Säuglings, 

Miteinbeziehung der Mutter bzw. Eltern / Beobachtung und Kontrolle der Vitalparameter / 

Apgar Schema / Anwendung von Prophylaxen / Beobachtung und Einschätzung der 

Wachstumsentwicklung und des Ernährungszustandes beim Neugeborenen und Säugling 

/ Beobachtung, Kontrollen und Maßnahmen bei physiologischen Veränderungen, z.B. 

Ikterus neonatorum oder postpartale Gewichtsabnahme / Pathologische Veränderungen 

und entsprechende Maßnahmen / Interdisziplinäre Zusammenarbeit 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 393

Partiale 2 : 

Die Anatomie der weiblichen Brust und die Physiologie des Stillens / Muttermilch / 

psychosoziale und ökologische bzw. ökonomische Faktoren des Stillens / Vorteile des 

Stillens / Beratung und Betreuung beim Stillen / Stillfördernde Praktiken / Beratung und 

Betreuung bei mütterlichen und kindlichen Stillhindernissen bzw. bei Kontraindikationen 

der Muttermilchernährung / Das Abstillen / Ernährung des Kindes mit 

Muttermilchersatzprodukten 

Partiale 3 : 

Die tägliche Wochenbettvisite durch die Hebamme / Beurteilung und Überwachung der 

Rückbildungsvorgänge / Prozessorientierte Beratung, Betreuung und Pflege der 

Wöchnerin / Ernährungsberatung und Hygiene / Psychosoziale Beratung und Betreuung / 

Bedeutung und Ziele der Rückbildungsgymnastik / Prophylaxen / Kreislauf- und 

Stoffwechselanregung / Atemschulung / Übungen für den Beckenboden und die 

Bauchmuskulatur / Beckenbodenschonendes Verhalten / Kontraindikationen / 

Einschränkungen / Motivation der Wöchnerin zur Teilnahme an einer Rückbildungsgruppe 

/ Entlassungsgespräch 


Wochenbettbetreuung in der Klinik und zu Hause; Ulrike Harder 

Kinderheilkunde für Hebammen; Stephan Illing 

Das Neugeborene in der Hebammenpraxis; Bund Deutscher Hebammen 

Nach der Geburt Wochenbett und Rückbildung; Angela Heller 

Stillberatung – Mutter und Kind professionell unterstützen; Marie Biancuzzo, Elsevier 

2005 

Stillen, Gumberger/Hormann, G+U 2008 

Lehrmethoden 

Themenzentrierte Vorträge mit Diskussionsrunden und praxisrelevante Übungen, 

Gruppenarbeiten und Präsentationen. 


Partiale I – mündliche Prüfung 50%, schriftlicher Test 50% 

Partiale II – schriftlicher Test 30%, mündliche Prüfung 70% 

Partiale III – mündliche Prüfung 100% 

Die Gesamtnote ergibt sich aus der prozentuellen Aufteilung der Stunden. 

Prozessorientierte Dokumentation der Hebammenbetreuung 


Sommersemester 1 SWS PROD2ILV 1 


Die Studierenden erwerben folgende Kompetenzen: 

� Kenntnisse über die rechtlichen Grundlagen der Dokumentation der 

Hebammenbetreuung und deren Bedeutung in der Praxisrealität 

� Anwendung der prozessorientierten Dokumentation, Dokumentation von 

Beratungs- und Betreuungsverläufen sowie Analyse und Auswertung der 

Ergebnisse 

� Kenntnisse über die wissenschaftliche Relevanz der professionell geführten 

Dokumentation 

� Umgang mit verschiedenen Dokumentatiossystemen 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 394

� Analyse und Dokumentation von Problemsituationen und Entwicklung von 

Lösungsstrategien 


Semester 


Einführung in Datenverarbeitung / Umgang mit Windows, Word und andere Formen der 

EDV Datenverarbeitung / Grundlagen und Formen der Dokumentation / EDV gestützte 

Dokumentation / Datenquellen / Rechtliche Grundlagen – Dokumentationspflicht / 

Durchführung der Dokumentation gemäß des Betreuungsprozesses / Handhabung der 

Dokumentation - Übungsbeispiele 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorträge und Diskussionsrunden, Einzelarbeiten – Recherche, Partnerarbeiten – 

Übungsbeispiele, Präsentationen der Arbeitsergebnisse - Diskussion 


Prüfung – mündlich (40%), schriftliches Konzept (60%) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 395


Berufspraktikum II und praktikumsbegleitendes Seminar 




Die Studierenden können alle definierten Tätigkeiten laut Praxiskatalog gemäß den 

Kompetenzerwerbsstufen eigenständig und sicher anwenden. Sie können gemäß den 

fachlich-wissenschaftlichen Grundlagen berufsspezifische Zusammenhänge erkennen und 

entsprechende Maßnahmen prozessorientiert in den Arbeitsabläufen anwenden. Sie sind 

in der Lage, im praktischen Handlungsfeld hebammenspezifische Problemstellungen 

prozessorientiert zu identifizieren, formulieren, analysieren und dem entsprechend zu 

lösen. Sie können ihr erworbenes theoretisches Wissen verwenden, um evidenzbasierte 

Lösungen abzuleiten und umzusetzen. Sie sind in der Lage, die Hebammentätigkeit nach 

Maßgabe der fachlich und wissenschaftlichen Erkenntnisse und Erfahrungen 

durchzuführen. 


Kenntnisse aus Berufspraktikum I und II. 



Beratung und Betreuung von Schwangeren 


Betreuung der Gebärenden 

Verlaufsüberwachung 

Äußere und innere Untersuchung,CTG 

Assistenz bei und nach der Geburt 

Bonding und erstes Stillen 

Übernahme und Versorgung des Neugeborenen 


Dokumentation 


Beratung und Betreuung der Wöchnerin/der Familie 

Beobachtung und Pflege des Neugeborenen 



keine 

Lehrmethoden 




Praktische Beurteilung erfolgt im Geburtenbereich der Praktikumsstelle – 

Leistungsüberprüfung 100 % - bei neg. Beurteilung tritt die an der IMC-FH Krems gültige 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 396

Pathologie in der Geburtshilfe – hebammenspezifischer Bereich 


Wintersemester 6 SWS PGHEB3ILV 6 


Prozessorientierte Beratung, Betreuung und Pflege :bei Störungen in der 

Frühschwangerschaft;bei schwangerschaftsspezifischen Erkrankungen oder Krankheit und 

Schwangerschaft ;bei bestehenden Abhängigkeiten;bei Z.n.Unfällen oder Operationen;bei 

Pathophysiologien im III. Trimenon;bei regelwidrigen oder Risikogeburten; 

Umgang mit Geburtshilflichen Instrumenten, speziellen Handgriffen / Manövern und 

Medikationen; hebammenspezifische Alternativen in Schwangerschaft, bei Geburt und 

nach Geburt 

Prozessorientierte Planung und Durchführung von prae und postoperativen Maßnahmen; 

Beratung und Betreuung bei Infektionserkrankungen und Impfungen und bei Rhesus- 

Inkompatibilität 


1. und 2. Semester 


Der/die Studierende kann: 

Störungen in der Schwangerschaft erkennen,deren Risiko einschätzen und geeignete 

Therapiemaßnahmen einleiten oder ausführen; bei Schwangerschaftsdiagnostik, 

Kinderwunsch, Schwangerschaftsabbruch, schwangerschaftsspezifischen und allgemeinen 

Erkrankungen, Abhängigkeiten, Z.n. Unfällen/Operationen (auch vor 

Schwangerschaft) beraten; bei allen Abweichungen eines normalen Verlaufs Frauen 

Hebammen spezifisch betreuen und behandeln; eine regelwidrige oder Risiko Geburt und 

Nachgeburt in Zusammenarbeit mit dem Arzt/Ärztin teilweise und im Notfall allein 

durchführen; geburtshilfliche Instrumente handhaben und spezielle Handgriffe oder 

Manöver durchführen; mit besonderen Medikationen und speziellen Altenativen von 

Seiten der Hebamme bei Problemen in der Schwangerschaft, unter und nach der Geburt 

umgehen. 

prae und postoperative Maßnahmen planen und durchführen; bei Infektionserkrankungen, 

Impfungen und bei Rhesus-Inkompatibilität beraten und betreuen. 


Hebammenkunde, Geist/Harder/Stiefel 

Die Geburtshilfe, Schneider/Husslein 

CTG-Training, Gauge/Henderson 

Erkrankungen in der Schwangerschaft, Gerhard Grospietsch 

Hebammenarbeit, Eva Cignacco 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorträge, Einzelreferate, Gruppenarbeiten, Fallbeispiele aus der Praxis, Diskussion, 

Demonstrationen am geburtshilflichen Phantom, praktische Übungen, schriftliche 

Arbeiten, themenbezogene Erfahrungsberichte von Frauen 


schriftliche Prüfung 

schriftlich/mündliches Einzelreferat, 

Wiederholungsprüfung in schriftlicher Form laut Studienprüfungsordnung 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 397

Pathologie in der Geburtshilfe – medizinischer Bereich Partiale 1 

und 2 


Wintersemester 9 SWS PGMED3ILV 9 


Partiale 1 


geburtshilflichen Wissenschaft, um pathologische Verläufe in der Praepartalen Phase, 

Geburtsphase und Postpartalen Phase frühzeitig und rechtzeitig erkennen und 

einschätzen zu können. 

Die Studierenden können aufgrund dieser erworbenen Kompetenzen die erforderlichen 

Maßnahmen im Rahmen der berufsspezifischen Betreuung und Beratung ableiten. Sie 

sind in der Lage, die Grenzen ihrer fachspezifischen Eigenverantwortlichkeit zu erkennen, 

und infolge dessen einen entsprechenden Transfer in die Berufspraxis herzustellen. 

Partiale 2 

Übersicht über Teilgebiete der Pharmakologie mit Indikationen, Wirkmechanismen, 

Nebenwirkungen sowie Kontraindikationen verschiedener Arzneimittelgruppen unter 

besonderer Berücksichtigung von Gravidität sowie Stillzeit. 

Die Studentinnen kennen neben häufig vorkommenden, ausgewählten Krankheitsbildern 

unter Berücksichtigung der Pathogenese, Symptomatik und Diagnostik die 

Therapiemöglichkeiten in Abhängigkeit von Indikation, Wirkmechanismus, 

Kontraindikationen sowie Wechselwirkungen. Die Studenten sollen neben der 

pharmakologischen Therapie unter Berücksichtigung der Pharmakokinetik und der 

Pharmakodynamik auch im Stande sein, das Krankheitsbild zu definieren. 




Partiale 1 

Pathologie in der Praepartalen Phase 

Störungen der Frühschwangerschaft, Regelwidrigkeiten der plazentaren Einheit, 

Fehlgeburt, Hypertensive Schwangerschaftserkrankungen, Prae-Eklampsie, Erkrankungen 

in der Schwangerschaft, Anämie, Infektionen, Diabetes, Fetomaternale 

Blutgruppenunverträglichkeit, Risikoschwangerschaft (Begriffsklärung, Risiken), 

Mehrlingsschwangerschaft, Intrauterine Wachstumsretardierung, Blutungen, Vorzeitiger 

FB-Sprung, Terminüberschreitung 

Gastvorträge: 

Thema: Nabelschnurvorfall 

Thema: Atemtherapie und Hilfestellungen bei verzögertem Geburtsverlauf 

Pathologischer Geburtsverlauf 

Pathologischer Geburtsverlauf – Management, Regelwidrigkeit des Geburtsmechanismus 

(Anomalien), Intrapartale Überwachung, Intrapartale Asphyxie, Mehrlinge, Vaginaloperative 

Entbindung, Sectio caesarea, Totgeburt, Epiduralanaesthesie, Prae- und 

postoperative Überwachung 

Pathologie in der Postpartalen Phase 

Involutionsstörungen, Harnverhaltung, Inkontinenz, Harnwegsinfekt, Hämorrhoiden, 

Endometritis, Thrombophlebitis, Mastitis, Wundheilungsstörungen, Postpartale 

Depression 

Partiale 2 

Infektionskrankheiten: Arzneimittel zur Prävention und Therapie 

Impfungen unter besonderer Berücksichtigung des österreichischen Impfplans 

Zytostatika und Immunsupressiva 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 398

Medikamente mit Wirkungen auf das vegetative Nervensystem 

arterielle Hypertonie: Die ABCD Regel der Blutdrucktherapie 

Varizen: Therapieoptionen 

Arzneigruppen zur Behandlung von Störung der Herzfunktion sowie Störungen im 

Coronargefäßsystem 

Prophylaxe und Therapie bei cardiovaskulären Risikofaktoren 

Therapie bei Asthma bronchiale sowie COPD, Nikotinersatz 

Allergie 

Vitamine, Mineralien und Spurenelemente 

Die moderne Infusionstherapie 

Diabetes mellitus: orale antidiabetische Therapie sowie Insulintherapie 

endokrines System 

Cortison: antientzündliche Wirkung 

Therapie und Pathogenese bei Schilddrüsenfunktionsstörungen 

Osteoporose 

moderne Schmerztherapie 

Lehrmethoden 

Partiale 1 


sowie Geburtssimulationen am Phantom 

Partiale 2 

Vortragsserie, Erarbeitung von neuen Inhalten in Form von Präsentationen, 

Fallpräsentationen aus dem Krankenhaus-Alltag, Arbeitsblätter und Filme 


Partiale 1 

Mündliche Prüfung 

Einzelreferat inkl. Hand-out 

Wiederholungsprüfungen laut Prüfungsordnung, jeweils in mündlicher Form. 

Partiale 2 

2 mündliche Prüfungen 

Wiederholungsmöglichkeit: mündliche Prüfung lt. Prüfungsordnung 


Berufsrecht 


Wintersemester 2 SWS BRE3ILV 2 


Die / der Studierende erwirbt folgende Kompetenzen: 

Sie können die aktuellen Berufspflichten und Berufsrechte und deren reflektive 

Integration in das berufliche Handeln beschreiben. Sie kennen die gesetzlich 

vorgeschriebenen Grenzen der Eigenverantwortlichkeit und können im Falle der 

Notwendigkeit die Zusammenarbeit mit Ärzten ableiten. 


Gesetzliche Grundlagen der Hebammenlehre, 1. Semester 


Sanitätsrecht / Berufsrecht – Hebammenrecht – EU Richtlinien – 

Personenstandsrechtliche Pflichten – Nebengesetze zum Hebammenrecht / 

Sozialversicherungsrecht / Arbeitsrecht – Arbeitnehmerschutz / Schutzbestimmungen für 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 399

Mutter und Kind / Rechtsgrundlagen für die Adoption, - Anonyme Geburt, – für den 

Schwangerschaftsabbruch, – für die Sterilisation / 

Fortpflanzungsmedizingesetz/Gentechnikgesetz 


Hausreither: Kodex Gesundheitsberufe Band 2 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag 

Referate 

Diskussion 


Schriftliche Prüfung 

Wiederholungsprüfung laut IMC Prüfungsordnung 

Forensik 


Wintersemester 1 SWS FOR3ILV 1 


Die Studierenden kennen die Aufgaben der Forensischen Medizin im geburtshilflichen 

Kontext. Sie können die erworbenen Kenntnisse in das berufliche Handeln innerhalb der 

realen Praxissituation ableiten und umsetzen. 


1. Semester 


Aufgaben der Forensischen Medizin / Gutachtertätigkeit / Rechtsmedizin – 

berufsrelevante Strafgesetze / Forensische Fallbesprechungen aus dem Bereich der 

Geburtshilfe / Aufklärungspflicht / Dokumentationspflicht / Schweigepflicht 


keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorträge und Diskussionsrunden 

Fallanalysen und Besprechungen mit Praxistransfer. 



Wiederholungsprüfung laut IMC Prüfungsordnung 

Kommunikation und interdisziplinäre Teamarbeit 


Wintersemester 1 SWS KOMTE3WK 1 


Die Studierenden sollen in ihren kommunikativen Fähigkeiten gestärkt und gefördert 

werden. Sie sollen die Grundprinzipien der Gruppenarbeit verstehen lernen und in ihrer 

täglichen Praxis zielführend und effizient einsetzen können. Sie machen sich mit 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 400

zeitgemässen Methoden der interdisziplinären Zusammenarbeit und Teamarbeit vertraut 

und können diese auch eigenständig anwenden. 

Stärkung der eigenen Ausdrucksfähigkeit sowie der kommunikativen Kompetenzen 

Stärkung der Fähigkeit eigenständig und sowohl interdisziplinär als auch transdisziplinär 

im Team zu arbeiten 


Kennenlernen von Methoden der Eigenreflexion 


Keine 


Vertiefung in Kommunikation und Gesprächsführung 

Themenzentrierte Gesprächsführung 

Team und Teamarbeit 

Grundprinzipien der Gruppendynamik - Positionen, Strukturen und Muster 

Beratung, Intervision, Reflecting Team und Supervision 

Interdisziplinarität 


Birkenbihl, V.F.: Kommunikationstraining. Zwischenmenschliche Beziehungen erfolgreich 

gestalten. 21. Auflage. Moderne Verlagsgesellschaft Landsberg am Lech. 1999 

Bentz v. A.: Teamarbeit. 2000 

Cohn, Ruth: Von der Psychoanalyse zur themenzentrierten Interaktion. Klett-Cotta. 1997 

Gellert, M.: Teamarbeit, Teamentwicklung, Teamberatung. Ein Praxisbuch für die Arbeit 

in und mit Teams. Limmer Verlag. 2007 

Watzlawick, Paul: Die erfundene Wirklichkeit. Piper. 1997 

Zapotoczky, Klaus: Medizinische Kommunikation auf dem Prüfstand. Trauner. 2002 

Lehrmethoden 

Theorieinput, Selbstreflexion, Übungen, Kleingruppen- und Großgruppenarbeit 


Fragebogen - Einzelfeedback schriftlich 



Wintersemester 1 SWS ENG3ILV 1 


Erreichung einer guten Sprachbeherrschung in den Bereichen allgemeine Kommunikation 

(sprachliche Bewältigung von berufsbezogenen Situationen) sowie der Fähigkeit, sich mit 

fachrelevanten Texten 

inhaltlich und sprachlich auseinandersetzen zu können. 


keine 


Eine ausgewogene Behandlung allgemeiner und berufsbezogener Texte, 

sowie eine Zusammenfassung bzw. Wiederholung grundlegender linguistischer 

Strukturen. 


The Pregnancy Book (Your complete guide to a healthy pregnancy, labour and giving 

birth, life with your new baby) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 401

Lehrmethoden 

Inhalte sowie sprachliche Strukturen werden erarbeitet durch 

a) Information des Vortragenden 

b) Einzelarbeit, Paar- und Gruppenarbeit der Studierenden 


schriftlicher Test 100% 

Evidence Based Midwifery 


Wintersemester 1 SWS EBM3ILV 1 


Die Studierende kann: 

� eine fachspezifische Frage zur wissenschaftlichen Literatursuche stellen 

� eine wissenschaftliche Literatursuche selbständig durchführen 

� hebammenrelevante Forschungsarbeiten selbständig beurteilen 


Lehrveranstaltung „Wissenschaftliche Grundlagen― 1. Semester 


Theoretische Grundlagen der Evidence-Based-Midwifery / Evidenz als Strategie für 

Veränderungen / Best Practice Modelle / Evidence Based Midwifery und die Cochrane 

Collaboration / Grenzen der Evidence Based MidwiferyGewalt an Frauen und Mädchen, 

Schwangeren 


Bowers, D., House, A. und Owens, D. (2001) Understanding Clinical Papers, Chichester: 

Wiley 

Cluett, E.und Bluff, R. (Hrsg.) (2003) Hebammenforschung, Bern: Hans Huber 

Greenberg, R. et al (2005) Medical Epidemiology, 4.Aufl., New York: Lange Medical Books 

Greenhalgh, T. (2003) Einführung in die Evidence-based Medicine: Kritische Beurteilung 

klinischer Studien als Basis einer rationalen Medizin. Bern: Hans Huber 

Kleibel, V. und Mayer, H. (2005) Literaturrecherche für Gesundheitsberufe. Wien: 

Facultas. 

LoBiondo-Wood, G. und Haber, J. (2005) Pflegeforschung: Methoden, kritische 

Einschätzung und Anwendung, 2.Aufl., München: Urban & Fischer 

Müllner, M. (2005) Erfolgreich wissenschaftlich Arbeiten in der Klinik, 2.Aufl., Wien: 

Springer 

Rees, C. (2003) Introduction to Research for Midwives, 2.Aufl., Edinburgh: Books for 

Midwives 

Sackett, D.L., Richardson, W.S., Rosenberg, W. (1999) Evidenzbasierte Medizin. 

München: Zuckschwerdt. 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag 

Selbständige Erarbeitung der Themen in Selbststudium und in Gruppenarbeit 


Schriftliche Arbeit zur Literatursuche 

Schriftliche Arbeit zur kritischen Bewertung eines Forschungsberichtes 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 402

Fachpraktische Übungen III 


Wintersemester 1 SWS FPÜ3ILV 1 


aufbauend auf die FÜ I und II erwerben die Studierenden weitere fachpraktische 

Kompetenzen auf der Grundlage der theoretischen Inhalte des 3. Semesters 


1. und 2. Semester, FÜ I und FÜ II 


Pathologie und Notfälle: Vermittlung der Fachpraktischen Übungen in der Kleingruppe / 

Stufenweise Planung und gezielte Umsetzung der Praktischen Übungen gemäß 

Praxiskatalog / Individuelle Anleitung durch Tutoren / Übungen und Simulationen am 

Geburtsphantom und Reanimationsphantom / Evaluierung und Reflexion 


Hebammenkunde, Geist/Harder/Stiefel 

Lehrmethoden 

Handlungsorientiertes und reflektives Lernen in der realen Praxissituation, Übungen am 

geburtshilflichen Phantom 


Fachpraktische Einzelüberprüfungen in der abschließenden LV anhand der Übungen 

Berufspraktikum III und praktikumsbegleitendes Seminar 




Die Studierenden erhalten einen Überblick über interkulturelle Kommunikation und 

wissen sowie können diese Verschiedenheiten in ihren Berufsalltag integrieren. Sie 

werden für das „Befremdende― im Umgang mit MigrantInnen sensibilisiert. Sie lernen 

Diversitäten zu erkennen, zu vermitteln, Lösungsansätze zu kreieren und in die Praxis 

umzusetzen. 


Vorkenntnisse aus den Lehrveranstaltungen der Psychosozialen Problemstellungen, 

Fachpraktische Übungen 


Klinische Bereiche: 20 Schwangere, 20 Wöchnerinnen und 20 Neugeborene, 15 

Gebärende und 5 Geburten lt. EU-Richtlinie / Teilnahme an Geburtsvorbereitungskursen / 

Zielsetzung und Planung der Praxissituation / Praktische Umsetzung der Ziele unter 

Anleitung des Praxisteams und der Tutorin gemäß Praxiskatalog / Evaluierung / Analyse 

von Problemen und Situationen / Assessment und Dokumentation / Berichte, 

Erfahrungsaustausch, Reflexion und weiterführende Planung im Rahmen des 

Begleitseminars 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 403


keine 

Lehrmethoden 




Praktische Beurteilung: 

Leistungsüberprüfung Geburtenbereich 

Leistungsüberprüfung Postpartaler Bereich 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 404


Neonatologie 


Sommersemester 3 SWS NEON4ILV 3 



Sie können den physiologischen Zustand und die Entwicklung des Neugeborenen und 

Säuglings differenzieren, um die Abgrenzung zu harmlosen Normvarianten und 

Auffälligkeiten zu erkennen. Sie erkennen die Alarmsymptome von typischen 

Fehlbildungen und Erkrankungen im Neugeborenen- und Säuglingsalter und können 

frühzeitige und rechtzeitige Maßnahmen zur Diagnostik und Therapie im Rahmen der 

fachlichen interdisziplinären Zusammenarbeit anwenden. Sie können die im Rahmen der 

Elternberatung entsprechenden fachspezifischen Informationen erklären und anwenden. 


Kenntnisse aus den Lehrveranstaltungen des 2. und 3. Semesters. 


Beobachtung, Symptome, Diagnostik und Therapie bei: 

Asphyxie / Dsytrophie / Geburtsverletzungen / Erkrankungen und Fehlbildungen / 

Neugeborenenikterus / Stoffwechselkrankheiten / Endokrine Erkrankungen / Das 

untergewichtige Neugeborene / Gestörte postnatale Adaption / Akute metabolische 

Entgleisung / Plötzlicher Kindstod / Reanimation des Neugeborenen / Transport / 

Ernährungs- und Flüssigkeitsbilanz / Überwachung der Körperfunktionen / Blutgasanalyse 

und Sauerstofftherapie / Künstliche Beatmung Pharmakotherapie des Neugeborenen / 

Eltern auf der Intensivstation / Interdisziplinäre Zusammenarbeit 


M.Obladen;R.F.Maier; Neugeborenenintensivmedizin; Springer Verl. 7. Aufl. 2006 

Lehrmethoden 


Übungen an der Reanimationspuppe 


Schriftlicher Prüfung 


Geburtshilfliche Notfälle – medizinischer Bereich Partiale 1 und 2 


Sommersemester 4 SWS GNMED4ILV 4 


Partiale 1 


geburtshilflichen Wissenschaft, 

um lebensbedrohliche Zustände bei Mutter und/oder Kind zu vermeiden, ggf. frühzeitig 

und rechtzeitig erkennen sowie einschätzen zu können. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 405

Sie können aufgrund dieser erworbenen Kenntnisse die erforderlichen Maßnahmen 

einleiten und durchführen, bzw. in interdisziplinärer 

Zusammenarbeit weiter ausüben. Sie sind demzufolge in der Lage, die Grenzen ihrer 

fachspezifischen Eigenverantwortlichkeit zu erkennen. 

Partiale 2 

Genereller Überblick über die Themenbereiche der Anästhesie, Analgesie und 

anästhesiologische Pharmakotherapie mit speziellem Augenmerk auf die Besonderheiten 

bei Schwangeren. 

Kennenlernen von Schwerpunkten der Pharmakotherapie in der Gravidität, insbesondere 

den Magen-Darm-Trakt und die Gerinnung betreffend. 

Die Studenten kennen die Vorgangsweisen und -möglichkeiten bei akuten 

geburtshilflichen Notfällen sowie Therapieansätze und deren Optionen. Sie sind im 

Stande die wichtigsten Medikamente und deren Indikationen sowie Kontraindikationen zu 

benennen und eine wirksame intra- und postpartale Schmerztherapie zu planen 




Partiale 1 : 

HELLP Syndrom / Eklampsie / Schulterdystokie / Fruchtwasserembolie / Blutungen und 

deren Ursachen, Hämorrhagischer Schock / Thromboembolische Komplikationen / 

Embolie / Notfallsectio / /Puerperalsepsis / Endotoxinschock / Maßnahmen bei 

Bewusstlosigkeit, Atem- und Kreislaufstillstand / Schock und Schockbekämpfung 

Diagnostik, Sofortmaßnahmen, Überwachung, Management und Therapie, Dokumentation 

der Maßnahmen. 

Partiale 2 : 

Medikamente in der Anästhesie / Medikamente mit Wirkung auf das Zentralnervensystem 

/ Medikamente mit Einfluss auf die Blutgerinnung ( Antikoagulantien, Heparine, 

Coumarinderivate, Antikoagulantien in Blutkonserven, Antithrombin, Fibrinolytika, 

Antifibrinolytika, Gerinnungsfaktoren Konzentrate ) / Medikamente zur 

Schockbekämpfung 


Schneider, Husslein, Scheider; Die Geburtshilfe; Springer Verl. 3. Aufl. 

Lehrmethoden 



Vortragsserie, aktives Erarbeiten der wesentlichen Lehrinhalte, anschauliche Fallbeispiel 

aus dem Klinikalltag. 


Schriftlicher Abschlusstest in jeder Partiale. Die Gesamtnote ergibt sich aus der 

prozentuellen Aufteilung der Stunden. 

WH-Prüfung laut Prüfungsordnung. 

Geburtshilfliche Notfälle - Hebammenbereich 


Sommersemester 2 SWS GNHEB4ILV 2 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 406

Sie erkennen die Grenzen ihrer eigenverantwortlichen Berufsausübung bei Verdacht oder 

Auftreten von für die Frau oder das Kind regelwidrigen und gefahrdrohenden Zuständen 

während der Schwangerschaft, der Geburt und des Wochenbetts und können nach 

ärztlicher Anordnung die erforderlichen Maßnahmen in Zusammenarbeit mit der/dem 

Ärztin/Arzt durchführen. Sie erkennen und evaluieren lebensbedrohliche Zustände bei 

Mutter und/oder dem Kind, indem sie entsprechende lebensrettende Maßnahmen 

einleiten und durchführen bzw. in interdisziplinärer Zusammenarbeit anwenden. Sie sind 

auch in der Lage, die Zusammensetzung, Wirkung, Nebenwirkungen bzw. Anwendung 

von speziellen Arzneimitteln bei geburtshilflichen Notfällen zu beschreiben, sowie die 

Arzneimittel den gesetzlichen Bestimmungen entsprechend anzuwenden. 




Prozessorientierte Betreuung und spezielle Maßnahmen bei geburtshilfichen Notfällen / 

Diagnostik, Sofortmaßnahmen, Überwachung, Management und Therapie, 

Dokumentation der Maßnahmen / Management der Schulterdystokie / Durchführung der 

Maßnahmen in Zusammenarbeit mit der/dem Ärztin/Arzt 


Schneider, Husslein, Scheider; Die Geburtshilfe; Springer Verl. 3. Aufl. 

Lehrmethoden 



Vortragsserie, aktives Erarbeiten der wesentlichen Lehrinhalte, anschauliche Fallbeispiel 

aus dem Klinikalltag 



Wiederholung bei negativer Beurteilung laut FH-Prüfungsordnung 

Psychosoziale Problemstellungen in der Geburtshilfe 

Partiale 1 bis 3 


Sommersemester 5 SWS PPG4ILV 5 


Partiale 1 

Die Studierenden erwerben Kenntnisse über: 

� Grundlagen des Entwicklungskonzepts der Bindungstheorie und deren 

Auswirkung auf die Zeit rund um Schwangerschaft und Geburt, Säuglings-, 

Kleinkind-, Jugend-, und Erwachsenenalter. 

� das Erkennen von Bindungsmustern und Bindungsstörungen 

� Möglichkeiten der Hilfestellung durch Prävention und Beratung von der 

Hebamme 

� die multiprofessionelle Zusammenarbeit mit anderen Berufsgruppen 

� psychotherapeutische Behandlungskonzepte 

Partiale 2 

Die Studierenden erwerben: 

� Kenntnisse über die unterschiedlichen Verlustsituationen 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 407

� Kenntnisse über die unterschiedlichen Hilfs- und 

Betreuungsangebote/konzepte im Krankenhaussetting 

� Kenntnisse über die Wichtigkeit von interdisziplinären Teams, aber auch über 

bestehende Probleme in multiprofessionellen Teams, die sich in der 

gemeinsamen Betreuung "verwaister Eltern" ergeben können. 

� Kenntnisse über die Möglichkeiten und Grenzen der hebammenzentrierten 

Trauer- und Sterbebegleitung in Krankenhäusern und in der freien Praxis. 

Partiale 3 

Die Studierende kann 

� den an sie gerichteten Bildungsauftrag anhand praktischer Beispiele skizzieren 

� die besondere Lernsituation ihrer Zielgruppe erfassen und daraus die geeignete 

Vermittlungsform ableiten 

� unterschiedliche Lehr-, Lern- und Sozialformen der Bildungsarbeit differenzieren 

� unter Berücksichtigung der Zielgruppe den Lernprozess planen und gestalten 

� fördernde und hemmende bzw. erschwerende Faktoren zur Umsetzung des 

Lernprozesses 

� analysieren und entsprechende Maßnahmen ableiten 

� Lehrsequenzen zielorientiert auswerten und reflektieren 




Partiale 1 

Einführung in die Grundlagen der Bindungstheorie 

Entwicklungskonzept der Bindungstheorie 

Bindungsstörungen 

Bindung und Trauma 

Risikoschwangerschaft und Trauma 

Posttraumatisches Belastungssyndrom 

Psychosoziale Belastungen und Behandlungskonzepte (vorzeitige Wehentätigkeit, 

Hyperemesis, intrauterine Mangelentwicklung, unerklärliche Blutungen, Bluthochdruck, 

Ängste, Depression,…) 

Konzepte der Prävention und Beratung für die Hebamme (z.B.: SAFE ® - Modell) 

Theoretische Einführung zum Thema Psychosen 

Partiale 2 

� Einführung in das Thema 

� Definition, Unterscheidung, Abgrenzung von 

Fehlgeburt/Totgeburt/Neugeborenentod/plötzlicher Kindstod. Gründe dafür, 

sowie das unterschiedliche Erleben dieser Situationen durch die Mutter und 

den Vater, sowie das dazugehörige soziale System (Geschwister, Großeltern, 

Freunde) 

� Demographische Betrachtungsweise von Fehl-, Totgeburten und 

Säuglingssterblichkeit unter Berücksichtigung des Fertilitätsalters der Frauen 

und die daraus resultierenden sozialpolitischen- und medizinischen 

Auswirkungen 

� Besondere Verlustsituationen wie z.B. Infertilität, prognostiziere bzw. 

unerwartet auftretende Fehlbildungen des Kindes, Schwangerschaftsabbruch 

aus sozialer und medizinischer Indikationsstellung, Adoption, anonyme Geburt, 

Kindesverlust alleinstehender Frauen, Tod eines Kindes bei 

Mehrlingsschwangerschaften 

� Betreuer "verwaister Eltern" im Krankenhaussetting (Hebammen, Ärzte, 

Therapeuten, Seelsorger) => Eignung der Ausbildungsverordnungen in Bezug 

auf Trauer- und Sterbebegleitung, Fort- und Weiterbildung, 

Entlastungsangebote durch die Arbeitgeber 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 408

� Begleitung und Betreuung Trauernder im Krankenhaus (Betreuungskontinuum, 

spez. Trauerbegleitungsteams, Kommunikation, psychosoziale Betreuungs- 

und Hilfsnetze) 

� Begleitung und Betreuung "verwaister Eltern" durch die Hebamme während 

der vor/während/nach der Geburt 

� Externe Hilfs- und Betreuungsangebote, Selbsthilfegruppen 

Partiale 3 

� Einführung - Übersicht der LV - Aufgabenplanung 

Pädagogischer Auftrag der Hebamme 

� Gestaltung von zielgruppenorientierten Veranstaltungen 

� Lernsituation - Rahmenbedingungen und Bedingungsfeld 

� Lehr- und Lernformen 

� Sozialformen 

� Planungsschritte und Gestaltung des Lernprozesses 

� Individuelle Beratung und Anleitung 

� Aufarbeitung eines Themas in einer Lernsequenz: 

o Hebammen unterrichten in Kindergärten, Grundstufe und Mittleren Stufen 

� Gesundheitsbildung zu den Themen Sexualität, Schwangerschaft, 

Geburt und Elternschaft 


Partiale 1 

Brisch/Hellbrügge, Die Anfänge der Eltern-Kind-Bindung, Klett-Cotta 

Brisch/Helbrügge, Der Säugling – Bindung, Neurobiologie und Gene, Klett-Cotta 

Partiale 2 

Cignacco, E. (Hrsg.) (2006) Hebammenarbeit - Assesssment, Diagnosen und 

Interventionen bei patho - (physiologischen) und psychosozialen Phänomenen; Bern; 

Hans Huber Verlag (in Auszügen) 

Lothrop, H. (2005) Gute Hoffnung - jähes Ende, München; Kösel Verlag (in Auszügen) 

Lehrmethoden 

Partiale 1 

Vortrag 

Partnerarbeiten und –übungen 

Rollenspiele 

Ressourcenorientierte Stabilisierungsübungen 

Imaginationen 

Erarbeitung und Präsentation eines Kurzreferates 

Partiale 2 

Vorträge unter Einbeziehung von PP-Präsentationen, Gruppenarbeiten (Fallstudien, 

Recherche), Diskussionsrunden, Einbeziehung von Auditivmedien, Präsentationen von 

Ergebnissen durch die Studierenden, Feeback- und Reflexionsrunden. 

Partiale 3 

Themenzentrierte Vorträge mit Diskussionsrunden, Einzelarbeiten, Teamarbeiten und 

Präsentationen 


Partiale 1 

Referat 

Partiale 2 

Schriftliche Seminararbeit, verfasst nach gültigen Kriterien für wissenschaftliches 

Arbeiten 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 409

Partiale 3 

Präsentation - mündlich und schriftlich 



Persönlichkeitstraining II 


Sommersemester 1 SWS PT4WK 1 

Wissenschaftstheoretische Grundlagen in Bezug auf: 

Konflikte / Konfliktentstehung / Konfliktverläufe / Konfliktmanagement / 

Konfliktprophylaxe 

Einführung in Konflikt- und Beschwerdemanagement / Problemlösungsmethoden und - 

strategien / Deeskalationsmanagement 

Lösungs- und Kompetenzorientiertes Handeln / Aneignung und Erwerb von persönlichen / 

individuellen Strategien 




Sensibilisierung für und Stärkung der eigenen Konfliktfähigkeit 

Erkennen der eigenen und der fremden Konfliktbewältigungsstrategien und -muster 

Reflexion, Training und Verbesserung des eigenen Kommunikationsverhaltens 

Anwendung theoretischer Modelle im Alltag / Erhöhung der eigenen Ausdrucksfähigkeit 

Professionelles Gesprächsverhalten unter Berücksichtigung des speziellen 

Anforderungsprofils 

Erwerb von Strategien in Bezug auf Gesprächsführung, Konflikt- und 

Beschwerdemanagement 


Keine 

Lehrmethoden 

Theoretischer Input / Vortrag und Diskussion unter Verwendung bestimmter Medien / 

Kleingruppen und Einzelarbeit / Praxisbezogene Anwendung und Übungen 


Einzelfeedback schriftlich 

Fachenglisch II 


Sommersemester 1 SWS ENG4ILV 1 


Erreichung sehr guter Sprachbeherrschung in den Bereichen allgemeine 

und berufsbezogene Kommunikation. 

Die Studierenden sind in der Lage sich über die unten angegeben Themen in englischer 

Sprache angemessen auszudrücken. 


2. Semster, FE I 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 410


Folgende Themen aus den fachbezogenen Bereichen von Midwifery werden 

u.a.angesprochen: Conception, How the Baby Develops, Antenatal Care and Antenatal 

Classes, When the Pregnancy Goes Wrong, A Difficult Birth etc. 

Fortsetzung der Behandlung fachbezogener Themen, zusätzlich 

werden linguistische Strukturen des Englischen behandelt: z.B. Gerund. 




Lehrmethoden 

1. Instruktionen durch den Vortragenden 

2. Einzelarbeit, Paar- und Gruppenarbeit der Studierenden 

Leitlinien: Motivation zur Erlernung von Fremdsprachen kann immer nur Selbstmotivation 

sein. Individuelles Leistungsstreben und Kooperation im Team sind keine 

Gegensätze, Studierende und Vortragender sind gemeinsam für den Lernerfolg 

verantwortlich. 


1 schriftlicher Test 

1 Referat in Englisch 


Prozessorientierung in der Hebammenwissenschaft 


Sommersemester 1 SWS PROH4ILV 1 


Die Studierenden erwerben: 

� Vertiefende Kenntnisse zu den verschiedenen wissenschaftlichen Zugängen 

(basierend auf dem Wissensstand aus Semester 1 - 3) 

� Praktische Erfahrungen in der Umsetzung eines Forschungsprozesses anhand 

eines selbst durchzuführenden Forschungsprojektes 

� Kompetenzen in der schriftlichen Ausarbeitung des Forschungsprozesses nach 

wissenschaftlichen Kriterien 


Semester 1 bis 3 


Wiederholung von Arten und Möglichkeiten in der "qualitativen - und quantitativen 

Forschungsansätzen" (Fragebogen, Interview, Beobachtung) 

Auswählen eines geeigneten Forschungsprojektes (Forschungsfrage, Wahl des 

Forschungsfeldes und des adäquaten Forschungsansatzes, sowie des geeigneten 

Forschungsinstrumentes, erstellen des ausgewählten Instrumentes) 

Basis dafür stellen die ausgearbeiteten Konzepte für "Geburtsvorbereitung" dar. 

Durchlaufen des Forschungsprozesses (Kontaktaufnahme, Probeinterview, 

Interviewphase, Ausarbeitung der Interviews, Bearbeitung der Forschungsfrage anhand 

der Interviewergebnisse unter Einbeziehung wissenschaftlicher Literatur) 

Schriftliche Aufarbeitung des Forschungsprozesses nach gültigen Kriterien für 

wissenschaftliches Arbeiten. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 411


Cluett, Elisabeth, R. (2000) "Hebammenforschung"; Bern, Verlag Hans Huber (in 

Auszügen) 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorträge unter Einbeziehung von Power Point Präsentationen, Gruppenarbeiten, Arbeiten 

im Forschungsfeld, Besprechungen mittels "Blended Learning" zur Reflexion und 

Bearbeitung eventuell auftauchender Fragen oder Problemen gemeinsam mit der 

Vortragenden. Präsentationen der einzelnen Forschungsprojekte. Abschließend 

Feedbackrunde mit der Möglichkeit zu Reflexion und Erfahrungsaustausch 


Schriftliche Seminararbeit, verfasst nach gültigen Kriterien des wissenschaftlichen 

Arbeitens. 

Angewandte Wissenschaft im Fachbereich 


Sommersemester 1 SWS AWISS4ILV 1 



Sie beherrschen jene Fähigkeiten, die erforderlich sind, um evidenzbasiertes Handeln in 

die Betreuungsprozesse zu integrieren. Sie sind in der Lage, forschungsrelevante 

Fragestellungen auszuwählen und anzuwenden sowie die erhobenen Daten für die 

Beantwortung der Fragestellung en aufzubereiten. Sie anerkennen die Notwendigkeit der 

Integration der Genderthematik in berufsspezifische Arbeitsabläufe. Sie können anhand 

von Fallstudien prozessorientierte Betreuungsmodelle praxisgerecht unter 

Berücksichtigung der Hebammenbetreuung innerhalb und außerhalb des klinischen 

Bereiches ableiten und nach Maßgabe der fachlichen und wissenschaftlichen Erkenntnisse 

und Erfahrungen anwenden. Sie können die erworbenen wissenschaftlichen Erkenntnisse 

reflektiv im Rahmen der praktischen Tätigkeit einflechten, um die Effektivität ihres 

fachlichen Handelns im Sinne der Sicherheit von Mutter und Kind zu gewährleisen. 


Kenntnisse aus dem 1. und 2. Semester. 


Evidenzbasierte Praxis versus Traditionelle Praxis der Hebammentätigkeit / Modelle der 

angewandten Wissenschaft im klinischen und außerklinischen Bereich der 

Hebammentätigkeit 


Enkin et al, A Guide to Effective Care in Pregnancy and Childbirth 

Robinson, Ann, Midwives, Research and Childbirth, Chapmann & Hall 

Silverton, The Art and Science of Midwifery, Prentice Hall 

Marland, The Art of Midwifery, Routledge 

Buckley, Delivering Quality in Midwifery, Balliere Tindall 

Proctor, Renfrew, Linking Research and Practice in Midwifery – a Guide to Evidence- 

Based Practice, Balliere Tindall 

Hunt, Symonds, The Social Meaning of Midwifery, Macmillan 

Aktuelle Fachzeitschriften und fachspezifische Datenbanken 

sowie Unterlagen der Lektoren 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 412

Lehrmethoden 

Vorträge unter Einbeziehung von Power Point Präsentationen, Gruppenarbeiten, Arbeiten 

im Forschungsfeld 


Lehrveranstaltung mit immanentem Prüfungscharakter. Wiederholungsmöglichkeit 

entsprechend der Prüfungsordnung der IMC Fachhochschule Krems. 

Berufspraktikum IV und praktikumsbegleitendes Seminar 


Sommersemester 1 SWS BPR4BOPR 12 


Die Studierenden erwerben weitere fachpraktische Kompetenzen in den prae- und 

postpartalen Bereichen sowie im Geburtenbereich. Jede Studierende soll bis zum Ende 

des Praktikums die vorgeschriebenen Tätigkeiten laut EU Richtlinie durchgeführt und 

nachweislich im eigens dafür vorgesehenen Katalog dokumentieren. 


Kenntnisse aus Berufspraktikum I bis III 



Beratung und Betreuung von mindestens 25 Schwangeren, Dokumentation, Teilnahme an 

Geburtsvorbereitungskursen lt. Praxiskatalog 


Betreuung von mindestens 20 Gebärenden, Verlaufsüberwachung 

Äußere und innere Untersuchung, CTG 

Selbständige Durchführung von 10 Geburten 

Bonding und erstes Stillen, Übernahme und Versorgung des Neugeborenen 


Dokumentation 


Beratung und Betreuung der Wöchnerin/der Familie (mindestens 25) 

Beobachtung und Pflege von mindestens 25 Neugeborenen 


Begleitung und Betreuung von Wöchnerinnen im Bereich der Neonatologie 

Dokumentation 

Verfassen einer Seminararbeit mit einem Fallbeispiel 


keine 

Lehrmethoden 




Praktische Beurteilung: 

Leistungsüberprüfung Präpartaler Bereich 10% 

Leistungsüberprüfung Geburtenbereich 60% 

Leistungsüberprüfung Postpartaler Bereich 30% 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 413

5 th Semester (Fall) 

Pädiatrie 


Wintersemester 1 SWS 1 



Sie können den physiologischen Zustand und die Entwicklung des Neugeborenen und 

Säuglings differenzieren, um die Abgrenzung zu harmlosen Normvarianten und 

Auffälligkeiten zu erkennen. Sie erkennen die Alarmsymptome von typischen 

Fehlbildungen und Erkrankungen im Neugeborenen- und Säuglingsalter und können 

frühzeitige und rechtzeitige Maßnahmen zur Diagnostik und Therapie im Rahmen der 

fachlichen interdisziplinären Zusammenarbeit anwenden. Sie können die im Rahmen der 

Elternberatung entsprechenden fachspezifischen Informationen erklären und anwenden. 




Genetische und chromosomale Erkrankungen / Infektionen und Infektionskrankheiten / 

Krankheitsbilder, Untersuchungen, Therapiegrundsätze, Erregertypen, Meldepflicht / 

Soziale und ethische Probleme bei behinderten und kranken Kindern / Elternberatung / 

Interdisziplinäre Zusammenarbeit 


� Illing, Kinderheilkunde für Hebammen, Hippokrates 

� Flehming, Normale Entwicklung des Säuglings und ihre Abweichungen, Thieme 

� Niessen, Pädiatrie, Chapmann & Hall 

� Künzel, Wulf, Frühgeburt, U&S 

� Amato, Manual der Neonatologie, Thieme 

� Dick, Stopfkuchen, Brockerhoff, Primäre Neugeborenenreanimation, Springer 


Lehrmethoden 


Übungen an der Reanimationspuppe 


Schriftlicher Prüfung 


Fertilität und Reproduktion Partiale 1 und 2 





FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 414

Sie können die Bedeutung der Gesundheitsförderung für die Frau und deren Umfeld 

interpretieren. Sie sind in der Lage, das erworbene Wissen hinsichtlich der Umsetzung 

von Konzepte der primären und sekundären Prävention bei Jugendlichen, Frauen und 

deren Familie anzuwenden. Sie können Methoden zur Förderung der Frauengesundheit 

in ihren berufsspezifischen Bereich integrieren und entsprechende Maßnahmen 

entwickeln. Sie sind in der Lage, die Frau und deren Familie kompetent in Bezug auf 

Sexualität, Empfängnisregelung und Familienplanung zu informieren und S sie können 

beschreiben, welche Inhalte im Rahmen der Beratung und Betreuung von Jugendlichen, 

Frauen und deren Partner zur Regelung der Fertilität bzw. ausführliche Informationen für 

eine persönliche Entscheidung erforderlich sind. Sie können Hilfestellungen in 

psychosozialen Problemsituationen anwenden. 


Kenntnisse aus den Lehrveranstaltungen des 1.-4. Semesters. 


Partiale 1 : 

Physiologie und Pathologie der menschlichen Fortpflanzung: Geschlechtsentwicklung / Hormonelle 

Voraussetzungen – Lebensabschnitte und hormonelle Situation im Leben einer Frau 

Die gynäkologische Untersuchung: Anamnese / Klinischer Status / gynäkologische 

Routineuntersuchung / spezielle gyn. Untersuchungen / gynäkologische Vorsorgeuntersuchungen 

und deren Bedeutung / Spezifische Schmerzen / Lageveränderungen des weiblichen Genitale / 

Spezielle therapeutische Eingriffe / Gynäkologische Erkrankungen / Auswirkungen auf die 

psychische Situation der Frau 

Partiale 2 : 

Sexualerziehung / Familienplanung und Antikonzeption / Familienplanung und Konzeption / 

Schwangerschaftsabbruch / IVF / Psychosoziale Aspekte des Kinderwunsches / Hormontherapie 


Mahmood Manavi, Gynäkologie&Geburtshilfe, Methodik bei Untersuchungen und 

Eingriffen, Facultas 2006, 256S.,ISBN, 978-3-85076-674-6, EUR 34,90 

Lehrbuch der Frauenheilkunde, Band I, Gynäkologie, Maudrich 2001,245S.,ISBN, 978-3- 

85175-750-7, EUR 19,90 

'Frauengesundheit' Anita Riecher-Rössler und Johannes Bitzer, Urban & Fischer, 2005, ISBN 9 

783437 22 1163 

Lehrmethoden 

Themenzentrierte Vorträge mit Abbildungs- und Videodarstellungen, praxisrelevante 

Falldarstellungen sowie Diskussionsrunden zur Vertiefung des Lehrinhaltes 




Frauen- und Familiengesundheit Partiale 1 und 2 







FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 415




entwickeln. Sie sind in der Lage, die Frau und deren Familie kompetent in Bezug auf 

Sexualität, Empfängnisregelung und Familienplanung zu informieren und S sie können 

beschreiben, welche Inhalte im Rahmen der Beratung und Betreuung von Jugendlichen, 

Frauen und deren Partner zur Regelung der Fertilität bzw. ausführliche Informationen für 

eine persönliche Entscheidung erforderlich sind. Sie können Hilfestellungen in 

psychosozialen Problemsituationen anwenden. 




Partiale 1: 

Frauen- und Familiengesundheit sowie frauenspezifische Programme als integraler Teil der 

Hebammenarbeit / Spezielle Modelle der Gesundheitsförderung / Verhaltensänderung – Grundlagen 

für die Praxis / Fachspezifische Maßnahmen und Betreuungsangebote für Gesundheitsförderung 

während Schwangerschaft / Geburt / Wochenbett 

Partiale 1: 

Frauen- und Familiengesundheit sowie frauenspezifische Programme als integraler Teil der 

Hebammenarbeit / Spezielle Modelle der Gesundheitsförderung / Verhaltensänderung – Grundlagen 

für die Praxis / Fachspezifische Maßnahmen und Betreuungsangebote für Gesundheitsförderung 

während Schwangerschaft / Geburt / Wochenbett 


Frauengesundheit' Anita Riecher-Rössler und Johannes Bitzer, Urban & Fischer, 2005, 

ISBN 9 783437 22 1163 

Essen und Trinken - Kinderwunsch, Schwangerschaft und Stillzeit; Ingeborg Hanreich, 

Hanreich Verlag 2006, ISBN 978-3-901518-07-2Ernährungsberatung in Schwangerschaft 

und Stillzeit; Ute Körner, Ruth Rösch, Edition Hebamme, Hippokrates Verlag, 2008, ISBN 

978-3-8304-5400-7 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorträge und Diskussionen, Einzelarbeiten und Partnerarbeiten, praktische Übungen 


Positionspapier und Projekt-Präsentation Gewichtung 40% 

Mündliche Prüfung Gewichtung 40% 

Schriftliche Prüfung Gewichtung 20% 


Frauen und Soziales 




Die Studierenden lernen die Profession Sozialarbeit / Soziale Arbeit, die soziale 

Landschaft Österreichs / NÖ`s, soziale Einrichtungen und vor allem die Handlungsfelder 

Kind, Jugend, Familie, Gesundheit und Gender kennen und können diese Erkenntnisse an 

ihr Klientel weitergeben. Sie erkunden Theorien sozialer Arbeit und können diese in ihren 

Wirkungskreis einbringen. Die Studierenden besuchen soziale Einrichtungen vor Ort und 

beschäftigen sich mit spezifischen Fragestellungen der Sozialen Arbeit. Sie wissen über 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 416

den Bezug von Sozialleistungen sowie anderen Unterstützungsleistungen Bescheid und 

nehmen eine Vermittlungsposition ein. 




Einführung in die Aufgaben und Bereiche der Sozialarbeit / Gesetzliche Grundlagen der 

Sozialhilfe / Soziale Arbeit mit Frauen und Mädchen / Gewalt in der Familie / Spezielle 

Sozial-Frauenprogramme und Netzwerke 


Bundeskanzleramt: Information für alle Berufsgruppen, Wien, 1994 

Fröschl, E., Löw, S.: Über Liebe, Macht und Gewalt. Jugend & Volk, 1995 

Perttu, S., Kaselitz, V.: Gewalt an Frauen in der Schwangerschaft, Daphne, AÖF, 2005 

Thiersch, H.: Handbuch der Sozialarbeit / Sozialpädagogik, München, 2005 

Wendt, W.R.: Geschichte der Sozialen Arbeit, Stuttgart, 1995 

Lehrmethoden 

Theorieinput, Fallbeispiele, GG- und KG-Arbeit, Literaturrecherche, Exkursionen 


Mündliche Prüfung 100% 


Alternative Betreuungsmethoden 










entwickeln. 




Traditionelles Hebammenwissen im Kontext mit traditionellen Heilmethoden / Pflanzen 

und Kräuter – Anwendungsmöglichkeiten im Bereich der Schwangerschaft, Geburt und 

Wochenbett / Grundlegende Einführung in die Wirkungsmechanismen von Akupunktur 

und Homöopathie in der Geburtshilfe / Anwendung von Entspannungstechniken und 

Atemtechniken 


Dittmar, Loch, Wiesenauer, Naturheilverfahren in der Frauenheilkunde und Geburtshilfe, 

Hippokrates 

sowie Unterlagen der LektorInnen 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 417

Lehrmethoden 

Vorträge und Diskussionen, Einzelarbeiten und Partnerarbeiten, praktische Übungen 


Mündliche oder schriftliche Prüfung 100% 


Transkulturelle Aspekte in der Hebammenbetreuung 





Die Studierenden erhalten einen Überblick über interkulturelle Kommunikation und 

wissen sowie können diese Verschiedenheiten in ihren Berufsalltag integrieren. Sie 

werden für das „Befremdende― im Umgang mit MigrantInnen sensibilisiert. Sie lernen 

Diversitäten zu erkennen, zu vermitteln, Lösungsansätze zu kreieren und in die Praxis 

umzusetzen. 


Vorkenntnisse aus den Lehrveranstaltungen der Psychosozialen Problemstellungen, 

Fachpraktische Übungen. 


Partiale 1 

Kulturhistorische Analysen Faktoren „ Kultur und Fremdheit „ im Rahmen der Beratung und 

Betreuung / Soziokulturelle Dimensionen von Gesundheit Krankheit / Bedeutung der non-verbalen 

Kommunikation / Beratung und Betreuung von Migranten und deren Familie mit professionellen 

Dolmetscher 

Partiale 2 

Spezifische Themen: Schmerz / Schwangerschaft, Geburt, Wochenbett, Stillen, Verhütung / Tod, 

Trauer / Traumatisierung nach Folter- und Kriegserfahrungen / Genitale Verstümmelung / 

Auswirkung von Migrationserfahrungen 


David, M., Borde, Th., Netenich (Hg): Migration- Frauen – Gesundheit. Perspektiven im 

eruopäischen Kontext. Mabuseverlag, F.a.M., 2000 

Domenig, D.(Hg): Professionelle Transkulturelle Pflege. Hans Huber Verlag, Bern, 2001 

Herriger, H.J.: Interkulturelle Kommunikation. A Francke UTB, 2007 

Lebert, G.: Vortrag zur Tagung „Migration und Gesundheit. Eine österreichische 

Bestandsaufnahme.― FGS & BMfGF, Wien, 10.2004 

Lehrmethoden 

Theorieinput, Fallbeispiele, Literaturrecherche, Kleingruppenarbeit, Rollenspiele 


Partiale 1 – 2 Lernberichte 

Prozentaufteilung der Partiale erfolgt im Syllabus des Studienganges – abschließender 

Prüfungscharakter bei neg. Beurteilung tritt die an der IMC-FH Krems gültige 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 418

Fachenglisch III 




Erreichung sehr guter Sprachbeherrschung in den Bereichen allgemeine 

und berufsbezogene Kommunikation. 

Die Studierenden sind in der Lage sich über die unten angegeben Themen in englischer 

Sprache angemessen auszudrücken. 




Folgende Themen aus den fachbezogenen Bereichen von Midwifery werden 

u.a.angesprochen: Conception, How the Baby Develops, Antenatal Care and Antenatal 

Classes, When the Pregnancy Goes Wrong, A Difficult Birth etc. 

Fortsetzung der Behandlung fachbezogener Themen, zusätzlich 

werden linguistische Strukturen des Englischen behandelt: z.B. Gerund. 




Lehrmethoden 









1 Referat in Englisch 


Gender Studies 




Am Ende der Lehrveranstaltung sind die Studierenden befähigt, Theorien und Methoden 

der Frauen- und Geschlechterforschung wiederzugeben und diese im geburtshilfichen 

Kontext reflektiert und kritisch zu diskutieren. Der inhaltliche Schwerpunkt wird auf das 

Thema "Vater bzw. Eltern sein und werden in der gegenwärtigen Gesellschaft" gerichtet 

sein. Die Studierenden werden die neue Rolle des Vaters rund um die Geburt anhand von 

bereitgestellten Texten, Medienbeispielen sowie eigener, kleiner Forschungsprojekte, 

reflektieren. Auf diese Weise wird es ihnen ermöglicht, sich kritisch mit 

geschlechtsspezifischen Zuschreibungen und mit differenzierten 

Unterstützungsangeboten für diesen Lebensübergang auseinanderzusetzen. Zusätzlich 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 419

transferieren die Studierenden ihre bereits erworbenen Kompetenzen im Bereich des 

wissenschaftlichen Arbeitens entsprechend dem an der IMC-Fachhochschule 

gebräuchlichen Leitfaden. 


Vorkenntnisse aus den Lehrveranstaltungen der wissenschaftlichen Qualifikationen aus 

den Semestern 1-4. 


Zuschreibung, Aneignung und Reproduktion eines Geschlechts / Repräsentation von „ Geschlecht „ 

/ Feministische Gesellschaftsanalyse / Interaktion und Geschlecht / Interaktionsordnung / 

Arrangement der Geschlechter / Die institutionelle Reflexivität von Geschlecht / Relevanz von 

Geschlecht / Ritualisierungen / Feministische Forschung 


Schäfer, E./Abou-Dakn, M./Wöckel, A. (Hrsg.) (2008) Vater werden ist nicht schwer? Zur 

neuen Rolle des Vaters rund um die Geburt. Edition Psychosozial; Gießen. 

Lehrmethoden 

Impulsreferate, Gruppenarbeiten in Kleingruppen, Diskussion, Reflexion 


Teil 1: schriftliche Abhandlung der Themenstellung als Gruppenarbeit. Gewichtung: 50 % 

Teil 2: Gruppenpräsentation der ausgearbeiteten Projekte. Gewichtung: 50 %. 


Fallstudien – praepartaler und postpartaler Bereich 




Die Studierenden können anhand von komplexen Fallbeispielen aus der Praxisrealität ihre 

Analyse-, Problemlösungs- und Entscheidungsfähigkeit festigen. Sie sind in der Lage, das 

erworbene Wissen im zukünftigen Berufsleben umzusetzen. 





Themenstellung : komplexe Praxisfälle aus dem praepartalen- und postpartalen Bereich 

Konfrontation mit dem Fall / Information, Exploration, Resolution, Disputation, Kollation / 

Präsentation / Praxistransfer 


Alle Fachbücher der Geburtshilfe lt. Literaturliste 1. Sem. bis 4. Sem 

Lehrmethoden 

Fachdidaktische Planung der Fallstudien: 

Konfrontation mit dem Fall -Information, Exploration, Problemdarstellung, 

Problemanalyse, Problemlösung, Resolution- Entscheidung - Ziele und Maßnahmen, 

Disputation und Kollation 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 420

Interaktive Gruppenarbeiten und Plenusmdiskussionen 




Bachelorarbeit I und Bachelorseminar 





Sie produzieren eine schriftliche Seminararbeit anhand von forschungsrelevanten 

Fragestellungen aus dem berufsspezifischen Bereich. Sie sind in der Lage, die 

Seminararbeit professionell und repräsentativ gemäß der wissenschaftlichen 

Anforderungen druckreif zu schreiben. 


Vorkenntnisse aus den Lehrveranstaltungen der wissenschaftlichen Qualifikationen bzw. 

der fachpraktischen Übungen aus den Semestern 1-4. 


Themenwahl in Zusammenhang mit berufsspezifischen Bereichen des 5. Semesters / 

Durchführung lt. Richtlinien des IMC Krems / Coaching im Rahmen des Bachelorseminars 

/ Ausarbeitung der Seminararbeit 


Fachbücher, Fachzeitschriften und fachspezifische Datenbanken werden dem jeweiligen 

Themenkreis der Seminararbeit entsprechend empfohlen und eingesetzt 

Lehrmethoden 

Einführung in die Thematik mittels Impulsreferate der Vortragenden. Selbstgesteuerte 

Einzelarbeit mit Reflexionsphasen. 


Schriftliche Seminararbeit – Bachelorarbeit I – abschließender Prüfungscharakter 


Berufspraktikum V und praktikumsbegleitendes Seminar 





Sie können alle definierten Tätigkeiten laut Praxiskatalog gemäß den 







FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 421


Maßgabe der fachlichen und wissenschaftlichen Erkenntnisse und Erfahrungen 

durchzuführen. Sie beherrschen alle praktischen Fertigkeiten, die laut EU-Richtlinie 

erforderlich sind, um Berufsqualifikation zu erlangen. 


Vorkenntnisse aus Berufspraktikum I bis IV. 



Gebärende und 10 Geburten lt. EU-Richtlinie / Teilnahme an Geburtsvorbereitungskursen 

und Elternberatung / Zielsetzung und Planung der Praxissituation / Praktische Umsetzung 

der Ziele unter Anleitung des Praxisteams und der Tutorin gemäß Praxiskatalog / 

Evaluierung / Analyse von Problemen und Situationen / Assessment und Dokumentation / 

Berichte, Erfahrungsaustausch, Reflexion und weiterführende Planung im Rahmen des 

Begleitseminars 


keine 

Lehrmethoden 




Praktische Beurteilung - abschließender Prüfungscharakter 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 422

6 th Semester (Spring) 

Innovative Modelle der freiberuflichen Hebammenpraxis 


Sommersemester 1 SWS 1 


Im Rahmen der Lehrveranstaltung werden die Studierenden mit innovativen Modellen 

aus der freien Hebammenpraxis konfrontiert. Dabei geht es um Definitionsfindung, 

Ausarbeitung von innovativen Modellen, Kennenlernen der unterschiedlichsten Modelle im 

In- und Ausland und deren Vergleiche. Sie sind in der Lage, die erworbenen Kenntnisse 

ind ihre zukünftigen Pläne im Freiberuflichen Sektor umzusetzen. Sie können Modelle der 

Freiberuflichkeit anhand von Qualitätsparameter einschätzen. 


Keine 


Exkursion: Kennen lernen verschiedener Modelle der freiberuflichen Hebammenpraxis 

z.B. Mütterstudio, Geburtshaus, Hebammenordination im nationalen und internationalen 

Bereich 


Bryar, Theorie und Hebammenpraxis, Hans Huber 

Zoege, Professionalisierung der Hebammenberufes, Hans Huber 

Symonds, Hunt, The Midwife and Society, Macmillan 

www.hebammen.at 

www.euro.who.int/ 

www.europeanmidwives.org 


Lehrmethoden 

Inputreferat, Diskussionen, Gruppenarbeiten, Exkursionen, Präsentationen 


Lernbericht – abschließender Prüfungscharakter 


Hausgeburtshilfe 





Sie können die Bedeutung eines professionellen Selbstverständnisses beschreiben. Sie 

können alle Kriterien definieren, die im Rahmen der Berufsausbildung vonseiten der 

Berufsorganisation zu erfüllen sind. Sie können ihr erworbenes Wissen im Rahmen der 

freiberuflichen Tätigkeit, insbesondere der Hausgeburtshilfe, anwenden. Sie sind in der 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 423

Lage, die freiberufliche Berufsausübung mittels organisatorischer und 

betriebswirtschaftlicher Prinzipien zu entwickeln, gestalten und umsetzen. Sie vergleichen 

und kontrastieren die freiberufliche Ausübung bzw. berufliche Weiterentwicklung der 

Hebammen im europäischen Kontext. 


Keine 


Geschichtlicher Hintergrund der Hausgeburtshife / Organisation und Struktur der 

österreichischen Hausgeburtshilfe / Betreuungsmodelle – Betreuung während der 

Schwangerschaft, Geburt und nach der Geburt / Voraussetzungen und Anforderungen an 

die Hausgeburtshebamme / Medizinisch-technische Ausstattung für die Hausgeburtshilfe 

/ Hygienische Anforderungen und Maßnahmen/ Medizinische Voraussetzungen für eine 

Hausgeburt / Häusliche Voraussetzungen / Vorgehen bei Komplikationen / 

Qualitätssicherung in der Hausgeburtshilfe / Netzwerke der Hausgeburtshilfe / Adäquate 

Alternativen zur Hausgeburt 









Lehrmethoden 





Berufsorganisation und Professionalisierung 





Sie können die Bedeutung eines professionellen Selbstverständnisses beschreiben. Sie 

können alle Kriterien definieren, die im Rahmen der Berufsausbildung vonseiten der 

Berufsorganisation zu erfüllen sind. Sie können ihr erworbenes Wissen im Rahmen der 

freiberuflichen Tätigkeit, insbesondere der Hausgeburtshilfe, anwenden. Sie sind in der 

Lage, die freiberufliche Berufsausübung mittels organisatorischer und 

betriebswirtschaftlicher Prinzipien zu entwickeln, gestalten und umsetzen. Sie vergleichen 

und kontrastieren die freiberufliche Ausübung bzw. berufliche Weiterentwicklung der 

Hebammen im europäischen Kontext. 


Keine 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 424


Berufsorganisation der österreichischen Hebammen –Hebammen- 

gremium / Registratur/ Fortbildung / Regelung der Freiberuflichkeit / Konzepte der 

Hebammenarbeit im Kontext der Professionalisierung /Rolle der Hebamme in der 

Gesellschaft / Hebammen-Netzwerke auf nationaler und internationaler Ebene 









Lehrmethoden 





Betriebswirtschaft und Unternehmensgründung 





Sie können die Bedeutung und Anwendung der betriebswirtschaftlichen Aspekte innerhalb 

und außerhalb von Institutionen sowie die Integration von Betriebsmanagement in den 

Berufsalltag beschreiben und die betriebswirtschaftlichen Prinzipien bei freiberuflicher 

Berufsausübung umsetzen. 


Keine 


Grundlagen der Betriebswirtschaftslehre / Einführung in Personalmanagement / Kosten- 

und Finanzmanagement / Datenmanagement / Betriebsmanagement / 

Kleinunternehmen: Unternehmensgründung – Planung und Umsetzung / Businessplan 


Salis, Hausen, Ratgeber für den Einstieg in die Freiberuflichkeit, Hippokrates, 2001 

Schwarz, Schwarz, Praxishandbuch Freiberufler, Redline Wirtschaftsverlag 

Buckley, Delivering Quality in Midwifery, Bailliere Tinfall 

Pfeiffer, Qualitätsmanagement. Strategien-Methoden-Techniken, C. Hanser 

Faulstich, Grundwissen Öffentlichkeitsarbeit, UTB, 2000 

Bruhn, Unternehmens- und Marketingkommunikation, Vahlen Verl., 2005 

Zollonetz, Grundlagen Marketing, Cornelsen, 2003 

Zollonetz, Marketing-Mix, Cornelsen, 2003 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 425

Lehrmethoden 

Wissensvermittlung durch Vorträge und Übungen 




Qualitätsmanagement 




Die Studierenden kennen die wichtigsten Begrifflichkeiten sowie Ansätze und Modelle im 

Qualitätsmanagement. 

Die Studierenden sind in der Lage die wichtigsten Methoden und Technik von QM 

anzuwenden und in der Praxis einzusetzen. 


Keine 


Effektive Betreuung während der Schwangerschaft, Geburt, Wochenbett : Fallstudien - 

konkrete Praxisfälle / Gegenüberstellung Freipraxis und klinisches Setting / Methoden 

und Anwendung der Qualitätssicherung im klinischen und außerklinischen Bereich der 

Geburtshilfe 


Bruhn, M. (2008): Qualitätsmanagement für Dienstleistungen. Grundlagen-Konzepte- 

Methoden. 7. Aufl. Springer: Berlin / Heidelberg 

Kamiske, G.F. / Brauer, J.-P. (2008): Qualitätsmanagement von A-Z. Erläuterungen 

moderner Begriffe des Qualitätsmanagements. 6. Aufl. Hanser: München 

Zollondz, H.-D. (2006): Qualitätsmanagement. Einführung in Geschichte, Begriffe, 

Systeme und Konzepte. 2., vollst. überarb. u. erw. Aufl. Oldenburg Verlag: München / 

Wien 

Lehrmethoden 

Theorieinput, Gruppenarbeiten, Diskussion 




Öffentlichkeitsarbeit und Marketing für Hebammen 




Die Studierenden kennen Grundbegriffe, Denk- und Arbeitsweise sowie Instrumente des 

Marketings und können sich mit aktuellen Tendenzen auseinandersetzen und eine 

Verbindung zum Gesundheitsbereich herstellen. Mit Kommunikationspolitik - und dabei 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 426

insbesondere mit Öffentlichkeitsarbeit - haben die Studierenden auch praxisrelevante 

Erfahrungen gesammelt (Konzeption und Durchführung von PR-Projekten, Evaluation, 

Medienarbeit, Verfassen von Pressetexten). 


Keine 


Formen der Öffentlichkeitsarbeit / Umgang mit Medien / Methoden der Repräsentation / 

Einführung in strategisches Marketing / Marketingplan für eine Hebammenpraxis 


Elste, Frank: marketing und werbung in der medizin. Wien: Springer Verlag, 2004 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag, Diskussion, Einzel- und Gruppenarbeiten 




Fachenglisch IV 




Erreichung sehr guter schriftlicher und mündlicher Sprachbeherrschung in den Bereichen 

allgemeine und berufsbezogene Kommunikation. 


Fachenglisch I-III. 


Studium von englischer Fachliteratur für die Bachelorarbeiten / Rohkonzept des Abstracts 

für die BA II / 

Bewerbungsformalitäten in englischer Sprache 




Lehrmethoden 









1 Kurze Studie eines Forschungsprojektes mit abschließendem Referat in Englisch 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 427

Fallstudien – Geburtenbereich 




Die Studierenden können anhand von komplexen Fallbeispielen aus der Praxisrealität ihre 

Analyse-, Problemlösungs- und Entscheidungsfähigkeit festigen. Sie sind in der Lage, das 

erworbene Wissen im zukünftigen Berufsleben umzusetzen. 





Themenstellung : komplexe Praxisfälle aus dem Geburtenbereich 

Konfrontation mit dem Fall / Information, Exploration, Resolution, Disputation, Kollation / 

Präsentation / Praxistransfer 


Alle Fachbücher der Geburtshilfe lt. Literaturliste 1. Sem. bis 5. Sem 

Lehrmethoden 

Fachdidaktische Planung der Fallstudien: 

Konfrontation mit dem Fall -Information, Exploration, Problemdarstellung, 

Problemanalyse, Problemlösung, Resolution- Entscheidung - Ziele und Maßnahmen, 

Disputation und Kollation 

Interaktive Gruppenarbeiten und Plenusmdiskussionen 




Bachelorarbeit II und Bachelorseminar 




Im Rahmen dieser Lehrveranstaltung wenden die Studierenden ihre erworbenen 

Kenntnisse des wissenschaftlichen Arbeitens an, indem sie sich in ein Thema aus dem 

Gebiet der Geburtshilfe - fachspezifischer Hebammenbereich - vertiefen, dieses 

bearbeiten und ihre zweite Bachelorarbeit gemäß den gültigen Richtlinien der IMC 

Fachhochschule Krems verfassen. 

Die Studierenden sollen am Ende der Lehrveranstaltung befähigt sein, eigenständig einen 

abgegrenzten Themenbereich aus dem Gebiet der Geburtshilfe - fachspezifischer 

Hebammenbereich - mithilfe wissenschaftlicher Methoden zu er- und bearbeiten und die 

gewonnen wichtigsten Aspekte ihrer Arbeit schriftlich darzulegen. Als Basis dienen die im 

Bachelorseminar I erworbenen Grundkenntnisse sowie die erworbenen Kenntnisse durch 

die erstellte Bachelorarbeit I. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 428


Vorkenntnisse aus den Lehrveranstaltungen der wissenschaftlichen Qualifikationen bzw. 

der fachpraktischen Übungen aus den Semestern 1-5. 


Themenwahl in Zusammenhang mit berufsspezifischen Bereichen des 6. Semesters / 

Durchführung lt. Richtlinien des IMC Krems / Coaching im Rahmen des Bachelorseminars 

/ Ausarbeitung der Seminararbeit 


Wird thematisch bedingt in der Einzelbetreuungssituation besprochen. Weitere 

Literatur/Datenquellen werden ggf. als Download in den Course Sessions zur Verfügung 

gestellt. 

Lehrmethoden 

Vertiefende Einführung in die Thematik mittels Impulsreferat durch die Lektorinnen. 

Selbstgesteuerte Einzelarbeit mit begleitenden Reflexionsphasen. 


Schriftliche Seminararbeit – Bachelorarbeit II – abschließender Prüfungscharakter 


Berufspraktikum VI und praktikumsbegleitendes Seminar 





Sie können alle definierten Tätigkeiten laut Praxiskatalog gemäß den 








Maßgabe der fachlichen und wissenschaftlichen Erkenntnisse und Erfahrungen 

durchzuführen. Sie beherrschen alle praktischen Fertigkeiten, die laut EU-Richtlinie 

erforderlich sind, um Berufsqualifikation zu erlangen. 


Vorkenntnisse aus Berufspraktikum I bis V. 



Gebärende und 15 Geburten lt. EU-Richtlinie / Teilnahme an Geburtsvorbereitungskursen 

und Elternberatung / Zielsetzung und Planung der Praxissituation / Praktische Umsetzung 

der Ziele unter Anleitung des Praxisteams und der Tutorin gemäß Praxiskatalog / 

Evaluierung / Analyse von Problemen und Situationen / Assessment und Dokumentation / 

Berichte, Erfahrungsaustausch / Abschließende Reflexion 


keine 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 429

Lehrmethoden 




Praktische Beurteilung - abschließender Prüfungscharakter 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 430

OCCUPATIONAL THERAPY – Bachelor Programme 


Berufsethik und Ergotherapie im Gesundheitswesen 


Wintersemester 2 SWS BEGW1VO 3 


Der/Die Studierende 

- erwirbt ein Verständnis für die geschichtliche Entwicklung und den aktuellen Stand 

der Ergotherapie in Bezug auf Ausbildung, Berufsausübung und Forschung 

international. 

- erwirbt Grundverständnis ethischer Haltung auf Basis der WHO und kann diese in 

seinem/ihrem therapeutischen Alltag umsetzen. 

- lernt Vergleiche anzustellen und richtungsweisende Tendenzen zu erkennen. 

- kann seine/ihre therapeutische Intervention auf Grundlage berufsethischer Kriterien 

begründen. 


Keine 


� Ursprünge ergotherapeutischer Ansätze, Entwicklung von Berufsbild und Ausbildung, 

Professionalisierung, Arbeitsfelder und Schwerpunkte (Gesundheitsförderung, 

Prävention, Therapie und Rehabilitation). 

� Die ergotherapeutische Berufsentwicklung und Professionalisierung (Geschichtlicher 

Überblick sowie Entwicklungen der Ergotherapie in Österreich und im internationalen 

Vergleich (Occupational Science)). 

� Ethische Fragestellungen der therapeutischen Praxis und Forschung, kulturelle 

Sensibilität, internationaler ethischer Berufscodex. 


Bailey, D. & Schwartzberg, S. (2003). Ethical and Legal Dilemmas in Occupational 

Therapy. F.A.Davis. 

Feiler, M. (Hrsg.) (2003). Klinisches Reasoning in der Ergotherapie, Berlin: Springer. 

Hack, B. (2003). Ethik in der Ergotherapie, Berlin: Springer. 

van Keuk, E., Ghaderi C., Joksimovic, L. & David, D. (Hrsg.) (2011). Diversity - 

Transkulturelle Kompetenz in klinischen und sozialen Arbeitsfeldern, Stuttgart: W. 

Kohlhammer Verlag. 

Scheepers, C., Steding-Albrecht, U. & Jehn, P. (Hrsg.) (2011). Ergotherapie. Vom 

Behandeln zum Handeln, Stuttgart: Thieme. 

Slater, D. (Hrsg.) (2006). Reference Guide to the Occupational Therapy Code of Ethics, 

American Occupational Therapy Association Press. 

http://www.cotec-europe.org 

http://ethik.univie.ac.at 

http://univie.ac.at/ierm 

http://transkulturelles-portal.com 

http://www.wfot.org 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung, Falldiskussion, Kleingruppenarbeit, Selbststudium 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 431


20% Kleingruppenarbeit zu einem Fallbeispiel aus ethischer Sicht 

80% schriftliche Prüfung 

Grundlagenmodelle in der Ergotherapie 


Wintersemester 3 SWS GME1ILV 3 



- kennt gängige Berufsmodelle und –konzepte und kann seine/ihre ergotherapeutische 

Intervention auf Grundlage dieser begründen. 

- kennt die individuelle Handlungsfähigkeit der Klientin/des Klienten in den 

Lebensbereichen unter Berücksichtigung der Umweltfaktoren hinsichtlich der sozialen, 

kulturellen, physischen und institutionellen Gegebenheiten. 

- kann einen ergotherapeutischen Prozess erstellen, umsetzen und versteht die 

Zusammenhänge. 


Keine 


� Einführung in die Schritte des ergotherapeutischen Prozesses, Fallbeispiele 

o Problemidentifikation (Befundung) 

o Therapieplanung 

o Qualitätssicherung 

o Evaluation 

o Dokumentation und Reflexion 

� Ergotherapeutische Grundannahmen über den Menschen und die Gesellschaft, das 

Handeln im Allgemeinen und als therapeutisches Mittel, Gesundheit und Krankheit, 

Handlungsrollen, Alterstheorien, Umwelten, Veränderungen der 

Handlungskomponenten 

� Praxismodelle (z.B. MOHO) und Konzepte der Ergotherapie in Bezug auf die 

Einsatzmöglichkeiten in der Praxis. 


Pflichtliteratur: 

O Scheepers, C., Steding-Albrecht, U. & Jehn, P. (Hrsg.) (2011). Ergotherapie. Vom 

Behandeln zum Handeln. Lehrbuch für Ausbildung und Praxis, Stuttgart: Thieme. 

Weitere empfohlene Literatur: 

� Kielhofner, G., Marotzki, U., Mentrup, C. (2005): Model of Human Occupation 

(MOHO). Grundlagen für die Praxis, Reihe: Ergotherapie - Reflexion und Analyse, 

Heidelberg: Springer. 

� Nieuwesteeg-Gutzwiller, M.-T. & Somazzi, M. (2010): Handlungsorientierte 

Ergotherapie. Das Bieler Modell als Grundlage für Ausbildung und Praxis, Bern: 

Huber. 

� Jerosch-Herold, C. / Marotzki, U. / Hack, B. M. / Weber, P. (2009): Konzeptionelle 

Modelle für die ergotherapeutische Praxis, Reihe: Ergotherapie - Reflexion und 

Analyse (2. Auflage), Heidelberg: Springer. 

� Hagedorn, Rosemary (2000): Ergotherapie - Theorien und Modelle. Die Praxis 

Begründen, Stuttgart: Thieme. 

� Arbeitskreis Modelle und Theorien Wien (2004): OPM - Occupational Performance 

Model (Australia), Idstein: Schulz-Kirchner. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 432

Lehrmethoden 

Die Aktivitäten der Studierenden stehen im Mittelpunkt des didaktischen Konzepts. Der 

Vortrag der Lehrenden bildet den Ausgangspunkt für den fachbezogenen Wissenserwerb. 

Anhand zur Verfügung gestellter Fallbeispiele wird die Verbindung von Theorie und Praxis 

ermöglicht. Mittels Diskussionen, Selbststudium, Einzel- und Gruppenarbeiten sowie 

Präsentationen soll das erworbene Wissen gefestigt und vertieft werden. Durch die 

Gruppenarbeit wird neben dem fachbezogenen Wissenserwerb auch das 

fachübergreifende soziale Lernen gefördert. 

Der Lehrende steht als Begleiterin des Lernprozesses für Fragen und Unterstützung zur 

Verfügung. 


Schriftliche wissensorientierte Zwischenprüfung 40% 

Schriftliche anwendungsorientierte Abschlussprüfung 60% 

Einführung in die Anatomie und Physiologie 


Wintersemester 2 SWS EAP1VO 3 



- kennt die wichtigsten Begriffe der Anatomie und Physiologie des menschlichen 

Körpers. 


Keine 


Grundbegriffe der Anatomie und Physiologie 

o Allgemeine Definition von Zelle, Gewebe, Organ und Organsystemen 

- Aufbau, Morphologie & Funktion von Zelle und Gewebe 

- Aufbau und Funktion von 

o Bewegungsapparat und Schädel 

- allgemeiner Teil: 

o Knochen (Verbindungen und Funktion inkl. Gelenke), Muskeln 

o ausgewählte Knochen und Muskelgruppen 

o Nervensystem und Reizleitungssysteme (peripher) 


Eines der folgenden Anatomie Bücher, das Physiologie-Buch, sowie das Skriptum werden 

empfohlen. 

Prometheus; Schünke et al., Thieme Verlag 

Anatomie; Aumüller et al., Duale Reihe 

Taschenatlas der Physiologie; Silbernagel und Despopoulos, Thieme Verlag 

Allgemeine Histologie und Anatomie für Studierende der Physiotherapie, Weninger, 

Facultas Verlag 

Empfohlene Literatur: 

Feneis‘ Bildlexikon der Anatomie; Dauber, Thieme Verlag 

Weiterführende Literatur: 

Sobotta Atlas der Anatomie des Menschen; Putz und Pabst, Elesiver 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 433

Rohen Anatomie des Menschen; Rohen, Schattauer 

Atlas der Anatomie; Netter, Thieme 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag, Anregung zu "Computer supported cooperative learning" 



Spezielle Anatomie 


Wintersemester 3 SWS SAN1VO 4 



- kennt die Anatomie und Physiologie des menschlichen Körpers, insbesondere die der 

Extremitäten, des Schädels und des Rumpfes. 

- kann die Körperstrukturen in vivo inspizieren und palpieren. 

- kennt die Nomenklatur, die Topografie und die Funktion des zentralen und peripheren 

Nervensystems. 


Einführung in die Anatomie und Physiologie 


� Anatomie und Physiologie des Bewegungsapparates (inkl. Schädel) mit Schwerpunkt 

obere Extremität und Rumpf 

� Aufbau, Morphologie, Funktion; Knochen, Muskeln, Muskelgruppen, umgebende 

Gewebe 

� Neurale Steuerung 

� Anatomie in Vivo: Palpation 

� Neuroanatomische und neurophysiologische Grundlagen 

� Grundbegriffe und Grundstrukturen des ZNS und PNS 

� Aufbau und Funktion des Gehirns (inklusive Plastizität des Gehirns) und der 

Gehirnnerven 

� Aufbau und Funktion des Rückenmarks 

� Aufbau und Funktion der Spinalnerven 

� Aufbau und Funktion des viszeralen Nervensystems 

� Sinnesphysiologie 


Eines der folgenden Werke wird empfohlen: 

Taschenatlas Anatomie - Werner Platzer (3 Bände) 

Prometheus, Lernatlas der Anatomie (3 Bände) 

Anatomie. Duale Reihe - Gerhard Aumüller 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung und Selbststudium, Lernen am Modell/Präparat 


mündliche Einzelprüfung mit praktischem Anteil: 100% 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 434

Bewegungslehre 


Wintersemester 1 SWS BEW1ILV 1 



- kennt die Grundlagen der Bewegungslehre und ihre Nomenklatur. 

- kann physiologische Haltung und Bewegung anhand von strukturierten Kriterien 

beobachten, interpretieren und analysieren. 


Einführung in die Anatomie und Physiologie (findet parallel statt), Spezielle Anatomie 

(findet parallel statt) 


� Körperabschnitte 

� Physiologische und ökonomische Bewegungen 

� Achsen und Ebenen 

� Bewegungen um Achsen in Ebenen in den Gelenken 

� Körperdiagonale/ Körpermittelpunkt/ Körperlängsachse 

� Distanzpunkte/ Hebel/ Drehpunkte 

� Besonderheiten von Muskeln und Muskelaktivitäten, z. B. Dynamik/Isometrie 

� Konzentrik/Exzentrik 

� Agonist - Antagonist - Synergist 

� Mehrgelenkige Muskeln 

� Gleichgewichtsreaktionen/ Schwerpunkt/ Unterstützungsfläche 

� Weiterlaufende Bewegungen/Widerlagerung/ Ausweichbewegungen 

� Analyse der Statik/ Haltung 


� Betz U., Heel C. 2006. Bewegungssystem: Band 1. Thieme Verlag. Stuttgart. 

� Buckup K. 2005. Klinische Tests an Knochen, Gelenken und Muskeln. Thieme Verlag. 

Stuttgart. 

� Calais – Germain B. 2008. Anatomie der Bewegung: Techniken und Funktionen des 

Körpers. Marix Verlag. Wiesbaden. 

� Götz – Neumann K. 2006. Gehen verstehen. Georg Thieme Verlag. Stuttgart. 

� Hüter – Becker A, Dölken M. 2005. Biomechanik, Bewegungslehre, 

Leistungsphysiologie, Trainingslehre. Thieme Verlag. Stuttgart. 

� Kapandji I.A. 2009. Funktionelle Anatomie der Gelenke. Thieme Verlag. Stuttgart. 

� Klein P., Sommerfeld P. 2004. Biomechanik der menschlichen Gelenke. Urban und 

Fischer Verlag. München. 

� Pschyrembel. 2007. Klinisches Wörterbuch. Walter de Gruyter GmbH & Co. KG. 

Berlin. 

� Schellhammer S. 2002. Bewegungslehre. Urban und Fischer Verlag. München. 

� Schünke M. et al.2005.Prometheus: Lernatlas der Anatomie. Thieme Verlag. 

Stuttgart. 

� Suppe` B. 2007. FBL Klein – Vogelbach: Functional Kinetics. Springer Verlag. 

Heidelberg. 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag: Vermittlung des theoretischen Lernstoffes laut Lehrplan in Verbindung mit 

praktischen Unterrichtselementen z.B. Arbeit in Kleingruppen und praktischen 

Übungselementen, um das Verständnis für die theoretischen Inhalte zu verbessern. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 435

Diskussion. Einsatz von Medien wie Power Point und Folienpräsentationen sind 

vorgesehen. Studium der Literatur. 


Schriftlicher Test (100%) 

Klinische Chirurgie und Traumatologie 


Wintersemester 1 SWS KCT1VO 2 



- kennt erste Hilfe Maßnahmen und kann diese anwenden. 

- kennt die Ursache, Klinik, Diagnostik, medizinische Therapie inklusive gängigste 

operative Versorgungen und deren Rehabilitationsprozesse. 

- kennt die Prognose für die Ergotherapie relevantesten Krankheitsbilder. 

- erkennt lebensbedrohliche Zustände und kann gegebenenfalls im Rahmen der Ersten 

Hilfe erste Schritte einleiten. 





- Allgemeine Grundlagen der Chirurgie, Verletzungen, Operative Eingriffe, 

Gelenksersatz, plastische Chirurgie, 

- Auswirkungen für den Betroffenen im Alltag- Obere Extremität- Untere Extremität- 

Kopf –WS Beckenschwerpunkt obere Extremität 

- Handchirurgie: Auswahl der Krankheitsbilder in Absprache mit dem/der 

ergotherapeutischen Fachverantwortlichen. 

- Auswirkung von spezifischen Medikamenten auf 

Alltag und Handlungsfähigkeit 

- Einführung in die Erste Hilfe 


� ergotherapie in der traumatologie, orthopädie und rheumatologie connie 

koesling/thomas bollinger herzka thiemeverlag 

� unfallchirurgie 

rüter, trentz, wagner 

urban und fischer 

� unfallchirurgie 

diagnostik/indikationen/nachbehandlung 

josef mischo 

enkeverlag 

Lehrmethoden 

� Vorträge 

� Gruppenarbeit 


Schriftlicher Test (100%) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 436

Klinische Innere Medizin 


Wintersemester 1 SWS KIM1VO 2 



- kennt die Ursache, Klinik, Diagnostik, medizinische Therapie und Rehabilitation 

ausgewählter Krankheitsbilder der Inneren Medizin. 

- erkennt lebensbedrohliche Zustände und kann gegebenenfalls im Rahmen der Ersten 

Hilfe erste Schritte einleiten. 





� Überblick über die Diagnostik, Therapie und Rehabilitation der Inneren Medizin 

� Ausgewählte Krankheitsbilder (z.B. Herzerkrankungen) die ein zentrales Element für 

die Partizipation der PatientInnen in die Gesellschaft darstellen. 

� Auswirkung von spezifischen Medikamenten auf Alltag und Handlungsfähigkeit 

� Überblick über lebensbedrohlichen Zustände im klinischen Alltag 


Steffers/Credner: Allgemeine Krankheitslehre und Innere Medizin für Physiotherapeuten; 

Thieme 2011 

Herold: Innere Medizin 2010; Herold 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung, Kurzreferate 


Schriftliche Prüfung 100% 

Pathologie und Hygiene 


Wintersemester 2 SWS PH1VO 4 



- kennt berufsrelevante Hygienemaßnahmen und kann diese im therapeutischen 

Setting ausführen. 

- kennt die berufsrelevanten Fachtermini der Pathologie. 

- kennt pathologische Veränderungen der Systeme des menschlichen Körpers. 


Keine 


PATHOLOGIE: 

� Begriffserklärung 

� Pathologie/Krankheit/Krankheitszeichen 

� Verlaufsmöglichkeiten von Erkrankungen 

� Heilung 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 437

� Leiden 

� Tod 

� Todeszeichen 

� Krankheitsursachen 

� innere Ursachen 

� äußere Ursachen 

� psychosoziale Faktoren 

� krankhafte Veränderungen an Zellen und Gewebe beispielhaft anhand von 

Erkrankungen der inneren Organe 

Nekrose, Geschwür, Ödem, Atrophie, Hypoplasie, Hypertrophie, Hyperplasie, Neoplasie, 

Benignität / maligne Entartung 

� Entzündungen im Bezug zur Wundheilung 

� Lokale Störungen im Herz-Kreislauf-System 

HYGIENE: 

� Einführung in 

� Epidemiologie 

� Infektionsepidemiologie 

� Bakteriologie 

� Virologie 

� Parasitologie 

� Maßnahmen zur Infektionsverhütung 

� Praktischen Anwendung der Desinfektion 

� Persönliche Hygiene 

� Infektionsschutz (Impfungen) 

� Umgang mit Wunden und Drainagen 


Pathologie: 


Skriptum zur Vorlesung 


Walter Ulrich, Otto Braun. Pathologie für MTA, RTA und Krankenhauspflegepersonal. 

(2000, 3. Auflage – W. Maudrich Verlag) 

Nennstiel S., BASICS Allgemeine Pathologie (Urban und Fischer Verlag, Elsvier GmBH). 


Böcker – Denk – Heinz. Pathologie. (2004, 3. Auflage - Elsevier. Urban & Fischer-Verlag.) 

Hygiene: 


Kaiser, H./Lausch, A.P./Stanosch, M.: Hygiene, Infektionslehre, Mikrobiologie (...). Verlag: 

Maudrich; Wien 2008 ; ISBN: 978-3-85175-876-4 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung mir Diskussionen; Selbststudienaufträge; ggf. PBL. 


Pathologie: Schriftlicher Test 50% 

Hygiene: Schriftlicher Test 50% 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 438

Allgemeine Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen 


Wintersemester 2 SWS AEM1UE 1 



- kann den Teilschritt Behandlung des ergotherapeutischen Prozesses praktisch 

anwenden und dokumentieren. 

- kann Therapien nach Maßgabe der fachlichen und wissenschaftlichen Erkenntnisse 

und Erfahrungen durchführen. 

- ist in der Durchführung gängiger Behandlungsstrategien geübt. 

- kann einfache ergotherapeutische Interventionen der motorisch-funktionellen 

Behandlung mit therapeutischen Aktivitäten aus den Bereichen Selbsterhaltung, 

Produktivität und Freizeit planen und durchführen. 


Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation (findet parallel statt), Grundlagenmodelle der 

Ergotherapie (findet parallel statt) 


� Vermittlung von: - theoretischem Hintergrund - zugehörigen Maßnahmen, Methoden, 

Mitteln und Konzepten, einer Zuordnung zu den Zielsetzungen der Wiederherstellung, 

Kompensation –aktueller Evidenz 

� Praktisches Üben einfacher ergotherapeutischer Interventionen. 

� Zuordnung der Behandlungsverfahren zu Verbesserung, Erweiterung, Erhaltung, 

Wiederherstellung und Kompensation 

� Fokus: Gelenkschutz 





Weitere empfohlene Literatur: 

� Koesling, C. & Bollinger Herzka, T. (Hrsg.) (2008): Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie. 

Traumatologie und Rheumatologie. Ergotherapie Lehrbuch, Stuttgart: Thieme. 

� Pauli S./ Leimer G. (2010). Ergotherapeutische Übungen in der Handtherapie, 

Dortmund: Verlag modernes lernen. 

� Waldner-Nilsson, B. (2009). Handrehabilitation. Für Ergo- und Physiotherapeuten. 

Grundlagen, Erkrankungen (Band 1), Heidelberg: Springer. 

� Winkelmann I. (Hrsg.) (2009): Handwerk in der Ergotherapie, Stuttgart: Thieme. 

� Diverse kunsthandwerkliche Anleitungsbücher betreffend Specksteinbearbeitung, 

Filzen, Weben, Peddigrohr flechten und Seidenmalen 

Lehrmethoden 

Im Mittelpunkt des didaktischen Konzeptes stehen die Aktivitäten der Studierenden. 

Ergotherapeutische Interventionen werden auf der Grundlage verbaler und schriftlicher 

Anleitung erarbeitet und praktisch erprobt. Schriftliche Reflexionen im Rahmen von 

Einzelarbeiten sowie Diskussionen festigen das erworbene Wissen. Gegenseitiges Anleiten 

der Studierenden bei unterschiedlichen Interventionen fördert das soziale Lernen und die 

didaktischen Fertigkeiten. Die praktisch erworbenen Fertigkeiten werden in der 

Lehrveranstaltung Methodik und Aktivität der Partizipation im Rahmen von 

Aktivitätenanalysen reflektiert. 

Die Lehrende steht als Begleiterin des Lernprozesses für Fragen und Unterstützung zur 

Verfügung. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 439


Teilprüfung der Lehrveranstaltung Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation fließt in 

Modulbewertung ein: Schriftlicher Zwischentest: 30% 

Modulabschlussprüfung (gemeinsam mit LV Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation): 

Schriftliche Aktivitätenanalyse 70% 

Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation 


Wintersemester 2 SWS MAP1ILV 2 



- kennt die Standards von Befundung und Dokumentation des ergotherapeutischen 

Prozesses. 

- kann den ergotherapeutischen Prozess in seinen einzelnen Teilschritten 


- kennt Aktivitätenanalysen und kann diese durchführen. 


Grundlagenmodelle der Ergotherapie (findet parallel statt), Allgemeine 

ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen (findet parallel statt) 


- Einführung in gängige Befundungs- und Untersuchungsverfahren der Ergotherapie 

- Struktur der Befundung und Dokumentation 

- Allgemeine Einführung einer Aktivitätenanalyse, bezogen auf unterschiedliche 

Lebensbereiche. 

- Die Bedeutung der Aktivitätenanalysen für die Ergotherapie und verschiedene 

Zugänge: Task-Focused Activity Analysis, Theory-Focused Activity Analysis, 

Individual-Focused 




Fürhoff, J. (2008). Analyse handwerklicher und gestalterischer Techniken aus 

therapeutischer Sicht. Ein fachdidaktischer Beitrag zur praktischen Umsetzung in der 

Ergotherapie-Ausbildung, Idstein: Schulz-Kirchner. 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag, Diskussion, Gruppenarbeiten, Literaturstudium, Präsentationen 


Teilprüfung der Lehrveranstaltung Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation fließt in 

Modulbewertung ein: Schriftlicher Zwischentest: 30% 

Modulabschlussprüfung (gemeinsam mit LV Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation): 

Schriftliche Aktivitätenanalyse 70% 

Psychosoziale Aspekte in der Ergotherapie I 


Wintersemester 2 SWS PSAI1ILV 2 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 440



- kennt Theoriegrundlagen zur Kommunikation und beherrscht die Grundlagen der 

Gesprächsführung. 

- versteht die Bedeutung von Teamarbeit und die Grundlagen der Kommunikation in 

einem Team und kann in einem Team arbeiten. 

- lernt sich selbst wahrzunehmen und sein/ihr Handeln zu reflektieren. 

- erlangt Rollenklarheit in der Studierenden-Rolle. 


Keine 


- Grundlagen der Kommunikation und Gesprächsführung, 

- Rollen und Rollenverständnis, 

- Innere Grundhaltung, 

- Kommunikations- und Gesprächstechniken, 

- Aufbau und Struktur von Kommunikationsprozessen, 

- Ablauf eines Gespräches, 

- Rahmenbedingungen, 

- Körpersprache, 

- Distanzverhalten, 

- Stimme und Sprechen 

- Umgang mit Kritik / Feedback Spannungsfelder in der Kommunikation, das 

therapeutische Gespräch, 

- Anwendung von verschiedenen Strategien in schwierigen Situationen aus dem 

therapeutischen Alltag, 

- Bearbeitung von konkreten Aufgaben und Problemstellungen durch Zusammenarbeit 

im Team 

- Auseinandersetzung mit Selbstbild und Fremdbild 

- Teamprozesse erkennen und reflektieren, 

- Umgang mit Konflikten und individuellen Bedürfnissen, 

- Einführung in die Rahmenbedingungen und Anforderungen des Studiums. 


� Andrea Dehn-Hindenberg: Gesundheitskommunikation im Therapieprozess, ISBN 

978-3-8248-0658-4 

� Simon, Walter: „Gabals großer Methodenkoffer – Grundlagen der Kommunikation―, 

Offenbach, Gabal Verlag 2004 

� Radatz, Sonja: „Beratung ohne Ratschlag― ,ISCT, 2000 

� Sumsion Thelma. „Klientenzentrierte Ergotherapie―, Thieme, 2002 

� Townsend, Elizabeth A.; Polatajko, Helene J. (2007): Enabling occupation II. 

Advancing an occupational therapy vision for health, well-being & justice through 

occupation. Ottawa: Canadian Association of Occupational Therapists. 

� Friedemann (2006): Miteinander reden 1-3 Reinbek 

� Weinberger Sabine (2006): Klientenzentrierte Gesprächsführung, Weinheim und 

München 

� Büttner Claudia: Gesprächsführung und Beratung – Sicherheit und Kompetenz im 

Therapiegespräch 

� Zimbardo, Philip: Psychologie – Eine Einführung 

Weiterführende Literatur 

� Friederike Leute: Richtig sprechen mit dementen Menschen, ISBN 978-3-497- 

02060-7 

� Kindl-Beilfuß, Carmen: „Fragen können wie Küsse schmecken―, Carl – Auer – 

Systeme, Heidelberg, 2010 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 441

� Lahninger, Paul: „Reise zur Lösung – Coaching - Kompetenz in Beratung, 

Teamentwicklung, Führung, Lehrtätigkeit, Gesprächsführung―; managerSeminare 

Verlags Gmbh, Bonn, 2010 

� Fengler Jörg (2009): Feedback geben, Strategien und Übungen, Beltz 

� Gehm Theo (1994): Kommunikation im Beruf Weinheim und Basel Schulz von 

Thun 

� Glasl, Friedrich: Konfliktmanagement, Verlag Freies Geistesleben 

� Holler, Ingrid: Trainingsbuch zur Gewaltfreien Kommunikation, Junfermann 

� Rosenberg, Marshall: Gewaltfreie Kommunikation, Junfermann 2003 

Lehrmethoden 

interaktive Lehrveranstaltung, kurze Theorieinputs, Reflexionen und Austausch in 

Lernpartnerschaften, praxisnahe Selbsterfahrung und Reflexion, Üben von 

therapeutischen Gesprächen in unterschiedlichen Bereichen, Videoanalysen,... 


30% Durchführung einer Kurzpräsentation in der Lehrveranstaltung und Ausarbeitung 

eines Handouts 1 Seite mit einer KollegIn 

70% schriftliche Ausarbeitung von 5 Seiten über eine gelungene und nichtgelungene 

Interaktion und der Durchführung von einem klientenzentrierten Assessment (Reflexion) 

Medizinisches Englisch 


Wintersemester 1 SWS MEN1ILV 1 



- kennt das berufsrelevante englische Fachvokabular. 

- versteht englischsprachige Fachliteratur. 

- kann Konversationen in englischer Sprache durchführen. 


Keine 


� Berufsrelevantes Fachvokabular (menschliche Topographie, ADLs, 

Schmerzbeschreibung/-Qualitäten, etc.) 

� Untersuchungs- und Behandlungsgespräche 

� Beratungsgespräche 

� Alltagskonversation 

� Fachliteratur 

� Diskussion über die englischsprachige Fachliteratur 


Compulsory reading: 

The textbook Fachenglisch für Gesundheitsberufe: Physiotherapie, Ergotherapie, 

Logopädie 

(Sandra Schiller, Springer, 3. Auflage), ISBN: 978-3-642-17291-5, is mandatory. 

The textbook Ready for IELTS Student's Book with CD-Rom (Sam McCarter, Macmillan), 

ISBN-10:3191229272, is available in the FH library, and extracts from it will be 

integrated into class. (The FH Krems offers students the opportunity to take the 

internationally acknowledged IELTS exam on a voluntary basis on site.) 

Optional self-study material: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 442

Fachwörterbuch Ergotherapie Deutsch-Englisch Englisch-Deutsch, Ergotherapeutische 

Fachbegriffe unter der Lupe – Definitionen und Erläuterungen (AG MoTheo, Schulz- 

Kirchner), ISBN-10: 3824806495 

Fachwortschatz Medizin. Englisch. CD-Rom (Friedbichler M. & E., Thieme-Verlag), ISBN: 

9783131406811 

English Grammar in Use Intermediate with Answers & CD-Rom (Murphy, Viney & Craven, 

Cambridge University Press), ISBN-10: 9780521537629 

IELTS exam-related information and practice material: 

www.ielts.org 

www.world-english.org/ielts_free_tests.htm 

www.cambridgeesol.org/exams/academic-english/ielts.html 

www.ielts-exam.net 

CDs, videos and audio files will occasionally be used in class. 

Lehrmethoden 

A variety of individual, pair-work, group-work and open-class activities in the shape of 

exercises, discussions and role-plays will be used to integrate and supplement the 

material presented in the mandatory textbook Fachenglisch für Gesundheitsberufe: 

Physiotherapie, Ergotherapie, Logopädie (Sandra Schiller, Springer, 3. Auflage) and the 

textbook Ready for IELTS (Sam McCarter, Macmillan). 

Students‘ individual success and the success of this class in general depends on the 

lecturer‘s and students‘ commitment in creating a constructive learning environment (to 

which using mobile phones or surfing the Internet while in class is not conducive). 


100% Final Written Examination: tasks and questions testing content, vocabulary and 

grammar areas covered in class 

(e.g. gap-fill, matching and sentence completion exercises); 

Proseminar für wissenschaftliches Arbeiten 


Wintersemester 2 SWS PWA1PS 2 



- kann wissenschaftliche Erkenntnisse recherchieren, ihre Qualität und Zuverlässigkeit 

beurteilen und für ergotherapeutische Fragestellungen aufbereiten. 


Keine 


Wissenschaftsverständnis aufbauen, Formalkriterien für wissenschaftliche Arbeiten 

kennen und anwenden 

� Literaturrecherche 

� Zitierregeln 

� Einführung in die Methodologie einer wissenschaftlichen Arbeit 

� Prinzipien der EBM (Evidence Based Medicine) 

� Prinzipien der EBP (Evidence Based Practice) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 443


De Poy, E. & Gitlin, L. (2005). Introduction to Research. St. Louis: Elsevier Mosby. 

Taylor, M.C. (2007). Evicence-Based Practice for Occupational Therapists. Oxford: 

Blackwell Publishing. 

Creswell, J.W. (2009). Research Design. London: Sage Publications. 

Franck, N. & Stary, J. (2011). Die Technik wissenschaftlichen Arbeitens. Paderborn: 

Ferdinan Schöningh Verlag. 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag 

praktische Übungen (Formulieren von Fragestellungen, Auswahl von Keywords, 

Literaturrecherche) 

Gruppenarbeit (Beurteilung von Studien) 


Am Ende des Semesters ist eine Proseminararbeit (Umfang 10 Seiten) zu verfassen. 

Die Proseminararbeit soll die erworbenen Kenntnisse des Proseminars zur Anwendung 

bringen. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 444

2nd Semester (SPRING) 

Soziologie 


Sommersemester 1 SWS SOZ2VO 2 



- kennt die Grundlagenmodelle aus dem Bereich der Gesundheitssoziologie und kann 

diese in seine/ihre therapeutische Handlung mit einbeziehen. 

- kennt soziale Bedingungen von Entstehung, Verlauf und Bewältigung von Krankheit 

und kann die Auswirkungen von Betätigung auf die soziale Position und die 

Gesundheit einer Person einschätzen. 


Keine 


� Erwartungshaltungen gegenüber Therapeutin/Patientin 

o Rollenverständnis (u. a. TherapeutIn in der Ausbildung) 

o Soziale Kontrolle - Konsequenzen nichterfüllter Erwartungen 

� (kulturspezifische) Normen- und Werteorientierung 

� Spannungsfeld Gesellschaft/Individuum 

o Positionsmerkmale (z. B. Position, Rang, Macht, Schicht, Milieu) 

o Institutionen 

o Individuation, Vergesellschaftung, Sozialisation (in modernen Gesellschaften) 

� Grundlagen der Medizinsoziologie 

� Gesundheit und Krankheit aus sozialwissenschaftlicher Sicht 

� Auswirkungen von Krankheit auf das Soziale Verhalten 

� Auswirkungen der sozialen Position auf Gesundheitsverhalten 

� Umgang mit Gruppen/ Gruppenprozess 


Elias, Norbert (1993): Was ist Soziologie. Weinheim und München – S. 9 – 31 

Elias, Norbert (1993): Was ist Soziologie. Weinheim und München – S. 32 – 50 

Weber, Max (2002): Wirtschaft und Gesellschaft. Tübingen. S. 122 – 176 

Schroer, Markus (Hrg.) (2005): Soziologie des Körpers. Frankfurt-Main. Darin: Knoblauch 

und Nollmann; S. 92 – 165 

Abel, Thomas / Schori, Dominik (2009): Der Capability-Ansatz in der 

Gesundheitsförderung; Ansatzpunkte für eine Neuausrichtung der Ungleichheitsforschung. 

S. 48 - 64 

Lehrmethoden 

Es sind vor jeder Stunde vorgegebene soziologische Texte zu lesen. Diese bilden die 

Grundlage der inhaltlichen Arbeit in der jeweiligen Präsenzeinheit. Diese wird durch 

Vortrag und kleine Arbeitsgruppen unterstützt. 


Eine schriftliche Prüfung über die gelesene Literatur. 

Beurteilungskriterien sind: 

� Vollständigkeit der Texterfassung (30 %) 

� Verständnis der Inhalte (30 %) 

� Anwendbarkeit auf aktuelle Probleme / Fragestellungen (40 %) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 445

Klinische Neurologie und Neuropsychologie 


Sommersemester 2 SWS KNN2VO 4 



- kennt Ursache, Klinik, Diagnostik und medizinische Therapie der klinischen 

Neurologie und Neuropsychologie und deren Rehabilitationsprozesse. 

- kennt die Prognose der für die Ergotherapie relevantesten Krankheitsbilder. 


Einführung in die Anatomie und Physiologie, Spezielle Anatomie 


� Überblick über die medizinische (Neurologie) und neuropsychologische Diagnostik und 

Therapie im Fachgebiet Neurologie inkl. Rehabilitationsphasen 

� Ursache, Klinik, Diagnostik, Therapie, Rehabilitation und Prognose der für die 

Ergotherapie relevantesten neurologischen und neuropsychologischen Symptome und 

Krankheitsbilder. 

� Auswahl der Krankheitsbilder in Absprache mit der 




� Thieme, Neurologie, K. F. Masuhr, M. Neumann 

� Facultas, Grundlagen für Human- und Zahnmediziner, K. Zeiler und S. Asenbaum 

� Deutsche Gesellschaft für Neurologie: www.dgn.org 

� Trepel, M.: Neuroanatomie - Struktur und Funktion. Urban & Fischer 

� Karnath, H.-O. / Thier, P. (Hg.): Neuropsychologie. Springer 

� Reihe: Fortschritte der Neuropsychologie. Hogrefe (z.B. Bd.2 Gedächtnisstörungen 

nach Hirnschäden, Bd.5 visuelle Wahrnehmungsstörungen, Bd.10 Apraxien) 

Lehrmethoden 

Verbindung aus Informationsinput, seminaristischer Arbeit, ausgewählte Praxisanalyse / 

Fallstudien, Praxisnahes, interaktives Erarbeiten der einzelnen Pathologien mit Fall- und 

Therapiebeispielen 


Teilprüfung Klinische Neuropsychologie: Schriftliches Examen 50% 

Teilprüfung Klinische Neurologie: Schriftliche Abschlussprüfung 50% 

Klinische Orthopädie 


Sommersemester 1 SWS KO2VO 2 



- kennt Ursache, Klinik, Diagnostik und medizinische Therapie inklusive gängigste 

operative Prozesse der Orthopädie und deren Rehabilitationsprozesse. 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 446


Einführung in die Anatomie und Physiologie, Spezielle Anatomie, Bewegungslehre 


� Untersuchungsmethoden, Anamnese, Ätiologie, Symptome, Auswirkungen auf den 

Betroffenen. 

� Ärztliche Intervention bei Nichttraumatischen Erkrankungen der Extremitäten und des 

Rumpfes in allen Lebensabschnitten. 

� Auswahl der Krankheitsbilder in Absprache mit der 


� Auswirkung von spezifischen Medikamenten auf Alltag und Handlungsfähigkeit. 


Orthopädie und Unfallchirurgie, Fritz U. Niethard, Joachim Pfeil, Peter Bieberthaler, Duale 

Reihe Thieme, 6.Auflage 2009 

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung, Gruppenarbeiten, Kurzreferate 


Schriftliche Prüfung 100% 

Spezielle Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen I 


Sommersemester 3 SWS SEM2ILV 3 



- kennt gängige Behandlungsmaßnahmen der kognitiven Rehabilitation und kann diese 

durchführen. 





Grundlagenmodelle in der Ergotherapie, Allgemeine ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen, 

Spezielle Anatomie, Klinische Neurologie und Neuropsychologie (findet parallel statt) 


� Vermittlung von: 

o theoretischem Hintergrund 

o zugehörigen Maßnahmen, Methoden, Mitteln und Konzepten 

o einer Zuordnung zu den Zielsetzungen der Wiederherstellung, 

Kompensation 

o aktueller Evidenz 

� Praktisches Üben spezieller ergotherapeutischer Interventionen. 

� Erfassen der individuellen Handlungsfähigkeiten im klinischen Kontext aller 

PatientInnengruppen für die Wiederherstellung der Partizipation 



Fokus: 

� Training von Aufmerksamkeit, Gedächtnis/Lernen, 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 447

Unawareness, Planen/Problemlösen, räumliche Leistungen, zentrale Kontrolle bzw. 

exekutive Funktionen anwenden. 

� Interventionen zur Förderung oder Kompensation der Krankheitseinsicht / - 

verarbeitung, Raumauffassung / -verarbeitung, Praxis, Sinneswahrnehmung/verarbeitung, 

� Lesen/Schreiben/Rechnen; Motivation 


Fries, W., Lössl, H. & Wagenhäuser Steffi (2007). Teilhaben! Neue Konzepte der 

Neurorehabilitation – für eine erfolgreiche Rückkehr in Alltag und Beruf, 

Stuttgart: Thieme. 

Habermann, c. & Kolster, F. (Hrsg.) (2009). Ergotherapie im Arbeitsfeld Neurologie (2. 

Auflage), Stuttgart: Thieme. 

Craneburgh, B. van (2007). Neurorehabilitation. Neurophysiologische Grundlagen, 

Lernprozesse, Behandlungsprinzipien, München: Urban & Fischer. 

Frommelt, P. & Lösslein, H. (Hrsg.) (2010). NeuroRehabilitation. Ein Praxisbuch für 

interdisziplinäre Teams, Heidelberg: Springer. 

Götze, R. & Zenz, K. (2010). Neuropsychologisches Befundsystem für die Ergotherapie (3. 

Auflage), Heidelberg: Springer. 

Schweizer, V. (2005). Neurotraining. Therapeutische Arbeit im kognitiven Bereich mit 

hirngeschädigten Erwachsenen (3., unveränderte Auflage), Heidelberg: Springer. 

Finauer, G. (2009) (Hrsg.). Therapiemanuale für die neuropsychologische Rehabilitation. 

Kognitive und kompetenzorientierte Therapie für die Gruppen- und Einzelbehandlung. 2. 

Auflage, Heidelberg: Springer. 

Prosiegel, M. & Böttger, S. (2007). Neuropsychologische Störungen und ihre 

Rehabilitation. Hirnläsionen. Syndrome. Diagnostik. Therapie. (4. Auflage), München: 

Pflaum. 

Sturm, W., Herrmann, M. & Münte, T.F. (Hrsg.) (2009). Lehrbuch der Klinischen 

Neuropsychologie. Grundlagen, Methoden, Diagnostik, Therapie (2. Auflage), Heidelberg: 

Spektrum. 

Lehrmethoden 

Im Mittelpunkt des didaktischen Konzeptes stehen die Aktivitäten der Studierenden. 

Ergotherapeutische Interventionen werden nach einem theoretischen Input der 

Lehrenden von den Studierenden praktisch erprobt. Schriftliche Reflexionen im Rahmen 

von Einzel-, Partner- und Gruppenarbeiten sowie Diskussionen festigen das erworbene 

Wissen. Gegenseitiges Anleiten der Studierenden bei unterschiedlichen Interventionen 

fördert das soziale Lernen und die didaktischen Fertigkeiten. 

Der Lehrende steht als Begleiterin des Lernprozesses für Fragen und Unterstützung zur 

Verfügung. 


Die Modulnote setzt sich folgendermaßen zusammen: 

The module grade consists of the following: 

� schriftliche Leistungsfeststellung im Rahmen der Modulabschlussprüfung der 

Lehrveranstaltungen Spezielle ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen I und Didaktik der 

Aktivität und Partizipation I mit der Gewichtung 60%: Studierende geben ein 

Portfolio ab (Inhalt ergotherapeutische Prozesse in der Diagnostik und Therapie -> 

Beurteilungskriterien sind Vollständigkeit (Biomechanik, Sensomotorik, psychosozial, 

kognitiv) und Inhalt (Schwerpunkt psychosozial und kognitiv) 

� Die Leistungsfeststellung der Lehrveranstaltung Didaktik der Aktivität und 

Partizipation I (Biomechanische und sensomotorische Befundung) mit der 

Gewichtung 40% fließt in die Modulnote mit ein. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 448

Didaktik der Aktivität und Partizipation I 


Sommersemester 4 SWS DAP2ILV 3 



- kennt biomechanische, motorische, sensorische, perzeptive, kognitive und 

psychosoziale Handlungskompetenzen und ihre Zusammenhänge auf 

PatientInnenebene. 

- ist in der Lage die individuelle Handlungsfähigkeit des Patienten/der Patientin zu 

erfassen. 

- kann den ergotherapeutischen Prozess im Teilschritt Diagnostik anwenden und 



Berufsethik und Ergotherapie im Gesundheitswesen, Methodik der Aktivität und 

Partizipation, Grundlagenmodelle in der Ergotherapie, Einführung in die Anatomie und 

Physiologie, Spezielle Anatomie, Bewegungslehre 


� Clinical Reasoning unter Berücksichtigung der verschiedenen Lebensbereiche, 

Lebensphasen und unterschiedlicher Gesundheitsprobleme von Klienten 

� Analyse der biomechanischen und sensomotorischen Komponente der 

Handlungsperformanz 

� Analyse der psychosozialen und kognitiven Komponente der Handlungsperformanz 

� Einsatz standardisierter Befundungsinstrumente zu den Komponenten (A-One, Tinetti, 

Up & go, Ashworth Scale, Semmes-Weinstein, Rivermead,....) 

� Identifikation, Analyse und Reflexion der Befunderhebung bei ausgewählten 

Fallbeispielen (Anwendung des ICF Modells) 


o Haus KM. 2010. Neurophysiologische Behandlung bei Erwachsenen. Springer - Verlag 

GmbH: Berlin, Heidelberg. 

o Laube W. 2009. Sensomotorisches System. Thieme Verlag: Stuttgart. 

o Schünke M. et al. 2006. Prometheus: Lernatlas der Anatomie, Kopf und 

Neuroanatomie. Thieme Verlag: Stuttgart, New York. 

o Scheepers C. et al.2011. Ergotherapie vom Behandeln zum Handeln. Thieme Verlag: 

Stuttgart, New York 

o Habermann C., Kolster F. 2009. Ergotherapie im Arbeitsfeld der Neurologie, Thieme 

Verlag 

o Feiler M.2003. Klinisches Reasoning in der Ergotherapie, Springer Verlag 

o Kubny Lüke B. 2009 Ergotherapie im Arbeitsfeld der Psychiatrie, Thieme Verlag 

o Köhler K. et al. 2007 Arbeitstherapie und Arbeitsrehabilitation, Thieme Verlag 

Lehrmethoden 

Interaktive Lehr/Lernveranstaltung, kurze Theorieinputs, praktisches Ausprobieren, 

Selbsterfahrung, Videoanalysen,... 


Die Modulnote setzt sich folgendermaßen zusammen: 

The module grade consists of the following: 

� schriftliche Leistungsfeststellung im Rahmen der Modulabschlussprüfung der 

Lehrveranstaltungen Spezielle ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen I und Didaktik der 

Aktivität und Partizipation I mit der Gewichtung 60%: Studierende geben ein 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 449

Portfolio ab (Inhalt ergotherapeutische Prozesse in der Diagnostik und Therapie -> 

Beurteilungskriterien sind Vollständigkeit (Biomechanik, Sensomotorik, psychosozial, 

kognitiv) und Inhalt (Schwerpunkt psychosozial und kognitiv) 

� Die Leistungsfeststellung der Lehrveranstaltung Didaktik der Aktivität und 

Partizipation I (Biomechanische und sensomotorische Befundung) mit der 

Gewichtung 40% fließt in die Modulnote mit ein. 

Ergotherapie in der Neurologie 


Sommersemester 4 SWS ENL2ILV 4 



- kennt die relevanten Krankheitsbilder der Neurologie und kann adäquate Maßnahmen 

im Rahmen des ergotherapeutischen Prozesses anwenden. 

- kennt fachspezifische therapeutische Konzepte und kann sie adäquat für diverse 

Krankheitsbilder funktionell einsetzten. 

- kann ergotherapeutische Behandlungstechniken für das Individuum Patient adäquat 

an die Situation anpassen. 

- kennt im Rahmen des klinischen Fachbereichs der Ergotherapie die 

Betrachtungsweise des EBP Modells und kann diese anwenden. 


Einführung in die Anatomie und Physiologie, Spezielle Anatomie, Bewegungslehre, LV 

Klinische Neurologie und Neuropsychologie (findet parallel statt) 


Spezifische Krankheitsbilder aus dem Fachbereich der Neurologie und deren 

Auswirkungen auf die Handlungsfähigkeit. 

� diverse Sensomotorische Behandlungsverfahren wie z.B Bobath, Perfetti, Affolter, 

PNF, …Training der Rumpfstabilität, Transfertechniken, verbales und physisches 

Anleiten,… 

� Förderung der motorischen Kontrolle, inkl. Tonusregulierung, Armbehandlung 

(Schwerpunkt: Behandlung nach Bobath) 

� Förderung der Greiffunktion/Graphomotorik: normale Entwicklung, deren Variation 

und deren Auswirkungen auf den Alltag), 

� Förderung der Wahrnehmungsverarbeitung (z.B.: Konzept der Sensorischen 

Integration) 

� Förderung der Greiffunktion (Graphomotorik: normale Entwicklung, deren Variation 

und deren 

� Auswirkungen auf den Alltag) 


� Ergotherapie im Arbeitsfeld Neurologie; hrsg. Von Carola Habermann, Stuttgart 

Thieme; ISBN 978-3-13-125622-5 

� Die Therapie des facio-oralen Traktes bei neurologischen Patienten, zwei Fallbeispiele; 

Claudia Gratz; Doris Woite; Idstein: Schulz-Kirchner 2000; ISBN 978-3824801756 

� Spiegeltherapie in der Neurorehabilitation; Antje Nakaten; Christian Dohle; Judith 

Püllen; Idstein: Schulz-Kirchner, 2009; ISBN 978-3-8248-0634-8 

� Das Affolter-Modell. Entwicklungsmodell und gespürte Interaktionstherapie; Unter 

Mitarb. v. Walter Ehwald, Sabine Augstein u. a; München Pflaum; ISBN 

9783790509779 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 450

� Neurophysiologische Behandlungen bei Erwachsenen, Grundlagen der Neurologie, 

Behandlungskonzepte, alltagsorientierte Therapiekonzepte; Karl-Michael Haus, 

Verlag Springer; ISBN 978354095969 

� Update Schlaganfall: Aktuelle Entwicklungen für die Ergotherapie in der Neurologie. 

Herbsttagung 2011 DVE Fachausschuss Neurologie; e-Book 

� Der hemiplegische Patient. Kognitiv-therapeutische Übungen; Carlo Perfetti; Susanne 

Wopfner-Oberleit; Annelies Dieplinger-Falchetto; Verlag Pflaum; ISBN 

9783790507584 

� Praxis des Bobath-Konzepts. Grundlagen – Handlings – Fallbeispiele; Michaela 

Friedhoff; Daniela Schieberle; Verlag Thieme, ISBN 9783131427816 


o Graz, C. & Woite, D. (2000). Die Therapie des fazio-oralen Traktes bei 

neurologischen Patienten, Schulz-Kirchner-Verlag 

o Bioniok A. Dohle CH Govers J. (2009). Spiegeltherapie in der Neurorehabilitation, 

Idstein:Schultz-Kirchner 

o Hofer A. (2009). Das Affolter-Modell. Entwicklungsmodell und gespürte 

Interaktionstherapie, München: Pflaum-Verlag 

o Haus KM (2005). Neurophysiologische Behandlungen bei Erwachsenen: Grundlagen 

der Neurologie Behandlungskonzepte Alltagsorientierte Therapieansätze, Springer 

o Patricia M. Davies, R Gierig, Sonderegger H. (1995) Wieder Aufstehen: 

Frühbehandlung und Rehabilitation für Patienten mit schweren Hirnschädigungen. 

Springer 

o Perfetti C. ( 2008). Der hemiplegische Patient: Kognitiv-therapeutische Übungen, 

Richard Pflaum-Verlag 

o Davies P.M. (2004). Hemiplegie, Springer 

o Fischer A, Murray E.,Bundy A. (1998). Sensorische Integrationstherapie, Theorie und 

Praxis, Heidelberg. Springer 

Lehrmethoden 

praxis-integrierte Lehrveranstaltung: 

Vermittlung von theoretischem Basiswissen über zerebrale, periphere, degenerative, 

entzündliche Erkrankungen und Folgezuständen nach Tumoren im ZNS an Hand eines 

ergotherapeutischen Modells 

o Aufzeigen der Auswirkung von neurologischen Krankheitsbildern auf die 

Handlungsfähigkeit unter Berücksichtigung von Team Learning bzw. fallbasierten 

Lernen 

o Darstellung der auf die Krankheitsbilder bezogenen fachspezifischen 

therapeutischen Konzepte und ergotherapeutischen Behandlungstechniken 

Explizite Vermittlung von sensomotorischen Behandlungsverfahren(Bobath, 

Perfetti, Affolter, PNF, Sensorische Integrationstherapie, Spiegeltherapie, Forced 

Use, Johnstone…): theoretischer Hintergrund, aktuelle Evidenz und darauf 

bezogene manuelle Fertigkeiten 

o Praktisches Üben spezieller sensomotorischer Interventionen mit Schwerpunkt 

auf 

Förderung der motorischen Kontrolle Tonusregulation 

Rumpf- und Scapulamobität bzw.- stabilität 

Transfertechniken 

Lagerungstechniken 

Armbehandlung 

Förderung der Greiffunktion 

Förderng der Wahrnehmungsverarbeitung 


Abschlussprüfung schriftliche Leistungsfeststellung 40% und Abschlussprüfung mündlichpraktische 

Leistungsfeststellung 60% 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 451

Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie I 


Sommersemester 1 SWS EOP2ILV 1 



- kennt spezifische Krankheitsbilder der Orthopädie und kann adäquate Maßnahmen im 

Rahmen des ergotherapeutischen Prozesses anwenden. 








Einführung in die Anatomie und Physiologie, Spezielle Anatomie, Bewegungslehre, 

Klinische Chirurgie und Traumatologie, Allgemeine Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen, 

Grundlagenmodelle der Ergotherapie, Klinische Orthopädie (findet parallel statt) 


Spezifische Krankheitsbilder aus dem Fachbereich der Orthopädie und deren 


� Einführung in das Konzept der orthopädischen manuellen Therapie 


Kategorie A 

� Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie, Traumatologie und Rheumatologie 

Connie Koesling, Thomas Bollinger Herzka 

Verlag Thieme 

ISBN 978-3-13-125611-9 

Kategorie B 

� Handrehabilitation Band 1 (Grundlagen, Erkrankungen) 

B. Waldner-Nilsson 

Verlag Springer 

ISBN 978-3-540-23548-4 

� Handrehabilitation Band 2 (Verletzungen) (bei LVA Ergotherapie in der 

Traumatologie, Innere Medizin und Chirurgie Kategorie A) 

B. Waldner-Nilsson 


� Anatomie und Biomechanik der Hand 

Rainer Zumhasch, Michael Wagner, Sven Klausch 

Verlag Thieme 

ISBN 978-3-13-166511-9 

Kategorie C 

� Handtherapie 

Birgit Schröder 

Verlag Thieme 

ISBN 978-3-13-117642-4 

� Ergotherapeutische Übungen in der Handtherapie 

Sabine Pauli/Gerda Leimer 

Praxis ergotherapie 

ISBN 978-3-8080-0650-4 

� Ergotherapie in der Handrehabilitation 

Isabelle Ziem 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 452

Verlag Huber 

ISBN 978-3-456-84600-2 

� Erkrankungen und Verletzungen der Hand 

Sabine Pauli, Sara Straub 

ISBN 978-3-8248-0855-7 

� Strukturen und Funktionen begreifen 

Jutta Hochschild 

Verlag Thieme 

ISBN 3-13-110421-X 

� Chirurgie der Hand 

Rheuma-Arthrose-Nervenengpässe 

Thieme Verlag 

ISBN 978-3-13-148151-1 

� Konservative Behandlung von Hand- und Fingergelenksarthrose 

Kathrein Malfertheiner 

Verlag Dr. Müller 

ISBN 978-3-639-35223-8 

� Kindliches Rheuma 

Huemer, Kaulfersch 


ISBN 978-3-211-48619-1 

� Die ergotherapeutische Behandlung von Patienten mit chronischer Polyarthritis 

Ulrike Dölle, Martina Pohlmann 

Schulz-Kirchner-Verlag 

ISBN 3-8248-0473-5 

� Chronische Schmerzen, Wie Sie lernen, damit umzugehen 

Patience Higman, Margaret Hönicke 

Schulz-Kirchner-Verlag 

ISBN 978-3-8248-0868-7 

� Präzise Hände 

Schmerzfrei und beweglich 

Dr. med. Christian Larsen, Bea Larsen 

Verlag TRIAS 

� Schienenbehandlung in der Handtherapie 

Esther Bohli 

Verlag Huber 

ISBN 978-3-456-85019-1 

� Schienen in der Handtherapie 

Waltraud Knaus 

Verlag modernes lernen 

ISBN 978-3-8080-0676-4 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag, Power-Point, Video, Skript, Praktische Übungen, schriftliche Gruppenarbeiten 

und Präsentationen 


Zwischenprüfung Präsentation: 30% 

Abschlussprüfung Schriftliche Leistungsfeststellung: 70% 

Ergotherapie in der Gesundheitsförderung I 


Sommersemester 3 SWS EGF2ILV 3 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 453

- kennt die relevantesten Krankheitsbilder und kann adäquate Maßnahmen im Rahmen 

des ergotherapeutischen Prozesses anwenden. 


Krankheitsbilder funktionell einsetzen. 



- kennt die Begriffe der Gesundheitsförderung und die Ziele der Handlungsperformanz 

und kann diese praktisch umsetzen. 

- kennt im Rahmen des Fachbereichs Gesundheitsförderung der Ergotherapie die 



Grundlagenmodelle der Ergotherapie, Allgemeine Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen, 

Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation, Einführung in die Anatomie und Physiologie, 

Spezielle Anatomie, Bewegungslehre 


� Begriffsbestimmungen und rechtliche Grundlagen 

� Arbeitsphysiologie: 

- Belastungs-/Beanspruchungskonzept, etc. 

� Ergonomische Grundlagen Berufskrankheiten, arbeitsbedingte Erkrankungen, 

Arbeitsunfälle 

� Anwendung von Aktivitäts- und Handlungsanalysen. 

� Behandlungsverfahren zur Verbesserung, Erweiterung, Erhaltung und 

Wiederherstellung der Handlungsfähigkeit und Erarbeiten von kompensatorischen 

Strategien (inklusive Umweltanpassung) in den verschiedenen Lebensbereichen und 

Handlungsrollen unter Berücksichtigung der individuellen Lebensabschnitte an den 

Beispielen: 

o Produktivität –ArbeitnehmerInnenschutz und Gesundheitsprävention 

o Freizeit, Selbsterhaltung und Erholung 

Die Techniken werden im Rahmen der EBP ausgewählt und vermittelt. 


Blaha, F. (Hrsg.) (2001). Trends der Bildschirmarbeit. Ein Handbuch über Recht, 

Gesundheit und Ergonomie in der Praxis. Wien, New York: Springer Verlag. 

Jacobs, K. (2008). Ergonomics for therapists. Philadelphia: CV Mosby Co. 

Stein, F., Söderback, I., Cutler, S. & Larson, B. (2006). Occupational therapy & 

ergonomics. West Sussex, England: John Wiley & sons. 

Hartmann, B. (2000). Prävention arbeitsbedingter Rücken- und Gelenkserkrankungen. 

Ergonomie und arbeitsmedizinische Praxis. München: Ecomed. 

Kempf, H.D. (2009). Die neue Rückenschule. Das Praxisbuch. Heidelberg: Springer 

Verlag. 

Kempf, H.D. (2004). Rückenschule für Kinder: Haltungsschäden vorbeugen. Hamburg: 

Rororo Verlag. 

Schur, M. (2011). Mustermappe Arbeitsschutz im Büro. Freiburg: Haufe-Lexware. 

Martin, P., Prümper, J., von Harten, G. (2008). Ergonomie-Prüfer zur Beurteilung von 

Büro- und Bildschirmarbeitsplätzen. Frankfurt am Main: Bund-Verlag 

Hüter-Becker, A., Schewe, H., Heipertz, W. (Hrsg.) (1999). Lehrbuchreihe Band 1, 

Biomechanik, Arbeitsmedizin, Ergonomie. Stuttgart, New York: Thieme Verlag. 

Scaffe, M.E., Reitz, M., Pizzi, M. (2009). Occupational Therapy in the Promotion of Health 

and Wellness. Philadelphia: F.A. Davis Co. 

Hurrelmann, K., Klotz, T., Haisch, J. (2010). Lehrbuch Prävention & 

Gesundheitsförderung. Bern: Huber Verlag. 

Antonovsky, A., Franke, A. (1997). Salutogenese: Zur Entmystifizierung der Gesundheit. 

Tübingen: Dgvt-Verlag. 

www.ris.bka.gv.at / Bundeskanzleramt Rechtsinformationssystem / 

ArbeitnehmerInnenschutzgesetz 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 454

Lehrmethoden 

Vorlesung Theorie, Selbststudium, praxisnahe Übungen, Kleingruppenarbeit und 

Präsentation, Selbsterfahrung und Reflexion 


20 % Kleingruppenarbeit (Inhalt: Assessments zur Begutachtung von Arbeitsplätzen; 

Beurteilungskriterien: Vollständigkeit und Präsentation) 

30 % Erstellen einer Übungsmappe (Inhalt: verhaltens- und verhältnisergonomische 

Interventionen der Ergotherapie in der Gesundheitsförderung und Prävention; schriftliche 

Beurteilungskriterien: Vollständigkeit und Inhalt). 

50 % schriftliche Endprüfung 

Psychosoziale Aspekte in der Ergotherapie II 


Sommersemester 2 SWS PSA2ILV 2 



- kennt gängige Bindungs-, Entwicklungs-, Handlungs- und Verhaltenstheorien. 

- kennt Grundlagen der Wahrnehmungspsychologie. 

- kennt Grundlagen der Arbeitspsychologie. 

- kennt Modelle und Konzepte hinsichtlich Emotion, Motivation, Denken und Gedächtnis 

- und kann das psychologische Wissen als Bezugswissenschaft und als 

handlungsleitende Basis in der Ergotherapie einsetzen. 


Grundlagenmodelle der Ergotherapie 


Entwicklungspsychologie in den verschiedenen Lebensphasen 

• Emotion und Motivation 

• Bindungstheorien, Psychologische Handlungs- und Verhaltenstheorien 

• Wahrnehmungspsychologie 

• Arbeitspsychologie 


B-Literatur 

Goldstein, E.B. (2008). Wahrnehmungspsychologie (7. Auflage). Der Grundkurs. Berlin 

Heidelberg: Spektrum Akademischer Verlag. 

Kauffeld, S. (2011). Arbeits-, Organisations- und Personalpsychologie. Berlin Heidelberg: 

Pringer-Verlag. 

Marcus, B. (2011). Einführung in die Arbeits- und Organisationspsychologie. Lehrbuch 

Basiswissen Psychologie. Wiesbaden: VS Verlag. 

Müsseler, J. & Prinz, W. (Hrsg.) (2002). Allgemeine Psychologie. Heidelberg: Spektrum 

Akademischer Verlag. 

Oerter, R. & Montada, L. (2008). Entwicklungspsychologie (6. Auflage). Weinheim, Basel: 

Beltz Verlag. 

Renneberg, B. & Hammelstein (Hrsg.) (2006). Gesundheitspsychologie. Heidelberg: 

Springer Medizin Verlag. 

Lehrmethoden 

Vortrag, Gruppenarbeiten, Präsentation der Gruppenarbeiten, Diskussion 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 455


Während des Semesters müssen sich die Studierenden mit einem Thema (mögliche 

Themen werden in der Lehrveranstaltung ausgegeben) vertieft auseinandersetzen, eine 

Verbindung zur Ergotherapie herstellen und vor der Klasse präsentieren (40% der 

Leistungsfeststellung). Am Ende des Semesters findet eine schriftliche Prüfung (60% der 

Leistungsfeststellung) statt. 

Berufspraktikum Gesundheitsförderung 


Sommersemester 1 SWS BP2BOPR 2 



- kann die erworbenen fachlich methodischen Kompetenzen anwenden. 

- kann die erworbenen sozial-kommunikativen Kompetenzen und die 

wissenschaftlichen Kompetenzen in der praktischen Arbeit an KlientInnen umsetzen. 

- kann ergotherapeutische Prozesse an KlientInnen anhand der Struktur des 

ergotherapeutischen Prozesses dokumentieren. 


Berufsethik und Ergotherapie im Gesundheitswesen, Grundlagenmodelle der Ergotherapie, 

Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation, Didaktik der Aktivität und Partizipation I, 

Ergotherapie in der Gesundheitsförderung I, Psychosoziale Aspekte in der Ergotherapie I 

und II 


Schwerpunkt ist die Anwendung der in der LV Gesundheitsförderung kennengelernten 

ergotherapeutischen Untersuchungs- und Interventionsmöglichkeiten. 

Der ergotherapeutische Prozess soll am Klienten/an der Klientin dargestellt werden. 

Lehrmethoden 

Die Studierenden werden von der Praktikumsbetreuenden vorbereitet selbständig das 

Praktikum und damit verbunden Aufgabenstellungen durchzuführen: 

� Evaluation eines Arbeitsplatzes 

� Beschreibung des ergotherapeutischen Prozesses im Abschlussbericht 

� Selbstständige Recherchearbeiten und Literaturstudium 

Die Studierenden bekommen zur Verbesserung ihrer Lernfortschritte schriftliches 

Feedback der Praktikumsbetreuenden. 


Absolvierung des Praktikums (40 Stunden): 50% 

Verfassen eines Praktikumsberichts: Schriftliche Leistungsfeststellung 50% 

Medizinisches Englisch II 


Sommersemester 1 SWS MEN2ILV 2 





- kann Alltagskonversationen sowie Beratungs- und Behandlungsgespräche in 

Englischer Sprache durchführen. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 456


Medizinisches Englisch I 


Vertiefung: 

� Berufsrelevantes Fachvokabular Untersuchungs- und Behandlungsgespräche 

� Beratungsgespräche 

� Alltagskonversation 

� Bearbeitung der englischsprachigen Fachliteratur 

� Referate in englischer Sprache (inkl. englischer Fachterminologie) 


The textbook Fachenglisch für Gesundheitsberufe: Physiotherapie, Ergotherapie, 

Logopädie (Sandra Schiller, Springer, 3. Auflage), ISBN: 978-3-642-17291-5, is 

mandatory. 

Lehrmethoden 

A variety of individual, pair-work, group-work and open-class activities in the shape of 

exercises, discussions and role-plays will be used to integrate and supplement the 

material presented in the mandatory textbook. 

Both students and lecturer are jointly responsible for the success of this course. 


80% Final Written Examination: tasks and questions testing content, vocabulary and 

grammar areas covered in class (e.g. gap-fill, matching and sentence completion 

exercises); 

exam duration: 50 minutes 

20% Presentation Project 

Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten 


Sommersemester 1 SWS WA2VO 2 



- kennt die Prinzipien wissenschaftlich fundierten Arbeitens (Qualitative und 

quantitative Forschungsmethoden) und kann diese anwenden. 


Proseminar für Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten, Berufsethik und Ergotherapie im 

Gesundheitswesen 


Grundlagen und Bedeutung quantitativer Forschungsmethodik; 

Quantitativer und qualitativer Forschungsprozess: 

� Formulieren quantitativer und qualitativer Forschungsfragen 

� quantitative und qualitative Forschungsdesigns 

� Möglichkeiten der Datenerhebung 

� Fragebögen erstellen 

� Ethik in der qualitativen und quantitativen Forschung 


� Creswell, J.W. (2009). Research Design. London: Sage Publications. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 457

� Curtin, M. & Fossey, E. (2007). Appraising the trustworthiness of qualitative 

studies: Guidelines for occupational therapists. Australian Occupational Therapy 

Journal, 54, 88-94. 

� De Poy, E. & Gitlin, L. (2005). Introduction to Research. St. Louis: Elsevier Mosby. 

� Eid, M., Gollwitzer, M. & Schmitt, M. (2010). Statistik und Forschungsmethoden: 

Lehrbuch. Weinheim: Beltz Psychologie Verlags Union. 

� Flick, U. (2004). Qualitative Sozialforschung. Reinbek: Rowohlt. 

� Bortz, J. & Döring, N. (2006). Forschungsmethoden und Evaluation: für Human- 

und Sozialwissenschaftler. Heidelberg: Springer Verlag. 

Lehrmethoden 

Lehrvortrag, Gruppenarbeiten, Diskussionen 


schriftliche Prüfung am Ende des Semesters 100% 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 458


BIO-Psychosoziale Aspekte in der Gerontologie 


Wintersemester 1 SWS BPSAG3VO 2 



- kennt das Gedankenmodell der Salutogenese. 

- ist für spezifische Herausforderungen der Lebenssituation alternder Menschen 

sensibilisiert. 


Soziologie 


� Das Prinzip der Salutogenese 

� Das Prinzip der Validation 

� Das Modell des reifen Organismus 

� „Palliative care― und die Handlungsrollen der Ergotherapie 

Klinische Psychiatrie 


Wintersemester 1 SWS KPSY3VO 2 




ausgewählter psychiatrischer Krankheitsbilder. 



Spezielle Anatomie, Klinische Neurologie und Neuropsychologie 


� Geschichte der Psychiatrie, Suizid, Depression, Manie, Burn out 

� psychische Entwicklung des Menschen 

� der psychisch beeinträchtigte alte und junge Mensch 

� Anamnese, Ätiologie, Symptome, Auswirkungen für den Betroffenen, 

und ärztliche Intervention bei ausgesuchten psychiatrischen Krankheitsbildern 


Klinische Geriatrie 


Wintersemester 1 SWS KGER3VO 2 




ausgewählter geriatrischer Krankheitsbilder. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 459



Klinische Innere Medizin, Klinische Neurologie und Neuropsychologie, Einführung in die 

Anatomie und Physiologie, Spezielle Anatomie, Bewegungslehre 


� Gesellschaftliche Aspekte des Alterns 

� Biologische und physiologische Aspekte des Alterns 

� Altern und Prävention 

� Geriatrische Leitsyndrome/Multimorbidität 

� Anamnese, Ätiologie, Symptome – Bedeutung für den Alltag des Betroffenen 

� ärztliche Intervention bei ausgesuchten geriatrischen 

Krankheitsbildern in Absprache mit den ergotherapeutischen Fachverantwortlichen 


Klinische Pädiatrie 


Wintersemester 1 SWS KPÄD3VO 2 




ausgewählter geriatrischer Krankheitsbilder. 



Einführung in die Anatomie und Physiologie, Spezielle Anatomie, Bewegungslehre, 

Klinische Neurologie und Neuropsychologie 


� (Neuro)pädiatrische Untersuchung des Säuglings, Kindes und Jugendlichen (inkl. 

Mutter-Kind-Pass) 

� Überblick über Geburtsverlauf, Komplikationen, Geburtstraumata, Frühgeburt 

� Ursache, Klinik, Diagnostik, Therapie und Rehabilitation ergotherapeutisch relevanter 

Krankheitsbilder im Kindesalter 

� Geburtstraumen 

� Entwicklungsstörungen 

� Neuropädiatrische und kinderpsychiatrische Erkrankungen (z.B. ICP, SHT, 

Neuromuskuläre Erkrankungen, ADHS, Essstörungen,…) 

� Überblick über häufige Infektionskrankheiten und Chromosomenanomalien 

� Stoffwechselerkrankungen 

� Sinnes- und Mehrfachbehinderungen 


Spezielle Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen II 


Wintersemester 4 SWS SEM3FPÜ 3 



FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 460

- kennt gängige Behandlungsmaßnahmen zur Verbesserung, Erweiterung, Erhaltung, 

Wiederherstellung und Kompensation mit dem Ansatzpunkt biomechanischer 

Fähigkeitskomponenten und kann diese durchführen. 




- kennt die Grundlagen der Schienenherstellung sowie verschiedene Schienenarten. 

- kann ausgewählte Schienen praktisch herstellen. 


Grundlagenmodelle der Ergotherapie, Einführung in die Anatomie und Physiologie, 

Spezielle Anatomie, Bewegungslehre, Klinische Chirurgie und Traumatologie, Klinische 

Orthopädie, Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie I, Didaktik der Aktivität und Partizipation I 

Didaktik der Aktivität und Partizipation II interagiert mit dieser Lehrveranstaltung 

(Modul) 


� Vermittlung von: -theoretischem Hintergrund –zugehörigen Maßnahmen, 

Methoden, Mitteln und Konzepten -einer Zuordnung zu den Zielsetzungen der 

Wiederherstellung, Kompensation –aktueller Evidenz 



� Praktisches Üben der individuellen Handlungsfähigkeiten im klinischen Kontext 

aller PatientInnengruppen für die Wiederherstellung der Partizipation 

Fokus: 

� Schienenherstellung 

� Techniken zur Muskelkräftigung, physikalische Maßnahmen 

� Narbenbehandlung,... 

Didaktik in der Aktivität und Partizipation II 


Wintersemester 4 SWS DAP3ILV 3 



- kann den ergotherapeutischen Prozess im Teilschritt Behandlungsplanung und 

Zielsetzung praktisch anwenden, umsetzen und dokumentieren. 

- kennt die Standards und Zielsetzungen im Teilschritt Behandlungsplanung und 

Zielsetzung im ergotherapeutischen Prozess. 


Grundlagenmodelle der Ergotherapie, Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation, Didaktik 

der Aktivität und Partizipation I, Ergotherapie in der Gesundheitsförderung I, 

Ergotherapie in der Neurologie, Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie I 

Folgende Lehrveranstaltungen finden parallel statt und interagieren mit dieser 

Lehrveranstaltung: 

Spezielle Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen II (Modul) 

Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie II 

Ergotherapie in der Chirurgie, Traumatologie und Innere Medizin 

Ergotherapie in der Pädiatrie 

Ergotherapie in der Geriatrie 

Ergotherapie in der Gesundheitsförderung II 

Ergotherapie in der Psychiatrie 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 461


Kriterien für eine optimale Behandlungsplanung und Durchführung: 

1. Evidenzbasiert, 

2. effektiv (wirtschaftlich), 

3. klientenzentriert, 

4. dem Berufsbild, den gesetzlichen und ethischen Richtlinien entsprechend. 

� Therapieplanung und (soweit möglich) Umsetzung therapeutischer Interventionen 

anhand komplexer Fallbeispiele (z.B. multiple Krankheitsbilder, begrenzte zeitliche 

oder finanzielle Ressourcen, multidisziplinäres und multikulturelles Arbeiten, 

Anwendung des ICF) 

� Vermittlung der Notwendigkeit von Therapiezielen. Begriffe klären, welche im 

Zusammenhang der Zielformulierung stehen, Operationalisierung, Kategorisierung, 

Selektieren und Hierarchisieren von Zielen, gängige Möglichkeiten der Zieleinteilung 

im ET-Prozess. 

� Übungen um Ziele korrekt, klientenzentriert und klar zu formulieren. Erarbeitung 

einer Denkstruktur um aufeinander aufbauende Therapieziele zu identifizieren. 

� Begriffsklärung: Therapieansatz, Maßnahme, Methode, Mittel und Konzepte. Settings 

für die Umsetzung von Interventionen. Systematisierung von Therapieansätzen 

(Fähigkeitskomponenten, Lebensbereiche und Umwelt)und ihre Zuordnung zu den 

Zielsetzungen der Wiederherstellung, Kompensation und Adaptation. Level of 

Evidence als Entscheidungskriterium bei der Auswahl therapeutischer Interventionen. 

Anhand konkreter Beispiele aus der Praxis werden verschiedene Instrumente der 

Evaluation angewendet und diskutiert. 

Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie II 


Wintersemester 1 SWS EOP3ILV 2 



- kennt spezifische Krankheitsbilder der Orthopädie und kann adäquate Maßnahmen im 

Rahmen des ergotherapeutischen Prozesses anwenden. 










Orthopädie, Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie I, Didaktik der Aktivität und Partizipation I 


Spezifische Krankheitsbilder aus dem Fachbereich der Orthopädie und deren 


� Einführung in das Konzept der muskulären Rehabilitation 

Ergotherapie in der Chirurgie, Traumatologie und Innere Medizin 


Wintersemester 2 SWS ECTIM3ILV 2 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 462



- kennt spezifische Krankheitsbilder der Chirurgie, Traumatologie und Inneren Medizin 

und kann adäquate Maßnahmen im Rahmen des ergotherapeutischen Prozesses 

anwenden. 










Orthopädie, Klinische Innere Medizin, Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie I, Didaktik der 

Aktivität und Partizipation I 


Spezifische Krankheitsbilder aus den Fachbereichen: 

� Chirurgie 

� Traumatologie 

� Inneren Medizin 

und deren individuelle Auswirkungen auf die Handlungsfähigkeit. Übungen zur ersten 

Hilfe. 

Ergotherapie in der Pädiatrie 


Wintersemester 3 SWS EPÄD3ILV 2 



- kennt die relevanten Krankheitsbilder der Pädiatrie und kann adäquate Maßnahmen 










Spezielle Anatomie, Bewegungslehre, Allgemeine Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen, 

Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation, Klinische Neurologie und Neuropsychologie, 

spezielle Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen I, Didaktik der Aktivität und Partizipation I, 

Psychosoziale Aspekte in der Ergotherapie II, Klinische Pädiatrie (findet parallel statt) 


Spezifische Krankheitsbilder aus dem Fachbereich: 

� Pädiatrie 

und deren individuelle Auswirkungen auf die Handlungsfähigkeit. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 463

Behandlungstechniken fließen im Rahmen des ET-Prozesses in die Behandlung von 

pädiatrischen Patienten und Klienten ein. 


Ergotherapie in der Geriatrie 


Wintersemester 1 SWS EGER3ILV 1 



- kennt die relevanten Krankheitsbilder der Geriatrie und kann adäquate Maßnahmen 










Spezielle Anatomie, Bewegungslehre, Allgemeine Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen, 

Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation, Klinische Neurologie und Neuropsychologie, 

Klinische Innere Medizin, Ergotherapie in der Neurologie, spezielle Ergotherapeutische 

Maßnahmen I, Didaktik der Aktivität und Partizipation I, Klinische Geriatrie (findet 

parallel statt), Bio-psychosoziale Aspekte der Gerontologie (findet parallel statt) 



� Geriatrie 

und deren individuellen Auswirkungen auf die Handlungsfähigkeit. 

Die Multimorbidität (Symptomebene) und die Zusammenhänge der Fachbereiche (Innere 

Medizin, Neurologie) stehen im Fokus dieser Lehrveranstaltung. 


Ergotherapie in der Gesundheitsförderung II 


Wintersemester 1 SWS EGF3ILV 1 



- kennt die relevanten Krankheitsbilder des Fachbereichs kann adäquate Maßnahmen 






- kennt im Rahmen des Fachbereichs der Ergotherapie die Betrachtungsweise des EBP 

Modells und kann diese anwenden. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 464

- kennt Behandlungsverfahren der beruflichen Integration zur Verbesserung, 

Erweiterung, Erhaltung und Wiederherstellung der Handlungsfähigkeit und kann diese 

anwenden. 

- kennt relevante psychiatrische Krankheitsbilder und kann adäquate Maßnahmen zur 

beruflichen Integration planen und umsetzen. 




Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie, Ergotherapie in der Neurologie, Ergotherapie in der 

Gesundheitsförderung I, Soziologie, Ergotherapie in der Psychiatrie (findet parallel statt), 

Klinische Psychiatrie (findet parallel statt) 


Anwendung von Aktivitäts- und Handlungsanalysen. 

Behandlungsverfahren zur Verbesserung, Erweiterung, Erhaltung und Wiederherstellung 

der Handlungsfähigkeit und Erarbeiten von kompensatorischen Strategien (inklusive 

Umweltanpassung) in den verschiedenen Lebensbereichen und Handlungsrollen unter 

Berücksichtigung der individuellen Lebensabschnitte am Beispiel: 

� Freizeit und Selbsterhaltung am Beispiel Produktivität –Berufliche Integration 

Ergotherapie in der Psychiatrie 


Wintersemester 2 SWS EPSY3ILV 2 



- kennt die relevanten Krankheitsbilder der Psychiatrie und kann adäquate Maßnahmen 










Spezielle ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen I, Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation, 

Didaktik der Aktivität und Partizipation I, Psychosoziale Aspekte in der Ergotherapie II, 

Soziologie, Klinische Psychiatrie (findet parallel statt) 



• Psychiatrie 

und deren individuellen Auswirkungen auf die Handlungsfähigkeit. 


Creek, J. & Lougher, L. (2008). Occupational Therapy and Mental Health (4th Edition), 

Churchill Livingstone. 

Köhler, K. & Steier-Mecklenburg, F. (Hrsg.) (2007). Arbeitstherapie und 

Arbeitsrehabilitation, Stuttgart: Thieme. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 465

Kubny-Lüke, B. (Hrsg.) (2009). Ergotherapie im Arbeitsfeld Psychiatrie (2. Auflage), 


Psychosoziale Aspekte in der Ergotherapie III 


Wintersemester 2 SWS PSA3ILV 2 



- kennt den Einfluss psychischer Belastungsfaktoren auf die Gesundheit. 

- erkennt Krisen, kennt Lösungsansätze für schwierige Situationen und kann 

Krisenintervention praktisch durchführen. 

- kennt psychosoziale Aspekte von Sterben und Tod und kann eigene Erfahrungen und 

Einstellungen reflektieren. 


Psychosoziale Aspekte in der Ergotherapie I und II, Soziologie 


Entwicklungspsychologie in den verschiedenen Lebensphasen 

- Psychohygiene: 

o Helfersyndrom 

o Burnout 

o Mobbing 

- Krisen und Krisenintervention 

- Umgang mit Sterben und Tod 

Medizinisches Englisch III 


Wintersemester 1 SWS MEN3ILV 2 




- ist in der Lage Untersuchungsgespräche in englischer Sprache zu führen und 

ergotherapeutische Aufträge zu erteilen. 


- kann mit englischsprachiger medizinischer und ergotherapeutischer Terminologie in 

Wort und Schrift kommunizieren. 

- kann Alltagskonversationen sowie Beratungs- und Behandlungsgespräche in 

englischer Sprache durchführen. 


Medizinisches Englisch I und II 


Professionalisierung: 

� Berufsrelevantes Fachvokabular (Ergotherapie- und Medizinspezifische 

Fachterminologie) 

� Untersuchungs- und Behandlungsgespräche 

� Evaluierung der englischsprachigen Fachliteratur 

� Erstellung von englischsprachigen Fachtexten 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 466

� Präsentationen in englischer Sprache (inkl. englischer Fachterminologie) 

Methoden der Evaluation 


Wintersemester 1 SWS MEV3ILV 2 



- kann einfache statistische Verfahren durchführen und interpretieren. 

- versteht den Zusammenhang zwischen Wissenschaft und Praxis und kann auf Grund 

einer Kritischen Auseinandersetzung im Sinne der Evaluation Therapiemethoden 

adaptieren. 


Proseminar für wissenschaftliches Arbeiten, Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten 


� Grundlagen der (deskriptiven) Statistik (Variablen, Messung und Konstrukte); 

� Auswertungsverfahren der quantitativen und qualitativen Forschung; 

� Durchführen der Datenanalyse mittels SPSS 

� Graphische Darstellung und Interpretation von statistischen Auswertungen 

(Ergebnissen) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 467


Berufspraktikum I 


Sommersemester 2 SWS BP4BP 30 




- kann die erworbenen sozial-kommunikativen Kompetenzen und 

- kann die wissenschaftlichen Kompetenzen in der Praktischen Arbeit am Patienten 

umsetzen. 

- kann ergotherapeutische Prozesse am Patienten/an der Patientin nach dem 

ergotherapeutischen Prozess dokumentieren. 




Spezielle Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen I und II, Didaktik in der Aktivität und 

Partizipation I und II, Ergotherapie in der Gesundheitsförderung I und II, Ergotherapie in 

der Neurologie, Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie I und II, Ergotherapie in der Chirurgie, 

Traumatologie und Innere Medizin, Ergotherapie in der Psychiatrie, Ergotherapie in der 

Geriatrie, Psychosoziale Aspekte in der Ergotherapie I, II und III 


Schwerpunkt ist die Anwendung der im Kernstudium kennengelernten 

ergotherapeutischen Untersuchungs- und Interventionsmöglichkeiten bezogen auf 

klinische Fachbereiche. 

Im Rahmen der praktischen Ausbildung sind: 

1. in den Pflicht- und Wahlbereichen fundierte Erfahrungen in der PatientInnenbetreuung 

sowie fundierte Kenntnisse, Fähigkeiten und Fertigkeiten in der Durchführung 

ergotherapeutischer Maßnahmen zu erwerben und 

2. mindestens 20 Prozesse gemäß Anlage 5 in den Pflichtbereichen durchzuführen. 

Pflichtbereiche: 

� Orthopädie, Traumatologie, Handchirurgie, innere Medizin einschließlich 

Rheumatologie 

� Psychiatrie 

� Geriatrie 

� Neurologie 

� Kinder- und Jugendheilkunde 

Wahlbereiche je nach individuellem Schwerpunkt: 

� Spezielle klinische Bereiche; 

� berufliche Integration; 

� Multiprofessioneller Bereich, insbesondere in Zusammenarbeit mit 

PhysiotherapeutInnen, DiätologInnen und LogopädInnen; 

� Arbeitsmedizin; 

� Gesundheitsförderung und Prävention. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 468


Intra- und interdisziplinäre Zusammenarbeit in der Ergotherapie 


Wintersemester 1 SWS IIZE4ILV 1 



- kann die Zuständigkeit anderer Gesundheitsberufe sowie sonstiger Berufe im 

Gesundheitssektor erkennen und im multiprofessionellen Team zusammenarbeiten. 


Berufsethik und Ergotherapie im Gesundheitswesen, Psychosoziale Aspekte in der 

Ergotherapie I 


� Kernkompetenz und Schnittstellen angrenzender Berufe im interdisziplinären Team 

o PhysiotherapeutInnen, LogopädInnen, DiätologInnen, Gesundheits- und 

Krankenpfleger, Hebammen, medizinischer Masseur, Heilmasseur, MTF, 

Orthopädietechniker, Psychologen, Sozialarbeiter, Besonderheiten bzw. 

Herausforderungen der Arbeit im interdisziplinären Team 

� Der/Die PatientIn steht im Mittelpunkt der Zusammenarbeit. 

� Erkennung der Synergismen 

Berufsentwicklung & Qualitätsmanagement in der Ergotherapie 


Wintersemester 2 SWS BQE5ILV 2 



- kennt die Grundlagen des Projektmanagements. 

- kennt die Grundlagen des Qualitätsmanagements. 

- können Elemente des Projekt- und Qualitätsmanagements in einem 

ergotherapeutischen Kontext anwenden. 


Berufsethik und Ergotherapie im Gesundheitswesen, Grundlagenmodelle der Ergotherapie 


� Basisinhalte: Wissens- und Projektmanagement 

� Qualitätsmanagement in der Forschung 

� Organisationsentwicklung (Organisationstheorie) 

� Auswahlverfahren; Administration und Marketing (Public Relations) Controlling 

� Strategieentwicklung 

� Berufsfeldentwicklung auf Basis einer SWOT Analyse 

� Qualitätsmanagement in Bezug auf den ergotherapeutischen Prozess 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 469

Supervision I 


Wintersemester 1 SWS SV5WK 1 



- lernt Supervision als einen wichtigen Teil der Arbeit als Ergotherapeut/in kennen. 

- erlangt Rollenklarheit in der Studierenden-Rolle und nähert sich an die neue 

Berufsrolle an. 

- lernt interne und externe Ressourcen wahrzunehmen und zu nutzen, Netzwerke zu 

knüpfen und setzt sich persönlich und fachlich mit seinem/ihrem Handeln im 

Praktikum auseinander. 


Keine 


� Psychohygiene und spezifische Gesundheitsförderung 

� Selbstorganisation 

� Selbstreflexion 

� Wahrnehmung persönlicher und fachlicher Grenzen 

� Eigene Ressourcenerkennung 

� Burn-Out Syndrom und Vermeidungsstrategien 

� Erkennen spezieller Situationen im Berufsalltag und Entwickeln von Lösungsstrategien 

an Hand von Fallbeispielen aus dem eigenen Erfahrungsschatz 

� Zurechtfinden in den verschiedenen Rollen, die den Studierenden abverlangt werden 

� Übungen zur Selbstwahrnehmung 

� Reflexion eigener Handlungsrollen und der eigenen Handlungsgeschichte 

(occupational history), 

� Beschäftigung mit der eigenen Occupational Balance 

� Fallsupervision 

Psychosomatik 


Wintersemester 2 SWS PSOM5ILV 3 



- kennt die Ursache, Klinik, Diagnostik, medizinische Therapie und deren 

Rehabilitationsprozesse. 



Klinische Psychiatrie 


Auswirkung von psychischen Krankheiten wie: 

� Psychosen (insbesondere Schizophrenie; inkl. organische Psychosen z.B. Demenz) 

� depressives Syndrom 

� manisches Syndrom 

� Essstörungen 

� Suchterkrankungen 

� Neurosen 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 470

� Borderline Syndrom 

� Suizidalität auf das somato-viszerale System. 

� Auswirkung der Medikation von PatientInnen auf das Bewegungsverhalten und 

den Umgang mit PatientInnen. 

Didaktik in der Aktivität und Partizipation III 


Wintersemester 2 SWS DAP5ILV 3 



- kann den ergotherapeutischen Prozess in ihren einzelnen Teilschritten praktisch 

anwenden, umsetzten und dokumentieren. 

- kennt die Standards und die Zielsetzung des Prozesses. 

- kann diesen Prozess an Hand eines Fallbeispiels lösen. 

- ist in der Durchführung gängiger Behandlungsstrategien geübt und beherrscht 

Routineaufgaben im Behandlungsprozess. 

- kennt im Rahmen des ergotherapeutischen Prozesses die Grenzen der eigenen 

Handlungsperformanz und kann gegebenenfalls andere medizinische Berufsgruppen 

zu Rate ziehen. 

- kennt biomechanische, motorische, sensorisch-perzeptiv-kognitive und psychosoziale 

Handlungskompetenzen und ihre Zusammenhänge auf PatientInnenebene. 

- ist in der Lage die individuelle Handlungsfähigkeit des Patienten/der Patientin zu 

erfassen und entsprechend darauf zu reagieren bzw. den Behandlungsplan zu 

adaptieren. 


Berufsethik und Ergotherapie im Gesundheitswesen, Grundlagenmodelle der 

Ergotherapie, Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation, Allgemeine ergotherapeutische 

Maßnahmen, Didaktik der Aktivität und Partizipation I und II, Spezielle 

Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen I und II, Ergotherapie in der Gesundheitsförderung I und 

II, Ergotherapie in der Neurologie, Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie I und II, Ergotherapie 

in der Chirurgie, Traumatologie und Innere Medizin, Ergotherapie in der Pädiatrie, 

Ergotherapie in der Geriatrie, Ergotherapie in der Psychiatrie 


� Durchführung des ergotherapeutischen Prozesses Anhand ausgewählter Fallbeispiele. 

� In diesen Ablauf fließen die Grundlagenmodelle und die biopsychosozialen Modelle in 

der Abhandlung ein. 

Spezielle Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen III 


Wintersemester 3 SWS SEM5FPÜ 2 




und Erfahrungen planen und durchführen. 

- ist in der Durchführung gängiger Behandlungsstrategien geübt und beherrscht 

Routineaufgaben im Behandlungsprozess. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 471

- kennt biomechanische, motorische, sensorisch-perzeptive-kognitive und 

psychosoziale Handlungskompetenzen und ihre Zusammenhänge auf 

PatientInnenebene. 

- kann Maßnahmen zur Verbesserung, Erweiterung, Erhaltung, Wiederherstellung und 

Kompensation mit dem Ansatzpunkt psychosoziale Fähigkeitskomponenten 

durchführen. 


Berufsethik und Ergotherapie im Gesundheitswesen, Grundlagenmodelle der 

Ergotherapie, Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation, Allgemeine ergotherapeutische 

Maßnahmen, Didaktik der Aktivität und Partizipation I und II, Spezielle 

Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen I, Psychosoziale Aspekte in der Ergotherapie I, Klinische 

Psychiatrie 


� Vermittlung von: -theoretischem Hintergrund –zugehörigen Maßnahmen, 

Methoden, Mitteln und Konzepten -einer Zuordnung zu den Zielsetzungen der 

Wiederherstellung, Kompensation –aktueller Evidenz 

� Praktisches Üben spezieller Interventionen. 



� Fokus: 

Themenzentrierte Interaktion, therapeutische Grundhaltung; ergotherapeutische 

Behandlung unter spezieller Berücksichtigung der psychosozialen Aspekte; 

ergotherapeutische Vorgehensweise bei 

ausgewählten Krankheitsbildern/Störungsbildern wie: Schizophrenie, Affektive Störungen, 

Erkrankungen des Alters, Suizid, Psychosomatik, etc. 

Spezielle psychosoziale Behandlungsverfahren: Arbeit mit bildnerischen Mitteln, 

Eltern/Angehörigenarbeit, Puppen- und Rollenspiel, 

Krisenintervention, Biografiearbeit, aktivierende Therapie 


Stein, F. & Cutler, S. (Hrsg.) (2002). Psychosozial Occupational Therapy. A holistic 

approach (2. Edition), Albany: Delmar. 

Kubny-Lüke, B. (Hrsg.) (2009). Ergotherapie im Arbeitsfeld Psychiatrie (2. Auflage), 


Bachelorarbeit I und Bachelorseminar 


Wintersemester 1 SWS BP5SE 5 





- kann forschungswürdige Fragen und Phänomene aus der ergotherapeutischen Praxis 

und Theorie formulieren. 

- kann eine Fragestellung methodologisch abhandeln und dokumentieren. 

- hat die Bachelorarbeit I fertiggestellt. 


Proseminar für wissenschaftliches Arbeiten, Wissenschaftliches Arbeiten, Methoden der 

Evaluation, Medizinisches Englisch I, II und III 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 472


- Formulierung einer eigenen Forschungsfrage 

- Fachhochschulspezifische (Abteilung für Ergotherapie bezogene) Vorgaben für die 

Bachelorarbeit I 

- Erstellung eines Konzeptes für die Bachelorarbeit I 

- (Gemeinsame) Reflexion des Konzeptes sowie der Bachelorarbeit I 

Berufspraktikum II und begleitendes Seminar 


Wintersemester 1 SWS BP5BP 10 




- kann die erworbenen sozial-kommunikativen Kompetenzen und 

- die wissenschaftlichen Kompetenzen in der praktischen Arbeit am Patienten 

umsetzen. 










Geriatrie, Psychosoziale Aspekte in der Ergotherapie I, II und III 



3. in den Pflicht- und Wahlbereichen fundierte Erfahrungen in der Patientenbetreuung 

sowie fundierte Kenntnisse, Fähigkeiten und Fertigkeiten in der Durchführung 

ergotherapeutischer Maßnahmen zu erwerben und 

4. mindestens 20 Prozesse gemäß Anlage 5 in den Pflichtbereichen durchzuführen. 


� Orthopädie, Traumatologie, Handchirurgie, innere Medizin einschließlich 

Rheumatologie 


� Geriatrie 







PhysiotherapeutInnen, DiätologInnen und LogopädInnen; 

� Arbeitsmedizin; 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 473

� Gesundheitsförderung und Prävention. 

Forschung in der Ergotherapie 


Wintersemester 3 SWS FE5ILV 3 



- kann eigenständige Forschungsfragen nach wissenschaftlichen Aspekten lösen. 



Evaluation, Englisch I, II und III 


Grundlagen und Bedeutung qualitativer Forschungsmethodik in der ET; 

Qualitativer Forschungsprozess: 

o Kriterien qualitativer Forschung; 

o qualitative Forschungsdesigns; 

o Übungen zu qualitativen Forschungsmethoden der 

Datensammlung, wie Beobachtung, Interviews, Befragung,.. ; Übungen zu Datenanalyse: 

- Outline zu frei gewähltem Thema inkl. Literaturstudium 

- Konzeptionierung eines Exposés 

Durchführung eines Pilotforschungsprojekts 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 474


Internationale ergotherapeutische Kooperationen 


Sommersemester 2 SWS IEK6EX 2 



- nimmt an einer Exkursion teil. 

- nutzt die Exkursion um sich international zu vernetzen und berufsrelevante 

Informationen auszutauschen. 


Englisch I, II und III 


Exkursion: 

� Internationales Networking, Austausch von berufsrelevanten Informationen 

� Internationale Forschungsentwicklung/-Möglichkeiten im Bereich der Ergotherapie 

im Vergleich (Ähnlichkeiten und Unterschiede) 

� Austauschmöglichkeiten für Praktika und Projekte 

Kooperationsentwicklung mit internationalen Ausbildungsstätten und 

Forschungsinstituten (intra- und interdisziplinär) 

Rechtswissenschaften im Gesundheitswesen 


Sommersemester 1 SWS RWGW6VO 2 



- kennt die Grenzen der eigenverantwortlichen Berufsausübung und kann den Bezug 

zu den entsprechenden gesetzlichen Regelungen herstellen. 


Keine 


� Einführung: Rechtsbegriff / Rechtsordnung / öffentliches Recht / Privatrecht / 

Europarecht 

� Arbeitsrecht 

� Rechtliche Aspekte der Ergotherapie im Besonderen die Grenzen der 

eigenverantwortlichen Berufsausübung - bezugnehmend auf das MTD-Gesetz 

� EU-Recht – Kompatibilität, 

� Sozialversicherungsrecht 

� Rechtliche Grundlagen der Dokumentation und der Verschwiegenheitspflicht 

� Krankenhausmanagement im Bezug zu den Gesundheitsberufen 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 475

Community Based Rehabilitation/Service 


Sommersemester 2 SWS CBR6ILV 2 



- kennt die individuelle Handlungsfähigkeit des Patienten oder der Patientin in den 

Lebensbereichen unter Berücksichtigung der Umweltfaktoren hinsichtlich der sozialen, 

kulturellen, physischen und institutionellen Gegebenheiten. 


Grundlagenmodelle der Ergotherapie, Psychosoziale Aspekte der Ergotherapie II und III, 

Ergotherapie in der Gesundheitsförderung I und II, Didaktik der Aktivität und 

Partizipation I, II und III, Soziologie 


� Theorien und Konzepte der Lebensqualität und Gesundheitsförderung, 

Gesundheitsschutz und Sozialhygiene in modernen Gesellschaften, Umwelt und 

Gesundheit, 

� Psychosoziale Einflüsse auf Gesundheit und Krankheit in verschiedenen Lebensaltern, 

Grundlagen der Planung, Entwicklung und Implementierung von 

Gesundheitsprogrammen, 

� Praxis der Gesundheitsförderung, Prävention und Intervention im lokalen, regionalen 

und nationalen Bereich 

Betriebswirtschaftliche Grundlagen 


Sommersemester 2 SWS BWLG6ILV 3 



- kennt die Grundlagen der Betriebsführung. 

- kennt die Grundzüge einer betriebswirtschaftlichen Organisation der freiberuflichen 

Praxis. 


keine 


� Allgemeine Grundlagen der Betriebsführung 

� Organisationslehre und Betriebsführung im intra- und extramuralen Bereich 

� Businessplan 

� Personalmanagement (Bedarf, Auswahl, Einsatz, Entwicklung) 

� Ressourcenmanagement 

� Budgeterstellung 

� Finanzierung 

� Die freiberufliche ergotherapeutische Praxis 

� Organisation und Führung 

� Führung und Lehre 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 476

� Beratung und Anleitung als Führungsaufgabe 

Supervision II 


Sommersemester 1 SWS SV6WK 1 



- setzt sich persönlich und fachlich mit seinem/ihrem Handeln im Praktikum 

auseinander. 

- kann sein/ihr Handeln reflektieren. 

- nähert sich an die neue Berufsrolle an. 

- ist sich der Grenzen und Möglichkeiten seines/ihres zukünftigen Berufes bewusst. 

- kennt bzw. erkennt seine/ihre eigenen Grenzen und geht damit verantwortungsvoll 

um. 


Supervision I 


� Selbstorganisation, 

� Selbstreflexion, 

� Wahrnehmung persönlicher und fachlicher Grenzen, 

� Eigene Ressourcenerkennung, Burn-Out Syndrom und Vermeidungsstrategien, 

� Erkennen spezieller Situationen im Berufsalltag und Entwickeln von Lösungsstrategien 

an Hand von Fallbeispielen aus dem eigenen Erfahrungsschatz. 

� Zurechtfinden in den verschiedenen Rollen, die den Studierenden abverlangt werden. 

� Übungen zur Selbstwahrnehmung 

� Reflexion eigener Handlungsrollen und der eigenen Handlungsgeschichte 

(occupational history), 

� Beschäftigung mit der eigenen Occupational Balance, 

� Fallsupervision 

Multimedia in der Ergotherapie 


Sommersemester 2 SWS MME6ILV 2 



- kann ergotherapeutische Aktivitäten analysieren, planen und durchführen. 

- kennt therapeutische Anwendungsmöglichkeiten erlernter Techniken und Methoden. 


Allgemeine ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen, Methodik der Aktivität und Partizipation, 

Spezielle Ergotherapeutische Maßnahmen I und III, Ergotherapie in der Neurologie, 

Ergotherapie in der Gesundheitsförderung I und II, Ergotherapie in der Orthopädie I und 

II, Ergotherapie in der Chirurgie, Traumatologie und Innere Medizin, Ergotherapie in der 

Pädiatrie, Ergotherapie in der Psychiatrie, Ergotherapie in der Geriatrie 


� Fächerübergreifende Anwendung bereits erlernter Techniken und Methoden. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 477

� Fokussierte Auseinandersetzung mit einem in der Ergotherapie relevanten Thema 

bezüglich des Einsatzes von Medien als Therapiemittel. 

� Multimediale Einsatzmöglichkeiten als Therapiemittel der Zukunft. 

Case Management 


Sommersemester 2 SWS CM6ILV 2 



- kennt die theoretischen Grundlagen bezüglich der Ursprünge von Case Management 

und kann sie auf das Gesundheitssystem und Versorgungsstrukturen im Bereich 

ergotherapeutischer, medizinischer und sozialer Dienstleistungen übertragen und 

anwenden. 


Berufsethik und Ergotherapie im Gesundheitswesen, Intra- und interdisziplinäre 

Zusammenarbeit in der Ergotherapie 


� Grundbegriffe des Case Management 

� Vorteile und Gefahren 

� Situation in Österreich 

� Case Management in Verbindung mit Ergotherapie, Beispiele aus der internationalen 

Literatur 

� Diskussion über Zukunftspotential des Case Managements für die Ergotherapie in 

Österreich 

Bachelorarbeit II und Bachelorseminar 


Sommersemester 1 SWS BA6SE 8 





- kann forschungswürdige Fragen und Phänomene aus der ergotherapeutischen Praxis 

und Theorie formulieren. 

- kann wissenschaftlichen Form darstellen. 

- kann eine Fragestellung methodologisch abhandeln und dokumentieren. 

- hat die Bachelorarbeit II fertiggestellt. 



Evaluation, Forschung in der Ergotherapie, Bachelorarbeit I und Bachelorseminar 


� Formulierung einer eigenen Forschungsfrage 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 478

� Fachhochschulspezifische (Studiengang Ergotherapie bezogene) Vorgaben für die 


� Erstellung eines Konzeptes für die Bachelorarbeit II 

� (Gemeinsame) Reflexion des Konzeptes sowie der Bachelorarbeit II 

� Präsentationstechniken für Bachelorarbeit II 

Berufspraktikum III und begleitendes Seminar 


Sommersemester 1 SWS BP6BP 8 




- kann die erworbenen sozial-kommunikativen Kompetenzen und die wissenschaftlichen 

Kompetenzen in der praktischen Arbeit am Patienten umsetzen. 










Geriatrie, Psychosoziale Aspekte in der Ergotherapie I, II und III, Intra- und 

Interdisziplinäre Zusammenarbeit in der Ergotherapie 



� in den Pflicht- und Wahlbereichen fundierte Erfahrungen in der 

Patientenbetreuung sowie fundierte Kenntnisse, Fähigkeiten und Fertigkeiten in 

der Durchführung ergotherapeutischer Maßnahmen zu erwerben und 

� mindestens 20 Prozesse gemäß Anlage 5 in den Pflichtbereichen durchzuführen. 


� Orthopädie, Traumatologie, Handchirurgie, innere Medizin inkl. Rheumatologie 


� Geriatrie 







PhysiotherapeutInnen oder PhysiotherapeutInnen, DiätologInnen und 

LogopädInnen; 

� Arbeitsmedizin; Gesundheitsförderung und Prävention. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 479

MARKETING AND SALES – Master Programme 


Marketing Planning and Budgeting 

Semester Hours per week ECTS 

Fall 2 4 


Upon completion of the course the student will be able to: 

• create and implement a marketing plan 

• calculate the necessary resources and develop a budgeting plan 

• apply modern management methods to support strategy development, 

communication and successful performance improvement 

• apply tools for analysis and decision making (e.g. Balanced Scorecard) during the 

development 

• realize and analyse the importance of different value systems and expectations 

during negotiations in an international context 


None 

Literature 

Paul W. Farris, Neil T. Bendle, Phililip E. Pfeifer, David J. Reibstein: Marketing Metrics: 

The Definitive Guide to Measuring Marketing Performance, 2 nd Edition, 2010 Pearson; 

ISBN-13: 978-0-13-705829-7 


Case study based learning. 



• Marketing-Plan 

• Connection between marketing-plan and strategy 

• Implementing of marketing strategy in a marketing plan including resource 

planning 

• Building blocks of a marketing budget 

• Marketing-Instrument and Marketing-Mix 

• Target pricing and target costing 

• Relationship between cost-, finance-, personnel- und marketing planning 

• Budget development and derivation bottom-up und top-down 

• Key indicators 

Evaluation 

Case study, final oral exam 



Fall 1 2 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 480



• define project and process management and its attributes and differences 

• monitor and supervise projects 

• plan and carry out process analysis and innovation 

• plan and implement projects 

• conduct restructuring projects including evaluation of progress and 

implementation of corrective measures 


None 


The course topics will include: 

• Project requirements and project goals 

• Project organisation 

• Project structure 

• Project phases, expiration and deadlines 

• Resource planning 

• Cost and financial resources 

• Changes and adaption of project schedule 

• Control and regulations, reporting system 

• Teamwork and communication 

• Project management success 

• Project start up 

• Project completion 

• Techniques and operations of international project-, processes- and human 

resource management with the goal of gaining professional skills, to find solutions 

for complex management tasks in multinational organizations. 

Literature 

Kerzner, Harold: Project Management: A systems approach to planning, scheduling and 

controlling, John Wiley & Sons, Hoboken, 8th edition (2003) 

Kerzner, Harold: Project Management: Case Studies, John Wiley & Sons, Hoboken (2003) 

Burke, Rory: Project Management: planning and control techniques, John Wiley & Sons, 

Hoboken, 4th edition (2003) 

Lientz, Bennet P. / Rea, Kathryn P.: International Project Management, Academic Press, 

San Diego (2003) 

Newton, Richard: The Project Manager, Financial Times Prentice Hall, Harlow (2005) 

Maylor, Harvey: Project Management, Financial Times Prentice Hall, Harlow, 3rd edition 

(2005) 


This course provides the knowledge students need for planning, implementing, and 

controlling international projects successfully. It covers cultural differences impacting 

project management and moves through the skill set needed by project managers in a 

global setting. 

Students should be able to manage any international project up to a certain complexity 

and size (budget related) successfully. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 481

Evaluation 

Exam 

Consumer Behaviour 


Fall 2 4 



• understand the psychological impact factors on the process of buying decision 

• illustrate the role of attitudes and emotions 

• explain the process of information processing of clients and customers 

• develop effective segmentations approaches 

• apply the principles of consumer behaviour for the development of point-of-sale 

and point-of-touch 


None 



• Sector-specific differences 

• Marketers vs. consumers point of view 

• Consumer behaviour: point of sale 

• Consumer perception and consumers 

• Consumer motivation and values 

• Social and cultural influence on consumer behaviour 

• Consumer typology 

• Current influences on consumer behaviour 

Literature 

Ebster, Claus (2011). Course Package Consumer Behavior (will be made available online) 

Ebster, Claus & Garaus, Marion (2011). Store Design and Visual Merchandising: Creating 

Store Space That Encourages Buying. Business Expert Press; ISBN-13: 978-1606490945 


Lectures, exercises, course project 

Evaluation 

Exam, project 

Market Intelligence and Marketing Metrics 


Fall 2 4 



• define key-performance indicators 

• describe and analyse key indicators 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 482

• determine the performance and compare different segments and departments of a 

company 

• know the fundamental instruments of (empirical) market research and approaches 

of descriptive data analysis including important statistical measures 

• plan a systematic approach for target-oriented analysis and interpret empirical 

data in the context of market research 

• apply fundamental methods for the calculation and interpretation of statistical 

data 

• adjust programme and project structures 


None 


Market metrics are used in business planning and marketing monitoring to keep the 

marketing programme on track. Metrics refer to the performance measures and 

operating statistics. They are key performance indicators, allowing to track performance 

over time and enable for greater precision in execution of business activities. 

Intelligence is the task of collecting and analysing about the market in which a company 

operates. Marketing intelligence provides a map of the marketing environment and 

identifies the landmarks and potential risks. 

Depending on the sector of business activity, the strategies and indicators can be quite 

different in practice. 

The topics of the course will include: 

• Sector-specific differences 

• Data source and Information systems 

• Primary and secondary research 

• Research concepts 

• Research projects and programme management 

• Methods of data analysis and -interpretation 

• Marketing metrics 

• Co-operation with MAFO-service provider 

Literature 

Paul W. Farris, Neil T. Bendle, Phililip E. Pfeifer, David J. Reibstein: Marketing Metrics: 

The Definitive Guide to Measuring Marketing Performance; 2 nd Edition; 2010 Pearson; 

ISBN-13: 978-0-13-705829-7 


The course incorporates theoretical and practical elements. Students will be required to 

work with MIS/DSS software to analyse a company's situation. 

Evaluation 

Exam, case project 

Public Relations 


Fall 2 4 


Upon completion of the course the student will be able to 

• Solve typical management tasks in public relations 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 483

• Identify potential PR threats 

• Draft, prepare and carry out PR concepts on a management or consultant level 

• Prepare and plan activities in crisis PR 

• Locate promising aspects for innovative PR strategies 

• Carry out a stakeholder analysis 

• Integrate executives and a team into the public relations measures / concepts 

• Plan integrated PR communications in coordination with e.g. advertising and 

marketing depts. 

• Analyse presented PR measures 

• Identify suitable external service partners 

• Apply corporate identity to PR concepts and/or vice versa 


None 



• Stakeholder analysis 

• Fundamentals of public relations: internal and external communication, including 

stakeholder-communication 

• Stakeholder support, information- and media partners 

• Media-relations 

• Event management 

• Online-PR and experimental PR: social media & weblogs 

• Fundamentals of crisis communication planning 

Literature 

Hand-outs, examples/ cases and other information will be available via the IMC eLearning 

platform. 

"Public Relations - Strategies and Tactics", 10th Edition - D. Wilcox/G. Cameron, Pearson. 

ISBN 978-0-205-09916-0 


Lectures are based on slides and discussions on practical cases and scenarios. Student 

teamwork on cases is a main aspect of the lecture. The course comprises a combination 

of formal lecture, colleague counselling and discussing cases, placing particular emphasis 

on student participation. This will support the ambition to enhance analytical, diagnostic 

decision making and communication skills for students. 

Evaluation 

Oral exam 

Integrated Marketing Communications I 


Fall 2 4 


This course aims to combine a theoretical perspective of marketing communications and 

brand management with a practical focus. The content reflects a scrutiny of 

contemporary cases, across a variety of sectors and geographies. The goal is to introduce 

students to the critical study of marketing communications and branding and their 

management in organisations, as fundamental tools for augmenting valuable offerings in 

competitive markets. 

After completing this course students should be able to: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 484

� Describe and discuss fundamental concepts in marketing communications and 

branding 

� Appraise (from an integrated marketing communication perspective) an 

organisations communication efforts 

� Identify and explain the significance of branding in an organisation 

� Describe the different ways of classifying audiences for advertising and integrated 

brand promotion 

� Assess and revise the advertising and promotion industry‘s size, structure, and 

participants 

� Discuss some significant eras in the evolution of advertising, and relate important 

changes in advertising practice to more fundamental changes in society and 

culture 

� Identify and contrast forces that will continue to affect the evolution of advertising 

� Explain how ethical considerations affect the development of advertising and 

integrated brand promotion (ibp) campaigns. 

� Analyse and judge the meaning and importance of self-regulation (and 

government guidelines) for firms that develop and use advertising and promotion 

� Discuss how advertising may influence consumer behaviour 

� Compose different bases that marketers use to identify target segments and 

criteria used for choosing a target segment 

� Identify the essential elements of an effective positioning strategy 

� Review the necessary ingredients for creating a brand‘s value proposition 

� Arrange the relevant components of an advertising plan 

� Explain and appraise various methods for setting advertising budgets. 


None 



� Fundamentals of various application tools for Marketing-communication 

(―Marcoms‖ / Advertising ATL, BTL, TTL) 

� Communication with broad effect: „classical marketing― („mass market―) - above 

the line (ATL) 

� Campaign Management: Briefing of Media-Agencies, Evaluation of Media-Plans 

� Pros and cons of selected types of media (adequate choice) 

� Fundamentals of media planning 

� Basic-figures of media-planning (GRP: Gross Rating Points, OTS, OHT etc.) 

� Requirements and basic conditions for international campaign management 

(especially ATL) 

� Consumable products (FMCG)-Marketing-communication 

� Industrial marketing and marketing communication 

� Services marketing communication 

� Marketing communication for non-profit organizations 

� Entrepreneurship/ communication strategy for niche providers (KMU) 

� International marketing communication 

Literature 

All hand-outs, examples/ cases and other information will be available via the IMC 

eLearning platform. 

Richard J. Semenik, Chris T. Allen, Thomas C. O'Guinn, Hans Rüdiger Kaufmann, 

Advertising and Promotions - An Integrated Brand Approach, International Edition, 6th 

edition (just published, issue dated as ―2012‖!) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 485


Lectures are based on slides, including practical examples, presented and discussed with 

the lector. The course comprises a combination of formal lecture, colleague counselling 

and discussing cases, placing particular emphasis on student participation. This will 

support the ambition to enhance analytical-, diagnostic-, decision making, and 

communication skills for students. 

Evaluation 

Oral exam 

Business Partner Analysis 


Fall 1 2 



� compile criteria for the evaluation and selection of business partners 

� apply these criteria for contacting, negotiating and selecting potential business 

partners 

� define performance indicators for the evaluation of business partners 

� negotiating cooperation frameworks and contracts/agreements 

� structure and monitor communication, information flow and training 

� monitor and instruct business partners 

� monitor and continuous alignment of cooperation 

� manage a multi-channel sales network 

� establish lasting business relationships 

� factor juridical considerations within rules and regulations of the European Union 


None 


A business partner is an organization or natural person, with concerns of interest. In the 

context of „Marketing and Sales― these are also referred to as „Channel Partners―. 

The schedule of the content of teaching is as follows: 

� Evaluation and selection of business partners 

� Search, selection and application of customers and business partners under 

special consideration of own marketing efforts (Product launch, sales processes of 

a product or provision of service) supporting partners 

� Linkage of storage and inventory handling, JIT Programs, Price structure and 

payment methods 

Literature 

Distribution Channels: Understanding and Managing Channels to Market, Julian Dent, 

Kogan Page 2008 

Rosenbloom, Bert, Marketing Channels: A Management View, South-Western College Pub; 

7th ed. 2003 


Lectures (case studies, models and theory, examples) 

Evaluation 

Written examination 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 486

Individual and Group Negotiation 


Fall 1 2 



• explain the most important issues in conversation techniques 

• explain the differences between one-on-one conversations and group discussions 

• plan, carry out and analyse of discussions and negotiations 

• understand & analyse the concept, the specifics and the components of the 

process of negotiations, especially in business environments 

• define and tackle prime issues in business negotiations 

• choose, apply and defend adequate negotiation techniques 

• evaluate consequences of negotiation techniques applied for assumed or set 

business targets 

• critically evaluate and defend experience based negotiation cases 


None 


The objective of this module is to provide students with an experience-based 

understanding of the specifics of business negotiations, in individual as well as in group 

set-ups and serve as a general introduction into and a solid conceptual basis for the 

specifics of the international and intercultural business negotiations to follow in the 2nd 

semester. 

The module will start with the discussion of the negotiation process and its structure from 

the point of view of general systems analysis and will go over to involving other points of 

view like psychology, communication and game theory. The sub-elements, evoked in the 

systems analysis, will then serve as background for further detailed taxonomy combined 

with experience based discussion of practical usability and applicable techniques. Split 

into small teams, students will be exposed to a negotiation game, set in an international 

business context and intended to intensively exercise group negotiation capabilities of 

the participants. Each of the students will also be assigned an individual task, aiming at 

training their estimating and evaluating skills with regard to business negotiations. 


• Basis for discussion and negotiation 

• Negotiation strategy‘s, implementation 

• Integrative negotiation (Harvard concept) 

• Successful Argumentation (development and action) 

• Constructive handling with objection 

• Tools for Analysis, preparation and guidance of negotiations 

• The negotiation process (development and phases) 

• Complex negotiations and more topic negotiations 

• Negotiation in teams (roles, tactics, delegation) 

• Negotiation tactics and how to (en)counter them 

• Solution based negotiating techniques 

• Handling of emotions during negotiations 

• „How to break the deadlock― 

• Instruments for negotiation leadership (question techniques etc.) 

• Analysis and reflection of personal negotiating styles 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 487

Literature 

Harvard Business School – Program on Negotiations – various readings 

Malhotra Deepak, Bazerman Max H., ―Negotiation Genius‖, Bantam Books, 2008 

Raiffa Howard, ―The Art and Science of Negotiations‖, Belknap Press, 1990 

Shell Richard G., ―Bargaining for Advantage‖, Penguin, 2006 

Watkins Michael, Rosegrant Susan, ―Breakthrough International Negotiations‖, Jossey- 

Bass, 2001 


Presentations will be used to structure the teaching subject and to illustrate decision 

problems and possible approach and solutions. Special emphasis will be put on 

implementing practical exercises in form of a specially developed negotiation game as 

well as presentations and critical discussion of real-life examples to support issues 

presented and discussed and also to animate critical evaluations. An experience-based 

instrumental approach will be coupled with a holistic overview, providing students with 

intellectual insights into non-economic sciences and thus inviting them to expand their 

cognitive horizons. 

Evaluation 

Project report and class assignment. 

Legal Regulations for Marketing and Sales 


Fall 2 4 



• describe juridical issues in international projects 

• explain the necessity of complying with regulations and provisions in data 

transmission and data protection 

• monitor the access permissions for and handle corporate data 

• identify possible problem areas while using modern online media 

• explain the most important juridical aspects of the completion of a 

contract/agreement and trademark protection 


None 



• Applicable law 

• Data protection guidelines and data information security 

• Rules and access rights 

• Online-shops 

• Consumer tracking 

• Search engine advertising 

• Affiliate and E-Mail marketing 

• Introduction in trademark law 

• Introduction in law of contract 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 488

Literature 

Hand-outs uploaded for the meeting. 


The course includes lectures, presentations, use of legal vocabulary, cases and text 

samples. 

Evaluation 

Take-home exam, written exam 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 489

2 st Semester (SPRING) 

Integrated Marketing Communication II 


Spring 3 7 



� derive a communication strategy from an overall corporate strategy 

� capture different means of dialogue-oriented advertising 

� get a rough understanding of direct and social media marketing 

� understand the conception and implementation of cross media campaigns 

� identify the importance of marketing controlling and feedback loops in line with a 

� discuss and evaluate the importance of strategic alliances in communication 

� review and capture agency-related topics such as pitch management, daily work 

with PR and advertising agencies, marketing consultants 

� get an idea of current trends in marketing such as social networking, LBS, viral 

Marketing 

� learn about various steps and dimensions of a brand development process 

� simulate how to translate a brand strategy into actions plans by making use of 

employer and internal branding activities, touch point analysis and so forth 


Marketing Planning and Budgeting, Project Management, Consumer Behaviour, Market 

Intelligence and Marketing Metrics, Integrated Marketing Communications I, Business 

Partner Analysis, Individual and Group Negotiation 


The courses aims to deepen the knowledge acquired in IMCO I by emphasising on 

practical examples and in-class simulation exercises. The content reflects a range of case 

studies across a variety of industries. The main goal is to acquaint students with practical 

Marketing knowledge laying a focus on the implementation of Marketing strategies in the 

following operative areas: Media Planning, e-Marketing & CRM, Internal and External 

Branding, Pitch & Agency Management, Marketing Controlling and Feedback Loops. 


- Comparison and connection of organizational strategy in the communication strategy 

- Dialog-oriented non classical marketing forms: below the line (BTL) 

- Characteristics, costs, and application modern communication forms especially direct 

marketing and Social Media Marketing 

- Combination of ATL and BTL, by including new media internet and mobile devices 

(„cross media―: through the line (TTL) 

- Campaign voting and media planning 

- Point-of-Purchase: Sales Promotion and Personal Selling 

- Feedback loops in communication 

- Communication partner and strategic alliances in communication 

- Monitoring of communication efforts and adjustments to variations in the proceeded 

goals 

- Dialog-Marketing: multilevel campaigns, including Online- and Mobile-Marketing 

- Search engine-Marketing and Search engine-Optimization (analytical, „on-page― and 

„off-page―) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 490

- New Trends in Marketing-communication: Viral Marketing, Marketing in social 

Networks, Application-based Marketing-communication and communication for 

Location Based Services (LBS) 

- Strategic Brand Management and Brand positioning 

- Development and implementations of Branding-Strategies 

- Development of Marketing-Programmes and co-ordination of marketingcommunication, 

to strengthen and develop the brand value 

- Brand value preservation, to successfully deploy business opportunities 

- Models of brand architecture (branded house, house of brands, hybrid) 

- MarCom-messages towards market positioning 

- Fairs and evaluation of brand value and development 

- Matching the name policy to brand-positioning 

- Segment specific Brand management and Brand positioning in an international 

context 

Literature 

All hand-outs, examples / cases studies and other uploaded material. 

Richard J. Semenik, Chris T. Allen, Thomas C. O‘Guinn, Hans Rüdiger Kaufmann, 

Advertising and Promotions – An Integrated Brand Approach, International Edition, 6th 

edition (just published, issue dated as ―2012‖) 


This course will be divided into two parts delivered by two lecturers from a different 

industrial background. Lectures are based on slides, including a sundry set of case study 

and simulation exercises, presented and discussed with the lector and in student groups. 

Hence, the course comprises a combination of formal lectures, colleague counselling and 

discussions, placing a major emphasis on student participation. This will undermine the 

practical focus on putting knowledge into practice at the same time enhancing logical 

reasoning, critical thinking, decision making in marketing and finally intrapersonal 


Students will be provided with useful information and practical material in order to be 

able to successfully complete group exercises. 

Evaluation 

Final oral exam, presentation 

Agency and Expert Management 


Spring 1 2 



� analyse proposed communication topics 

� optimise the communication portfolio 

� utilise both framework and company information to develop a briefing for creative, 

advertising and media agencies 

� evaluate the framework for agency selection and comparison of results (pitch 

management) 

� apply project- and time management when developing a cooperation with 

agencies 

� evaluation of creative services and concepts 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 491



Intelligence and Marketing Metrics, Integrated Marketing Communications I, Business 

Partner Analysis, Individual and Group Negotiation 



� Market screening – pre-selection of possible suppliers/ Agencies 

� Structure and function of agencies 

� Evaluation and selection of external partners – in the areas of market research, 

advertising and dialog marketing agencies, independent Freelancer 

� Basic application for creative briefings 

� Framework for advertising agency- announcement, selection process, evaluation 

basis for contract negotiations 

� Pitch, Post-Pitch Feedback 

� Basic foundation for concept and strategy creation for organization 

communication 

� Implementation of marketing goals in a creative concept 

� Planning, creation and production of advertisements (ATL/BTL and for Onlineapplication) 

� Project Management – Time management 

� Foundation for creative techniques 

� Evaluation of creative performance requirements 

� Ethics in advertising (Guidelines and self-restriction-codex) 

� Long term relationship establishment and development Client-Agency relationship 

Literature 

Fitch, B., McCurry, M., Gaston, B. (2010). Media Relations Handbook: For Agencies, 

Associations Nonprofits and Congress - The Big Blue Book. TheCapitolNet. 

Sims, M. (2005). Working With Agencies: An Insider's Guide. John Wiley & Sons. 


Lectures are based on slides, including practical examples, presented and discussed with 

the lector. The course comprises a combination of formal lecture, colleague counselling 

and discussing cases, placing particular emphasis on student participation. This will 

support the ambition to enhance analytical-, diagnostic-, decision making, and 

communication skills for students. 

Evaluation 

Oral exam 

Leadership and Human Resources 


Spring 2 4 



� grasp the importance of motivation in the context of leadership; 

Capture methods and techniques of coaching, mediation and supervision; 

Identify and discuss the main features of the international Human Resource 

Management; 

� collect and analyze global issues in Human Resource Management; 

Describe the staff planning as a source of information for internal decision making 

in relation to knowledge and capacity management ("recruiting, selection, training 

and rightsizing"); 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 492

� conceive various stages of the recruitment process; 

Reflect upon the most important aspects of performance evaluation and 

compensation in the context of global intercultural change processes; 

� solve tasks and problems that result from cultural differences of individuals and 

groups in international projects and / or international organizations. 


Business Partner Analysis, Individual and Group Negotiation, Legal Regulations for 




� Human resource management and marketing 

� Personnel recruitment and building a job description 

� Instruction and training personnel as well as personnel reductions 

� Personnel selection through an assessment centre, personnel development 

� Career and career development 

� Performance evaluation and compensation 

� Human Resource Management 

� Personnel controlling 

� Consulting/ Training/ Coaching as instruments for personnel development 

� Definition and tasks of leaders 

Literature 

Robert L. Mathis and John H. Jackson, Human Resource Management, 13th edition, 

South-Western, Cengage Learning EMEA, 2010 ISBN 978-0538453158 


The course incorporates theoretical as well as practical elements. A special focus is put 

on job application and job interview. 

Evaluation 

Oral and written exam. 

CSR and Business Ethics 


Spring 1 2 



� know and discuss the psychological, ethical and social dimensions of leading in an 

international and intercultural environment 

� differentiate and apply international code of conduct rules while upholding 

sustainability criteria 

� integrate ethics and sustainable approaches in key areas of strategic and tactical 

marketing 






� Concepts for Ethics and sustainability 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 493

� Integration and implementation of ethics and sustainability in key areas of 

strategic and operative management 

� CSR in the area of Marketing (Product policy etc.) and PR 

� Success effects and influence factors on CSR 

� Interests of Stakeholders 

� Sustainability in Management – Effects on organizational success and organization 

reputation 

� Discussion of relevant topics such as Burnout, Mobbing, Work-Life-Balance, 

Coaching, Mediation, Supervision of the leader in the executive management in 

self-reflection and in the evaluation of the environment (360°-Evaluation- 

Methods), etc. 

� Significance and roll of the International Code of Conduct Rules in economic, 

political, ethical and moral aspect 

� Definition of organization culture in the international context 

� Form and shaping of organizational culture, possibility of changing the 

organizational culture in areas of conflict as well as the international code of 

behaviour 

� Globalization and consequences in areas of conflict with topics such as 

Sustainability, Fair Trade etc. 

Literature 

Crane, A. & Matten, D. (2010). Business Ethics: Managing Corporate Citizenship and 

Sustainability in the Age of Globalization. Oxford University Press. 

Werther, W.B. Jr. & Chandler, D. (2011). Strategic Corporate Social Responsibility: 

Stakeholders in a Global Environment. Sage. 


This course combines a theoretical and practical sessions to provide a reflection of theory 

and its application. Group exercises and cases support the learning. 

Evaluation 

Written exam 

Research Seminar and Preparation for Master Thesis 


Spring 2 4 



� Plan, develop and create a piece of scientific work such as a proposal (exposé); 

� Form hypotheses and research questions for the preparation of the Master Thesis; 

� Defend one‘s own approach with special attention to the Master Thesis Defense; 

� Practice citation and scientific reasoning; 

� Distinguish between primary and secondary information; 

� Choose an appropriate research approach and the survey instrument. 


Consumer Behaviour, Market Intelligence and Marketing Metrics 



� Topic finding and research planning 

� Time Management 

� Scientific theory basic principles 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 494

� Structure, development and contents of working scientifically as well as Diploma 

Thesis 

� Reference 

� Introduction of ideal typical research processes in business sciences 

� Discussion research questions vs. hypotheses 

� Information search 

� Composition of an Exposé 

� Scientific research work and data evaluation 

� Academic language 

� Reading and analysis of specialized publications 

� Reference analysis and ranking-discussion 

� Structure of the scientific industry 

� Research methods 

� Hermeneutical versus empirical working 

� Objectivity – Validity – Reliability 

� Composition of conducting an independent work according to the guidelines of the 

IMC Fachhochschule Krems „Working scientifically― 

Literature 

Lecturers' hand-outs. All hand-outs, exercises, results to exercises and other information 

will be available in the IMC eLearning platform. 





acquaint them with an academic (method and fact driven) elaboration of a topic. 

Furthermore, they also have to provide a proposal for a paper meeting scientific 

standards to familiarize them with process of writing and the guidelines applying at the 

IMC as well as prepare one core article for discussion. 

Evaluation 

Proposal, methodology discussion 

Account Management 


Spring 2 5 



� Control and accompany the phases of the sales process; 

� Use a matched question and answer technique; 

� Create and present the solutions to the customers; 

� Analyse customer base and profitability; 

� Develop client portfolios; 

� Align customer base and product offering; 

� Ensure the customer-company feedback loop; 

� Plan, administer and monitor the sales team. 



Intelligence and Marketing Metrics, Integrated Marketing Communication I, Business 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 495

Partner Analysis, Individual and Group Negotiation, Legal Regulations for Marketing and 

Sales 



� Account Strategy‗s: Take-over, development 

� Implementing Key Account-plans 

� Co-ordination of products and customer structure 

� Profitability Analysis from customers 


� Sales presentations 

� Technology in Key Account Management 

� Selection, Training, Motivation and compensation of the sales personnel 

� Sales planning and budgeting 

� Territory Management 

Literature 

Belz, C., Müllner, M. & Zupancic, D. (2010). Excellence in Key Account Management: The 

St. Gallen KAM concept. Mi-Wirtschaftsbuch. 

Cheverton, P. (2008). Key Account Management: Tools and Techniques for Achieving 

Profitable Key Supplier Status (4th ed). Kogan Page. 


This course is part of the Key account management module. It combines theoretical 

sessions and practical examples. Cases will be used to highlight the concepts, and roleplay 

activities provide students with the opportunity to reflect on their own skills and 

development of a sales strategy 

Evaluation 

Written exam and group case work. 

Domestic and International Sales and Closing 


Spring 2 4 



� Assess and evaluate their own and others' behaviour and negotiation style; 

� Assess the relevance of cultural differences; 

� Improve use of the knowledge of cultural aspects to improve the success rate and 

the development of the sales talent; 

� Combine the Harvard concept of negotiations with requirements for the conduct of 

negotiations oriented on culture and relations. 





Sales 



� Personality and customers perception 

� Methods and concepts of sales processes 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 496

� Harvard-concept of negotiations 

� Values and attitude in intercultural sales and business transactions 

� Strategic preparation, planning and tactic 

� Complex organization and decision structures in B2B 

� Alignment of the business centres to buying centre 

� Handling objections and excuses 

� Hurdles and problem solving 


Literature 

Hofstede, G. (1989). Cultural predictors of national negotiation styles, in: F. Mautner- 

Markhof: Processes of international negotiations. Westview Press House. 

Lewicki, R. J., Barry, B. & Saunders, D. M. (2007). Essentials of Negotiation. McGraw-Hill. 

Thomas, A. (2010): Handbook of Intercultural Communication and Cooperation: Basics 

and Areas of Application. Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. 






Evaluation 

Cases and roleplay module exam. 

Intercultural Negotiation and Cooperation 


Spring 1 2 



� Assess and evaluate their own and others' behaviour and negotiation style; 

� Assess the relevance of cultural differences; 

� Improve use of the knowledge of cultural aspects to improve the success rate and 

the development of the sales talent; 

� Prepare and plan for intercultural cooperation under the consideration of cultural 

particularities. 





Sales 



� Methods and concepts of the negotiation process 

� Culture models and cultural differences 

� National and cultural aspects of negotiations and the intercultural co-operation 

� The Harvard concept of negotiation and conflict management including SWOT 

analysis and development with other cultures 

� Values and behaviour in intercultural negotiations and co-operation 

� Intercultural conflict areas 

� Strategy and tactic for planning intercultural communication 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 497

Literature 

Lewicki, R. J., Barry, B. & Saunders, D. M. (2007). Essentials of Negotiation. McGraw-Hill. 

Thomas, A. (2010): Handbook of Intercultural Communication and Cooperation: Basics 


Trompenaars, F. (1997). Riding The Waves of Culture: Understanding Diversity in Global 

Business. McGraw-Hill. 






Evaluation 

Cases and roleplay module exam. 

Brand Development and Strategic Innovation 


Spring 3 7 



� Develop an understanding of the role of brand image in international context; 

� Assess the future strategic market potential; 

� Understand the impact of a strong brand image for the company's success; 

� Strengthen the strategic analysis of risks and potential ability of brands and 

innovations; 

� Develop of IMC-communication strategies to increase brand value; 

� Apply portfolio strategies; 

� Plan and implement a customer-centric and brand innovation strategy. 





Sales 



� Strategic analysis of future potential product- und Brand innovation 

� Co-operation of brand image and organization success 

� Brand-driven innovation 

� Customer oriented brand development 

� Comparison of the marked based view und resource based view 

� Image transfer 

� Launch und relaunch 

� First-mover-advantages in positioning 

� Framing and categorizing of brands and products from consumer view 

� Steps of strategic innovation 

� Practical case studies from successful and failed brand development and 

innovation 

� IMC-Campaign to increase the brand value 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 498

Literature 

Strategic Brand Management: A European Perspective. 2nd edition. Keller, Kevin Lane; 

Aperia, Tony; Georgson, Mats. 


Cooperative seminar with strong student input (group work etc.). 

Evaluation 

Oral exam and homework 

Intercultural Behaviour and Communication 


Spring 2 4 



� Assess and evaluate the own culture specific behaviour 

� Apply portfolio strategies in assessment and development 

� Plan and implement a consumer-based brand innovation strategy 

� Assess the relevance of cultural influences in decision making 

� Apply the knowledge on cultural aspects to adapt own behaviour and 

communication strategy in intercultural projects 





Sales 


The main topics of the course will cover: 

� Cultural models and differences in behaviour 

� Values and norms in intercultural team work 

� Intercultural conflict resources 

� Individualism vs. collectivism 

� Influence of hierarchies 

� Monochrome and polychromic detection, future orientation 

� Communication: high and low context 

� Responsiveness and authentic adaption 

� Success control 

Literature 

Hall, E.T. (1990). Understanding Cultural Differences: German, French. Americans. 

Intercultural Press. 

Thomas, A. (2010). Handbook of Intercultural Communication and Cooperation: Basics 



This course uses a series of theoretical and practical sessions to give students the 

opportunity to apply and reflect. 

Evaluation 

Group case assessment and written exam. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 499




Fall 2 2 


n.a. 


n.a. 


n.a. 

Literature 

n.a. 


n.a. 

Evaluation 

n.a. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 500


Business Workshop 


Spring 2 2 



� Know and apply competences in a complex situation 

� Critically reflect on the own utilisation of tools and performance 

� Realise and interpret the interconnections and interactions of single company 

sections 

� Assess the possibilities of process and company control when managing change 

processes 


Marketing Planning and Budgeting, Project Management, Customer Behaviour, Market 

Intelligence and Marketing Metrics, Integrated Marketing Communication I and II, 





� Interdisciplinary application of tools and techniques that the students became 

familiar with during the first semester 

� Analysis of a Real-Life Case of the International Marketing 

� Experience of a crisis situation, crisis management and successful project 

completion 

� Practical application of ratio analysis including company valuation 

Literature 

Duarte, D. L. & Tennant Snyder, N. (2006). Mastering Virtual Teams. Strategies, Tools, 

and Techniques That Succeed. John Wiley & Sons. 


This course will emphasis students work on cases in complex settings. 

Evaluation 

Case assessment 

Change Management 


Spring 2 4 



� Identify and realise the need for change processes in organisations 

� Plan, implement and initialise change processes 

� Evaluate restructuring processes including progress reporting and taking of 

correcting actions 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 501



Marketing and Sales, Leadership and Human Resources, CSR and Business Ethics 



� concept of change management 

� change cycles 

� phases of the change process 

� models and steps to bring about effective change in the company 

� analysis of the reasons for resistance or description of the methods of how this 

resistance can be overcome 

� errors in change processes 

� cost-benefit analysis of completed processes of change 

� risk analysis 

� analysis of success factors 

� evidence of failed change processes 

� elements for successful implementation of change processes 

� importance of "soft factors" for the successful implementation of new strategies 

� presentation and analysis of new management methods, such as Balanced 

Scorecard, TQM systems, methods of self and external evaluation, etc. 

Literature 

Anderson, D. (2010). Beyond Change Management: How to Achieve Breakthrough 

Results Through Conscious Change Leadership (2nd ed). John Wiley & Sons. 

Cameron, E. & Green, M. (2009). Making Sense of Change Management: A complete 

guide to the models, tools and techniques of organizational change management. Kogan 

Page. 

Trompenaars, F. (2004). Managing People across Cultures. Capstone. 


This course will combine theoretical assessment and practical exercises. 

Evaluation 

Group project and presentation. 

Product Design and Incremental Innovation 


Spring 2 3 



� Evaluate the innovative capacity in a company 

� Identify and develop potential partners for innovation 

� Apply the methods of innovation management 

� Plan and implement account portfolio strategies 

� Assess and develop client and customer base 





Marketing and Sales, Leadership and Human Resources, CSR and Business Ethics, 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 502

Account Management, Domestic and International Sales and Closing, Intercultural 

Negotiation and Cooperation, Applied Research and Training 



� innovative technology characteristics, process and service products 

� decision-making and development process 

� identification and selection of innovation 

� distribution of innovative products and technologies, marketing 

� innovation management 

� offer design and sales management 

� design condition (Rebates, Bundling) 

� integration customer innovation 

� open innovation 

� competitive intelligence 

� creativity techniques 

Literature 

Maital, S. & Seshadri, D.V.R. (2007). Innovation Management: Strategies, Concepts and 

Tools for Growth and Profit. Sage. 


This course is part of the Key Account module, and integrates theoretical and practical 

elements. 

Evaluation 

Case work and oral examination. 

Budgeting and Performance Management 


Spring 2 3 



� Implement and utilise management tools 

� Evaluate and develop customer stock 

� Plan and implement account portfolio strategies 

� Assess and develop client and customer base 

� Manage the sales team 

� Prepare and implement the budget 

� Develop and implement controlling structures including key performance 

indicators, marketing metrics and early warning systems 










FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 503

� components of the marketing budget 

� performance budgeting and annual planning 

� implementation planning 

� target-comparison 

� controlling factors of economic success 

� contribution margin analysis for products, markets and customers 

� controlling distribution channels and customers 

� monthly reporting 

� metrics for customer acquisition, customer retention, performance development 

and performance maintenance 

� sales planning and budgeting 

� tuning range, customers, distribution channels and sales organization 

� planning the process and cost of sales 

� planning of the expected gross margins 

� implementation of measurement systems 

� early warning systems 

� opportunities / risks portfolio 

� establishment of cause and effect chains 

� strengths and weaknesses analysis of the distribution 

Literature 

Davis, J. (2006). Measuring Marketing: 103 Key Metrics Every Marketer Needs. John 

Wiley & Sons. 

Parmenter, D. (2010). Key Performance Indicators (KPI): Developing, Implementing, and 

Using Winning KPIs. John Wiley & Sons. 


This course is part of the Key Account module, and integrates theoretical and practical 

elements. 

Evaluation 

Case work and oral examination. 

Conflict Management 


Spring 1 2 



� Explain potential conflicts and describe solution strategies to address such 

conflicts 

� Implementation of management tools that help to prevent and solve conflicts 

� Develop strategies to address conflicts in teams and with clients 










FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 504

� conflict causes, types, levels 

� escalation dynamics 

� conflict resolution strategies 

� identifying and resolving conflict patterns 

� dealing with conflict in teams and with customers - focus on a balance between 

profit and orientation relationship with a particular focus on key account 

management 

� instruments of conflict resolution 

� facilitation, negotiation, organizational development, arbitration, etc. 

� mediation processes and instruments 

� mediation skills in leadership and in customer contact 

� conflict coaching 

Literature 

Bannink, F. (2010). Handbook of Solution-Focused Conflict Management. Hogrefe. 

Corvette, B.A.B. (2006). Conflict Management: A Practical Guide to Developing 

Negotiation Strategies. Prentice Hall. 


The course will integrate both theoretical sessions as well as group exercises. 

Evaluation 

Case work and exam 

Contractual Law 


Spring 2 4 



� Differentiate the legal norms applying in this field 

� Assess associate risks 

� Discuss the main elements and clauses of contracts 

� Evaluate contracts and apply legal norms for writing offers and contracts 










� European and Transnational Contract Law: scopes and international application 

� contract - contract work - order 

� delegating authority to conclude and represent 

� freedom of contract 

� formation of contracts: offer and acceptance 

� contract clauses 

� unclear and incomplete statements 

� formalities 

� contract violations 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 505

Literature 

Duxbury, R. (2009). Nutshell Contract Law (8th ed). Sweet & Maxwell. 

McKendrick, E. (2010). Contract Law: Text, Cases, and Materials. Oxford University Press. 



Evaluation 

Written exam and group work. 

Strategic Brand and Channel Management 


Spring 2 3 



� Connect company and brand targets and strategies 

� Analyse and develop the strategic brand position 

� Development of brands and manage the innovation process 

� Integration of the sales channel in the marketing concept 

� Identify and utilise of changes in the market system to improve the channel 

management in international context 





Marketing and Sales, Leadership and Human Resources, CSR and Business Ethics, Brand 

Development and Strategic Innovation, Intercultural Behaviour and Communication, 

Applied Research and Training. 



� effective brand positioning 

� brand strategy and brand portfolio 

� strategic brand and market analysis 

� single-channel versus multi-channel 

� stakeholder analysis and communication 

� distribution structures and organization 

� impact of new technologies 

� current trends in international marketing 

Literature 

Aaker, D.A. (2004). Brand Portfolio Strategy: Creating Relevance, Differentiation, Energy, 

Leverage, and Clarity. Free Press. 

Keller, K, Aperia, T. & Georgson, M. (2008). Strategic Brand Management: A European 

Perspective. Prentice Hall. 

Lockwood, T. (2009). Design Thinking: Integrating Innovation, Customer Experience, and 

Brand Value. Allworth. 

Neumeier, M. (2005). The Brand Gap: How to bridge the distance between business 

strategy and design (2nd ed.). New Riders. 

Parmenter, D. (2010). Key Performance Indicators (KPI): Developing, Implementing, and 

Using Winning KPIs. John Wiley & Sons. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 506


This course is part of the Brand Management module, and integrates theoretical and 

practical elements. 

Evaluation 

Written exam and group work 

Budgeting and Performance Management 


Spring 2 3 



� Align company and brand targets and strategies 

� Analyse and develop the marketing strategy meeting the given framework 

conditions 

� Develop and utilise a system of marketing metrics to monitor performance 

� Prepare and implement the budget 







Applied Research and Training 



� components of the marketing budget 

� performance budgeting and annual planning 

� implementation planning 

� target-comparison 

� controlling factors of economic success 

� contribution margin analysis for products, markets and customers 

� controlling distribution channel 

� monthly reporting 

� metrics for customer acquisition, customer retention, performance development 

and performance maintenance 

� sales planning and budgeting 

� tuning range, customers, distribution channels and sales organization 

� planning of marketing strategy 

� planning of the expected gross margins 

� implementation of measurement systems 

� early warning systems 

� opportunities / risks portfolio 

� establishment of cause and effect chains 

� strengths and weaknesses of the brands 

Literature 

Kapferer, J.N. (2008). The New Strategic Brand Management: Creating and Sustaining 

Brand Equity Long Term (4th ed). Kogan Page. 

Farris, P.A., Bendle, N.T., Pfeifer, P.E. & Reibstein, D.J. (2006). Marketing Metrics: 50+ 

Metrics Every Executive Should Master. Wharton School Publishing. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 507

Franceschini, F., Maisano, D. & Galetto, M. (2009). Management by Measurement: 

Designing Key Indicators and Performance Measurement Systems. Springer. 

Maital, S. & Seshadri, D.V.R. (2007). Innovation Management: Strategies, Concepts and 

Tools for Growth and Profit. Sage. 

Ulwick, A.W. (2005). What Customers Want: Using Outcome-Driven Innovation to Create 

Breakthrough Products and Services. McGraw-Hill. 


This course is part of the Brand Management module, and integrates theoretical and 

practical elements. 

Evaluation 

Written exam and group work 

Patent and Trademark Law 


Spring 2 4 



� Know and describe the importance of IP protection 

� Know and apply the relevant legal norms in international context 

� Develop and implement a strategy for IP protection 

� Take corrective or punitive action when IP violations occur 










� Protection of intellectual property 

� Patent law - trademark law - design protection - copyright law - competition law - 

product liability 

� Patent and trademark 

� Patent types 

� Patent application and scope 

� Types of trademark protection 

� Consumer protection 

� Types of products and liability 

� Violation of the law 

Literature 

Burg, B.D., Topken, A. & Jiang, J. (2011). A Manual for Intellectual Property Management 

Patent Law. World Scientific. 

Firth, A. (2011). Trade Marks: Law and Practice (3rd ed). Jordan Publishing. 

Cornish, W. (2007). Intellectual Property: Patents, Copyrights, Trademarks and Allied 

Rights (6th ed). Sweet & Maxwell. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 508



Evaluation 

Written exam and group work. 

Conflict Management 


Spring 1 2 



� Explain potential conflicts and describe solution strategies to address such 

conflicts 

� Implementation of management tools that help to prevent and solve conflicts 

� Develop strategies to address conflicts in teams and with clients 










� conflict causes, types, levels 

� escalation dynamics 

� conflict resolution strategies 

� identifying and resolving conflict patterns 

� dealing with conflict in teams and with customers - focus on a balance between 

profit and orientation relationship with a particular focus on fire management 

� instruments of conflict resolution 

� facilitation, negotiation, organizational development, arbitration, etc. 

� mediation processes and instruments 

� mediation skills in leadership and in customer contact 

� conflict coaching 

Literature 

McConnon, S. & McConnon, M. (2008). Conflict Management in the Workplace: How to 

Manage Disagreements and Develop Trust and Understanding. 

Bannink, F. (2010). Handbook of Solution-Focused Conflict Management. Hogrefe. 

Corvette, B.A.B. (2006). Conflict Management: A Practical Guide to Developing 

Negotiation Strategies. Prentice Hall. 



Evaluation 

Oral exam and group work. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 509

MEDICAL & PHARMACEUTICAL BIOTECHNOLOGY – 

Bachelor Programme 


Analytic Chemistry Laboratory 


Fall 2 CHEM_L I 3 


Qualitative Analytics 

Quantitative Analytics 


The course will be held as a laboratory exercise where basic school knowledge is 

supposed. Of course students will be held to discuss specific problems as well as to work 

out problems given by the lecturer. 


This laboratory exercise gives an overview on analytical methods in chemistry. It 

comprises qualitative analytics as well as quantitative. 

Handling of equipment, interpretation of data and compiling documentation is trained. 


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

Laboratory documentation / theoretical knowledge 

Anatomy and Physiology 


Fall 2 HUM I 2 


The goal of the course is to give the students some basic understanding of the human 

body‘s construction principles, and of its functions. Common diseases, their 

pathophysiology and their clinical appearances will be addressed. 


Basic introduction lecture into human diseases and physiology 


The course consists of eight lectures, each of them comprising between two and three 

teaching units. 


Lecture 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 510

Evaluation 

Final Exam 

Applied Mathematics 


Fall 3 MATH 3 


Upon completion, students from diverse educational backgrounds should have a profound 

knowledge of the basics of higher mathematics 


Basic introduction lecture into mathematics 


The lectures will explain and discuss the mathematical chapters and issues mentioned in 

the course description and give plenty of examples for the students to practice what they 

have learned in the lectures. At the end of every lecture the students will get handouts in 

which the main content will be summarized with even more exercises for self-study. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Regular assessment test at the beginning of each unit, Final Exam 

Applied Microbiology 


Fall 1 MICB_T 1 


This course presents a selection of topics from the field of microbiology, especially 

bacteriology. The students are introduced into structure and function of prokaryotic cells, 

growth and control of growth of microorganisms, bacterial metabolism, genetics and 

phylogeny of prokaryotes: 


Beginners 


In this beginners course of microbiology the basic concepts are introduced. Most of the 

presented methods will be carried out in the course ―Microbiological working techniques‖. 

Literature 

Brock – Biology of Microorganisms; Madigan and Martinko; Pearson Prentice Hall 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 511


Most of the lecture will be front-desk teaching with sufficient possibilities of active 

participation. Group work elements are included to force students to reflect about 

microbiological problems. 

Evaluation 

Written exam, group work 

Applied Physics Laboratory 


Fall 3 PHYS_L 4 


Delivering the basic practical knowledge of physical phenomenon via selected 

experiments. 


Basic 


The main aim of this course is to learn how scientific experiments are carried out 

(problem, singly acquiring of the theoretical background, exact practical work, writing 

and using a laboratory journal, analyzing and discussing measuring errors) and to find 

the connection between theory and practice. 


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

Laboratory Protocols, oral exams, practical work 

Applied Physics 


Fall 2 PHYS_T 2 


Teaching the basics of physical principles. 


Basic school knowledge of physics. 


Physics I will give an overview about the fundamental laws of nature, the way of thinking 

in physics, the procedures of solving tasks and the principles of interdisciplinary research 

strategies. 


Lecture 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 512

Evaluation 

Written exams, assignments 

Chemical Calculations 


Fall 1 CCAL 1 


Students will acquire a basic knowledge of the stoichiometric terms, especially the 

amount of substance and its use. They will be able to calculate simple laboratory 

problems such as preparation of solutions or titrations. They will be provided with a basic 

knowledge of pH, oxidation numbers and balancing of equations. 

Students will acquire a sense for the significant figures of measured values and for the 

importance of writing down calculations comprehensibly. 


Basic school knowledge of chemistry. 


Introduction to the knowledge needed for the evaluation of data, measured in a chemical 

laboratory: 

� Basic units and their conversions 

� Density 

� Mass fraction 

� Significant figures 

� Amount of substance 

� Contents of solutions, fractions and concentratios 

� Dilution of solutions 

� Titrations 

� pH 

� Oxidation numbers 


Each topic will be developed in the following way: 

Theoretical introduction 

Demonstrated calculations (examples) 

Instructions for further calculations (students' work) 

Evaluation 

Mid Term Exam, Final Exam 

General and Inorganic Chemistry 


Fall 3 CHEM_T I 4 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 513


Chemistry is central to the understanding of biochemical and biotechnological processes. 

This course will generate a thorough basis for the later application of these theoretical 

mechanisms. 


School level Chemistry 


The content of the chemistry lectures will be broken down into the two main parts, 

chemical theory and problem solving. The theoretical part will deal with the basic 

knowledge and the fundamental principles of chemistry. In the problem solving part the 

learned theory will be repeated and applied to study exercises and specific problems. For 

every two hours of theory there will be one hour of problem solving as shown in the 

course outline below. 


Lecture and problem sessions 

Evaluation 

Final Exam/Problem Sessions 

Human genetics 


Fall 1 HGEN 1 


After this course students understand 

� Basic facts about cell and cell organelles and macromolecules of the cell 

� Transcription and translation, types and effects of mutations 

� Genome organization 

� DNA replication and mitosis and meiosis 

� Mendelian inheritance and analysis of mendelian pedigrees 

� Complex traits 

� Mechanisms of genetic diseases 

� Mapping disease genes and use of SNPs 

� Basic concepts of human evolution 


Beginners 


Students from different educational levels should become familiar with the basic concepts 

of genetics, in particular human genetics. 

Literature 

iGenetics – A Mendelian Approach by P.J. Russel; Pearson, Benjamin Cummings (2006) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 514


Most of the lecture will be front-desk teaching with sufficient possibilities of active 

participation. Group work elements will be included whenever appropriate. 

Evaluation 

Quiz, Final Exam 

Introduction to Laboratory Techniques 


Fall 1 ILT 2 


Introduction to laboratory techniques is a two hours credit lab course designed to 

introduce basics concerning bench work and empirical observations. The experiments 

should help the students to reach their goals in a successful career by 

- training practical abilities (orientation in laboratory, working safety and risk in the 

laboratory, handling equipment and chemicals, planning experiments, writing 

protocols) 

- emphasizing the importance of basic chemical calculations for setting up and 

performing experimental work 


Beginners 


The experiments during this lab give students practical experience in properly working 

and handling equipment and chemicals in laboratory. A selection of general 

laboratory techniques (filtration, evaporation, sublimation, decantation, dilution...) and 

reactions used in a chemistry and physic laboratory has been made and will be 

performed by the students in small teams. Students are expected to come to lab with a 

thorough understanding of the principles involved in the experiment, the goals of the 

experiment, and the procedures to be followed. Whenever appropriate, the student 

should also know what data and observations are anticipated. 

Getting information about potential hazards (MSDS) of chemicals used and respecting 

safety considerations during the experiments is every student‘s duty before and during 

the lab. 


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

Laboratory Notes/Practical Work Evaluation/Oral Exam 

Microbiological Working Techniques Laboratory 


Fall 2 MICB_L 2 


FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 515

The main objective of the microbiology lab course is to make the students familiar with 

the basic concepts and techniques of microbiology such as handling bacteria, yeasts and 

fungi, sterile working, using the microscope, staining bacteria and preparation of media 

and solutions. Methods of growing, isolating and identifying microorganisms as well as 

eliminating them are covered. 


Beginners 


Microbiology lab course is adjusted to the growth rates of the used microorganisms and 

therefore blocked. During the main part of the course the groups are rotating through the 

experiments. 


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

Laboratory Protocols/Report Sheets/Laboratory Work/Results 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 516


Applied Biophysics 


Spring 2 PHYS_T II 2 


Repetition of basic physics, demonstration and lab exercises, lectures in biophysics. 


Physics, Physics Laboratory 


The interdisciplinary character of biotechnology and relevant biophysical principles are 

being discussed in a very simple way in order to enhance the enthusiasm and to learn 

the structures of thinking in a natural scientific way. 

The basics of physics will be repeated on the desk ―in a classic way‖. Preposition will be 

self-teaching based on the textbook ―Physics‖. The power point presentation will only 

give an orientation about the most important topics and offers a basis for individual 

exercises (with space for individual remarks). 

Demonstrations and lab experiments are important to understand and will be also part of 

examinations. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Exam 

Applied Biophysics Laboratory 


Spring 2 PHYS_L II 3 


The main aim of this course is – as in the Physics Lab I - to learn how scientific 

experiments are carried out (problem -> singly acquiring of the theoretical background 

-> exact practical work -> writing and using a laboratory journal -> creating a scientific 

report) and to find the connection between theory and practice. 


Physics Laboratory 1 


In the lab the students work in groups of 2 pupils at their given practical problems. 7 

different physical problems have to be solved in practical work as well as in theory. The 

working groups rotate between the different experiments (e.g. hot-air-engine, rotation of 

the plane of polarization with quartz and with sugar solutions, Newton´s rings in 

transmitted monochromatic light, Michelson interferometer, change of state I and II,…) 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 517


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

Laboratory Protocols and oral examination 

Cell Biology 


Spring 2 CELLB_T 2 


In this lecture you will be introduced in the principles of eukaryotic cells and tissues. You 

will learn the differences between eukaryotic and prokaryotic cells (mainly structure), 

and the different use in science and industry. 


Biology 


Upon completion of this lecture, you are expected to: 

Be familiar with the structure and morphology of eukaryotic cells, cell cycle and cell cycle 

regulation as well as gene expression, processing and protein targeting. 

Understand the principles of cell growth in bacterial and mammalian cells and their 

specific characteristics. 

Have basic knowledge about gene manipulation and expression systems. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Mid Term and Final Exam/Presentation 

Human Diseases 


Spring 1 HUM II 1 


The students shall develop an understanding of the most fundamental physiological 

principles that underlie regulation, adaptation, and homeostasis -all mechanisms and 

concepts that can be applied on a wide variety of physiologic and pathologic processes. 

Knowledge of these concepts should facilitate the intellectual approach to the body´s 

functions, be it on a macro- or micro-level. 


Anatomy and Physiology 


The course comprises 4 sessions of lectures that will cover the following topics: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 518

Nephrology: Anatomy of the kidney, homeostasis of salt and water balance, regulation of 

ph-value and blood pressure. 

Endocrinology: Endocrine organs, hormones and their modes of action, feed-backmechanism 

and regulatory circuits, fertility and reproduction. 

Neurology: Constituents of the nervous system, excitability and guidance of impulses, 

bio-electric coupling, anatomy of the brain. 

Specific diseases and their therapies will be addressed depending on their relevance for 

the understanding of physiology and pathophysiology. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Exam 

Immunology and Medical Microbiology 


Spring 2 MMICB 1 


Basic understanding of the 

� innate and adaptive immune system 

� mechanisms of bacterial pathogenesis 

� mechanisms of viral replication and pathogenesis 

� and the respective ways of pathogens to avoid immune response 

� eukaryotic pathogens 


Basics of Biology and Physiology 


This course deals with pathogenic bacteria, viruses and eukaryotic parasites and their 

interaction with the immune system. 


The students will be provided with the basic concepts of immunology and medical 

microbiology. Selected parts will be discussed in greater detail. Students will to have 

work out and present selected topics. 

Evaluation 

Exam, student presentations 

Introduction into databases 


Fall 1 IT II 1 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 519


On completion of this course, the students should have the basic knowledge to cope with 

the IT-demands in higher BIOTECH-semesters as well as the necessary knowledge to 

work with: 

MS PowerPoint (ability to set up and perform convincing presentations) 

MS Word (ability to format documents and write seminar papers) 

MS Excel (Spreadsheet-Calculation to use necessary functions, enter formulars and 

create charts) 

The level of knowledge should be at the end of the course more or less the one of an 

ECDL-holder (see http://www.ecdl.com) 


Beginners 


As IT becomes more and more vital to organizations Office applications offer the 

possibility to create masses of information that needs to be organized in an intelligent 

way. In this course we will go through the software applications MS Excel and MS Word. 

MS Word: formatting documents, numerations, usage of templates, footers and headers 

MS Excel: creation and modification of worksheets, usage of formulas and functions, 

manual creation of charts as well as with wizards, creation and the usage of data lists. 


Lectures and seminar-style exercises as well as self-study. 

Evaluation 

Presentations, written exam 

Microbiological Monitoring Laboratory 


Spring 4 MICM_L 5 


Upon completion of the course students are familiar with 

� Official requirements on sterile production of medicinal products 

� Sources of contamination 

� Sampling methods 

� Isolation and identification of germs 

� Methods of decontamination 

� Writing of a cleaning SOP 


Microbiological Working Techniques Laboratory 


A theoretical introduction will provide insight into the regulatory monitoring requirements 

in pharmaceutical production. In the first practical part students will use the most 

common microbiological monitoring techniques as well as small scale and automatized 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 520

identification systems. The working instructions are SOPs, the results have to reported in 

a test report style. 

In a second part students will have to develop simple monitoring and cleaning methods 

themselves and prepare SOPs. 


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

PreLab Questions, Reports 

Molecular Biology and Genetic Engineering 


Spring 2 MOLB_T 3 


The goal of the course is to give a basic overview about genetic engineering to have a 

basis for understanding the lab courses done in later semesters. 


Basics of Biology 


Introduction into proteins and amino acids, DNA, RNA and the most common genetic 

engineering techniques. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Exam/Presentation 

Organic Chemistry Laboratory 


Spring 2 CHEM_L II 2 


Organic Chemistry laboratory is a two hours credit lab course designed to practice 

benchwork and empirical observations. The purpose of the organic chemistry lab is to 

give students practical experience with operational organic chemistry. 


Basics of Chemistry and Laboratory Techniques 


The experiments during this lab give students practical experience in properly working 

and handling equipment in a chemistry laboratory. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 521


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

Laboratory Journals and Protocols/Laboratory Work 

Organic Chemistry 


Spring 2 CHEM_T II 3 


Organic chemistry is central to the understanding of biochemical and biotechnological 

processes. This course will generate a through basis for the later application of these 

theoretical mechanisms. 


Basics of Chemistry 


The content of the organic chemistry lectures will be broken down into three main parts, 

chemical theory, problem solving, practical exercises. The theoretical part will deal with 

the basic knowledge and the fundamental principles of organic chemistry. In the problem 

solving part the learned theory will be repeated and applied to study exercises and 

specific problems. In the practical exercises the students will build model and solve 

nomenclature problems under supervision. 


Lecture and problem sessions 

Evaluation 

Exam/Problem Sessions 

Quality management: GLP/GMP 


Spring 1 IQM 1 


Introduction into quality management is a two hour credit course, designed to introduce 

the students into the general principles of pharmaceutical quality management and the 

use of the most important documents. 


None 


The lecturers will introduce the basic concept of quality control systems and quality 

management according to ISO 9000, followed by an overview on the principles of quality 

management related to GMP and GLP regulations. The students will also perform first 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 522

exercises in the use and generation of key performance indicators, process descriptions 

and SOPs. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Exercises 

Statistics and Software Applications in Biotechnology 


Spring 3 STAT 4 


Concepts of statistics, descriptive statistics and analytical statistics will be presented. 

Analyzing data by SPSS, interpretation of statistical tests will be part of this lecture. 


None 


Basics of statistics with fundamental parameters and methods are presented by 

combining theory and practice. This will be connected with a software and data collection 

and using and processing data with computer software will be presented. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 523


Biochemistry Laboratory 


Fall 3 BCH_L 4 


The course will use selected practical examples to refer the students a broad insight into 

protein chemistry and immunological working techniques. 


Basic knowledge of Chemistry 


The course will deal with basic as well as with advanced protein chemistry and analytics. 


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

PreLab Questions/Laboratory Work/Protocols/oral exam 

Biochemistry 


Fall 3 BCHEM_T 4 


At the end of the lecture series the students will be able to understand the chemical basis 

of all major cellular processes. The will understand how catabolic and anabolic cascades 

work in terms of energy generation and the synthesis of small building blocks or 

macromolecular entities. Most importantly they will understand the intricate and tightly 

interlinked networks of enzymatic metabolic conversions and the regulatory principles 

that govern all metabolic events. 


Basic knowledge of chemistry 


1. Macromolecules and their building blocks 

2. Basic concepts of chemical reactions and their energetic and kinetic 

properties 

3. Enzymes and their catalytic and regulatory strategies 

4. Metabolism: Basic concepts and design 

5. Glycogene metabolism, glycolysis and gluconeogenesis 

6. The citric acid cycle 

7. Oxidative Phosphorylation 

8. Photosynthesis 

9. Calvin cycle and the pentose phosphate pathway 

10. Protein turnover and amino acid catabolism and anabolism 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 524


Lecture and discussion 

Evaluation 

Written exams 

Bioinformatics 

11. Fatty acid metabolism and the biosynthesis of membrane lipids and 

steroids 

12. Nucleotide biosynthesis 

13. The integration of metabolism 


Spring 2 BIT I 2 


This course provides knowledge on important biological databases, qualification to use 

these db and important tools and understanding the work of a bioinformatician. 


Basic IT knowledge 


The use of Biological Databases and important bio-informatic tools like Blast, which are 

important for the work in a molecular lab are presented. 


Lecture and exercises 

Evaluation 

Exam/Presentation 

Cell culture laboratory 1 


Fall 2 CELLC_L 3 


The Cell Culture lab course will introduce basal techniques in animal cell culture 

technology and cell biology. The main part of the course is used for one experiment that 

consists of several parts. This will show how time-consuming real research work is and 

how important it is to plan a project thoroughly and work orderly. 


Basics of laboratory working and immunology 


You will practice cell biology techniques you learn in Cell Culture laboratory and get to 

know new methods. Furthermore you have to apply the techniques from the first part 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 525

and create a strategy to solve a given problem. This strategy and a timetable have to be 

handed in a week. 


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

Laboratory Protocols/Laboratory Work/Oral Exam 

Cell Culture Techniques 


Fall 1 CELLC_T 1 


In this lecture you will be introduced in the principles of eukaryotic cells, cell cultures, cell 

culture equipment and handling. You will learn to maintain animal cell cultures, how to 

manipulate animal cells and about the basic equipment used in animal culture. 


Basic knowledge of immunology, biology and laboratory work 


Upon completion of this lecture, you are expected to be familiar with the use of animal 

cell culture, characteristics of cells in culture, basic equipment and laboratory design,growth 

and maintenance of cells in culture, cell line and culture monitoring and genetic 

engineering of animal cells in culture. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Cell Physiology and Medical Molecular Biology 


Fall 2 MMOLB_T 2 


The students will get an overview of modern concepts of cell biology, membrane and 

neural cell physiology, cell communication and signal transduction. As a consequence the 

students will understand the functional impact of genetic and biochemical cellular 

alterations on the development and progression of major human diseases such as cancer 

and neurodegenerative syndromes. 


Basic knowledge of biology and immunology 


1. Signal Transduction: 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 526

A. General Concepts and Overview 

B. Selected Signalling Pathways such as G-Proteins, Receptor Tyrosine Kinases, 

Transforming Growth Factor beta, Wnt, Hedgehog, Notch, Nuclear Factor Kappa 

B. 

2. Regulation of cell cycle progression and cellular proliferation, Focus on Retinoblastoma 

Tumour Suppressor Protein 

3. Apoptosis in development and disease, Focus on p53 Tumour Suppressor Protein 

4. Membrane Biology and Neural Cell Physiology 

5. Direct contact dependent cell communication and the extracellular matrix: General 

mechanisms of tissue formation 

6. Basic physiology of selected tissues: Muscles, liver, intestine, skin, brain; vision, 

hearing, smell 



Evaluation 

Written exams 

Genetic Engineering Laboratory 


Fall 2 GEN_L I 1 


The genetic engineering laboratory will introduce basal techniques in molecular biology – 

transformation, miniplasmid preparations, restriction digests, agarose gel 

electrophoresis. Additionally calculating buffer compositions will be practiced. Upon 

completion of this course, you are expected to: 

� be familiar with the introduced techniques in molecular biology and understand 

the principles and concepts behind them and are able to apply the knowledge 

of these techniques to novel experiments 

� be able to calculate buffer compositions and find the necessary information in 

manufacturer‘s catalogues 


Basic Laboratory techniques, microbiology, genetic engineering 


Agarose gel electrophoresis 

Preparation of competent cells 

Transformation 

Miniplasmid Preparation 

Restriction digest 

DNA quantification 

Buffer calculations 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 527


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

Exam/laboratory protocols/Laboratory work 

GLP/GMP 


Fall 1 GLP_T 1 


GMP / GLP is a one hour credit course, designed to teach a clear understanding of the 

field of pharmaceutical quality management. The course should provide the students with 

an overview on GLP regulation, general GMP regulation and GMP in biotechnological 

development processes. 


None 


The lecturers will give an overview on GMP and GLP regulations, which is the main 

regulation governing the working environment in pharmaceutical industry. Starting with 

the GLP regulations, which cover the setup of test facilities responsible for safety 

techniques the lecture moves on to GMP regulations, which cover the pharmaceutical 

production process. A final, more detailed look on these regulations in the production of 

biopharmaceutical and during the drug development process will close the lecture. 


The study subject will be taught according to general OECD / WHO /EU and local 

directives and local guide lines. Students will be provided with power point presentations 

and supplemental material as appropriate. 

To deepen the students understanding, study questions will be given to the students at 

the end of each lecture. The students are expected to solve these questions as home 

work in preparation for the following lecture. These will allow them to follow the progress 

of the course and prepare themselves for the final exam. 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Instrumental Analytics Laboratory 


Fall 2 IA_L 3 


The course aims to give the student a basic understanding of instrumental analytic 

methods used in biotechnology. 


Basic Laboratory working techniques 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 528


Students get familiar with following important laboratory techniques: ATP Quantification 

via luminescence spectroscopy, Protein Quantification via Fluorescence (a performance 

qualification of an analytical device will also be performed), DNA Isolation from 

Genetically modified food, Recombinant Protein Technology: Yeast Cell Disruption via 

French Press Technology, Recombinant Protein Technology: FPLC purification of a 

recombinant protein, FPLC: Cleaning and Maintenance of Chromatography columns, Real 

time PCR: Analysis of genetically modified food 


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

Laboratory Protocols/Oral Exam 

Instrumental Analytics Theory 


Fall 1 IA_T 1 


The goal of the course is to get an overview about the most common instruments which 

are used in the biomedical continuum. Special focus is put on understanding the 

hardware and the applications which are performed by analytical instruments. 


None 


The course describes the following instruments and analytical techniques: 

Centrifugation techniques and applications, UV/Vis –Spectroscopy and applications, 

Measurement modes (kinetic and endpoint), Kinetic data reduction, Circular dichroism 

spectroscopy, Infrared Spectroscopy and applications, Fluorescence Methods, 

Applications and Devices, Laser Scanning Microscopy, Fluorescence detection methods 

(Fluorescence Intensity, Time resolved fluorescence, Fluorescence polarization, 

Fluorescence life time), Luminescence, Bioluminescence Applications, etc. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Presentation, final exam 

Introduction to contamination control and clean room training 


Spring 1 CRT 1 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 529


Clean room training provides basic theoretical knowledge and practical training for 

behavior in classified areas. Students are trained to apply theory from the lecture on 

setting parameters for the clean room and appropriate working in the clean room. 


None 


Clean room training consists of a lecture on theoretical background and practical training 

in the lab. Students work in groups to compile protocols for working in classified areas. 

After practical training gathered data is compiled in a report. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Protocol 

Measurement and Control Systems 1 


Fall 1 MPC I 1 


On successful completion of this course, students will be able to: 


None 

� understand and describe the principles of modern sensor systems 

� describe, analyse and apply measurement methods 

� understand the principles of open- and closed-loop control systems 

� solve control problems in a systematic way. 


This course is focusing on measuring and control systems (MCS) used in process 

technology. The course is designed as a review on the necessary basics of electrical 

engineering followed by measurement and control engineering with focus on the use in 

biotechnical systems. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Mid Term Exam, final exam 

PTS preparation: Application and Preparation 


Fall 1 PTS I 1 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 530


Students should know the do's and don'ts in regards to the entire application process for 

a position in a company. This will not only be beneficial for the practical training semester 

but also for future reference when applying for a position. Students will be able to write a 

curriculum vitae, cover letter and also will know how to react during job interviews. 


None 


Students are accompanied through various stages in regards to their application process 

for the practical training semester. They will receive general information in regards to the 

practical training semester, its set up and the reports that need to be prepared. They will 

learn about the different ways on how to write a cover letter, curriculum vitae and what 

to watch out for when applying for a job. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Assignments 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 531


Biochemical analytics Theory 


Spring 2 BCHA_T 2 


Students are familiar with principles and interpretation of the results of common 

analytical methods as chromatography (SEC, IEX, Affinity,…), electrophoresis, blotting, 

FACS, MS, 


Biochemistry 


Important methods used in biochemical analytics will be discussed with the focus on the 

principal of the methods and the data interpretation 


The course will be held as an academic lecture assuming basics in chemistry, 

biochemistry, physics are assumed. Students will be held to discuss specific points. In 

addition students will give short presentations to different topics. 

Evaluation 

Final exam/Presentations/Mid Term Exam 

Bioprocess technology Theory 


Spring 3 BPT_T 5 


The course will deal with the basic theory behind biopharmaceutical processes. 


Physics, Chemistry, Cell Physiology, Microbiology 


Students shall become familiar with the scientific description of the unit operations 

applied in Bioprocess Engineering to ensure an optimum design of (bio) processes. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Midterm exam/Final exam 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 532

Cell culture laboratory 2 


Spring 2 CELLC_L II 3 


On the basis of the previous cell biology training the present advanced course is designed 

to further improve the student‘s technical and conceptual skills in cell biology. By means 

of four state-of-the-art cell biology methods, which are presently widely used in both 

basic research and applied drug discovery screening programs, the students will learn 

how to plan, execute and validate scientific experiments. 


Laboratory Skills, cell Physiology 


In the first (theoretical) part the students will get detailed background information 

regarding the cell models (origin/biology) and materials (chemical composition, 

applicability) employed in the course. In addition, we will discuss the advantages and 

shortcomings/pitfalls as well as the physiological relevance of the experimental 

techniques including data interpretation and validation. In order to guarantee a precise 

and smooth workflow in the laboratory the students will also receive first technical 

instructions on the upcoming experiments. 

In the second (practical) part the students will perform the experiments according to the 

instructions of the course manual and the hands-on demonstrations of the supervising 

lecturers. 


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

Laboratory Work/Laboratory Protocols 

Current Issues in Biotechnology 


Spring 1 CUR II 1 


Lectures on current scientific and industrial topics in biotechnology. 


None 


External lecturers from scientific institutions and industry are presenting the most current 

findings and developments in biotechnology. 


Lecture 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 533

Evaluation 

In-class participation 

Drug Regulatory Affairs 


Fall 1 DRUG I 1 


The pharmaceutical industry is probably one of the most restricted branches. Legal 

regulation already starts at an early state of the development of a medicinal product, 

includes the marketing of it and ends with its "death". But law is continually changing, 

particularly due to the fast development of new technologies. So, law tends to change as 

science changes. The code is not defined by the sovereign alone, but is an interactive 

process amongst all concerned parties. 


None 


Familiarization of the students with the main topics of drug law. The course centers on 

the situation in the European Union. 


It is the aim of the course to enable students to understand legal requirements related to 

pharmaceutical products. This cannot be reached by front-lecturing alone and therefore, 

discussions and brief revisions at the beginning of the each meeting will take place. 

Evaluation 

Review & group work/Final exam 

Equipment and Production Design 


Spring 2 EPD 2 


On successful completion of the course the students will be able to define the main 

equipment used in biopharmaceutical production, explain the operating principles of the 

equipment involved, identify the most important design parameters of equipment 

concerning product quality, calculate design parameters of critical equipment based on 

production requirements, appraise regulatory, environmental and safety requirements on 

production layout. 


None 


After an introduction in this topic, where the general requirements of the equipment 

involved in the production of therapeutic proteins are illustrated, basic elements of 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 534

iotech production facilities are presented in detail (support systems and utilities, 

production of cell culture media, bioreactors and product holding tanks and containers, 

cell separation and disruption systems, ultrafiltration equipment, process 

chromatography systems, freeze-drying). 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Genetic Engineering Laboratory under GLP 


Spring 2 GEN_L II 3 


Upon completion of the course the students will 

� be able to apply good documentation practice 

� understand the application of GLP in a laboratory environment 

� use the applied lab techniques (Protein expression, purification, 

characterization; DNA purification, restriction, ligation, transformation, 

PCR) 


Laboratory Skills, Genetic Engineering Laboratory, GLP/GMP seminar 


The experiments for the laboratory course ―Genetic Engineering Laboratory under GLP‖ 

are discussed in the lecture ―GLP/GMP seminar‖. During that seminar a study plan and 

protocol sheets are prepared that are then used to document the work in the laboratory 

course. 

The Genetic Engineering Laboratory will take one week. During this week two 

experiments have to be performed: 

� Cloning and identification of recombinant clones 

� Protein expression and characterization 


The Genetic Engineering Laboratory is based on the study plan which is prepared during 

the preceding GMP / GLP lectures. The students have to design protocol sheets to 

document their experimental observations as well as the raw data of their 

experiments. In order to meet the goals of the laboratory course the students will be 

assisted by the laboratory instructors, who will provide the students with practical tips 

and theoretical support. Since safety is a central question in the laboratory, the students 

will also have to identify potential hazards in the experimental setup and provide 

suggestions on how to minimize these risks during their practical work. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 535

Evaluation 

Study Report 

GLP/GMP Seminar 


Spring 2 GLP_SE 3 


Upon completion of this course students will 

� be able to apply good documentation practice 

� understand the application of GLP in a laboratory environment 

� get an understanding for finding critical steps in a process 


Genetic Engineering, Basic knowledge of GLP 


This seminar prepares for the laboratory course ―Genetic Engineering Laboratory under 

GLP‖. After an introduction about the official requirements on GLP laboratories the 

scientific background and the actual realization of the experiments are discussed in detail. 

The students have to prepare a study plan with protocol sheets and a time table about 

the two experiments of the lab course. 

With the assembled documentation the students then perform and document the 

experiments in the lab. 

After the lab course they have to write a study report about the execution and outcome 

of one of the experiments in the lab. 

In the lab each student has to perform a calibration exercise, that will be part of the 

grade for the seminar. 


The introductory meetings will be front-desk teaching. Later on the students will have to 

present the techniques they will apply and work out the critical steps. The development 

of the study plan will be done during the seminar in the PC-labs and supported by the 

lecturer. 

Evaluation 

Study Plan, Presentation, Calibration 

Introduction into Validation 


Spring 1 IVAL 1 


Getting a basic understanding of the requirements of validation principles of equipment. 


None 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 536


The students will gain knowledge on the legal regulations, validation pyramids, 

equipment qualification (IQ,OQ,PQ), basics on test validation (sensitivity, reproducibility, 

robustness), basic principles of facility validation. The students will also produce 

specifications for basic facility equipment like pumps. 


Lecture, workshops 

Evaluation 

Presentation of the workshops 

Measurement and Process Control Systems 2 


Spring 1 MPC II 1 


On successful completion of this course, students will be able to understand and describe 

the principles of modern sensor systems, understand the principles of open-loop control 

systems, understand the principles of Stored Programmable Controller (SPC), analyze 

and program special SPC-tasks used in biotechnology, solve control problems in a 

systematic way. 


MPC3 


This course is focusing on measuring and control systems (MCS) used in process 

technology. 

Designed as an introduction into the necessary basics of open loop control systems 

followed by programming special Stored-Programmable-Controller (SPC) -tasks used in 

biotechnology. 


Lecture with high practical background. Students have to work out problems given by the 

lecturer. Practical work on controller programming. 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Pharmaceutical Production Systems 


Spring 1 PPS 1 


The course will provide an overview on expression systems for recombinant proteins with 

a focus on microbial systems. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 537


None 


The first part of the lecture focuses on process development of microbial production 

systems including E.coli, S.cerevisiae and P.pastoris. Mammalian cell culture production 

systems are outlined. 

In the second part of the lecture the fermentation and primary recovery of microbial 

production systems at commercial scale will be discussed. This includes information on 

process upscale strategies, large scale process equipment and commercial process flows. 

Differences to mammalian cell culture systems are outlined. 

In the final part of the lecture the purification of microbial production systems at 

commercial scale will be discussed. This includes information on process upscale 

strategies, large scale process equipment and commercial process flows. Differences to 

mammalian cell culture systems are outlined. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 538


Bachelor thesis I and Bachelor seminar 


Fall 1 BACH I 4 


The course provides the possibility to discuss the bachelor thesis I with their internal 

coach. 


Practical work for Bachelor thesis 


All topics concerning the bachelor thesis I are discussed in this seminar. The students are 

asked to define their questions in advance; therefore they also define the content of the 

lecture according to their needs. 


Seminar 

Evaluation 

Bachelor thesis I 

Practical Training semester 


Fall PTS II 26 


The students should gain an insight into scientific and industrial work during this min. 22 

weeks lasting training. They should develop special skills and apply the knowledge gained 

in the courses from semester 1 to 4. 


Semester 1-4 


Students are responsible to carry out the internship tasks and experiments as stated in 

the contract of practical training. Additionally the students will have an internal coach in 

Krems who will support the student during the work and the development of the bachelor 

thesis. 

Evaluation 

Initial report, employer evaluation, experience presentation 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 539


Bachelor thesis II and Bachelor seminar 


Spring 1 BACH_SE 8 


The course provides the possibility to discuss the bachelor thesis II with their internal 

coach. 


Practical work for Bachelor thesis 


All topics concerning the bachelor thesis II are discussed in this seminar. The students 

are asked to define their questions in advance; therefore they also define the content of 

the lecture according to their needs. 


Seminar 

Evaluation 

Bachelor thesis II 

Bioprocess Technology and Fermentation Laboratory 


Spring 5 BPT_L 10 


To become familiar with the use of bioreactors and the measuring methods applied for 

the monitoring of the production process for recombinant protein expression reactions. 


Bioprocess technology, Equipment and Production Design 


Expression of a protein in E.coli. The process needs to be adapted from the shaking 

flasks culture protocols to a bioreactor procedure. Evaluation of the growth properties, 

the biomass and the recombinant protein yields in the fermenter and a shaking culture 

using different OD measurements, dry matter determination as well as ELISA or Western 

blotting procedures Preparation and autoclaving of the medium and the autoclave 

reagents have to be mastered by the students. 


Laboratory 

Evaluation 

Laboratory Protocols 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 540

Clinical Studies and GCP 


Spring 1 GCP I 2 


After this course students know about the basic principles of GCP and its background and 

historical development. Furthermore they know the main laws, regulations, roles and 

responsibilities applicable for the conduct of clinical trials. The course gives insights into 

the phases of the clinical development of medicinal drugs and the current strategies of 

drug development. 


None 


On the basis of GCP the students will gain an overview on the different phases (I-IV) of 

the clinical development process. The set-up, directing and the monitoring of different 

clinical studies will be discussed. A special focus lies herby on the project management of 

clinical studies and the responsibilities of a clinical monitor. For the better understanding 

of the teaching the student will get problems to solve which can come up during clinical 

studies. These problems will then be identified and solved in small groups. 


Face to face sessions with interactions (question/answer) between student and lecturer, 

brain-storming exercises in small groups with oral presentation to the whole group. 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Material Science and Biomaterials 


Spring 1 MSC 2 


This course gives an outline on the basics of material science including specific details on 

biomaterials. 


None 


The students should get an overview on the basic requirements of equipment materials, 

material selection for facilities and facility parts. Biocompatibility of materials, metals and 

plastics and their use in process technology are also dealt with in this course. 


The content will be worked out in a mixture of basic lessons, specialised lessons, highlevel 

discussion and work in groups. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 541

Evaluation 

In-class participation 

Principles of Management and Marketing 


Spring 2 PMGT 1 


The students will get an basic introduction into marketing- and sales- activities of 

biotechnologic business companies which generally operate global. 


None 


The student will get impart of an overview of the hole business area of a company. 

Specific contents are business aims and principles, economy (market-structures, legal 

environment), marketing (market analysis, market strategies), management and 

personnel administration (business structures and organization), management principles, 

recruiting and training, accountancy and controlling, funding, acquisition, production, 

operational management. Practice exercises for several themes will be provided. 


The students will get a basic introduction into marketing- and sales- activities of 

biotechnological business companies which generally operate global. 

Evaluation 

Mid term exam, final exam 



Spring 2 PRO 2 


This lecture will familiarize students with the basic concepts in Project Management as 

applied in the Pharmaceutical Industry for new product development. 


None 


The course will by and large be based on the Project Management processes as defined 

by Project Management Institute (PMI; www.pmi.org), the 'golden standard' of Project 

Management. These processes will be depicted by examples from the 

Pharmaceutical/Biotechnology Industry. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 542


By original design, this lecture will be held by the lecturer in charge. However, several 

activities are intended to convert this lecture into a lively forum of interaction and 

exchange between students and lecturer. Particularly, certain elements are planned to 

encourage active involvement and integration of students, specifically group works, eg 

Critical Path Identification, Risk Management Exercise, Communication Plan 

Development, etc. After all, Project Management is TEAMWORK - and the livelier the 

students are, the more fun it will be! Students will also be required to provide the 

audience, ie their peers, with overviews (as Powerpoint presentations) on selected topics, 

eg on nowadays most common and state of the art clinical trial designs. the necessary 

information is to be researched by the students in the internet, based on key words and 

suitable web sites provided by the lecturer. 

Evaluation 

Presentation, final exam 

Pharmacology 


Spring 2 PHARM 4 


The students should get an overview on the basics of pharmacology, pharmacodynamics 

and pharmacokinetics. 


None 


The scope of this lecture lies on the basic pharmacological principles of the autonomous 

nervous system, specific groups of drugs and diseases like antimicrobial and antiviral 

drugs, cancer chemotherapy, allergy, asthma, drugs influencing blood and coagulation, 

hormone therapies, contraception, diabetes and obesity. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 543

MEDICAL & PHARMACEUTICAL BIOTECHNOLOGY – 

Master Programme 


Contamination control in production plants 


Fall 1 CON 1 

Learning Outcomes/ Course Objectives 

Students get familiar with industrial hygiene regarding safety of biopharmaceuticals. 

They learn about regulatory expectations, microbiology (sources and characteristics of 

microorganisms), cleaning, disinfection, sterilization, clean room classes and monitoring. 


Advanced 


The course is split into two parts: 

Academic lectures discussing about industrial hygiene and how this contributes to safety 

of biopharmaceuticals. 

Seminars/Workshops applying the lessons learned. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam, discussions. 

Equipment and production design 


Fall 2 EPD II 3 



� specify critical design parameters for tangential flow filtration units 

� identify competent suppliers of centrifuges & ultrafiltration systems 

� prepare an ordering specification for various equipment used in the 

down-stream processing of biopharmaceuticals 

� define the specific steps applied in the piping planning process 

� illustrate the most important information to be included in a Master 

Validation Plan 

� explain the tests to be carried out in the IQ-, OQ- and PQ-phase 

� evaluate facility design concepts to meet GMP requirements 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 544


Advanced 


The course covers the following topics: 

� Introduction 

� Types of Technical Specifications 

� Main content of Ordering Specifications 

� Presentations of various specifications by the students followed by 

discussions 

� Detail engineering of piping and vessels 

� IQ, OQ and PQ of process equipment 

� Design of biopharmaceutical facilities 


In the first meeting the flow sheets of various unit operations are shown and elucidated 

in detail. Each student (or a small group of students) has to select one type of 

equipment displayed in the flow sheets, from which an ordering specification has to be 

prepared using sources supplied in the home pages of the main manufacturers of process 

equipment. The students are requested to contribute to the particular presentations by 

any comments or by putting critical questions. 

In order to support the understanding of my own presentations regarding detail 

engineering of piping and vessels as well as the qualification of equipment various 

drawings and layouts are shown. Some examples in the field of "Piping and 

Instrumentation Drawings" are included. 

Evaluation 

Specification, final exam 

Equipment, test and process validation 


Fall 2 ETPV_T 2 


On successful completion of the course the students will be able to understand 

Qualification and Validation principles including Design Phase, Equipment Qualification, 

Analytical Method Validation, Computerized System Validation, Process Validation, 

Cleaning and Sterilization Validation as well as regulatory respectively industry 

background and expectations 


Advanced 


The course covers the foundation of validation, regulatory requirements and guidelines, 

validation pyramid, equipment qualification (DQ, IQ, OQ, PQ), risk analysis, facility 

qualification, method validation (sensitivity, robustness, reproducibility), process 

validation, cleaning validation and sterilization/sanitization validation. Workshops will 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 545

cover user requirements, equipment qualification, process validation, computerized 

system validation, analytical method validation and cleaning validation. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Workshop, final exam 

Fermentation technology laboratory 


Fall 5 FERM_L 8 


The students are enabled to plan and operate a fermentation process. This includes the 

preparation of the inoculum, the operating of the fermentation in shaking flasks and the 

bioreactor and the compilation of the corresponding reports. The students should also be 

able to judge the outcome of their process using industry relevant analytical methods. 

Prerequisites/ Level 

Advanced 


The scope of the course is to conduct the upstream part of a typical industry production 

process of an active pharmaceutical ingredient in a single cell organism. This comprises 

the preparation of a cell bank, the execution of the pre- and main-culture (in shaking 

flasks and a bioreactor), the primary recovery and the corresponding analytical methods. 

The students are responsible for the fermentation plan of the whole laboratory course for 

the schedule for their process. They should consider all factors for their concept, as 

composition of the media, operating parameters, performance parameters to be checked 

and primary recovery and have to assemble the bioreactor and its components. The 

whole process as well as the documentation is GMP-based. 


The students will be prepared for the laboratory course in the corresponding lectures. 

Evaluation 

Protocol and participation 

Process control and process online monitoring 


Fall 2 PCON 2 


Process Control: Students know how process control works in principle and are familiar 

with control strategies. In addition the most important types of controllers get to be 

known, the interaction between computerized systems and biological processes 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 546

Process online monitoring: Relevant on-line probes and their usage for process controll 

get to be known, the usage of on-line measurements instead of off-line measurements - 

how to replace them 


Advanced 


Fermentor instrumentation / - set up; Definition in-, on-, at- and off-line; Sampling 

techniques; Off-line analytics, Chromatographic methods (substrate, nucleotides,…); 

-Omics (Transcriptomics (microarrays, real time PCR,…), proteomics, metabolomics); in- 

and on-line methods; spectroscopic methods; software sensors; multivariant data 

analysis / chemometrics; FDA´s QbD and PAT guideline and initiative 


Academic lectures, problem sessions, group works 

Evaluation 

Group works, final exam 

Recombinant protein production and modification laboratory 


Fall 4 PROT_L 5 


In the laboratory course the students will get familiar with the protein expression 

platform P. pastoris. The human cytokine TNF alpha will be produced intracellular and the 

product will be purified via affinity purification. Finally the product will be characterized in 

a cell based test system (WEHI cells). This murine cell line is very sensitive for apoptosis 

induction via human TNF alpha (IC50 value is ~10pg). 


Advanced 


Transformation (chemical) of Pichia 

Media Design, Cultivation of Pichia 

Screening of Expression clones 

Induction of recombinant protein production 

Disruption of cells via French Press or glass beads 

Affinity Purification of TNF alpha 

Buffer exchange via gel filtration 

Activity testing via cytotoxicity assay in murine cell line (cell culture technique) 


The students will be prepared for the laboratory course in the corresponding lecture 

Evaluation 

Protocol and review of provided papers 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 547

Recombinant protein production and modification theory 


Fall 2 PROT_T 3 


The students will get an overview about the most common Protein expression organisms 

which are used in industry and research (E. coli, Yeast, Insect Cells, Mammalian Cells 

and in vitro transcription and translation methods). Additionally the most important post- 

and cotranslational protein modifications and the corresponding analysis are 

discussed. Finally, the student will hear strategies to purify recombinant proteins. 


Advanced 

Course Description: 

Overview Expression Organisms in Industry and Research, Novel Expression Systems and 

Platforms; E. coli ,Gene Dose, Promoters, Plasmid stability, Signal Sequences and 

Secretion, N-end Rule, Strains; Yeast System for Protein Expression, Plasmids, Focus 

Pichia pastoris; Insect cells, Plasmids and Systems; Mammalian Cells; In vitro Protein 

Production Systems; Protein Purification Strategies; Post and co-translational Modification 

of Proteins, Analysis of Protein-Modification 


Students have to work out selected topics (papers provided by the lecturer) in 

recombinant protein engineering in small groups. 

Evaluation 

Presentation and final exam 

Research semester preparation 


Fall 1 PREP 1 


Students update their curriculum vitas and application forms and are prepared for 

interviews. 


None 


Specialists from the life science industry are invited to give insights about their work and 

various research topics in order for the students to gain a better insight of what possible 

fields they could work in. Students learn about different application possibilities and the 

do's and don‘ts when writing their application. The importance of cover letters is 

discussed and the application documents are updated. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 548


Students are assisted during their application process and develop strategies for their 

application. 

Evaluation 

Updated CVs and motivation letters 

Scale up – Scale down techniques 


Fall 2 SCALE 2 


The students learn the most important purification techniques commonly used in 

biotechnological industry with a special emphasis on their scalability. 


Advanced 


The four main downstream operations are outlined: Separation, Isolation of the product. 

Purification, preparation in pure state. Thus the following unit operations are examined: 

filtration, lysis, flocculation, sedimentation, extraction, chromatography, adsorption, 

precipitation, crystallisation, drying and centrifugation. Purification strategies of specific 

products are discussed to high lighten the advantages and disadvantages of these 

processes. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Standardization 


Fall 1 SCT 1 


General overview how and which standards (engineering as well as pharmaceutical) are 

applied in the pharmaceutical industry. 


Advanced 


The course covers the basic principles how engineering and especially pharmaceutical 

standards are implemented respectively transcribed into internal specifications (e.g. URS, 

Material Specification, Product Specification) and the concerned parts of the CTD of 

regulatory submissions. Students will be introduced to national (e.g. ÖNORM, DIN) and 

international (e.g. EN, ISO, Ph.Eur.) standards and regulations (e.g. DGVO, MSV, AM-VO). 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 549

Furthermore the students will have to compile material specifications as well as a product 

specification. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam, presentation of the workshops 

Upstream processing and fermentation 


Fall 2 FERM_T 2 


Students get familiar with state of the art technologies in fermentation of 

pharmaceuticals, developments in research and trends in proceeding of pharmaceutical 

projects 


Advanced 


The course is split into two parts: 

Part I gives an introduction into mass balancing, growth kinetics and general aspects 

necessary to be calculated when fermentation processes are developed. 

Part II gives an overview of industrial practice of the in Part I discussed topics. 


Lectures, seminar and discussion 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 550


Analytic methods in biomedicine laboratory 


Spring 2 ANA_L 2 


Proficiency in planning, executing and interpreting molecular diagnostic technologies. 


Advanced 


The following analytic-diagnostic methods are planned: 

1. Identification of oncogenic mutations in the signaling molecule KRAS 

� Preparation of genomic DNA from cell lines and/or paraffin-embedded and 

formaldehyd-fixed tumour specimen 

� Preparation of RNA from cell lines and/or paraffin-embedded and formaldehydfixed 

tumor specimen 

� Generation of cDNA from RNA samples 

� Real-Time PCR experiments to identify and characterize mutations in the KRAS 

oncogene 

2. Pyrosequencing experiments to identify and characterize genomic mutations in the 

KRAS oncogene 

3. Immunohistochemistry of paraffin-embedded human cancer specimen 


Each day the course will be divided into two parts. In the first (theoretical) part the 

students will get detailed background information regarding the cells (origin/biology) and 

materials (chemical composition, applicability) employed in the course. In addition, we 

will discuss the advantages and shortcomings/pitfalls as well as the clinical relevance of 

the molecular diagnostic techniques including data interpretation and validation. In order 

to guarantee a precise and smooth workflow in the laboratory the students will also 

receive first technical instructions on the upcoming experiments. 

In the second (practical) part the students will perform the experiments according to the 

instructions of the course manual and the hands-on demonstrations of the supervising 

lecturers 

Evaluation 

Protocols, commitment 

Analytic methods in biomedicine theory 


Spring 1 ANA_T 1 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 551


The students will be able to understand and assess critical current trends in molecular 

medical diagnostics. In particular they will be equipped with the technical expertise to 

comprehend the major state of the art technologies in the diagnostic field. Given the 

importance of biomarkers and diagnostic procedures in the detection and treatment of 

major human diseases the knowledge delivered in the lecture and in the accompanying 

laboratory course will make the students more competitive for the job market of the 

pharmaceutical industry. 


Advanced 


The following topics will be discussed: 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Bioinformatics 

1. Molecular Diagnostics: Past, Present and Future 

2. The importance of biomarkers in the detection and treatment of 

diseases 

3. Real Time PCR, the gold standard of genetic diagnostics 

4. Pyrosequencing and massive parallel next generation DNA 

sequencing techniques 

5. Molecular Cytogenetics in molecular diagnostics 

6. DNA microarrays and genetic testing 

7. Nutrigenomics 

8. Molecular diagnostic applications in forensic sciences 

9. Applications of proteomics to disease diagnostics 

10. Immunohistochemistry and the pathological assessment of 

diseases 


Spring 1 BIT II 2 


Understanding of Simulation in Biology 


Advanced 


Simple Programming skills and Knowledge in Simulation Software; Genome wide 

Association Studies 


Learning by Doing 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 552

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Cancer/Aging 


Spring 1 AGING 1 


Understanding of the molecular causes of cancer and the metastatic cascade 


Advanced 


1. The hallmarks of cancer 

2. Angiogenesis and cancer 

3. The metastatic cascade 

4. Colon cancer: a classical example for tumour progression 

5. Skin cancer and melanoma: understanding the development of aggressive 

tumours 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Current issues in regenerative medicine 


Spring 1 CURR V 1 


Upon completion of this lecture, you are expected to be familiar with tissue engineering, 

cell biology and physiology. 


Advanced 


In this lecture you will be introduced in the principles of tissues, regenerative medicine, 

tissue engineering, medical and molecular biology ( bone marrow, skin, blood cells, 

cartilage etc.) 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 553

Developmental biology and new therapeutic strategies 


Spring 1 DEVB 2 


The understanding of the molecular mechanisms of embryonic pattern formation and 

tissue and organ development is often essential to understand the molecular causes of 

human diseases. The lecture series in developmental biology is supposed to summarize 

the major principles of developmental biology. Various model organisms are presently 

exploited to unravel universal mechanisms of embryonic development and are 

increasingly used for drug discovery purposes. As a matter of fact the students will be 

able to develop an interdisciplinary way of thinking which is generally considered a 

prerequisite for sustainable technological breakthroughs in bio-medical sciences. 

In addition, the students will actively participate by preparing short talks that focus on 

current issues of developmental biology. Instructions regarding the preparation and the 

topics of the talks will be given in the first lecture. 


Advanced 


The major topics of the lecture series are: 

1. General principles of embryonic development 

2. Early embryonic development and axis formation (from fertilization to gastrulation) 

3. Later embryonic development: The emergence of the ectoderm and central and 

peripheral nervous system, the mesoderm specification, endoderm and its 

descendant tissues 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam and presentations 

Drug discovery systems 


Spring 2 DISC 3 


Students receive a detailed knowledge about modern drug discovery strategies. 


Advanced 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 554


The lecture deals with latest trends and technologies in drug discovery. Leading scientists 

from Austrian drug discovery companies (Boehringer, SeaLife Pharama) are presenting 

their approach for identification and characterization of new lead compounds. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final Exam 

Pathophysiology and Molecular Therapeutic Strategies 


Spring 3 PMTS 4 


Students will get to know the most common diseases, their molecular reasons and 

pathology, current treatments and future perspectives of treatment. 

Upon completion of the course the students will understand the strategies for gaining 

novel therapies, know the standard and future strategies for vaccinations. 


Advanced 


Neurodegenerative diseases 

Cardiovascular diseases 

Auto-immune diseases and allergies 

Infectious diseases 


Lecture and discussions with the students upon their individual interest. 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Immunology 


Spring 1 IMM 1 


The course should provide the students with a 

� An overview on the single components of the immune system 

� Basic understanding of immunological principles 

� Allow the student to connect clinical disease pictures with the underlying 

immunological mechanisms. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 555


Advanced 


The lecture will introduce the central components of the human immune system and the 

theory underlying immunological responses. The studies will proceed as outlined below: 

� Introduction to immunology _ B cells and the generation of antibodies 

� T cells and the process of antigen processing by APCs 

� Innate immunity and the complement system 

� Small lymphocyte development and differentiation 

� Adaptive immunity to infection 

� Mechanisms of tolerance induction and disease resulting from the 

failure of the immune system 


The study subject will be taught according to the textbook. Students will be provided with 

supplemental material as appropriate. 

To deepen the students understanding, study questions will be given to the students at 

the end of each lecture. The students are expected to solve these questions as home 

work in preparation for the following lecture. These will allow them to follow the progress 

of the course and prepare themselves for the final exam. 

Methods of evaluation 

Final exam 

Medical biotechnology laboratory 


Spring 4 MBT_L 4 


During this practical course, the students will be enrolled in marine biotechnology and in 

the isolation of bioactive substances. Furthermore, you will be introduced into drug 

discovery, vitro cell characterization techniques as well as into electrophysiological 

methods. 

Part 1: During this practical course, the students will be introduced into in vitro cell 

characterization techniques as well as into electrophysiological methods. 

In Part2, students will be enrolled in marine biotechnology and in the isolation of 

bioactive substances 


Advanced 


In Part 1: Students will cultivate different marine bacterial or fungal strains to isolate 

bioactive substances for drug discovery. Aniti-viral & anti-bacterial test systems will be 

performed. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 556

In Part 2: The goal is to elucidate the function of a specific gene. The students will 

perform either alone or in groups of 2, by means of a rotation system, different 

experiments: Transfection methods, migration assays, Fluorescence microscopy, Realtime 

PCR (optional) Anoikis assays (apoptosis/necrosis), Luciferase (Reporter) assays. 


The students will practically perform all assays, upon instruction by the lecturers and will 

write the protocol in the form of a manuscript. 

Evaluation 

Practical work skills, laboratory protocol 

Regenerative Medicine and Nanobiotechnology 


Spring 3 RMN 4 


Regenerative medicine and nanobiotechnology are emerging fields in biotechnology. The 

students will be introduced into tissue and organ culture as well as the used methods and 

equipment. They will get an overview about the application of micro- and nanoparticles 

used in biotechnology (diagnostics, drug delivery, magnetic nanoparticles, biochips, 

intelligent implants etc.). 


Advanced 


In this lecture series experts will introduce basic concepts of their field and present stateof-the-art 

solutions and current research fields. 


Lecture and discussion. 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics 


Spring 1 KIN 2 

Learning Outcomes/Course objectives 

Get an understanding how the basics of Pharmacodynamics and Pharmacokinetics drive 

modern drug development 


Advanced 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 557


Molecular drug targets; Quantification of drug action - Concentration/Response Curves; 

Agonist - Antagonist; Signal transduction via receptors; Receptor Superfamilies; 

Tolerance mechanisms; Selective Estrogen Modulators; GABAA-receptor subtypes and 

Benzodiazepines, G protein-coupled receptors - desensitization, internalization; 

Development of Trastuzumab, Imatinib and selective COX2-Inhibitors; Ionchannels in the 

heart; Membrane permeation; Drug distribution; Metabolism of drugs and xenobiotics; 

Biotransformation; Renal excretion; First-order kinetics, Bateman-function, Bioavailability; 

Clincal trials; Mouse models in pharmacological research; 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Sampling and quality control 


Fall 2 SAM 2 


Students will 

� Learn how quality control of biopharmaceuticals can be established. 

� Understand key elements in quality control of biopharmaceuticals. 

� Understand specific requirements on organization, procedures, processes and 

resources. 


Advanced 


Topics of this course include: 

� Biopharmaceuticals – QC principles 

� Terms and definitions of analytical testing and quality control 

� Areas of Responsibility of a QC unit 

� The laboratory process: sampling, laboratory operations (covering SOPs, 

reference materials, testing equipment, data analysis, method validation), 

documentation (lab data, records, reports, certificate of analysis) 

� Method development and validation of bioassays 

� Implementation of a QC programme (quality control cycle, reference materials, 

quantitative analysis of data, monitoring of data) 

� Product characterization vs. QC testing specifications for biopharmaceuticals 


Academic lecture, discussion, workshop 

Evaluation 

Final exam; discussions and workshops 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 558

Systems biology 


Spring 1 SYSB 1 


Systems Biology tries to describe complex biological systems in an integrative manner. In 

this lecture students will learn to know this concept using selected examples. 


Advanced 


Dr. Dallinger: Nycomed is a leading manufacturer of products promoting wound healing. 

In this context the complex role of the extracellular matrix is discussed. In particular, 

collagen a multifunctional protein is described. collagen is a major component of many 

biotech products and the applications for collagen are growing rapidly. 

Dr. Gaisberger: antibody diversity is a tight regulated mechanism which is crucial for the 

recognition of a broad range of antigens. On the other hand misregulation can lead to 

manifestation of cancers of the lymphoid cell lines. 

The lecture gives an overview about the latest research in this field. 

Dipl. Ing. Halbmayer: "diagnostic assays for allergy detection". As Biomin, Romer Lbas is 

belonging to the "Erber Group Familily" and is a leading company in detection of 

allergens in food and feedstuff. 

Dr. Hundsberger: Aptamers, a new class of therapeutic molecules with an exciting 

potential 

Dr. Mika Jokinen: Biopolymers and their applications in tissue engineering 

Evaluation 

Final exam 100% 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 559


Diploma thesis and coaching seminar 


Fall 2 MAST II 15 


The scientific topic of the diploma thesis and the working area in the research semester 

are given by the external placement partners (in rare cases also internally) and internally 

checked and approved at the University of Applied Sciences. Students receive help in 

regards to general scientific questions from their internal supervisor. For the preparation 

of the diploma thesis and its scientific work in the research semester, the students work 

on the specialized theoretical background of their future research project. As far as 

possible, students develop a project outline together with their external coach. The 

internal coach of the diploma thesis is considered to be the mentor for the students. 

Research semester 


Fall 15 


During the research semester students work in the pharmaceutical industry, clinics or 

other medical institutions in laboratories, production units or in marketing or sales of 

medicinal products. Aim of the research semester is the independent work in a research 

or development project and to write a scientific project report, in connection with the 

diploma thesis. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 560


Bioethics 


Spring 1 BETH 2 


Special problems of ethics are covered: pre implantation diagnostics, predictive medicine, 

organ transplantations, life quality, medicide. The effects resulting from these issues on 

healthcare professionals and their (economic) impact on society are discussed. 

Presentations of ethical aspects of certain topics are combined with case studies. The 

discussions in small groups as well as substantiated arguing the will enable the students 

to show ethical competence in public. 

Biomedical technology: Industry and markets 


Spring 1 BMT 1 


Different aspects and practical examples will be presented by the experts and should be 

discussed in the forum. 


Advanced 


Students gain an overview of future prospective of biomedicine, future scenarios for 

biotechnology and medicine techniques, global trends in biotechnology, regenerative 

medicine and nanobiotechnology, basics of health and pharma economy, design of 

pharma economic studies and analysis of economic efficiency. 

They will understand that the interdisciplinary and respectful cooperation of scientists, 

engineers and clinicians and with industry and governmental offices and authorities and 

is the basic prerequisite for the development of new strategies in the field of 

biotechnology. 


Academic lecture, discussion 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Biostatistics and trend analysis 


Spring 1 BSTAT 1 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 561


This lecture deals with biostatistics and statistical methods for the evaluation of 

production processes: point estimates, interval estimates; confidence intervals; statistical 

tests (t-test, chi-square test, f-test). Statistical stability: Cusum charts, moving average, 

EMWA charts, p- and np- charts for binomial data, measurands of binomial data, c- and 

u-charts for nominal data, poisson-distribution and measured values; Introduction into 

SPSS. 


This lecture deals with biostatistics and statistical methods for the evaluation of 

production processes: point estimates, interval estimates; confidence intervals; statistical 

tests (t-test, chi-square test, f-test). Statistical stability: Cusum charts, moving average, 

EMWA charts, p- and np- charts for binomial data, measurands of binomial data, c- and 

u-charts for nominal data, poisson-distribution and measured values; Introduction into 

SPSS. 


Advanced 


Students will get familiar with important statistical tests (T-test, Chi-Quadrat Test, F-Test) 

and how IT systems can support these (using of open source statistical software) 


The theoretical concept is presented and afterwards in practical examples the theoretical 

knowledge is applied. 

Evaluation 

Final exam; presentations 

Business- and Patenlaw 


Spring 2 BPLAW 4 


Students should acquire an overview and understanding of the basic concepts and 

principles of law playing a role in business (focusing on medical and pharmaceutical 

biotechnology); introduction into legal language. 

This course will allow students to enter into more profound, sector-specific studies 

(patent law, drug law). 


Advanced 


The course provides with general and basic information on business law and presents the 

main features of different branches of law relevant in medical and pharmaceutical 

biotechnology (basic legal terms and concepts, basic legal terminology and law sources, 

civil law and common law, overview on the historic development and selected topics). 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 562


The lecturer will present a guide on the complex body of business law, especially 

European Union law, and will make students familiar with understanding of legal 

problems and ways to solve them. 

Discussions are intended. Students are expected to do private studies. 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Business start-up and administration 


Spring 1 BPLAW 1 


Students get acquainted with questions to be asked in order to identify a business 

opportunity. They will learn how to write a business plan and which Do's and Don'ts they 

have to consider before starting their own business. The content of the course will not 

only be applicable for start-ups but also for employees of smaller or bigger companies 

who always depend on the creativity of their employees and their ideas. 

The guest lecturers will provide an insight of their experience in setting-up a company, 

the obstacles and opportunities. 


Advanced 


The contents of the business plan will be discussed in great detail and common obstacles 

will be solved by using a number of practical examples. 



Clinical Studies and GCP 


Spring 1 GCP II 2 


After attending this course you should be able to share your knowledge about the further 

advanced aspects of GCP and its subtleties as well as pitfalls in daily practice. 

You will be able to provide further insights into the clinical development of medicinal 

drugs, monitoring, source data verification and the preparation for inspections and audits. 


Advanced 


� Pharmacovigilance & Drug Safety 

� Informed Consent 

� Drug Development 

� Source Documents and e-Source Data 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 563

� Monitoring 

� Quality 

� Fraud / Misconduct 

� Common Mistakes 

� Audit & Inspection Readiness 


Face to face sessions with interactions (question/answer) between student and lecturer, 

brain-storming exercises in small groups with oral presentation to the whole group 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Diploma thesis and coaching seminar 


Spring 2 MAST_SE 7 

Learning Outcomes/Course objective 

The course provides the possibility to discuss the master thesis that has to be written by 

the students during ARTS with their internal coach. 


Advanced 


All topics concerning the master thesis, progress report or experience report are 

discussed in this course. The students are asked to define their questions in advance; 

therefore they also define the content of the lecture according to their needs. 


Content and type is variable, agreed between student and internal thesis coach. 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Drug law and regulations of drugs and medical devices 


Spring 2 DLAWREG 3 


Overview and basic understanding of the Product Life Cycle and Regulatory Procedures 

involved. 


Advanced 


The course gives an overview of the regulatory framework for product development, 

preclinical and clinical stages, license applications and license maintenance. Target is to 

understand the strategic relevance of regulatory decisions and the ethical background of 

the procedures and the necessity to establish standards/harmonized regulations. 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 564


Presentation lead by the lector, motivation/integration of the audience by questions 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

GLP and GMP regulations 


Spring 1 GMP_T II 2 


GLP/ GMP is a one hour credit course, designed to teach an clear understanding on the 

regulation governing the field of pharmaceutical quality management. The course should 

provide the students with a 

� Overview on regulation applicable to non-clinical drug development 

� Overview on regulations governing pharmaceutical production 

� Overview on standards and regulations governing pharmaceutical quality 

management 


Advanced 


The lecturer will give an overview on non-clinical development and quality management 

in the pharmaceutical industry. The students will subsequently present central regulatory 

documents in the field of preclinical development, clinical development, pharmaceutical 

manufacturing and Quality management. 


The study subject will be taught according to general OECD / WHO /EU and local 

directives and local guide lines. Students will be provided with power point presentations 

and supplemental material as appropriate. 

Groups of 2-3 students will then present regulatory guide lines to one of 12 different 

topics (~20 min presentation 5 min discussion) to deepen their understanding on how 

legislation is implemented. 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

IT: Databases 


Spring 1 IT III 2 


The students are able to talk about databases with IT experts and programmers, to 

articulate what they are in need of. The students have managed to build their own small 

queries to get selected data for analysis. Students can extract data from databases for 

additional analysis in excel and know how to analyze data in excel to achieve a good 

result. 


Advanced 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 565


In this Lecture the first part of the course will be on basics about relational databases 

(based on MS Access). Additionally the course will provide analytical tools of Microsoft 

Excel to use the prepared data from the database. 


The first part of the course will be held in a basic lecture room for teaching the basic 

information about databases. The rest of the course will be held in IT Labs, for the 

students to get the options for hands on experience on the taught information. 

This course will be supported by e-learning material of Microsoft E-Learning. 

Evaluation 

Final exam 

Project and portfolio management 


Spring 1 PRO II 2 


The lecture will familiarize students with project management tools, techniques and 

concepts as discussed and applied in the pharmaceutical industry for new drug 

development and life cycle projects 


Advanced 


Course terminology is based on the PMI (pmi.org) standards. The course is divided into 

four major topics. 

1. Critical elements of project management 

2. Planning and monitoring concepts 

3. Portfolio evaluation techniques used in the parmaceutical industry 

4. Leadership styles for project managers 


Each unit will have a theoretical and practical section. During the practical part students 

will apply the theoretical knowledge in small groups. Each group will deliver a one page 

summary of their work. Selected groups will present their work in front of the class (5 

min preso). 

Evaluation 

Summary papers 20% 

Group Presentation 20% 

Final Exam (multiple choice and open questions) 60% 

Quality management systems 


Spring 1 QM II 2 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 566


The course will give an overview of the Quality Management Systems used in 

Pharmaceutical Industries. At the end of the lecture the students will know the different 

aspects of QM Systems, will be familiar with the principles of statistical methods used in 

QM, with TQM and with QM-System audits. 


Advanced 


The course will be a lecture with 4 Modules, 3 hours each 

Module 1: QM-Systems, Standards and Guidelines, Comparison of ISO/ICH/GMP 

Module 2: Statistical Methods and QM-Tools 

Module 3: Total Quality Management Principles and Tools 

Module 4: Auditing of QM-Systems, Principles and Methodology 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final Exam (multiple choice) 

Risk assessment 


Spring 1 RISK 1 


This course will enable the students to understand the concepts of risk assessments in 

the pharmaceutical and biotechnological industry and to apply the most important risk 

assessment methods. 


Advanced 


Risk assessment is discussed in the context of the risk management process as it is 

required by guidelines and laws pertinent to biotechnology and the pharmaceutical 

development process. The following methods are described and evaluated using practical 

examples: Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA), Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA), 

Fault Tree Analysis (FTA), Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP), Hazard Analysis and 

Critical Control Point Methodology (HACCP). In addition to quality risk management 

concepts, the role of risk assessment in reliability engineering and in the management of 

investment projects is discussed. 


Lecture 

Evaluation 

Final Exam 

FHR-5-0008_Vers.03_Rev.00_2012 567

EXPORT-ORIENTED MANAGEMENT - IMC Fachhochschule Krems

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?